initial commit of ebook 20866HEADmain

414 files changed, 35392 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/20866-8.txt b/20866-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85a4ce4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11016 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Infantry Drill Regulations, United States
+Army, 1911, by United States War Department
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: Infantry Drill Regulations, United States Army, 1911
+       Corrected to April 15, 1917 (Changes Nos. 1 to 19)
+
+
+Author: United States War Department
+
+
+
+Release Date: March 20, 2007  [eBook #20866]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED
+STATES ARMY, 1911***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Bethanne M. Simms, Linda Cantoni, and the Project
+Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net).
+Special thanks to Daniel Emerson Griffith for creating the Lilypond sound
+and image files for the bugle calls.
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+      file which includes sound clips of bugal calls and
+      the numerous original graphic illustrations.
+      See 20866-h.htm or 20866-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/1/20866/20866-h/20866-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/1/20866/20866-h.zip)
+
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+      Nearly all of the italicized text in the original book is
+      also in bold typeface. For ease of reading, bold typeface
+      is not indicated in this e-book. Both bold and italics are
+      indicated by _underscores_.
+
+
+
+
+
+Infantry Drill Regulations
+
+UNITED STATES ARMY
+
+1911
+
+CORRECTED TO APRIL 15, 1917
+(Changes Nos. 1 to 19)
+
+
+MILITARY PUBLISHING CO.
+42 BROADWAY
+NEW YORK
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT
+Document No. 394
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF
+
+
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT,
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
+_Washington, August 19, 1911._
+
+The following System of Drill Regulations for Infantry, prepared by a
+board of officers consisting of Lieut. Col. John F. Morrison,
+Infantry; Capt. Merch B. Stewart, Eighth Infantry; and Capt. Alfred W.
+Bjornstad, Twenty-eighth Infantry, is approved and is published for
+the information and government of the Regular Army and the Organized
+Militia of the United States. With a view to insure uniformity
+throughout the Army, all infantry drill formations not embraced in
+this system are prohibited, and those herein prescribed will be
+strictly observed.
+
+By order of the Secretary of War:
+
+LEONARD WOOD,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff._
+
+
+
+
+TABLE OF CONTENTS.
+
+
+PART I--_Drill._                                  Paragraph.
+
+ 1. Introduction                                        1-30
+ 2. Orders, commands and signals                       31-47
+ 3. School of the soldier                             48-100
+ 4. School of the squad                              101-158
+ 5. School of the company                            159-257
+      (_a_) Close order                              167-198
+      (_b_) Extended order                           199-231
+      (_c_) Fire                                     232-257
+ 6. The battalion                                    258-326
+      (_a_) Close order                              263-289
+      (_b_) Combat principles                        290-326
+ 7. The regiment                                     327-346
+      (_a_) Close order                              333-341
+      (_b_) Combat principles                        342-346
+ 8. The brigade                                      347-349
+
+PART II--_Combat._
+
+ 1. Introduction                                     350-357
+ 2. Leadership                                       358-388
+      (_a_) General considerations                   358-370
+      (_b_) Teamwork                                 371-377
+      (_c_) Orders                                   378-383
+      (_d_) Communication                            384-388
+ 3. Combat reconnaissance                            389-399
+ 4. Fire superiority                                 400-424
+      (_a_) Purpose and nature                       400-401
+      (_b_) Fire direction and control               402-424
+ 5. Deployment                                       425-441
+ 6. Attack                                           442-488
+      (_a_) Deployment for attack                    449-452
+      (_b_) Advancing the attack                     453-457
+      (_c_) The fire attack                          458-463
+      (_d_) The charge                               464-475
+      (_e_) Pursuit                                  476-480
+      (_f_) Attack of fortifications                 481-484
+      (_g_) Holding attack                           485-488
+ 7. Defense                                          489-519
+      (_a_) Positions and intrenchments              489-494
+      (_b_) Deployment for defense                   495-510
+      (_c_) Counterattack                            511-516
+      (_d_) Delaying action                          517-519
+ 8. Meeting engagements                              520-530
+ 9. Withdrawal from action                           531-535
+10. Miscellaneous                                    537-622
+      (_a_) Machine guns                             537-546
+      (_b_) Ammunition supply                        547-553
+      (_c_) Mounted scouts                           554-557
+      (_d_) Night operations                         558-568
+      (_e_) Infantry against Cavalry                 569-574
+      (_f_) Infantry against Artillery               575-578
+      (_g_) Artillery supports                       579-583
+      (_h_) Intrenchments                            584-595
+      (_i_) Minor warfare                            596-603
+      (_j_) Patrols                                  604-622
+
+PART III--_Marches and camps._
+
+ 1. Marches                                          623-660
+      (_a_) Training and discipline                  623-635
+      (_b_) Protection of the march                  636-660
+ 2. Camps                                            661-707
+      (_a_) Sanitation                               661-677
+      (_b_) Protection of camp or bivouac            678-707
+
+PART IV--_Ceremonies and inspections._
+
+ 1. Ceremonies                                       708-765
+      (_a_) Reviews                                  711-731
+      (_b_) Parades                                  732-735
+      (_c_) Escorts                                  736-744
+ 2. Inspections                                      745-754
+ 3. Muster                                           755-757
+ 4. Honors and salutes                               758-765
+
+PART V.--_Manuals._
+
+ 1. The color                                        766-778
+ 2. The band                                         779-781
+ 3. Manual of the saber                              782-791
+ 4. Manual of tent pitching                          792-803
+ 5. Manual of the bugle                              804-807
+      (_a_) Bugle calls.
+      (_b_) Bugle signals.
+
+
+
+
+INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
+
+UNITED STATES ARMY, 1911.
+
+
+
+
+DEFINITIONS.
+
+
+_Alignment:_ A straight line upon which several elements are formed,
+or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements upon a
+straight line.
+
+_Base:_ The element on which a movement is regulated.
+
+_Battle sight:_ The position of the rear sight when the leaf is laid
+down.
+
+_Center:_ The middle point or element of a command.
+
+_Column:_ A formation in which the elements are placed one behind
+another.
+
+_Deploy:_ To extend the front. In general to change from column to
+line, or from close order to extended order.
+
+_Depth:_ The space from head to rear of any formation, including the
+leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12
+inches.
+
+_Distance:_ Space between elements in the direction of depth. Distance
+is measured from the back of the man in front to the breast of the man
+in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 inches in both line and
+column.
+
+_Element:_ A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, forming
+part of a still larger body.
+
+_File:_ Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the
+rear rank. The front-rank man is the _file leader_. A file which has
+no rear-rank man is a _blank file_. The term _file_ applies also to a
+single man in a single-rank formation.
+
+_File closers:_ Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a
+company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, all men
+posted in the line of file closers.
+
+_Flank:_ The right or left of a command in line or in column; also the
+element on the right or left of the line.
+
+_Formation:_ Arrangement of the elements of a command. The placing of
+all fractions in their order in line, in column, or for battle.
+
+_Front:_ The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in line
+or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 inches. Front
+also denotes the direction of the enemy.
+
+_Guide:_ An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom the
+command or elements thereof regulates its march.
+
+_Head:_ The leading element of a column.
+
+_Interval:_ Space between elements of the same line. The interval
+between men in ranks is 4 inches and is measured from elbow to elbow.
+Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured from the left elbow of
+the left man or guide of the group on the right, to the right elbow of
+the right man or guide of the group on the left.
+
+_Left:_ The left extremity or element of a body of troops.
+
+_Line:_ A formation in which the different elements are abreast of
+each other.
+
+_Order, close:_ The formation in which the units, in double rank, are
+arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and distances.
+
+_Order, extended:_ The formation in which the units are separated by
+intervals greater than in close order.
+
+_Pace:_ Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time.
+
+_Point of rest:_ The point at which a formation begins. Specifically,
+the point toward which units are aligned in successive movements.
+
+_Rank:_ A line of men placed side by side.
+
+_Right:_ The right extremity or element of a body of troops.
+
+
+
+
+PART I.--DRILL.
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+1. Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training;
+success may be looked for only when the training is intelligent and
+thorough.
+
+2. Commanding officers are accountable for the proper training of
+their respective organizations within the limits prescribed by
+regulations and orders.
+
+The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency.
+The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon its
+effectiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in the training
+of the units of an organization are indispensable to the efficiency of
+the whole; it is by such means alone that the requisite teamwork may
+be developed.
+
+3. Simple movements and elastic formations are essential to correct
+training for battle.
+
+4. The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the
+principles for training and for increasing the probability of success
+in battle.
+
+In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be sought.
+Quibbling over the minutiæ of form is indicative of failure to grasp
+the spirit.
+
+5. The principles of combat are considered in Part II of these
+regulations. They are treated in the various schools included in Part
+I only to the extent necessary to indicate the functions of the
+various commanders and the division of responsibility between them.
+The amplification necessary to a proper understanding of their
+application is to be sought in Part II.
+
+6. The following important distinctions must be observed:
+
+(_a_) Drills executed at _attention_ and the ceremonies are
+_disciplinary exercises_ designed to teach precise and soldierly
+movement, and to inculcate that prompt and subconscious obedience
+which is essential to proper military control. To this end, smartness
+and precision should be exacted in the execution of every detail. Such
+drills should be frequent, but short.
+
+(_b_) The purpose of _extended order drill_ is to teach the
+_mechanism_ of deployment, of the firings, and, in general, of the
+employment of troops in combat. Such drills are in the nature of
+disciplinary exercises and should be frequent, thorough, and exact in
+order to habituate men to the firm control of their leaders. Extended
+order drill is executed _at ease_. The company is the largest unit
+which executes extended order drill.
+
+(_c_) _Field exercises_ are for instruction in the duties incident to
+campaign. Assumed situations are employed. Each exercise should
+conclude with a discussion, on the ground, of the exercise and
+principles involved.
+
+(_d_) The _combat exercise, a form of field exercise_ of the company,
+battalion, and larger units, consists of the _application of tactical
+principles_ to assumed situations, employing in the execution the
+appropriate formations and movements of close and extended order.
+
+Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle
+conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men with
+such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently be
+consolidated to provide war-strength organizations. Officers and
+noncommissioned officers not required to complete the full quota of
+the units participating are assigned as observers or umpires.
+
+The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; thorough
+training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals is necessary.
+
+The exercise should be followed by a brief drill at attention in order
+to restore smartness and control.
+
+7. In field exercises the enemy is said to be _imaginary_ when his
+position and force are merely assumed; _outlined_ when his position
+and force are indicated by a few men; _represented_ when a body of
+troop acts as such.
+
+
+_General Rules for Drills and Formations._
+
+8. When the _preparatory_ command consists of more than one part, its
+elements are arranged as follows:
+
+(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions or
+elements of an organization: (_a_) Description of the movement; (_b_)
+how executed, or on what element executed.
+
+(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivisions of
+an organization: (_a_) The designation of the subdivisions; (_b_) the
+movement to be executed.
+
+9. Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained as
+toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute the word "left"
+for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation of the
+corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are given
+for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The substitute
+word of the command is placed within parentheses.
+
+10. Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when
+marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the command for
+movements involving marching need not be prefaced by _forward_, as 1.
+_Column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+11. Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in double
+time.
+
+If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command _double time_
+precedes the command of execution.
+
+12. In successive movements executed in double time the leading or
+base unit marches in _quick time_ when not otherwise prescribed; the
+other units march in _double time_ to their places in the formation
+ordered and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. If
+marching in double time, the command _double time_ is omitted. The
+leading or base unit marches in _quick time_; the other units continue
+at double time to their places in the formation ordered and then
+conform to the gait of the leading or base unit.
+
+13. To hasten the execution of a movement begun in quick time, the
+command: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_, is given. The leading or base
+unit continues to march in quick time, or remains at halt if already
+halted; the other units complete the execution of the movement in
+double time and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit.
+
+14. To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the
+correction of errors, the command: 1. _In place_, 2. _HALT_, is given.
+All halt and stand fast, without changing the position of the pieces.
+To resume the movement the command: 1. _Resume_, 2. _MARCH_, is given.
+
+15. To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt, to begin
+anew a movement improperly begun, the command, _AS YOU WERE_, is
+given, at which the movement ceases and the former position is
+resumed.
+
+16. Unless otherwise announced, the guide of a company or subdivision
+of a company in line is _right_; of a battalion in line or line of
+subdivisions or of a deployed line, _center_; of a rank in column of
+squads, toward the side of the guide of the company.
+
+To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change the
+guide: _Guide (right, left_, or _center)_.
+
+In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point of
+rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced.
+
+The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with a
+movement, follows the command of execution for that movement.
+Exception: 1. _As skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2.
+_MARCH_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+17. _The turn on the fixed pivot_ by subdivisions is used in all
+formations from line into column and the reverse.
+
+_The turn on the moving pivot_ is used by subdivisions of a column in
+executing changes of direction.
+
+18. Partial changes of direction may be executed:
+
+By interpolating in the preparatory command the word _half_, as
+_Column half right (left)_, or _Right (left) half turn_. A change of
+direction of 45° is executed.
+
+By the command: _INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT)_. The guide, or guiding
+element, moves in the indicated direction and the remainder of the
+command conforms. This movement effects slight changes of direction.
+
+19. The designations _line of platoons_, _line of companies_, _line of
+battalions_, etc., refer to the formations in which the platoons,
+companies, battalions, etc., each in column of squads, are in line.
+
+20. Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in forming
+line to the right or left the subdivisions will have their proper
+intervals.
+
+In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is
+charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve the
+trace, step, and distance.
+
+21. In close order, all details, detachments, and other bodies of
+troops are habitually formed in double rank.
+
+To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in and in
+alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand upon the hip,
+fingers pointing downward. In the first case the hand is dropped by
+the side when the next man on the left has his interval; in the second
+case, at the command _front_.
+
+22. The posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, special units
+(such as band or machine-gun company), etc., in the various formations
+of the company, battalion, or regiment, are shown in plates.
+
+In all changes from one formation to another involving a change of
+post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken by the most
+convenient route as soon as practicable after the command of execution
+for the movement; officers and noncommissioned officers who have
+prescribed duties in connection with the movement ordered, take their
+new posts when such duties are completed.
+
+As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever
+their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty to
+rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks.
+
+23. Except at ceremonies, the special units have no fixed places. They
+take places as directed; in the absence of directions, they conform as
+nearly as practicable to the plates, and in subsequent movements
+maintain their relative positions with respect to the flank or end of
+the command on which they were originally posted.
+
+24. General, field, and staff officers are habitually mounted. The
+staff of an officer forms in single rank 3 paces in rear of him, the
+right of the rank extending 1 pace to the right of a point directly in
+rear of him. Members of the staff are arranged in order from right to
+left as follows: General staff officers, adjutant, aids, other staff
+officers, arranged in each classification in order of rank, the senior
+on the right. The flag of the general officer and the orderlies are 3
+paces in rear of the staff, the flag on the right. When necessary to
+reduce the front of the staff and orderlies, each line executes _twos
+right_ or _fours right_, as explained in the Cavalry Drill
+Regulations, and follows the commander.
+
+When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return saber
+with their chief.
+
+25. In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns to the
+left.
+
+When the commander faces to give commands, the staff, flag, and
+orderlies do not change position.
+
+26. When making or receiving official reports, or on meeting out of
+doors, all officers will salute.
+
+Military courtesy requires the junior to salute first, but when the
+salute is introductory to a report made at a military ceremony or
+formation, to the representative of a common superior (as, for
+example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the officer
+making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first; the officer
+to whom the report is made will acknowledge by saluting that he has
+received and understood the report.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 17._)
+
+27. For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment or smaller
+unit, except those belonging to the machine-gun organizations, are
+consolidated into a detachment; the senior present commands if no
+officer is in charge. The detachment is formed as a platoon or squad
+of cavalry in line or column of fours; noncommissioned staff officers
+are on the right or in the leading ranks.
+
+28. For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff officers as are
+dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the color, in order of rank
+from right to left. In column of squads they march as file closers.
+
+29. Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned staff officers and
+orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless otherwise directed.
+If mounted, the noncommissioned staff officers are ordinarily posted
+on the right or at the head of the orderlies.
+
+30. In all formations and movements a noncommissioned officer
+commanding a platoon or company carries his piece as the men do, if he
+is so armed, and takes the same post as an officer in like situation.
+When the command is formed in line for ceremonies, a noncommissioned
+officer commanding a company takes post on the right of the right
+guide after the company has been aligned.
+
+
+
+
+ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS.
+
+
+31. _Commands_ only are employed in drill at attention. Otherwise
+either a _command_, _signal_, or _order_ is employed, as best suits
+the occasion, or one may be used in conjunction with another.
+
+32. Signals should be freely used in instruction, in order that
+officers and men may readily know them. In making arm signals the
+saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand.
+
+33. Officers and men fix their attention at the first word of command,
+the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first motion of the
+signal. A signal includes both the preparatory command and the command
+of execution; the movement commences as soon as the signal is
+understood, unless otherwise prescribed.
+
+34. Except in movements executed at _attention_, commanders or leaders
+of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or signals whenever such
+repetition is deemed necessary to insure prompt and correct execution.
+
+Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon leaders,
+guides, and musicians are equipped with whistles.
+
+The major and his staff will use a whistle of distinctive tone; the
+captain and company musicians a second and distinctive whistle; the
+platoon leaders and guides a third distinctive whistle.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 15._)
+
+35. Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential as a
+substitute for the voice under conditions which render the voice
+inadequate.
+
+Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed upon to
+facilitate the solution of such special difficulties as the particular
+situation is likely to develop, but it must be remembered that
+simplicity and certainty are indispensable qualities of a signal.
+
+
+_Orders._
+
+36. In these regulations an _order_ embraces instructions or
+directions given orally or in writing in terms suited to the
+particular occasion and not prescribed herein.
+
+_Orders_ are employed only when the _commands_ prescribed herein do
+not sufficiently indicate the will of the commander.
+
+Orders are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383, inclusive.
+
+
+_Commands._
+
+37. In these regulations a _command_ is the will of the commander
+expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein.
+
+38. There are two kinds of commands:
+
+The _preparatory_ command, such as _forward_, indicates the movement
+that is to be executed.
+
+The command of _execution_, such as _MARCH_, _HALT_, or _ARMS_, causes
+the execution.
+
+_Preparatory_ commands are distinguished by _italics_, those of
+_execution_ by _CAPITALS_.
+
+Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands
+prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit
+concerned.
+
+The _preparatory_ command should be given at such an interval of time
+before the command of _execution_ as to admit of being properly
+understood: the command of _execution_ should be given at the instant
+the movement is to commence.
+
+The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness
+proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.
+
+Each _preparatory_ command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising
+inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of
+_execution_ may be more energetic.
+
+The command of _execution_ is firm in tone and brief.
+
+39. Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion repeat such
+commands of their superiors as are to be executed by their units,
+facing their units for that purpose. The battalion is the largest unit
+that executes a movement at the command of execution of its commander.
+
+40. When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face toward
+them.
+
+Indifference in giving commands must be avoided as it leads to laxity
+in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at all times.
+
+
+_Bugle Signals._
+
+41. The authorized bugle signals are published in Part V of these
+regulations.
+
+The following bugle signals may be used off the battle field, when not
+likely to convey information to the enemy:
+
+_Attention:_ Troops are brought to attention.
+
+_Attention to orders:_ Troops fix their attention.
+
+_Forward, march:_ Used also to execute quick time from double time.
+
+_Double time, march._
+
+_To the rear, march:_ In close order, execute _squads right about_.
+
+_Halt._
+
+_Assemble, march._
+
+The following bugle signals may be used on the battle field:
+
+_Fix bayonets._
+
+_Charge._
+
+_Assemble, march._
+
+These signals are used only when intended for the entire firing line;
+hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit (for
+example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct section of
+the battle field. Exception: _Fix bayonet_. (See par. 318.)
+
+The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on the
+battle field. Their principal uses are in field exercises and practice
+firing.
+
+_Commence firing:_ Officers charged with fire direction and control
+open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, the
+signal is equivalent to _fire at will_.
+
+_Cease firing:_ All parts of the line execute _cease firing_ at once.
+
+These signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, except
+when such unit is independent or detached from its regiment.
+
+
+_Whistle Signals._
+
+42. _Attention to orders._ A _short blast_ of the whistle. This signal
+is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fix the attention
+of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to giving
+commands, orders, or signals.
+
+When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing and
+fixes his attention at a _short blast_ of his platoon leader's
+whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are
+repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a squad leader's
+attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of his platoon
+leader, or if there are no orders or commands to convey to his squad
+he resumes firing at once.
+
+_Suspend firing._ A _long blast_ of the whistle.
+
+All other whistle signals are prohibited.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 15._)
+
+
+_Arm Signals._
+
+43. The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals either
+arm may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing line
+"repeat back" at once to prevent misunderstanding.
+
+_Forward, march._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold
+the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march.
+
+This signal is also used to execute quick time from double time.
+
+_Halt._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and
+hold the arm vertically.
+
+_Double time, march._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust
+the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times.
+
+_Squads right, march._ Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times
+between the vertical and horizontal positions.
+
+_Squads left, march._ Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it downward to the side and swing it several times between the
+downward and horizontal positions.
+
+_Squads right about, march_ (if in close order) or, _To the rear,
+march_ (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically above the
+head; carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several
+times between the vertical and downward positions.
+
+_Change direction_ or _Column right (left), march._ The hand on the
+side toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried
+across the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then
+swing in a horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new
+direction.
+
+_As skirmishers, march._ Raise both arms laterally until horizontal.
+
+_As skirmishers, guide center, march._ Raise both arms laterally until
+horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return
+to the horizontal; repeat several times.
+
+_As skirmishers, guide right (left), march._ Raise both arms laterally
+until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in
+the horizontal position; swing the other upward until vertical and
+return it to the horizontal; repeat several times.
+
+_Assemble, march._ Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and
+describe horizontal circles.
+
+_Range_, or _Change elevation._ To announce _range_, extend the arm
+toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist
+closed; by keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; by
+opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number
+equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short
+horizontal line with forefinger. _To change elevation_, indicate the
+_amount of increase_ or _decrease_ by fingers as above; point upward
+to indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease.
+
+_What range are you using?_ or _What is the range?_ Extend the arms
+toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting
+on the other hand, fist closed.
+
+_Are you ready?_ or _I am ready._ Raise the hand, fingers extended and
+joined, palm toward the person addressed.
+
+_Commence firing._ Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm
+down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body.
+
+_Fire faster._ Execute rapidly the signal "Commence firing."
+
+_Fire slower._ Execute slowly the signal "Commence firing."
+
+_To swing the cone of fire to the right, or left._ Extend the arm in
+full length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to
+right (left), and point in the direction of the new target.
+
+_Fix bayonet._ Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix
+bayonet" (par. 95).
+
+_Suspend firing._ Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal
+position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front.
+
+_Cease firing._ Raise the forearm as in _suspend firing_ and swing it
+up and down several times in front of the face.
+
+_Platoon._ Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader;
+describe small circles with the hand. (See par. 44.)
+
+_Squad._ Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing
+the hand up and down from the wrist. (See par. 44.)
+
+_Rush._ Same as _double time_. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 14._)
+
+44. The signals _platoon_ and _squad_ are intended primarily for
+communication between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal
+_platoon_ or _squad_ indicates that the platoon commander is to cause
+the signal which follows to be executed by platoon or squad.
+
+
+_Flag Signals._
+
+45. The signal flags described below are carried by the company
+musicians in the field.
+
+In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the permanent
+battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are as
+shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, within
+their respective battalions, in the order given below.
+
+First battalion:
+  Company A. Red field, white square.
+  Company B. Red field, blue square.
+  Company C. Red field, white diagonals.
+  Company D. Red field, blue diagonals.
+
+Second battalion:
+  Company E. White field, red square.
+  Company F. White field, blue square.
+  Company G. White field, red diagonals.
+  Company H. White field, blue diagonals.
+
+Third battalion:
+  Company I. Blue field, red square.
+  Company K. Blue field, white square.
+  Company L. Blue field, red diagonals.
+  Company M. Blue field, white diagonals.
+
+46. In addition to their use in visual signaling, these flags serve to
+mark the assembly point of the company when disorganized by combat,
+and to mark the location of the company in bivouac and elsewhere, when
+such use is desirable.
+
+47. (1) For communication between the firing line and the reserve or
+commander in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal Corps codes) are
+prescribed and should be memorized. In transmission, their concealment
+from the enemy's view should be insured. In the absence of signal
+flags, the headdress or other substitute may be used.
+
+--------------+--------------------------------+---------------------------
+ Letter of    |If signaled from the rear to    |If signaled from the firing
+ alphabet.    |      the firing line.          |     line to the rear.
+--------------+--------------------------------+---------------------------
+AM            |Ammunition going forward.       |Ammunition required.
+CCC           |Charge (mandatory at all times).|Am about to charge if no
+              |                                | instructions to the
+              |                                | contrary.
+CF            |Cease firing.                   |Cease firing.
+DT            |Double time or "rush".          |Double time or "rush".
+F             |Commence firing.                |Commence firing.
+FB            |Fix bayonets.                   |Fix bayonets.
+FL            |Artillery fire is causing us    |Artillery fire is causing
+              | losses.                        | us losses.
+G             |Move forward.                   |Preparing to move forward.
+HHH           |Halt.                           |Halt.
+K             |Negative.                       |Negative.
+LT            |Left.                           |Left.
+O             |What is the (R.N. etc.)?        |What is the (R.N. etc.)?
+(Ardois       | Interrogatory.                 | Interrogatory.
+and           |                                |
+semaphore     |                                |
+only.)        |                                |
+_ _ __ __ _ _ |                                |
+              |What is the (R.N. etc.)?        |What is the (R.N. etc.)?
+(All          | Interrogatory.                 | Interrogatory.
+methods       |                                |
+but ardois    |                                |
+and           |                                |
+semaphore.)   |                                |
+P             |Affirmative.                    |Affirmative.
+R             |Acknowledgment.                 |Acknowledgment.
+RN            |Range.                          |Range.
+RT            |Right.                          |Right.
+SSS           |Support going forward.          |Support needed.
+SUF           |Suspend firing.                 |Suspend firing.
+T             |Target.                         |Target.
+--------------+--------------------------------+---------------------------
+
+(2) THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE.
+
+(See illustrations on pages following.)
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 13._)
+
+
+TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+
+
+SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.
+
+
+48. The instructor explains briefly each movement, first executing it
+himself if practicable. He requires the recruits to take the proper
+positions unassisted and does not touch them for the purpose of
+correcting them, except when they are unable to correct themselves. He
+avoids keeping them too long at the same movement, although each
+should be understood before passing to another. He exacts by degrees
+the desired precision and uniformity.
+
+49. In order that all may advance as rapidly as their abilities
+permit, the recruits are grouped according to proficiency as
+instruction progresses. Those who lack aptitude and quickness are
+separated from the others and placed under experienced drill masters.
+
+
+_INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS._
+
+50. For preliminary instruction a number of recruits, usually not
+exceeding three or four, are formed as a squad in single rank.
+
+
+_Position of the Soldier, or Attention._
+
+51. Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conformation
+of the man permits.
+
+Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45°.
+
+Knees straight without stiffness.
+
+Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on
+hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally.
+
+Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the
+trousers.
+
+Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis
+of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front.
+
+Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the
+feet.
+
+
+_The Rests._
+
+52. Being at a halt, the commands are: _FALL OUT_; _REST_; _AT EASE_;
+and 1. _Parade_, 2. _Rest_.
+
+At the command _fall out_, the men may leave the ranks, but are
+required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former
+places, at attention, at the command _fall in_.
+
+At the command _rest_ each man keeps one foot in place, but is not
+required to preserve silence or immobility.
+
+At the command _at ease_ each man keeps one foot in place and is
+required to preserve silence but not immobility.
+
+53. 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to
+the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without
+constraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left
+hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the
+right hand; preserve silence and steadiness of position.
+
+54. To resume the attention: 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_. The men take
+the position of the soldier.
+
+
+_Eyes Right or Left._
+
+55. 1. _Eyes_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_, 3. _FRONT_.
+
+At the command _right_, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed
+on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in, the same
+rank. At the command _front_, turn the head and eyes to the front.
+
+
+_Facings._
+
+56. To the flank: 1. _Right (left)_, 2. _FACE_.
+
+Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning
+on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the
+left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is
+executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner.
+
+_Right (left) half face_ is executed similarly, facing 45°.
+
+"To face in marching" and advance, turn on the ball of either foot and
+step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; to face in
+marching without gaining ground in the new direction, turn on the ball
+of either foot and mark time.
+
+57. To the rear: 1. _About_, 2. _FACE_.
+
+Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the rear
+and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the
+position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on
+the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the
+left.
+
+
+_Salute with the Hand._
+
+58. 1. _Hand_, 2. _SALUTE_.
+
+Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches
+the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb
+and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at
+about 45°, hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward the
+person saluted. (_TWO_) Drop the arm smartly by the side.
+
+For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes," paragraphs
+758-765.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 3, 6, and 18._)
+
+
+_STEPS AND MARCHINGS._
+
+59. All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right step,
+begin with the left foot.
+
+60. The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured
+from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per
+minute.
+
+The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence
+is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.
+
+The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by
+calling _one, two, three, four_, or _left, right_, the instant the
+left and right foot, respectively, should be planted.
+
+61. All steps and marchings and movements involving march are executed
+in _quick time_ unless the squad be marching in _double time_, or
+_double time_ be added to the command; in the latter case _double
+time_ is added to the preparatory command. Example: 1. _Squad right,
+double time_, 2. _MARCH_ (School of the Squad).
+
+
+_Quick Time._
+
+62. Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. _Forward_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+At the command _forward_, shift the weight of the body to the right
+leg, left knee straight.
+
+At the command _march_, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30
+inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without
+shock; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as
+above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally.
+
+63. Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in double
+time: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the
+right leg. At the command _march_, raise the forearms, fingers closed,
+to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy run
+with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging
+motion to the arms.
+
+If marching in quick time, at the command _march_, given as either
+foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then step
+off in double time.
+
+64. To resume the quick time: 1. _Quick time_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as either foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick
+time, dropping the hands by the sides.
+
+
+_To Mark Time._
+
+65. Being in march: 1. _Mark time_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as either foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and
+continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches
+and planting it on line with the other.
+
+Being at a halt, at the command _march_, raise and plant the feet as
+described above.
+
+
+_The Half Step._
+
+66. 1. _Half step_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time.
+
+67. _Forward_, _half step_, _halt_, and _mark time_ may be executed
+one from the other in quick or double time.
+
+To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. _Forward_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+
+_Side Step._
+
+68. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. _Right (left) step_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the left
+foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time.
+
+The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
+double time.
+
+If at order arms, the side step is executed _at trail_ without
+command.
+
+
+_Back Step._
+
+69. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. _Backward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.
+
+The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
+double time.
+
+If at order arms, the back step is executed _at trail_ without
+command.
+
+
+_To Halt._
+
+70. To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. _Squad_, 2.
+_HALT_.
+
+At the command _halt_, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant
+the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first foot by the
+side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides.
+
+
+_To March by the Flank._
+
+71. Being in march: 1. _By the right (left) flank_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching
+and step off in the new direction with the right foot.
+
+
+_To March to the Rear._
+
+72. Being in march: 1. _To the rear_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about on the balls
+of both feet and immediately step off with the left foot.
+
+If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four steps
+in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot.
+
+
+_Change Step._
+
+73. Being in march: 1. _Change step_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the right foot near
+the heel of the left and step off with the left foot.
+
+The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command
+_march_ being given as the left foot strikes the ground.
+
+
+_MANUAL OF ARMS._
+
+74. As soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, nomenclature
+(Pl. I), and care of his rifle; when fair progress has been made in
+the instruction without arms, he is taught the manual of arms;
+instruction without arms and that with arms alternate.
+
+75. The following rules govern the carrying of the piece:
+
+First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the chamber
+or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so loaded, or
+supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with
+the _safety lock_ turned to the "safe." At all other times it is
+carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled.
+
+Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are immediately
+inspected at the commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_; 3. _Order
+(Right shoulder, port)_, 4. _ARMS_.
+
+A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.
+
+If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed
+and placed in the belt.
+
+Third. The cut-off is kept turned "off" except when cartridges are
+actually used.
+
+Fourth. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, on guard,
+or for combat.
+
+Fifth. _Fall in_ is executed with the piece at the order arms. _Fall
+out_, _rest_, and _at ease_ are executed as without arms. On resuming
+_attention_ the position of order arms is taken.
+
+Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece is
+brought to the right shoulder at the command _march_, the three
+motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be
+executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command with the
+words _at trail_; as, 1. _At trail, forward_, 2. _MARCH_; the trail is
+taken at the command _march_.
+
+When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval or
+distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the piece
+to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting.
+
+Seventh. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The execution
+of the order begins when the halt is completed.
+
+Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without
+arms.
+
+[Illustration: Plate I. [Transcriber's Note: Plate number omitted in
+original.]]
+
+76. The following rules govern the execution of the manual of arms:
+
+First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of
+gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps the piece; the sling is
+included in the grasp of the hand.
+
+Second. In all positions of the piece "diagonally across the body" the
+position of the piece, left arm and hand are the same as in port arms.
+
+Third. In resuming the order from any position in the manual, the
+motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the piece about 3
+inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand above and
+near the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended and joined,
+forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all fingers of the
+right hand grasping the piece. To complete the order, lower the piece
+gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left quickly by the
+side, and take the position of order arms.
+
+Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to the ground, or
+other similar abuse of the rifle to produce effect in executing the
+manual, is prohibited.
+
+Fourth. The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the recruits
+are first required to give their whole attention to the details of the
+motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they become
+accustomed to handling their pieces. The instructor may require them
+to count aloud in cadence with the motions.
+
+Fifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are, for the
+purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail;
+in this case the command of _execution_ determines the prompt
+execution of the first motion, and the commands, _two_, _three_,
+_four_, that of the other motions.
+
+To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: _By
+the numbers_; all movements divided into motions are then executed as
+above explained until he cautions: _Without the numbers_; or commands
+movements other than those in the manual of arms.
+
+Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of the
+manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the
+previous position of the piece.
+
+Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may be
+carried in any manner directed.
+
+77. _Position of order arms standing:_ The butt rests evenly on the
+ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and
+touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand
+holding the piece between the thumb and fingers.
+
+78. Being at order arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+With the right hand carry the piece in front of the center of the
+body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at
+the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (_TWO_)
+Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand.
+
+79. Being at order arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the
+small of the stock; the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up,
+sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck
+with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting
+against the body; the piece in a vertical plane parallel to the front.
+
+80. Being at present arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Carry the piece diagonally across the body and take the position of
+port arms.
+
+81. Being at port arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center of the
+body and take the position of present arms.
+
+82. Being at present or port arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the right
+with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just above the
+lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last
+position in coming to the order. (_TWO_) Complete the order.
+
+83. Being at order arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel
+between the first two fingers. (_TWO_) Without changing the grasp of
+the right hand, place the piece on the right shoulder, barrel up and
+inclined at an angle of about 45° from the horizontal, trigger guard
+in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the piece in
+a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left hand,
+thumb and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip
+of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow
+down. (_THREE_) Drop the left hand by the side.
+
+84. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (_TWO_),
+(_THREE_) Execute order arms as described from port arms.
+
+85. Being at port arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Change the right hand to the butt. (_TWO_), (_THREE_) As in right
+shoulder arms from order arms.
+
+86. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (_TWO_) Change
+the right hand to the small of the stock.
+
+87. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Execute port arms. (_THREE_) Execute present arms.
+
+88. Being at present arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Execute port arms. (_TWO_), (_THREE_), (_FOUR_) Execute right shoulder
+arms as from port arms.
+
+89. Being at port arms: 1. _Left shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder,
+barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same
+time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second
+fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (_TWO_) Drop the right
+hand by the side.
+
+Being at left shoulder arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. (_TWO_)
+Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, regrasp it with the
+left, and take the position of port arms.
+
+_Left shoulder arms_ may be ordered directly from the order, right
+shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command _arms_ execute
+_port arms_ and continue in cadence to the position ordered.
+
+90. Being at order arms: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_.
+
+Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly
+bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the body, barrel to
+the left; grasp the piece with the left hand just below the stacking
+swivel, and with the right hand below and against the left.
+
+Being at parade rest: 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_.
+
+Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the right
+hip.
+
+91. Being at order arms: 1. _Trail_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle
+forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30° with the
+vertical.
+
+When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the
+piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered until the
+piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used.
+
+92. Being at trail arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order.
+
+
+_Rifle Salute._
+
+93. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Rifle_, 2. _SALUTE_.
+
+Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm
+horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and joined,
+forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the person
+saluted. (_TWO_) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes to the
+front. (_C.I.D.R., No. 6._)
+
+94. Being at order or trail arms: 1. _Rifle_, 2. _SALUTE_.
+
+Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down,
+thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against piece near
+the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (_TWO_) Drop the left hand
+by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front.
+
+For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes" (pars. 758-765).
+
+
+_The Bayonet._
+
+95. Being at order arms: 1. _Fix_, 2. _BAYONET_.
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
+grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward the body;
+draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing
+at the muzzle; resume the order.
+
+If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet with the
+left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner.
+
+96. Being at order arms: 1. _Unfix_, 2. _BAYONET_.
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
+grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing
+the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise the bayonet
+until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece;
+drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and,
+glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing
+between the left arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right
+hand and resume the order.
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
+from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
+most convenient manner.
+
+If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
+most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
+original position.
+
+Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity but
+not in cadence.
+
+97. _CHARGE BAYONET._ Whether executed at halt or in motion, the
+bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of _guard_ in
+the Manual for Bayonet Exercise.
+
+Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in the
+Manual for Bayonet Exercise.
+
+
+_The Inspection._
+
+98. Being at order arms: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+At the second command take the position of port arms. (_TWO_) Seize
+the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn
+the handle up, draw the bolt back, and glance at the chamber. Having
+found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes
+to the front.
+
+99. Being at inspection arms: 1. _Order (Right shoulder, port)_, 2.
+_ARMS_.
+
+At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, turn the handle
+down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command arms,
+complete the movement ordered.
+
+
+_To Dismiss the Squad._
+
+100. Being at halt: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Port_, 4. _ARMS_,
+5. _DISMISSED_.
+
+
+
+
+SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.
+
+
+101. Soldiers are grouped into squads for purposes of instruction,
+discipline, control, and order.
+
+102. The squad proper consists of a corporal and seven privates.
+
+The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to make the
+squad a fixed unit and to facilitate the control and movement of the
+company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and less than 12,
+they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess above 8 being posted
+as file closers. If the number grouped is greater than 11, 2 or more
+squads are formed and the group is termed a platoon.
+
+For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified.
+
+103. The corporal is the squad leader, and when absent is replaced by
+a designated private. If no private is designated, the senior in
+length of service acts as leader.
+
+The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the front
+rank of the squad.
+
+When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear rank
+man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank until the
+corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear rank man steps
+back into the rear rank.
+
+104. In battle officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve the
+integrity of squads; they designate new leaders to replace those
+disabled, organize new squads when necessary, and see that every man
+is placed in a squad.
+
+Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to which they
+belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated
+therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon
+leaders, whether these be of their own or of another organization.
+
+105. The squad executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and
+_marchings_, and the _manual of arms_ as explained in the School of
+the Soldier.
+
+
+_To Form the Squad._
+
+106. To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces in front
+of where the center is to be and commands: _FALL IN_.
+
+The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are arranged
+by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in order of
+height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand as soon as
+the man on his left has his interval. The rear rank forms with
+distance of 40 inches.
+
+The instructor then commands: _COUNT OFF_.
+
+At this command all except the right file execute _eyes right_, and
+beginning on the right, the men in each rank count _one_, _two_,
+_three_, _four_; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as he
+counts.
+
+Pieces are then inspected.
+
+
+_Alignments._
+
+107. To align the squad, the base file or files having been
+established: 1. _Right (Left)_, 2. _DRESS_, 3. _FRONT_.
+
+At the command _dress_ all men place the left hand upon the hip
+(whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the base
+file, when on or near the new line executes _eyes right_, and, taking
+steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his right arm rests
+lightly against the arm of the man on his right, and so that his eyes
+and shoulders are in line with those of the men on his right; the rear
+rank men cover in file.
+
+The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from the right
+flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, or in advance,
+of the line; only the men designated move.
+
+At the command _front_, given when the ranks are aligned, each man
+turns his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand by his
+side.
+
+In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, or
+parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique
+directions.
+
+Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a
+considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed by
+marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, as the
+case may be, without other command, and at the trail.
+
+108. To preserve the alignment when marching: _GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT)_.
+
+The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, yielding
+to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from the opposite
+direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually opening out
+or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly lengthening or
+shortening the step; the rear rank men cover their file leaders at 40
+inches.
+
+In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated flank,
+conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, the leading man
+of the front rank is the guide.
+
+
+_To Take Intervals and Distances._
+
+109. Being in line at a halt: 1. _Take interval_, 2. _To the right
+(left)_, 3. _MARCH_, 4. _Squad_, 5. _HALT_.
+
+At the second command the rear-rank men march backward 4 steps and
+halt; at the command _march_ all face to the right and the leading man
+of each rank steps off; the other men step off in succession, each
+following the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank men marching abreast
+of their file leaders.
+
+At the command _halt_, given when all have their intervals, all halt
+and face to the front.
+
+110. Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. _Assemble, to the
+right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear-rank man on the
+right closes to 40 inches. The other men face to the right, close by
+the shortest line, and face to the front.
+
+111. Being in line at a halt and having counted off: 1. _Take
+distance_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+At the command _march_ No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to the
+front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of
+the rear rank, in the order named, move straight to the front, each
+stepping off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command
+_halt_ is given when all have their distances.
+
+In case more than one squad is in line, each squad executes the
+movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is right.
+
+112. Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. _Assemble_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to
+their proper places in line.
+
+
+_To Stack and Take Arms._
+
+113. Being in line at a halt: _STACK ARMS_.
+
+Each even number of the front rank grasps his piece with the left hand
+at the upper band and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the
+front, muzzle inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center
+of the interval on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the
+stacking swivel; each even number of the rear rank then passes his
+piece, barrel to the rear, to his file leader, who grasps it between
+the bands with his right hand and throws the butt about 2 feet in
+advance of that of his own piece and opposite the right of the
+interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and
+forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages with that of
+his own piece; each odd number of the front rank raises his piece with
+the right hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front; the left
+hand, guiding the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the
+swivel of his own piece with the free hook of that of the even number
+of the rear rank; he then turns the barrel outward into the angle
+formed by the other two pieces and lowers the butt to the ground, to
+the right of and against the toe of his right shoe.
+
+The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the even numbers
+of the front rank.
+
+When each man has finished handling pieces, he takes the position of
+the soldier.
+
+114. Being in line behind the stacks: _TAKE ARMS_.
+
+The loose pieces are returned by the even numbers of the front rank;
+each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece with the left
+hand, the piece of his rear-rank man with his right hand, grasping
+both between the hands; each odd number of the front rank grasps his
+piece in the same way with the right hand, disengages it by raising
+the butt from the ground and then, turning the piece to the right,
+detaches it from the stack; each even number of the front rank
+disengages and detaches his piece by turning it to the left, and then
+passes the piece of his rear-rank man to him, and all resume the
+order.
+
+115. Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 1 rear rank
+takes the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking the stack;
+the stacks made or broken, he resumes his post.
+
+Pieces not used in making the stack are termed _loose pieces_.
+
+Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed.
+
+
+_The Oblique March._
+
+116. For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in column or
+correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face half right
+or half left, points out to the men their relative positions, and
+explains that these are to be maintained in the oblique march.
+
+117. 1. _Right (Left) oblique_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Each man steps off in a direction 45° to the right of his original
+front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders
+parallel to those of the guide (the man on the right front of the line
+or column), and so regulates his steps that the ranks remain parallel
+to their original front.
+
+At the command _halt_ the men halt faced to the front.
+
+To resume the original direction: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight to
+the front.
+
+If at _half step_ or _mark time_ while obliquing, the oblique march is
+resumed by the commands: 1. _Oblique_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+
+_To Turn on Moving Pivot._
+
+118. Being in line: 1. _Right (Left) turn_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The movement is executed by each rank successively and on the same
+ground. At the second command, the pivot man of the front rank faces
+to the right in marching and takes the half step; the other men of the
+rank oblique to the right until opposite their places in line, then
+execute a second right oblique and take the half step on arriving
+abreast of the pivot man. All glance toward the marching flank while
+at half step and take the full step without command as the last man
+arrives on the line.
+
+_Right (Left) half turn_ is executed in a similar manner. The pivot
+man makes a half change of direction to the right and the other men
+make quarter changes in obliquing. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+_To Turn on Fixed Pivot._
+
+119. Being in line, to turn and march: 1. _Squad right (left)_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank faces to
+the right in marching and marks time; the other front rank men oblique
+to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time.
+In the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by
+the second and first, moves straight to the front until in rear of his
+front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and mark time;
+the other number of the rear rank moves straight to the front four
+paces and places himself abreast of the man on his right. Men on the
+new line glance toward the marching flank while marking time and, as
+the last man arrives on the line, both ranks execute _forward, march_,
+without command.
+
+120. Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. _Squad right (left)_, 2.
+_MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is
+executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men,
+on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is
+given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last
+man arrives on the line.
+
+121. Being in line, to turn about and march: 1. _Squad right (left)
+about_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the second command, the front rank twice executes _squad right_,
+initiating the second _squad right_ when the man on the marching flank
+has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rear rank the third man from
+the right, followed by the second and first in column, moves straight
+to the front until on the prolongation of the line to be occupied by
+the rear rank; changes direction to the right; moves in the new
+direction until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the
+right in marching, mark time, and glance toward the marching flank.
+The fourth man marches on the left of the third to his new position;
+as he arrives on the line, both ranks execute _forward, march_,
+without command.
+
+122. Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. _Squad right (left)
+about_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is
+executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men,
+on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is
+given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last
+man arrives on the line.
+
+
+_To Follow the Corporal._
+
+123. Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad without
+unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in front of it and
+commands: _FOLLOW ME_.
+
+If in line or skirmish line, No. 2 of the front rank follows in the
+trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; the other men conform to the
+movements of No. 2, guiding on him and maintaining their relative
+positions.
+
+If in column; the head of the column follows the corporal.
+
+
+_To Deploy as Skirmishers._
+
+124. Being in any formation, assembled: 1. _As skirmishers_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+The corporal places himself in front of the squad, if not already
+there. Moving at a run, the men place themselves abreast of the
+corporal at half-pace intervals, Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. 3 and
+4 on his left, rear-rank men on the right of their file leaders, extra
+men on the left of No. 4; all then conform to the corporal's gait.
+
+When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly formed on
+No. 2 of the front rank, who stands fast or continues the march, as
+the case may be; the corporal places himself in front of the squad
+when advancing and in rear when halted.
+
+When deployed as skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieces at the
+trail unless otherwise ordered.
+
+The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No. 2 front rank
+is the guide.
+
+125. The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half pace,
+resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The front of a
+squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces.
+
+
+_To Increase or Diminish Intervals._
+
+126. If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than the
+normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to increase or
+decrease the interval: 1. _As skirmishers, (so many) paces_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If already
+deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the guide.
+
+
+_The Assembly._
+
+127. Being deployed: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places.
+
+If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time,
+form, and follow him.
+
+The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed.
+
+
+_Kneeling and Lying Down._
+
+128. If standing: _KNEEL_.
+
+Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left
+rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly as
+possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; piece
+remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the
+lower band.
+
+129. If standing or kneeling: _LIE DOWN_.
+
+Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the left foot
+and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35° to the right;
+piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the
+front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand
+grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the
+position of order arms, lying down.
+
+130. If kneeling or lying down: _RISE_.
+
+If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the
+left heel.
+
+If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to the front,
+on the ground marked by the knees.
+
+131. If lying down: _KNEEL_. Raise the body on both knees; take the
+position of kneel.
+
+132. In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying down are
+ordinarily used only for the better utilization of cover.
+
+When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken in lieu
+of the position kneeling.
+
+
+_LOADINGS AND FIRINGS._
+
+133. The commands for loading and firing are the same whether
+standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at
+a halt.
+
+When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does not
+load, aim, or fire.
+
+The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading.
+
+Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only.
+
+134. Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without command
+until the command _unload_, or _inspection arms_, fresh clips being
+inserted when the magazine is exhausted.
+
+135. The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may be
+done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are indicated
+before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted when the
+target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such case battle sight
+is used if no sight setting is announced.
+
+136. The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight
+setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be
+repeated until a change of either or both is necessary.
+
+Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or
+target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until a change
+is ordered.
+
+137. If the men are not already in the position of load, that position
+is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the announcement
+is omitted, the position is taken at the first command for firing.
+
+138. When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate firing
+is discretionary with each man.
+
+
+_To Load._
+
+139. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. _With dummy (blank or
+ball) cartridges_, 2. _LOAD_.
+
+At the command _load_ each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half
+right and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such
+position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
+body; raises, or lowers, the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height
+of the breast, and turns the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns
+and draws the bolt back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in
+the clip slots, places the thumb on the powder space of the top
+cartridge, the fingers extending around the piece and tips resting on
+the magazine floor plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by
+pressing down with the thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts the
+bolt home, turning down the handle; turns the safety lock to the
+"safe" and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each rear rank
+man moves to the right front, takes a similar position opposite the
+interval to the right of his front rank man, muzzle of the piece
+extending beyond the front rank, and loads.
+
+A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
+as practicable in the position of load.
+
+If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if
+kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the
+elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left hand
+steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt
+resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.
+
+For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
+are designated as that of _load_.
+
+140. For instruction in loading: 1. _Simulate_, 2. _LOAD_.
+
+Executed as above described except that the cut-off remains "off" and
+the handling of cartridges is simulated.
+
+The recruits are first taught to _simulate_ loading and firing; after
+a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges
+may be used.
+
+141. The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine
+"off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while "off" or
+"on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in the
+proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to
+be regarded as exceptional.
+
+
+_To Unload._
+
+142. _UNLOAD._
+
+Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt
+alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected.
+After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first
+thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding
+it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and
+back to engage it under the bolt and then thrusting the bolt home; the
+trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and
+returned to the belt and the piece is brought to the order.
+
+
+_To Set the Sight._
+
+143. _RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.)_, or _BATTLE SIGHT_.
+
+The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains
+and verifies sight settings.
+
+
+_To Fire by Volley._
+
+144. 1. _READY_, 2. _AIM_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _FIRE_.
+
+At the command _ready_ turn the safety lock to the "ready;" at the
+command _aim_ raise the piece with both hands and support the butt
+firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb clasping
+the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the piece, right
+elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forward and a
+little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right
+eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as to perceive the
+object aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against
+the front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight
+is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight.
+
+Each rear-rank man aims through the interval to the right of his file
+leader and leans slightly forward to advance the muzzle of his piece
+beyond the front rank.
+
+In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of
+elbow in front of kneecap. In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported
+by the knees.
+
+In aiming lying down, raise the piece with both hands; rest on both
+elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder.
+
+At the command _fire_ press the finger against the trigger; fire
+without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the piece;
+lower the piece in the position of _Load_ and load. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+2._)
+
+145. To continue the firing: 1. _AIM_, 2. _Squad_, 3. _FIRE_.
+
+Each command is executed as previously explained. _Load_ (from
+magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with
+the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready."
+
+
+_To Fire at Will._
+
+146. _FIRE AT WILL._
+
+Each man, independently of the others, comes to the _ready_, aims
+carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, _fires_,
+_loads_, and continues the firing until ordered to _suspend_ or _cease
+firing_.
+
+147. To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the
+instructor shouts: _FASTER (SLOWER)_.
+
+Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at
+effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum
+of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate
+the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to combat
+conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are
+designated.
+
+
+_To Fire by Clip._
+
+148. _CLIP FIRE._
+
+Executed in the same manner as _fire at will_, except that each man,
+after having exhausted the cartridges then in the piece, _suspends
+firing_.
+
+
+_To Suspend Firing._
+
+149. The instructor blows a _long blast_ of the whistle and repeats
+same, if necessary, or commands: _SUSPEND FIRING_.
+
+Firing stops; pieces are held loaded and locked, in a position of
+readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. The
+men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at
+which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear.
+
+This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to _cease firing_.
+
+
+_To Cease Firing._
+
+150. _CEASE FIRING._
+
+Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge
+is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights
+are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order.
+
+_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 7._)
+
+151. Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any time
+after the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has
+actually commenced or not.
+
+
+_THE USE OF COVER._
+
+152. The recruit should be given careful instruction in the individual
+use of cover.
+
+It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural
+cover, he must be able to tire easily and effectively upon the enemy;
+if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as
+possible; he must conceal himself as much as possible while firing and
+while advancing. While setting his sight he should be under cover or
+lying prone.
+
+153. To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time
+concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in
+simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching
+positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from
+depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to
+fire around the right side of his concealment whenever possible, or,
+when this is not possible, to rise enough to fire over the top of his
+concealment.
+
+When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with
+reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper
+position for firing.
+
+154. The evil of remaining too long in one place, however good the
+concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to advance from
+cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving his
+concealment.
+
+It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an
+enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from
+a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and
+throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing
+from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle
+grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right
+leg.
+
+155. He should be taught that, when fired on while acting
+independently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then
+endeavor to locate his enemy.
+
+156. The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued
+in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then be taught
+that the proper advance of the platoon or company and the
+effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the question
+of cover for individuals. He should also be taught that he may not
+move about or shift his position in the firing line except the better
+to see the target.
+
+
+_OBSERVATION._
+
+157. The ability to use his eyes accurately is of great importance to
+the soldier. The recruit should be trained in observing his
+surrounding from positions and when on the march.
+
+He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military features of
+the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in counting
+distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and forms.
+
+158. In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they
+should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming
+point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a
+designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone
+position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked
+eye and with field glasses. Similarly, they should be trained in
+estimating distances.
+
+
+
+
+SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
+
+
+159. The captain is responsible for the theoretical and practical
+instruction of his officers and noncommissioned officers, not only in
+the duties of their respective grades, but in those of the next higher
+grades.
+
+160. The company in line is formed in double rank with the men
+arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from right to
+left, the tallest on the right.
+
+The original division into squads is effected by the command: _COUNT
+OFF_. The squads, successively from the right, count off as in the
+School of the Squad, corporals placing themselves as Nos. 4 of the
+front rank. If the left squad contains less than six men, it is either
+increased to that number by transfers from other squads or is broken
+up and its members assigned to other squads and posted in the line of
+file closers. These squad organizations are maintained, by transfers
+if necessary, until the company becomes so reduced in numbers as to
+necessitate a new division into squads. No squad will contain less
+than six men.
+
+161. The company is further divided into two, three, or four platoons,
+each consisting of not less than two nor more than four squads. In
+garrison or ceremonies the strength of platoons may exceed four
+squads.
+
+162. At the formation of the company the platoons or squads are
+numbered consecutively from right to left and these designations do
+not change.
+
+For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the
+designations, _right_, _center_, _left_, when in line, and _leading_,
+_center_, _rear_, when in column, are applied to platoons or squads.
+These designations apply to the actual right, left, center, head, or
+rear, in whatever direction the company may be facing. The _center
+squad_ is the middle or right middle squad of the company.
+
+The designation "So-and-so's" squad or platoon may also be used.
+
+163. Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants and noncommissioned
+officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1, right; 2, left; 3, center
+(right center); 4, left center.
+
+[Illustration: Plate II. THE COMPANY.]
+
+The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, one
+to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned to
+platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, its
+guide, or guides, accompany the platoon leader.
+
+During battle, these assignments are not changed: vacancies are filled
+by noncommissioned officers of the platoon, or by the nearest
+available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with
+reenforcing troops.
+
+164. The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When not
+commanding a platoon, he is posted as a file closer opposite the third
+file from the outer flank of the first platoon; and when the company
+is deployed he accompanies the captain.
+
+The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned according to his
+rank as a sergeant.
+
+Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle, are in
+ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed, they are posted in
+the line of file closers.
+
+Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. When
+the company is deployed, they accompany the captain.
+
+165. The company executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and
+_marchings_, _manual of arms_, _loadings_ and _firings_, _takes
+intervals_ and _distances_ and _assembles_, _increases_ and
+_diminishes intervals_, resumes _attention_, _obliques_, resumes the
+direct march, preserves alignments, _kneels_, _lies down_, _rises_,
+_stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the Schools of the Soldier
+and the Squad, substituting in the commands _company_ for _squad_.
+
+The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc.,
+substituting their designation for _squad_ in the commands. In the
+same manner these execute the movements prescribed for the company,
+whenever possible, substituting their designation for _company_ in the
+commands.
+
+166. A company so depleted as to make division into platoons
+impracticable is led by the captain as a single platoon, but retains
+the designation of company. The lieutenants and first sergeant assist
+in fire control; the other sergeants place themselves in the firing
+line as skirmishers.
+
+
+CLOSE ORDER.
+
+_Rules._
+
+167. The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear, platoons,
+are the right and left, or leading and rear, guides, respectively, of
+the company when it is in line or in column of squads. Other guides
+are in the line of file closers.
+
+In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of
+the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if
+in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to
+flanks of the platoon does not change.
+
+168. The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank
+opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to
+the other flank, the captain commands: 1. _File closers on left
+(right) flank_; 2. _MARCH_. The file closers dart through the column;
+the captain and guides change.
+
+In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the side
+of the guide.
+
+169. Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or
+firings.
+
+Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual
+of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at
+the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements.
+
+170. In _taking intervals and distances_, unless otherwise directed,
+the right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in
+the line of file closers, and, with them, take a distance of 4 paces
+from the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command _march_, the
+file closers face to the flank and each steps off with the file
+nearest him. In _assembling_ the guides and file closers resume their
+positions in line.
+
+171. In movements executed simultaneously by platoons (as _platoons
+right_ or _platoons, column right_), platoon leaders repeat the
+preparatory command (_platoon right_, etc.), applicable to their
+respective platoons. The command of execution is given by the captain
+only.
+
+
+_To Form the Company._
+
+172. At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant takes position
+6 paces in front of where the center of the company is to be, faces
+it, draws saber, and commands: _FALL IN_.
+
+The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front,
+where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the
+center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first
+sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the
+right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their
+posts.
+
+The first sergeant commands: _REPORT_. Remaining in position at the
+order, the squad leaders, in succession from the right, salute and
+report: _All present_; or, _Private(s) ---- absent_. The first
+sergeant does not return the salutes of the squad leaders; he then
+commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Order_, 4. _ARMS_, faces
+about, salutes the captain, reports: _Sir, all present or accounted
+for_, or the names of the unauthorized absentees, and, without
+command, takes his post.
+
+If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant
+commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Right shoulder_, 4. _ARMS_,
+and calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers _here_
+and executes order arms. The sergeant then effects the division into
+squads and reports the company as prescribed above.
+
+The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, and
+facing, the company in time to receive the report of the first
+sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber.
+
+The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has reported
+and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not under arms, is
+formed in like manner omitting reference to arms.
+
+173. For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company,
+when small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close
+order movements only are executed. The single rank executes all
+movements as explained for the front rank of a company.
+
+
+_To Dismiss the Company._
+
+174. Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first sergeant:
+_Dismiss the company_. The officers fall out; the first sergeant
+places himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front and 2 paces
+from the nearest flank of the company, salutes, faces toward opposite
+flank of the company, and commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3.
+_Port_, 4. _ARMS_, 5. _DISMISSED_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+_Alignments._
+
+175. The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School of the
+Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file. The
+rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the front
+and covers his file leader.
+
+At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation of the
+line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is
+made, verifies the alignment, and commands: _FRONT_.
+
+Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify
+alignments.
+
+
+_Movements on the Fixed Pivot._
+
+176. Being in line, to turn the company: 1. _Company right (left)_, 2.
+_MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_; or, 3. _Forward_, 4. _MARCH_.
+
+At the second command the right-flank man in the front rank faces to
+the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank men oblique
+to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time; in
+the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by the
+second and first, moves straight to the front until in rear of his
+front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and mark time;
+the remaining men of the rear rank move straight to the front 4 paces,
+oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the third man, cover
+their file leaders, and mark time; the right guide steps back, takes
+post on the flank, and marks time.
+
+The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace in rear of the
+new line.
+
+The command _halt_ may be given at any time after the movement begins;
+only those halt who are in the new position. Each of the others halts
+upon arriving on the line, aligns himself to the right, and executes
+_front_ without command.
+
+177. Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the reverse: 1.
+_Platoons right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_; or 3.
+_Forward_, 4. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company.
+
+Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on the flank
+toward which the movement is to be executed are covering. This is
+effected by previously announcing the guide to that flank.
+
+178. Being in line, to form column of squads, or the reverse; or,
+being in line of platoons, to form column of platoons, or the reverse:
+1. _Squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Squads right (left)_, 2.
+_MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad.
+
+If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side of the
+file closers, they dart through the column and take posts in rear of
+the company at the second command. If the column of squads be formed
+from line, the file closers take posts on the pivot flank, abreast of
+and 4 inches from the nearest rank. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+_Movements on the Moving Pivot._
+
+179. Being in line, to change direction: 1. _Right (Left) turn_, 2.
+_MARCH_, 3. _Forward_, 4. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed as described in the School of the Squad, except that the men
+do not glance toward the marching flank and that all take the full
+step at the fourth command. The right guide is the pivot of the front
+rank. Each rear-rank man obliques on the same ground as his file
+leader.
+
+180. Being in column of platoons, to change direction: 1. _Column
+right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the first command the leader of the leading platoon commands:
+_Right turn_. At the command _march_ the leading platoon turns to the
+right on moving pivot; its leader commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_,
+on completion of the turn. Rear platoons march squarely up to the
+turning point of the leading platoon and turn at command of their
+leaders.
+
+181. Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. _Column right
+(left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns to the
+right on moving pivot as in the School of the Squad; the other ranks,
+without command, turn successively on the same ground and in a similar
+manner.
+
+182. Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons or the
+reverse: 1. _Platoons, column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company.
+
+183. Being in line, to form column of squads and change direction: 1.
+_Squads right (left), column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Right
+(Left) by squads_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+In the first case the right squad initiates the _column right_ as soon
+as it has completed the _squad right_.
+
+In the second case, at the command _march_, the right squad marches
+_forward_; the remainder of the company executes _squads right,
+column left_, and follows the right squad. The right guide, when he
+has posted himself in front of the right squad, takes four short
+steps, then resumes the full step; the right squad conforms.
+
+184. Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1. _Squads right (left),
+platoons, column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Platoons, right
+(left) by squads_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company in the preceding
+paragraph.
+
+
+_Facing or Marching to the Rear._
+
+185. Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of platoons or
+squads, to face or march to the rear: 1. _Squads right (left) about_,
+2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Squads right (left) about_, 2. _MARCH_, 3.
+_Company_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad.
+
+If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closers
+turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, each
+darts through the nearest interval between squads. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+2._)
+
+186. To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. _About_, 2. _FACE_, 3.
+_Forward_, 4. _MARCH_.
+
+If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now the
+front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their relative
+positions. No other movement is executed until the line is faced to
+the original front.
+
+
+_On Right (Left) Into Line._
+
+187. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line on right or
+left: 1. _On right (left) into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4.
+_HALT_, 5. _FRONT_.
+
+At the first command the leader of the leading unit commands: _Right
+turn_. The leaders of the other units command: _Forward_, if at a
+halt. At the second command, the leading unit turns to the right on
+moving pivot. The command _halt_ is given when the leading unit has
+advanced the desired distance in the new direction; it halts; its
+leader then commands: _Right dress_.
+
+The units in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, when
+opposite the right of its place in line, executes _right turn_ at the
+command of its leader; each is halted on the line at the command of
+its leader, who then commands: _Right dress_. All dress on the first
+unit in line.
+
+If executed in double time, the leading squad marches in double time
+until halted.
+
+
+_Front Into Line._
+
+188. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line to the front:
+1. _Right (Left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4.
+_HALT_, 5. _FRONT_.
+
+At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the leading
+one command: _Right oblique_. If at a halt, the leader of the leading
+unit commands: _Forward_. At the second command the leading unit moves
+straight forward; the rear units oblique as indicated. The command
+_halt_ is given when the leading unit has advanced the desired
+distance; it halts; its leader then commands: _Left dress_. Each of
+the rear units, when opposite its place in line, resumes the original
+direction at the command of its leader; each is halted on the line at
+the command of its leader, who then commands: _Left dress_. All dress
+on the first unit in line.
+
+189. Being in column of squads to form column of platoons, or being in
+line of platoons, to form the company in line: 1. _Platoons, right
+(left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_, 5.
+_FRONT_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company. In forming the
+company in line, the dress is on the left squad of the left platoon.
+If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders verify the alignment
+before taking their posts; the captain commands _front_ when the
+alignments have been verified.
+
+When _front into line_ is executed in double time the commands for
+halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is toward the side of
+the first unit in line.
+
+
+_AT EASE AND ROUTE STEP._
+
+190. The column of squads is the habitual column of route, but _route
+step_ and _at ease_ are applicable to any marching formation.
+
+191. To march at route step: 1. _Route step_, 2. _MARCH_. Sabers are
+carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry their pieces at
+will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not required to preserve
+silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks cover and preserve their
+distance. If halted from route step, the men stand _at rest_.
+
+192. To march at ease: 1. _At ease_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The company marches as in route step, except that silence is
+preserved; when halted, the men remain _at ease_.
+
+193. Marching at route step or at ease: 1. _Company_, 2. _ATTENTION_.
+
+At the command _attention_ the pieces are brought to the right
+shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed.
+
+
+_TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS._
+
+194. Being in column of squads: 1. _Right (left) by twos_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_ all files except the two right files of the
+leading squad execute _in place halt_; the two left files of the
+leading squad oblique to the right when disengaged and follow the
+right files at the shortest practicable distance. The remaining squads
+follow successively in like manner. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+195. Being in column of squads or twos: 1. _Right (left) by file_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, all files execute _in place halt_ except the
+right file of the leading two or squad. The left file or files of the
+leading two or squad oblique successively to the right when disengaged
+and each follows the file on its right at the shortest practicable
+distance. The remaining twos or squads follow successively in like
+manner. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+196. Being in column of files or twos, to form column of squads; or,
+being in column of files, to form column of twos: 1. _Squads (Twos),
+right (left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, the leading file or files halt. The remainder
+of the squad, or two, obliques to the right and halts on line with the
+leading file or files. The remaining squads or twos close up and
+successively form in rear of the first in like manner.
+
+The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered _right_ or
+_left_, so as to restore the files to their normal relative positions
+in the two or squad.
+
+197. The movements prescribed in the three preceding paragraphs are
+difficult of execution at attention and have no value as disciplinary
+exercises.
+
+198. Marching by twos or files can not be executed without serious
+delay and waste of road space. Every reasonable precaution will be
+taken to obviate the necessity for these formations.
+
+
+EXTENDED ORDER.
+
+_Rules for Deployment._
+
+199. The command _guide right (left_ or _center)_ indicates the base
+squad for the deployment; if in line it designates the actual _right
+(left_ or _center)_ squad; if in column the command _guide right
+(left)_ designates the _leading_ squad, and the command _guide center_
+designates the _center_ squad. After the deployment is completed, the
+guide is _center_ without command, unless otherwise ordered.
+
+200. At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, from either
+column of squads or line, each squad leader (except the leader of the
+base squad, when his squad does not advance), cautions his squad,
+_follow me_ or _by the right (left) flank_, as the case may be; at the
+command _march_, he steps in front of his squad and leads it to its
+place in line.
+
+201. Having given the command for forming skirmish line, the captain,
+if necessary, indicates to the corporal of the base squad the point on
+which the squad is to march; the corporal habitually looks to the
+captain for such directions.
+
+202. The base squad is deployed as soon as it has sufficient interval.
+The other squads are deployed as they arrive on the general line; each
+corporal halts in his place in line and commands or signals, _as
+skirmishers_; the squad deploys and halts abreast of him.
+
+If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before
+arriving on the line.
+
+203. Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the guide.
+Within their respective fronts, individuals or units march so as best
+to secure cover or to facilitate the advance, but the general and
+orderly progress of the whole is paramount.
+
+On halting, a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the
+enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying down
+if necessary.
+
+204. The company in skirmish line _advances_, _halts_, moves _by the
+flank_, or _to the rear_, _obliques_, resumes _the direct march_,
+passes from _quick_ to _double time_ and the reverse by the same
+commands and in a similar manner as in close order; if at a halt, the
+movement _by the flank_ or _to the rear_ is executed by the same
+commands as when marching. _Company right (left, half right, half
+left)_ is executed as explained for the front rank, skirmish intervals
+being maintained.
+
+205. A platoon or other part of the company is deployed and marched in
+the same manner as the company, substituting in the commands,
+_platoon_ (_detachment_, etc.) for _company_.
+
+
+_Deployments._
+
+206. Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: 1. _As
+skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to the
+front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, the captain
+commands: 1. _Company_, 2. _HALT_. If the guide be _right (left)_, the
+other corporals move to the _left (right)_ front, and, in succession
+from the base, place their squads on the line; if the guide be center,
+the other corporals move to the _right_ or _left_ front, according as
+they are on the right or left of the center squad, and in succession
+from the center squad place their squads on the line.
+
+If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the other
+squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; interior
+squads may be moved when squads more distant from the base have gained
+comfortable marching distance.
+
+207. Being in column of squads, to form skirmish line to the front: 1.
+_As skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If marching, the corporal of the base squad deploys it and moves
+straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad without
+advancing. If the guide be _right (left)_, the other corporals move to
+the _left (right) front_, and, in succession from the base, place
+their squads on the line; if the guide be _center_, the corporals in
+front of the center squad move to the right (if at a halt, to the
+right rear), the corporals in rear of the center squad move to the
+left front, and each, in succession from the base, places his squad on
+the line.
+
+The column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands and in
+like manner.
+
+208. The company in line or in column of squads may be deployed in an
+oblique direction by the same commands. The captain points out the
+desired direction; the corporal of the base squad moves in the
+direction indicated; the other corporals conform.
+
+209. To form skirmish line to the flank or rear the line or the column
+of squads is turned by squads to the flank or rear and then deployed
+as described.
+
+210. The intervals between men are increased or decreased as described
+in the School of the Squad, adding to the preparatory command, _guide
+right (left_ or _center)_ if necessary.
+
+
+_The Assembly._
+
+211. The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, the
+element on which the company is to assemble and commands: 1.
+_Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated point
+and the company is re-formed in line. If assembled by platoons, these
+are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, and the
+company is re-formed in line.
+
+Platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. _Platoons, assemble_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company.
+
+One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. _Such
+platoon(s), assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed by the designated platoon or platoons as described for the
+company.
+
+
+_The Advance._
+
+212. The advance of a company into an engagement (whether for attack
+or defense) is conducted in close order, preferably column of squads,
+until the probability of encountering hostile fire makes it advisable
+to deploy. After deployment, and before opening fire, the advance of
+the company may be continued in skirmish line or other suitable
+formation, depending upon circumstances. The advance may often be
+facilitated, or better advantage taken of cover, or losses reduced by
+the employment of the _platoon_ or _squad columns_ or by the use of a
+_succession of thin lines_. The selection of the method to be used is
+made by the captain or major, the choice depending upon conditions
+arising during the progress of the advance. If the deployment is found
+to be premature, it will generally be best to assemble the company and
+proceed in close order.
+
+Patrols are used to provide the necessary security against surprise.
+
+213. Being in skirmish line: 1. _Platoon columns_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their
+respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march to
+the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in like
+manner to the right; each platoon lender thus conducts the march of
+his platoon in double column of files; platoon guides follow in rear
+of their respective platoons to insure prompt and orderly execution of
+the advance.
+
+214. Being in skirmish line: 1. _Squad columns_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Each squad leader moves to the front; the members of each squad
+oblique toward and follow their squad leader in single file at easy
+marching distances.
+
+215. _Platoon columns_ are profitably used where the ground is so
+difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to take
+advantage of the few favorable routes; no two platoons should march
+within the area of burst of a single shrapnel.[1] _Squad columns_ are
+of value principally in facilitating the advance over rough or
+brush-grown ground; they afford no material advantage in securing
+cover.
+
+[Footnote 1: Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.]
+
+216. To deploy platoon or squad columns: 1. _As skirmishers_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place
+themselves in their original positions on the line.
+
+217. Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The platoon or squad leaders signal _assemble_. The men of each
+platoon or squad, as the case may be, advance and, moving to the right
+and left, take their proper places in line, each unit assembling on
+the leading element of the column and re-forming in line. The platoon
+or squad leaders conduct their units toward the element or point
+indicated by the captain, and to their places in line; the company is
+re-formed in line.
+
+218. Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of thin lines:
+1. _(Such numbers), forward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The captain points out in advance the selected position in front of
+the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves to the
+front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals as nearly
+as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable distance
+(generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon the terrain and the
+character of the hostile fire), a second is sent forward by similar
+commands, and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has
+advanced. Upon arriving at the indicated position, the first line is
+halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, halt on line with the first
+and the men take their proper places in the skirmish line.
+
+Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and the men of a
+squad are sent forward in order from right to left as deployed. The
+first line is led by the platoon leader of the right platoon, the
+second by the guide of the right platoon, and so on in order from
+right to left.
+
+The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions demand a
+faster gait.
+
+The company having arrived at the indicated position, a further
+advance by the same means may be advisable.
+
+219. The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide
+stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery fire or heavy,
+long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its
+purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to
+engaging in a fire fight. This method of advancing results in serious
+(though temporary) loss of control over the company. Its advantage
+lies in the fact that it offers a less definite target, hence is less
+likely to draw fire.
+
+220. The above are suggestions. Other and better formations may be
+devised to fit particular cases. The best formation is the one which
+advances the line farthest with the least loss of men, time, and
+control.
+
+
+_The Fire Attack._
+
+221. The principles governing the advance of the firing line in attack
+are considered in the School of the Battalion.
+
+When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as a whole by
+ordinary means, it advances by rushes.
+
+222. Being in skirmish line: 1. _By platoon_ (_two platoons, squad,
+four men_, etc.), _from the right (left)_, 2. _RUSH_.
+
+The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges the
+details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it
+into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he designates the
+leader for the indicated fraction. When about to rush, he causes the
+men of the fraction to cease firing and to hold themselves flat, but
+in readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at
+the signal of the platoon leader, if the latter be not the leader of
+the rush) commands: _Follow me_, and, running at top speed, leads the
+fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open
+fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been
+previously designated.
+
+The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next
+like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader, without further
+command of the captain, and so on, successively, until the entire
+company is on the line established by the first rush.
+
+If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior platoon
+leader conforms to the action of the senior.
+
+A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase or
+decrease the size of the fractions to complete the movement.
+
+223. When the company forms a part of the firing line, the rush of the
+company as a whole is conducted by the captain, as described for a
+platoon in the preceding paragraph. The captain leads the rush;
+platoon leaders lead their respective platoons; platoon guides follow
+the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance.
+
+224. When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes
+impracticable, any method of advance that _brings the attack closer to
+the enemy_, such as crawling, should be employed.
+
+For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 318 and 319.
+
+
+_The Company in Support._
+
+225. To enable it to follow or reach the firing line, the support
+adopts suitable formations, following the principles explained in
+paragraphs 212-218.
+
+The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. If after
+deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it for some time in
+close formation, it should be reassembled. It is redeployed when
+necessary.
+
+226. The movements of the support as a whole and the dispatch of
+reenforcements from it to the firing line are controlled by the major.
+
+A reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence and will
+be avoided whenever practicable.
+
+The captain of a company in support is constantly on the alert for the
+major's signals or commands.
+
+227. A reenforcement sent to the firing line joins it deployed as
+skirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement places it in an interval
+in the line, if one exists, and commands it thereafter as a unit. If
+no such suitable interval exists, the reenforcement is advanced with
+increased intervals between skirmishers; each man occupies the nearest
+interval in the firing line, and each then obeys the orders of the
+nearest squad leader and platoon leader.
+
+228. A reenforcement joins the firing line as quickly as possible
+without exhausting the men.
+
+229. The original platoon division of the companies in the firing line
+should be maintained and should not be broken up by the mingling of
+reenforcements.
+
+Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying a
+reenforcement take over the duties of others of like grade who have
+been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to exercise their
+normal functions. Conditions will vary and no rules can be prescribed.
+It is essential that all assist in mastering the increasing
+difficulties of control.
+
+
+_The Company Acting Alone._
+
+230. In general, the company, when acting alone, is employed according
+to the principles applicable to the battalion acting alone; the
+captain employs platoons as the major employs companies, making due
+allowance for the difference in strength.
+
+The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed with.
+
+231. The company must be well protected against surprise. Combat
+patrols on the flanks are specially important. Each leader of a flank
+platoon details a man to watch for the signals of the patrol or
+patrols on his flank.
+
+
+FIRE.
+
+232. Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra ammunition is issued
+before the company deploys for combat.
+
+In close order the company executes the firings at the command of the
+captain, who posts himself in rear of the center of the company.
+
+Usually the firings in close order consist of saluting volleys only.
+
+233. When the company is deployed, the men execute the firings at the
+command of their platoon leaders; the latter give such commands as are
+necessary to carry out the captain's directions, and, from time to
+time, add such further commands as are necessary to continue, correct,
+and control the fire ordered.
+
+234. The voice is generally inadequate for giving commands during fire
+and must be replaced by signals of such character that proper fire
+direction and control is assured. To attract attention, signals must
+usually be preceded by the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of
+the firing line about to rush should, if practicable, avoid using the
+long blast signal as an aid to _cease firing_. Officers and men behind
+the firing line can not ordinarily move freely along the line, but
+must depend on mutual watchfulness and the proper use of the
+prescribed signals. All should post themselves so as to see their
+immediate superiors and subordinates.
+
+235. The musicians assist the captain by observing the enemy, the
+target, and the fire effect, by transmitting commands or signals, and
+by watching for signals.
+
+236. Firing with blank cartridges at an _outlined_ or _represented_
+enemy at distances less than 100 yards is prohibited.
+
+237. The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation
+thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in
+marksmanship, are treated in the Small-Arms Firing Manual.
+
+
+_Ranges._
+
+238. For convenience of reference ranges are classified as follows:
+
+     0 to 600 yards, close range.
+     600 to 1,200 yards, effective range.
+     1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range.
+     2,000 yards and over, distant range.
+
+239. The distance to the target must be determined as accurately as
+possible and the sights set accordingly. Aside from training and
+morale, this is the most important single factor in securing effective
+fire at the longer ranges.
+
+240. Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most
+accurate and only practicable method of determining the range will
+generally be to take the mean of several estimates.
+
+Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate
+estimators in the company, are designated as _range estimators_ and
+are specially trained in estimating distances.
+
+Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range
+estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of
+their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+
+_Classes of Firing._
+
+241. _Volley firing_ has limited application. In defense it may be
+used in the early stages of the action if the enemy presents a large,
+compact target. It may be used by troops executing _fire of position_.
+When the ground near the target is such that the strike of bullets can
+be seen from the firing line, _ranging volleys_ may be used to correct
+the sight setting.
+
+In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon.
+
+242. _Fire at will_ is the class of fire normally employed in attack
+or defense.
+
+243. _Clip fire_ has limited application. It is principally used: 1.
+In the early stages of combat, to steady the men by habituating them
+to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short burst of fire.
+
+
+_The Target._
+
+244. Ordinarily the major will assign to the company an objective in
+attack or sector in defense; the company's target will lie within the
+limits so assigned. In the choice of target, tactical considerations
+are paramount; the nearest hostile troops within the objective or
+sector will thus be the usual target. This will ordinarily be the
+hostile firing line; troops in rear are ordinarily proper targets for
+artillery, machine guns, or, at times, infantry employing fire of
+position.
+
+Change of target should not be made without excellent reasons
+therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under
+conditions which make them more to be feared than the troops
+comprising the former target.
+
+245. The distribution of fire over the entire target is of special
+importance.
+
+The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each
+platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his
+position in the company. Men are so instructed that each fires on
+that part of the target which is directly opposite him.
+
+246. All parts of the target are equally important. Care must be
+exercised that the men do not slight its less visible parts. A section
+of the target not covered by fire represents a number of the enemy
+permitted to fire coolly and effectively.
+
+247. If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders
+select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the
+_aiming target_, and direct a sight setting which will carry the cone
+of fire into the target.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+
+_Fire Direction._
+
+248. When the company is large enough to be divided into platoons, it
+is impracticable for the captain to command it directly in combat. His
+efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to
+enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly
+what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct
+serious errors or omissions.
+
+249. The captain _directs_ the fire of the company or of designated
+platoons. He designates the target, and, when practicable, allots a
+part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action
+he determines the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates
+the class of fire to be employed and the time to open fire.
+Thereafter, he observes the fire effect, corrects material errors in
+sight setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and
+causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as may be received
+from the rear.
+
+
+_Fire Control._
+
+250. In combat the platoon is the _fire unit_. From 20 to 35 rifles
+are as many as one leader can control effectively.
+
+251. Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or
+directions of the captain, having first taken such precautions to
+insure correct sight setting and clear description of the target or
+aiming target as the situation permits or requires; thereafter, he
+gives such additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact
+compliance with the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when
+necessary. He designates an aiming target when the target can not be
+seen with the naked eye.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+252. In general, _platoon leaders_ observe the target and the effect
+of their fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands or
+signals; they observe and regulate the rate of fire. The _platoon
+guides_ watch the firing line and check every breach of fire
+discipline. _Squad leaders_ transmit commands and signals when
+necessary, observe the conduct of their squads and abate excitement,
+assist in enforcing fire discipline and participate in the firing.
+
+253. The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control.
+Loss of control is an evil which robs success of its greatest results.
+To avoid or delay such loss should be the constant aim of all.
+
+Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight
+setting and target, and resume a well directed fire.
+
+
+_Fire Discipline._
+
+254. "Fire discipline implies, besides a habit of obedience, a control
+of the rifle by the soldier, the result of training, which will enable
+him in action to make hits instead of misses. It embraces taking
+advantage of the ground; care in setting the sight and delivery of
+fire; constant attention to the orders of the leaders, and careful
+observation of the enemy; an increase of fire when the target is
+favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy disappears; economy
+of ammunition." (Small-Arms Firing Manual.)
+
+In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position and thus
+reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate value of
+hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire
+superiority.
+
+Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each
+man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the
+proper target.
+
+255. To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire
+discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire should be as rapid as
+is consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the
+visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper
+rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man, usually
+rendering cautions or commands unnecessary.
+
+In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt preceding
+the assault, and in pursuing fire.
+
+256. In an advance by rushes, leaders of troops in firing positions
+are responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover the advance of
+each rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change slightly the
+direction of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of advanced
+portions of the firing line.
+
+257. In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon
+leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point
+where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly
+with vigorous fire.
+
+
+
+
+SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
+
+
+258. The battalion being purely a tactical unit, the major's duties
+are primarily those of an instructor in drill and tactics and of a
+tactical commander. He is responsible for the theoretical and
+practical training of the battalion. He supervises the training of the
+companies of the battalion with a view to insuring the thoroughness
+and uniformity of their instruction.
+
+In the instruction of the battalion as a whole, his efforts will be
+directed chiefly to the development of tactical efficiency, devoting
+only such time to the mechanism of drill and to the ceremonies as may
+be necessary in order to insure precision, smartness, and proper
+control.
+
+259. The movements explained herein are on the basis of a battalion of
+four companies; they may be executed by a battalion of two or more
+companies, not exceeding six.
+
+260. The companies are generally arranged from right to left according
+to the rank of the captains present at the formation. The arrangement
+of the companies may be varied by the major or higher commander.
+
+After the battalion is formed, no cognizance is taken of the relative
+order of the companies.
+
+261. In whatever direction the battalion faces, the companies are
+designated numerically from right to left in line, and from head to
+rear in column, _first company_, _second company_, etc.
+
+The terms _right_ and _left_ apply to actual right and left as the
+line faces; if the about by squads be executed when in line, the right
+company becomes the left company and the right center becomes the left
+center company.
+
+The designation center company indicates the right center or the
+actual center company according as the number of companies is even or
+odd.
+
+262. The band and other special units, when attached to the battalion,
+take the same post with respect to it as if it were the nearest
+battalion shown in Plate IV.
+
+
+CLOSE ORDER.
+
+_Rules._
+
+[Illustration: Plate III. THE BATTALION.]
+
+263. Captains repeat such preparatory commands as are to be
+immediately executed by their companies, as _forward_, _squads right_,
+etc.; the men execute the commands _march_, _halt_, etc., if applying
+to their companies, when given by the major. In movements executed in
+route step or at ease the captains repeat the command of execution, if
+necessary. Captains do not repeat the major's commands in executing
+the manual of arms, nor those commands which are not essential to the
+execution of a movement by their companies, as _column of squads_,
+_first company_, _squads right_, etc.
+
+In giving commands or cautions captains may prefix the proper letter
+designations of their companies, as _A Company, HALT_; _B Company,
+squads right_, etc.
+
+264. At the command _guide center (right_ or _left)_, captains
+command: _Guide right_ or _left_, according to the positions of their
+companies. _Guide center_ designates the left guide of the center
+company.
+
+265. When the companies are to be dressed, captains place themselves
+on that flank toward which the dress is to be made, as follows:
+
+The battalion in line: Beside the guide (or the flank file of the
+front rank, if the guide is not in line) and facing to the front.
+
+The battalion in column of companies: Two paces from the guide, in
+prolongation of and facing down the line.
+
+Each captain, after dressing his company, commands: _FRONT_, and takes
+his post.
+
+The battalion being in line and unless otherwise prescribed, at the
+captain's command _dress_, or at the command _halt_, when it is
+prescribed that the company shall dress, the guide on the flank away
+from the point of rest, with his piece at right shoulder, dresses
+promptly on the captain and the companies beyond. During the dress he
+moves, if necessary, to the right and left only; the captain dresses
+the company on the line thus established. The guide takes the position
+of order arms at the command _front_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+266. The battalion executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_
+and _marchings_, _manual of arms_, resumes _attention_, _kneels_,
+_lies down_, _rises_, _stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the
+Schools of the Soldier and Squad, substituting in the commands
+_battalion_ for _squad_.
+
+The battalion executes _squads right (left)_, _squads right (left)
+about_, _route step_ and _at ease_, and _obliques_ and resumes the
+_direct march_, as explained in the School of the Company.
+
+267. The battalion in column of platoons, squads, twos, or files
+changes direction; in column of squads forms column of twos or files
+and re-forms columns of twos or squads, as explained in the School of
+the Company.
+
+268. When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution by
+companies or platoons of movements in the School of the Company the
+major may cause such movement to be executed by prefixing, when
+necessary, _companies (platoons)_ to the commands prescribed therein:
+as 1. _Companies, right front into line_, 2. _MARCH_. To complete such
+simultaneous movements, the commands _halt_ or _march_, if
+prescribed, are given by the major. The command _front_, when
+prescribed, is given by the captains.
+
+269. The battalion as a unit executes the loadings and firings only in
+firing saluting volleys. The commands are as for the company,
+substituting _battalion_ for _company_. At the first command for
+loading, captains take post in rear of the center of their respective
+companies. At the conclusion of the firing, the captains resume their
+posts in line.
+
+On other occasions, when firing in close order is necessary, it is
+executed by company or other subdivision under instructions from the
+major.
+
+
+_To Form the Battalion._
+
+270. For purposes other than ceremonies: The battalion is formed in
+column of squads. The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts
+himself so as to be facing the column, when formed, and 6 paces in
+front of the place to be occupied by the leading guide of the
+battalion; he draws saber; _adjutant's call_ is sounded or the
+adjutant signals _assemble_.
+
+The companies are formed, at attention, in column of squads in their
+proper order. Each captain, after halting his company, salutes the
+adjutant; the adjutant returns the salute and, when the last captain
+has saluted, faces the major and reports: _Sir, the battalion is
+formed_. He then joins the major.
+
+271. For ceremonies or when directed: The battalion is formed in line.
+
+The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts himself so as to
+be 6 paces to the right of the right company when line is formed, and
+faces in the direction in which the line is to extend. He draws saber;
+_adjutant's call_ is sounded; the band plays if present.
+
+The right company is conducted by its captain so as to arrive from the
+rear, parallel to the line; its right and left guides precede it on
+the line by about 20 paces, taking post facing to the right at order
+arms, so that their elbows will be against the breasts of the right
+and left files of their company when it is dressed. The guides of the
+other companies successively prolong the line to the left in like
+manner and the companies approach their respective places in line as
+explained for the right company. The adjutant, from his post, causes
+the guides to cover.
+
+When about 1 pace in rear of the line, each company is halted and
+dressed to the right against the arms of the guides.
+
+The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the
+right company is halted; it ceases playing when the left company has
+halted.
+
+When the guides of the left company have been posted, the adjutant,
+moving by the shortest route, takes post facing the battalion midway
+between the post of the major and the center of the battalion.
+
+The major, staff, noncommissioned staff, and orderlies take their
+posts.
+
+When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and others
+have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. _Guides_, 2.
+_POSTS_, 3. _Present_, 4. _ARMS_. At the second command guides take
+their places in the line. The adjutant then turns about and reports to
+the major: _Sir, the battalion is formed_; the major directs the
+adjutant: _Take your post, Sir_; draws saber and brings the battalion
+to the order. The adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the
+major.
+
+
+_To Dismiss the Battalion._
+
+272. _DISMISS YOUR COMPANIES._
+
+Staff and noncommissioned staff officers fall out; each captain
+marches his company off and dismisses it.
+
+
+_To Rectify the Alignment._
+
+273. Being in line at a halt, to align the battalion: 1. _Center
+(right_ or _left)_, 2. _DRESS_.
+
+The captains dress their companies successively toward the center
+(right or left) guide of the battalion, each as soon as the captain
+next toward the indicated guide commands: _Front_. The captains of the
+center companies (if the dress is _center_) dress them without waiting
+for each other.
+
+274. To give the battalion a new alignment: 1. _Guides center (right_
+or _left) company on the line_, 2. _Guides on the line_, 3. _Center
+(right_ or _left)_, 4. _DRESS_, 5. _Guides_, 6. _POSTS_.
+
+At the first command, the designated guides place themselves on the
+line (par. 271) facing the center (right or left). The major
+establishes them in the direction he wishes to give the battalion.
+
+At the second command, the guides of the other companies take posts,
+facing the center (right or left), so as to prolong the line.
+
+At the command _dress_, each captain dresses his company to the flank
+toward which the guides of his company face.
+
+At the command _posts_, given when all companies have completed the
+dress, the guides return to their posts.
+
+
+_To Rectify the Column._
+
+275. Being in column of companies, or in close column, at a halt, if
+the guides do not cover or have not their proper distances, and it is
+desired to correct them, the major commands: 1. _Right (left)_, 2.
+_DRESS_.
+
+Captains of companies in rear of the first place their right guides so
+as to cover at the proper distance; each captain aligns his company to
+the right and commands: _FRONT_.
+
+
+_On Right (Left) into Line._
+
+276. Being in column of squads or companies: 1. _On right (left) into
+line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the
+leading company commands: _Squads right_. If at a halt each captain in
+rear commands: _Forward_. At the second command the leading company
+marches in line to the right; the companies in rear continue to march
+to the front and form successively on the left, each, when opposite
+its place, being marched in line to the right.
+
+The fourth command is given when the first company has advanced the
+desired distance in the new direction; it halts and is dressed to the
+right by its captain; the others complete the movement, each being
+halted 1 pace in rear of the line established by the first company,
+and then dressed to the right.
+
+Being in column of companies: At the first command, the captain of the
+first company commands: _Right turn_. If at a halt, each captain in
+rear commands: _Forward_. Each of the captains in rear of the leading
+company gives the command: 1. _Right turn_, in time to add, 2.
+_MARCH_, when his company arrives opposite the right of its place in
+line.
+
+The fourth command is given and the movement completed as explained
+above.
+
+Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each
+captain places himself so as to march beside the right guide after his
+company forms line or changes direction to the right.
+
+If executed in double time, the leading company marches in double time
+until halted.
+
+
+_Front into Line._
+
+277. Being in column of squads or companies: 1. _Right (Left) front
+into line_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the
+leading company commands: _Column right_; the captains of the
+companies in rear, _column half right_. At the second command the
+leading company executes column right, and, as the last squad
+completes the change of direction, is formed in line to the left,
+halted, and dressed to the left. Each of the companies in rear is
+conducted by the most convenient route to the rear of the right of the
+preceding company, thence to the right, parallel to and 1 pace in rear
+of the new line; when opposite its place, it is formed in line to the
+left, halted, and dressed to the left.
+
+Being in column of companies: If marching, the captain of the leading
+company gives the necessary commands to halt his company at the second
+command; if at a halt, the leading company stands fast. At the first
+command, the captain of each company in rear commands: _Squads right_,
+or _Right by squads_, and after the second command conducts his
+company by the most convenient route to its place in line, as
+described above.
+
+Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each
+captain halts when opposite or at the point where the left of his
+company is to rest.
+
+
+_To Form Column of Companies Successively to the Right or Left._
+
+278. Being in column of squads: 1. _Column of companies, first
+company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The leading company executes _squads right_ and moves forward. The
+other companies move forward in column of squads and successively
+march in line to the right on the same ground as the leading company
+and in such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding
+company.
+
+
+_To Form Column of Squads Successively to the Right or Left._
+
+279. Being in column of companies: 1. _Column of squads, first
+company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The leading company executes _squads right_ and moves forward. The
+other companies move forward in column of companies and successively
+march in column of squads to the right on the same ground as the
+leading company.
+
+
+_To Change Direction._
+
+280. Being in column of companies or close column: 1. _Column right
+(left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The captain of the first company commands: _Right turn_.
+
+The leading company turns to the right on moving pivot, the captain
+adding: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_, upon its completion.
+
+The other companies march squarely up to the turning point; each
+changes direction by the same commands and means as the first and in
+such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding company.
+
+281. Being in line of companies or close line: 1. _Battalion right
+(left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+The right company changes direction to the right; the other companies
+are conducted by the shortest line to their places abreast of the
+first.
+
+The fourth command is given when the right company has advanced the
+desired distance in the new direction; that company halts; the others
+halt successively upon arriving on the line.
+
+282. Being in column of squads, the battalion changes direction by the
+same commands and in the manner prescribed for the company.
+
+
+_Mass Formations._
+
+282 1-2. Being in column of squads, to form a line of columns of
+companies or company subdivisions, facing in any desired direction, at
+any desired interval, on the right or left of the leading element of
+the battalion: 1. _Line of companies (half companies, platoons), at
+(so many) paces, guide right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4.
+_HALT_.
+
+The leading company (or subdivision) marches in the direction
+previously indicated by the major until the command halt is given and
+then halts. Each succeeding company (or subdivision) marches by the
+most direct route to its place at the prescribed interval on the left
+(right) of the next preceding company (or subdivision), halting when
+it is abreast of the leading element of the battalion.
+
+If the battalion be in any formation other than column of squads, the
+major indicates the desired direction to the leading element. The
+entire command forms column of squads and executes the movement in
+conformity with the principles indicated above. (_C.I.D.R., No. 19._)
+
+283. Being in line, line of companies, or column of companies: 1.
+_Close on first (fourth) company_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast; if marching, it is
+halted; each of the other companies is conducted toward it and is
+halted in proper order in close column.
+
+If the battalion is in line, companies form successively in rear of
+the indicated company; if in column of squads, companies in rear of
+the leading company form on the left of it.
+
+In close column formed from line on the first company, the left guides
+cover; formed on the fourth company, right guides cover. If formed on
+the leading company, the guide remains as before the formation. In
+close line, the guides are halted abreast of the guide of the leading
+company.
+
+The battalion in column closes on the leading company only.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 19._)
+
+
+_To Extend the Mass._
+
+284. Being in close column or in close line: 1. _Extend on first
+(fourth) company_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Being in close line: If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast;
+if marching, it halts; each of the other companies is conducted away
+from the indicated company and is halted in its proper order in line
+of companies.
+
+Being in close column, the extension is made on the fourth company
+only. If marching, the leading company continues to march; companies
+in rear are halted and successively resume the march in time to follow
+at full distance. If at halt, the leading company marches; companies
+in rear successively march in time to follow at full distance.
+
+Close column is not extended in double time.
+
+285. Being in close column: 1. _Right (left) front into line_, 2.
+_MARCH_. Executed as from column of companies.
+
+286. Being in close column: 1. _Column of squads, first (fourth)
+company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The designated company marches in column of squads to the right. Each
+of the other companies executes the same movement in time to follow
+the preceding company in column.
+
+287. Being in close line: 1. _Column of squads, first (fourth)
+company, forward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The designated company moves forward. The other companies (halting if
+in march) successively take up the march and follow in column.
+
+
+_Route Step and At Ease._
+
+288. The battalion marches in _route step_ and _at ease_ as prescribed
+in the School of the Company. When marching in column of companies or
+platoons, the guides maintain the trace and distance.
+
+In route marches the major marches at the head of the column; when
+necessary, the file closers may be directed to march at the head and
+rear of their companies.
+
+
+_Assembly._
+
+289. The battalion being wholly or partially deployed, or the
+companies being separated: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The major places himself opposite to or designates the element or
+point on which the battalion is to assemble. Companies are assembled
+and marched to the indicated point. As the companies arrive the major
+or adjutant indicates the formation to be taken.
+
+
+COMBAT PRINCIPLES.
+
+_Orders._
+
+290. The following references to orders are applicable to attack or
+defense.
+
+291. In extended order, the company is the largest unit to execute
+movements by prescribed commands or means. The major, assembling his
+captains if practicable, directs the disposition of the battalion by
+means of _tactical orders_. He controls its subsequent movements by
+such _orders_ or _commands_ as are suitable to the occasion.
+
+292. In every disposition of the battalion for combat the major's
+order should give subordinates sufficient information of the enemy, of
+the position of supporting and neighboring troops, and of the object
+sought to enable them to conform intelligently to the general plan.
+
+The order should then designate the companies which are to constitute
+the _firing line_ and those which are to constitute the _support_. In
+attack, it should designate the direction or the objective, the order
+and front of the companies on the firing line, and should designate
+the right or left company as base company. In defense, it should
+describe the front of each company and, if necessary, the sector to be
+observed by each.
+
+293. When the battalion is operating alone, the major provides for the
+reconnaissance and protection of his flanks; if part of a larger
+force, the major makes similar provisions, when necessary, without
+orders from higher authority, unless such authority has specifically
+directed other suitable reconnaissance and protection.
+
+294. When the battalion is deployed upon the initiative of the major,
+he will indicate whether extra ammunition shall be issued; if deployed
+in pursuance of orders of higher authority, the major will cause the
+issue of extra ammunition, unless such authority has given directions
+to the contrary.
+
+
+_Deployment._
+
+295. The following principles of deployment are applicable to attack
+or defense.
+
+296. A premature deployment involves a long, disorganizing and
+fatiguing advance of the skirmish line, and should be avoided. A
+greater evil is to be caught by heavy fire when in dense column or
+other close order formation; hence advantage should be taken of cover
+in order to retain the battalion in close order formation until
+exposure to heavy hostile fire may reasonably be anticipated.
+
+297. The major regulates the depth of the deployment and the extent
+and density of the firing line, subject to such restrictions as a
+senior may have imposed.
+
+Companies or designated subdivisions and detachments are conducted by
+their commanders in such manner as best to accomplish the mission
+assigned to them under the major's orders. Companies designated for
+the firing line march independently to the place of deployment, form
+skirmish line, and take up the advance. They conform, in general, to
+the base company.
+
+298. The commander of a battalion, whether it is operating alone or as
+part of a larger force, should hold a part of his command out of the
+firing line. By the judicious use of this force the major can exert an
+influence not otherwise possible over his firing line and can control,
+within reasonable limits, an action once begun. So if his battalion be
+assigned to the _firing line_ the major will cause one, two, or three
+companies to be deployed on the firing line, retaining the remaining
+companies or company as a _support_ for that firing line. The division
+of the battalion into firing line and support will depend upon the
+front to be covered and the nature and anticipated severity of the
+action.
+
+299. If the battalion be part of a larger command, the number of
+companies in the firing line will generally be determinable from the
+regimental commander's order; the remainder constitutes the support.
+If the battalion is acting alone, the support must be strong enough to
+maintain the original fire power of the firing line, to protect the
+flanks, and to perform the functions of a reserve, whatever be the
+issue of the action. See paragraph 346.
+
+300. If the battalion is operating alone, the support may, according
+to circumstances, be held in one or two bodies and placed behind the
+center, or one or both flanks of the firing line, or echeloned beyond
+a flank. If the battalion is part of a larger force, the support is
+generally held in one body.
+
+301. The distance between the firing line and the supporting group or
+groups will vary between wide limits; it should be as short as the
+necessity for protection from heavy losses will permit. When cover is
+available, the support should be as close as 50 to 100 yards; when
+such cover is not available, it should not be closer than 300 yards.
+It may be as far as 500 yards in rear if good cover is there
+obtainable and is not obtainable at a lesser distance.
+
+302. In exceptional cases, as in a meeting engagement, it may be
+necessary to place an entire battalion or regiment in the firing line
+at the initial deployment, the support being furnished by other
+troops. Such deployment causes the early mingling of the larger units,
+thus rendering leadership and control extremely difficult. The
+necessity for such deployment will increase with the inefficiency of
+the commander and of the service of information.
+
+
+_Fire._
+
+303. Fire direction and fire control are functions of company and
+platoon commanders. The major makes the primary apportionment of the
+target--in defense, by assigning sectors of fire; in attack, by
+assigning the objective. In the latter case each company in the firing
+line takes as its target that part of the general objective which lies
+in its front.
+
+304. The major should indicate the point or time at which the fire
+fight is to open. He may do this in his order for deployment or he may
+follow the firing line close enough to do so at the proper time. If it
+be impracticable for him to do either, the senior officer with the
+firing line, in each battalion, selects the time for opening fire.
+
+
+_Attack._
+
+305. The battalion is the _attack unit_, whether operating alone or as
+part of a larger unit.
+
+306. If his battalion be one of several in the firing line, the major,
+in executing his part of the attack, pushes his battalion forward as
+vigorously as possible within the front, or section, assigned to it.
+The great degree of independence allowed to him as to details demands,
+in turn, the exercise of good judgment on his part. Better leadership,
+better troops, and more favorable terrain enable one battalion to
+advance more rapidly in attack than another less fortunate, and such a
+battalion will insure the further advance of the others. The leading
+battalion should not, however, become isolated; isolation may lead to
+its destruction.
+
+307. The deployment having been made, the firing line advances without
+firing. The predominant idea must be to close with the enemy as soon
+as possible without ruinous losses. The limited supply of ammunition
+and the uncertainty of resupply, the necessity for securing fire
+superiority in order to advance within the shorter ranges, and the
+impossibility of accomplishing this at ineffective ranges, make it
+imperative that fire be not opened as long as the advance can be
+continued without demoralizing losses. The attack which halts to open
+fire at extreme range (over 1,200 yards) is not likely ever to reach
+its destination. Every effort should be made, by using cover or
+inconspicuous formations, or by advancing the firing line as a whole,
+to arrive within 800 yards of the enemy before opening fire.
+
+308. Except when the enemy's artillery is able to effect an unusual
+concentration of fire, its fire upon deployed infantry causes losses
+which are unimportant when compared with those inflicted by his
+infantry; hence the attacking infantry should proceed to a position as
+described above, and from which an effective fire can be directed
+against the hostile infantry with a view to obtaining fire
+superiority. The effectiveness of the enemy's fire must be reduced so
+as to permit further advance. The more effective the fire to which the
+enemy is subjected the less effective will be his fire.
+
+309. Occasionally the fire of adjacent battalions, or of infantry
+employing fire of position, or of supporting artillery, will permit
+the further advance of the entire firing line from this point, but it
+will generally be necessary to advance by rushes of fractions of the
+line.
+
+The fraction making the rush should be as large as the hostile fire
+and the necessity for maintaining fire superiority will permit.
+Depending upon circumstances, the strength of the fraction may vary
+from a company to a few men.
+
+The advance is made as rapidly as possible without losing fire
+superiority. The smaller the fraction which rushes, the greater the
+number of rifles which continue to fire upon the enemy. On the other
+hand, the smaller the fraction which rushes the slower will be the
+progress of the attack.
+
+310. Enough rifles must continue in action to insure the success of
+each rush. Frequently the successive advances of the firing line must
+be effected by rushes of fractions of decreased size; that is,
+advances by rushes may first be made by company, later by half company
+or platoon, and finally by squads or files; but no subsequent
+opportunity to _increase_ the rate of advance, such as better cover or
+a decrease of the hostile fire, should be overlooked.
+
+311. Whenever possible, the rush is begun by a flank fraction of the
+firing line. In the absence of express directions from the major, each
+captain of a flank company determines when an advance by rushes shall
+be attempted. A flank company which inaugurates an advance by rushes
+becomes the base company, if not already the base. An advance by
+rushes having been inaugurated on one flank, the remainder of the
+firing line conforms; fractions rush successively from that flank and
+halt on the line established by the initial rush.
+
+The fractions need not be uniform in size; each captain indicates how
+his company shall rush, having due regard to the ground and the state
+of the fire fight.
+
+312. A fraction about to rush is sent forward when the remainder of
+the line is firing vigorously; otherwise the chief advantage of this
+method of advancing is lost.
+
+The length of the rush will vary from 30 to 80 yards, depending upon
+the existence of cover, positions for firing, and the hostile fire.
+
+313. When the entire firing line of the battalion has advanced to the
+new line, fresh opportunities to advance are sought as before.
+
+314. Two identical situations will never confront the battalion; hence
+at drill it is prohibited to arrange the details of an advance before
+the preceding one has been concluded, or to employ a fixed or
+prearranged method of advancing by rushes.
+
+315. The major posts himself so as best to direct the reenforcing of
+the firing line from the support. When all or nearly all of the
+support has been absorbed by the firing line, he joins, and takes full
+charge of, the latter.
+
+316. The reenforcing of the firing line by driblets of a squad or a
+few men has no appreciable effect. The firing line requires either no
+reenforcement or a strong one. Generally one or two platoons will be
+sent forward under cover of a heavy fire of the firing line.
+
+317. To facilitate control and to provide intervals in which
+reenforcements may be placed, the companies in the firing line should
+be kept closed in on their centers as they become depleted by
+casualties during the advance.
+
+When this is impracticable, reenforcements must mingle with and
+thicken the firing line. In battle the latter method will be the rule
+rather than the exception, and to familiarize the men with such
+conditions the combat exercises of the battalion should include both
+methods of reenforcing. Occasionally, to provide the necessary
+intervals for reenforcing by either of these methods, the firing line
+should be thinned by causing men to drop out and simulate losses
+during the various advances. Under ordinary conditions the depletion
+of the firing line for this purpose will be from one-fifth to one-half
+of its strength.
+
+318. The major or senior officer in the firing line determines when
+bayonets shall be fixed and gives the proper command or signal. It is
+repeated by all parts of the firing line. Each man who was in the
+front rank prior to deployment, as soon as he recognizes the command
+or signal, suspends firing, quickly fixes his bayonet, and immediately
+resumes firing; after which the other men suspend firing, fix
+bayonets, and immediately resume firing. The support also fixes
+bayonets. The concerted fixing of the bayonet by the firing line at
+drill does not simulate battle conditions and should not be required.
+It is essential that there be no marked pause in the firing. Bayonets
+will be fixed generally before or during the last, or second last,
+advance preceding the charge.
+
+319. Subject to orders from higher authority, the major determines the
+point from which the charge is to be made. The firing line having
+arrived at that point and being in readiness, the major causes the
+_charge_ to be sounded. The signal is repeated by the musicians of all
+parts of the line. The company officers lead the charge. The
+skirmishers spring forward shouting, run with bayonets at charge, and
+close with the enemy.
+
+The further conduct of the charging troops will depend upon
+circumstances; they may halt and engage in bayonet combat or in
+pursuing fire; they may advance a short distance to obtain a field of
+fire or to drive the enemy from the vicinity; they may assemble or
+reorganize, etc. If the enemy vacates his position every effort should
+be made to open fire at once on the retreating mass, reorganization of
+the attacking troops being of secondary importance to the infliction
+of further losses upon the enemy and to the increase of his confusion.
+In combat exercises the major will assume a situation and terminate
+the assault accordingly.
+
+
+_Defense._
+
+320. In defense, as in attack, the battalion is the tactical unit best
+suited to independent assignment. Defensive positions are usually
+divided into sections and a battalion assigned to each.
+
+321. The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover trenches
+and obstacles as are to be constructed. He assigns companies to
+construct them and details the troops to occupy them.
+
+322. The major reenforces the firing line in accordance with the
+principles applicable to, and explained in connection with, the
+attack, maintaining no more rifles in the firing line than are
+necessary to prevent the enemy's advance.
+
+323. The supply of ammunition being usually ample, fire is opened as
+soon as it is possible to break up the enemy's formation, stop his
+advance, or inflict material loss, but this rule must be modified to
+suit the ammunition supply.
+
+324. The major causes the firing line and support to fix bayonets when
+an assault by the enemy is imminent. Captains direct this to be done
+if they are not in communication with the major and the measure is
+deemed advisable.
+
+Fire alone will not stop a determined, skillfully conducted attack.
+The defender must have equal tenacity; if he can stay in his trench or
+position and cross bayonets, he will at least have neutralized the
+hostile first line, and the combat will be decided by reserves.
+
+325. If ordered or compelled to withdraw under hostile infantry fire
+or in the presence of hostile infantry, the support will be posted so
+as to cover the retirement of the firing line.
+
+326. When the battalion is operating alone, the support must be strong
+and must be fed sparingly into the firing line, especially if a
+counterattack is planned. Opportunities for counterattack should be
+sought at all times.
+
+
+
+
+THE REGIMENT.
+
+
+[Illustration: Plate IV. THE REGIMENT.]
+
+327. Normally, the regiment consists of three battalions, but these
+regulations are applicable to a regiment of two or more battalions.
+Special units, such as band, machine-gun company, and mounted scouts,
+have special formations for their own use. Movements herein
+prescribed are for the battalions; special units conform thereto
+unless otherwise prescribed or directed.
+
+328. The colonel is responsible for the theoretical instruction and
+practical training of the regiment as a whole. Under his immediate
+supervision the training of the units of the regiment is conducted by
+their respective commanders.
+
+329. The colonel either gives his commands or orders orally, by bugle,
+or by signal, or communicates them by staff officers or orderlies.
+
+Each major gives the appropriate commands or orders, and, in
+close-order movements, causes his battalion to execute the necessary
+movements at his command of execution. Each major ordinarily moves his
+battalion from one formation to another, in column of squads, in the
+most convenient manner, and, in the presence of the enemy, in the most
+direct manner consistent with cover.
+
+Commanders of the special units observe the same principles as to
+commands and movements. They take places in the new formation as
+directed by the colonel; in the absence of such directions they
+conform as nearly as practicable to Plate IV, maintaining their
+relative positions with respect to the flank or end of the regiment on
+which they are originally posted.
+
+330. When the regiment is formed, and during ceremonies, the
+lieutenant colonel is posted 2 paces to the left of, and 1 pace less
+advanced than the colonel. In movements subsequent to the formation of
+the regiment and other than ceremonies, the lieutenant colonel is on
+the left of the colonel.
+
+331. In whatever formation the regiment may be, the battalions retain
+their permanent administrative designations of _first_, _second_,
+_third battalion_. For convenience, they may be designated, when in
+line, as _right_, _center_, or _left battalion_; when in column, as
+_leading_, _center_, or _rear battalion_. These designations apply to
+the actual positions of the battalions in line or column.
+
+332. Except at ceremonies, or when rendering honors, or when otherwise
+directed, after the regiment is formed, the battalions march and stand
+_at ease_ during subsequent movements.
+
+
+CLOSE ORDER.
+
+_To Form the Regiment._
+
+333. Unless otherwise directed, the battalions are posted from right
+to left, or from head to rear, according to the rank of the battalion
+commanders present, the senior on the right or at the head. A
+battalion whose major is in command of the regiment retains its place.
+
+334. For ordinary purposes, the regiment is formed in column of squads
+or in column of masses.
+
+The adjutant informs the majors what the formation is to be. The
+battalions and special units having been formed, he posts himself and
+draws saber. _Adjutant's call_ is sounded, or the adjutant signals
+_assemble_.
+
+If forming in column of squads, the adjutant posts himself so as to be
+facing the column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be
+occupied by the leading guide of the regiment; if forming in column of
+masses, he posts himself so as to be facing the right guides of the
+column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be occupied
+by the right guide of the leading company. Later, he moves so as best
+to observe the formation.
+
+The battalions are halted, at attention, in column of squads or close
+column, as the case may be, successively from the front in their
+proper order and places. The band takes its place when the leading
+battalion has halted. Other special units take their places in turn
+when the rear battalion has halted.
+
+The majors and the commanders of the machine-gun company and mounted
+scouts (or detachment) each, when his command is in place, salutes the
+adjutant and commands: _At ease_; the adjutant returns the salutes.
+When all have saluted and the band is in place, the adjutant rides to
+the colonel, reports: _Sir, the regiment is formed_, and takes his
+post. The colonel draws saber.
+
+The formation in column of squads may be modified to the extent
+demanded by circumstances. Prior to the formation the adjutant
+indicates the point where the head of the column is to rest and the
+direction in which it is to face: he then posts himself so as best to
+observe the formation. At _adjutant's call_ or _assemble_ the leading
+battalion marches to, and halts at, the indicated point. The other
+battalions take positions from which they may conveniently follow in
+their proper places.
+
+335. For ceremonies, or when directed, the regiment is formed in line
+or line of masses.
+
+The adjutant posts himself so as to be 6 paces to the right of the
+right or leading company of the right battalion when the regiment is
+formed and faces in the direction in which the line is to extend.
+_Adjutant's call_ is sounded; the band plays.
+
+The adjutant indicates to the adjutant of the right battalion the
+point of rest and the direction in which the line is to extend, and
+then takes post facing the regiment midway between the post of the
+colonel and the center of the regiment. Each of the other battalion
+adjutants precedes his battalion to the line and marks its point of
+rest.
+
+The battalions, arriving from the rear, each in line or close column,
+as the case may be, are halted on the line successively from right to
+left in their proper order and places. Upon halting, each major
+commands: 1. _Right_, 2. _DRESS_. The battalion adjutant assists in
+aligning the battalion and then takes his post.
+
+The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the
+right battalion has halted; it ceases playing when the left battalion
+has halted. The machine-gun company and the mounted scouts (or
+detachment) take their places in line after the center battalion has
+halted.
+
+The colonel and those who accompany him take post.
+
+When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and all
+others have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. _Present_,
+2. _ARMS_. He then turns about and reports to the colonel: _Sir, the
+regiment is formed_; the colonel directs the adjutant: _Take your
+post, Sir_, draws saber and brings the regiment to the order. The
+adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the colonel.
+
+
+_To Dismiss the Regiment._
+
+336. Being in any formation: _DISMISS YOUR BATTALIONS_. Each major
+marches his battalion off and dismisses it.
+
+
+_Movements by the Regiment._
+
+337. The regiment executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and
+_marchings_, _manual of arms_, resumes _attention_, _kneels_, _lies
+down_, _rises_, _stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the Schools
+of the Soldier and Squad, substituting in the commands, when
+necessary, _battalions_ for _squad_.
+
+The regiment executes _squads right (left)_, _squads right (left)
+about_, _route step_ and _at ease_, _obliques_ and resumes the direct
+march as explained in the School of the Company.
+
+The regiment in column of files, twos, squads, or platoons, changes
+direction, and in column of squads forms column of twos or files and
+re-forms column of twos or squads, as explained in the School of the
+Company. In column of companies, it changes direction as explained in
+the School of the Battalion.
+
+338. When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution, by
+battalions, companies, or platoons, of movements prescribed in the
+School of the Company or Battalion, the colonel may cause such
+movements to be executed by prefixing, where necessary, _battalions
+(companies, platoons)_, to the commands prescribed therein.
+
+339. The column of squads is the usual column of march; to shorten the
+column, if conditions permit, a double column of squads may be used,
+the companies of each battalion marching abreast in two columns.
+Preliminary to an engagement, the regiment or its units will be placed
+in the formation best suited to its subsequent tactical employment.
+
+340. To assume any formation, the colonel indicates to the majors the
+character of the formation desired, the order of the battalions, and
+the point of rest. Each battalion is conducted by its major, and is
+placed in its proper order in the formation, by the most convenient
+means and route.
+
+Having halted in a formation, no movements for the purpose of
+correcting minor discrepancies in alignments, intervals, or distances
+are made unless specially directed by the colonel or necessitated by
+conditions of cover.
+
+341. To correct intervals, distances, and alignments, the colonel
+directs one or more of the majors to rectify their battalions. Each
+major so directed causes his battalion to correct its alignment,
+intervals, and distances, and places it in its proper position in the
+formation.
+
+
+_COMBAT PRINCIPLES._
+
+342. The regiment is deployed by the colonel's order to the commanders
+of battalions and special units. The order should give them
+information of the situation and of the proposed plan of action. In
+attack, the order should assign to each battalion not in reserve its
+objective or line of advance. In defense, it should assign to each its
+sector. In either case it should designate the troops for, and the
+position of, the reserve and prescribe the employment of the machine
+guns and mounted scouts.
+
+Both in attack and defense the order may fix the front to be covered
+in the deployment.
+
+Encroachment upon the proper functions of subordinates and unnecessary
+details should be studiously avoided. When the regiment deploys, the
+colonel habitually places the band at the disposal of the surgeon for
+employment in caring for the wounded. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+343. The regiment, when operating alone and attacking, should
+undertake an enveloping attack if it does not result in overextension.
+
+Assuming a regiment of 1,500 rifles, an extension of more than 1,000
+yards between its extreme flanks when making an enveloping attack
+alone is seldom justifiable; when part of a battle line, a front of
+500 yards can rarely be exceeded.
+
+344. In defense the front occupied when acting alone or posted on or
+near the flank of a battle line should seldom exceed 600 yards; when
+posted as an interior regiment, the front may be increased to 800
+yards. The front may be somewhat longer than in the attack, since
+smaller battalion supports are justifiable. When the regiment is
+operating alone, however, the regimental reserve should be as strong
+in the defense as in the attack unless the flanks are secure.
+
+345. The colonel should always hold out a reserve--generally one
+battalion; but when the regiment is operating alone, it is generally
+advisable to hold out more at first.
+
+346. Whereas the support held out in each battalion of the firing line
+is intended to thicken the diminishing firing line at the proper times
+and sometimes to lengthen it, the reserve held out in a regiment
+operating alone is used for this purpose only as a last resort. Its
+primary functions are: In attack, to protect the flanks, to improve
+fully the advantage following a victory, or to cover defeat; in
+defense, to prolong the firing line, to effect a counterattack, or to
+cover withdrawal. It is the colonel's chief means of influencing an
+action once begun. It should be conserved to await the proper moment
+for its employment; the combat will seldom come to a successful issue
+without its employment in some form.
+
+The reserve of a regiment operating as part of a large force becomes a
+local reserve. It replaces depleted supports and in attack strengthens
+and protects the firing line in the charge.
+
+
+
+
+THE BRIGADE.
+
+
+347. The brigade does not engage in prescribed drills. It engages in
+route marches and battle or other tactical exercises. These are
+conducted pursuant to commands or orders formulated to suit the
+conditions of the proposed movement or exercise, and, in general, in
+accordance with the principles applicable to the regiment.
+
+348. A brigade of about 4,000 rifles, as part of a general battle
+line, would be deployed on a front of not more than 1,200 yards in
+attack or 1,600 yards in defense.
+
+When acting alone the distance between extreme flanks in an enveloping
+attack should not exceed 2,000 yards at the time the attacking
+infantry opens fire.
+
+When acting alone, the front in defense should not exceed 1,600 yards.
+
+These limits apply to the original deployment of the brigade for
+combat and presuppose an enemy of equal or nearly equal training and
+morale. The limits necessitated by the subsequent progress of the
+combat can not be foreseen.
+
+349. Units larger than the brigade are generally composed of all arms.
+Combined tactics are considered in the Field Service Regulations.
+
+
+
+
+PART II.--COMBAT.
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+350. Part II of these regulations treats only of the basic principles
+of combat tactics as applied to infantry and to the special units,
+such as machine guns and mounted scouts, which form a part of infantry
+regiments and battalions.
+
+The combat tactics of the arms combined are considered in Field
+Service Regulations.
+
+351. Modern combat demands the highest order of training, discipline,
+leadership, and morale on the part of the infantry. Complicated
+maneuvers are impracticable; efficient leadership and a determination
+to win by simple and direct methods must be depended upon for success.
+
+352. The duties of infantry are many and difficult. All infantry must
+be fit to cope with all conditions that may arise. Modern war requires
+but one kind of infantry--good infantry.
+
+353. The infantry must take the offensive to gain decisive results.
+Both sides are therefore likely to attempt it, though not necessarily
+at the same time or in the same part of a long battle line.
+
+In the local combats which make up the general battle the better
+endurance, use of ground, fire efficiency, discipline, and training
+will win. It is the duty of the infantry to win the local successes
+which enable the commanding general to win the battle.
+
+354. The infantry must have the tenacity to hold every advantage
+gained, the individual and collective discipline and skill needed to
+master the enemy's fire, the determination to close with the enemy in
+attack, and to meet him with the bayonet in defense. Infantry must be
+trained to bear the heaviest burdens and losses, both of combat and
+march.
+
+Good infantry can defeat an enemy greatly superior in numbers, but
+lacking in training, discipline, leadership, and morale.
+
+355. It is impossible to establish fixed forms or to give general
+instructions that will cover all cases. Officers and noncommissioned
+officers must be so trained that they can apply suitable means and
+methods to each case as it arises. Study and practice are necessary to
+acquire proper facility in this respect. Theoretical instruction can
+not replace practical instruction; the former supplies correct ideas
+and gives to practical work an interest, purpose, and definiteness not
+otherwise obtainable.
+
+356. After the mechanism of extended order drill has been learned with
+precision in the company, every exercise should be, as far as
+practicable, in the nature of a maneuver (combat exercise) against an
+_imaginary_, _outlined_, or _represented_ enemy.
+
+Company extended order drill may be conducted without reference to a
+tactical situation, but a combat exercise, whatever may be the size of
+the unit employed, should be conducted under an assumed tactical
+situation.
+
+357. An effective method of conducting a combat exercise is to outline
+the enemy with a few men equipped with flags. The umpire or inspector
+states the situation and the commander leads his troops with due
+regard to the assumptions made.
+
+Changes in the situation, the results of reconnaissance, the character
+of artillery fire, etc., are made known to the commander when
+necessary by the umpire or inspector, who, in order to observe and
+influence the conduct of the exercise, remains in rear of the firing
+line. From this position he indicates, with the aid of prearranged
+signals, the character of the fire and movements of the hostile
+infantry. These signals are intended for the men outlining the enemy.
+These men repeat the signals; all officers and men engaged in the
+exercise and in sight of the outlined enemy are thus informed of the
+enemy's action and the exercise is conducted accordingly.
+
+Assistant umpires, about one for each company in the firing line, may
+assist in indicating hostile fire and movements and in observing the
+conduct of the exercise.
+
+An outlined enemy may be made to attack or defend.
+
+Situations should be simple and natural. During or after the exercise
+the umpire or inspector should call attention to any improper
+movements or incorrect methods of execution. He will prohibit all
+movements of troops or individuals that would be impossible if the
+enemy were real. The slow progress of events to be expected on the
+battle field can hardly be simulated, but the umpire or inspector will
+prevent undue haste and will attempt to enforce a reasonably slow rate
+of progress.
+
+The same exercise should not be repeated over the same ground and
+under the same situation. Such repetitions lead to the adoption of a
+fixed mode of attack or defense and develop mere drill masters. Fixed
+or prearranged systems are prohibited.
+
+
+
+
+LEADERSHIP.
+
+
+_General Considerations._
+
+358. The art of leadership consists of applying sound tactical
+principles to concrete cases on the battle field.
+
+Self-reliance, initiative, aggressiveness, and a conception of
+teamwork are the fundamental characteristics of successful leadership.
+
+359. A correct grasp of the situation and a definite plan of action
+form the soundest basis for a successful combat.
+
+A good plan once adopted and put into execution should not be
+abandoned unless it becomes clear that it can not succeed.
+Afterthoughts are dangerous, except as they aid in the execution of
+details in the original plan.
+
+360. Combats that do not promise success or some real advantage to the
+general issue should be avoided; they cause unnecessary losses, impair
+the morale of one's own troops, and raise that of the enemy.
+
+361. Complicated maneuvers are not likely to succeed in war. All plans
+and the methods adopted for carrying them into effect must be simple
+and direct.
+
+362. Order and cohesion must be maintained within the units if success
+is to be expected.
+
+363. Officers must show themselves to be true leaders. They must act
+in accordance with the spirit of their orders and must require of
+their troops the strictest discipline on the field of battle.
+
+364. The best results are obtained when leaders know the capacity and
+traits of those whom they command; hence in making detachments units
+should not be broken up, and a deployment that would cause an
+intermingling of the larger units in the firing line should be
+avoided.
+
+365. Leading is difficult when troops are deployed. A high degree of
+training and discipline and the use of close order formations to the
+fullest extent possible are therefore required.
+
+366. In order to lighten the severe physical strain inseparable from
+infantry service in campaign, constant efforts must be made to spare
+the troops unnecessary hardship and fatigue; but when necessity
+arises, the limit of endurance must be exacted.
+
+367. When officers or men belonging to fighting troops leave their
+proper places to carry back, or to care for, wounded during the
+progress of the action, they are guilty of skulking. This offense must
+be repressed with the utmost vigor.
+
+368. The complete equipment of the soldier is carried into action
+unless the weather or the physical condition of the men renders such
+measure a severe hardship. In any event, only the pack[2] will be laid
+aside. The determination of this question rests with the regimental
+commander. The complete equipment affords to men lying prone
+considerable protection against shrapnel.
+
+[Footnote 2: The "pack" includes blanket, poncho, and shelter tent.]
+
+369. The post of the commander must be such as will enable him to
+observe the progress of events and to communicate his orders.
+Subordinate commanders, in addition, must be in position to transmit
+the orders of superiors.
+
+Before entering an action the commander should be as far to the front
+as possible in order that he personally may see the situation, order
+the deployment, and begin the action strictly in accordance with his
+own wishes.
+
+During the action, he must, as a rule, leave to the local leaders the
+detailed conduct of the firing line, posting himself either with his
+own reserve or in such a position that he is in constant, direct, and
+easy communication with it.
+
+A commander takes full and direct charge of his firing line only when
+the line has absorbed his whole command.
+
+When their troops are victorious, all commanders should press forward
+in order to clinch the advantage gained and to use their reserves to
+the best advantage.
+
+370. The latitude allowed to officers is in direct proportion to the
+size of their commands. Each should see to the general execution of
+his task, leaving to the proper subordinates the supervision of
+details, and interfering only when mistakes are made that threaten to
+seriously prejudice the general plan.
+
+
+_Teamwork._
+
+371. The comparatively wide fronts of deployed units increase the
+difficulties of control. Subordinates must therefore be given great
+latitude in the execution of their tasks. The success of the whole
+depends largely upon how well each subordinate coordinates his work
+with the general plan.
+
+A great responsibility is necessarily thrown upon subordinates, but
+responsibility stimulates the right kind of an officer.
+
+372. In a given situation it is far better _to do any intelligent
+thing_ consistent with the aggressive execution of the general plan,
+than to search hesitatingly for the ideal. This is the true rule of
+conduct for subordinates who are required to act upon their own
+initiative.
+
+A subordinate who is reasonably sure that his intended action is such
+as would be ordered by the commander, were the latter present and in
+possession of the facts, has enough encouragement to go ahead
+confidently. He must possess the loyalty to carry out the plans of his
+superior and the keenness to recognize and to seize opportunities to
+further the general plan.
+
+373. Independence must not become license. Regardless of the number of
+subordinates who are apparently supreme in their own restricted
+spheres, there is but one battle and but one supreme will to which all
+must conform.
+
+Every subordinate must therefore work for the general result. He does
+all in his power to insure cooperation between the subdivisions under
+his command. He transmits important information to adjoining units or
+to superiors in rear and, with the assistance of information received,
+keeps himself and his subordinates duly posted as to the situation.
+
+374. When circumstances render it impracticable to consult the
+authority issuing an order, officers should not hesitate to vary from
+such order when it is clearly based upon an incorrect view of the
+situation, is impossible of execution, or has been rendered
+impracticable on account of changes which have occurred since its
+promulgation. In the application of this rule the responsibility for
+mistakes rests upon the subordinate, but unwillingness to assume
+responsibility on proper occasions is indicative of weakness.
+
+Superiors should be careful not to censure an apparent disobedience
+where the act was done in the proper spirit and to advance the general
+plan.
+
+375. When the men of two or more units intermingle in the firing line,
+all officers and men submit at once to the senior. Officers and
+platoon guides seek to fill vacancies caused by casualties. Each
+seizes any opportunity to exercise the functions consistent with his
+grade, and all assist in the maintenance of order and control.
+
+Every lull in the action should be utilized for as complete
+restoration of order in the firing line as the ground or other
+conditions permit.
+
+376. Any officer or noncommissioned officer who becomes separated from
+his proper unit and can not rejoin must at once place himself and his
+command at the disposal of the nearest higher commander.
+
+Anyone having completed an assigned task must seek to rejoin his
+proper command. Failing in this, he should join the nearest troops
+engaged with the enemy.
+
+377. Soldiers are taught the necessity of remaining with their
+companies, but those who become detached must join the nearest company
+and serve with it until the battle is over or reorganization is
+ordered.
+
+
+_Orders._
+
+378. Commands are deployed and enter the combat by the orders of the
+commander to the subordinate commanders.
+
+The initial combat orders of the division are almost invariably
+written; those of the brigade are generally so. The written order is
+preferable and is used whenever time permits.
+
+If time permits, subsequent orders are likewise written, either as
+field orders or messages.
+
+379. The initial combat orders of regiments and smaller units are
+given verbally. For this purpose the subordinates for whom the orders
+are intended are assembled, if practicable, at a place from which the
+situation and plan can be explained.
+
+Subsequent orders are verbal or in the form of verbal or written
+messages. Verbal messages should not be used unless they are short and
+unmistakable.
+
+380. The initial combat order of any commander or subordinate is based
+upon his definite plan for executing the task confronting him.
+
+Whenever possible the formation of the plan is preceded by a personal
+reconnaissance of the terrain and a careful consideration of all
+information of the enemy.
+
+381. The combat order gives such information of the enemy and of
+neighboring or supporting friendly troops as will enable subordinates
+to understand the situation.
+
+The general plan of action is stated in brief terms, but enough of the
+commander's intentions is divulged to guide the subsequent actions of
+the subordinates.
+
+Clear and concise instructions are given as to the action to be taken
+in the combat by each part of the command. In this way the commander
+assigns tasks, fronts, objectives, sectors or areas, etc., in
+accordance with his plan. If the terms employed convey definite ideas
+and leave no loopholes, the conduct of subordinates will generally be
+correspondingly satisfactory.
+
+Such miscellaneous matter relating to special troops, trains,
+ammunition, and future movements of the commander is added as concerns
+the combat itself.
+
+Combat orders should prescribe communication, reconnaissance, flank
+protection, etc., when some special disposition is desired or when an
+omission on the part of a subordinate may reasonably be feared.
+
+382. When issuing orders, a commander should indicate clearly _what_
+is to be done by each subordinate, but not _how_ it is to be done. He
+should not encroach upon the functions of a subordinate by prescribing
+details of execution unless he has good reason to doubt the ability or
+judgment of the subordinate, and can not substitute another.
+
+Although general in its terms, an order must be definite and must be
+the expression of a fixed decision. Ambiguity or vagueness indicates
+either vacillation or the inability to formulate orders.
+
+383. Usually the orders of a commander are intended for, and are given
+to, the commanders of the next lower units, but in an emergency a
+commander should not hesitate to give orders directly to any
+subordinate. In such case he should promptly inform the intermediate
+commander concerned.
+
+
+_Communication._
+
+384. Communication is maintained by means of staff officers,
+messengers, relay systems, connecting files, visual signals,
+telegraph, or telephone.
+
+385. The signal corps troops of the division establish lines of
+information from division to brigade headquarters. The further
+extension of lines of information in combat by signal troops is
+exceptional.
+
+386. Each regiment, employing its own personnel, is responsible for
+the maintenance of communication from the colonel back to the brigade
+and forward to the battalions. For this purpose the regiment uses the
+various means which may be furnished it. The staff and orderlies,
+regimental and battalion, are practiced in the use of these means and
+in messenger service. Orderlies carry signal flags.
+
+387. Connection between the firing line and the major or colonel is
+practically limited to the prescribed flag, arm, and bugle signals.
+Other means can only be supplemental. Company musicians carry company
+flags and are practiced in signaling.
+
+388. The artillery generally communicates with the firing line by
+means of its own staff officers or through an agent who accompanies
+some unit in or near the front. The infantry keeps him informed as to
+the situation and affords him any reasonable assistance. When the
+infantry is dependent upon the artillery for fire support, perfect
+coordination through this representative is of great importance.
+
+
+
+
+COMBAT RECONNAISSANCE.
+
+
+389. Combat reconnaissance is of vital importance and must not be
+neglected. By proper preliminary reconnaissance, deployments on wrong
+lines, or in a wrong direction, and surprises may generally be
+prevented.
+
+390. Troops deployed and under fire can not change front and thus they
+suffer greatly when enfiladed. Troops in close order formation may
+suffer heavy losses in a short time if subjected to hostile fire. In
+both formations troops must be protected by proper reconnaissance and
+warning.
+
+391. The difficulty of reconnaissance increases in proportion to the
+measures adopted by the enemy to screen himself.
+
+The strength of the reconnoitering party is determined by the
+character of the information desired and the nature of the hostile
+screen. In exceptional cases as much as a battalion may be necessary
+in order to break through the hostile screen and enable the commander
+or officer in charge to reconnoiter in person.
+
+A large reconnoitering party is conducted so as to open the way for
+small patrols, to serve as a supporting force or rallying point for
+them, and to receive and transmit information. Such parties maintain
+signal communication with the main body if practicable.
+
+392. Each separate column moving forward to deploy must reconnoiter to
+its front and flank and keep in touch with adjoining columns. The
+extent of the reconnaissance to the flank depends upon the isolation
+of the columns.
+
+393. Before an attack a reconnaissance must be made to determine the
+enemy's position, the location of his flanks, the character of the
+terrain, the nature of the hostile field works, etc., in order to
+prevent premature deployment and the resulting fatigue and loss of
+time.
+
+It will frequently be necessary to send forward a thin skirmish line
+in order to induce the enemy to open fire and reveal his position.
+
+394. It will frequently be impossible to obtain satisfactory
+information until after the action has begun. The delay that may be
+warranted for the purpose of reconnaissance depends upon the nature of
+the attack and the necessity for promptness. For example, in a meeting
+engagement, and sometimes in a holding attack, the reconnaissance may
+have to be hasty and superficial, whereas in an attack against an
+enemy carefully prepared for defense there will generally be both time
+and necessity for thorough reconnaissance.
+
+395. In defense, reconnaissance must be kept up to determine the
+enemy's line of advance, to ascertain his dispositions, to prevent his
+reconnaissance, etc.
+
+Patrols or parties posted to prevent hostile reconnaissance should
+relieve the main body of the necessity of betraying its position by
+firing on small bodies of the enemy.
+
+396. Reconnaissance continues throughout the action.
+
+A firing or skirmish line can take care of its front, but its flanks
+are especially vulnerable to modern firearms. The moral effect of
+flanking fire is as great as the physical effect. Hence, combat
+patrols to give warning or covering detachments to give security are
+indispensable on exposed flanks. This is equally true in attack or
+defense.
+
+397. The fact that cavalry patrols are known to be posted in a certain
+direction does not relieve infantry commanders of the responsibility
+for reconnaissance and security.
+
+To be surprised by an enemy at short range is an unpardonable offense.
+
+398. The commander of a battalion on a flank of a general line
+invariably provides for the necessary reconnaissance and security on
+that flank unless higher authority has specifically ordered it. In any
+event, he sends out combat patrols as needed.
+
+Where his battalion is on a flank of one section of the line and a
+considerable interval lies between his battalion and the next section,
+he makes similar provision.
+
+399. Battalion commanders in the first line establish patrols to
+observe and report the progress or conduct of adjoining troops when
+these can not be seen.
+
+
+
+
+FIRE SUPERIORITY.
+
+
+_PURPOSE AND NATURE._
+
+400. In a decisive battle success depends on gaining and maintaining
+fire superiority. Every effort must be made to gain it early and then
+to keep it.
+
+Attacking troops must first gain fire superiority in order to reach
+the hostile position. Over open ground attack is possible only when
+the attacking force has a decided fire superiority. With such
+superiority the attack is not only possible, but success is probable
+and without ruinous losses.
+
+Defending troops can prevent a charge only when they can master the
+enemy's fire and inflict heavy losses upon him.
+
+401. To obtain fire superiority it is necessary to produce a heavy
+volume of accurate fire. Every increase in the effectiveness of the
+fire means a corresponding decrease in the effectiveness of the
+enemy's fire.
+
+The volume and accuracy of fire will depend upon several
+considerations:
+
+(_a_) _The number of rifles employed._ On a given front the greatest
+volume of fire is produced by a firing line having only sufficient
+intervals between men to permit the free use of their rifles. The
+maximum density of a firing line is therefore about one man per yard
+of front.
+
+(_b_) The _rate_ of fire affects its volume; an excessive rate reduces
+its accuracy.
+
+(_c_) _The character of the target_ influences both volume and
+accuracy. Larger dimensions, greater visibility, and shorter range
+increase the rate of fire; greater density increases the effect.
+
+(_d_) _Training and discipline_ have an important bearing on the rate
+or volume of fire, but their greatest influence is upon accuracy.
+
+The firing efficiency, of troops is reduced by fatigue and adverse
+psychological influences.
+
+(_e_) _Fire direction and control_ improve collective accuracy. The
+importance of fire direction increases rapidly with the range. Control
+exerts a powerful influence at all ranges.
+
+
+_FIRE DIRECTION AND CONTROL._
+
+_Opening Fire._
+
+402. Beyond effective ranges important results can be expected only
+when the target is large and distinct and much ammunition is used.
+
+Long-range fire is permissible in pursuit on account of the moral
+effect of any fire under the circumstances. At other times such fire
+is of doubtful value.
+
+403. In attack, the desire to open fire when losses are first felt
+must be repressed. Considerations of time, target, ammunition, and
+morale make it imperative that the attack withhold its fire and press
+forward to a first firing position close to the enemy. The attacker's
+target will be smaller and fainter than the one he presents to the
+enemy.
+
+404. In defense, more ammunition is available, ranges are more easily
+determined, and the enemy usually presents a larger target. The
+defender may therefore open fire and expect results at longer ranges
+than the attacker, and particularly if the defenders intend a delaying
+action only.
+
+If the enemy has a powerful artillery, it will often be best for the
+defending infantry to withhold its fire until the enemy offers a
+specially favorable target. Vigorous and well-directed bursts of fire
+are then employed. The troops should therefore be given as much
+artificial protection as time and means permit, and at an agreed
+signal expose themselves as much as necessary and open fire.
+
+405. In unexpected, close encounters a great advantage accrues to the
+side which first opens rapid and accurate fire with battle sight.
+
+
+_Use of Ground._
+
+406. The position of the firers must afford a suitable field of fire.
+
+The ground should permit constant observation of the enemy, and yet
+enable the men to secure some cover when not actually firing.
+
+Troops whose target is for the moment hidden by unfavorable ground,
+either move forward to better ground or seek to execute cross fire on
+another target.
+
+407. The likelihood of a target being hit depends to a great extent
+upon its visibility. By skillful use of ground, a firing line may
+reduce its visibility without loss of fire power. Sky lines are
+particularly to be avoided.
+
+
+_Choice of Target._
+
+408. The target chosen should be the hostile troops most dangerous to
+the firers. These will usually be the nearest hostile infantry. When
+no target is specially dangerous, that one should be chosen which
+promises the most hits.
+
+409. Frequent changes of target impair the fire effect. Random changes
+to small, unimportant targets impair fire discipline and accomplish
+nothing. Attention should be confined to the main target until
+substantial reason for change is apparent.
+
+410. An opportunity to deliver flanking fire, especially against
+artillery protected in front by shields, is an example warranting
+change of target and should never be overlooked. Such fire demoralizes
+the troops subjected to it, even if the losses inflicted are small.
+In this manner a relatively small number of rifles can produce
+important results.
+
+
+_The Range._
+
+411. Beyond close range, the correct setting of the rear sight is of
+primary importance, provided the troops are trained and well in hand.
+The necessity for correct sight setting increases rapidly with the
+range. Its importance decreases as the quality of the troops decrease,
+for the error in sight setting, except possibly at very long ranges,
+becomes unimportant when compared with the error in holding and
+aiming.
+
+412. In attack, distances must usually be estimated and corrections
+made as errors are observed. Mechanical range finders and ranging
+volleys are practicable at times.
+
+In defense, it is generally practicable to measure more accurately the
+distances to visible objects and to keep a record of them for future
+use.
+
+
+_Distribution of Fire and Target._
+
+413. The purpose of fire superiority is to get hits whenever possible,
+but at all events to keep down the enemy's fire and render it
+harmless. To accomplish this the target must be covered with fire
+throughout its whole extent. Troops who are not fired upon will fire
+with nearly peace-time accuracy.
+
+The target is roughly divided and a part is assigned to each unit. No
+part of the target is neglected. In attack, by a system of overlapping
+in assigning targets to platoons, the entire hostile line can be kept
+under fire even during a rush.
+
+
+_Observation._
+
+414. The correctness of the sight setting and the distribution of fire
+over the target can be verified only by careful observation of the
+target, the adjacent ground, and the effect upon the enemy.
+
+415. Observation only can determine whether the fire fight is being
+properly conducted. If the enemy's fire is losing in accuracy and
+effect, the observer realizes that his side is gaining superiority. If
+the enemy's fire remains or becomes effective and persistent, he
+realizes that corrective measures are necessary to increase either
+volume or accuracy, or both.
+
+
+_Discipline._
+
+416. Discipline makes good direction and control possible and is the
+distinguishing mark of trained troops.
+
+417. The discipline necessary in the firing line will be absent unless
+officers and noncommissioned officers can make their will known to the
+men. In the company, therefore, communication must be by simple
+signals which, in the roar of musketry, will attract the attention and
+convey the correct meaning.
+
+
+_Expenditure of Ammunition._
+
+418. In attack the supply is more limited than in defense. Better
+judgment must be exercised in expenditure. Ordinarily, troops in the
+firing line of an attack can not expect to have that day more
+ammunition than they carry into the combat, except such additions as
+come from the distribution of ammunition of dead and wounded and the
+surplus brought by reinforcements.
+
+419. When a certain fire effect is required, the necessary ammunition
+must be expended without hesitation. Several hours of firing may be
+necessary to gain fire superiority. True economy can be practiced only
+by closing on the enemy before first opening fire and thereafter
+suspending fire when there is nothing to shoot at.
+
+
+_Supporting Artillery._
+
+420. Artillery fire is the principal aid to the infantry in gaining
+and keeping fire superiority, not only by its hits, but by the moral
+effect it produces on the enemy.
+
+421. In attack, artillery assists the forward movement of the
+infantry. It keeps down the fire of the hostile artillery and seeks to
+neutralize the hostile infantry by inflicting losses upon it,
+destroying its morale, driving it to cover, and preventing it from
+using its weapons effectively.
+
+In defense, it ignores the hostile artillery when the enemy's attack
+reaches a decisive stage and assists in checking the attack, joining
+its fire power to that of the defending infantry.
+
+422. Troops should be accustomed to being fired over by friendly
+artillery and impressed with the fact that the artillery should
+continue firing upon the enemy until the last possible moment. The
+few casualties resulting from shrapnel bursting short are trifling
+compared with those that would result from the increased effectiveness
+of the enemy's infantry fire were the friendly artillery to cease
+firing.
+
+Casualties inflicted by supporting artillery are not probable until
+the opposing infantry lines are less than 200 yards apart.
+
+423. When the distance between the hostile infantry lines becomes so
+short as to render further use of friendly artillery inadvisable, the
+commander of the infantry firing line, using a preconcerted signal,[3]
+informs the artillery commander. The latter usually increases the
+range in order to impede the strengthening of the enemy's foremost
+line.
+
+[Footnote 3: With a 4-foot white and red regimental signal flag.]
+
+
+_Fire of Position._
+
+424. Infantry is said to execute fire of position when it is posted so
+as to assist an attack by firing over the heads, or off the flank, of
+the attacking troops and is not itself to engage in the advance; or
+when, in defense, it is similarly posted to augment the fire of the
+main firing line.
+
+Machine guns serve a like purpose.
+
+In a decisive action, fire of position should be employed whenever the
+terrain permits and reserve infantry is available.
+
+
+
+
+DEPLOYMENT.
+
+
+425. Troops are massed preparatory to deployment when the nature of
+their deployment can not be foreseen or it is desirable to shorten the
+column or to clear the road. Otherwise, in the deployment of large
+commands, whether in march column, in bivouac, or massed, and whether
+forming for attack or for defense, they are ordinarily first formed
+into a line of columns to facilitate the extension of the front prior
+to deploying.
+
+The rough line or lines of columns thus formed enable troops to take
+advantage of the terrain in advancing and shorten the time occupied in
+forming the firing line.
+
+426. In deploying the division each brigade is assigned a definite
+task or objective. On receipt of his orders, the brigade commander
+conducts his brigade in column or in line of regiments until it is
+advisable that it be broken into smaller columns. He then issues his
+order, assigning to each regiment its task, if practicable. In a
+similar manner the regimental commanders lead their regiments forward
+in column, or in line of columns, until the time arrives for issuing
+the regimental order. It is seldom advisable to break up the battalion
+before issuing orders for its deployment.
+
+427. Each subordinate commander, after receiving his order for the
+action, should precede his command as far as possible, in order to
+reconnoiter the ground personally, and should prepare to issue his
+orders promptly.
+
+428. Each commander of a column directs the necessary reconnaissance
+to front and flank; by this means and by a judicious choice of ground
+he guards against surprise.
+
+429. The premature formation of the firing line causes unnecessary
+fatigue and loss of time, and may result in a faulty direction being
+taken. Troops once deployed make even minor changes of direction with
+difficulty, and this difficulty increases with the length of the
+firing line.
+
+430. In the larger units, when the original deployment is found to be
+in the wrong direction, it will usually be necessary to deploy the
+reserve on the correct front and withdraw and assemble the first line.
+
+431. To gain decisive results, it will generally be necessary to use
+all the troops at some stage of the combat. But in the beginning,
+while the situation is uncertain, care should be taken not to engage
+too large a proportion of the command. On the other hand, there is no
+greater error than to employ too few and to sacrifice them by
+driblets.
+
+432. When it is intended to fight to a decision, fire superiority is
+essential. To gain this, two things are necessary: A heavy fire and a
+fire well directed and controlled. Both of these are best obtained
+when the firing line is as dense as practicable, while leaving the men
+room for the free use of their rifles.
+
+If the men are too widely separated, direction and control are very
+difficult, often impossible, and the intensity of fire is slight in
+proportion to the front occupied.
+
+433. In an attack or stubborn defense the firing line should have a
+density of one man per yard of front occupied.
+
+Where the tactical situation demands the holding of a line too long to
+be occupied throughout at this density, it is generally better to
+deploy companies or platoons at one man per yard, leaving gaps in the
+line between them, than to distribute the men uniformly at increased
+intervals.
+
+434. A relatively thin firing line may be employed when merely
+covering the movements of other forces; when on the defensive against
+poor troops; when the final action to be taken has not yet been
+determined; and, in general, when fire superiority is not necessary.
+
+435. The length of the firing line that the whole force may employ
+depends upon the density of the line and the _strength in rear_
+required by the situation.
+
+Supports and reserves constitute the strength in rear.
+
+In a decisive attack they should be at least strong enough to replace
+a heavy loss in the original firing line and to increase the charging
+line to a density of at least one and one-half men per yard and still
+have troops in rear for protection and for the other purposes
+mentioned above.
+
+436. In the original deployment the strength of the reserve held out
+by each commander comprises from one-sixth to two-thirds of his unit,
+depending upon the nature of the service expected of the reserve.
+
+A small force in a covering or delaying action requires very little
+strength in rear, while a large force fighting a decisive battle
+requires much. Therefore, depending upon circumstances, the original
+deployment, including the strength in rear, may vary from 1 to 10 men
+per yard. Against an enemy poorly disciplined and trained, or lacking
+in morale, a thinner deployment is permissible.
+
+437. The density of the whole deployment increases with the size of
+the command, because the larger the command the greater the necessity
+for reserves. Thus, a battalion acting alone may attack with two men
+per yard of front, but a regiment, with three battalions, may only
+double the front of the one battalion.
+
+438. By the assignment of divisions or larger units to parts of a line
+of battle several miles long, a series of semi-independent battle, or
+local combat, districts are created.
+
+The general deployment for a long line of battle comprising several
+battle districts is not directly considered in these regulations. The
+deployments treated of herein are those of the infantry within such
+districts.
+
+The density of deployment in these districts may vary greatly,
+depending upon the activity expected in each. Within these battle
+districts, as well as in smaller forces acting alone, parts of the
+line temporarily of less importance may be held weakly, in order to
+economize troops and to have more at the decisive point.
+
+439. The front that a unit may occupy when deployed depends also upon
+whether its flanks are secured. If both flanks are secured by other
+troops, the unit may increase its front materially by reducing its
+reserve or supports. If only one flank is so secured, the front may
+still be somewhat increased, but the exposed flank must be guarded by
+posting the supports or reserve toward that flank.
+
+Natural obstacles that secure the flanks have practically the same
+effect upon deployment.
+
+440. Except when assigned as supports or reserve, regiments in the
+brigade, battalions in the regiment, and companies in the battalion
+are, when practicable, deployed side by side.
+
+441. In the deployment, battalions establish the firing line, each
+furnishing its own support.
+
+In each unit larger than the battalion a reserve is held out, its
+strength depending upon circumstances. In general, the reserve is
+employed by the commander to meet or improve conditions brought about
+by the action of the firing line. It must not be too weak or too split
+up. It must be posted where the commander believes it will be needed
+for decisive action, or where he desires to bring about such action.
+When necessary, parts of it reenforce or prolong the firing line.
+
+
+
+
+ATTACK.
+
+
+442. An attack is bound to succeed if fire superiority is gained and
+properly used.
+
+To gain this superiority generally requires that the attack employ
+more rifles than the defense; this in turn means a longer line, as
+both sides will probably hold a strong firing line.
+
+443. With large forces, a direct frontal attack gives the attacker
+little opportunity to bring more rifles to bear. However, if the enemy
+is unduly extended, a frontal attack may give very decisive results.
+
+444. Owing to the difficulty of control and the danger of the parts
+being defeated in detail, wide turning movements are seldom allowable
+except in large forces.
+
+445. If the attack can be so directed that, while the front is
+covered, another fraction of the command strikes a flank more or less
+obliquely (an enveloping attack) the advantages gained are a longer
+line and more rifles in action; also a converging fire opposed to the
+enemy's diverging fire.
+
+446. An envelopment of both flanks should never be attempted without a
+very decided superiority in numbers.
+
+447. The enveloping attack will nearly always result locally in a
+frontal attack, for it will be met by the enemy's reserve. The
+advantage of envelopment lies in the longer concentric line, with its
+preponderance of rifles and its converging fire.
+
+448. Cooperation between the frontal and enveloping attacks is
+essential to success. Both should be pushed vigorously and
+simultaneously, and ordinarily both should move simultaneously to the
+charge; but at the final stage of the attack conditions may sometimes
+warrant one in charging while the other supports it with fire.
+
+The envelopment of a flank is brought about with difficulty when made
+by troops already deployed in another direction or by their reserves.
+The two attacks should be deployed at a suitable distance apart, with
+the lines of attack converging in rear of the hostile position. The
+troops that are to make the enveloping attack should deploy in the
+proper direction at the start and should be given orders which enable
+them to gain their point of deployment in the most direct and
+practical manner.
+
+The enveloping attack is generally made the stronger, especially in
+small forces.
+
+
+_DEPLOYMENT FOR ATTACK._
+
+449. Where open terrain exposes troops to hostile artillery fire it
+may be necessary to make the deployment 2 miles or more from the
+hostile position.
+
+The foreground should be temporarily occupied by covering troops. If
+the enemy occupies the foreground with detachments, the covering
+troops must drive them back.
+
+450. To enable large forces to gain ground toward the enemy, it may
+sometimes be cheaper and quicker in the end to move well forward and
+to deploy at night. In such case the area in which the deployment is
+to be made should, if practicable, be occupied by covering troops
+before dark.
+
+The deployment will be made with great difficulty unless the ground
+has been studied by daylight. The deployment gains little unless it
+establishes the firing line well within effective range of the enemy's
+main position. (See Night Operations.)
+
+451. Each unit assigned a task deploys when on its direction line, or
+opposite its objective, and when it has no longer sufficient cover for
+advancing in close order. In the firing line, intervals of 25 to 50
+yards should be maintained as long as possible between battalions. In
+the larger units it may be necessary to indicate on the map the
+direction or objective, but to battalion commanders it should be
+pointed out on the ground.
+
+452. The reserve is kept near enough to the firing line to be on hand
+at the decisive stage. It is posted with reference to the attack, or
+to that part of the attacking line, from which the greater results are
+expected; it is also charged with flank protection, but should be kept
+intact.
+
+Supports are considered in paragraphs 225 to 228, inclusive, and 298
+to 302, inclusive.
+
+
+_ADVANCING THE ATTACK._
+
+453. The firing line must ordinarily advance a long distance before it
+is justified in opening fire. It can not combat the enemy's artillery,
+and it is at a disadvantage if it combats the defender's long-range
+rifle fire. Hence it ignores both and, by taking full advantage of
+cover and of the discipline of the troops, advances to a first firing
+position at the shortest range possible.
+
+Formations for crossing this zone with the minimum loss are considered
+in paragraphs 212 to 220, inclusive. These and other methods of
+crossing such zones should be studied and practiced.
+
+454. The best protection against loss while advancing is to escape the
+enemy's view.
+
+455. Each battalion finds its own firing position, conforming to the
+general advance as long as practicable and taking advantage of the
+more advanced position of an adjacent battalion in order to gain
+ground.
+
+The position from which the attack opens fire is further considered in
+paragraphs 306 to 308, inclusive.
+
+456. It will frequently become necessary for infantry moving to the
+attack to pass through deployed artillery. This should be done so as
+to interfere as little as possible with the latter's fire, and never
+so as to cause that fire to cease entirely. As far as practicable,
+advantage should be taken of intervals in the line, if any. An
+understanding between artillery and infantry commanders should be had,
+so as to effect the movement to the best advantage.
+
+457. In advancing the attack, advanced elements of the firing line or
+detachments in front of it should not open fire except in defense or
+to clear the foreground of the enemy. Fire on the hostile main
+position should not be opened until all or nearly all of the firing
+line can join in the fire.
+
+
+_THE FIRE ATTACK._
+
+458. At the first firing position the attack seeks to gain fire
+superiority. This may necessitate a steady, accurate fire for a long
+time. The object is to subdue the enemy's fire and keep it subdued so
+that the attacking troops may advance from this point to a favorable
+place near the enemy from which the charge may be made. Hence, in the
+advance by rushes, sufficient rifles must be kept constantly in action
+to keep down the enemy's fire; this determines the size of the
+fraction rushing.
+
+459. To advance without fire superiority against a determined defense
+would result in such losses as to bring the attack to a standstill or
+to make the apparent success barren of results.
+
+460. Diminution of the enemy's fire and a pronounced loss in
+effectiveness are the surest signs that fire superiority has been
+gained and that a part of the firing line can advance.
+
+461. The men must be impressed with the fact that, having made a
+considerable advance under fire and having been checked, it is
+suicidal to turn back in daylight.
+
+If they can advance no farther, they must intrench and hold on until
+the fall of darkness or a favorable turn in the situation develops.
+
+Intrenching is resorted to only when necessary. Troops who have
+intrenched themselves under fire are moved forward again with
+difficulty.
+
+462. Supports and reserves occupying intrenchments vacated by the
+firing line should improve them, but they must not be held back or
+diverted from their true missions on this account.
+
+463. Paragraphs 309 to 317, inclusive, deal more in detail with the
+conduct of the fire attack.
+
+
+_THE CHARGE._
+
+464. Fire superiority beats down the enemy's fire, destroys his
+resistance and morale, and enables the attacking troops to close on
+him, but an actual or threatened occupation of his position is needed
+to drive him out and defeat him.
+
+The psychological moment for the charge can not be determined far in
+advance. The tactical instinct of the responsible officer must decide.
+
+465. The defenders, if subjugated by the fire attack, will frequently
+leave before the charge begins. On the other hand, it may be necessary
+to carry the fire attack close to the position and follow it up with a
+short dash and a bayonet combat. Hence the distance over which the
+charge may be made will vary between wide limits. It may be from 25 to
+400 yards.
+
+The charge should be made at the earliest moment that promises
+success; otherwise the full advantage of victory will be lost.
+
+466. The commander of the attacking line should indicate his approval,
+or give the order, before the charge is made. Subordinate commanders,
+usually battalion commanders, whose troops are ready to charge signal
+that fact to the commander. It may be necessary for them to wait until
+other battalions or other parts of the line are ready or until the
+necessary reserves arrive.
+
+At the signal for the charge the firing line and nearby supports and
+reserves rush forward. See paragraphs 318 and 319.
+
+The charge is made simultaneously, if possible, by all the units
+participating therein, but, once committed to the assault, battalions
+should be pushed with the utmost vigor and no restraint placed on the
+ardor of charging troops by an attempt to maintain alignment.
+
+467. Before ordering the charge the commander should see that enough
+troops are on hand to make it a success. Local reserves joining the
+firing line in time to participate in the charge give it a strong
+impetus. Too dense a mass should be avoided.
+
+468. The line should be strengthened by prolongation, if practicable,
+and remaining troops kept in formation for future use; but rather than
+that the attack should fail, the last formed body will be sent in,
+unless it is very apparent that it can do no good.
+
+469. To arrive in the hostile position with a very compact firing line
+and a few formed supports is sufficient for a victory, but an
+additional force kept well in hand for pursuit is of inestimable
+value.
+
+470. A premature charge by a part of the line should be avoided, but
+if begun, the other parts of the line should join at once if there is
+any prospect of success. Under exceptional conditions a part of the
+line may be compelled to charge without authority from the rear. The
+intention to do so should be signaled to the rear.
+
+471. Confidence in their ability to use the bayonet gives the
+assaulting troops the promise of success.
+
+472. If the enemy has left the position when the charging troops reach
+it, the latter should open a rapid fire upon the retreating enemy, if
+he is in sight. It is not advisable for the mixed and disordered units
+to follow him, except to advance to a favorable firing position or to
+cover the reorganization of others.
+
+473. The nearest formed bodies accompanying or following the charge
+are sent instantly in pursuit. Under cover of these troops order is
+restored in the charging line. If the captured position is part of a
+general line or is an advanced post, it should be intrenched and
+occupied at once.
+
+The exhaustion of officers and men must not cause the neglect of
+measures to meet a counterattack.
+
+474. If the attack receives a temporary setback and it is intended to
+strengthen and continue it, officers will make every effort to stop
+the rearward movement and will reestablish the firing line in a
+covered position as close as possible to the enemy.
+
+475. If the attack must be abandoned, the rearward movement should
+continue with promptness until the troops reach a feature of the
+terrain that facilitates the task of checking and reorganizing them.
+The point selected should be so far to the rear as to prevent
+interference by the enemy before the troops are ready to resist. The
+withdrawal of the attacking troops should be covered by the artillery
+and by reserves, if any are available.
+
+See Night Operations.
+
+
+_PURSUIT._
+
+476. To reap the full fruits of victory a vigorous pursuit must be
+made. The natural inclination to be satisfied with a successful charge
+must be overcome. The enemy must be allowed no more time to reorganize
+than is positively unavoidable.
+
+477. The part of the reserve that is still formed or is best under
+control is sent forward in pursuit and vigorously attacks the enemy's
+main body or covering detachments wherever found.
+
+The artillery delivers a heavy fire upon the retreating enemy; the
+disordered attacking troops secure the position, promptly re-form, and
+become a new reserve.
+
+478. If the captured position is a section of the general line, the
+breach should be heavily occupied, made wider, and strongly secured by
+drawing on all reserves in the vicinity.
+
+479. After the pursuit from the immediate battle field, pursuit by
+parallel roads is especially effective where large commands are
+concerned.
+
+480. Artillery and cavalry are very effective in pursuit.
+
+
+_ATTACK OF FORTIFICATIONS._
+
+481. Few modifications enter into the problem of attacking
+fortifications. Such as are to be considered relate chiefly to the
+greater time and labor of advancing, the more frequent use of darkness
+and the use of hand grenades to augment the fire.
+
+482. If the enemy is strongly fortified and time permits, it may be
+advisable to wait and approach the charging point under cover of
+darkness. The necessary reconnaissance and arrangements should be made
+before dark. If the charge is not to be made at once, the troops
+intrench the advanced position, using sand bags if necessary. Before
+daylight the foreground should be cleared of obstacles.
+
+483. If the distance is short and other conditions are favorable, the
+charge may be made without fire preparation. If made, it should be
+launched with spirit and suddenness at the break of day. (See Night
+Operations.)
+
+484. In siege operations troops are usually advanced to the charging
+point by sapping. This method, however, presupposes that an early
+victory is not necessary or that it is clearly inadvisable to attempt
+more direct methods.
+
+
+_HOLDING ATTACK._
+
+485. The holding attack must be vigorous enough to hold the enemy in
+position and must present a front strong enough to conceal the
+secondary nature of the attack.
+
+The holding attack need have comparatively little strength in rear,
+but conceals the fact by a firing line not distinguishable from that
+of a decisive attack.
+
+486. Supports and reserves are kept at short distances. Their strength
+is less if the object is merely to hold the enemy fast than if the
+object is, in addition, to compel him to use up reserves.
+
+487. Holding attacks which may later develop into decisive attacks
+should be correspondingly strong in rear.
+
+488. All feint attacks should employ dense firing lines. Their
+weakness is in rear and is concealed.
+
+
+
+
+DEFENSE.
+
+
+_POSITIONS AND INTRENCHMENTS._
+
+489. The first requirement of a good position is a clear field of fire
+and view to the front and exposed flanks to a distance of 600 to 800
+yards or more. The length of front should be suitable to the size of
+the command and the flanks should be secure. The position should have
+lateral communication and cover for supports and reserves. It should
+be one which the enemy can not avoid, but must attack or give up his
+mission.
+
+A position having all these advantages will rarely, if ever, be found.
+The one should be taken which conforms closest to the description.
+
+490. The natural cover of the position should be fully utilized. In
+addition, it should be strengthened by fieldworks and obstacles.
+
+The best protection is afforded by deep, narrow, inconspicuous
+trenches. If little time is available, as much as practicable must be
+done. That the fieldworks may not be needed should not cause their
+construction to be omitted, and the fact that they have been
+constructed should not influence the action of a commander, if
+conditions are found to be other than expected.
+
+491. When time and troops are available the preparations include the
+necessary communicating and cover trenches, head cover, bombproofs,
+etc. The fire trenches should be well supplied with ammunition.
+
+The supports are placed close at hand in cover trenches when natural
+cover is not available.
+
+492. Dummy trenches frequently cause the hostile artillery to waste
+time and ammunition and to divert its fire.
+
+493. The location, extent, profile, garrison, etc., of fieldworks are
+matters to be decided by the infantry commanders. Officers must be
+able to choose ground and properly intrench it. (See Intrenchments.)
+
+494. In combat exercises, when it is impracticable to construct the
+trenches appropriate to the exercise, their trace may be outlined by
+bayonets, sticks, or other markers, and the responsible officers
+required to indicate the profile selected, method and time of
+construction, garrisons, etc.
+
+
+_DEPLOYMENT FOR DEFENSE._
+
+495. The density of the whole deployment depends upon the expected
+severity of the action, the character of the enemy, the condition of
+the flanks, the field of fire, the terrain, and the available
+artificial or natural protection for the troops.
+
+496. If exposed, the firing line should be as dense in defense as in
+attack. If the firing line is well intrenched and has a good field of
+fire, it may be made thinner.
+
+Weaker supports are permissible. For the same number of troops the
+front occupied on the defensive may therefore be longer than on the
+offensive, the battalions placing more companies in the firing line.
+
+497. If it is intended only to delay the enemy, a fairly strong
+deployment is sufficient, but if decisive results are desired, a
+change to the offensive must be contemplated and the corresponding
+strength in rear provided. This strength is in the reserve, which
+should be as large as the demands of the firing line and supports
+permit. Even in a passive defense the reserve should be as strong as
+in the attack, unless the flanks are protected by other means.
+
+498. Supports are posted as close to the firing line as practicable
+and reinforce the latter according to the principles explained in the
+attack. When natural cover is not sufficient for the purpose,
+communicating and cover trenches are constructed. If time does not
+permit their construction, it is better to begin the action with a
+very dense firing line and no immediate supports than to have supports
+greatly exposed in rear.
+
+499. The reserve should be posted so as to be entirely free to act as
+a whole, according to the developments. The distance from firing line
+to reserve is generally greater than in the attack. By reason of such
+a location the reserve is best able to meet a hostile enveloping
+attack; it has a better position from which to make a counter attack;
+it is in a better position to cover a withdrawal and permit an orderly
+retreat.
+
+The distance from firing line to reserve increases with the size of
+the reserve.
+
+500. When the situation is no longer in doubt, the reserve should be
+held in rear of the flank which is most in danger or offers the best
+opportunity for counterattack. Usually the same flank best suits both
+purposes.
+
+501. In exceptional cases, on broad fronts, it may be necessary to
+detach a part of the reserve to protect the opposite flank. This
+detachment should be the smallest consistent with its purely
+protective mission.
+
+502. The commander assigns to subordinates the front to be occupied by
+them. These, in turn, subdivide the front among their next lower units
+in the firing line.
+
+503. An extended position is so divided into sections that each has,
+if practicable, a field of fire naturally made distinct by the
+terrain.
+
+Unfavorable and unimportant ground will ordinarily cause gaps to exist
+in the line.
+
+504. The size of the unit occupying each section depends upon the
+latter's natural strength, front, and importance. If practicable,
+battalions should be kept intact and assigned as units to sections or
+parts of sections.
+
+505. Where important dead space lies in front of one section, an
+adjoining section should be instructed to cover it with fire when
+necessary, or machine guns should be concealed for the like purpose.
+
+506. Advanced posts, or any other form of unnecessary dispersion,
+should be avoided.
+
+507. Unless the difficulty of moving the troops into the position be
+great, most of the troops of the firing line are held in rear of it
+until the infantry attack begins. The position itself is occupied by a
+small garrison only, with the necessary outguards or patrols in front.
+
+508. Fire alone can not be depended upon to stop the attack. The
+troops must be determined to resort to the bayonet, if necessary.
+
+509. If a night attack or close approach by the enemy is expected,
+troops in a prepared position should strengthen the outguards and
+firing line and construct as numerous and effective obstacles as
+possible. Supports and local reserves should move close to the firing
+line and should, with the firing line, keep bayonets fixed. If
+practicable, the front should be illuminated, preferably from the
+flanks of the section.
+
+510. Only short range fire is of any value in resisting night attacks.
+The bayonet is the chief reliance. (See Night Operations.)
+
+
+_COUNTERATTACK._
+
+511. The passive defense should be assumed only when circumstances
+force it. Only the offensive wins.
+
+512. An active defense seeks a favorable decision. A favorable
+decision can not be expected without counterattack.
+
+513. A passive defense in a position whose flanks are not protected by
+natural obstacles is generally out of the question.
+
+514. Where the defense is assumed with a view to making a
+counterattack, the troops for the counterattack should be held in
+reserve until the time arrives for such attack. The defensive line
+should be held by as few troops as possible in order that the force
+for the offensive may be as large as possible.
+
+The force for the counterattack should be held echeloned in rear of
+the flank which offers it the greatest advantage for the proposed
+attack.
+
+515. The counterattack should be made vigorously and at the proper
+time. It will usually be made:
+
+By launching the reserve against the enemy's flank when his attack is
+in full progress. This is the most effective form of counterattack.
+
+Straight to the front by the firing line and supports after repulsing
+the enemy's attack and demoralizing him with pursuing fire.
+
+Or, by the troops in rear of the firing line when the enemy has
+reached the defensive position and is in disorder.
+
+516. Minor counterattacks are sometimes necessary in order to drive
+the enemy from important positions gained by him.
+
+
+_DELAYING ACTION._
+
+517. When a position is taken merely to delay the enemy and to
+withdraw before becoming closely engaged, the important considerations
+are:
+
+The enemy should be forced to deploy early. The field of fire should
+therefore be good at distances from 500 to 1,200 yards or more; a good
+field of fire at close range is not necessary.
+
+The ground in rear of the position should favor the withdrawal of the
+firing line by screening the troops from the enemy's view and fire as
+soon as the position is vacated.
+
+518. A thin firing line using much ammunition will generally answer
+the purpose. Supports are needed chiefly to protect the flanks.
+
+The reserve should be posted well in rear to assist in the withdrawal
+of the firing line.
+
+519. Artillery is especially valuable to a delaying force.
+
+
+
+
+MEETING ENGAGEMENTS.
+
+
+520. Meeting engagements are characterized by the necessity for hasty
+reconnaissance, or the almost total absence of reconnaissance; by the
+necessity for rapid deployment, frequently under fire; and usually by
+the absence of trenches or other artificial cover. These conditions
+give further advantages to the offensive.
+
+521. The whole situation will usually indicate beforehand the proper
+general action to be taken on meeting the enemy.
+
+522. Little fresh information can be expected. The boldness,
+initiative, and determination of the commander must be relied upon.
+
+523. A meeting engagement affords an ideal opportunity to the
+commander who has intuition and quick decision and who is willing to
+take long chances. His opponent is likely to be overcautious.
+
+524. The amount of information that the commander is warranted in
+awaiting before taking final action depends entirely upon his mission.
+One situation may demand a blind attack; another may demand rapid,
+partial deployment for attack, but careful and time-consuming
+reconnaissance before the attack is launched.
+
+525. A great advantage accrues to the side which can deploy the
+faster. The advantage of a close-order formation, favoring rapid
+deployment, becomes more pronounced with the size of the force.
+
+526. The first troops to deploy will be able to attack with longer
+firing lines and weaker supports than are required in the ordinary
+case. But if the enemy succeeds in deploying a strong, defensive line,
+the attack must be strengthened accordingly before it is wasted.
+
+527. If the situation warrants the advance, the leading troops seek to
+deploy faster than the enemy, to reach his flanks, check his
+deployment, and get information. In any event, they seek to cover the
+deployment of their own troops in rear--especially the artillery--and
+to seize important ground.
+
+528. The commander of a long column which meets the enemy should be
+with the advance guard to receive information promptly and to
+reconnoiter. If he decides to fight, the advance guard must hold the
+enemy while the commander formulates a plan of action, issues the
+necessary orders, and deploys the main body. Meantime, the column
+should be closing up, either in mass or to form line of columns, so
+that the deployment, when determined upon, may be made more promptly.
+
+529. The action of the advance guard, prior to the receipt of orders,
+depends upon the situation. Whether to attack determinedly or only as
+a feint, or to assume the defensive, depends upon the strength of the
+advance guard, the terrain, the character of the hostile force
+encountered, and the mission and intentions of the commander of the
+whole.
+
+530. If the enemy is beforehand or more aggressive, or if the advance
+guard is too weak, it may be necessary to put elements of the main
+body into action as fast as they arrive, in order to check him. This
+method should be avoided; it prevents the formation and execution of a
+definite plan and compels piecemeal action. The best results are
+obtained when the main body is used as a whole.
+
+
+
+
+WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION.
+
+
+531. The withdrawal of a defeated force can generally be effected only
+at a heavy cost. When it is no longer possible to give the action a
+favorable turn and the necessity for withdrawal arises, every effort
+must be made to place distance and a rear guard between the enemy and
+the defeated troops.
+
+532. Artillery gives especially valuable assistance in the withdrawal.
+The long-range fire of machine guns should also be employed. Cavalry
+assists the withdrawal by charging the pursuing troops or by taking
+flank positions and using fire action.
+
+533. If an intact reserve remains it should be placed in a covering
+position, preferably on a flank, to check the pursuit and thus enable
+the defeated troops to withdraw beyond reach of hostile fire.
+
+The covering position of the reserve should be at some distance from
+the main action, but close enough to bring the withdrawing troops
+quickly under the protection of its fire. It should have a good field
+of fire at effective and long ranges and should facilitate its own
+safe and timely withdrawal.
+
+534. If the general line is divided, by terrain or by organization,
+into two or more parts, the firing line of the part in the least
+danger from pursuit should be withdrawn first. A continuous firing
+line, whose parts are dependent upon one another for fire support,
+should be withdrawn as a whole, retiring by echelon at the beginning
+of the withdrawal. Every effort must be made to restore the
+organizations, regain control, and form column of march as soon as the
+troops are beyond the reach of hostile fire.
+
+As fast as possible without delaying the march, companies, and the
+larger units should be re-formed, so that the command will again be
+well in hand.
+
+535. The commander of the whole, having given orders for withdrawal,
+should go to the rear, select a rendezvous point, and devote himself
+to the reorganization of his command.
+
+The rendezvous point is selected with regard to the natural channels
+of movement approximately straight to the rear. It should be distant
+from the battle field and should facilitate the gathering and
+protection of the command.
+
+
+SUMMARY.
+
+536. 1. Avoid combats that offer no chance of victory or other
+valuable results.
+
+2. Make every effort for the success of the general plan and avoid
+spectacular plays that have no bearing on the general result.
+
+3. Have a definite plan and carry it out vigorously. Do not vacillate.
+
+4. Do not attempt complicated maneuvers.
+
+5. Keep the command in hand; avoid undue extension and dispersion.
+
+6. Study the ground and direct the advance in such a way as to take
+advantage of all available cover and thereby diminish losses.
+
+7. Never deploy until the purpose and the proper direction are known.
+
+8. Deploy enough men for the immediate task in hand; hold out the rest
+and avoid undue haste in committing them to the action.
+
+9. Flanks must be protected either by reserves, fortifications, or the
+terrain.
+
+10. In a decisive action, gain and keep fire superiority.
+
+11. Keep up reconnaissance.
+
+12. Use the reserve, but not until needed or a very favorable
+opportunity for its use presents itself. Keep some reserve as long as
+practicable.
+
+13. Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if the result is worth
+the cost.
+
+14. Spare the command all unnecessary hardship and exertion.
+
+
+
+
+MISCELLANEOUS.
+
+
+_MACHINE GUNS._
+
+537. Machine guns must be considered as weapons of emergency. Their
+effectiveness combined with their mobility renders them of great value
+at critical, though infrequent, periods of an engagement.
+
+538. When operating against infantry only, they can be used to a great
+extent throughout the combat as circumstances may indicate, but they
+are quickly rendered powerless by efficient field artillery and will
+promptly draw artillery fire whenever they open. Hence their use in
+engagements between large commands must be for short periods and at
+times when their great effectiveness will be most valuable.
+
+539. Machine guns should be attached to the advance guard. In meeting
+engagements they will be of great value in assisting their own
+advance, or in checking the advance of the enemy, and will have
+considerable time to operate before hostile artillery fire can silence
+them.
+
+Care must be taken not to leave them too long in action.
+
+540. They are valuable to a rear guard which seeks to check a vigorous
+pursuit or to gain time.
+
+541. In attack, if fire of position is practicable, they are of great
+value. In this case fire should not be opened by the machine guns
+until the attack is well advanced. At a critical period in the attack,
+such fire, if suddenly and unexpectedly opened, will greatly assist
+the advancing line. The fire must be as heavy as possible and must be
+continued until masked by friendly troops or until the hostile
+artillery finds the machine guns.
+
+542. In the defense, machine guns should be used in the same general
+manner as described above for the attack. Concealment and patient
+waiting for critical moments and exceptional opportunities are the
+special characteristics of the machine gun service in decisive
+actions.
+
+543. As part of the reserve, machine guns have special importance. If
+they are with the troops told off to protect the flanks, and if they
+are well placed, they will often produce decisive results against a
+hostile turning movement. They are especially qualified to cover a
+withdrawal or make a captured position secure.
+
+544. Machine guns should not be assigned to the firing line of an
+attack. They should be so placed that fire directed upon them is not
+likely to fall upon the firing line.
+
+545. A skirmish line can not advance by walking or running when
+hostile machine guns have the correct range and are ready to fire.
+Machine-gun fire is not specially effective against troops lying on
+the ground or crawling.
+
+546. When opposed by machine guns and without artillery to destroy
+them, infantry itself must silence them before it can advance.
+
+An infantry command that must depend upon itself for protection
+against machine guns should concentrate a large number of rifles on
+each gun in turn and until it has silenced it.
+
+
+_AMMUNITION SUPPLY._
+
+547. The method of supply of ammunition to the combat trains is
+explained in Field Service Regulations.
+
+548. The combat train is the immediate reserve supply of the
+battalion, and the major is responsible for its proper use. He will
+take measures to insure the maintenance of the prescribed allowance at
+all times.
+
+In the absence of instructions, he will cause the train to march
+immediately in rear of his battalion, and, upon separating from it to
+enter an engagement, will cause the ammunition therein to be issued.
+When emptied, he will direct that the wagons proceed to the proper
+rendezvous to be refilled. Ordinarily a rendezvous is appointed for
+each brigade and the necessary number of wagons sent forward to it
+from the ammunition column.
+
+549. When refilled, the combat wagons will rejoin their battalions,
+or, if the latter be engaged, will join or establish communication
+with the regimental reserve.
+
+550. Company commanders are responsible that the belts of the men in
+their companies are kept filled at all times, except when the
+ammunition is being expended in action. In the firing line the
+ammunition of the dead and wounded should be secured whenever
+practicable.
+
+551. Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first.
+Thirty rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as
+a reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer.
+
+552. When necessary to resupply the firing line, ammunition will be
+sent forward with reenforcements, generally from the regimental
+reserve.
+
+Men will never be sent back from the firing line for ammunition. Men
+sent forward with ammunition remain with the firing line.
+
+553. As soon as possible after an engagement the belts of the men and
+the combat wagons are resupplied to their normal capacities.
+Ammunition which can not be reloaded on combat wagons will be piled up
+in a convenient place and left under guard.
+
+
+_MOUNTED SCOUTS._
+
+554. The mounted scouts should be thoroughly trained in patrolling and
+reconnaissance. They are used for communication with neighboring
+troops, for patrolling off the route of march, for march outposts,
+outpost patrols, combat patrols, reconnaissance ahead of columns, etc.
+Their further use is, in general, confined to escort and messenger
+duty. They should be freely used for all these purposes, but for these
+purposes only.
+
+555. When infantry is acting alone, or when the cavalry of a mixed
+command has been sent to a distance, the mounted scouts are of special
+importance to covering detachments and should be used to make the
+reconnaissance which would otherwise fall to cavalry.
+
+556. In reconnaissance, scouts should be used in preference to other
+troops as much as possible. When not needed for mounted duty, they
+should be employed for necessary dismounted patrolling.
+
+557. Battalion staff officers should be specially trained in
+patrolling and reconnaissance work in order that they may be available
+when a mounted officer's patrol is required.
+
+
+_NIGHT OPERATIONS._
+
+558. By employing night operations troops make use of the cover of
+darkness to minimize losses from hostile fire or to escape
+observation. Night operations may also be necessary for the purpose of
+gaining time. Control is difficult and confusion is frequently
+unavoidable.
+
+It may be necessary to take advantage of darkness in order to assault
+from a point gained during the day, or to approach a point from which
+a daylight assault is to be made, or to effect both the approach and
+the assault.
+
+559. Offensive and defensive night operations should be practiced
+frequently in order that troops may learn to cover ground in the dark
+and arrive at a destination quietly and in good order, and in order to
+train officers in the necessary preparation and reconnaissance.
+
+Only simple and well-appointed formations should be employed.
+
+Troops should be thoroughly trained in the necessary details--e.g.,
+night patrolling, night marching, and communication at night.
+
+560. The ground to be traversed should be studied by daylight and, if
+practicable, at night. It should be cleared of hostile detachments
+before dark, and, if practicable, should be occupied by covering
+troops.
+
+Orders must be formulated with great care and clearness. Each unit
+must be given a definite objective and direction, and care must be
+exercised to avoid collision between units.
+
+Whenever contact with the enemy is anticipated, a distinctive badge
+should be worn by all.
+
+561. Preparations must be made with secrecy. When the movement is
+started, and not until then, the officers and men should be acquainted
+with the general design, the composition of the whole force, and
+should be given such additional information as will insure cooperation
+and eliminate mistakes.
+
+During the movement every precaution must be taken to keep secret the
+fact that troops are abroad.
+
+Unfriendly guides must frequently be impressed. These should be
+secured against escape, outcry, or deception.
+
+Fire action should be avoided in offensive operations. In general,
+pieces should not be loaded. Men must be trained to rely upon the
+bayonet and to use it aggressively.
+
+562. Long night marches should be made only over well-defined routes.
+March discipline must be rigidly enforced. The troops should be
+marched in as compact a formation as practicable, with the usual
+covering detachments. Advance and rear guard distances should be
+greatly reduced. They are shortest when the mission is an offensive
+one. The connecting files are numerous.
+
+563. A night advance made with a view to making an attack by day
+usually terminates with the hasty construction of intrenchments in the
+dark. Such an advance should be timed so as to allow an hour or more
+of darkness for intrenching.
+
+An advance that is to terminate in an assault at the break of day
+should be timed so that the troops will not arrive long before the
+assault is to be made; otherwise the advantage of partial surprise
+will be lost and the enemy will be allowed to reenforce the threatened
+point.
+
+564. The night attack is ordinarily confined to small forces, or to
+minor engagements in a general battle, or to seizure of positions
+occupied by covering or advanced detachments. Decisive results are not
+often obtained.
+
+Poorly disciplined and untrained troops are unfit for night attacks or
+for night operations demanding the exercise of skill and care.
+
+Troops attacking at night can advance close to the enemy in compact
+formations and without suffering loss from hostile artillery or
+infantry fire. The defender is ignorant of the strength or direction
+of the attack.
+
+A force which makes a vigorous bayonet charge in the dark will often
+throw a much larger force into disorder.
+
+565. Reconnaissance should be made to ascertain the position and
+strength of the enemy and to study the terrain to be traversed.
+Officers who are to participate in the attack should conduct this
+reconnaissance. Reconnaissance at night is especially valuable.
+Features that are distinguishable at night should be carefully noted,
+and their distances from the enemy, from the starting point of the
+troops, and from other important points should be made known.
+
+Preparations should have in view as complete a surprise as possible.
+An attack once begun must be carried to its conclusion, even if the
+surprise is not as complete as was planned or anticipated.
+
+566. The time of night at which the attack should be made depends upon
+the object sought. If a decisive attack is intended, it will generally
+yield the best results if made just before daylight. If the object is
+merely to gain an intrenched position for further operations, an
+earlier hour is necessary in order that the position gained may be
+intrenched under cover of darkness.
+
+567. The formation for attack must be simple. It should be carefully
+effected and the troops verified at a safe distance from the enemy.
+The attacking troops should be formed in compact lines and with strong
+supports at short distances. The reserve should be far enough in rear
+to avoid being drawn into the action until the commander so desires.
+Bayonets are fixed, pieces are not loaded.
+
+Darkness causes fire to be wild and ineffective. The attacking troops
+should march steadily on the enemy without firing, but should be
+prepared and determined to fight vigorously with the bayonet.
+
+In advancing to the attack the aim should be to get as close as
+possible to the enemy before being discovered, then to trust to the
+bayonet.
+
+If the assault is successful, preparations must be made at once to
+repel a counterattack.
+
+568. On the defense, preparations to resist night attacks should be
+made by daylight whenever such attacks are to be feared.
+
+Obstacles placed in front of a defensive position are especially
+valuable to the defense at night. Many forms of obstacles which would
+give an attacker little concern in the daytime become serious
+hindrances at night.
+
+After dark the foreground should be illuminated whenever practicable
+and strong patrols should be pushed to the front.
+
+When it is learned that the enemy is approaching, the trenches are
+filled and the supports moved close to the firing line.
+
+Supports fix bayonets, but do not load. Whenever practicable and
+necessary they should be used for counterattacks, preferably against a
+hostile flank.
+
+The defender should open fire as soon as results may be expected. This
+fire may avert or postpone the bayonet combat, and it warns all
+supporting troops. It is not likely that fire alone can stop the
+attack. The defender must be resolved to fight with the bayonet.
+
+Ordinarily fire will not be effective at ranges exceeding 50 yards.
+
+A white rag around the muzzle of the rifle will assist in sighting the
+piece when the front sight is not visible.
+
+See paragraphs 450, 482, 483, 509, 510.
+
+
+_INFANTRY AGAINST CAVALRY._
+
+569. A cavalry charge can accomplish little against infantry, even in
+inferior numbers, unless the latter are surprised, become
+panic-stricken, run away, or can not use their rifles.
+
+570. A charge from the front is easily checked by a well-directed and
+sustained fire.
+
+If the charge is directed against the flank of the firing line, the
+supports, reserves, or machine guns should stop it. If this
+disposition is impracticable, part of the line must meet the charge by
+a timely change of front. If the flank company, or companies, in the
+firing line execute _platoons right_, the successive firing lines can
+ordinarily break a charge against the flank. If the cavalry line
+passes through the firing line, the latter will be little damaged if
+the men retain their presence of mind. They should be on the watch for
+succeeding cavalry lines and leave those that have passed through to
+friendly troops in rear.
+
+571. Men standing are in the best position to meet a charge, but other
+considerations may compel them to meet it lying prone.
+
+572. In a mêlée, the infantryman with his bayonet has at least an even
+chance with the cavalryman, but the main dependence of infantry is
+rifle fire. Any formation is suitable that permits the free use of the
+necessary number of rifles.
+
+Ordinarily there will be no time to change or set sights. Fire at will
+at battle sight should be used, whatever the range may be. It will
+usually be unwise to open fire at long ranges.
+
+573. An infantry column that encounters cavalry should deploy at once.
+If attacked from the head or rear of the column, and if time is
+pressing, it may form a succession of skirmish lines. Infantry, by
+deploying 50 or 100 yards in rear of an obstacle, may check cavalry
+and hold it under fire beyond effective pistol range.
+
+In any situation, to try to escape the issue by running is the worst
+and most dangerous course the infantry can adopt.
+
+574. In attacking dismounted cavalry, infantry should close rapidly
+and endeavor to prevent remounting. Infantry which adopts this course
+will not be seriously checked by delaying cavalry.
+
+Every effort should be made to locate and open fire on the led
+horses.
+
+
+_INFANTRY AGAINST ARTILLERY._
+
+575. A frontal attack against artillery has little chance of
+succeeding unless it can be started from cover at comparatively short
+range. Beyond short range, the frontal fire of infantry has little
+effect against the artillery personnel because of their protective
+shields.
+
+Machine guns, because their cone of fire is more compact, will have
+greater effect, but on the other hand they will have fewer
+opportunities and they are limited to fire attack only.
+
+As a rule, one's own artillery is the best weapon against hostile
+artillery.
+
+576. Artillery attacked in flank by infantry can be severely damaged.
+Oblique or flank fire will begin to have decisive effect when
+delivered at effective range from a point to one side of the
+artillery's line of fire and distant from it by about half the range.
+Artillery is better protected on the side of the caisson.
+
+577. Guns out of ammunition, but otherwise secure against infantry
+attack, may be immobilized by fire which will prevent their
+withdrawal, or by locating and driving off their limbers. Or they may
+be kept out of action by fire which will prevent the receipt of
+ammunition.
+
+578. Artillery when limbered is helpless against infantry fire. If
+caught at effective range while coming into action or while limbering,
+artillery can be severely punished by infantry fire.
+
+In attacking artillery that is trying to escape, the wheel horses are
+the best targets.
+
+
+_ARTILLERY SUPPORTS._
+
+579. The purpose of the artillery support is to guard the artillery
+against surprise or attack.
+
+Artillery on the march or in action is ordinarily so placed as to be
+amply protected by the infantry. Infantry always protects artillery in
+its neighborhood.
+
+580. The detail of a support is not necessary except when the
+artillery is separated from the main body or occupies a position in
+which its flanks are not protected.
+
+The detail of a special support will be avoided whenever possible.
+
+581. The formation of an artillery support depends upon circumstances.
+On the march it may often be necessary to provide advance, flank, and
+rear protection. The country must be thoroughly reconnoitered by
+patrols within long rifle range.
+
+582. In action, the formation and location of the support must be such
+as to gain and give timely information of the enemy's approach and to
+offer actual resistance to the enemy beyond effective rifle range of
+the artillery's flanks. It should not be close enough to the artillery
+to suffer from fire directed at the artillery. In most cases a
+position somewhat to the flank and rear best fulfills these
+conditions.
+
+583. The support commander is charged only with the protection of the
+artillery. The tactical employment of each arm rests with its
+commander. The two should cooperate.
+
+
+_INTRENCHMENTS._
+
+(Plate V.)
+
+584. Ordinarily, infantry intrenches itself whenever it is compelled
+to halt for a considerable time in the presence of the enemy.
+
+Infantry charged with a resisting mission should intrench whenever
+there is any likelihood that the cover constructed will be of use.
+
+585. Except in permanent fortifications or in fortifications prepared
+long in advance, the infantry plans and constructs the field works
+that it will occupy.
+
+When performing their duties in this connection officers should bear
+in mind that profile and construction are simple matters compared with
+location and correct tactical use.
+
+586. Intrenchments enable the commander to hold a position with the
+least possible number of men and to prolong his line or increase his
+reserve.
+
+They are constructed with a view to giving cover which will diminish
+losses, but they must not be so built or placed as to interfere with
+the free use of the rifle. Fire effect is the first consideration.
+
+587. The trace of a fire trench or of a system of fire trenches
+depends upon the ground and the proposed density of the entire firing
+line. The trenches are laid out in company lengths, if possible.
+
+Adjoining trenches should afford each other mutual support. The flanks
+and important gaps in the line should be protected by fire trenches
+echeloned in rear. (Fig. 6).
+
+588. To locate the trace, lie on the ground at intervals and select
+the best field of fire consistent with the requirements of the
+situation.
+
+A profile should be selected which will permit the fire to sweep the
+foreground, require the minimum of labor and time, and permit the best
+concealment. No fixed type can be prescribed. The type must be
+selected with due regard to the terrain, the enemy, time, tools,
+materials, soil, etc.
+
+589. _Hasty cover._ With the intrenching tool, troops can quickly
+throw up a low parapet about 3 feet thick which will furnish
+considerable cover against rifle fire, but scarcely any against
+shrapnel. Such cover is frequently of value to an attack that is
+temporarily unable to continue. In time, and particularly at night, it
+may be developed into a deep fire or cover trench.
+
+590. _Fire trenches_ should be placed and constructed so as to give a
+good field of fire and to give the troops protection behind a vertical
+wall, preferably with some head or overhead cover. They should be
+concealed or inconspicuous in order to avoid artillery fire or to
+decrease its accuracy. They should have natural or artificial
+communication with their supports, but in establishing the trace this
+is a secondary consideration.
+
+The simplest form of fire trench is deep and narrow and has a flat,
+concealed parapet. (Fig. 1.) In ordinary soil, and on a basis of two
+reliefs and tasks of 5 feet, it can be constructed in about two hours
+with intrenching tools.
+
+This trench affords fair cover for troops subjected to fire, but not
+actually firing. When it is probable that time will permit
+elaboration, the simple trench should be planned with a view to
+developing it ultimately into a more complete form. (Figs. 2 and 3.)
+Devices should be added to increase the security of the trench and the
+comfort of the men.
+
+Where the excavated earth is easily removed, a fire trench without
+parapet may be the one best suited to the soil and other conditions
+affecting the choice of profile. (Fig. 4.) The enemy's infantry, as
+well as his artillery, will generally have great difficulty in seeing
+this type of trench.
+
+In very difficult soil, if the time is short, it may be necessary to
+dig a wider, shallower trench with a higher parapet.
+
+[Illustration: Plate V.]
+
+Head cover, notches, and loop holes are of value to troops when
+firing, but many forms weaken and disclose the location of the
+parapet. Filled sandbags kept in the trench when the men are not
+firing may be thrown on the parapet to form notches or loopholes when
+the troops in the trench open fire and concealment of the trench is no
+longer necessary or possible.
+
+By the use of observation stations the maximum rest and security is
+afforded the troops. Stations are best located in the angles of
+traverses or at the end of the trench.
+
+591. Where the nature of the position makes it advisable to construct
+traverses at regular intervals it is generally best to construct a
+section of trench for each squad, with traverses between squads. (Fig.
+5.)
+
+592. _Cover trenches_ are placed as closely as practicable to their
+respective fire trenches. Where natural cover is not available, each
+fire trench should have artificial cover in rear for its
+support--either a cover trench of its own or one in common with an
+adjoining fire trench.
+
+The cover trench is simple and rectangular in profile. Concealment is
+indispensable. It is generally concealed by the contour of the ground
+or by natural features, but to guard against hostile searching fire
+overhead cover is frequently advisable.
+
+Cover trenches should be made as comfortable as possible. It will
+often be advisable to make them extensive enough to provide cooking
+and resting facilities for the garrisons of the corresponding fire
+trenches.
+
+593. _Communicating trenches_ are frequently necessary in order to
+connect fire trenches with their corresponding cover trenches where
+natural, covered communication is impracticable. They are generally
+rectangular in profile, deep, and narrow. They are traversed or
+zigzagged to escape enfilade.
+
+Returns or pockets should be provided for use as latrines, storerooms,
+dressing stations, passing points for troops, etc.
+
+Cover from observation while passing through the trench may insure
+against loss as effectively as material cover from the enemy's fire.
+
+_Communicating ways_, naturally or artificially screened from the
+enemy's view, sometimes provide sufficient cover for the passage of
+troops.
+
+594. _Dummy trenches_ frequently draw the enemy's attention and fire
+and thus protect the true fire trench.
+
+Any type is suitable which presents to the enemy the appearance of a
+true trench imperfectly concealed.
+
+595. When it is uncertain whether time will permit the completion of
+all the work planned, work should proceed with due regard to the order
+of importance of the several operations. Ordinarily the order of
+importance will be:
+
+1. Clearing foreground to improve the field of fire and construction
+of fire trench.
+
+2. Head or overhead cover; concealment.
+
+3. Placing obstacles and recording ranges.
+
+4. Cover trenches for supports and local reserves.
+
+5. Communicating trenches.
+
+6. Widening and deepening of trenches; interior conveniences.
+
+See paragraph 568.
+
+
+_MINOR WARFARE._
+
+596. Minor warfare embraces both regular and irregular operations.
+
+Regular operations consist of minor actions involving small bodies of
+trained and organized troops on both sides.
+
+The tactics employed are in general those prescribed for the smaller
+units.
+
+597. Irregular operations consist of actions against unorganized or
+partially organized forces, acting in independent or semi-independent
+bodies. Such bodies have little or only crude training and are under
+nominal and loose leadership and control. They assemble, roam about,
+and disperse at will. They endeavor to win by stealth or by force of
+superior numbers, employing ambuscades, sudden dashes or rushes, and
+hand-to-hand fighting.
+
+Troops operating against such an enemy usually do so in small units,
+such as platoons, detachments, or companies, and the tactics employed
+must be adapted to meet the requirements of the situation. Frequently
+the enemy's own methods may be employed to advantage.
+
+In general, such operations should not be undertaken hastily; every
+preparation should be made to strike suddenly and to inflict the
+maximum punishment.
+
+598. In general, the service of information will be insufficient;
+adequate reconnaissance will rarely be practicable. March and bivouac
+formations must be such as to admit of rapid deployment and fire
+action in any direction.
+
+599. In the open country, where surprise is not probable, troops may
+be marched in column of squads preceded, within sight, by a squad as
+an advance party.
+
+600. In close country, where surprise is possible, the troops must be
+held in a close formation. The use of flank patrols becomes difficult.
+Occasionally, an advance party--never less than a squad--may be sent
+out. In general, however, such a party accomplishes little, since an
+enemy intent on surprise will permit it to pass unmolested and will
+fall upon the main body.
+
+Under such conditions, especially when the road or trail is narrow,
+the column of twos or files is a convenient formation, the officers
+placing themselves in the column so as to divide it into nearly equal
+parts. If rushed from a flank, such a column will be in readiness to
+face and fire toward either or both flank, the ranks being back to
+back; if rushed from the front, the head of the column may be
+deployed, the rest of the column closing up to support it and to
+protect its flanks and rear. In any event, the men should be taught to
+take some form of a closed back-to-back formation.
+
+601. The column may often be broken into two or more approximately
+equal detachments separated on the march by distances of 50 to 100
+yards. As a rule the detachments should not consist of less than 25
+men each. With this arrangement of the column, it will rarely be
+possible for an enemy to close simultaneously with all of the
+detachments, one or more being left unengaged and under control to
+support those engaged or to inflict severe punishment upon the enemy
+when he is repulsed.
+
+602. The site for camp or bivouac should be selected with special
+reference to economical and effective protection against surprise.
+Double sentinels are posted on the avenues of approach and the troops
+sleep in readiness for instant action. When practicable, troops should
+be instructed in advance as to what they are to do in case of attack
+at night.
+
+603. Night operations are frequently advisable. With the small forces
+employed, control is not difficult. Irregular troops rarely provide
+proper camp protection, and they may frequently be surprised and
+severely punished by a properly conducted night march and attack.
+
+
+_PATROLS._
+
+604. The following paragraphs on patrols are placed here for
+convenience. They relate in particular to the conduct of the patrol
+and its leader, and apply to patrols employed in covering detachments
+as well as in combat reconnaissance.
+
+605. A patrol is a detachment sent out from a command to gain
+information of the country or of the enemy, or to prevent the enemy
+from gaining information. In special cases patrols may be given
+missions other than these.
+
+606. The commander must have clearly in mind the purpose for which the
+patrol is to be used in order that he may determine its proper
+strength, select its leader, and give the latter proper instructions.
+
+In general, a patrol should be sent out for one definite purpose only.
+
+607. The strength of a patrol varies from two or three men to a
+company. It should be strong enough to accomplish its purpose, and no
+stronger.
+
+If the purpose is to gain information only, a small patrol is better
+than a large one. The former conceals itself more readily and moves
+less conspicuously. For observing from some point in plain view of the
+command or for visiting or reconnoitering between outguards two men
+are sufficient.
+
+If messages are to be sent back, the patrol must be strong enough to
+furnish the probable number of messengers without reducing the patrol
+to less than two men. If hostile patrols are likely to be met and must
+be driven off, the patrol must be strong.
+
+In friendly territory, a weaker patrol may be used than would be used
+for the corresponding purpose in hostile territory.
+
+608. The character of the leader selected for the patrol depends upon
+the importance of the work in hand.
+
+For patrolling between the groups or along the lines of an outpost, or
+for the simpler patrols sent out from a covering detachment, the
+average soldier will be a competent leader.
+
+609. For a patrol sent out to gain information, or for a distant
+patrol sent out from a covering detachment, the leader must be
+specially selected. He must be able to cover large areas with few men;
+he must be able to estimate the strength of hostile forces, to report
+intelligently as to their dispositions, to read indications, and to
+judge as to the importance of the information gained. He must possess
+endurance, courage, and good judgment.
+
+His instructions should be full and clear. He must be made to
+understand exactly what is required of him, where to go and when to
+return. He should be given such information of the enemy and country
+as may be of value to him. He should be informed as to the general
+location of his own forces, particularly of those with whom he may
+come in contact. If possible, he should be given a map of the country
+he is to traverse, and in many cases his route may be specified.
+
+Besides his arms and ammunition, the patrol leader should have a
+compass, a watch, a pencil, a note book, and, when practicable, field
+message blanks and a map of the country.
+
+The patrol leader assembles the men detailed for the patrol. He
+inspects their arms and ammunition and satisfies himself that they are
+in suitable condition for the duty. He sees that none has any papers,
+maps, etc., that would be of value to the enemy if captured. He sees
+that their accouterments do not glisten or rattle when they move. He
+then repeats his instructions to the patrol and assures himself that
+every man understands them. He explains the signals to be used and
+satisfies himself that they are understood. He designates a man to
+take his place should he be disabled.
+
+610. The formation and movements of the patrol must be regulated so as
+to render probable the escape of at least one man should the patrol
+encounter a superior force. The formation will depend upon the nature
+of the ground traversed and the cover afforded. The leader must adopt
+the formation and measures best suited to the accomplishment of his
+object.
+
+In general, it should have the formation of a main body with advance,
+rear, and flank guards, though each be represented only by a single
+man.
+
+611. The distances separating the members of the patrol vary according
+to the ground. If too close together, they see no more than one man;
+if too widely separated they are likely to be lost to the control of
+the leader.
+
+With a patrol of four or five men the distances may vary from 25 to 50
+yards; with a larger patrol they may be as great as 100 yards.
+
+At times a column of files, separated by the distances prescribed, is
+a satisfactory formation.
+
+612. The country must be carefully observed as the patrol advances. In
+passing over a hill, the country beyond should first be observed by
+one man; houses, inclosures, etc., should be approached in a similar
+manner or avoided entirely; woods should generally be reconnoitered in
+a thin skirmish line.
+
+613. The strength and composition of hostile troops must be observed.
+If they can not be counted, their strength may be estimated by the
+length of time a column consumes in passing a given point, or by the
+area covered if in camp.
+
+Patrol leaders should know, if practicable, the uniforms, guidons,
+etc., of the enemy, as it will assist in determining the class of
+troops seen when no other means for doing so are available.
+
+Insignia from the enemy's uniforms, picked up by patrols, often convey
+valuable information by indicating what troops are in the vicinity.
+
+614. Patrols avoid fighting, except in self-defense or in order to
+prevent the enemy's patrols from gaining valuable information, or when
+necessary in order to accomplish their mission. In such cases, a
+patrol should fight resolutely even though inferior in numbers.
+
+615. Information gained by patrols is generally of no value unless
+received in time to be of use to the commander. Patrol leaders must
+therefore send back information of importance as soon as it is gained
+unless the patrol itself is to return at once.
+
+616. If written, messages should state the place, date, hour, and
+minute of their dispatch. The information contained in them should be
+clearly and concisely expressed. They should be signed by the patrol
+leader.
+
+The authorized message book should be used and the form therein
+adhered to.
+
+617. If the message be an oral one, the patrol leader should require
+the messenger to repeat it before starting back. In general, an oral
+message should cover but one point. Except when there is little chance
+of error in transmission, messages should be written.
+
+618. When in friendly territory and not very far from friendly troops,
+one messenger is sufficient unless the message is very important. In
+hostile territory, either two men should go together or the message
+should be sent in duplicate by different routes.
+
+619. Whether the information gained is of sufficient importance to be
+reported at once or may await the return of the patrol is a question
+which must be decided in each case. In case of reasonable doubt, it is
+generally better to send the report promptly. If the patrol leader has
+received proper instructions before starting out and has the requisite
+ability to lead a patrol, he can generally decide such questions
+satisfactorily as they arise.
+
+620. Infantry patrols are generally used for work within 2 miles of
+supporting troops, but cases arise where they must go to greater
+distances.
+
+621. Patrols composed of mounted scouts are conducted like cavalry
+patrols and should be trained in accordance with the Cavalry Drill
+Regulations.
+
+For distant patrolling, a mounted patrol under an officer should be
+used.
+
+622. For controlling the movements of the patrol, the leader should,
+when necessary, make use of the arm signals prescribed in these
+regulations.
+
+On account of the short distances separating them, ordinary
+communication between members of the patrol is best effected quietly
+by word of mouth.
+
+When a member of a patrol is sent to a distant point, communication
+may be effected by means of simple, prearranged signals.
+
+When practicable, the patrol leader may communicate with the main body
+by means of visual signaling.
+
+
+
+
+PART III.--MARCHES AND CAMPS.
+
+
+
+
+MARCHES.
+
+
+_TRAINING AND DISCIPLINE._
+
+623. Marching constitutes the principal occupation of troops in
+campaign and is one of the heaviest causes of loss. This loss may be
+materially reduced by proper training and by the proper conduct of the
+march.
+
+624. The training of infantry should consist of systematic physical
+exercises to develop the general physique and of actual marching to
+accustom men to the fatigue of bearing arms and equipment.
+
+Before mobilization troops should be kept in good physical condition
+and so practiced as to teach them thoroughly the principles of
+marching. At the first opportunity after mobilization the men should
+be hardened to cover long distances without loss.
+
+625. With new or untrained troops, the process of hardening the men to
+this work must be gradual. Immediately after being mustered into the
+service the physical exercises and marching should be begun.
+Ten-minute periods of vigorous setting-up exercises should be given
+three times a day to loosen and develop the muscles. One march should
+be made each day, with full equipment, beginning with a distance of 2
+or 3 miles and increasing the distance daily as the troops become
+hardened, until a full day's march under full equipment may be made
+without exhaustion.
+
+626. A long march should not be made with untrained troops. If a long
+distance must be covered in a few days, the first march should be
+short, the length being increased each succeeding day.
+
+627. Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the
+care of feet. Shoes should not be too wide or too short. Sores and
+blisters on the feet should be promptly dressed during halts. At the
+end of the march feet should be bathed and dressed; the socks and, if
+practicable, the shoes should be changed.
+
+628. The drinking of water on the march should be avoided. The thirst
+should be thoroughly quenched before starting on the march and after
+arrival in camp. On the march the use of water should, in general, be
+confined to gargling the mouth and throat or to an occasional small
+drink at most.
+
+629. Except for urgent reasons, marches should not begin before an
+hour after daylight, but if the distance to be covered necessitates
+either breaking camp before daylight or making camp after dark, it is
+better to do the former.
+
+Night marching should be avoided when possible.
+
+630. A halt of 15 minutes should be made after the first half or
+three-quarters of an hour of marching; thereafter a halt of 10 minutes
+is made in each hour. The number and length of halts may be varied,
+according to the weather, the condition of the roads, and the
+equipment carried by the men. When the day's march is long a halt of
+an hour should be made at noon and the men allowed to eat.
+
+631. The rate of march is regulated by the commander of the leading
+company of each regiment, or, if the battalions be separated by
+greater than normal distances, by the commander of the leading company
+of each battalion. He should maintain a uniform rate, uninfluenced by
+the movements of troops or mounted men in front of him.
+
+The position of companies in the battalion and of battalions in the
+regiment is ordinarily changed daily so that each in turn leads.
+
+632. The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the
+amount of straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at
+the end of the march.
+
+An officer of each company marches in its rear to prevent undue
+elongation and straggling.
+
+When necessary for a man to fall out on account of sickness, he should
+be given a permit to do so. This is presented to the surgeon, who will
+admit him to the ambulance, have him wait for the trains, or follow
+and rejoin his company at the first halt.
+
+633. Special attention should be paid to the rate of march. It is
+greater for trained than for untrained troops; for small commands than
+for large ones; for lightly burdened than for heavily burdened
+troops. It is greater during cool than during hot weather. With
+trained troops, in commands of a regiment or less, marching over
+average roads, the rate should be from 2-3/4 to 3 miles per hour. With
+larger commands carrying full equipment, the rate will be from 2 to
+2-1/2 miles per hour.
+
+634. The marching capacity of trained infantry in small commands is
+from 20 to 25 miles per day. This distance will decrease as the size
+of the command increases. For a complete division the distance can
+seldom exceed 12-1/2 miles per day unless the division camps in
+column.
+
+635. In large commands the marching capacity of troops is greatly
+reduced by faulty march orders and poor march discipline.
+
+The march order should contain such instructions as will enable the
+troops to take their proper places in column promptly. Delay or
+confusion in doing so should be investigated. On the other hand,
+organization commanders should be required to time their movements so
+that the troops will not be formed sooner than necessary.
+
+The halts and starts of the units of a column should be regulated by
+the watch and be simultaneous.
+
+Closing up during a halt, or changing gait to gain or lose distance
+should be prohibited.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 12._)
+
+
+_PROTECTION OF THE MARCH._
+
+_General Considerations._
+
+636. A column on the march in the vicinity of the enemy is covered by
+detachments called "advance guards," "rear guards," or "flank guards."
+The object of these covering detachments is to facilitate the advance
+of the main body and to protect it from surprise or observation.
+
+They facilitate the advance of the main body by promptly driving off
+small bodies of the enemy who seek to harass or delay it; by removing
+obstacles from the line of advance, by repairing roads, bridges, etc.,
+thus enabling the main body to advance uninterruptedly in convenient
+marching formations.
+
+They protect the main body by preventing the enemy from firing into it
+when in close formation; by holding the enemy and enabling the main
+body to deploy before coming under effective fire; by preventing its
+size and conditions from being observed by the enemy; and, in
+retreat, by gaining time for it to make its escape or to reorganize
+its forces.
+
+637. Tactical units should not be broken in making details for
+covering detachments.
+
+638. The march order of the whole command should explain the
+situation, and, among other things, detail the commander and troops
+for each covering detachment. It should specify the route to be taken
+and the distance to be maintained between the main body and its
+covering detachments. It should order such reconnaissance as the
+commander specially desires to have made.
+
+The order of the commander of a covering detachment should clearly
+explain the situation to subordinates, assign the troops to the
+subdivisions, prescribe their distances, and order such special
+reconnaissance as may be deemed necessary in the beginning.
+
+An advance or flank guard commander marches well to the front and,
+from time to time, orders such additional reconnaissance or makes such
+changes in his dispositions as the circumstances of the case demand.
+
+
+_Advance Guards._
+
+639. An _advance guard_ is a detachment of the main body which
+precedes and covers it on the march.
+
+640. The advance guard commander is responsible for its formation and
+conduct. He should bear in mind that its purpose is to facilitate and
+protect the march of the main body. Its own security must be effected
+by proper dispositions and reconnaissance, not by timid or cautious
+advance. It must advance at normal gait and search aggressively for
+information of the enemy. Its action when the enemy attempts to block
+it with a large force depends upon the situation and plans of the
+commander of the troops.
+
+641. The strength of the advance guard varies from one-twentieth to
+one-third of the main body, depending upon the size of the main body
+and the service expected of the advance guard.
+
+642. The formation of the advance guard must be such that the enemy
+will be met first by a patrol, then in turn by one or more larger
+detachments, each capable of holding the enemy until the next in rear
+has time to deploy before coming under effective fire.
+
+643. Generally an advance guard consisting of a battalion or more is
+divided primarily into the _reserve_ and the _support_. When the
+advance guard consists of less than a battalion, the reserve is
+generally omitted.
+
+644. In an advance guard consisting of two battalions or less, the
+reserve and support, if both are used, are approximately equal; in
+larger advance guards, the reserve is approximately two-thirds of the
+whole detachment.
+
+In an advance guard consisting of one battalion, the machine guns, if
+any, form part of the reserve. In an advance guard consisting of two
+or more battalions, the machine guns form part of the support.
+
+645. The _support_ sends forward an _advance party_. The _advance
+party_, in turn, sends a patrol, called a _point_, still farther to
+the front. Patrols are sent out to the flanks when necessary. When the
+distance between parts of the advance guard or the nature of the
+country is such as to make direct communication difficult, connecting
+files march between the subdivisions to keep up communication. Each
+element of the column sends the necessary connecting files to its
+front.
+
+646. A battalion acting as an advance guard should be formed about as
+follows: The _reserve_, two companies; the _support_, two companies;
+the _advance party_, three to eight squads (about a half company),
+depending upon the strength of the companies and the reconnaissance to
+be made; the _point_, a noncommissioned officer and three or four men.
+Or the reserve may be omitted. In such case the advance party will
+consist of one company preceded by a strong point. The remaining
+companies form the support.
+
+647. The distances separating the parts of an advance guard vary
+according to the mission of the whole force, the size of the advance
+guard, the proximity and character of the enemy, the nature of the
+country, etc. They increase as the strength of the main body
+increases; they are less when operating in rolling, broken country
+than in open country; when in pursuit of a defeated enemy than against
+an aggressive foe; when operating against cavalry than when against
+infantry.
+
+If there be a mounted point, it should precede the dismounted point by
+250 to 600 yards. The advance party may be stronger when there is a
+mounted point in front. The infantry maintains its gait without
+reference to the mounted point, the latter regulating its march on the
+former, (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+648. To afford protection to an infantry column, the country must be
+observed on each side of the road as far as the terrain affords
+positions for effective rifle fire upon the column. If the country
+that it is necessary to observe be open to view from the road,
+_reconnaissance_ is not necessary.
+
+649. The advance guard is responsible for the necessary reconnaissance
+of the country on both sides of the line of march.
+
+Special reconnaissance may be directed by the commander of the troops,
+or cavalry may be reconnoitering at considerable distances to the
+front and flanks, but this does not relieve the advance guard from the
+duty of local reconnaissance.
+
+650. This reconnaissance is effected by patrols sent out by the
+leading subdivisions of the advance guard. In a large advance guard
+the support commander orders the necessary reconnaissance.
+
+Patrols should be sent to the flanks when necessary to reconnoiter a
+specified locality and should rejoin the column and their proper
+subdivision as soon as practicable. When the advance party is strong
+enough, the patrols should be sent out from it. When depleted by the
+patrols sent out, the advance party should be reenforced during a halt
+by men sent forward from the support. If it be impracticable to send
+patrols from the advance party, they will be sent from the support.
+
+Where the country is generally open to view, but localities in it
+might conceal an enemy of some size, reconnaissance is necessary.
+Where the road is exposed to fire and the view is restricted, a patrol
+should be sent to examine the country in the direction from which
+danger threatens. The object may be accomplished by sending patrols to
+observe from prominent points. When the ground permits and the
+necessity exists, patrols may be sent to march abreast of the column
+at distances which permit them to see important features not visible
+from the road.
+
+Mounted scouts or cavalry, when available, should be used for flank
+patrols.
+
+651. Cases may arise where the best means of covering the head and
+flanks of the column will be by a line of skirmishers extending for
+several hundred yards to both sides of the road, and deployed at
+intervals of from 10 to 50 yards. A column may thus protect itself
+when passing through country covered with high corn or similar
+vegetation. In such case, the vegetation forms a natural protection
+from rifle fire beyond very short ranges.
+
+652. Fixed rules for the strength, formation, or conduct of advance
+guards can not be given. Each case must be treated to meet conditions
+as they exist. That solution is generally the best which, with the
+fewest men and unbroken units, amply protects the column and
+facilitates the advance.
+
+
+_Rear Guards._
+
+653. A _rear guard_ is a detachment detailed to protect the main body
+from attack in rear. In a retreat, it checks pursuit and enables the
+main body to increase the distance between it and the enemy and to
+re-form if disorganized.
+
+The general formation is that of an advance guard reversed.
+
+654. Its commander should take advantage of every favorable
+opportunity to delay the pursuers by obstructing the road or by taking
+up specially favorable positions from which to force the enemy to
+deploy. In this latter case care must be taken not to become so
+closely engaged as to render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. The
+position taken should be selected with reference to ease of withdrawal
+and ability to bring the enemy under fire at long range.
+
+655. In large commands artillery and cavalry form a very important
+part of the rear guard.
+
+
+_Flank Guards._
+
+656. A _flank guard_ is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a
+column marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may be
+placed in position to protect the passage, or it may be so marched as
+to cover the passage.
+
+657. The object of the flank guard is to hold the enemy in check long
+enough to enable the main body to pass, or, like the advance guard, to
+enable the main body to deploy.
+
+Like all other detachments, it should be no larger than is necessary,
+and should not be detailed except when its protection is required.
+
+658. When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance
+from the main body should not exceed a mile and a half. Practicable
+communication must exist between it and the main body.
+
+659. The flank guard is marched as a separate command; that is, with
+advance or rear guards or both, as circumstances demand, and with
+patrolling on the exposed flank.
+
+660. At times it may be necessary for an advance-guard commander to
+send out large reconnoitering parties which temporarily assume the
+character and duties of a flank guard. Such parties should be given
+specific orders as to when and where they are to rejoin the column.
+
+
+
+
+CAMPS.
+
+
+_SANITATION._
+
+661. If the area of the available ground is sufficient and suitable,
+the camp of the battalion or regiment should conform to the plates
+published in the Field Service Regulations. Under similar favorable
+conditions, the brigade may camp in column or in line of columns. In
+the latter formation the interval between regiments should be about 50
+yards. When the camp site has a restricted area, intervals and
+distances are reduced.
+
+Under service conditions, camp sites that will permit the encampment
+of regiments and brigades as above indicated will not often be
+available and regularity must be sacrificed.
+
+662. In large commands the halt order should assign camp sites to the
+next smaller commands, and the commanders of the latter should locate
+their respective commands to the best advantage on the area assigned
+them.
+
+
+_The Selection of Camp Sites._
+
+663. In campaign, tactical necessity may leave little choice in the
+selection of camp sites, but under any conditions the requirements of
+sanitation should be given every consideration consistent with the
+tactical situation.
+
+664. Great care should be exercised in selecting sites. In general,
+the following principles govern:
+
+The site should be convenient to an abundant supply of pure water.
+
+Good roads should lead to the camp. Interior communication throughout
+the camp should be easy. A camp near a main road is undesirable on
+account of dust and noise.
+
+Wood, grass, forage, and supplies should be at hand or easily
+obtainable.
+
+The ground should accommodate the command without crowding and without
+compelling the troops of one unit to pass through the camp of another.
+
+The site should be sufficiently high and rolling to drain off storm
+water readily, and, if the season be hot, to catch the breeze. In cold
+weather it should preferably have a southern exposure, with woods to
+the north to break the cold winds. In warm weather an eastern
+exposure, with the site moderately shaded by trees, is desirable.
+
+The site should be dry. For this reason porous soil, covered with
+stout turf and underlaid by a sandy or gravelly subsoil, is best. A
+site on clay soil, or where the ground water approaches the surface,
+is damp, cold, and unhealthful.
+
+Alluvial soils, marshy ground, and ground near the base of hills, or
+near thick woods or dense vegetation, are undesirable as camp sites on
+account of dampness. Ravines and depressions are likely to be unduly
+warm and to have insufficient or undesirable air currents.
+
+Proximity to marshes or stagnant water is undesirable on account of
+the dampness, mosquitoes, and the diseases which the latter transmit.
+The high banks of lakes or large streams often make desirable camp
+sites.
+
+Dry beds of streams should be avoided; they are subject to sudden
+freshet.
+
+665. The occupation of old camp sites is dangerous, since these are
+often permeated by elements of disease which persist for considerable
+periods. Camp sites must be changed promptly when there is evidence of
+soil pollution or when epidemic disease threatens, but the need for
+frequent changes on this account may be a reflection on the sanitary
+administration of the camp.
+
+A change of camp site is often desirable in order to secure a change
+of surroundings and to abandon areas which have become dusty and cut
+up.
+
+
+_Water Supply._
+
+666. Immediately on making camp a guard should be placed over the
+water supply. If the water be obtained from a stream, places should be
+designated for drawing water (1) for drinking and cooking, (2) for
+watering animals, (3) for bathing and washing clothing. The first
+named should be drawn farthest up the stream; the others, in the order
+named, downstream.
+
+If the stream be small, the water supply may be increased by building
+a dam. Small springs may be dug out and each lined with a gabion, or a
+barrel or box with both ends removed, or with stones, the space
+between the lining and the earth being filled with puddled clay. A rim
+of clay should be built to keep out surface drainage. The same method
+may be used near swamps, streams, or lakes to increase or clarify the
+water supply.
+
+667. Water that is not known to be pure should be boiled 20 minutes;
+it should then be cooled and aerated by being poured repeatedly from
+one clean container to another, or it may be purified by approved
+apparatus supplied for the purpose.
+
+668. Arrangements should be made for men to draw water from the
+authorized receptacles by means of a spigot or other similar
+arrangement. The dipping of water from the receptacles, or the use of
+a common drinking cup, should be prohibited.
+
+
+_Kitchens._
+
+669. Camp kettles can be hung on a support consisting of a green pole
+lying in the crotches of two upright posts of the same character.
+
+A narrow trench for the fire, about 1 foot deep, dug under the pole,
+not only protects the fire from the wind but saves fuel. A still
+greater economy of fuel can be effected by digging a similar trench in
+the direction of the wind and slightly narrower than the diameter of
+the kettles. The kettles are then placed on the trench and the space
+between the kettles filled in with stones, clay, etc., leaving the
+flue running beneath the kettles. The draft can be improved by
+building a chimney of stones, clay, etc., at the leeward end of the
+flue.
+
+Four such trenches radiating from a common central chimney will give
+one flue for use whatever may be the direction of the wind.
+
+A slight slope of the flue, from the chimney down, provides for
+drainage and improves the draft.
+
+670. The lack of portable ovens can be met by ovens constructed of
+stone and covered with earth to better retain the heat. If no stone is
+available, an empty barrel, with one head out, is laid on its side,
+covered with wet clay to a depth of 6 or more inches and then with a
+layer of dry earth equally thick. A flue is constructed with the clay
+above the closed end of the barrel, which is then burned out with a
+hot fire. This leaves a baked clay covering for the oven.
+
+A recess can be similarly constructed with boards or even brushwood,
+supported on a horizontal pole resting on upright posts, covered and
+burnt out as in the case of the barrel.
+
+When clay banks are available, an oven may be excavated therein and
+used at once.
+
+To bake in such ovens, first heat them and then close flues and ends.
+
+671. Food must be protected from flies, dust, and sun. Facilities must
+be provided for cleaning and scalding the mess equipment of the men.
+Kitchens and the ground around them must be kept scrupulously clean.
+
+672. Solid refuse should be promptly burned, either in the kitchen
+fire or in an improvised crematory.
+
+673. In temporary camps, if the soil is porous, liquid refuse from the
+kitchens may be strained through gunny sacking into seepage pits dug
+near the kitchen. Flies must not have access to these pits. Boards or
+poles, covered with brush or grass and a layer of earth may be used
+for this purpose. The strainers should also be protected from flies.
+Pits of this kind, dug in clayey soil, will not operate successfully.
+All pits should be filled with earth before marching.
+
+
+_Disposal of Excreta._
+
+674. Immediately on arriving in camp sinks should be dug. This is a
+matter of fundamental sanitary importance, since the most serious
+epidemics of camp diseases are spread from human excreta.
+
+One sink is usually provided for each company and one for the officers
+of each battalion. Those for the men are invariably located on the
+side of camp opposite the kitchens. All sinks should be so placed that
+they can not pollute the water supply or camp site as a result of
+drainage or overflow. To insure this, their location and their
+distance from camp may be varied.
+
+When camp is made for a single night, shallow trenches, 12 inches deep
+and 15 to 18 inches wide, which the men may straddle, will suffice.
+
+In more permanent camps, the trenches should be about 2 feet wide, 6
+feet deep, and 15 feet long. They should be provided with seats and
+back rests made of poles, and should be screened by brush or old tent
+flys.
+
+675. In cold weather the contents of sinks should be covered once
+daily with quicklime, ashes, or dry earth. When filled to within 2
+feet of the top, sinks should be discontinued and filled in.
+
+Open pits are dangerous during the fly season. However, the danger may
+be greatly reduced by covering the excreta with earth or by a thorough
+daily burning of the entire area of the trench. Combustible sweepings
+or straw, saturated with oil, may be used for this purpose.
+
+In fly season, trenches may be closed with seats covered down to the
+ground with muslin and supplied with self-closing lids. Urinal
+troughs, made of muslin and coated with oil or paint, should discharge
+into the trenches.
+
+676. In permanent camps special sanitary facilities for the disposal
+of excreta will ordinarily be provided.
+
+If necessary, urinal tubs may be placed in the company streets at
+night and removed at reveille. Their location should be plainly marked
+and thoroughly and frequently disinfected.
+
+677. When troops bivouac for the night the necessity for extensive
+sanitary precautions is not great; however, shallow sink trenches
+should be dug to prevent general pollution of the vicinity. If the
+cooking be collective, shallow kitchen sinks should be dug. If the
+cooking be individual, the men should be required to build their fires
+on the leeward flank of the camp or bivouac.
+
+Before marching, all trenches should be filled in.
+
+
+_PROTECTION OF CAMP OR BIVOUAC._
+
+_General Considerations._
+
+678. The outpost is a covering detachment detailed to secure the camp
+or bivouac against surprise and to prevent an attack upon it before
+the troops can prepare to resist.
+
+679. The size and disposition of the outpost will depend upon many
+circumstances, such as the size of the whole command, the proximity of
+the enemy and the situation with respect to him, the nature of the
+terrain, etc.
+
+A suitable strength may vary from a very small fraction to one-third
+of the whole force. For a single company in bivouac a few sentinels
+and patrols will suffice; for a large command a more elaborate outpost
+system must be provided. It should be no stronger than is consistent
+with reasonable security.
+
+The most economical protection is furnished by keeping close contact
+with the enemy by means of outpost patrols, in conjunction with
+resisting detachments on the avenues of approach.
+
+The outpost should be composed of complete organizations.
+
+680. In a brigade or smaller force on the march toward the enemy, the
+outpost is generally formed from the advance guard, and is relieved
+the following day when the new advance guard crosses the line of
+outguards. In a retreat, the detail for outpost duty is generally made
+from the main body. The new outpost becomes the rear guard the
+following day.
+
+681. When, as in large forces, an advance and rear guard performs such
+duty for several days, the outpost, during this period, is furnished
+by the advance or rear guards.
+
+When the command is small and stationary for several days, the outpost
+is relieved daily. In large commands, the outpost will, as a rule, be
+relieved at intervals of several days.
+
+682. The positions held by the subdivisions of the outpost should
+generally be prepared for defense, but conditions may render this
+unnecessary.
+
+Troops on outpost keep concealed as much as is consistent with the
+proper performance of their duties; especially do they avoid appearing
+on the sky line.
+
+Outpost troops do not render honors.
+
+
+_Distribution of Outpost Troops._
+
+683. The outpost will generally be divided into three parts. These, in
+order from the main body, are the _reserve_, the line of _supports_,
+and the line of _outguards_.
+
+The distances separating these parts, and their distance from the main
+body, will depend upon the object sought, the nature of the terrain,
+and the size of the command. There can be no uniformity in the
+distance between supports and reserve, nor between outguards and
+supports, even in the same outpost. The avenues of approach and the
+important features of the terrain will largely control their exact
+positions.
+
+The outpost of a small force should ordinarily hold the enemy beyond
+effective rifle range of the main body until the latter can deploy.
+For the same purpose the outpost of a large force should hold the
+enemy beyond artillery range.
+
+684. The _reserve_ constitutes the main body of the outpost and is
+held at some central point from which it can readily _support the
+troops in front_ or _hold a rallying position_ on which they may
+retire. The reserve may be omitted when the outpost consists of less
+than two companies.
+
+The reserve may comprise one-fourth to two-thirds of the strength of
+the outpost.
+
+685. The _supports_ constitute a line of _supporting_ and _resisting_
+detachments, varying in size from a half company to a battalion. They
+furnish the line of _outguards_.
+
+The supports are numbered consecutively from right to left. They are
+placed at the more important points on the outpost line, usually in
+the line on which resistance is to be made in case of attack.
+
+686. As a general rule, roads exercise the greatest influence on the
+location of supports, and a support will generally be placed on or
+near a road. The section which it is to cover should be clearly
+defined by means of tangible lines on the ground and should be such
+that the support is centrally located therein.
+
+687. The _outguards_ constitute the line of small detachments farthest
+to the front and nearest to the enemy. For convenience they are
+classified as _pickets_, _sentry squads_, and _cossack posts_. They
+are numbered consecutively from right to left in each support.
+
+688. A _picket_ is a group consisting of two or more squads,
+ordinarily not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of
+outguards to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or
+more sentinels, double sentinels, sentry squads, or cossack posts for
+_observation_.
+
+Pickets are placed at the more important points in the line of
+outguards, such as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the
+number of small groups required to observe properly its sector.
+
+689. A _sentry squad_ is a squad posted in _observation_ at an
+indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the
+remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels.
+In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol.
+
+690. A _cossack post_ consists of four men. It is an _observation_
+group similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel.
+
+691. At night, it will sometimes be advisable to place some of the
+outguards or their sentinels in a position different from that which
+they occupy in the daytime. In such case the ground should be
+carefully studied before dark and the change made at dusk. However, a
+change in the position of the outguard will be exceptional.
+
+692. _Sentinels_ are generally used singly in daytime, but at night
+double sentinels will be required in most cases. Sentinels furnished
+by cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near their group. Those
+furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away.
+
+Every sentinel should be able to communicate readily with the body to
+which he belongs.
+
+693. Sentinel posts are numbered consecutively from right to left in
+each outguard. Sentry squads and cossack posts furnished by pickets
+are counted as sentinel posts.
+
+694. Instead of using outguards along the entire front of observation,
+part of this front may be covered by _patrols_ only. These should be
+used to cover such sections of the front as can be crossed by the
+enemy only with difficulty and over which he is not likely to attempt
+a crossing after dark.
+
+In daylight much of the local patrolling may be dispensed with if the
+country can be seen from the posts of the sentinels. However, patrols
+should frequently be pushed well to the front unless the ground in
+that direction is exceptionally open.
+
+695. Patrols or sentinels must be the first troops which the enemy
+meets, and each body in rear must have time to prepare for the blow.
+These bodies cause as much delay as possible without sacrificing
+themselves, and gradually retire to the line where the outpost is to
+make its resistance.
+
+696. Patrols must be used to keep up connection between the parts of
+the outpost except when, during daylight, certain fractions or groups
+are mutually visible. After dark this connection must be maintained
+throughout the outpost except where the larger subdivisions are
+provided with wire communication.
+
+697. In addition to ordinary outguards, the outpost commander may
+detail from the reserve one or more _detached posts_ to cover roads or
+areas not in the general line assigned to the supports.
+
+In like manner the commander of the whole force may order _detached
+posts_ to be sent from the main body to cover important roads or
+localities not included in the outpost line.
+
+The number and strength of detached posts are reduced to the absolute
+needs of the situation.
+
+
+_Establishing the Outpost._
+
+698. The outpost is posted as quickly as possible so that the troops
+can the sooner obtain rest. Until the leading outpost troops are able
+to assume their duties, temporary protection, known as the _march
+outpost_, is furnished by the nearest available troops.
+
+699. The halt order of the commander, besides giving the necessary
+information and assigning camp sites to the parts of the command,
+details the troops to constitute the outpost, assigns a commander
+therefor, designates the general line to be occupied, and, when
+practicable, points out the position to be held in case of attack.
+
+700. The outpost commander, upon receipt of this order, should issue
+the outpost order with the least practicable delay. In large commands
+it may often be necessary to give the order from the map, but usually
+the outpost commander will have to make some preliminary
+reconnaissance, unless he has an accurate and detailed map.
+
+The order gives such available information of the situation as is
+necessary to the complete and proper guidance of subordinates;
+designates the troops to constitute the supports; assigns their
+location and the sector each is to cover; provides for the necessary
+detached posts; indicates any special reconnaissance that is to be
+made; orders the location and disposition of the reserve; disposes of
+the train if same is ordered to join the outpost; and informs
+subordinates where information will be sent.
+
+701. Generally it is preferable for the outpost commander to give
+verbal orders to his support commanders from some locality which
+overlooks the terrain. The time and locality should be so selected
+that the support commanders may join their commands and conduct them
+to their positions without causing unnecessary delay to their troops.
+The reserve commander should, if possible, receive his orders at the
+same time as the support commanders. Subordinates to whom he gives
+orders separately should be informed of the location of other parts of
+the outpost.
+
+In large outposts, written orders are frequently most convenient.
+
+After issuing the initial orders, the outpost commander inspects the
+outpost, orders the necessary changes or additions, and sends his
+superior a report of his dispositions.
+
+702. The _reserve_ is marched to its post by its commander, who then
+sends out such detachments as have been ordered and places the rest in
+camp or bivouac, over which at least one sentinel should be posted.
+Connection must be maintained with the main body, the supports and
+nearby detached posts.
+
+703. The _supports_ march to their posts, using the necessary covering
+detachments when in advance of the march outpost. A support
+commander's order should fully explain the situation to subordinates,
+or to the entire command, if it be small. It should detail the troops
+for the different outguards and, when necessary, define the sector
+each is to cover. It should provide the necessary sentinels at the
+post of the support, the patrols to be sent therefrom, and should
+arrange for the necessary intrenching. Connection should be maintained
+with adjoining supports and with the outguards furnished by the
+support.
+
+704. In posting his command the support commander must seek to cover
+his sector in such manner that the enemy can not reach, in dangerous
+numbers and unobserved, the position of the support or pass by it
+within the sector intrusted to the support. On the other hand, he must
+economize men on observation and patrol duty, for these duties are
+unusually fatiguing. He must practice the greatest economy of men
+consistent with the requirements of practical security.
+
+705. As soon as the posting of the support is completed, its commander
+carefully inspects the dispositions and corrects defects, if any, and
+reports the disposition of his support, including the patrolling
+ordered, to the outpost commander. This report is preferably made by
+means of a sketch.
+
+706. Each _outguard_ is marched by its commander to its assigned
+station, and, especially in the case of a picket, is covered by the
+necessary patrolling to prevent surprise.
+
+Having reached the position, the commander explains the situation to
+his men and establishes reliefs for each sentinel, and, if possible,
+for each patrol to be furnished. Besides these sentinels and patrols,
+a picket must have a sentinel at its post.
+
+The commander then posts the sentinels and points out to them the
+principal features, such as towns, roads, and streams, and gives their
+names. He gives the direction and location of the enemy, if known, and
+of adjoining parts of the outpost.
+
+He gives to patrols the same information and the necessary orders as
+to their routes and the frequency with which the same shall be
+covered. Each patrol should go over its route once before dark.
+
+707. Every picket should maintain connection by patrols with outguards
+on its right and left. Each commander will take precaution to conceal
+his outguard and will generally strengthen his position by
+intrenching.
+
+
+
+
+PART IV.--CEREMONIES AND INSPECTIONS.
+
+
+
+
+CEREMONIES.
+
+
+_General Rules for Ceremonies._
+
+708. The order in which the troops of the various arms are arranged
+for ceremonies is prescribed by Army Regulations.
+
+When forming for ceremonies the companies of the battalion and the
+battalions of the regiment are posted from right to left in line and
+from head to rear in column, in the order of rank of their respective
+commanders present in the formation, the senior on the right or at the
+head.
+
+The commander faces the command; subordinate commanders face to the
+front.
+
+709. At the command _present arms_, given by the colonel, the
+lieutenant colonel and the colonel's staff salute; the major's staff
+salute at the major's command. Each staff returns to the carry or
+order when the command _order arms_ is given by its chief.
+
+710. At the _assembly_ for a ceremony companies are formed on their
+own parades and informally inspected.
+
+At _adjutant's call_, except for ceremonies involving a single
+battalion, each battalion is formed on its own parade, reports are
+received, and the battalion presented to the major. At the second
+sounding of _adjutant's call_ the regiment is formed.
+
+
+_REVIEWS._
+
+_General Rules._
+
+711. The adjutant posts men or otherwise marks the points where the
+column changes direction in such manner that its flank in passing will
+be about 12 paces from the reviewing officer.
+
+The post of the reviewing officer, usually opposite the center of the
+line, is indicated by a marker.
+
+Officers of the same or higher grade, and distinguished personages
+invited to accompany the reviewing officer, place themselves on his
+left; their staffs and orderlies place themselves respectively on the
+left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer; all others
+who accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of
+his staff, their orderlies in rear. A staff officer is designated to
+escort distinguished personages and to indicate to them their proper
+positions.
+
+712. While riding around the troops, the reviewing officer may direct
+his staff, flag, and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing
+officer, or that only his personal staff and flag shall accompany him;
+in either case the commanding officer alone accompanies the reviewing
+officer. If the reviewing officer is accompanied by his entire staff,
+the staff officers of the commander place themselves on the right of
+the staff of the reviewing officer.
+
+The reviewing officer and others at the reviewing stand salute the
+color as it passes; when passing around the troops, the reviewing
+officer and those accompanying him salute the color when passing in
+front of it.
+
+The reviewing officer returns the salute of the commanding officer of
+the troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing officer do not
+salute. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 4 and 6._)
+
+713. In passing in review, each staff salutes with its commander.
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 4._)
+
+714. After saluting the reviewing officer, the commanding officer of
+the troops turns out of the column, takes post on the right of the
+reviewing officer, and returns saber; the members of his staff
+accompanying him take post on the right of the reviewing officer's
+staff and return saber. When the rear element of his command has
+passed, without changing his position, the commanding officer of the
+troops salutes the reviewing officer; he and the members of his staff
+accompanying him then draw saber and rejoin his command. The
+commanding officer of the troops and the members of his staff are the
+only ones who turn out of the column.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 10._)
+
+715. If the person reviewing the command is not mounted, the
+commanding officer and his staff on turning out of the column after
+passing the reviewing officer dismount preparatory to taking post. In
+such case, the salute of the commanding officer, prior to rejoining
+his command, is made with the hand before remounting.
+
+716. When the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor,
+each regimental color salutes at the command _present arms_, given or
+repeated by the major of the battalion with which it is posted; and
+again in passing in review.
+
+717. The band of an organization plays while the reviewing officer is
+passing in front of and in rear of the organization.
+
+Each band, immediately after passing the reviewing officer, turns out
+of the column, takes post in front of and facing him, continues to
+play until its regiment has passed, then ceases playing and follows in
+rear of its regiment; the band of the following regiment commences to
+play as soon as the preceding band has ceased.
+
+While marching in review but one band in each brigade plays at a time,
+and but one band at a time when within 100 paces of the reviewing
+officer.
+
+718. If the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor,
+the band plays the prescribed _national air_ or the field music sounds
+_to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_ when arms are
+presented. When passing in review at the moment the regimental color
+salutes, the musicians halted in front of the reviewing officer, sound
+_to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+6._)
+
+719. The formation for review may be modified to suit the ground, and
+the _present arms_ and the ride around the line by the reviewing
+officer may be dispensed with.
+
+720. If the post of the reviewing officer is on the left of the
+column, the troops march in review with the guide left; the commanding
+officer and his staff turn out of the column to the left, taking post
+as prescribed above, but to the left of the reviewing officer; in
+saluting, the captains give the command: 1. _Eyes_, 2. _LEFT_.
+
+721. Except in the review of a single battalion, the troops pass in
+review in quick time only.
+
+722. In reviews of brigades or larger commands, each battalion, after
+the rear has passed the reviewing officer 50 paces, takes the double
+time for 100 yards in order not to interfere with the march of the
+column in rear; if necessary, it then turns out of the column and
+returns to camp by the most practicable route; the leading battalion
+of each regiment is followed by the other units of the regiment.
+
+723. In a brigade or larger review a regimental commander may cause
+his regiment to stand _at ease_, _rest_, or _stack arms_ and _fall
+out_ and _resume attention_, so as not to interfere with the ceremony.
+
+724. When an organization is to be reviewed before an inspector junior
+in rank to the commanding officer, the commanding officer receives
+the review and is accompanied by the inspector, who takes post on his
+left.
+
+
+_Battalion Review._
+
+725. The battalion having been formed in line, the major faces to the
+front; the reviewing officer moves a few paces toward the major and
+halts; the major turns about and commands: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_,
+and again turns about and salutes.
+
+The reviewing officer returns the salute; the major turns about,
+brings the battalion to order arms, and again turns to the front.
+
+The reviewing officer approaches to about 6 paces from the major, the
+latter salutes, takes post on his right, and accompanies him around
+the battalion. The band plays. The reviewing officer proceeds to the
+right of the band, passes in front of the captains to the left of the
+line and returns to the right, passing in rear of the file closers and
+the band.
+
+On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes, halts,
+and when the reviewing officer and staff have passed moves directly to
+his post in front of the battalion, faces it, and commands: 1. _Pass
+in review_, 2. _Squads right_, 3. _MARCH_.
+
+At the first command the band changes direction if necessary, and
+halts.
+
+At the third command, given when the band has changed direction, the
+battalion moves off, the band playing; without command from the major
+the column changes direction at the points indicated, and column of
+companies at full distance is formed successively to the left at the
+second change of direction; the major takes his post 30 paces in front
+of the band immediately after the second change; the band having
+passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left out of the column,
+takes post in front of and facing the reviewing officer, and remains
+there until the review terminates.
+
+The major and staff salute, turn the head as in _eyes right_, and look
+toward the reviewing officer when the major is 6 paces from him; they
+return to the carry and turn the head and eyes to the front when the
+major has passed 6 paces beyond him.
+
+Without facing about, each captain or special unit commander, except
+the drum major, commands: 1. _Eyes_, in time to add, 2. _RIGHT_, when
+at 6 paces from the reviewing officer, and commands _FRONT_ when at 6
+paces beyond him. At the command _eyes_ the company officers armed
+with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the
+command _right_ all turn head and eyes to the right, the company
+officers complete _present saber_ and the noncommissioned officers
+armed with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the
+command _front_ all turn head and eyes to the front, and officers and
+noncommissioned officers armed with the saber resume the carry saber;
+without arms in hand the first motion of the hand salute is made at
+the command _right_ and the second motion not made until the command
+_front_.
+
+Noncommissioned staff officers, noncommissioned officers in command of
+subdivisions, and the drum major salute, turn the head and eyes,
+return to the front, resume the carry or drop the hand, at the points
+prescribed for the major. Officers and dismounted noncommissioned
+officers in command of subdivisions with arms in hand render the rifle
+or saber salute. Guides charged with the step, trace, and direction do
+not execute _eyes right_.
+
+If the reviewing officer is entitled to a salute from the colors, the
+regimental color salutes when at 6 paces from him, and is raised when
+at 6 paces beyond him.
+
+The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the reviewing
+officer, returns saber and remains there until the rear of the
+battalion has passed, then salutes, draws saber, and rejoins his
+battalion. The band ceases to play when the column has completed its
+second change of direction after passing the reviewing officer.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 10._)
+
+726. When the battalion arrives at its original position in column,
+the major commands: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The band plays in double time.
+
+The battalion passes in review as before, except that in double time
+the command _eyes right_ is omitted and there is no saluting except by
+the major when he leaves the reviewing officer.
+
+The review terminates when the rear company has passed the reviewing
+officer; the band then ceases to play, and, unless otherwise directed
+by the major, returns to the position it occupied before marching in
+review, or is dismissed; the major rejoins the battalion and brings it
+to _quick time_. The battalion then executes such movements as the
+reviewing officer may have directed, or is marched to its parade
+ground and dismissed.
+
+Marching past in double time may, in the discretion of the reviewing
+officer, be omitted; the review terminates when the major rejoins his
+battalion.
+
+727. At battalion review the major and his staff may be dismounted in
+the discretion of the commanding officer.
+
+
+_Regimental Review._
+
+728. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses.
+
+In line the review proceeds as in the battalion, substituting
+"colonel" for "major" and "regiment" for "battalion."
+
+To march the regiment in review, the colonel commands: _PASS IN
+REVIEW_. The band changes direction, if necessary, and halts. Each
+major then commands: 1. _Squads right_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The band marches at the command of the major of the leading battalion.
+
+At the second change of direction each major takes post 20 paces in
+front of his leading company.
+
+The rear of the column having passed the reviewing officer, the
+battalions, unless otherwise directed, are marched to their parades
+and dismissed.
+
+In line of masses, when the reviewing officer has passed around the
+regiment, the colonel commands: _PASS IN REVIEW_. The band changes
+direction, if necessary, and halts. The major of the right battalion
+then commands: 1. _Column of squads, first company, squads right_, 2.
+_MARCH_. At the third command the band and the leading company of the
+right battalion move off. Each company and battalion in rear moves off
+in time to follow at its proper distance.
+
+729. The review of a small body of troops composed of different arms
+is conducted on the principles laid down for the regiment. The troops
+of each arm are formed and marched according to the drill regulations
+for that arm.
+
+
+_Review of Large Commands._
+
+730. A command consisting of one regiment, or less, and detachments of
+other arms is formed for review as ordered by the commanding officer.
+The principles of regimental review will be observed whenever
+practicable.
+
+731. In the review of a brigade or larger command the _present arms_
+and the ride around the line by the reviewing officer are omitted. The
+troops form and march in the order prescribed by the commanding
+officer.
+
+
+_PARADES._
+
+_General Rules._
+
+732. If dismounted, the officer receiving the parade, and his staff,
+stand at parade rest, with arms folded, while the band is sounding
+off; they resume attention with the adjutant. If mounted, they remain
+at attention.
+
+733. At the command _report_, given by a battalion adjutant, the
+captains in succession from the right salute and report: _A (_ or
+_other) company, present_ or _accounted for_; or, _A (_or _other)
+company, (so many) officers_ or _enlisted men absent_, and resume the
+order saber; at the same command given by the regimental adjutant, the
+majors similarly report their battalions.
+
+
+_Battalion Parade._
+
+734. At _adjutant's call_ the battalion is formed in line but not
+presented. Lieutenants take their posts in front of the center of
+their respective platoons at the captain's command for dressing his
+company on the line. The major takes post at a convenient distance in
+front of the center and facing the battalion.
+
+The adjutant, from his post in front of the center of the battalion,
+after commanding: 1. _Guides_, 2. _POSTS_, adds: 1. _Parade_, 2.
+_REST_; the battalion executes parade rest. The adjutant directs the
+band: _SOUND OFF_.
+
+The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the line of
+officers to the left of the line and back to its post on the right,
+when it ceases playing. At evening parade, when the band ceases
+playing, _retreat_ is sounded by the field music and, following the
+last note and while the flag is being lowered, the band plays the
+_Star Spangled Banner_.
+
+Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant comes to attention,
+and, as the last note ends, commands: 1. _Battalion_, 2. _ATTENTION_,
+3. _Present_, 4. _ARMS_, and salutes, retaining that position until
+the last note of the National Anthem. He then turns about and reports:
+_Sir, the parade is formed_. The major directs the adjutant: _Take
+your post, Sir_. The adjutant moves at a trot (if dismounted, in quick
+time), passes by the major's right, and takes his post.
+
+The major draws saber and commands: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_, and adds
+such exercises in the manual of arms as he may desire. Officers,
+noncommissioned officers commanding companies or armed with the saber,
+and the color guard, having once executed order arms, remain in that
+position during the exercises in the manual.
+
+The major then directs the adjutant: _Receive the reports, Sir_. The
+adjutant, passing by the major's right, advances at a trot (if
+dismounted, in quick time) toward the center of the line, halts
+midway between it and the major, and commands: _REPORT_.
+
+The reports received, the adjutant turns about, and reports: _Sir, all
+are present or accounted for_; or _Sir, (so many) officers_ or
+_enlisted men are absent_, including in the list of absentees those
+from the band and field music reported to him by the drum major prior
+to the parade.
+
+The major directs: _Publish the orders, Sir_.
+
+The adjutant turns about and commands: _Attention to orders_; he then
+reads the orders, and commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _CENTER_, 3.
+_MARCH_.
+
+At the command _center_, the company officers carry saber and face to
+the center. At the command _march_, they close to the center and face
+to the front; the adjutant turns about and takes his post.
+
+The officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior
+commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_. The officers advance, the band
+playing; the left officer of the center or right center company is the
+guide, and marches on the major; the officers are halted at 6 paces
+from the major by the senior who commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _HALT_.
+They halt and salute, returning to the carry saber with the major. The
+major then gives such instructions as he deems necessary, and
+commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _POSTS_, 3. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _posts_, company officers face about.
+
+At the command _march_, they step off with guide as before, and the
+senior commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _HALT_, so as to halt 3 paces from
+the line; he then adds: 1. _POSTS_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _posts_, officers face outward and, at the command
+_march_, step off in succession at 4 paces distance, resume their
+posts and order saber; the lieutenants march directly to their posts
+in rear of their companies.
+
+The music ceases when all officers have resumed their posts.
+
+The major then commands: 1. _Pass in review_, 2. _Squads right_, 3.
+_MARCH_, and returns saber.
+
+The battalion marches according to the principles of review; when the
+last company has passed, the ceremony is concluded.
+
+The band continues to play while the companies are in march upon the
+parade ground. Companies are formed in column of squads, without
+halting, and are marched to their respective parades by their
+captains.
+
+When the company officers have saluted the major, he may direct them
+to form line with the staff, in which case they individually move to
+the front, passing to the right and left of the major and staff, halt
+on the line established by the staff, face about, and stand at
+attention. The music ceases when the officers join the staff. The
+major causes the companies to pass in review under the command of
+their first sergeants by the same commands as before. The company
+officers return saber with the major and remain at attention.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 19._)
+
+
+_Regimental Parade._
+
+735. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses; the
+formation having proceeded up to, but not including the _present_, the
+parade proceeds as described for the battalion, with the following
+exceptions:
+
+"Colonel" is substituted for "major," "regiment" for "battalion," in
+the description, and "battalions" for "battalion" in the commands.
+
+Lieutenants remain in the line of file closers.
+
+After publishing the orders, the adjutant commands: 1. _Officers,
+center_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The company commanders remain at their posts with their companies.
+
+The field and staff officers form one line, closing on the center. The
+senior commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The second major is the guide and marches on the colonel.
+
+After being dismissed by the colonel, each major moves individually to
+the front, turns outward, and followed by his staff resumes his post
+by the most direct line. The colonel directs the lieutenant colonel to
+march the regiment in review; the latter moves to a point midway
+between the colonel and the regiment and marches the regiment in
+review as prescribed. If the lieutenant colonel is not present the
+colonel gives the necessary commands for marching the regiment in
+review.
+
+
+_ESCORTS._
+
+_Escort of the Color._
+
+736. The regiment being in line, or line of masses, the colonel
+details a company, other than the color company, to receive and escort
+the national color to its place. During the ceremony the regimental
+color remains with the color guard at its post with the regiment.
+
+The band moves straight to its front until clear of the line of field
+officers, changes direction to the right, and is halted; the
+designated company forms column of platoons in rear of the band, the
+color bearer or bearers between the platoons.
+
+The escort then marches without music to the colonel's office or
+quarters and is formed in line facing the entrance, the band on the
+right, the color bearer in the line of file closers.
+
+The color bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed by a
+sergeant of the escort, then goes to obtain the color.
+
+When the color bearer comes out, followed by the lieutenant and
+sergeant, he halts before the entrance, facing the escort; the
+lieutenant places himself on the right, the sergeant on the left of
+the color bearer; the escort presents arms, and the field music sounds
+_to the color_; the first lieutenant and sergeant salute.
+
+Arms are brought to the order; the lieutenant and sergeant return to
+their posts; the company is formed in column of platoons, the band
+taking post in front of the column; the color bearer places himself
+between the platoons; the escort marches in quick time, with guide
+left, back to the regiment, the band playing; the march is so
+conducted that when the escort arrives at 50 paces in front of the
+right of the regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to
+its front; when the color arrives opposite its place in line, the
+escort is formed in line to the left; the color bearer, passing
+between the platoons, advances and halts 12 paces in front of the
+colonel.
+
+The color bearer having halted, the colonel, who has taken post 30
+paces in front of the center of his regiment, faces about, commands:
+1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_, resumes his front, and salutes; the field
+music sounds _to the color_; and the color bearer executes the color
+salute at the command _present arms_.
+
+The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to the order, at
+which the color bearer resumes the carry and takes his post with the
+color company.
+
+The escort presents arms and comes to the order with the regiment, at
+the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it again in
+column of platoons, and, preceded by the band, marches it to its
+place, passing around the left flank of the regiment.
+
+The band plays until the escort passes the left of the line, when it
+ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear
+of the regiment.
+
+The regiment may be brought to a rest when the escort passes the left
+of the line. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 19._)
+
+737. Escort of the color is executed by a battalion according to the
+same principles.
+
+
+_Escorts of Honor._
+
+738. Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiving and
+escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for
+this purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior
+discipline.
+
+The escort forms in line, opposite the place where the personage
+presents himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it
+will march. On the appearance of the personage, he is received with
+the honors due to his rank. The escort is formed into column of
+companies, platoons or squads, and takes up the march, the personage
+and his staff or retinue taking positions in rear of the column; when
+he leaves the escort, line is formed and the same honors are paid as
+before.
+
+When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the
+point where the personage is to be received, as for instance, where a
+courtyard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels is posted
+from that point to the escort, facing inward; the sentinels
+successively salute as he passes and are then relieved and join the
+escort.
+
+An officer is appointed to attend him and bear such communication as
+he may have to make to the commander of the escort.
+
+
+_Funeral Escort._
+
+739. The composition and strength of the escort are prescribed in Army
+Regulations.
+
+The escort is formed opposite the quarters of the deceased; the band
+on that flank of the escort toward which it is to march.
+
+Upon the appearance of the coffin, the commander commands: 1.
+_Present_, 2. _ARMS_, and the band plays an appropriate air; arms are
+then brought to the order.
+
+The escort is next formed into column of companies, platoons, or
+squads. If the escort be small, it may be marched in line. The
+procession is formed in the following order: 1. _Music_, 2. _Escort_,
+3. _Clergy_, 4. _Coffin and pallbearers_, 5. _Mourners_, 6. _Members
+of the former command of the deceased_, 7. _Other officers and
+enlisted men_, 8. _Distinguished persons_, 9. _Delegations_, 10.
+_Societies_, 11. _Civilians_. Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and
+7), with side arms, are in the order of rank, seniors in front.
+
+The procession being formed, the commander of the escort puts it in
+march.
+
+The escort marches slowly to solemn music; the column having arrived
+opposite the grave, line is formed facing it.
+
+The coffin is then carried along the front of the escort to the grave;
+arms are presented, the music plays an appropriate air; the coffin
+having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and arms are
+brought to the order.
+
+The commander next commands: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_. The escort
+executes _parade rest_, officers and men inclining the head.
+
+When the funeral services are completed and the coffin lowered into
+the grave the commander causes the escort to resume attention and fire
+three rounds of blank cartridges, the muzzles of the pieces being
+elevated. When the escort is greater than a battalion, one battalion
+is designated to fire the volleys.
+
+A musician then sounds _taps_.
+
+The escort is then formed into column, marched in quick time to the
+point where it was assembled, and dismissed.
+
+The band does not play until it has left the inclosure.
+
+When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the
+escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may march _at ease_ in
+quick time until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought
+to attention. The music does not play while marching _at ease_.
+
+In marching at attention, the field music may alternate with the band
+in playing.
+
+740. When arms are presented at the funeral of a person entitled to
+any of the following honors, the band plays the prescribed _national
+air_, or the field music sounds _to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_,
+or _ruffles_, according to the rank of the deceased, after which the
+band plays an appropriate air. The commander of the escort, in forming
+column, gives the appropriate commands for the different arms.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 6._)
+
+741. At the funeral of a mounted officer or enlisted man, his horse,
+in mourning caparison, follows the hearse.
+
+742. Should the entrance of the cemetery prevent the hearse
+accompanying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the column
+is halted at the entrance long enough to take the coffin from the
+hearse, when the column is again put in march. The Cavalry and
+Artillery, when unable to enter the inclosure, turn out of the column,
+face the column, and salute the remains as they pass.
+
+743. When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters of the
+deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are presented
+upon receiving the remains at the quarters and also as they are borne
+into the church.
+
+744. The commander of the escort, previous to the funeral, gives the
+clergyman and pallbearers all needful directions.
+
+
+
+
+INSPECTIONS.
+
+
+_Company Inspection._
+
+745. Being in line at a halt: 1. _Open ranks_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_ the front rank executes right dress; the rear
+rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and execute
+right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective flanks and
+take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of
+their respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear
+rank, and file closers, takes post 3 paces in front of the right
+guide, facing to the left, and commands: 1. _FRONT_, 2. _PREPARE FOR
+INSPECTION_.
+
+At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain returns
+saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order saber, and
+stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection they carry saber,
+face about, and order saber. The captain may direct the lieutenants to
+accompany or assist him, in which case they return saber and, at the
+close of the inspection, resume their posts in front of the company,
+draw and carry saber.
+
+Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the right of
+the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, executes
+_inspection arms_.
+
+The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just
+above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain inspects
+the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in
+receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left
+hand at the balance and executes _order arms_.
+
+As the captain returns the piece the next man executes _inspection
+arms_, and so on through the company.
+
+Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes
+_order arms_ as soon as the captain passes to the next man.
+
+The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to right
+in rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers.
+
+When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes _inspection
+saber_. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute _inspection pistol_
+by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding it diagonally
+across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the neck, muzzle
+pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to the holster as
+soon as the captain passes.
+
+Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing to the
+left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants and
+commands: 1. _Close ranks_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_ the lieutenants resume their posts in line; the
+rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the
+file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank.
+
+746. If the company is dismissed, rifles are put away. In quarters,
+headdress and accouterments are removed and the men stand near their
+respective bunks; in camp they stand covered, but without
+accouterments, in front of their tents.
+
+If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks and
+its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man will arrange
+the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters or permanent camp,
+or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter tent camp, in the
+same relative order as directed in paragraph 747.
+
+The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the
+quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and calls
+the men to attention on entering each squad room or on approaching the
+tents; the men stand at attention but do not salute. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+16._)
+
+747. If the inspection is to include an examination of the equipment
+while in ranks, the captain, after closing ranks, causes the company
+to stack arms, to march backward until 4 paces in rear of the stacks
+and to take intervals. He then commands: 1. _UNSLING EQUIPMENT_, 2.
+_OPEN PACKS_.
+
+At the first command, each man unslings his equipment and places it on
+the ground at his feet, haversack to the front end of the pack 1 foot
+in front of toes.
+
+At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs removed and
+unrolled, the longer edge of the pack along the lower edge of the
+cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter tent pins, removes meat can,
+knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and places them on the
+right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon in the open meat can;
+removes the canteen and cup from the cover and places them on the left
+side of the haversack; unstraps and spreads out haversack so as to
+expose its contents; folds up the carrier to uncover the cartridge
+pockets; opens same; unrolls toilet articles and places them on the
+outer flap of the haversack; places underwear carried in pack on the
+left half of the open pack, with round fold parallel with front edge
+of pack; opens first-aid pouch and exposes contents to view. Special
+articles carried by individual men, such as flag kit, field glasses,
+compass, steel tape, notebook, etc., will be arranged on the right
+half of the open pack. Each man then resumes the attention. Plate VI
+shows the relative position of all articles except underwear and
+special articles.
+
+The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers as before,
+inspects the equipment, returns to the right, and commands: _CLOSE
+PACKS_.
+
+Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up his
+haversack and its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, fork, and
+spoon, and the canteen and cup; closes cartridge pockets and first-aid
+pouch; restores special articles to their proper receptacles; rolls up
+and replaces pack in carrier; and, leaving the equipment in its
+position on the ground, resumes the attention.
+
+All equipments being packed, the captain commands: _SLING EQUIPMENT_.
+
+The equipments are slung and belts fastened.
+
+The captain then causes the company to assemble and take arms. The
+inspection is completed as already explained.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 16._)
+
+748. Should the inspector be other than the captain, the latter, after
+commanding _front_, adds _REST_, and faces to the front. When the
+inspector approaches, the captain faces to the left, brings the
+company to attention, faces to the front, and salutes. The salute
+acknowledged, the captain carries saber, faces to the left, commands:
+_PREPARE FOR INSPECTION_, and again faces to the front.
+
+The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber and
+accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him.
+
+
+_Battalion Inspection._
+
+749. If there be both inspection and review, the inspection may either
+precede or follow the review.
+
+The battalion being in column of companies at full distance, all
+officers dismounted, the major commands: 1. _Prepare for inspection_,
+2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the first command each captain commands: _Open ranks_.
+
+At the command _march_ the ranks are opened in each company, as in the
+inspection of the company.
+
+The field musicians join their companies.
+
+The drum major conducts the band to a position 30 paces in rear of the
+column, if not already there, and opens ranks.
+
+The major takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of the
+center of the leading company. The staff takes post as if mounted. The
+color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff.
+
+Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not take
+post in front of the column but accompany him.
+
+The inspector inspects the major, and, accompanied by the latter,
+inspects the staff officers.
+
+The major then commands: _REST_, returns saber, and, with his staff,
+accompanies the inspector.
+
+If the major is the inspector he commands: _REST_, returns saber, and
+inspects his staff, which then accompanies him.
+
+The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, then makes a
+minute inspection of the color guard, the noncommissioned staff, and
+the arms, accouterments, dress, and ammunition of each soldier of the
+several companies in succession, and inspects the band.
+
+The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of the
+color guard, noncommissioned staff, and band.
+
+The color guard and noncommissioned staff may be dismissed as soon as
+inspected.
+
+[Illustration: Plate VI.]
+
+750. As the inspector approaches each company its captain commands: 1.
+_Company_, 2. _ATTENTION_, 3. _PREPARE FOR INSPECTION_, and faces to
+the front; as soon as inspected he returns saber and accompanies the
+inspector. The inspection proceeds as in company inspection. At its
+completion the captain closes ranks and commands: _REST_. Unless
+otherwise directed by the inspector, the major directs that the
+company be marched to its parade and dismissed.
+
+751. If the inspection will probably last a long time the rear
+companies may be permitted to stack arms and fall out; before the
+inspector approaches they fall in and take arms.
+
+752. The band plays during the inspection of the companies.
+
+When the inspector approaches the band the adjutant commands: _PREPARE
+FOR INSPECTION_.
+
+As the inspector approaches him each man raises his instrument in
+front of the body, reverses it so as to show both sides, and then
+returns it.
+
+Company musicians execute inspection similarly.
+
+753. At the inspection of quarters or camp the inspector is
+accompanied by the captain, followed by the other officers or by such
+of them as he may designate. The inspection is conducted as described
+in the company inspection.
+
+
+_Regimental Inspection._
+
+754. The commands, means, and principles are the same as described for
+a battalion.
+
+The colonel takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of
+the major of the leading battalion. His staff takes post as if
+mounted. The color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff.
+
+The inspector inspects the colonel and the lieutenant colonel, and,
+accompanied by the colonel, inspects the staff officers.
+
+The colonel then commands: _REST_, returns saber, and, with the
+lieutenant colonel and staff, accompanies the inspector.
+
+If the colonel is the inspector he commands: _REST_, returns saber,
+and inspects the lieutenant colonel and staff, all of whom then
+accompany him.
+
+The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, makes a minute
+inspection of the color guard, noncommissioned staff, each battalion
+in succession, and the band.
+
+On the approach of the inspector each major brings his battalion to
+attention. Battalion inspection follows.
+
+
+
+
+MUSTER.
+
+
+_Regimental, Battalion, or Company Muster._
+
+755. Muster is preceded by an inspection, and, when practicable, by a
+review.
+
+The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field, staff, and
+band, the surgeon with the hospital roll; each captain with the roll
+of his company. A list of absentees, alphabetically arranged, showing
+cause and place of absence, accompanies each roll.
+
+756. Being in column of companies at open ranks, each captain, as the
+mustering officer approaches, brings his company to right shoulder
+arms, and commands: _ATTENTION TO MUSTER_.
+
+The mustering officer or captain then calls the names on the roll;
+each man, as his name is called, answers _Here_ and brings his piece
+to order arms.
+
+After muster, the mustering officer, accompanied by the company
+commanders and such other officers as he may designate, verifies the
+presence of the men reported in hospital, on guard, etc.
+
+757. A company may be mustered in the same manner on its own parade
+ground, the muster to follow the company inspection.
+
+
+
+
+HONORS AND SALUTES.
+
+
+758. Further rules governing honors, courtesies, etc., are prescribed
+in Army Regulations.
+
+759. (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and enlisted men
+not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, or mess, on
+every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being addressed, the
+officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting first.
+
+(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted
+men, the word "attention" is given by some one who perceives him, when
+all rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until the officer
+leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men at meals stop
+eating and remain seated at attention.
+
+(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer,
+faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing he faces
+an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same
+place or on the same ground, such compliments need not be repeated.
+Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute an officer
+unless addressed by him.
+
+(4) Before addressing an officer, an enlisted man makes the prescribed
+salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or, if unarmed, with
+the right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply.
+
+(5) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formation, officers
+and enlisted men salute military persons as follows: With arms in
+hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (sentinels on interior guard
+duty excepted); without arms, the right-hand salute.
+
+(6) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted men
+salute military persons with the right-hand salute.
+
+(7) Officers and enlisted men will render the prescribed salutes in a
+military manner, the officer junior in rank, or the enlisted men,
+saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted, all
+entitled to the salute shall return it.
+
+(8) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign
+conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before addressing
+a superior officer not mounted.
+
+(9) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, but
+shall come to attention if at rest or at ease.
+
+(10) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. In
+general, it does not exceed 30 paces.
+
+(11) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a body
+of troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite the post of
+the commander.
+
+(12) In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street cars,
+and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal salutes
+may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to disturb or annoy
+civilians present.
+
+(13) Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same
+compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and
+Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers of
+their own regiment, corps, or arm of service.
+
+(14) Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the
+foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed with
+the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the proper
+performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute as
+prescribed in drill regulations. (_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+760. (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute
+officers of grades higher than the person commanding the unit, by
+first bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as required by
+subparagraph (5), paragraph 759. If the person saluted is of a junior
+or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention in the exchange of
+salutes.
+
+(2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their commanders will
+exchange salutes, both commands being at attention.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+761. Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually
+engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under campaign or
+simulated campaign conditions. Troops on the service of security pay
+no compliments whatever.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+762. If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and armed
+with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought to _present
+arms_ or _present sabers_ before its commander salutes in the
+following cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when _to the
+color_ or _to the standard_ is sounded during ceremonies, or when a
+person is saluted who is its immediate or higher commander or a
+general officer, or when the national or regimental color is saluted.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+763. At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command shall
+render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position of
+salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at retreat and
+during ceremonies when _to the color_ is played, if no band is
+present. If not under arms, the organizations shall be brought to
+attention at the first note of the National Anthem, _to the color_ or
+_to the standard_, and the salute rendered by the officer or
+noncommissioned officer in command as prescribed in regulations, as
+amended herein.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 17._)
+
+764. Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when persons
+belonging to the military service are present, all officers and
+enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing toward
+the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward the flag).
+If in uniform, covered or uncovered, or in civilian clothes,
+uncovered, they shall salute at the first note of the anthem,
+retaining the position of salute until the last note of the anthem.
+If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover at the first note of
+the anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder and so
+remain until its close, except that in inclement weather the headdress
+may be slightly raised.
+
+The same rules apply when _to the color_ or _to the standard_ is
+sounded as when the National Anthem is played.
+
+When played by an Army band, the National Anthem shall be played
+through without repetition of any part not required to be repeated to
+make it complete.
+
+The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the playing
+of the National Anthem of the United States shall be shown toward the
+national anthem of any other country when played upon official
+occasions.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+765. Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will render
+honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as required by
+subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian dress and covered,
+they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder
+with the right hand; if uncovered they will salute with the right-hand
+salute.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+
+
+
+PART V.--MANUALS.
+
+
+
+
+THE COLOR.
+
+
+766. The word "color" implies the national color; it includes the
+regimental color when both are present.
+
+The rules prescribing the colors to be carried by regiments and
+battalions on all occasions are contained in Army Regulations.
+
+767. In garrison the colors, when not in use, are kept in the office
+or quarters of the colonel, and are escorted thereto and therefrom by
+the color guard. In camp the colors, when not in use, are in front of
+the colonel's tent. From reveille to retreat, when the weather
+permits, they are displayed uncased; from retreat to reveille and
+during inclement weather they are cased.
+
+Colors are said to be cased when furled and protected by the oil-cloth
+covering.
+
+768. The regimental color salutes in the ceremony of escort of the
+color, and when saluting an officer entitled to the honor, but in no
+other case.
+
+If marching, the salute is executed when at 6 paces from the officer
+entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed when 6 paces beyond him.
+
+The national color renders no salute. (_C.I.D.R., No. 6._)
+
+
+_The Color Guard._
+
+769. The color guard consists of two color sergeants, who are the
+color bearers, and two experienced privates selected by the colonel.
+The senior color sergeant carries the national color; the junior color
+sergeant carries the regimental color. The regimental color, when
+carried, is always on the left of the national color, in whatever
+direction they may face.
+
+770. The color guard is formed and marched in one rank, the color
+bearers in the center. It is marched in the same manner and by the
+same commands as a squad, substituting, when necessary, _guard_ for
+_squad_.
+
+771. The color company is the center or right center company of the
+center or right center battalion. The color guard remains with that
+company unless otherwise directed.
+
+772. In line the color guard is in the interval between the inner
+guides of the right and left center companies.
+
+In line of columns or in close line, the color guard is midway between
+the right and left center companies and on line with the captains.
+
+In column of companies or platoons the color guard is midway between
+the color company and the company in rear of the color company and
+equidistant from the flanks of the column.
+
+In close column the color guard is on the flank of the color company.
+
+In column of squads the color guard is in the column between the color
+company and the company originally on its left.
+
+When the regiment is formed in line of masses for ceremonies, the
+color forms on the left of the leading company of the center (right
+center) battalion. It rejoins the color company when the regiment
+changes from line of masses. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+773. The color guard when with a battalion that takes the battle
+formation, joins the regimental reserve, whose commander directs the
+color guard to join a certain company of the reserve. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+2._)
+
+774. The color guard executes neither loadings nor firings; in
+rendering honors, it executes all movements in the manual; in drill,
+all movements unless specially excused.
+
+
+_To Receive the Color._
+
+775. The color guard, by command of the senior color sergeant,
+presents arms on receiving and parting with the color. After parting
+with the color, the color guard is brought to order arms by command of
+the senior member who is placed as the right man of the guard.
+
+776. At drills and ceremonies, excepting _escort of the color_, the
+color, if present, is received by the color company after its
+formation.
+
+The formation of the color company completed, the captain faces to the
+front; the color guard, conducted by the senior sergeant, approaches
+from the front and halts at a distance of 10 paces from the captain,
+who then faces about, brings the company to the present, faces to the
+front, salutes, again faces about and brings the company to the order.
+The color guard comes to the present and order at the command of the
+captain, and is then marched by the color sergeant directly to its
+post on the left of the color company.
+
+777. When the battalion is dismissed the color guard escorts the color
+to the office or quarters of the colonel.
+
+
+_Manual of the Color._
+
+778. At the _carry_ the heel of the pike rests in the socket of the
+sling; the right hand grasps the pike at the height of the shoulder.
+
+At the _order_ the heel of the pike rests on the ground near the right
+toe, the right hand holding the pike in a vertical position.
+
+At _parade rest_ the heel of the pike is on the ground, as at the
+_order_; the pike is held with both hands in front of the center of
+the body, left hand uppermost.
+
+The _order_ is resumed at the command _attention_.
+
+The left hand assists the right when necessary.
+
+The _carry_ is the habitual position when the troops are at a
+shoulder, port, or trail.
+
+The _order_ and _parade rest_ are executed with the troops.
+
+_The color salute:_ Being at a carry, slip the right hand up the pike
+to the height of the eye, then lower the pike by straightening the arm
+to the front.
+
+
+
+
+THE BAND.
+
+
+779. The band is formed in two or more ranks, with sufficient
+intervals between the men and distances between the ranks to permit of
+a free use of the instruments.
+
+The field music, when united, forms with and in rear of the band; when
+the band is not present the posts, movements, and duties of the field
+music are the same as prescribed for the band; when a musician is in
+charge his position is on the right of the front rank. When the
+battalion or regiment turns about by squads, the band executes the
+countermarch; when the battalion or regiment executes _right_, _left_,
+or _about face_, the band faces in the same manner.
+
+In marching, each rank dresses to the right.
+
+In executing _open ranks_ each rank of the band takes the distance of
+3 paces from the rank next in front; the drum major verifies the
+alignment.
+
+The field music sounds the _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_, and
+_to the color_ at the signal of the drum major.
+
+780. The drum major is 3 paces in front of the center of the front
+rank, and gives the signals or commands for the movements of the band
+as for a squad, substituting in the commands _band_ for _squad_.
+
+
+_Signals of the Drum Major._
+
+781. Preparatory to a signal the staff is held with the right hand
+near the head of the staff, hand below the chin, back to the front,
+ferrule pointed upward and to the right.
+
+_Prepare to play:_ Face toward the band and extend the right arm to
+its full length in the direction of the staff. _Play:_ Bring the arm
+back to its original position in front of the body.
+
+_Prepare to cease playing:_ Extend the right arm to its full length in
+the direction of the staff. _Cease playing:_ Bring the arm back to its
+original position in front of the body.
+
+_To march:_ Turn the wrist and bring the staff to the front, the
+ferrule pointing upward and to the front; extend the arm to its full
+length in the direction of the staff.
+
+_To halt:_ Lower the staff into the raised left hand and raise the
+staff horizontally above the head with both hands, the arms extended;
+lower the staff with both hands to a horizontal position at the height
+of the hips.
+
+_To countermarch:_ Face toward the band and give the signal _to
+march_. The countermarch is executed by each front-rank man to the
+right of the drum major turning to the right about, each to the left,
+turning to the left about, each followed by the men covering him. The
+drum major passes through the center.
+
+_To oblique:_ Bring the staff to a horizontal position, the head of
+the staff opposite the neck, the ferrule pointing in the direction the
+oblique is to be made; extend the arm to its full length in the
+direction of the staff.
+
+_To march by the right flank:_ Extend the arm to the right, the staff
+vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the rear.
+
+_To march by the left flank:_ Extend the arm to the left, the staff
+vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the front.
+
+_To diminish front:_ Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the
+height of the eyes, right hand at the height of the hip.
+
+_To increase front:_ Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the
+height of the hip, right hand at the height of the neck.
+
+The _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_: Bring the staff to a vertical
+position, hand opposite the neck, back of the hand to the front,
+ferrule pointing down.
+
+_To the color:_ Bring the staff to a horizontal position at the height
+of the neck, back of the hand to the rear, ferrule pointing to the
+left.
+
+When the band is playing, in marching, the drum major beats the time
+with his staff and supports the left hand at the hip, fingers in
+front, thumb to the rear.
+
+The drum major, with staff in hand, salutes by bringing his staff to a
+vertical position, head of the staff up and opposite the left
+shoulder.
+
+The drum major, marching in review with staff in hand, salutes by
+bringing his staff to a vertical position, head of the staff up and
+opposite the left shoulder.
+
+At a halt, and the band not playing, the drum major holds his staff
+with the ferrule touching the ground about 1 inch from toe of right
+foot, at an angle of about 60°, ball pointing upward to the right,
+right hand grasping staff near the ball, back of the hand to the
+front: left hand at the hip, fingers in front, thumb to the rear.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 6._)
+
+
+
+
+MANUAL OF THE SABER.
+
+
+782. 1. _Draw_, 2. _SABER_.
+
+At the command _draw_ unhook the saber with the thumb and first two
+fingers of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook, fingers
+lifting the upper ring; grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the
+upper band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize the grip with the
+right hand, and draw the blade 6 inches out of the scabbard, pressing
+the scabbard against the thigh with the left hand.
+
+At the command _saber_ draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to its
+full extent to the right front, at an angle of about 45° with the
+horizontal, the saber, edge down, in a straight line with the arm;
+make a slight pause and bring the back of the blade against the
+shoulder, edge to the front, arm nearly extended, hand by the side,
+elbow back, third and fourth fingers back of the grip; at the same
+time hook up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of the
+left hand, thumb through the upper ring, fingers supporting it; drop
+the left hand by the side.
+
+_This is the position of carry saber dismounted._
+
+Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber unhook the
+scabbard before mounting; when mounted, in the first motion of _draw
+saber_ they reach with the right hand over the bridle hand and without
+the aid of the bridle hand draw the saber as before; the right hand at
+the _carry_ rests on the right thigh.
+
+On foot the scabbard is carried hooked up.
+
+783. When publishing orders, calling the roll, etc., the saber is held
+suspended from the right wrist by the saber knot; when the saber knot
+is used it is placed on the wrist before drawing saber and taken off
+after returning saber.
+
+784. Being at the order or carry: 1. _Present_, 2. _SABER_ (or
+_ARMS_).
+
+At the command _present_ raise and carry the saber to the front, base
+of the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck,
+edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the hilt,
+thumb extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping the
+grip.
+
+At the command _saber_, or _arms_, lower the saber, point in
+prolongation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to the left,
+hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended. If mounted, the
+hand is held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front
+of the stirrup.
+
+In rendering honors with troops officers execute the first motion of
+the salute at the command _present_, the second motion at the command
+_arms_; enlisted men with the saber execute the first motion at the
+command _arms_ and omit the second motion.
+
+785. Being at a carry: 1. _Order_, 2. _SABER_ (or _ARMS_).
+
+Drop the point of the saber directly to the front, point on or near
+the ground, edge down, thumb on back of grip.
+
+Being at the _present saber_, should the next command be _order arms_,
+officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber _order
+saber_; if the command be other than _order arms_, they execute _carry
+saber_.
+
+When arms are brought to the order the officers or enlisted men with
+the saber drawn _order saber_.
+
+786. The saber is held at the carry while giving commands, marching at
+attention, or changing position in quick time.
+
+When at the order sabers are brought to the carry when arms are
+brought to any position except the _present_ or _parade rest_.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+787. Being at the order: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_.
+
+Take the position of parade rest except that the left hand is
+uppermost and rests on the right hand, point of saber on or near the
+ground in front of the center of the body, edge to the right.
+
+At the command _attention_ resume the order saber and the position of
+the soldier.
+
+788. In marching in double time the saber is carried diagonally across
+the breast, edge to the front; the left hand steadies the scabbard.
+
+789. Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, on
+all duties under arms draw and return saber without waiting for
+command. All commands to soldiers under arms are given with the saber
+drawn.
+
+790. Being at a carry: 1. _Return_, 2. _SABER_.
+
+At the command _return_ carry the right hand opposite to and 6 inches
+from the left shoulder, saber vertical, edge to the left; at the same
+time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left hand and grasp it at
+the upper band.
+
+At the command _saber_ drop the point to the rear and pass the blade
+across and along the left arm; turn the head slightly to the left,
+fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard, raise the right hand,
+insert and return the blade; free the wrist from the saber knot (if
+inserted in it), turn the head to the front, drop the right hand by
+the side; hook up the scabbard with the left hand, drop the left hand
+by the side.
+
+Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, when
+mounted, return saber without using the left hand; the scabbard is
+hooked up on dismounting.
+
+791. At inspection enlisted men with the saber drawn execute the first
+motion of _present saber_ and turn the wrist to show both sides of the
+blade, resuming the carry when the inspector has passed.
+
+
+
+
+MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING.
+
+
+_Shelter Tents._
+
+792. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:
+_FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS_.
+
+The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a
+file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
+sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the
+company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken
+from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guides, and file closers
+form on a convenient flank. Before forming column of platoons,
+preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be redivided into two
+or more platoons, regardless of the size of each. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+793. The captain then causes the company to take intervals as
+described in the School of the Squad, and commands: _PITCH TENTS_.
+
+At the command _pitch tents_, each man steps off obliquely to the
+right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt
+of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,
+barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man
+then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of
+the right heel.
+
+Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins removed;
+each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the rear,
+flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear-rank man's half
+on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; the guy loops at
+both ends of the lower half are passed through the buttonholes
+provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped end of the guy
+rope is then passed through both guy loops and secured, this at both
+ends of the tent. Each front-rank man inserts the muzzle of his rifle
+under the front end of the ridge and holds the rifle upright, sling to
+the front, heel of butt on the ground beside the bayonet. His
+rear-rank man pins down the front corners of the tent on the line of
+bayonets, stretching the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye
+of the front guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front
+of the rifle as to hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the
+tent, each pins down a corner, stretching the sides and rear of the
+tent before securing; the rear-rank man then inserts an intrenching
+tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear end of the ridge
+inside the tent, the front-rank man pegging down the end of the rear
+guy ropes; the rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the
+rear-rank man working on the right.
+
+The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown back on
+the tent.
+
+As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment and the
+contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention in front of
+his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin.
+
+To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes
+should all be of the same length.
+
+In shelter-tent camps, in localities where suitable material is
+procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used in lieu of the rifle
+and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the shelter tent.
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2, 5 and 8._)
+
+794. When the pack is not carried the company is formed for shelter
+tents, intervals are taken, arms are laid aside or on the ground, the
+men are dismissed and proceed to the wagon, secure their packs, return
+to their places, and pitch tents as heretofore described.
+
+795. Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching one tent as
+heretofore described, then pitching a second tent against the opening
+of the first, using one rifle to support both tents, and passing the
+front guy ropes over and down the sides of the opposite tents. The
+front corner of one tent is not pegged down, but is thrown back to
+permit an opening into the tent.
+
+
+_Single Sleeping Bag._
+
+796. Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its short
+dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the right side
+of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left side by means
+of the tapes provided; fold the left half of the poncho over the
+blanket and button it together along the side and bottom.
+
+
+_Double Sleeping Bag._
+
+797. Spread one poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the poncho;
+tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes provided; spread
+a second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the right; button the two ponchos together along both
+sides and across the end.
+
+
+_To Strike Shelter Tents._
+
+798. The men standing in front of their tents: _STRIKE TENTS_.
+
+Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are
+lowered, packs made up, and equipments slung, and the men stand at
+attention in the places originally occupied after taking intervals.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 8._)
+
+
+_Common and Wall Tents._
+
+799. To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical wall
+tents: Mark line of tents by driving a wall pin on the spot to be
+occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal
+tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet,
+which will give a passage of two feet between tents. Spread tripod on
+the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is used.
+Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, and
+place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door (or
+doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the
+bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left
+(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the
+pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already
+driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the
+rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to
+complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops.
+Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front
+corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small
+amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven.
+According to the size of the tent one or two men, crawling under the
+tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or
+ridge pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes
+are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the
+tent to adjust it. The tent, steadied by the remaining men, one at
+each corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or
+storage type, corner poles will now be placed at the four corners.
+The four corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of
+the large pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such
+distance as to hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth
+when the guy ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through
+each remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven
+in line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the
+tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly
+are placed over the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace
+ropes, when used, are then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 11._)
+
+800. Rescinded. (_C.I.D.R., No. 11._)
+
+
+_Conical Wall Tent._
+
+801. Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using
+the hood lines with center pin as center, describe two concentric
+circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer
+circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3
+feet drive the other guy pin.
+
+In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case
+of pyramidal tents. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+_To Strike Common, Wall, Pyramidal, and Conical Wall Tents._
+
+802. _STRIKE TENTS._
+
+The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy
+ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall
+tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle.
+
+One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is
+lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole
+fastened together, and the remaining pins collected.
+
+
+_To Fold Tents._
+
+803. For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread the
+tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of side
+walls are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left;
+fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it
+rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent
+in two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in
+two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second
+from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the
+second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of
+the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the
+bundle; tie with the two exposed guys.
+
+
+_Method of Folding Pyramidal Tent._
+
+The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof canvas
+pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by leaving the
+rear-corner wall pins in the ground with the wall loops attached, one
+man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding the square iron in a
+perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from
+the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of
+the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle.
+
+Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear
+corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and
+pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and return to
+the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side
+of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the
+front side of tent.
+
+Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described
+above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the
+tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each
+on itself.
+
+Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward
+toward the bottom of tent, and continue to fold around the square iron
+as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth, and parallel with
+the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the canvas
+kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of the
+canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the two on
+the center width, which should be pulled out and away from bottom edge
+to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one end, fold
+toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first and second
+widths) and fold again toward the center so that the already folded
+canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle width. Then
+fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. Then begin
+folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, then
+making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that
+already folded, turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take
+the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle
+over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle drawing tight. Turn
+bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise.
+
+When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by
+23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack.
+
+Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle
+width of canvas in the back wall. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 1 and 8._)
+
+
+
+
+MANUAL OF THE BUGLE.
+
+
+_Warning Calls._
+
+804. _First call_, _guard mounting_, _full dress_, _overcoats_,
+_drill_, _stable_, _water_, and _boots and saddles_ precede the
+_assembly_ by such interval as may be prescribed by the commanding
+officer.
+
+_Mess_, _church_, and _fatigue_, classed as service calls, may also be
+used as warning calls.
+
+_First call_ is the first signal for formation for roll call and for
+all ceremonies except guard mounting.
+
+_Guard mounting_ is the first signal for guard mounting.
+
+The field music assembles at _first call_ and _guard mounting_.
+
+In a mixed command, _boots and saddles_ is the signal to mounted
+troops that their formation is to be mounted; for mounted guard
+mounting or mounted drill, it immediately follows the signal _guard
+mounting_ or _drill_.
+
+When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the _full dress_ or
+_overcoat_ call immediately follows _first call_, _guard mounting_, or
+_boots and saddles_.
+
+
+_Formation Calls._
+
+805. _Assembly:_ The signal for companies or details to fall in.
+
+_Adjutant's call:_ The signal for companies to form battalion; also
+for the guard details to form for guard mounting on the camp or
+garrison parade ground; it follows the _assembly_ at such interval as
+may be prescribed by the commanding officer.
+
+It is also used as a signal for the battalions to form regiment,
+following the first _adjutant's call_ at such interval as the
+commanding officer may prescribe.
+
+_To the color:_ Is sounded when the color salutes.
+
+
+_Alarm Calls._
+
+806. _Fire call:_ The signal for the men to fall in, without arms, to
+extinguish fire.
+
+_To arms:_ The signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on their
+company parade grounds as quickly as possible.
+
+_To horse:_ The signal for mounted men to proceed under arms to their
+horses, saddle, mount and assemble at a designated place as quickly as
+possible. In extended order this signal is used to remount troops.
+
+
+_Service Calls._
+
+807. _Tattoo_, _taps_, _mess_, _sick_, _church_, _recall_, _issue_,
+_officers'_, _captains'_, _first sergeants'_, _fatigue_, _school_, and
+_the general_.
+
+_The general_ is the signal for striking tents and loading wagons
+preparatory to marching.
+
+_Reveille_ precedes the _assembly_ for roll call; _retreat_ follows
+the _assembly_, the interval between being only that required for
+formation and roll call, except when there is parade.
+
+_Taps_ is the signal for extinguishing lights; it is usually preceded
+by _call to quarters_ by such interval as prescribed by Army
+Regulations.
+
+_Assembly_, _reveille_, _retreat_, _adjutant's call_, _to the color_,
+the _flourishes_, _ruffles_, and the _marches_ are sounded by all the
+field music united; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the
+musician of the guard or orderly musician; he may also sound the
+_assembly_ when the musicians are not united.
+
+The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if marches
+be played before _reveille_, it is fired at the commencement of the
+first march.
+
+The evening gun is fired at the last note of _retreat_.
+
+
+BUGLE CALLS.
+
+1. FIRST CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+2. GUARD MOUNTING.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+3. FULL DRESS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+4. OVERCOATS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+5. DRILL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+6. STABLE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+7. WATER.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+8. BOOTS AND SADDLES.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+9. ASSEMBLY.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+10. ADJUTANT'S CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+11. TO THE COLOR.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+12. FIRE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+13. TO ARMS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+14. TO HORSE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+15. REVEILLE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+16. RETREAT.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+17. TATTOO.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+18. CALL TO QUARTERS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+19. TAPS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+20. MESS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+21. SICK.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+22. CHURCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+23. RECALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+24. ISSUE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+25. OFFICERS' CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+26. CAPTAINS' CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+27. FIRST SERGEANTS' CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+28. FATIGUE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+29. SCHOOL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+29-1/2. THE GENERAL'S MARCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+(_C.I.D.R. No. 8, Sept. 3, 1914._)
+
+30. THE GENERAL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+30-1/2. FLOURISHES FOR REVIEW.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+BUGLE SIGNALS.
+
+See paragraph 41.
+
+31. ASSEMBLE. MARCH.
+
+Same as _Assembly_, No. 9.
+
+32. ATTENTION.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+33. ATTENTION TO ORDERS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+34. FORWARD. MARCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+35. HALT.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+36. DOUBLE TIME. MARCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+37. TO THE REAR. MARCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+38. COMMENCE FIRING.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+39. CEASE FIRING.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+40. FIX BAYONETS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+41. CHARGE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX A.
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT,
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
+_Washington, December 2, 1911._
+
+The Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911, have been prepared for the use
+of troops armed with the United States magazine rifle, model 1903. For
+the guidance of organizations armed with the United States magazine
+rifle, model 1898, the following alternative paragraphs are published
+and will be considered as substitute paragraphs for the corresponding
+paragraphs in the text: 75 (in part), 96, 98, 99, 134, 139, 141, 142,
+148, and 150.
+
+By order of the Secretary of War:
+
+LEONARD WOOD,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff_.
+
+
+75.... Third. The cut-off is kept turned down, except when using the
+magazine....
+
+96. Being at order arms: 1. _Unfix, BAYONET._
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Take the position of
+parade rest, grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right
+hand, press the spring with the forefinger of the left hand, raise the
+bayonet until the handle is about 6 inches above the muzzle of the
+piece, drop the point to the left, back of hand toward the body, and,
+glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing
+between the left arm and body; regrasp the piece with the right hand
+and resume the order.
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
+from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
+most convenient manner.
+
+If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
+most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
+original position.
+
+Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity, but
+not in cadence.
+
+98. Being at order arms: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+At the second command, take the position of port arms. (_TWO_) With
+the right hand open the magazine gate, turn the bolt handle up, draw
+the bolt back and glance at the magazine and chamber. Having found
+them empty, or having emptied them, raise the head and eyes to the
+front.
+
+99. Being at inspection arms: 1. _Order (Right shoulder, port)_, 2.
+_ARMS_.
+
+At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle
+down, close the magazine gate, pull the trigger, and resume port arms.
+At the command _arms_, complete the movement ordered.
+
+134. Pieces being loaded and in the position of load, to execute other
+movements with the pieces loaded: 1. _Lock_, 2. _PIECES_.
+
+At the command _Pieces_ turn the safety lock fully to the right.
+
+The safety lock is said to be at the "ready" when turned to the left,
+and at the "safe" when turned to the right.
+
+The cut-off is said to be "on" when turned up and "off" when turned
+down.
+
+139. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. _With dummy (blank or
+ball) cartridges_, 2. _LOAD_.
+
+At the command _load_ each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half
+right and carries the right foot to the right, about one foot, to such
+position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
+body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height
+of the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back,
+takes a cartridge between the thumb and first two fingers find places
+it in the receiver; places palm of the hand against the back of the
+bolt handle; thrusts the bolt home with a quick motion, turning down
+the handle, and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each
+rear-rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar position
+opposite the interval to the right of his front-rank man, muzzle of
+the piece extending beyond the front rank, and loads.
+
+A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
+as practicable in the position of load.
+
+If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is similar; if
+kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the
+elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down the left hand
+steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt
+resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.
+
+For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
+are designated as that of _load_.
+
+141. _FILL MAGAZINE._
+
+Take the position of load, if not already there, open the gate of the
+magazine with the right thumb, take five cartridges from the box or
+belt, and place them, with the bullets to the front, in the magazine,
+turning the barrel slightly to the left to facilitate the insertion of
+the cartridges; close the gate and carry the right hand to the small
+of the stock.
+
+To load from the magazine the command _From magazine_ will be given
+preceding that of _LOAD_; the _cut-off_ will be turned up on coming to
+the position of _load_.
+
+To resume loading from the belt the command _From belt_ will be given
+preceding the command _LOAD_; the _cut-off_ will be turned down on
+coming to the position of _load_.
+
+The commands _from magazine_ and _from belt_, indicating the change in
+the manner of loading, will not be repeated in subsequent commands.
+
+The words _from belt_ apply to cartridge box as well as belt.
+
+In loading from the magazine care should be taken to push the bolt
+fully forward and turn the handle down before drawing the bolt back,
+as otherwise the extractor will not catch the cartridge in the
+chamber, and jamming will occur with the cartridge following.
+
+To fire from the magazine, the command _MAGAZINE FIRE_ may be given at
+any time. The cut-off is turned up and an increased rate of fire is
+executed. After the magazine is exhausted the cut-off is turned down
+and the firing continued, loading from the belt.
+
+_Magazine fire_ is employed only when, in the opinion of the platoon
+leader or company commander, the maximum rate of fire becomes
+necessary.
+
+142. _UNLOAD._
+
+All take the position of load, turn the _cut-off_ up, if not already
+there, turn the safety lock to the left, and alternately open and
+close the chamber until all the cartridges are ejected. After the last
+cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed and the trigger pulled. The
+cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the box or
+belt, and the piece brought to the order.
+
+148. _CLIP FIRE._
+
+Turn the cut-off up; _fire at will_ (reloading from the magazine)
+until the cartridges in the piece are exhausted; turn the cut-off
+down; fill magazine; reload and take the position of _suspend firing_.
+
+150. _CEASE FIRING._
+
+Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cartridge is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the
+trigger is pulled, sights are laid down, and the piece is brought to
+the order.
+
+_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men.
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX B.
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT,
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
+_Washington, December 2, 1911._
+
+Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 798, Infantry Drill
+Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the Infantry
+Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General Orders, No.
+23, War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, the
+alternative paragraphs published herewith will govern.
+
+By order of the Secretary of War:
+
+LEONARD WOOD,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff._
+
+
+747. If the inspection is to include an examination of the blanket
+rolls the captain, before dismissing the company and after inspecting
+the file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in place, closes
+ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company back to four paces from the
+stacks, takes intervals, and commands: 1. _Unsling_, 2. _PACKS_, 3.
+_Open_, 4. _PACKS_.
+
+At the second command each man unslings his roll and places it on the
+ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end of shelter
+half to the right.
+
+At the fourth command the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular to the
+front with the triangular end of the shelter half to the front,
+opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the contents of
+his roll for inspection and resumes the attention.
+
+The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file
+closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, draws
+saber and commands: 1. _Close_, 2. _PACKS_.
+
+At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly spread
+on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the front, folds
+his blanket once across its length and places it upon the shelter
+half, fold toward the bottom, edge one-half inch from the square end,
+the same amount of canvas uncovered at the top and bottom. He then
+places the parts of the pole on the side of the blanket next the
+square end of shelter half, near and parallel to the fold, end of pole
+about 6 inches from the edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly
+near the opposite edge of the blanket and distributes the other
+articles carried in the roll; folds the triangular end and then the
+exposed portion of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket.
+
+The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the front
+and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly two and
+two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each pair stands on
+the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely and buckles the
+straps, passing the end of the strap through both keeper and buckle,
+back over the buckle and under the keeper. With the roll so lying on
+the ground that the edge of the shelter half can just be seen when
+looking vertically downward one end is bent upward and over to meet
+the other, a clove hitch is taken with the guy rope first around the
+end to which it is attached and then around the other end, adjusting
+the length of rope between hitches to suit the wearer.
+
+As soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his roll in
+the position it was in after being unslung and stands at attention.
+
+All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: 1. _Sling_, 2.
+_PACKS_.
+
+At the second command the rolls are slung, the end containing the pole
+to the rear.
+
+The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain completes the
+inspection as before.
+
+792. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:
+_FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS_.
+
+The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a
+file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
+sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the
+company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken
+from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, and file closers
+form on a convenient flank. Before forming column of platoons,
+preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be redivided into two
+or more platoons regardless of the size of each. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+793. The captain then causes the company to take intervals as
+described in the School of the Squad, and commands: _PITCH TENTS_.
+
+At the command _pitch tents_, each man steps off obliquely to the
+right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt
+of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,
+barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front rank man
+then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of
+the right heel. All unsling and open the blanket rolls and take out
+the shelter half, poles, and pins. Each then spreads his shelter half,
+triangle to the rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, rear
+rank man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together.
+Each front rank man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the
+halves, and holds the pole upright beside the bayonet placed in the
+ground; his rear rank man, using the pins in front, pins down the
+front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching the
+canvas taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and drives
+the pin at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the rope
+taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear rank man adjusts
+the pole and the front rank man drives the pins. The rest of the pins
+are then driven by both men, the rear rank man working on the right.
+
+As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents of the
+blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front of his own
+half on line with the front guy rope pin.
+
+The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents are
+pitched, should all be of the same length. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 8._)
+
+794. When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are taken as
+described above; the position of the front pole is marked with a
+bayonet and equipments are laid aside. The men then proceed to the
+wagon, secure their rolls, return to their places, and pitch tents as
+heretofore described.
+
+795. To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the same commands
+as before, except _Take half interval_ is given instead of _Take
+interval_. In taking interval each man follows the preceding man at 2
+paces. The captain then commands: _PITCH DOUBLE TENTS_.
+
+The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide and
+with him pitches a single shelter tent.
+
+Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the bayonet.
+
+The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two single
+tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. Two guy ropes
+are used at each end, the guy pins being placed in front of the corner
+pins.
+
+The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; and by
+numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling in on the left
+are numbered, counting off if necessary.
+
+All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent is to
+occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular ends to
+the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, first the
+ridges and then the square ends. The front corners of the tent are
+pinned by the front-rank men, the odd number holding the poles, the
+even number driving the pins. The rear-rank men similarly pin the rear
+corners.
+
+While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of the front
+rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted by the even
+number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the center eyes of the
+shelter halves in the following order: (1) The lower half of the front
+tent; (2) the lower half of the rear tent; (3) the upper half of the
+front tent; (4) the upper half of the rear tent. The guy ropes are
+then adjusted.
+
+The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned back,
+contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at _attention_, each
+opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent.
+
+796. Omitted.
+
+797. Omitted.
+
+798. Omitted.
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX C.
+
+MANUAL OF THE BAYONET.
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT,
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
+_Washington, February 20, 1918_.
+
+The following Manual of the Bayonet, prepared by a board consisting of
+Capt. Herschel Tupes, First Infantry, and Capt. Grosvenor L. Townsend,
+First Infantry, is approved and issued for the information and
+government of the Regular Army and the Organized Militia of the United
+States.
+
+By order of the Secretary of War.
+
+LEONARD WOOD,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff_.
+
+
+
+
+MANUAL OF THE BAYONET.
+
+UNITED STATES ARMY.
+
+
+1. The infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable the
+enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often necessary to
+obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed in the use of the
+rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters.
+
+2. The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier how to make
+effective use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat; to make him
+quick and proficient in handling his rifle; to give him an accurate
+eye and a steady hand; and to give him confidence in the bayonet in
+offense and defense. When skill in these exercises has been acquired,
+the rifle will still remain a most formidable weapon at close quarters
+should the bayonet be lost or disabled.
+
+3. Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will be judged by
+the skill shown by individuals in personal combat. For this purpose
+pairs or groups of opponents, selected at random from among recruits
+and trained soldiers, should engage in assaults, using the fencing
+equipment provided for the purpose.
+
+4. Officers and specially selected and thoroughly instructed
+noncommissioned officers will act as instructors.
+
+5. Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as the soldier
+is familiar with the handling of his rifle and will progress, as far
+as practicable, in the order followed in the text.
+
+6. Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground; but practice should
+also be had on uneven ground, especially in the attack and defense of
+intrenchments.
+
+7. These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic drill.
+
+8. The principles of the commands are the same as those given in
+paragraphs 9, 15, and 38, Infantry Drill Regulations. Intervals and
+distances will be taken as in paragraphs 109 and 111, Infantry Drill
+Regulations, except that, in formations for bayonet exercises, the men
+should be at least four paces apart in every direction.
+
+9. Before requiring soldiers to take a position or execute a movement
+for the first time, the instructor executes the same for the purpose
+of illustration, after which he requires the soldiers to execute the
+movement individually. Movements prescribed in this manual will not be
+executed in cadence as the attempt to do so results in incomplete
+execution and lack of vigor. Each movement will be executed correctly
+as quickly as possible by every man. As soon as the movements are
+executed accurately, the commands are given rapidly, as expertness
+with the bayonet depends chiefly upon quickness of motion.
+
+10. The exercises will be interrupted at first by short and frequent
+rests. The rests will be less frequent as proficiency is attained.
+Fatigue and exhaustion will be specially guarded against as they
+prevent proper interest being taken in the exercises and delay the
+progress of the instruction. Rests will be given from the position of
+order arms in the manner prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations.
+
+
+THE BAYONET.
+
+NOMENCLATURE AND DESCRIPTION.
+
+11. The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon consisting of three
+principal parts, viz, the _blade_, _guard_, and _grip_.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+12. The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, back,
+grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from guard to point
+is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge 5.6 inches.
+Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches. The weight of the
+bayonet is 1 pound; weight of rifle without bayonet is 8.69 pounds.
+The center of gravity of the rifle, with bayonet fixed, is just in
+front of the rear sight.
+
+
+I. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE.
+
+13. The instructor explains the importance of good footwork and
+impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and suppleness of
+body are as important for attack and defense as is the ability to
+parry and deliver a strong point or cut.
+
+14. All foot movements should be made from the position of _guard_. As
+far as practicable, they will be made on the balls of the feet to
+insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule can be laid down
+as to the length of the various foot movements; this depends entirely
+on the situations occurring in combat.
+
+15. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
+commands:
+
+1. _Bayonet exercise_, 2. _GUARD_.
+
+At the command _guard_, half face to the right, carry back and place
+the right foot about once and a half its length to the rear and about
+3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each other an angle of
+about 60°, weight of the body balanced equally on the balls of the
+feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands on hips, fingers to the
+front, thumbs to the rear, head erect, head and eyes straight to the
+front.
+
+16. To resume the attention, 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_. The men take
+the position of the soldier and fix their attention.
+
+17. _ADVANCE._ Advance the left foot quickly about once its length,
+follow immediately with the right foot the same distance.
+
+18. _RETIRE._ Move the right foot quickly to the rear about once its
+length, follow immediately with the left foot the same distance.
+
+19. 1. _Front_, 2. _PASS_. Place the right foot quickly about once its
+length in front of the left, advance the left foot to its proper
+position in front of the right.
+
+20. 1. _Rear_, 2. _PASS_. Place the left foot quickly about once its
+length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to its proper
+position in rear of the left.
+
+The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or to
+withdraw quickly therefrom.
+
+21. 1. _Right_, 2. _STEP_. Step to the right with the right foot about
+once its length and place the left foot in its proper relative
+position.
+
+22. 1. _Left_, 2. _STEP_. Step to the left with the left foot about
+once its length and place the right foot in its proper relative
+position.
+
+These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more
+favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. Better
+ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. In bayonet
+fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in stepping to the
+right or left is the one which at the moment bears the least weight.
+
+
+II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE.
+
+23. The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are the
+same as already given for movements without the rifle.
+
+24. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
+commands:
+
+1. _Bayonet exercise_, 2. _GUARD_.
+
+At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); at the
+same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with
+the left hand just below the lower band, fingers between the stock and
+gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping
+the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip,
+elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin.
+
+25. 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of
+order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention.
+
+26. During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will be
+executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they
+may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 27. Par. 24.]
+
+
+ATTACKS.
+
+27. 1. _THRUST._
+
+Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm,
+turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet at
+the point to be attacked, butt covering the right forearm. At the same
+time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of the
+body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot always on
+the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command.
+
+The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm,
+the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the
+attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach,
+chest, head, neck, and limbs.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 28.]
+
+28. 1. _LUNGE._
+
+Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot
+is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must always
+be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately without
+command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot if, for
+any reason, it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In the
+latter case, the preparatory common _forward_ will be given. Each
+method should be practiced.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 29.]
+
+29. 1. _Butt_, 2. _STRIKE_.
+
+Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle
+against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about
+the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the
+rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command.
+
+The points of attack in their order of importance are, head, neck,
+stomach, and crotch.
+
+30. 1. _Cut_, 2. _DOWN_.
+
+Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of
+attack. Guard is resumed without command.
+
+31. 1. _Cut_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_.
+
+With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left),
+directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without
+command.
+
+The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an
+enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false,
+or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in
+continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries.
+
+32. To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier will
+change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner, for
+example: 1. _To the right rear_, 2. _Cut_, 3. _DOWN_; 1. _To the
+right_, 2. _LUNGE_; 1. _To the left_, 2. _THRUST_, etc.
+
+Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the
+body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best
+accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot.
+
+These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
+guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 33. Par. 36.]
+
+33. Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting and
+lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings or
+other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably
+suspended at desired heights.
+
+34. The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by
+endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by
+directing the attack against one opening while looking at another.
+
+35. The soldier should also experience the effect of actual resistance
+offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in attacks. This will
+be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy.
+
+36. Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the
+execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the
+bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can
+be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely
+together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is
+preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc.,
+are also suitable.
+
+
+DEFENSES.
+
+37. In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard is
+resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have become
+proficient, the instructor will cause them to resume the position of
+guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry.
+
+38. 1. _Parry_, 2. _RIGHT_.
+
+Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply
+to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6
+inches to the right.
+
+39. 1. _Parry_, 2. _LEFT_.
+
+Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to
+cover the point attacked.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 40. Par 41.]
+
+40. 1. _Parry_, 2. _HIGH_.
+
+Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of
+vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front.
+
+When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may be
+supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This
+position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations,
+such as men mounted or on top of parapets.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 41. Par. 44.]
+
+41. 1. _Low parry_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_.
+
+Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height of the
+knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the right (left)
+to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened.
+
+These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist, leaves
+the head and body exposed.
+
+42. Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short
+motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far
+as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against _butt
+strike_ are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point
+attacked.
+
+43. To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the
+soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most
+convenient manner; for example: 1. _To the left rear_, 2. _Parry_, 3.
+_HIGH_; 1. _To the right_, 2. _Parry_, 3. _RIGHT_, etc.
+
+These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
+guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.
+
+In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is
+danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a
+vertical position.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 44.]
+
+
+III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET.
+
+44. 1. _Club rifle_, 2. _SWING_.
+
+Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn
+the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and
+muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at
+the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder farthest from the
+opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and
+knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet,
+shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity.
+_SWING._ Tighten the grasp of the hands and swing the rifle to the
+front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent and
+immediately return to the position of _club rifle_ by completing the
+swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command,
+_SWING_.
+
+The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any
+guard or parry that may be interposed.
+
+Being at _club rifle_, order arms is resumed by command.
+
+The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited.
+
+45. The position of _club rifle_ may be taken from any position of the
+rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in
+personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of
+the bayonet.
+
+
+IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS.
+
+46. The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous
+attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by the single
+movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the
+reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an
+attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of
+the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied
+by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to
+the right or left may be accompanied by attacks or defenses.
+
+47. Not more than three movements will be used in any combination. The
+instructor should first indicate the number of movements that are to
+be combined as _two movements_ or _three movements_. The execution is
+determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard is
+taken upon the completion of the last movement only.
+
+
+EXAMPLES.
+
+     _Front pass and LUNGE._
+     _Right step and THRUST._
+     _Left step and low parry RIGHT._
+     _Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE._
+     _Lunge and cut RIGHT._
+     _Parry right and parry HIGH._
+     _Butt strike and cut DOWN._
+     _Thrust and parry HIGH._
+     _Parry high and LUNGE._
+     _Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT._
+     _Right step, parry left and cut DOWN._
+     _To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN._
+     _To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE._
+
+48. Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will be
+made against the dummies both in quick time and double time.
+
+
+V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT.
+
+49. The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as far
+as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet exercises.
+
+50. The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme
+importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack
+fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the
+opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent
+on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take
+the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the
+offensive and take immediate advantage of it.
+
+51. Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing. Time
+for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a single
+hasty glance.
+
+52. In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be
+plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the point
+of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in night
+attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body.
+
+53. Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The
+point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in
+the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to
+the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for
+attack or defense.
+
+54. Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left hand.
+His position of _guard_ will not differ materially from that described
+in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge, he will be
+at a great disadvantage.
+
+55. The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is particularly
+useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a sentry can
+strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle.
+
+56. Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the
+muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will
+be directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attack him with short,
+stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon.
+
+57. The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and
+lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and
+advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp
+parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed
+to a counter attack, which should follow promptly.
+
+58. Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage by
+grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from behind.
+
+59. In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must be
+made to get on his near or left side, because here his reach is much
+shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable such
+an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the horseman.
+
+60. In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be best
+observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach
+generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within
+attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle
+of his body.
+
+
+VI. FENCING EXERCISES.
+
+61. Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of thrusts,
+parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will, the
+opponent replying with suitable parries and returns.
+
+62. The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before
+the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such
+condition as will prevent accidents.
+
+63. The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order,
+facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a
+distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as
+number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense.
+
+64. The opponents being at the order facing each other, the instructor
+commands: _SALUTE_.
+
+Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to
+the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and
+joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two.)
+Drop the arm smartly by the side.
+
+This salute is the fencing salute.
+
+All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will
+begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute.
+
+65. After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor
+commands: 1. _Fencing exercise_, 2. _GUARD_.
+
+At the command _guard_ each man comes to the position of _guard_,
+heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing
+lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the
+opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the _engage_ or _engage
+right_.
+
+66. Being at the _engage right_: _ENGAGE LEFT_.
+
+The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his
+opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
+right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position,
+each man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the
+corresponding portion of the opponent's bayonet.
+
+67. Being at _engage left_: _ENGAGE RIGHT_.
+
+The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his
+opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
+left and _engages_.
+
+68. Being _engaged_: _ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT_.
+
+The attack _engages left_ and then immediately _engages right_.
+
+69. Being _engaged left_: _ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT_.
+
+The attack _engages right_ and then immediately _engages left_.
+
+70. 1. _Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT)_; 2. _Number two, COUNTER_.
+
+Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly
+drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original
+position.
+
+71. In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage, a
+certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the
+play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This is
+necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended attack.
+It also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for his
+assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the movement is
+controlled by the left hand, the right remaining stationary.
+
+72. After some exercise in _engage_, _engage left_, and _counter_,
+exercises will be given in the _assaults_.
+
+
+ASSAULTS.
+
+73. The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name, as
+head, heck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the
+knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are
+first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at
+the command _assault_. Number one executes the attack, and number two
+parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one
+parries.
+
+74. For convenience in instruction _assaults_ are divided into _simple
+attacks_, _counter attacks_, _attacks on the rifle_, and _feints_.
+
+
+SIMPLE ATTACKS.
+
+75. Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement. There
+are three simple attacks--the _straight_, the _disengagement_, and the
+_counter disengagement_. They are not preceded by a feint.
+
+76. In the _straight_ the bayonet is directed straight at an opening
+from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle may, or
+may not, be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high or low,
+contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing the
+attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used in
+the engage may be continued in the attack.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number one, at neck_ (head,
+chest, right leg, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry right_; 3.
+_ASSAULT_.
+
+77. In the _disengagement_ contact with the opponent's rifle is
+abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled _under_ or _over_
+his bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This
+attack is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet
+from the moment contact is abandoned.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number one_, at stomach
+(left chest, left leg, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left_
+(etc.); 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+78. In the _counter disengagement_ a swift attack is made into the
+opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the
+engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral
+movement of the bayonet into the opening.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number two, engage left_; 2.
+_Number one_, at chest, _thrust_; 3. _Number two, parry left_; 4.
+_ASSAULT_.
+
+Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the
+opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry.
+
+79. A _counter attack_ or _return_ is one made instantly after or in
+continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible.
+This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter
+parry. The counter attack should also be made at, or just before, the
+full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made, a
+simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the
+opponent's body.
+
+Example: Being at _engage_, 1. _Number two_, at chest, _lunge_; 2.
+_Number one, parry right_, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.),
+_thrust_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+
+ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE.
+
+80. These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or disclosing
+an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the _press_,
+the _beat_, and the _twist_.
+
+81. In the _press_ the attack quickly presses against the opponent's
+bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the attack
+is delivered.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, press_, and at chest,
+_thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry right_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+82. The attack by _disengagement_ is particularly effective following
+_the press_.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, press_, and at
+stomach, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, low parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+83. The _beat_ is an attack in which a sharp blow is struck against
+the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an
+opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when
+there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, beat_, and at stomach
+(chest, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+84. In the _twist_ the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle or
+bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and a
+straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength
+on the part of the attack.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, twist_, and at
+stomach, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, low parry, left_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+
+FEINTS.
+
+85. Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are
+made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes the
+desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according
+to the number of such movements made by the attack.
+
+86. In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little force
+as possible is put into a feint.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, _Number one, feint_ head _thrust_; at
+stomach, _lunge_; 2. _Number two, parry right and low parry right_; 3.
+_ASSAULT_.
+
+Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes
+both parries.
+
+87. In double feints first one part of the body and then another is
+threatened and a third attacked.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, feint straight thrust_
+at chest; _disengagement_ at chest; at stomach, _lunge_; 2. _Number
+two, parry right, parry left_, and _low parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+88. An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the
+_press_ or _beat_.
+
+89. In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried. When
+the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the attack the
+feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a counter
+feint.
+
+90. A _counter feint_ is a feint following the opponent's feint or
+following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined
+movements.
+
+
+COMBINED MOVEMENTS.
+
+91. When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various foot
+movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor
+combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession,
+increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more
+skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently.
+
+1. Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, by disengagement_
+at chest, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left, right step_ (left foot
+first), and _lunge_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+2. Example: Being at _engage left_, _Number one, press_ and _lunge_;
+2. _Number two, parry right, left step_, and _thrust_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+3. Example: Being at the _engage_, _Number one, by disengagement_ at
+chest, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left, front pass_, and at head
+_butt strike_; 3. _Number one, right step_; 4. _ASSAULT_.
+
+92. Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as _cross
+counters_, and example No. 3 of movements known as _close counters_.
+
+93. A _chancery_ is an attack by means of which the opponent is
+disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which
+disables his weapon.
+
+94. When the different combinations are executed with sufficient skill
+the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized and
+executed at the command _assault_. The accuracy and celerity of the
+movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view to
+the correction of faulty execution.
+
+95. It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to
+leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of
+instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the
+object of the drill.
+
+
+VII. FENCING AT WILL.
+
+96. As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to
+the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men,
+each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself.
+Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random
+attacks and defenses.
+
+97. The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a time.
+Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn different
+methods of attack and defense from each other.
+
+98. The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a
+view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards
+everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the
+movements and quick perception of the adversary's intentions.
+
+99. Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent dodging
+to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be
+continually encouraged.
+
+100. In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents facing
+each other at the position of order arms, salute. They then
+immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles
+engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his
+opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided
+before the salute.
+
+101. The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing salute
+having been rendered, the instructor commands, _At will_, 2.
+_ASSAULT_, after which either party has the right to attack. To
+interrupt the contest the instructor will command _HALT_, at which the
+combatants will immediately come to the order. To terminate the
+contest the instructor will command, 1. _Halt_, 2. _SALUTE_, at which
+the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove
+their masks.
+
+102. When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one
+opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at
+_charge bayonet_, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver
+an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor
+commands, _HALT_, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in
+assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double
+time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a
+distance not exceeding 30 yards.
+
+103. The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide
+doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest
+indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment
+on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies and
+explain how they may be avoided in the future.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 104.]
+
+104. As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield the
+rifle left handed, that is on the left side of the body, left hand at
+the small Of the stock. Many men will be able to use this method to
+advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is wounded.
+
+105. After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in
+fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When
+practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this
+character.
+
+In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of
+umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at
+once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the
+numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required
+in group fencing.
+
+
+RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL.
+
+106. 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit
+counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient
+force to disable.
+
+2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit."
+
+3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. A
+position of engage is taken.
+
+4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only
+when the first hit was not called.
+
+5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because of
+breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take the
+position of the order.
+
+6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will
+not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend
+himself.
+
+7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing.
+
+8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit.
+
+
+SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL.
+
+107. When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's position
+and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to discover, if
+possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the adversary out
+and induce him to expose that part of the body at which the attack is
+to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a feint and then
+make the real attack.
+
+108. Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are
+difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more
+exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there
+is no previous warning of its delivery although it should always be
+expected. Returns are made without lunging if the adversary can be
+reached by thrusts or cuts.
+
+109. Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without
+knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and
+leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual returns with certain
+attacks from certain parries--a fault which the skilled opponent will
+soon discover.
+
+110. Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging.
+
+111. The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many
+forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible.
+Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted.
+
+
+HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS.
+
+112. The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of
+his weapon, not only to show the various movements, but also to lead
+in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and
+arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as
+instructors by fencing with each other.
+
+113. The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and his
+degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the instructor
+is demonstrating the combinations, feints, returns, and parries the
+rapidity of his attack should be regulated by the skill of the pupil
+and no more force than is necessary should be used. If the pupil
+exposes himself too much in the feints and parries the instructor
+will, by an attack, convince him of his error; but if these returns be
+too swiftly or too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious
+and the precision of his attack will be impaired. The object is to
+teach the pupil, not to give exhibitions of superior skill.
+
+114. Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered and
+fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick advantage of
+such opportunities.
+
+
+VIII. COMPETITIONS.
+
+115. In competitions between different organizations none but skillful
+fencers will be allowed to participate.
+
+116. In contests between two men judges may assign values to hits as
+follows:
+
+-------------------------------------------------
+                   | Thrusts |          |  Butt
+                   |   and   |  Cuts.   |   of
+                   | lunges. |          | rifle.
+-------------------------------------------------
+Stomach            |    4    |          |   1
+Chest              |    3    |          |
+Head               |    3    |    2     |   3
+Neck               |    2    |    2     |   2
+Legs               |    1    |    1     |
+Arms and hands     |    1    |    1     |
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+Stepping out of bounds, 4 points.
+
+117. When superiority between two men is decided by bouts, each bout
+will be decided by itself, i.e., points won in one bout can not be
+carried over to another.
+
+118. Details other than those mentioned above will be arranged by the
+officials of the competition.
+
+
+
+
+[C.I.D.R. 20.]
+
+INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
+
+CHANGES }                   WAR DEPARTMENT,
+No. 20  }                   WASHINGTON, _August 18, 1917_.
+
+Paragraph 150 and paragraph 150 of Appendix A, Infantry Drill
+Regulations (corrected to Apr. 15, 1917), are changed as follows, to
+correct error made in printing that edition:
+
+150. (Page 47.) _CEASE FIRING._
+
+Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load; those not loaded are loaded; sights are laid, pieces are locked
+and brought to the order.
+
+_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position, or to steady the men. (_C.I.D.R. No. 20, August 18, 1917._)
+
+[300.73, A.G.O.]
+
+150. (Page 220, Appendix A.) _CEASE FIRING._
+
+Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge
+is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights
+are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order.
+
+_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men. (_C.I.D.R. No. 20, August 18, 1917._)
+
+[300.73, A.G.O.]
+
+BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:
+
+H.L. SCOTT,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff_.
+
+Official:
+H.P. McCAIN,
+_The Adjutant General_.
+
+
+
+
+Books necessary for citizens and for every man interested in home
+defense and the military.
+
+Field Service Regulations                                      .75
+Regulations for the Army of the United States                 1.00
+Manual for Army Bakers                                         .75
+Blue Jackets Manual                                           1.00
+Sanitary Troops                                                .75
+Manual of Physical Training                                    .75
+Rules of Land Warfare                                          .75
+Coast Artillery Drill Regulations                             1.00
+Provisional Drill & Service Reg. For Field Artillery          1.25
+Ship and Gun Drills                                            .60
+Cavalry Drill Regulations                                      .75
+Small Arms Firing Manual                                       .75
+United States Army Transport Service Regulations               .50
+Manual for Army Cooks                                          .75
+Engineer's Field Manual                                       1.25
+The Deck and Boat Book                                         .60
+Infantry Drill Regulations                                     .50
+Drill Regulations for Machine Gun Companies                    .30
+Manual of Interior Guard Duty United States Army               .50
+Signal Book United States Army                                 .35
+Provisional Drill Regulations for 6' Howitzers                1.25
+Drill Regulations for Field Companies of Signal Corps          .75
+Gunnery and Explosive                                          .35
+Manual for Court Martials                                     1.10
+Manual for Medical Department                                 1.10
+Army Horse in Accident & Disease                               .85
+Non-Commissioned Officers and Privates Manual                  .50
+Provisional Drill Reg. for Horse and Light Artillery          1.25
+
+All the above Military and Naval text books have been compiled by U.S.
+Army and Navy officers and contain all changes to date.
+
+MILITARY PUBLISHING CO.
+42 BROADWAY
+NEW YORK
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED
+STATES ARMY, 1911***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 20866-8.txt or 20866-8.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/6/20866
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/20866-8.zip b/20866-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..907fea2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-8.zip
diff --git a/20866-h.zip b/20866-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee1529a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h.zip
diff --git a/20866-h/20866-h.htm b/20866-h/20866-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eeb94dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/20866-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,11827 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html>
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" />
+<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Infantry Drill Regulations, United States Army, 1911, by United States War Department</title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+
+    h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { width: 33%;
+	 margin-top: 2em;
+	 margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+
+    table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+    body{margin-left: 15%;
+         margin-right: 15%;
+        }
+
+    .pagenum  {position: absolute; left: 92%;
+               font-size: 13px; text-indent: 0em; color: #ababab;
+               background-color: inherit; font-weight: normal;
+               font-style: normal; font-variant: normal;
+               text-decoration: none;}
+
+    .blockquot{margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;}
+
+    .hang     {text-indent: -2em; margin-left: 2em;}
+
+    .bbox     {border: solid black 1px; margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%;}
+
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+    .u        {text-decoration: underline;}
+
+    .sans     {font-family: sans-serif; font-style: italic;
+               font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .sansp    {font-family: sans-serif;}
+
+    .err      {border-bottom: thin dotted red;}
+
+    .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;}
+    .footnote .label  {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;}
+    .fnanchor {vertical-align: baseline;
+               position: relative; bottom: 0.4em;
+               font-size: .8em;
+               text-decoration: none;}
+
+    .notes    {background-color: #eeeeee; color: #000; padding-top: .5em; padding-bottom: .5em;
+               padding-right: 1em; padding-left: 1em; border: 1px solid black;
+               margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%;}
+    hr.full { width: 100%;
+              margin-top: 3em;
+              margin-bottom: 0em;
+              margin-left: auto;
+              margin-right: auto;
+              height: 4px;
+              border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */
+              border-style: solid;
+              border-color: #000000;
+              clear: both; }
+    pre      {font-size: 75%;}
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, Infantry Drill Regulations, United States
+Army, 1911, by United States War Department</h1>
+<pre>
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre>
+<p>Title: Infantry Drill Regulations, United States Army, 1911</p>
+<p>       Corrected to April 15, 1917 (Changes Nos. 1 to 19)</p>
+<p>Author: United States War Department</p>
+<p>Release Date: March 20, 2007  [eBook #20866]</p>
+<p>Language: English</p>
+<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p>
+<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED STATES ARMY, 1911***</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<h3>E-text prepared by Bethanne M. Simms, Linda Cantoni,<br />
+    and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br />
+    (http://www.pgdp.net).<br />
+    <br />
+    Special thanks to Daniel Emerson Griffith<br />
+    for creating the Lilypond sound and image files for the bugle calls.</h3>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<div class="notes">
+<p><b>Transcriber's Notes:</b> The image and sound files for the
+<a href="#BUGLE_CALLS">bugle calls</a>
+were created with Lilypond. Click on the [Listen] link
+to hear the midi file. Click on the [Lilypond] link to view the Lilypond source
+file.</p>
+
+<p>Hover the mouse over text underlined in red to see a
+pop-up transcriber's note, <span class="err" title="Transcriber's Note">like this</span>.
+A hyperlinked paragraph number links to an <a href="#APPENDIX_A">appendix</a> containing an alternate
+version of that paragraph. The original book contains a short <a href="#ERRATA">errata page</a>,
+and [Errata] links have been provided
+where applicable.</p>
+
+</div>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<div class="bbox">
+<h1>Infantry<br />
+Drill Regulations</h1>
+
+<h3>UNITED STATES ARMY</h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/deco.png" width="18" height="20" alt="" /></p>
+
+<h1>1911</h1>
+
+<h3>CORRECTED TO APRIL 15, 1917</h3>
+
+<h4>(Changes Nos. 1 to 19)</h4>
+
+<hr style="width: 35%;" />
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+MILITARY PUBLISHING CO.<br />
+42 BROADWAY<br />
+NEW YORK<br />
+</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+WAR DEPARTMENT<br />
+Document No. 394<br />
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg&#160;3]</a></span></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+<span class="smcap">War Department</span>,<br />
+<span class="smcap">Office of the Chief of Staff</span>,<br />
+<i>Washington, August 19, 1911.</i><br />
+</p>
+
+<p>The following System of Drill Regulations for Infantry, prepared by a
+board of officers consisting of Lieut. Col. John F. Morrison,
+Infantry; Capt. Merch B. Stewart, Eighth Infantry; and Capt. Alfred W.
+Bjornstad, Twenty-eighth Infantry, is approved and is published for
+the information and government of the Regular Army and the Organized
+Militia of the United States. With a view to insure uniformity
+throughout the Army, all infantry drill formations not embraced in
+this system are prohibited, and those herein prescribed will be
+strictly observed.</p>
+
+<p>By order of the Secretary of War:</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+<span class="smcap">Leonard Wood</span>,<br />
+<i>Major General, Chief of Staff.</i>
+</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg&#160;5]</a></span></p>
+<h2>TABLE OF CONTENTS.</h2>
+
+<h3><a href="#PART_I_DRILL"><span class="smcap">Part I</span>&#8212;<i>Drill.</i></a></h3>
+
+<table style="width: 75%" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tbody>
+<tr><td>&#160;</td><td style="text-align: right">Paragraph.</td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#INTRODUCTION">1. Introduction</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_1">1&#8211;30</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#ORDERS_COMMANDS_AND_SIGNALS">2. Orders, commands and signals</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_31">31&#8211;47</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SOLDIER">3. School of the soldier</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_48">48&#8211;100</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">4. School of the squad</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_101">101&#8211;158</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY">5. School of the company</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_159">159&#8211;257</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#CLOSE_ORDER">(<i>a</i>) Close order</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_167">167&#8211;198</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#EXTENDED_ORDER">(<i>b</i>) Extended order</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_199">199&#8211;231</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#FIRE">(<i>c</i>) Fire</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_232">232&#8211;257</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_BATTALION">6. The battalion</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_258">258&#8211;326</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#CLOSE_ORDER2">(<i>a</i>) Close order</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_263">263&#8211;289</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#COMBAT_PRINCIPLES">(<i>b</i>) Combat principles</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_290">290&#8211;326</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#THE_REGIMENT">7. The regiment</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_327">327&#8211;346</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#CLOSE_ORDER3">(<i>a</i>) Close order</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_333">333&#8211;341</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#COMBAT_PRINCIPLES2">(<i>b</i>) Combat principles</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_342">342&#8211;346</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#THE_BRIGADE">8. The brigade</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_347">347&#8211;349</a></td></tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3><a href="#Part_II_COMBAT"><span class="smcap">Part II</span>&#8212;<i>Combat.</i></a></h3>
+
+<table style="width: 75%" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tbody>
+<tr><td><a href="#INTRODUCTION2">1. Introduction</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_350">350&#8211;357</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#LEADERSHIP">2. Leadership</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_358">358&#8211;388</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#GENERAL_CONSIDERATIONS">(<i>a</i>) General considerations</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_358">358&#8211;370</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#TEAMWORK">(<i>b</i>) Teamwork</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_371">371&#8211;377</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#ORDERS">(<i>c</i>) Orders</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_378">378&#8211;383</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#COMMUNICATION">(<i>d</i>) Communication</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_384">384&#8211;388</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#COMBAT_RECONNAISSANCE">3. Combat reconnaissance</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_389">389&#8211;399</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#FIRE_SUPERIORITY">4. Fire superiority</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_400">400&#8211;424</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#PURPOSE">(<i>a</i>) Purpose and nature</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_400">400&#8211;401</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#FIRE_DIRECTION">(<i>b</i>) Fire direction and control</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_402">402&#8211;424</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#DEPLOYMENT">5. Deployment</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_425">425&#8211;441</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#ATTACK">6. Attack</a></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_442">442&#8211;488</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#DEPLOYMENT_ATTACK">(<i>a</i>) Deployment for attack</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">
+  <a href="#para_449">449&#8211;452</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#ADVANCING_ATTACK">(<i>b</i>) Advancing the attack</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_453">453&#8211;457</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#FIRE_ATTACK">(<i>c</i>) The fire attack</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_458">458&#8211;463</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#CHARGE">(<i>d</i>) The charge</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_464">464&#8211;475</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#PURSUIT">(<i>e</i>) Pursuit</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_476">476&#8211;480</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#ATTACK_FORTIFICATIONS">(<i>f</i>) Attack of fortifications</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_481">481&#8211;484</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#HOLDING_ATTACK">(<i>g</i>) Holding attack</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_485">485&#8211;488</a><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg&#160;6]</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#DEFENSE">7. Defense</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_489">489&#8211;519</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#POSITIONS">(<i>a</i>) Positions and intrenchments</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_489">489&#8211;494</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#DEPLOYMENT_FOR_DEFENSE">(<i>b</i>) Deployment for defense</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_495">495&#8211;510</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#COUNTERATTACK">(<i>c</i>) Counterattack</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_511">511&#8211;516</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#DELAYING">(<i>d</i>) Delaying action</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_517">517&#8211;519</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#MEETING_ENGAGEMENTS">8. Meeting engagements</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_520">520&#8211;530</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#WITHDRAWAL_FROM_ACTION">9. Withdrawal from action</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_531">531&#8211;535</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#MISCELLANEOUS">10. Miscellaneous</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_537">537&#8211;622</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#MACHINE_GUNS">(<i>a</i>) Machine guns</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_537">537&#8211;546</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#AMMUNITION">(<i>b</i>) Ammunition supply</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_547">547&#8211;553</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#MOUNTED">(<i>c</i>) Mounted scouts</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_554">554&#8211;557</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#NIGHT_OPERATIONS">(<i>d</i>) Night operations</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_558">558&#8211;568</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#INFANTRY_AGAINST_CAVALRY">(<i>e</i>) Infantry against Cavalry</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_569">569&#8211;574</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#INFANTRY_AGAINST_ARTILLERY">(<i>f</i>) Infantry against Artillery</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_575">575&#8211;578</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#ARTILLERY_SUPPORTS">(<i>g</i>) Artillery supports</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_579">579&#8211;583</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#INTRENCHMENTS">(<i>h</i>) Intrenchments</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_584">584&#8211;595</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#MINOR_WARFARE">(<i>i</i>) Minor warfare</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_596">596&#8211;603</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#PATROLS">(<i>j</i>) Patrols</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_604">604&#8211;622</a></td></tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3><a href="#Part_III_MARCHES_AND_CAMPS"><span class="smcap">Part III</span>&#8212;<i>Marches and camps.</i></a></h3>
+
+<table style="width: 75%" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tbody>
+<tr><td><a href="#MARCHES">1. Marches</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_623">623&#8211;660</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#TRAINING">(<i>a</i>) Training and discipline</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_623">623&#8211;635</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#PROTECTION">(<i>b</i>) Protection of the march</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_636">636&#8211;660</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#CAMPS">2. Camps</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_661">661&#8211;707</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#SANITATION">(<i>a</i>) Sanitation</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_661">661&#8211;677</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#PROTECTION_OF_CAMP">(<i>b</i>) Protection of camp or bivouac</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_678">678&#8211;707</a></td></tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3><a href="#Part_IV_CEREMONIES_AND_INSPECTIONS"><span class="smcap">Part IV</span>&#8212;<i>Ceremonies and inspections.</i></a></h3>
+
+<table style="width: 75%" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tbody>
+<tr><td><a href="#CEREMONIES">1. Ceremonies</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_708">708&#8211;765</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#REVIEWS">(<i>a</i>) Reviews</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_711">711&#8211;731</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#PARADES">(<i>b</i>) Parades</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_732">732&#8211;735</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#ESCORTS">(<i>c</i>) Escorts</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_736">736&#8211;744</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#INSPECTIONS">2. Inspections</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_745">745&#8211;754</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#MUSTER">3. Muster</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_755">755&#8211;757</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#HONORS_AND_SALUTES">4. Honors and salutes</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_758">758&#8211;765</a></td></tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3><a href="#Part_V_MANUALS"><span class="smcap">Part V</span>.&#8212;<i>Manuals.</i></a></h3>
+
+<table style="width: 75%" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tbody>
+<tr><td><a href="#THE_COLOR">1. The color</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_766">766&#8211;778</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#THE_BAND">2. The band</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_779">779&#8211;781</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#MANUAL_OF_THE_SABER">3. Manual of the saber</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_782">782&#8211;791</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#MANUAL_OF_TENT_PITCHING">4. Manual of tent pitching</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_792">792&#8211;803</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><a href="#MANUAL_OF_THE_BUGLE">5. Manual of the bugle</a></td><td style="text-align: right"><a href="#para_804">804&#8211;807</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#BUGLE_CALLS">(<i>a</i>) Bugle calls.</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">&#160;</td></tr>
+<tr><td><span style="margin-left: 3em;"><a href="#BUGLE_SIGNALS">(<i>b</i>) Bugle signals.</a></span></td><td style="text-align: right">&#160;</td></tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3><a href="#APPENDIX_A">Appendix A.</a></h3>
+
+<h3><a href="#APPENDIX_B">Appendix B.</a></h3>
+
+<h3><a href="#APPENDIX_C">Appendix C.&#8212;Manual of the Bayonet.</a></h3>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg&#160;7]</a></span></p>
+<h1>INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.</h1>
+
+<h2>UNITED STATES ARMY, 1911.</h2>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>DEFINITIONS.</h2>
+
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Alignment:</span> A straight line upon which several elements are formed,
+or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements upon a
+straight line.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Base:</span> The element on which a movement is regulated.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Battle sight:</span> The position of the rear sight when the leaf is laid
+down.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Center:</span> The middle point or element of a command.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Column:</span> A formation in which the elements are placed one behind
+another.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Deploy:</span> To extend the front. In general to change from column to
+line, or from close order to extended order.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Depth:</span> The space from head to rear of any formation, including the
+leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12
+inches.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Distance:</span> Space between elements in the direction of depth. Distance
+is measured from the back of the man in front to the breast of the man
+in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 inches in both line and
+column.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Element:</span> A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, forming
+part of a still larger body.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">File:</span> Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the
+rear rank. The front-rank man is the <span class="sans">file leader</span>. A file which has
+no rear-rank man is a <span class="sans">blank file</span>. The term <span class="sans">file</span> applies also to a
+single man in a single-rank formation.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">File closers:</span> Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a
+company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, all men
+posted in the line of file closers.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Flank:</span> The right or left of a command in line or in column; also the
+element on the right or left of the line.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg&#160;8]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Formation:</span> Arrangement of the elements of a command. The placing of
+all fractions in their order in line, in column, or for battle.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Front:</span> The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in line
+or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 inches. Front
+also denotes the direction of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Guide:</span> An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom the
+command or elements thereof regulates its march.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Head:</span> The leading element of a column.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Interval:</span> Space between elements of the same line. The interval
+between men in ranks is 4 inches and is measured from elbow to elbow.
+Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured from the left elbow of
+the left man or guide of the group on the right, to the right elbow of
+the right man or guide of the group on the left.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Left:</span> The left extremity or element of a body of troops.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Line:</span> A formation in which the different elements are abreast of
+each other.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Order, close:</span> The formation in which the units, in double rank, are
+arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and distances.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Order, extended:</span> The formation in which the units are separated by
+intervals greater than in close order.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Pace:</span> Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Point of rest:</span> The point at which a formation begins. Specifically,
+the point toward which units are aligned in successive movements.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Rank:</span> A line of men placed side by side.</p>
+
+<p class="hang"><span class="sans">Right:</span> The right extremity or element of a body of troops.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg&#160;9]</a></span></p>
+<h1><a name="PART_I_DRILL" id="PART_I_DRILL"></a><span class="smcap">Part I</span>.&#8212;DRILL.</h1>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="INTRODUCTION" id="INTRODUCTION"></a>INTRODUCTION.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_1"><b>1.</b></a> Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training;
+success may be looked for only when the training is intelligent and
+thorough.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_2"><b>2.</b></a> Commanding officers are accountable for the proper training of
+their respective organizations within the limits prescribed by
+regulations and orders.</p>
+
+<p>The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency.
+The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon its
+effectiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in the training
+of the units of an organization are indispensable to the efficiency of
+the whole; it is by such means alone that the requisite teamwork may
+be developed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_3"><b>3.</b></a> Simple movements and elastic formations are essential to correct
+training for battle.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_4"><b>4.</b></a> The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the
+principles for training and for increasing the probability of success
+in battle.</p>
+
+<p>In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be sought.
+Quibbling over the minuti&#230; of form is indicative of failure to grasp
+the spirit.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_5"><b>5.</b></a> The principles of combat are considered in
+<a href="#Part_II_COMBAT">Part II</a> of these
+regulations. They are treated in the various schools included in
+<a href="#PART_I_DRILL">Part
+I</a> only to the extent necessary to indicate the functions of the
+various commanders and the division of responsibility between them.
+The amplification necessary to a proper understanding of their
+application is to be sought in <a href="#Part_II_COMBAT">Part II</a>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_6"><b>6.</b></a> The following important distinctions must be observed:</p>
+
+<p>(<i>a</i>) Drills executed at <span class="sans">attention</span> and the ceremonies are
+<span class="sans">disciplinary exercises</span> designed to teach precise and soldierly
+movement, and to inculcate that prompt and subconscious obedience
+which is essential to proper military control. To this end,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg&#160;10]</a></span> smartness
+and precision should be exacted in the execution of every detail. Such
+drills should be frequent, but short.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>b</i>) The purpose of <span class="sans">extended order drill</span> is to teach the
+<span class="sans">mechanism</span> of deployment, of the firings, and, in general, of the
+employment of troops in combat. Such drills are in the nature of
+disciplinary exercises and should be frequent, thorough, and exact in
+order to habituate men to the firm control of their leaders. Extended
+order drill is executed <span class="sans">at ease</span>. The company is the largest unit
+which executes extended order drill.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>c</i>) <span class="sans">Field exercises</span> are for instruction in the duties incident to
+campaign. Assumed situations are employed. Each exercise should
+conclude with a discussion, on the ground, of the exercise and
+principles involved.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>d</i>) The <span class="sans">combat exercise, a form of field exercise</span> of the company,
+battalion, and larger units, consists of the <span class="sans">application of tactical
+principles</span> to assumed situations, employing in the execution the
+appropriate formations and movements of close and extended order.</p>
+
+<p>Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle
+conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men with
+such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently be
+consolidated to provide war-strength organizations. Officers and
+noncommissioned officers not required to complete the full quota of
+the units participating are assigned as observers or umpires.</p>
+
+<p>The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; thorough
+training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals is necessary.</p>
+
+<p>The exercise should be followed by a brief drill at attention in order
+to restore smartness and control.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_7"><b>7.</b></a> In field exercises the enemy is said to be <span class="sans">imaginary</span> when his
+position and force are merely assumed; <span class="sans">outlined</span> when his position
+and force are indicated by a few men; <span class="sans">represented</span> when a body of
+troop acts as such.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">General Rules for Drills and Formations.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_8"><b>8.</b></a> When the <span class="sans">preparatory</span> command consists of more than one part, its
+elements are arranged as follows:</p>
+
+<p>(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions or
+elements of an organization: (<i>a</i>) Description of the movement; (<i>b</i>)
+how executed, or on what element executed.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg&#160;11]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivisions of
+an organization: (<i>a</i>) The designation of the subdivisions; (<i>b</i>) the
+movement to be executed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_9"><b>9.</b></a> Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained as
+toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute the word &quot;left&quot;
+for &quot;right,&quot; and the reverse, to have the explanation of the
+corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are given
+for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The substitute
+word of the command is placed within parentheses.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_10"><b>10.</b></a> Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when
+marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the command for
+movements involving marching need not be prefaced by <span class="sans">forward</span>, as 1.
+<span class="sans">Column right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_11"><b>11.</b></a> Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in double
+time.</p>
+
+<p>If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command <span class="sans">double time</span>
+precedes the command of execution.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_12"><b>12.</b></a> In successive movements executed in double time the leading or
+base unit marches in <span class="sans">quick time</span> when not otherwise prescribed; the
+other units march in <span class="sans">double time</span> to their places in the formation
+ordered and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. If
+marching in double time, the command <span class="sans">double time</span> is omitted. The
+leading or base unit marches in <span class="sans">quick time</span>; the other units continue
+at double time to their places in the formation ordered and then
+conform to the gait of the leading or base unit.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_13"><b>13.</b></a> To hasten the execution of a movement begun in quick time, the
+command: 1. <span class="sans">Double time</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, is given. The leading or base
+unit continues to march in quick time, or remains at halt if already
+halted; the other units complete the execution of the movement in
+double time and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_14"><b>14.</b></a> To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the
+correction of errors, the command: 1. <span class="sans">In place</span>, 2. <span class="sans">HALT</span>, is given.
+All halt and stand fast, without changing the position of the pieces.
+To resume the movement the command: 1. <span class="sans">Resume</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, is given.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_15"><b>15.</b></a> To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt, to begin
+anew a movement improperly begun, the command, <span class="sans">AS YOU WERE</span>, is
+given, at which the movement ceases and the former position is
+resumed.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg&#160;12]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_16"><b>16.</b></a> Unless otherwise announced, the guide of a company or subdivision
+of a company in line is <span class="sans">right</span>; of a battalion in line or line of
+subdivisions or of a deployed line, <span class="sans">center</span>; of a rank in column of
+squads, toward the side of the guide of the company.</p>
+
+<p>To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change the
+guide: <span class="sans">Guide (right, left</span>, or <span class="sans">center)</span>.</p>
+
+<p>In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point of
+rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced.</p>
+
+<p>The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with a
+movement, follows the command of execution for that movement.
+Exception: 1. <span class="sans">As skirmishers, guide right (left</span> or <span class="sans">center)</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_17"><b>17.</b></a> <span class="sans">The turn on the fixed pivot</span> by subdivisions is used in all
+formations from line into column and the reverse.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">The turn on the moving pivot</span> is used by subdivisions of a column in
+executing changes of direction.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_18"><b>18.</b></a> Partial changes of direction may be executed:</p>
+
+<p>By interpolating in the preparatory command the word <span class="sans">half</span>, as
+<span class="sans">Column half right (left)</span>, or <span class="sans">Right (left) half turn</span>. A change of
+direction of 45&#176; is executed.</p>
+
+<p>By the command: <span class="sans">INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT)</span>. The guide, or guiding
+element, moves in the indicated direction and the remainder of the
+command conforms. This movement effects slight changes of direction.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_19"><b>19.</b></a> The designations <span class="sans">line of platoons</span>, <span class="sans">line of companies</span>, <span class="sans">line of
+battalions</span>, etc., refer to the formations in which the platoons,
+companies, battalions, etc., each in column of squads, are in line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_20"><b>20.</b></a> Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in forming
+line to the right or left the subdivisions will have their proper
+intervals.</p>
+
+<p>In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is
+charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve the
+trace, step, and distance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_21"><b>21.</b></a> In close order, all details, detachments, and other bodies of
+troops are habitually formed in double rank.</p>
+
+<p>To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in and in
+alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand upon the hip,
+fingers pointing downward. In the first case the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg&#160;13]</a></span> hand is dropped by
+the side when the next man on the left has his interval; in the second
+case, at the command <span class="sans">front</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_22"><b>22.</b></a> The posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, special units
+(such as band or machine-gun company), etc., in the various formations
+of the company, battalion, or regiment, are shown in plates.</p>
+
+<p>In all changes from one formation to another involving a change of
+post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken by the most
+convenient route as soon as practicable after the command of execution
+for the movement; officers and noncommissioned officers who have
+prescribed duties in connection with the movement ordered, take their
+new posts when such duties are completed.</p>
+
+<p>As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever
+their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty to
+rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_23"><b>23.</b></a> Except at ceremonies, the special units have no fixed places. They
+take places as directed; in the absence of directions, they conform as
+nearly as practicable to the plates, and in subsequent movements
+maintain their relative positions with respect to the flank or end of
+the command on which they were originally posted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_24"><b>24.</b></a> General, field, and staff officers are habitually mounted. The
+staff of an officer forms in single rank 3 paces in rear of him, the
+right of the rank extending 1 pace to the right of a point directly in
+rear of him. Members of the staff are arranged in order from right to
+left as follows: General staff officers, adjutant, aids, other staff
+officers, arranged in each classification in order of rank, the senior
+on the right. The flag of the general officer and the orderlies are 3
+paces in rear of the staff, the flag on the right. When necessary to
+reduce the front of the staff and orderlies, each line executes <span class="sans">twos
+right</span> or <span class="sans">fours right</span>, as explained in the Cavalry Drill
+Regulations, and follows the commander.</p>
+
+<p>When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return saber
+with their chief.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_25"><b>25.</b></a> In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns to the
+left.</p>
+
+<p>When the commander faces to give commands, the staff, flag, and
+orderlies do not change position.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg&#160;14]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_26"><b>26.</b></a> When making or receiving official reports, or on meeting out of
+doors, all officers will salute.</p>
+
+<p>Military courtesy requires the junior to salute first, but when the
+salute is introductory to a report made at a military ceremony or
+formation, to the representative of a common superior (as, for
+example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the officer
+making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first; the officer
+to whom the report is made will acknowledge by saluting that he has
+received and understood the report.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 17.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_27"><b>27.</b></a> For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment or smaller
+unit, except those belonging to the machine-gun organizations, are
+consolidated into a detachment; the senior present commands if no
+officer is in charge. The detachment is formed as a platoon or squad
+of cavalry in line or column of fours; noncommissioned staff officers
+are on the right or in the leading ranks.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_28"><b>28.</b></a> For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff officers as are
+dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the color, in order of rank
+from right to left. In column of squads they march as file closers.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_29"><b>29.</b></a> Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned staff officers and
+orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless otherwise directed.
+If mounted, the noncommissioned staff officers are ordinarily posted
+on the right or at the head of the orderlies.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_30"><b>30.</b></a> In all formations and movements a noncommissioned officer
+commanding a platoon or company carries his piece as the men do, if he
+is so armed, and takes the same post as an officer in like situation.
+When the command is formed in line for ceremonies, a noncommissioned
+officer commanding a company takes post on the right of the right
+guide after the company has been aligned.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg&#160;15]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="ORDERS_COMMANDS_AND_SIGNALS" id="ORDERS_COMMANDS_AND_SIGNALS"></a>ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_31"><b>31.</b></a> <span class="sans">Commands</span> only are employed in drill at attention. Otherwise
+either a <span class="sans">command</span>, <span class="sans">signal</span>, or <span class="sans">order</span> is employed, as best suits
+the occasion, or one may be used in conjunction with another.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_32"><b>32.</b></a> Signals should be freely used in instruction, in order that
+officers and men may readily know them. In making arm signals the
+saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_33"><b>33.</b></a> Officers and men fix their attention at the first word of command,
+the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first motion of the
+signal. A signal includes both the preparatory command and the command
+of execution; the movement commences as soon as the signal is
+understood, unless otherwise prescribed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_34"><b>34.</b></a> Except in movements executed at <span class="sans">attention</span>, commanders or leaders
+of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or signals whenever such
+repetition is deemed necessary to insure prompt and correct execution.</p>
+
+<p>Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon leaders,
+guides, and musicians are equipped with whistles.</p>
+
+<p>The major and his staff will use a whistle of distinctive tone; the
+captain and company musicians a second and distinctive whistle; the
+platoon leaders and guides a third distinctive whistle.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 15.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_35"><b>35.</b></a> Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential as a
+substitute for the voice under conditions which render the voice
+inadequate.</p>
+
+<p>Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed upon to
+facilitate the solution of such special difficulties as the particular
+situation is likely to develop, but it must be remembered that
+simplicity and certainty are indispensable qualities of a signal.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Orders.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_36"><b>36.</b></a> In these regulations an <span class="sans">order</span> embraces instructions or
+directions given orally or in writing in terms suited to the
+particular occasion and not prescribed herein.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Orders</span> are employed only when the <span class="sans">commands</span> prescribed herein do
+not sufficiently indicate the will of the commander.</p>
+
+<p>Orders are more fully described in paragraphs <a href="#para_378">378</a> to 383, inclusive.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg&#160;16]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Commands.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_37"><b>37.</b></a> In these regulations a <span class="sans">command</span> is the will of the commander
+expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_38"><b>38.</b></a> There are two kinds of commands:</p>
+
+<p>The <span class="sans">preparatory</span> command, such as <span class="sans">forward</span>, indicates the movement
+that is to be executed.</p>
+
+<p>The command of <span class="sans">execution</span>, such as <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, <span class="sans">HALT</span>, or <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, causes
+the execution.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Preparatory</span> commands are distinguished by <span class="sans">italics</span>, those of
+<span class="sans">execution</span> by <span class="sans">CAPITALS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands
+prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit
+concerned.</p>
+
+<p>The <span class="sans">preparatory</span> command should be given at such an interval of time
+before the command of <span class="sans">execution</span> as to admit of being properly
+understood: the command of <span class="sans">execution</span> should be given at the instant
+the movement is to commence.</p>
+
+<p>The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness
+proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.</p>
+
+<p>Each <span class="sans">preparatory</span> command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising
+inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of
+<span class="sans">execution</span> may be more energetic.</p>
+
+<p>The command of <span class="sans">execution</span> is firm in tone and brief.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_39"><b>39.</b></a> Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion repeat such
+commands of their superiors as are to be executed by their units,
+facing their units for that purpose. The battalion is the largest unit
+that executes a movement at the command of execution of its commander.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_40"><b>40.</b></a> When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face toward
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Indifference in giving commands must be avoided as it leads to laxity
+in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at all times.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Bugle Signals.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_41"><b>41.</b></a> The authorized <a href="#BUGLE_SIGNALS">bugle signals</a> are published in
+<a href="#Part_V_MANUALS">Part V</a> of these
+regulations.</p>
+
+<p>The following bugle signals may be used off the battle field, when not
+likely to convey information to the enemy:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE32">Attention</a>:</span> Troops are brought to attention.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg&#160;17]</a></span><br />
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE32">Attention to orders</a>:</span> Troops fix their attention.<br />
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE34">Forward, march</a>:</span> Used also to execute quick time from double time.<br />
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE36">Double time, march.</a></span><br />
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE37">To the rear, march</a>:</span> In close order, execute <span class="sans">squads right about</span>.<br />
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE35">Halt.</a></span><br />
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE09">Assemble, march.</a></span></p>
+</div>
+
+<p>The following bugle signals may be used on the battle field:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE40">Fix bayonets.</a></span><br />
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE41">Charge.</a></span><br />
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE09">Assemble, march.</a></span></p>
+</div>
+
+<p>These signals are used only when intended for the entire firing line;
+hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit (for
+example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct section of
+the battle field. Exception: <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE40">Fix bayonet</a></span>. (See
+<a href="#para_318">par. 318</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on the
+battle field. Their principal uses are in field exercises and practice
+firing.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE38">Commence firing</a>:</span> Officers charged with fire direction and control
+open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, the
+signal is equivalent to <span class="sans">fire at will</span>.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE39">Cease firing</a>:</span> All parts of the line execute <span class="sans">cease firing</span> at once.</p>
+
+<p>These signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, except
+when such unit is independent or detached from its regiment.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Whistle Signals.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_42"><b>42.</b></a> <span class="sans">Attention to orders.</span> A <span class="sans">short blast</span> of the whistle. This signal
+is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fix the attention
+of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to giving
+commands, orders, or signals.</p>
+
+<p>When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing and
+fixes his attention at a <span class="sans">short blast</span> of his platoon leader's
+whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are
+repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a squad leader's
+attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of his platoon
+leader, or if there are no orders or commands to convey to his squad
+he resumes firing at once.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Suspend firing.</span> A <span class="sans">long blast</span> of the whistle.</p>
+
+<p>All other whistle signals are prohibited.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 15.</i>)<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg&#160;18]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Arm Signals.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_43"><b>43.</b></a> The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals either
+arm may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing line
+&quot;repeat back&quot; at once to prevent misunderstanding.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Forward, march.</span> Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold
+the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march.</p>
+
+<p>This signal is also used to execute quick time from double time.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Halt.</span> Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and
+hold the arm vertically.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Double time, march.</span> Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust
+the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Squads right, march.</span> Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times
+between the vertical and horizontal positions.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Squads left, march.</span> Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it downward to the side and swing it several times between the
+downward and horizontal positions.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Squads right about, march</span> (if in close order) or, <span class="sans">To the rear,
+march</span> (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically above the
+head; carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several
+times between the vertical and downward positions.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Change direction</span> or <span class="sans">Column right (left), march.</span> The hand on the
+side toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried
+across the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then
+swing in a horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new
+direction.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">As skirmishers, march.</span> Raise both arms laterally until horizontal.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">As skirmishers, guide center, march.</span> Raise both arms laterally until
+horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return
+to the horizontal; repeat several times.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">As skirmishers, guide right (left), march.</span> Raise both arms laterally
+until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in
+the horizontal position; swing the other upward until vertical and
+return it to the horizontal; repeat several times.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Assemble, march.</span> Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and
+describe horizontal circles.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg&#160;19]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Range</span>, or <span class="sans">Change elevation.</span> To announce <span class="sans">range</span>, extend the arm
+toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist
+closed; by keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; by
+opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number
+equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short
+horizontal line with forefinger. <span class="sans">To change elevation</span>, indicate the
+<span class="sans">amount of increase</span> or <span class="sans">decrease</span> by fingers as above; point upward
+to indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">What range are you using?</span> or <span class="sans">What is the range?</span> Extend the arms
+toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting
+on the other hand, fist closed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Are you ready?</span> or <span class="sans">I am ready.</span> Raise the hand, fingers extended and
+joined, palm toward the person addressed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Commence firing.</span> Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm
+down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Fire faster.</span> Execute rapidly the signal &quot;Commence firing.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Fire slower.</span> Execute slowly the signal &quot;Commence firing.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To swing the cone of fire to the right, or left.</span> Extend the arm in
+full length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to
+right (left), and point in the direction of the new target.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Fix bayonet.</span> Simulate the movement of the right hand in &quot;Fix
+bayonet&quot; (<a href="#para_95">par. 95</a>).</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Suspend firing.</span> Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal
+position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Cease firing.</span> Raise the forearm as in <span class="sans">suspend firing</span> and swing it
+up and down several times in front of the face.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Platoon.</span> Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader;
+describe small circles with the hand. (See <a href="#para_44">par. 44</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Squad.</span> Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing
+the hand up and down from the wrist. (See <a href="#para_44">par. 44</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Rush.</span> Same as <span class="sans">double time</span>. (<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 14.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_44"><b>44.</b></a> The signals <span class="sans">platoon</span> and <span class="sans">squad</span> are intended primarily for
+communication between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal
+<span class="sans">platoon</span> or <span class="sans">squad</span> indicates that the platoon commander is to cause
+the signal which follows to be executed by platoon or squad.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg&#160;20]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Flag Signals.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_45"><b>45.</b></a> The signal flags described below are carried by the company
+musicians in the field.</p>
+
+<p>In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the permanent
+battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are as
+shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, within
+their respective battalions, in the order given below.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p>
+First battalion:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company A. Red field, white square.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company B. Red field, blue square.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company C. Red field, white diagonals.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company D. Red field, blue diagonals.</span><br />
+<br />
+Second battalion:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company E. White field, red square.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company F. White field, blue square.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company G. White field, red diagonals.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company H. White field, blue diagonals.</span><br />
+<br />
+Third battalion:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company I. Blue field, red square.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company K. Blue field, white square.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company L. Blue field, red diagonals.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Company M. Blue field, white diagonals.</span><br />
+</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><a name="para_46"><b>46.</b></a> In addition to their use in visual signaling, these flags serve to
+mark the assembly point of the company when disorganized by combat,
+and to mark the location of the company in bivouac and elsewhere, when
+such use is desirable.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_47"><b>47.</b></a> (1) For communication between the firing line and the reserve or
+commander in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal Corps codes) are
+prescribed and should be memorized. In transmission, their concealment
+from the enemy's view should be insured. In the absence of signal
+flags, the headdress or other substitute may be used.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg&#160;21]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+  <tbody>
+  <tr>
+    <td style="text-align: center; border-bottom: 2px solid black;"><b>Letter of<br />
+    Alphabet.</b></td>
+    <td style="text-align: center; border-bottom: 2px solid black;"><b>If signaled from the rear<br />
+    to the firing line.</b></td>
+    <td style="text-align: center; border-bottom: 2px solid black;"><b>If signaled from the firing<br />
+    line to the rear.</b></td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>AM</td>
+    <td>Ammunition going forward.</td>
+    <td>Ammunition required.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>CCC</td>
+    <td>Charge (mandatory at all times).</td>
+    <td>Am about to charge if no instructions to the contrary.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>CF</td>
+    <td>Cease firing.</td>
+    <td>Cease firing.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>DT</td>
+    <td>Double time or &quot;rush&quot;.</td>
+    <td>Double time or &quot;rush&quot;.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>F</td>
+    <td>Commence firing.</td>
+    <td>Commence firing.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>FB</td>
+    <td>Fix bayonets.</td>
+    <td>Fix bayonets.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>FL</td>
+    <td>Artillery fire is causing us losses.</td>
+    <td>Artillery fire is causing us losses.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>G</td>
+    <td>Move forward.</td>
+    <td>Preparing to move forward.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>HHH</td>
+    <td>Halt.</td>
+    <td>Halt.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>K</td>
+    <td>Negative.</td>
+    <td>Negative.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>LT</td>
+    <td>Left.</td>
+    <td>Left.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>O<br />
+    (Ardois and semaphore only)</td>
+    <td>What is the (R.N. etc.)?<br />
+    Interrogatory.<br />
+&nbsp;</td>
+    <td>What is the (R.N. etc.)?<br />
+    Interrogatory.<br />
+&nbsp;</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>_ _ ____ ____ _ _<br />
+    (All methods but ardois<br />
+    and semaphore)</td>
+    <td>What is the (R.N. etc.)?<br />
+    Interrogatory.<br />
+&nbsp;</td>
+    <td>What is the (R.N. etc.)?<br />
+    Interrogatory.<br />
+&nbsp;</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>P</td>
+    <td>Affirmative.</td>
+    <td>Affirmative.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>R</td>
+    <td>Acknowledgment.</td>
+    <td>Acknowledgment.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>RN</td>
+    <td>Range.</td>
+    <td>Range.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>RT</td>
+    <td>Right.</td>
+    <td>Right.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>SSS</td>
+    <td>Support going forward.</td>
+    <td>Support needed.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>SUF</td>
+    <td>Suspend firing.</td>
+    <td>Suspend firing.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>T</td>
+    <td>Target.</td>
+    <td>Target.</td>
+  </tr>
+  </tbody>
+  </table>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b>(2) <span class="smcap">The Two-arm Semaphore Code</span>.</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">(See <a href="#SEMAPHORE">illustrations</a> on pages following.)</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 13.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg&#160;22]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><a name="SEMAPHORE"></a>TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE.</h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/semaphore1.png" width="417" height="694" alt="semaphore" title="semaphore" /></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg&#160;23]</a></span></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/semaphore2.png" width="421" height="691" alt="semaphore" title="semaphore" /></p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg&#160;25]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="SCHOOL_OF_THE_SOLDIER" id="SCHOOL_OF_THE_SOLDIER"></a>SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_48"><b>48.</b></a> The instructor explains briefly each movement, first executing it
+himself if practicable. He requires the recruits to take the proper
+positions unassisted and does not touch them for the purpose of
+correcting them, except when they are unable to correct themselves. He
+avoids keeping them too long at the same movement, although each
+should be understood before passing to another. He exacts by degrees
+the desired precision and uniformity.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_49"><b>49.</b></a> In order that all may advance as rapidly as their abilities
+permit, the recruits are grouped according to proficiency as
+instruction progresses. Those who lack aptitude and quickness are
+separated from the others and placed under experienced drill masters.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_50"><b>50.</b></a> For preliminary instruction a number of recruits, usually not
+exceeding three or four, are formed as a squad in single rank.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Position of the Soldier, or Attention.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_51"><b>51.</b></a> Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conformation
+of the man permits.</p>
+
+<p>Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45&#176;.</p>
+
+<p>Knees straight without stiffness.</p>
+
+<p>Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on
+hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally.</p>
+
+<p>Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the
+trousers.</p>
+
+<p>Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis
+of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front.</p>
+
+<p>Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the
+feet.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Rests.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_52"><b>52.</b></a> Being at a halt, the commands are: <span class="sans">FALL OUT</span>; <span class="sans">REST</span>; <span class="sans">AT EASE</span>;
+and 1. <span class="sans">Parade</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Rest</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg&#160;26]</a></span>
+
+</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">fall out</span>, the men may leave the ranks, but are
+required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former
+places, at attention, at the command <span class="sans">fall in</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">rest</span> each man keeps one foot in place, but is not
+required to preserve silence or immobility.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">at ease</span> each man keeps one foot in place and is
+required to preserve silence but not immobility.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_53"><b>53.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Parade</span>, 2. <span class="sans">REST</span>. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to
+the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without
+constraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left
+hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the
+right hand; preserve silence and steadiness of position.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_54"><b>54.</b></a> To resume the attention: 1. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ATTENTION</span>. The men take
+the position of the soldier.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Eyes Right or Left.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_55"><b>55.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Eyes</span>, 2. <span class="sans">RIGHT (LEFT)</span>, 3. <span class="sans">FRONT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">right</span>, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed
+on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in, the same
+rank. At the command <span class="sans">front</span>, turn the head and eyes to the front.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Facings.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_56"><b>56.</b></a> To the flank: 1. <span class="sans">Right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">FACE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning
+on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the
+left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is
+executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Right (left) half face</span> is executed similarly, facing 45&#176;.</p>
+
+<p>&quot;To face in marching&quot; and advance, turn on the ball of either foot and
+step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; to face in
+marching without gaining ground in the new direction, turn on the ball
+of either foot and mark time.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_57"><b>57.</b></a> To the rear: 1. <span class="sans">About</span>, 2. <span class="sans">FACE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the rear
+and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the
+position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on
+the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the
+left.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg&#160;27]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Salute with the Hand.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_58"><b>58.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Hand</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SALUTE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches
+the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb
+and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at
+about 45&#176;, hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward the
+person saluted. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) Drop the arm smartly by the side.</p>
+
+<p>For rules governing salutes, see &quot;<a href="#HONORS_AND_SALUTES">Honors and Salutes</a>,&quot; paragraphs
+<a href="#para_758">758&#8211;765</a>.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 3, 6, and 18.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">STEPS AND MARCHINGS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_59"><b>59.</b></a> All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right step,
+begin with the left foot.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_60"><b>60.</b></a> The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured
+from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per
+minute.</p>
+
+<p>The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence
+is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.</p>
+
+<p>The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by
+calling <span class="sans">one, two, three, four</span>, or <span class="sans">left, right</span>, the instant the
+left and right foot, respectively, should be planted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_61"><b>61.</b></a> All steps and marchings and movements involving march are executed
+in <span class="sans">quick time</span> unless the squad be marching in <span class="sans">double time</span>, or
+<span class="sans">double time</span> be added to the command; in the latter case <span class="sans">double
+time</span> is added to the preparatory command. Example: 1. <span class="sans">Squad right,
+double time</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span> (<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>).</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Quick Time.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_62"><b>62.</b></a> Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">forward</span>, shift the weight of the body to the right
+leg, left knee straight.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30
+inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without
+shock; next, in like manner, advance the right<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg&#160;28]</a></span>
+foot and plant it as above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_63"><b>63.</b></a> Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in double
+time: 1. <span class="sans">Double time</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the
+right leg. At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, raise the forearms, fingers closed,
+to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy run
+with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging
+motion to the arms.</p>
+
+<p>If marching in quick time, at the command <span class="sans">march</span>, given as either
+foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then step
+off in double time.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_64"><b>64.</b></a> To resume the quick time: 1. <span class="sans">Quick time</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, given as either foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick
+time, dropping the hands by the sides.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Mark Time.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_65"><b>65.</b></a> Being in march: 1. <span class="sans">Mark time</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, given as either foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and
+continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches
+and planting it on line with the other.</p>
+
+<p>Being at a halt, at the command <span class="sans">march</span>, raise and plant the feet as
+described above.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Half Step.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_66"><b>66.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Half step</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_67"><b>67.</b></a> <span class="sans">Forward</span>, <span class="sans">half step</span>, <span class="sans">halt</span>, and <span class="sans">mark time</span> may be executed
+one from the other in quick or double time.</p>
+
+<p>To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Side Step.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_68"><b>68.</b></a> Being at a halt or mark time: 1. <span class="sans">Right (left) step</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the left
+foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg&#160;29]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
+double time.</p>
+
+<p>If at order arms, the side step is executed <span class="sans">at trail</span> without
+command.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Back Step.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_69"><b>69.</b></a> Being at a halt or mark time: 1. <span class="sans">Backward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.</p>
+
+<p>The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
+double time.</p>
+
+<p>If at order arms, the back step is executed <span class="sans">at trail</span> without
+command.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Halt.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_70"><b>70.</b></a> To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">halt</span>, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant
+the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first foot by the
+side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To March by the Flank.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_71"><b>71.</b></a> Being in march: 1. <span class="sans">By the right (left) flank</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching
+and step off in the new direction with the right foot.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To March to the Rear.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_72"><b>72.</b></a> Being in march: 1. <span class="sans">To the rear</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about on the balls
+of both feet and immediately step off with the left foot.</p>
+
+<p>If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four steps
+in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Change Step.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_73"><b>73.</b></a> Being in march: 1. <span class="sans">Change step</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the right foot near
+the heel of the left and step off with the left foot.</p>
+
+<p>The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command
+<span class="sans">march</span> being given as the left foot strikes the ground.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg&#160;30]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">MANUAL OF ARMS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_74"><b>74.</b></a> As soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, nomenclature
+(<a href="#PLATE_I">Pl. I</a>), and care of his rifle; when fair progress has been made in
+the instruction without arms, he is taught the manual of arms;
+instruction without arms and that with arms alternate.</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_75" href="#APPENDIX_A">75.</a></b> The following rules govern the carrying of the piece:</p>
+
+<p>First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the chamber
+or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so loaded, or
+supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with
+the <span class="sans">safety lock</span> turned to the &quot;safe.&quot; At all other times it is
+carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled.</p>
+
+<p>Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are immediately
+inspected at the commands: 1. <span class="sans">Inspection</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>; 3. <span class="sans">Order
+(Right shoulder, port)</span>, 4. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.</p>
+
+<p>If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed
+and placed in the belt.</p>
+
+<p>Third. The cut-off is kept turned &quot;off&quot; except when cartridges are
+actually used.</p>
+
+<p>Fourth. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, on guard,
+or for combat.</p>
+
+<p>Fifth. <span class="sans">Fall in</span> is executed with the piece at the order arms. <span class="sans">Fall
+out</span>, <span class="sans">rest</span>, and <span class="sans">at ease</span> are executed as without arms. On resuming
+<span class="sans">attention</span> the position of order arms is taken.</p>
+
+<p>Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece is
+brought to the right shoulder at the command <span class="sans">march</span>, the three
+motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be
+executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command with the
+words <span class="sans">at trail</span>; as, 1. <span class="sans">At trail, forward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>; the trail is
+taken at the command <span class="sans">march</span>.</p>
+
+<p>When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval or
+distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the piece
+to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting.</p>
+
+<p>Seventh. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The execution
+of the order begins when the halt is completed.</p>
+
+<p>Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without
+arms.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><a name="PLATE_I"></a>
+<img src="images/rifle.png" width="754" height="446" alt="Plate I (rifle)" title="Plate I (rifle)" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b><span class="err" title="Transcriber's Note: Plate number omitted in original">
+Plate I.</span></b></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg&#160;31]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_76"><b>76.</b></a> The following rules govern the execution of the manual of arms:</p>
+
+<p>First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of
+gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps the piece; the sling is
+included in the grasp of the hand.</p>
+
+<p>Second. In all positions of the piece &quot;diagonally across the body&quot; the
+position of the piece, left arm and hand are the same as in port arms.</p>
+
+<p>Third. In resuming the order from any position in the manual, the
+motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the piece about 3
+inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand above and
+near the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended and joined,
+forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all fingers of the
+right hand grasping the piece. To complete the order, lower the piece
+gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left quickly by the
+side, and take the position of order arms.</p>
+
+<p>Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to the ground, or
+other similar abuse of the rifle to produce effect in executing the
+manual, is prohibited.</p>
+
+<p>Fourth. The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the recruits
+are first required to give their whole attention to the details of the
+motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they become
+accustomed to handling their pieces. The instructor may require them
+to count aloud in cadence with the motions.</p>
+
+<p>Fifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are, for the
+purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail;
+in this case the command of <span class="sans">execution</span> determines the prompt
+execution of the first motion, and the commands, <span class="sans">two</span>, <span class="sans">three</span>,
+<span class="sans">four</span>, that of the other motions.</p>
+
+<p>To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: <span class="sans">By
+the numbers</span>; all movements divided into motions are then executed as
+above explained until he cautions: <span class="sans">Without the numbers</span>; or commands
+movements other than those in the manual of arms.</p>
+
+<p>Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of the
+manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the
+previous position of the piece.</p>
+
+<p>Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may be
+carried in any manner directed.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg&#160;32]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_77"><b>77.</b></a> <span class="sans">Position of order arms standing:</span> The butt rests evenly on the
+ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and
+touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand
+holding the piece between the thumb and fingers.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_78"><b>78.</b></a> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Present</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>With the right hand carry the piece in front of the center of the
+body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at
+the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>)
+Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_79"><b>79.</b></a> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Port</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the
+small of the stock; the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up,
+sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck
+with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting
+against the body; the piece in a vertical plane parallel to the front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_80"><b>80.</b></a> Being at present arms: 1. <span class="sans">Port</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry the piece diagonally across the body and take the position of
+port arms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_81"><b>81.</b></a> Being at port arms: 1. <span class="sans">Present</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center of the
+body and take the position of present arms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_82"><b>82.</b></a> Being at present or port arms: 1. <span class="sans">Order</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the right
+with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just above the
+lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last
+position in coming to the order. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) Complete the order.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_83"><b>83.</b></a> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Right shoulder</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel
+between the first two fingers. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) Without changing the grasp of
+the right hand, place the piece on the right shoulder, barrel up and
+inclined at an angle of about 45&#176; from the horizontal, trigger guard
+in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the piece in
+a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left hand,
+thumb and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip
+of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow
+down. (<span class="sans">THREE</span>) Drop the left hand by the side.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg&#160;33]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_84"><b>84.</b></a> Being at right shoulder arms: 1. <span class="sans">Order</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>),
+(<span class="sans">THREE</span>) Execute order arms as described from port arms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_85"><b>85.</b></a> Being at port arms: 1. <span class="sans">Right shoulder</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Change the right hand to the butt. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>), (<span class="sans">THREE</span>) As in right
+shoulder arms from order arms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_86"><b>86.</b></a> Being at right shoulder arms: 1. <span class="sans">Port</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) Change
+the right hand to the small of the stock.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_87"><b>87.</b></a> Being at right shoulder arms: 1. <span class="sans">Present</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Execute port arms. (<span class="sans">THREE</span>) Execute present arms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_88"><b>88.</b></a> Being at present arms: 1. <span class="sans">Right shoulder</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Execute port arms. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>), (<span class="sans">THREE</span>), (<span class="sans">FOUR</span>) Execute right shoulder
+arms as from port arms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_89"><b>89.</b></a> Being at port arms: 1. <span class="sans">Left shoulder</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder,
+barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same
+time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second
+fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) Drop the right
+hand by the side.</p>
+
+<p>Being at left shoulder arms: 1. <span class="sans">Port</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>)
+Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, regrasp it with the
+left, and take the position of port arms.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Left shoulder arms</span> may be ordered directly from the order, right
+shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command <span class="sans">arms</span> execute
+<span class="sans">port arms</span> and continue in cadence to the position ordered.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_90"><b>90.</b></a> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Parade</span>, 2. <span class="sans">REST</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly
+bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the body, barrel to
+the left; grasp the piece with the left hand just below the stacking
+swivel, and with the right hand below and against the left.</p>
+
+<p>Being at parade rest: 1. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ATTENTION</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the right
+hip.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg&#160;34]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_91"><b>91.</b></a> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Trail</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle
+forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30&#176; with the
+vertical.</p>
+
+<p>When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the
+piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered until the
+piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_92"><b>92.</b></a> Being at trail arms: 1. <span class="sans">Order</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Rifle Salute.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_93"><b>93.</b></a> Being at right shoulder arms: 1. <span class="sans">Rifle</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SALUTE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm
+horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and joined,
+forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the person
+saluted. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes to the
+front. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 6.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_94"><b>94.</b></a> Being at order or trail arms: 1. <span class="sans">Rifle</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SALUTE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down,
+thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against piece near
+the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) Drop the left hand
+by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front.</p>
+
+<p>For rules governing salutes, see &quot;<a href="#HONORS_AND_SALUTES">Honors and Salutes</a>&quot; (pars.
+<a href="#para_758">758&#8211;765</a>).</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Bayonet.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_95"><b>95.</b></a> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Fix</span>, 2. <span class="sans">BAYONET</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
+grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward the body;
+draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing
+at the muzzle; resume the order.</p>
+
+<p>If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet with the
+left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner.</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_96" href="#APPENDIX_A">96.</a></b> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Unfix</span>, 2. <span class="sans">BAYONET</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
+grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing
+the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg&#160;35]</a></span> the bayonet
+until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece;
+drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and,
+glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing
+between the left arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right
+hand and resume the order.</p>
+
+<p>If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
+from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
+most convenient manner.</p>
+
+<p>If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
+most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
+original position.</p>
+
+<p>Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity but
+not in cadence.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_97"><b>97.</b></a> <span class="sans">CHARGE BAYONET.</span> Whether executed at halt or in motion, the
+bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of <span class="sans">guard</span> in
+the <a href="#APPENDIX_C">Manual for Bayonet Exercise</a>.</p>
+
+<p>Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in the
+<a href="#APPENDIX_C">Manual for Bayonet Exercise</a>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Inspection.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_98" href="#APPENDIX_A">98.</a></b> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Inspection</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command take the position of port arms. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) Seize
+the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn
+the handle up, draw the bolt back, and glance at the chamber. Having
+found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes
+to the front.</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_99" href="#APPENDIX_A">99.</a></b> Being at inspection arms: 1. <span class="sans">Order (Right shoulder, port)</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, turn the handle
+down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command arms,
+complete the movement ordered.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Dismiss the Squad.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_100"><b>100.</b></a> Being at halt: 1. <span class="sans">Inspection</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Port</span>, 4. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>,
+5. <span class="sans">DISMISSED</span>.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg&#160;36]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD" id="SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD"></a>SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_101"><b>101.</b></a> Soldiers are grouped into squads for purposes of instruction,
+discipline, control, and order.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_102"><b>102.</b></a> The squad proper consists of a corporal and seven privates.</p>
+
+<p>The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to make the
+squad a fixed unit and to facilitate the control and movement of the
+company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and less than 12,
+they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess above 8 being posted
+as file closers. If the number grouped is greater than 11, 2 or more
+squads are formed and the group is termed a platoon.</p>
+
+<p>For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_103"><b>103.</b></a> The corporal is the squad leader, and when absent is replaced by
+a designated private. If no private is designated, the senior in
+length of service acts as leader.</p>
+
+<p>The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the front
+rank of the squad.</p>
+
+<p>When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear rank
+man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank until the
+corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear rank man steps
+back into the rear rank.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_104"><b>104.</b></a> In battle officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve the
+integrity of squads; they designate new leaders to replace those
+disabled, organize new squads when necessary, and see that every man
+is placed in a squad.</p>
+
+<p>Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to which they
+belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated
+therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon
+leaders, whether these be of their own or of another organization.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_105"><b>105.</b></a> The squad executes the <span class="sans">halt</span>, <span class="sans">rests</span>, <span class="sans">facings</span>, <span class="sans">steps</span> and
+<span class="sans">marchings</span>, and the <span class="sans">manual of arms</span> as explained in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SOLDIER">School of
+the Soldier</a>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Form the Squad.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_106"><b>106.</b></a> To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces in front
+of where the center is to be and commands: <span class="sans">FALL IN</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg&#160;37]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are arranged
+by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in order of
+height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand as soon as
+the man on his left has his interval. The rear rank forms with
+distance of 40 inches.</p>
+
+<p>The instructor then commands: <span class="sans">COUNT OFF</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At this command all except the right file execute <span class="sans">eyes right</span>, and
+beginning on the right, the men in each rank count <span class="sans">one</span>, <span class="sans">two</span>,
+<span class="sans">three</span>, <span class="sans">four</span>; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as he
+counts.</p>
+
+<p>Pieces are then inspected.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Alignments.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_107"><b>107.</b></a> To align the squad, the base file or files having been
+established: 1. <span class="sans">Right (Left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">DRESS</span>, 3. <span class="sans">FRONT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">dress</span> all men place the left hand upon the hip
+(whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the base
+file, when on or near the new line executes <span class="sans">eyes right</span>, and, taking
+steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his right arm rests
+lightly against the arm of the man on his right, and so that his eyes
+and shoulders are in line with those of the men on his right; the rear
+rank men cover in file.</p>
+
+<p>The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from the right
+flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, or in advance,
+of the line; only the men designated move.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">front</span>, given when the ranks are aligned, each man
+turns his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand by his
+side.</p>
+
+<p>In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, or
+parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique
+directions.</p>
+
+<p>Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a
+considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed by
+marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, as the
+case may be, without other command, and at the trail.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_108"><b>108.</b></a> To preserve the alignment when marching: <span class="sans">GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT)</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, yielding
+to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg&#160;38]</a></span> the opposite
+direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually opening out
+or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly lengthening or
+shortening the step; the rear rank men cover their file leaders at 40
+inches.</p>
+
+<p>In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated flank,
+conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, the leading man
+of the front rank is the guide.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Take Intervals and Distances.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_109"><b>109.</b></a> Being in line at a halt: 1. <span class="sans">Take interval</span>, 2. <span class="sans">To the right
+(left)</span>, 3. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 4. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 5. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command the rear-rank men march backward 4 steps and
+halt; at the command <span class="sans">march</span> all face to the right and the leading man
+of each rank steps off; the other men step off in succession, each
+following the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank men marching abreast
+of their file leaders.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">halt</span>, given when all have their intervals, all halt
+and face to the front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_110"><b>110.</b></a> Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. <span class="sans">Assemble, to the
+right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear-rank man on the
+right closes to 40 inches. The other men face to the right, close by
+the shortest line, and face to the front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_111"><b>111.</b></a> Being in line at a halt and having counted off: 1. <span class="sans">Take
+distance</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span> No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to the
+front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of
+the rear rank, in the order named, move straight to the front, each
+stepping off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command
+<span class="sans">halt</span> is given when all have their distances.</p>
+
+<p>In case more than one squad is in line, each squad executes the
+movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is right.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_112"><b>112.</b></a> Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. <span class="sans">Assemble</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to
+their proper places in line.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg&#160;39]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Stack and Take Arms.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_113"><b>113.</b></a> Being in line at a halt: <span class="sans">STACK ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Each even number of the front rank grasps his piece with the left hand
+at the upper band and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the
+front, muzzle inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center
+of the interval on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the
+stacking swivel; each even number of the rear rank then passes his
+piece, barrel to the rear, to his file leader, who grasps it between
+the bands with his right hand and throws the butt about 2 feet in
+advance of that of his own piece and opposite the right of the
+interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and
+forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages with that of
+his own piece; each odd number of the front rank raises his piece with
+the right hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front; the left
+hand, guiding the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the
+swivel of his own piece with the free hook of that of the even number
+of the rear rank; he then turns the barrel outward into the angle
+formed by the other two pieces and lowers the butt to the ground, to
+the right of and against the toe of his right shoe.</p>
+
+<p>The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the even numbers
+of the front rank.</p>
+
+<p>When each man has finished handling pieces, he takes the position of
+the soldier.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_114"><b>114.</b></a> Being in line behind the stacks: <span class="sans">TAKE ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The loose pieces are returned by the even numbers of the front rank;
+each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece with the left
+hand, the piece of his rear-rank man with his right hand, grasping
+both between the hands; each odd number of the front rank grasps his
+piece in the same way with the right hand, disengages it by raising
+the butt from the ground and then, turning the piece to the right,
+detaches it from the stack; each even number of the front rank
+disengages and detaches his piece by turning it to the left, and then
+passes the piece of his rear-rank man to him, and all resume the
+order.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_115"><b>115.</b></a> Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 1 rear rank
+takes the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking the stack;
+the stacks made or broken, he resumes his post.</p>
+
+<p>Pieces not used in making the stack are termed <span class="sans">loose pieces</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg&#160;40]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Oblique March.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_116"><b>116.</b></a> For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in column or
+correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face half right
+or half left, points out to the men their relative positions, and
+explains that these are to be maintained in the oblique march.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_117"><b>117.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Right (Left) oblique</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Each man steps off in a direction 45&#176; to the right of his original
+front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders
+parallel to those of the guide (the man on the right front of the line
+or column), and so regulates his steps that the ranks remain parallel
+to their original front.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">halt</span> the men halt faced to the front.</p>
+
+<p>To resume the original direction: 1. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight to
+the front.</p>
+
+<p>If at <span class="sans">half step</span> or <span class="sans">mark time</span> while obliquing, the oblique march is
+resumed by the commands: 1. <span class="sans">Oblique</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Turn on Moving Pivot.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_118"><b>118.</b></a> Being in line: 1. <span class="sans">Right (Left) turn</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The movement is executed by each rank successively and on the same
+ground. At the second command, the pivot man of the front rank faces
+to the right in marching and takes the half step; the other men of the
+rank oblique to the right until opposite their places in line, then
+execute a second right oblique and take the half step on arriving
+abreast of the pivot man. All glance toward the marching flank while
+at half step and take the full step without command as the last man
+arrives on the line.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Right (Left) half turn</span> is executed in a similar manner. The pivot
+man makes a half change of direction to the right and the other men
+make quarter changes in obliquing. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Turn on Fixed Pivot.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_119"><b>119.</b></a> Being in line, to turn and march: 1. <span class="sans">Squad right (left)</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank faces to
+the right in marching and marks time; the other front rank men oblique
+to the right, place themselves abreast of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg&#160;41]</a></span> pivot, and mark time.
+In the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by
+the second and first, moves straight to the front until in rear of his
+front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and mark time;
+the other number of the rear rank moves straight to the front four
+paces and places himself abreast of the man on his right. Men on the
+new line glance toward the marching flank while marking time and, as
+the last man arrives on the line, both ranks execute <span class="sans">forward, march</span>,
+without command.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_120"><b>120.</b></a> Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. <span class="sans">Squad right (left)</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is
+executed as prescribed in the <a href="#para_119">preceding paragraph</a> except that all men,
+on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is
+given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last
+man arrives on the line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_121"><b>121.</b></a> Being in line, to turn about and march: 1. <span class="sans">Squad right (left)
+about</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command, the front rank twice executes <span class="sans">squad right</span>,
+initiating the second <span class="sans">squad right</span> when the man on the marching flank
+has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rear rank the third man from
+the right, followed by the second and first in column, moves straight
+to the front until on the prolongation of the line to be occupied by
+the rear rank; changes direction to the right; moves in the new
+direction until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the
+right in marching, mark time, and glance toward the marching flank.
+The fourth man marches on the left of the third to his new position;
+as he arrives on the line, both ranks execute <span class="sans">forward, march</span>,
+without command.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_122"><b>122.</b></a> Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. <span class="sans">Squad right (left)
+about</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is
+executed as prescribed in the <a href="#para_121">preceding paragraph</a> except that all men,
+on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is
+given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last
+man arrives on the line.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Follow the Corporal.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_123"><b>123.</b></a> Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad without
+unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in front of it and
+commands: <span class="sans">FOLLOW ME</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg&#160;42]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>If in line or skirmish line, No. 2 of the front rank follows in the
+trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; the other men conform to the
+movements of No. 2, guiding on him and maintaining their relative
+positions.</p>
+
+<p>If in column; the head of the column follows the corporal.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Deploy as Skirmishers.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_124"><b>124.</b></a> Being in any formation, assembled: 1. <span class="sans">As skirmishers</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The corporal places himself in front of the squad, if not already
+there. Moving at a run, the men place themselves abreast of the
+corporal at half-pace intervals, Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. 3 and
+4 on his left, rear-rank men on the right of their file leaders, extra
+men on the left of No. 4; all then conform to the corporal's gait.</p>
+
+<p>When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly formed on
+No. 2 of the front rank, who stands fast or continues the march, as
+the case may be; the corporal places himself in front of the squad
+when advancing and in rear when halted.</p>
+
+<p>When deployed as skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieces at the
+trail unless otherwise ordered.</p>
+
+<p>The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No. 2 front rank
+is the guide.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_125"><b>125.</b></a> The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half pace,
+resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The front of a
+squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Increase or Diminish Intervals.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_126"><b>126.</b></a> If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than the
+normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to increase or
+decrease the interval: 1. <span class="sans">As skirmishers, (so many) paces</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If already
+deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the guide.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Assembly.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_127"><b>127.</b></a> Being deployed: 1. <span class="sans">Assemble</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg&#160;43]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time,
+form, and follow him.</p>
+
+<p>The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Kneeling and Lying Down.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_128"><b>128.</b></a> If standing: <span class="sans">KNEEL</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left
+rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly as
+possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; piece
+remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the
+lower band.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_129"><b>129.</b></a> If standing or kneeling: <span class="sans">LIE DOWN</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the left foot
+and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35&#176; to the right;
+piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the
+front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand
+grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the
+position of order arms, lying down.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_130"><b>130.</b></a> If kneeling or lying down: <span class="sans">RISE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the
+left heel.</p>
+
+<p>If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to the front,
+on the ground marked by the knees.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_131"><b>131.</b></a> If lying down: <span class="sans">KNEEL</span>. Raise the body on both knees; take the
+position of kneel.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_132"><b>132.</b></a> In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying down are
+ordinarily used only for the better utilization of cover.</p>
+
+<p>When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken in lieu
+of the position kneeling.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">LOADINGS AND FIRINGS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_133"><b>133.</b></a> The commands for loading and firing are the same whether
+standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at
+a halt.</p>
+
+<p>When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does not
+load, aim, or fire.</p>
+
+<p>The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading.</p>
+
+<p>Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only.</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_134" href="#APPENDIX_A">134.</a></b> Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without command
+until the command <span class="sans">unload</span>, or <span class="sans">inspection arms</span>, fresh clips being
+inserted when the magazine is exhausted.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg&#160;44]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_135"><b>135.</b></a> The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may be
+done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are indicated
+before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted when the
+target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such case battle sight
+is used if no sight setting is announced.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_136"><b>136.</b></a> The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight
+setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be
+repeated until a change of either or both is necessary.</p>
+
+<p>Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or
+target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until a change
+is ordered.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_137"><b>137.</b></a> If the men are not already in the position of load, that position
+is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the announcement
+is omitted, the position is taken at the first command for firing.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_138"><b>138.</b></a> When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate firing
+is discretionary with each man.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Load.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_139" href="#APPENDIX_A">139.</a></b> Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. <span class="sans">With dummy (blank or
+ball) cartridges</span>, 2. <span class="sans">LOAD</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">load</span> each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half
+right and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such
+position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
+body; raises, or lowers, the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height
+of the breast, and turns the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns
+and draws the bolt back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in
+the clip slots, places the thumb on the powder space of the top
+cartridge, the fingers extending around the piece and tips resting on
+the magazine floor plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by
+pressing down with the thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts the
+bolt home, turning down the handle; turns the safety lock to the
+&quot;safe&quot; and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each rear rank
+man moves to the right front, takes a similar position opposite the
+interval to the right of his front rank man, muzzle of the piece
+extending beyond the front rank, and loads.</p>
+
+<p>A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
+as practicable in the position of load.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg&#160;45]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if
+kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the
+elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left hand
+steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt
+resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.</p>
+
+<p>For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
+are designated as that of <span class="sans">load</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_140"><b>140.</b></a> For instruction in loading: 1. <span class="sans">Simulate</span>, 2. <span class="sans">LOAD</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed as above described except that the cut-off remains &quot;off&quot; and
+the handling of cartridges is simulated.</p>
+
+<p>The recruits are first taught to <span class="sans">simulate</span> loading and firing; after
+a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges
+may be used.</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_141" href="#APPENDIX_A">141.</a></b> The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine
+&quot;off.&quot; The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while &quot;off&quot; or
+&quot;on&quot; by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in the
+proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to
+be regarded as exceptional.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Unload.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_142" href="#APPENDIX_A">142.</a></b> <span class="sans">UNLOAD.</span></p>
+
+<p>Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt
+alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected.
+After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first
+thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding
+it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and
+back to engage it under the bolt and then thrusting the bolt home; the
+trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and
+returned to the belt and the piece is brought to the order.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Set the Sight.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_143"><b>143.</b></a> <span class="sans">RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.)</span>, or <span class="sans">BATTLE SIGHT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains
+and verifies sight settings.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Fire by Volley.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_144"><b>144.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">READY</span>, 2. <span class="sans">AIM</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 4. <span class="sans">FIRE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">ready</span> turn the safety lock to the &quot;ready;&quot; at the
+command <span class="sans">aim</span> raise the piece with both hands and sup<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg&#160;46]</a></span>port the butt
+firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb clasping
+the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the piece, right
+elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forward and a
+little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right
+eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as to perceive the
+object aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against
+the front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight
+is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight.</p>
+
+<p>Each rear-rank man aims through the interval to the right of his file
+leader and leans slightly forward to advance the muzzle of his piece
+beyond the front rank.</p>
+
+<p>In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of
+elbow in front of kneecap. In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported
+by the knees.</p>
+
+<p>In aiming lying down, raise the piece with both hands; rest on both
+elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">fire</span> press the finger against the trigger; fire
+without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the piece;
+lower the piece in the position of <span class="sans">Load</span> and load. (<i>C.I.D.R., No.
+2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_145"><b>145.</b></a> To continue the firing: 1. <span class="sans">AIM</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 3. <span class="sans">FIRE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Each command is executed as previously explained. <span class="sans">Load</span> (from
+magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with
+the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the &quot;ready.&quot;</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Fire at Will.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_146"><b>146.</b></a> <span class="sans">FIRE AT WILL.</span></p>
+
+<p>Each man, independently of the others, comes to the <span class="sans">ready</span>, aims
+carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, <span class="sans">fires</span>,
+<span class="sans">loads</span>, and continues the firing until ordered to <span class="sans">suspend</span> or <span class="sans">cease
+firing</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_147"><b>147.</b></a> To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the
+instructor shouts: <span class="sans">FASTER (SLOWER)</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at
+effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum
+of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate
+the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to combat
+conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are
+designated.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg&#160;47]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Fire by Clip.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_148" href="#APPENDIX_A">148.</a></b> <span class="sans">CLIP FIRE.</span></p>
+
+<p>Executed in the same manner as <span class="sans">fire at will</span>, except that each man,
+after having exhausted the cartridges then in the piece, <span class="sans">suspends
+firing</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Suspend Firing.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_149"><b>149.</b></a> The instructor blows a <span class="sans">long blast</span> of the whistle and repeats
+same, if necessary, or commands: <span class="sans">SUSPEND FIRING</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Firing stops; pieces are held loaded and locked, in a position of
+readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. The
+men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at
+which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear.</p>
+
+<p>This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to <span class="sans">cease firing</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Cease Firing.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_150" href="#APPENDIX_A">150.</a></b> <span class="sans">
+CEASE FIRING.</span> [<a href="#ERRATA">Errata</a>]</p>
+
+<p>Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge
+is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights
+are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Cease firing</span> is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 7.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_151"><b>151.</b></a> Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any time
+after the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has
+actually commenced or not.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">THE USE OF COVER.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_152"><b>152.</b></a> The recruit should be given careful instruction in the individual
+use of cover.</p>
+
+<p>It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural
+cover, he must be able to tire easily and effectively upon the enemy;
+if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as
+possible; he must conceal himself as much as possible while firing and
+while advancing. While setting his sight he should be under cover or
+lying prone.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_153"><b>153.</b></a> To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time
+concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in
+simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching
+positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from
+depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to
+fire around the right side of his conceal<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg&#160;48]</a></span>ment whenever possible, or,
+when this is not possible, to rise enough to fire over the top of his
+concealment.</p>
+
+<p>When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with
+reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper
+position for firing.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_154"><b>154.</b></a> The evil of remaining too long in one place, however good the
+concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to advance from
+cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving his
+concealment.</p>
+
+<p>It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an
+enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from
+a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and
+throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing
+from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle
+grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right
+leg.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_155"><b>155.</b></a> He should be taught that, when fired on while acting
+independently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then
+endeavor to locate his enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_156"><b>156.</b></a> The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued
+in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then be taught
+that the proper advance of the platoon or company and the
+effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the question
+of cover for individuals. He should also be taught that he may not
+move about or shift his position in the firing line except the better
+to see the target.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">OBSERVATION.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_157"><b>157.</b></a> The ability to use his eyes accurately is of great importance to
+the soldier. The recruit should be trained in observing his
+surrounding from positions and when on the march.</p>
+
+<p>He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military features of
+the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in counting
+distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and forms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_158"><b>158.</b></a> In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they
+should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming
+point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a
+designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone
+position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked
+eye and with field glasses. Similarly, they should be trained in
+estimating distances.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg&#160;49]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY" id="SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY"></a>SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_159"><b>159.</b></a> The captain is responsible for the theoretical and practical
+instruction of his officers and noncommissioned officers, not only in
+the duties of their respective grades, but in those of the next higher
+grades.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_160"><b>160.</b></a> The company in line is formed in double rank with the men
+arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from right to
+left, the tallest on the right.</p>
+
+<p>The original division into squads is effected by the command: <span class="sans">COUNT
+OFF</span>. The squads, successively from the right, count off as in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>, corporals placing themselves as Nos. 4 of the
+front rank. If the left squad contains less than six men, it is either
+increased to that number by transfers from other squads or is broken
+up and its members assigned to other squads and posted in the line of
+file closers. These squad organizations are maintained, by transfers
+if necessary, until the company becomes so reduced in numbers as to
+necessitate a new division into squads. No squad will contain less
+than six men.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_161"><b>161.</b></a> The company is further divided into two, three, or four platoons,
+each consisting of not less than two nor more than four squads. In
+garrison or ceremonies the strength of platoons may exceed four
+squads.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_162"><b>162.</b></a> At the formation of the company the platoons or squads are
+numbered consecutively from right to left and these designations do
+not change.</p>
+
+<p>For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the
+designations, <span class="sans">right</span>, <span class="sans">center</span>, <span class="sans">left</span>, when in line, and <span class="sans">leading</span>,
+<span class="sans">center</span>, <span class="sans">rear</span>, when in column, are applied to platoons or squads.
+These designations apply to the actual right, left, center, head, or
+rear, in whatever direction the company may be facing. The <span class="sans">center
+squad</span> is the middle or right middle squad of the company.</p>
+
+<p>The designation &quot;So-and-so's&quot; squad or platoon may also be used.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_163"><b>163.</b></a> Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants and noncommissioned
+officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1, right; 2, left; 3, center
+(right center); 4, left center.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg&#160;50]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/plate2.png" width="525" height="734" alt="Plate II (company diagram)" title="Plate II (company diagram)" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b>Plate II. THE COMPANY.</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><a href="images/plate2lg.png">[Enlarge]</a></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg&#160;51]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, one
+to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned to
+platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, its
+guide, or guides, accompany the platoon leader.</p>
+
+<p>During battle, these assignments are not changed: vacancies are filled
+by noncommissioned officers of the platoon, or by the nearest
+available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with
+reenforcing troops.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_164"><b>164.</b></a> The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When not
+commanding a platoon, he is posted as a file closer opposite the third
+file from the outer flank of the first platoon; and when the company
+is deployed he accompanies the captain.</p>
+
+<p>The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned according to his
+rank as a sergeant.</p>
+
+<p>Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle, are in
+ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed, they are posted in
+the line of file closers.</p>
+
+<p>Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. When
+the company is deployed, they accompany the captain.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_165"><b>165.</b></a> The company executes the <span class="sans">halt</span>, <span class="sans">rests</span>, <span class="sans">facings</span>, <span class="sans">steps</span> and
+<span class="sans">marchings</span>, <span class="sans">manual of arms</span>, <span class="sans">loadings</span> and <span class="sans">firings</span>,
+<span class="sans">takes intervals</span> and <span class="sans">distances</span> and <span class="sans">assembles</span>, <span class="sans">increases</span> and
+<span class="sans">diminishes intervals</span>, resumes <span class="sans">attention</span>, <span class="sans">obliques</span>, resumes the
+direct march, preserves alignments, <span class="sans">kneels</span>, <span class="sans">lies down</span>, <span class="sans">rises</span>,
+<span class="sans">stacks</span> and <span class="sans">takes arms</span>, as explained in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SOLDIER">Schools of the Soldier</a>
+and the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">Squad</a>, substituting in the commands <span class="sans">company</span> for <span class="sans">squad</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc.,
+substituting their designation for <span class="sans">squad</span> in the commands. In the
+same manner these execute the movements prescribed for the company,
+whenever possible, substituting their designation for <span class="sans">company</span> in the
+commands.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_166"><b>166.</b></a> A company so depleted as to make division into platoons
+impracticable is led by the captain as a single platoon, but retains
+the designation of company. The lieutenants and first sergeant assist
+in fire control; the other sergeants place themselves in the firing
+line as skirmishers.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg&#160;52]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3><a name="CLOSE_ORDER"></a>CLOSE ORDER.</h3>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Rules.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_167"><b>167.</b></a> The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear, platoons,
+are the right and left, or leading and rear, guides, respectively, of
+the company when it is in line or in column of squads. Other guides
+are in the line of file closers.</p>
+
+<p>In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of
+the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if
+in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to
+flanks of the platoon does not change.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_168"><b>168.</b></a> The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank
+opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to
+the other flank, the captain commands: 1. <span class="sans">File closers on left
+(right) flank</span>; 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>. The file closers dart through the column;
+the captain and guides change.</p>
+
+<p>In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the side
+of the guide.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_169"><b>169.</b></a> Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or
+firings.</p>
+
+<p>Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual
+of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at
+the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_170"><b>170.</b></a> In <span class="sans">taking intervals and distances</span>, unless otherwise directed,
+the right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in
+the line of file closers, and, with them, take a distance of 4 paces
+from the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command <span class="sans">march</span>, the
+file closers face to the flank and each steps off with the file
+nearest him. In <span class="sans">assembling</span> the guides and file closers resume their
+positions in line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_171"><b>171.</b></a> In movements executed simultaneously by platoons (as <span class="sans">platoons
+right</span> or <span class="sans">platoons, column right</span>), platoon leaders repeat the
+preparatory command (<span class="sans">platoon right</span>, etc.), applicable to their
+respective platoons. The command of execution is given by the captain
+only.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Form the Company.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_172"><b>172.</b></a> At the sounding of the <a href="#BUGLE09">assembly</a> the first sergeant takes position
+6 paces in front of where the center of the company is to be, faces
+it, draws saber, and commands: <span class="sans">FALL IN</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg&#160;53]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front,
+where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the
+center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first
+sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the
+right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their
+posts.</p>
+
+<p>The first sergeant commands: <span class="sans">REPORT</span>. Remaining in position at the
+order, the squad leaders, in succession from the right, salute and
+report: <span class="sans">All present</span>; or, <span class="sans">Private(s) &#8212;&#8212; absent</span>. The first
+sergeant does not return the salutes of the squad leaders; he then
+commands: 1. <span class="sans">Inspection</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Order</span>, 4. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, faces
+about, salutes the captain, reports: <span class="sans">Sir, all present or accounted
+for</span>, or the names of the unauthorized absentees, and, without
+command, takes his post.</p>
+
+<p>If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant
+commands: 1. <span class="sans">Inspection</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Right shoulder</span>, 4. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>,
+and calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers <span class="sans">here</span>
+and executes order arms. The sergeant then effects the division into
+squads and reports the company as prescribed above.</p>
+
+<p>The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, and
+facing, the company in time to receive the report of the first
+sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber.</p>
+
+<p>The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has reported
+and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not under arms, is
+formed in like manner omitting reference to arms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_173"><b>173.</b></a> For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company,
+when small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close
+order movements only are executed. The single rank executes all
+movements as explained for the front rank of a company.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Dismiss the Company.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_174"><b>174.</b></a> Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first sergeant:
+<span class="sans">Dismiss the company</span>. The officers fall out; the first sergeant
+places himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front and 2 paces
+from the nearest flank of the company, salutes, faces toward opposite
+flank of the company, and commands: 1. <span class="sans">Inspection</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, 3.
+<span class="sans">Port</span>, 4. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, 5. <span class="sans">DISMISSED</span>. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Alignments.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_175"><b>175.</b></a> The alignments are executed as prescribed in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the
+Squad</a>, the guide being established instead of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg&#160;54]</a></span> the flank file. The
+rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the front
+and covers his file leader.</p>
+
+<p>At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation of the
+line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is
+made, verifies the alignment, and commands: <span class="sans">FRONT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify
+alignments.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Movements on the Fixed Pivot.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_176"><b>176.</b></a> Being in line, to turn the company: 1. <span class="sans">Company right (left)</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Company</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>; or, 3. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 4. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command the right-flank man in the front rank faces to
+the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank men oblique
+to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time; in
+the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by the
+second and first, moves straight to the front until in rear of his
+front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and mark time;
+the remaining men of the rear rank move straight to the front 4 paces,
+oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the third man, cover
+their file leaders, and mark time; the right guide steps back, takes
+post on the flank, and marks time.</p>
+
+<p>The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace in rear of the
+new line.</p>
+
+<p>The command <span class="sans">halt</span> may be given at any time after the movement begins;
+only those halt who are in the new position. Each of the others halts
+upon arriving on the line, aligns himself to the right, and executes
+<span class="sans">front</span> without command.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_177"><b>177.</b></a> Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the reverse: 1.
+<span class="sans">Platoons right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Company</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>; or 3.
+<span class="sans">Forward</span>, 4. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed by each platoon as described for the company.</p>
+
+<p>Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on the flank
+toward which the movement is to be executed are covering. This is
+effected by previously announcing the guide to that flank.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_178"><b>178.</b></a> Being in line, to form column of squads, or the reverse; or,
+being in line of platoons, to form column of platoons, or the reverse:
+1. <span class="sans">Squads right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>; or, 1. <span class="sans">Squads right (left)</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Company</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg&#160;55]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Executed by each squad as described in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side of the
+file closers, they dart through the column and take posts in rear of
+the company at the second command. If the column of squads be formed
+from line, the file closers take posts on the pivot flank, abreast of
+and 4 inches from the nearest rank. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Movements on the Moving Pivot.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_179"><b>179.</b></a> Being in line, to change direction: 1. <span class="sans">Right (Left) turn</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 4. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed as described in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>, except that the men
+do not glance toward the marching flank and that all take the full
+step at the fourth command. The right guide is the pivot of the front
+rank. Each rear-rank man obliques on the same ground as his file
+leader.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_180"><b>180.</b></a> Being in column of platoons, to change direction: 1. <span class="sans">Column
+right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the first command the leader of the leading platoon commands:
+<span class="sans">Right turn</span>. At the command <span class="sans">march</span> the leading platoon turns to the
+right on moving pivot; its leader commands: 1. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>,
+on completion of the turn. Rear platoons march squarely up to the
+turning point of the leading platoon and turn at command of their
+leaders.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_181"><b>181.</b></a> Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. <span class="sans">Column right
+(left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns to the
+right on moving pivot as in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>; the other ranks,
+without command, turn successively on the same ground and in a similar
+manner.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_182"><b>182.</b></a> Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons or the
+reverse: 1. <span class="sans">Platoons, column right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed by each platoon as described for the company.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_183"><b>183.</b></a> Being in line, to form column of squads and change direction: 1.
+<span class="sans">Squads right (left), column right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>; or, 1. <span class="sans">Right
+(Left) by squads</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>In the first case the right squad initiates the <span class="sans">column right</span> as soon
+as it has completed the <span class="sans">squad right</span>.</p>
+
+<p>In the second case, at the command <span class="sans">march</span>, the right squad marches
+<span class="sans">forward</span>; the remainder of the company executes <span class="sans">squads</span><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg&#160;56]</a></span> <span class="sans">right,
+column left</span>, and follows the right squad. The right guide, when he
+has posted himself in front of the right squad, takes four short
+steps, then resumes the full step; the right squad conforms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_184"><b>184.</b></a> Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1. <span class="sans">Squads right (left),
+platoons, column right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>; or, 1. <span class="sans">Platoons, right
+(left) by squads</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed by each platoon as described for the company in the
+<a href="#para_183">preceding
+paragraph</a>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Facing or Marching to the Rear.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_185"><b>185.</b></a> Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of platoons or
+squads, to face or march to the rear: 1. <span class="sans">Squads right (left) about</span>,
+2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>; or, 1. <span class="sans">Squads right (left) about</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3.
+<span class="sans">Company</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed by each squad as described in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closers
+turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, each
+darts through the nearest interval between squads. (<i>C.I.D.R., No.
+2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_186"><b>186.</b></a> To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. <span class="sans">About</span>, 2. <span class="sans">FACE</span>, 3.
+<span class="sans">Forward</span>, 4. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now the
+front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their relative
+positions. No other movement is executed until the line is faced to
+the original front.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">On Right (Left) Into Line.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_187"><b>187.</b></a> Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line on right or
+left: 1. <span class="sans">On right (left) into line</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Company</span>, 4.
+<span class="sans">HALT</span>, 5. <span class="sans">FRONT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the first command the leader of the leading unit commands: <span class="sans">Right
+turn</span>. The leaders of the other units command: <span class="sans">Forward</span>, if at a
+halt. At the second command, the leading unit turns to the right on
+moving pivot. The command <span class="sans">halt</span> is given when the leading unit has
+advanced the desired distance in the new direction; it halts; its
+leader then commands: <span class="sans">Right dress</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The units in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, when
+opposite the right of its place in line, executes <span class="sans">right turn</span> at the
+command of its leader; each is halted on the line<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg&#160;57]</a></span> at the command of
+its leader, who then commands: <span class="sans">Right dress</span>. All dress on the first
+unit in line.</p>
+
+<p>If executed in double time, the leading squad marches in double time
+until halted.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Front Into Line.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_188"><b>188.</b></a> Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line to the front:
+1. <span class="sans">Right (Left) front into line</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Company</span>, 4.
+<span class="sans">HALT</span>, 5. <span class="sans">FRONT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the leading
+one command: <span class="sans">Right oblique</span>. If at a halt, the leader of the leading
+unit commands: <span class="sans">Forward</span>. At the second command the leading unit moves
+straight forward; the rear units oblique as indicated. The command
+<span class="sans">halt</span> is given when the leading unit has advanced the desired
+distance; it halts; its leader then commands: <span class="sans">Left dress</span>. Each of
+the rear units, when opposite its place in line, resumes the original
+direction at the command of its leader; each is halted on the line at
+the command of its leader, who then commands: <span class="sans">Left dress</span>. All dress
+on the first unit in line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_189"><b>189.</b></a> Being in column of squads to form column of platoons, or being in
+line of platoons, to form the company in line: 1. <span class="sans">Platoons, right
+(left) front into line</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Company</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>, 5.
+<span class="sans">FRONT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed by each platoon as described for the company. In forming the
+company in line, the dress is on the left squad of the left platoon.
+If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders verify the alignment
+before taking their posts; the captain commands <span class="sans">front</span> when the
+alignments have been verified.</p>
+
+<p>When <span class="sans">front into line</span> is executed in double time the commands for
+halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is toward the side of
+the first unit in line.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">AT EASE AND ROUTE STEP.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_190"><b>190.</b></a> The column of squads is the habitual column of route, but <span class="sans">route
+step</span> and <span class="sans">at ease</span> are applicable to any marching formation.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_191"><b>191.</b></a> To march at route step: 1. <span class="sans">Route step</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>. Sabers are
+carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry their pieces at
+will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not required to preserve
+silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks cover and preserve their
+distance. If halted from route step, the men stand <span class="sans">at rest</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg&#160;58]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_192"><b>192.</b></a> To march at ease: 1. <span class="sans">At ease</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The company marches as in route step, except that silence is
+preserved; when halted, the men remain <span class="sans">at ease</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_193"><b>193.</b></a> Marching at route step or at ease: 1. <span class="sans">Company</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ATTENTION</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">attention</span> the pieces are brought to the right
+shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_194"><b>194.</b></a> Being in column of squads: 1. <span class="sans">Right (left) by twos</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span> all files except the two right files of the
+leading squad execute <span class="sans">in place halt</span>; the two left files of the
+leading squad oblique to the right when disengaged and follow the
+right files at the shortest practicable distance. The remaining squads
+follow successively in like manner. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_195"><b>195.</b></a> Being in column of squads or twos: 1. <span class="sans">Right (left) by file</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, all files execute <span class="sans">in place halt</span> except the
+right file of the leading two or squad. The left file or files of the
+leading two or squad oblique successively to the right when disengaged
+and each follows the file on its right at the shortest practicable
+distance. The remaining twos or squads follow successively in like
+manner. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_196"><b>196.</b></a> Being in column of files or twos, to form column of squads; or,
+being in column of files, to form column of twos: 1. <span class="sans">Squads (Twos),
+right (left) front into line</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, the leading file or files halt. The remainder
+of the squad, or two, obliques to the right and halts on line with the
+leading file or files. The remaining squads or twos close up and
+successively form in rear of the first in like manner.</p>
+
+<p>The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered <span class="sans">right</span> or
+<span class="sans">left</span>, so as to restore the files to their normal relative positions
+in the two or squad.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_197"><b>197.</b></a> The movements prescribed in the three preceding paragraphs are
+difficult of execution at attention and have no value as disciplinary
+exercises.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_198"><b>198.</b></a> Marching by twos or files can not be executed without serious
+delay and waste of road space. Every reasonable precaution will be
+taken to obviate the necessity for these formations.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg&#160;59]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3><a name="EXTENDED_ORDER"></a>EXTENDED ORDER.</h3>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Rules for Deployment.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_199"><b>199.</b></a> The command <span class="sans">guide right (left</span> or <span class="sans">center)</span> indicates the base
+squad for the deployment; if in line it designates the actual <span class="sans">right
+(left</span> or <span class="sans">center)</span> squad; if in column the command <span class="sans">guide right
+(left)</span> designates the <span class="sans">leading</span> squad, and the command <span class="sans">guide center</span>
+designates the <span class="sans">center</span> squad. After the deployment is completed, the
+guide is <span class="sans">center</span> without command, unless otherwise ordered.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_200"><b>200.</b></a> At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, from either
+column of squads or line, each squad leader (except the leader of the
+base squad, when his squad does not advance), cautions his squad,
+<span class="sans">follow me</span> or <span class="sans">by the right (left) flank</span>, as the case may be; at the
+command <span class="sans">march</span>, he steps in front of his squad and leads it to its
+place in line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_201"><b>201.</b></a> Having given the command for forming skirmish line, the captain,
+if necessary, indicates to the corporal of the base squad the point on
+which the squad is to march; the corporal habitually looks to the
+captain for such directions.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_202"><b>202.</b></a> The base squad is deployed as soon as it has sufficient interval.
+The other squads are deployed as they arrive on the general line; each
+corporal halts in his place in line and commands or signals, <span class="sans">as
+skirmishers</span>; the squad deploys and halts abreast of him.</p>
+
+<p>If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before
+arriving on the line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_203"><b>203.</b></a> Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the guide.
+Within their respective fronts, individuals or units march so as best
+to secure cover or to facilitate the advance, but the general and
+orderly progress of the whole is paramount.</p>
+
+<p>On halting, a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the
+enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying down
+if necessary.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_204"><b>204.</b></a> The company in skirmish line <span class="sans">advances</span>, <span class="sans">halts</span>, moves <span class="sans">by the
+flank</span>, or <span class="sans">to the rear</span>, <span class="sans">obliques</span>, resumes <span class="sans">the direct march</span>,
+passes from <span class="sans">quick</span> to <span class="sans">double time</span> and the reverse by the same
+commands and in a similar manner as in close order; if at a halt, the
+movement <span class="sans">by the flank</span> or <span class="sans">to the rear</span> is executed by the same
+commands as when marching. <span class="sans">Company right (left, half right,</span><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg&#160;60]</a></span> <span class="sans">half
+left)</span> is executed as explained for the front rank, skirmish intervals
+being maintained.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_205"><b>205.</b></a> A platoon or other part of the company is deployed and marched in
+the same manner as the company, substituting in the commands,
+<span class="sans">platoon</span> (<span class="sans">detachment</span>, etc.) for <span class="sans">company</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Deployments.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_206"><b>206.</b></a> Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: 1. <span class="sans">As
+skirmishers, guide right (left</span> or <span class="sans">center)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to the
+front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, the captain
+commands: 1. <span class="sans">Company</span>, 2. <span class="sans">HALT</span>. If the guide be <span class="sans">right (left)</span>, the
+other corporals move to the <span class="sans">left (right)</span> front, and, in succession
+from the base, place their squads on the line; if the guide be center,
+the other corporals move to the <span class="sans">right</span> or <span class="sans">left</span> front, according as
+they are on the right or left of the center squad, and in succession
+from the center squad place their squads on the line.</p>
+
+<p>If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the other
+squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; interior
+squads may be moved when squads more distant from the base have gained
+comfortable marching distance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_207"><b>207.</b></a> Being in column of squads, to form skirmish line to the front: 1.
+<span class="sans">As skirmishers, guide right (left</span> or <span class="sans">center)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If marching, the corporal of the base squad deploys it and moves
+straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad without
+advancing. If the guide be <span class="sans">right (left)</span>, the other corporals move to
+the <span class="sans">left (right) front</span>, and, in succession from the base, place
+their squads on the line; if the guide be <span class="sans">center</span>, the corporals in
+front of the center squad move to the right (if at a halt, to the
+right rear), the corporals in rear of the center squad move to the
+left front, and each, in succession from the base, places his squad on
+the line.</p>
+
+<p>The column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands and in
+like manner.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_208"><b>208.</b></a> The company in line or in column of squads may be deployed in an
+oblique direction by the same commands. The captain points out the
+desired direction; the corporal of the base squad moves in the
+direction indicated; the other corporals conform.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg&#160;61]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_209"><b>209.</b></a> To form skirmish line to the flank or rear the line or the column
+of squads is turned by squads to the flank or rear and then deployed
+as described.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_210"><b>210.</b></a> The intervals between men are increased or decreased as described
+in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>, adding to the preparatory command, <span class="sans">guide
+right (left</span> or <span class="sans">center)</span> if necessary.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Assembly.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_211"><b>211.</b></a> The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, the
+element on which the company is to assemble and commands: 1.
+<span class="sans">Assemble</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated point
+and the company is re-formed in line. If assembled by platoons, these
+are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, and the
+company is re-formed in line.</p>
+
+<p>Platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. <span class="sans">Platoons, assemble</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed by each platoon as described for the company.</p>
+
+<p>One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. <span class="sans">Such
+platoon(s), assemble</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Executed by the designated platoon or platoons as described for the
+company.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Advance.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_212"><b>212.</b></a> The advance of a company into an engagement (whether for attack
+or defense) is conducted in close order, preferably column of squads,
+until the probability of encountering hostile fire makes it advisable
+to deploy. After deployment, and before opening fire, the advance of
+the company may be continued in skirmish line or other suitable
+formation, depending upon circumstances. The advance may often be
+facilitated, or better advantage taken of cover, or losses reduced by
+the employment of the <span class="sans">platoon</span> or <span class="sans">squad columns</span> or by the use of a
+<span class="sans">succession of thin lines</span>. The selection of the method to be used is
+made by the captain or major, the choice depending upon conditions
+arising during the progress of the advance. If the deployment is found
+to be premature, it will generally be best to assemble the company and
+proceed in close order.</p>
+
+<p>Patrols are used to provide the necessary security against surprise.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg&#160;62]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_213"><b>213.</b></a> Being in skirmish line: 1. <span class="sans">Platoon columns</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their
+respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march to
+the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in like
+manner to the right; each platoon lender thus conducts the march of
+his platoon in double column of files; platoon guides follow in rear
+of their respective platoons to insure prompt and orderly execution of
+the advance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_214"><b>214.</b></a> Being in skirmish line: 1. <span class="sans">Squad columns</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Each squad leader moves to the front; the members of each squad
+oblique toward and follow their squad leader in single file at easy
+marching distances.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_215"><b>215.</b></a> <span class="sans">Platoon columns</span> are profitably used where the ground is so
+difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to take
+advantage of the few favorable routes; no two platoons should march
+within the area of burst of a single shrapnel.<a name="FNanchor_1_1" id="FNanchor_1_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a> <span class="sans">Squad columns</span> are
+of value principally in facilitating the advance over rough or
+brush-grown ground; they afford no material advantage in securing
+cover.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_216"><b>216.</b></a> To deploy platoon or squad columns: 1. <span class="sans">As skirmishers</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place
+themselves in their original positions on the line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_217"><b>217.</b></a> Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. <span class="sans">Assemble</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The platoon or squad leaders signal <span class="sans">assemble</span>. The men of each
+platoon or squad, as the case may be, advance and, moving to the right
+and left, take their proper places in line, each unit assembling on
+the leading element of the column and re-forming in line. The platoon
+or squad leaders conduct their units toward the element or point
+indicated by the captain, and to their places in line; the company is
+re-formed in line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_218"><b>218.</b></a> Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of thin lines:
+1. <span class="sans">(Such numbers), forward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The captain points out in advance the selected position in front of
+the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves to the
+front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals as nearly
+as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable distance
+(generally from 100 to 250 yards,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg&#160;63]</a></span> depending upon the terrain and the
+character of the hostile fire), a second is sent forward by similar
+commands, and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has
+advanced. Upon arriving at the indicated position, the first line is
+halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, halt on line with the first
+and the men take their proper places in the skirmish line.</p>
+
+<p>Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and the men of a
+squad are sent forward in order from right to left as deployed. The
+first line is led by the platoon leader of the right platoon, the
+second by the guide of the right platoon, and so on in order from
+right to left.</p>
+
+<p>The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions demand a
+faster gait.</p>
+
+<p>The company having arrived at the indicated position, a further
+advance by the same means may be advisable.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_219"><b>219.</b></a> The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide
+stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery fire or heavy,
+long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its
+purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to
+engaging in a fire fight. This method of advancing results in serious
+(though temporary) loss of control over the company. Its advantage
+lies in the fact that it offers a less definite target, hence is less
+likely to draw fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_220"><b>220.</b></a> The above are suggestions. Other and better formations may be
+devised to fit particular cases. The best formation is the one which
+advances the line farthest with the least loss of men, time, and
+control.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Fire Attack.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_221"><b>221.</b></a> The principles governing the advance of the firing line in attack
+are considered in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_BATTALION">School of the Battalion</a>.</p>
+
+<p>When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as a whole by
+ordinary means, it advances by rushes.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_222"><b>222.</b></a> Being in skirmish line: 1. <span class="sans">By platoon</span> (<span class="sans">two platoons, squad,
+four men</span>, etc.), <span class="sans">from the right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">RUSH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges the
+details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it
+into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he designates the
+leader for the indicated fraction. When about to rush, he causes the
+men of the fraction to cease firing and to hold themselves flat, but
+in readiness to spring forward in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg&#160;64]</a></span>stantly. The leader of the rush (at
+the signal of the platoon leader, if the latter be not the leader of
+the rush) commands: <span class="sans">Follow me</span>, and, running at top speed, leads the
+fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open
+fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been
+previously designated.</p>
+
+<p>The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next
+like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader, without further
+command of the captain, and so on, successively, until the entire
+company is on the line established by the first rush.</p>
+
+<p>If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior platoon
+leader conforms to the action of the senior.</p>
+
+<p>A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase or
+decrease the size of the fractions to complete the movement.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_223"><b>223.</b></a> When the company forms a part of the firing line, the rush of the
+company as a whole is conducted by the captain, as described for a
+platoon in the <a href="#para_222">preceding paragraph</a>. The captain leads the rush;
+platoon leaders lead their respective platoons; platoon guides follow
+the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_224"><b>224.</b></a> When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes
+impracticable, any method of advance that <span class="sans">brings the attack closer to
+the enemy</span>, such as crawling, should be employed.</p>
+
+<p>For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs <a href="#para_318">318</a> and
+<a href="#para_319">319</a>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Company in Support.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_225"><b>225.</b></a> To enable it to follow or reach the firing line, the support
+adopts suitable formations, following the principles explained in
+paragraphs <a href="#para_212">212&#8211;218</a>.</p>
+
+<p>The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. If after
+deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it for some time in
+close formation, it should be reassembled. It is redeployed when
+necessary.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_226"><b>226.</b></a> The movements of the support as a whole and the dispatch of
+reenforcements from it to the firing line are controlled by the major.</p>
+
+<p>A reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence and will
+be avoided whenever practicable.</p>
+
+<p>The captain of a company in support is constantly on the alert for the
+major's signals or commands.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg&#160;65]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_227"><b>227.</b></a> A reenforcement sent to the firing line joins it deployed as
+skirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement places it in an interval
+in the line, if one exists, and commands it thereafter as a unit. If
+no such suitable interval exists, the reenforcement is advanced with
+increased intervals between skirmishers; each man occupies the nearest
+interval in the firing line, and each then obeys the orders of the
+nearest squad leader and platoon leader.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_228"><b>228.</b></a> A reenforcement joins the firing line as quickly as possible
+without exhausting the men.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_229"><b>229.</b></a> The original platoon division of the companies in the firing line
+should be maintained and should not be broken up by the mingling of
+reenforcements.</p>
+
+<p>Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying a
+reenforcement take over the duties of others of like grade who have
+been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to exercise their
+normal functions. Conditions will vary and no rules can be prescribed.
+It is essential that all assist in mastering the increasing
+difficulties of control.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Company Acting Alone.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_230"><b>230.</b></a> In general, the company, when acting alone, is employed according
+to the principles applicable to the battalion acting alone; the
+captain employs platoons as the major employs companies, making due
+allowance for the difference in strength.</p>
+
+<p>The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed with.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_231"><b>231.</b></a> The company must be well protected against surprise. Combat
+patrols on the flanks are specially important. Each leader of a flank
+platoon details a man to watch for the signals of the patrol or
+patrols on his flank.</p>
+
+
+<h3><a name="FIRE"></a>FIRE.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_232"><b>232.</b></a> Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra ammunition is issued
+before the company deploys for combat.</p>
+
+<p>In close order the company executes the firings at the command of the
+captain, who posts himself in rear of the center of the company.</p>
+
+<p>Usually the firings in close order consist of saluting volleys only.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg&#160;66]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_233"><b>233.</b></a> When the company is deployed, the men execute the firings at the
+command of their platoon leaders; the latter give such commands as are
+necessary to carry out the captain's directions, and, from time to
+time, add such further commands as are necessary to continue, correct,
+and control the fire ordered.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_234"><b>234.</b></a> The voice is generally inadequate for giving commands during fire
+and must be replaced by signals of such character that proper fire
+direction and control is assured. To attract attention, signals must
+usually be preceded by the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of
+the firing line about to rush should, if practicable, avoid using the
+long blast signal as an aid to <span class="sans">cease firing</span>. Officers and men behind
+the firing line can not ordinarily move freely along the line, but
+must depend on mutual watchfulness and the proper use of the
+prescribed signals. All should post themselves so as to see their
+immediate superiors and subordinates.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_235"><b>235.</b></a> The musicians assist the captain by observing the enemy, the
+target, and the fire effect, by transmitting commands or signals, and
+by watching for signals.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_236"><b>236.</b></a> Firing with blank cartridges at an <span class="sans">outlined</span> or <span class="sans">represented</span>
+enemy at distances less than 100 yards is prohibited.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_237"><b>237.</b></a> The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation
+thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in
+marksmanship, are treated in the Small-Arms Firing Manual.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Ranges.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_238"><b>238.</b></a> For convenience of reference ranges are classified as follows:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p>
+0 to 600 yards, close range.<br />
+600 to 1,200 yards, effective range.<br />
+1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range.<br />
+2,000 yards and over, distant range.<br />
+</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><a name="para_239"><b>239.</b></a> The distance to the target must be determined as accurately as
+possible and the sights set accordingly. Aside from training and
+morale, this is the most important single factor in securing effective
+fire at the longer ranges.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_240"><b>240.</b></a> Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most
+accurate and only practicable method of determining the range will
+generally be to take the mean of several estimates.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg&#160;67]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate
+estimators in the company, are designated as <span class="sans">range estimators</span> and
+are specially trained in estimating distances.</p>
+
+<p>Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range
+estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of
+their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Classes of Firing.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_241"><b>241.</b></a> <span class="sans">Volley firing</span> has limited application. In defense it may be
+used in the early stages of the action if the enemy presents a large,
+compact target. It may be used by troops executing <span class="sans">fire of position</span>.
+When the ground near the target is such that the strike of bullets can
+be seen from the firing line, <span class="sans">ranging volleys</span> may be used to correct
+the sight setting.</p>
+
+<p>In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_242"><b>242.</b></a> <span class="sans">Fire at will</span> is the class of fire normally employed in attack
+or defense.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_243"><b>243.</b></a> <span class="sans">Clip fire</span> has limited application. It is principally used: 1.
+In the early stages of combat, to steady the men by habituating them
+to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short burst of fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Target.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_244"><b>244.</b></a> Ordinarily the major will assign to the company an objective in
+attack or sector in defense; the company's target will lie within the
+limits so assigned. In the choice of target, tactical considerations
+are paramount; the nearest hostile troops within the objective or
+sector will thus be the usual target. This will ordinarily be the
+hostile firing line; troops in rear are ordinarily proper targets for
+artillery, machine guns, or, at times, infantry employing fire of
+position.</p>
+
+<p>Change of target should not be made without excellent reasons
+therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under
+conditions which make them more to be feared than the troops
+comprising the former target.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_245"><b>245.</b></a> The distribution of fire over the entire target is of special
+importance.</p>
+
+<p>The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each
+platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his
+position in the company. Men are so instructed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg&#160;68]</a></span> that each fires on
+that part of the target which is directly opposite him.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_246"><b>246.</b></a> All parts of the target are equally important. Care must be
+exercised that the men do not slight its less visible parts. A section
+of the target not covered by fire represents a number of the enemy
+permitted to fire coolly and effectively.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_247"><b>247.</b></a> If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders
+select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the
+<span class="sans">aiming target</span>, and direct a sight setting which will carry the cone
+of fire into the target.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Fire Direction.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_248"><b>248.</b></a> When the company is large enough to be divided into platoons, it
+is impracticable for the captain to command it directly in combat. His
+efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to
+enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly
+what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct
+serious errors or omissions.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_249"><b>249.</b></a> The captain <span class="sans">directs</span> the fire of the company or of designated
+platoons. He designates the target, and, when practicable, allots a
+part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action
+he determines the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates
+the class of fire to be employed and the time to open fire.
+Thereafter, he observes the fire effect, corrects material errors in
+sight setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and
+causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as may be received
+from the rear.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Fire Control.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_250"><b>250.</b></a> In combat the platoon is the <span class="sans">fire unit</span>. From 20 to 35 rifles
+are as many as one leader can control effectively.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_251"><b>251.</b></a> Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or
+directions of the captain, having first taken such precautions to
+insure correct sight setting and clear description of the target or
+aiming target as the situation permits or requires; thereafter, he
+gives such additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact
+compliance with the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when
+necessary. He designates an aiming target when the target can not be
+seen with the naked eye.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg&#160;69]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_252"><b>252.</b></a> In general, <span class="sans">platoon leaders</span> observe the target and the effect
+of their fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands or
+signals; they observe and regulate the rate of fire. The <span class="sans">platoon
+guides</span> watch the firing line and check every breach of fire
+discipline. <span class="sans">Squad leaders</span> transmit commands and signals when
+necessary, observe the conduct of their squads and abate excitement,
+assist in enforcing fire discipline and participate in the firing.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_253"><b>253.</b></a> The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control.
+Loss of control is an evil which robs success of its greatest results.
+To avoid or delay such loss should be the constant aim of all.</p>
+
+<p>Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight
+setting and target, and resume a well directed fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Fire Discipline.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_254"><b>254.</b></a> &quot;Fire discipline implies, besides a habit of obedience, a control
+of the rifle by the soldier, the result of training, which will enable
+him in action to make hits instead of misses. It embraces taking
+advantage of the ground; care in setting the sight and delivery of
+fire; constant attention to the orders of the leaders, and careful
+observation of the enemy; an increase of fire when the target is
+favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy disappears; economy
+of ammunition.&quot; (Small-Arms Firing Manual.)</p>
+
+<p>In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position and thus
+reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate value of
+hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire
+superiority.</p>
+
+<p>Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each
+man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the
+proper target.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_255"><b>255.</b></a> To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire
+discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire should be as rapid as
+is consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the
+visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper
+rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man, usually
+rendering cautions or commands unnecessary.</p>
+
+<p>In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt preceding
+the assault, and in pursuing fire.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg&#160;70]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_256"><b>256.</b></a> In an advance by rushes, leaders of troops in firing positions
+are responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover the advance of
+each rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change slightly the
+direction of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of advanced
+portions of the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_257"><b>257.</b></a> In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon
+leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point
+where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly
+with vigorous fire.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg&#160;71]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="SCHOOL_OF_THE_BATTALION" id="SCHOOL_OF_THE_BATTALION"></a>SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_258"><b>258.</b></a> The battalion being purely a tactical unit, the major's duties
+are primarily those of an instructor in drill and tactics and of a
+tactical commander. He is responsible for the theoretical and
+practical training of the battalion. He supervises the training of the
+companies of the battalion with a view to insuring the thoroughness
+and uniformity of their instruction.</p>
+
+<p>In the instruction of the battalion as a whole, his efforts will be
+directed chiefly to the development of tactical efficiency, devoting
+only such time to the mechanism of drill and to the ceremonies as may
+be necessary in order to insure precision, smartness, and proper
+control.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_259"><b>259.</b></a> The movements explained herein are on the basis of a battalion of
+four companies; they may be executed by a battalion of two or more
+companies, not exceeding six.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_260"><b>260.</b></a> The companies are generally arranged from right to left according
+to the rank of the captains present at the formation. The arrangement
+of the companies may be varied by the major or higher commander.</p>
+
+<p>After the battalion is formed, no cognizance is taken of the relative
+order of the companies.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_261"><b>261.</b></a> In whatever direction the battalion faces, the companies are
+designated numerically from right to left in line, and from head to
+rear in column, <span class="sans">first company</span>, <span class="sans">second company</span>, etc.</p>
+
+<p>The terms <span class="sans">right</span> and <span class="sans">left</span> apply to actual right and left as the
+line faces; if the about by squads be executed when in line, the right
+company becomes the left company and the right center becomes the left
+center company.</p>
+
+<p>The designation center company indicates the right center or the
+actual center company according as the number of companies is even or
+odd.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_262"><b>262.</b></a> The band and other special units, when attached to the battalion,
+take the same post with respect to it as if it were the nearest
+battalion shown in <a href="#PLATE_IV">Plate IV</a>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg&#160;72]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3><a name="CLOSE_ORDER2"></a>CLOSE ORDER.</h3>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Rules.</span></h4>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/plate3.png" width="543" height="446" alt="Plate III (battalion diagram)" title="Plate III (battalion diagram)" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b>Plate III. THE BATTALION.</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><a href="images/plate3lg.png">[Enlarge]</a></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_263"><b>263.</b></a> Captains repeat such preparatory commands as are to be
+immediately executed by their companies, as <span class="sans">forward</span>, <span class="sans">squads right</span>,
+etc.; the men execute the commands <span class="sans">march</span>, <span class="sans">halt</span>, etc., if applying
+to their companies, when given by the major. In movements executed in
+route step or at ease the captains repeat the command of execution, if
+necessary. Captains do not repeat the major's commands in executing
+the manual of arms, nor those commands which are not essential to the
+execution of a movement by their companies, as <span class="sans">column of squads</span>,
+<span class="sans">first company</span>, <span class="sans">squads right</span>, etc.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg&#160;73]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In giving commands or cautions captains may prefix the proper letter
+designations of their companies, as <span class="sans">A Company, HALT</span>; <span class="sans">B Company,
+squads right</span>, etc.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_264"><b>264.</b></a> At the command <span class="sans">guide center (right</span> or <span class="sans">left)</span>, captains
+command: <span class="sans">Guide right</span> or <span class="sans">left</span>, according to the positions of their
+companies. <span class="sans">Guide center</span> designates the left guide of the center
+company.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_265"><b>265.</b></a> When the companies are to be dressed, captains place themselves
+on that flank toward which the dress is to be made, as follows:</p>
+
+<p>The battalion in line: Beside the guide (or the flank file of the
+front rank, if the guide is not in line) and facing to the front.</p>
+
+<p>The battalion in column of companies: Two paces from the guide, in
+prolongation of and facing down the line.</p>
+
+<p>Each captain, after dressing his company, commands: <span class="sans">FRONT</span>, and takes
+his post.</p>
+
+<p>The battalion being in line and unless otherwise prescribed, at the
+captain's command <span class="sans">dress</span>, or at the command <span class="sans">halt</span>, when it is
+prescribed that the company shall dress, the guide on the flank away
+from the point of rest, with his piece at right shoulder, dresses
+promptly on the captain and the companies beyond. During the dress he
+moves, if necessary, to the right and left only; the captain dresses
+the company on the line thus established. The guide takes the position
+of order arms at the command <span class="sans">front</span>. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_266"><b>266.</b></a> The battalion executes the <span class="sans">halt</span>, <span class="sans">rests</span>, <span class="sans">facings</span>, <span class="sans">steps</span>
+and <span class="sans">marchings</span>, <span class="sans">manual of arms</span>, resumes <span class="sans">attention</span>, <span class="sans">kneels</span>,
+<span class="sans">lies down</span>, <span class="sans">rises</span>, <span class="sans">stacks</span> and <span class="sans">takes arms</span>, as explained in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SOLDIER">Schools of the Soldier</a> and
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">Squad</a>, substituting in the commands
+<span class="sans">battalion</span> for <span class="sans">squad</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The battalion executes <span class="sans">squads right (left)</span>, <span class="sans">squads right (left)
+about</span>, <span class="sans">route step</span> and <span class="sans">at ease</span>, and <span class="sans">obliques</span> and resumes the
+<span class="sans">direct march</span>, as explained in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY">School of the Company</a>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_267"><b>267.</b></a> The battalion in column of platoons, squads, twos, or files
+changes direction; in column of squads forms column of twos or files
+and re-forms columns of twos or squads, as explained in the <a href="#para_158">School of
+the Company</a>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_268"><b>268.</b></a> When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution by
+companies or platoons of movements in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY">School of the Company</a> the
+major may cause such movement to be executed by prefixing, when
+necessary, <span class="sans">companies (platoons)</span> to the commands prescribed therein:
+as 1. <span class="sans">Companies, right front into line</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>. To complete such
+simultaneous movements, the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg&#160;74]</a></span> commands <span class="sans">halt</span> or <span class="sans">march</span>, if
+prescribed, are given by the major. The command <span class="sans">front</span>, when
+prescribed, is given by the captains.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_269"><b>269.</b></a> The battalion as a unit executes the loadings and firings only in
+firing saluting volleys. The commands are as for the company,
+substituting <span class="sans">battalion</span> for <span class="sans">company</span>. At the first command for
+loading, captains take post in rear of the center of their respective
+companies. At the conclusion of the firing, the captains resume their
+posts in line.</p>
+
+<p>On other occasions, when firing in close order is necessary, it is
+executed by company or other subdivision under instructions from the
+major.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Form the Battalion.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_270"><b>270.</b></a> For purposes other than ceremonies: The battalion is formed in
+column of squads. The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts
+himself so as to be facing the column, when formed, and 6 paces in
+front of the place to be occupied by the leading guide of the
+battalion; he draws saber; <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">adjutant's call</a></span> is sounded or the
+adjutant signals <span class="sans">assemble</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The companies are formed, at attention, in column of squads in their
+proper order. Each captain, after halting his company, salutes the
+adjutant; the adjutant returns the salute and, when the last captain
+has saluted, faces the major and reports: <span class="sans">Sir, the battalion is
+formed</span>. He then joins the major.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_271"><b>271.</b></a> For ceremonies or when directed: The battalion is formed in line.</p>
+
+<p>The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts himself so as to
+be 6 paces to the right of the right company when line is formed, and
+faces in the direction in which the line is to extend. He draws saber;
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">adjutant's call</a></span> is sounded; the band plays if present.</p>
+
+<p>The right company is conducted by its captain so as to arrive from the
+rear, parallel to the line; its right and left guides precede it on
+the line by about 20 paces, taking post facing to the right at order
+arms, so that their elbows will be against the breasts of the right
+and left files of their company when it is dressed. The guides of the
+other companies successively prolong the line to the left in like
+manner and the companies approach their respective places in line as
+explained for the right company. The adjutant, from his post, causes
+the guides to cover.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg&#160;75]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When about 1 pace in rear of the line, each company is halted and
+dressed to the right against the arms of the guides.</p>
+
+<p>The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the
+right company is halted; it ceases playing when the left company has
+halted.</p>
+
+<p>When the guides of the left company have been posted, the adjutant,
+moving by the shortest route, takes post facing the battalion midway
+between the post of the major and the center of the battalion.</p>
+
+<p>The major, staff, noncommissioned staff, and orderlies take their
+posts.</p>
+
+<p>When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and others
+have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. <span class="sans">Guides</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">POSTS</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Present</span>, 4. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>. At the second command guides take
+their places in the line. The adjutant then turns about and reports to
+the major: <span class="sans">Sir, the battalion is formed</span>; the major directs the
+adjutant: <span class="sans">Take your post, Sir</span>; draws saber and brings the battalion
+to the order. The adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the
+major.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Dismiss the Battalion.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_272"><b>272.</b></a> <span class="sans">DISMISS YOUR COMPANIES.</span></p>
+
+<p>Staff and noncommissioned staff officers fall out; each captain
+marches his company off and dismisses it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Rectify the Alignment.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_273"><b>273.</b></a> Being in line at a halt, to align the battalion: 1. <span class="sans">Center
+(right</span> or <span class="sans">left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">DRESS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The captains dress their companies successively toward the center
+(right or left) guide of the battalion, each as soon as the captain
+next toward the indicated guide commands: <span class="sans">Front</span>. The captains of the
+center companies (if the dress is <span class="sans">center</span>) dress them without waiting
+for each other.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_274"><b>274.</b></a> To give the battalion a new alignment: 1. <span class="sans">Guides center (right</span>
+or <span class="sans">left) company on the line</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Guides on the line</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Center
+(right</span> or <span class="sans">left)</span>, 4. <span class="sans">DRESS</span>, 5. <span class="sans">Guides</span>, 6. <span class="sans">POSTS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the first command, the designated guides place themselves on the
+line (<a href="#para_271">par. 271</a>) facing the center (right or left). The major
+establishes them in the direction he wishes to give the battalion.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg&#160;76]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>At the second command, the guides of the other companies take posts,
+facing the center (right or left), so as to prolong the line.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">dress</span>, each captain dresses his company to the flank
+toward which the guides of his company face.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">posts</span>, given when all companies have completed the
+dress, the guides return to their posts.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Rectify the Column.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_275"><b>275.</b></a> Being in column of companies, or in close column, at a halt, if
+the guides do not cover or have not their proper distances, and it is
+desired to correct them, the major commands: 1. <span class="sans">Right (left)</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">DRESS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Captains of companies in rear of the first place their right guides so
+as to cover at the proper distance; each captain aligns his company to
+the right and commands: <span class="sans">FRONT</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">On Right (Left) into Line.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_276"><b>276.</b></a> Being in column of squads or companies: 1. <span class="sans">On right (left) into
+line</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Battalion</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the
+leading company commands: <span class="sans">Squads right</span>. If at a halt each captain in
+rear commands: <span class="sans">Forward</span>. At the second command the leading company
+marches in line to the right; the companies in rear continue to march
+to the front and form successively on the left, each, when opposite
+its place, being marched in line to the right.</p>
+
+<p>The fourth command is given when the first company has advanced the
+desired distance in the new direction; it halts and is dressed to the
+right by its captain; the others complete the movement, each being
+halted 1 pace in rear of the line established by the first company,
+and then dressed to the right.</p>
+
+<p>Being in column of companies: At the first command, the captain of the
+first company commands: <span class="sans">Right turn</span>. If at a halt, each captain in
+rear commands: <span class="sans">Forward</span>. Each of the captains in rear of the leading
+company gives the command: 1. <span class="sans">Right turn</span>, in time to add, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>, when his company arrives opposite the right of its place in
+line.</p>
+
+<p>The fourth command is given and the movement completed as explained
+above.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg&#160;77]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each
+captain places himself so as to march beside the right guide after his
+company forms line or changes direction to the right.</p>
+
+<p>If executed in double time, the leading company marches in double time
+until halted.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Front into Line.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_277"><b>277.</b></a> Being in column of squads or companies: 1. <span class="sans">Right (Left) front
+into line</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the
+leading company commands: <span class="sans">Column right</span>; the captains of the
+companies in rear, <span class="sans">column half right</span>. At the second command the
+leading company executes column right, and, as the last squad
+completes the change of direction, is formed in line to the left,
+halted, and dressed to the left. Each of the companies in rear is
+conducted by the most convenient route to the rear of the right of the
+preceding company, thence to the right, parallel to and 1 pace in rear
+of the new line; when opposite its place, it is formed in line to the
+left, halted, and dressed to the left.</p>
+
+<p>Being in column of companies: If marching, the captain of the leading
+company gives the necessary commands to halt his company at the second
+command; if at a halt, the leading company stands fast. At the first
+command, the captain of each company in rear commands: <span class="sans">Squads right</span>,
+or <span class="sans">Right by squads</span>, and after the second command conducts his
+company by the most convenient route to its place in line, as
+described above.</p>
+
+<p>Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each
+captain halts when opposite or at the point where the left of his
+company is to rest.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Form Column of Companies Successively to the Right or Left.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_278"><b>278.</b></a> Being in column of squads: 1. <span class="sans">Column of companies, first
+company, squads right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The leading company executes <span class="sans">squads right</span> and moves forward. The
+other companies move forward in column of squads and successively
+march in line to the right on the same ground as the leading company
+and in such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding
+company.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg&#160;78]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Form Column of Squads Successively to the Right or Left.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_279"><b>279.</b></a> Being in column of companies: 1. <span class="sans">Column of squads, first
+company, squads right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The leading company executes <span class="sans">squads right</span> and moves forward. The
+other companies move forward in column of companies and successively
+march in column of squads to the right on the same ground as the
+leading company.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Change Direction.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_280"><b>280.</b></a> Being in column of companies or close column: 1. <span class="sans">Column right
+(left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The captain of the first company commands: <span class="sans">Right turn</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The leading company turns to the right on moving pivot, the captain
+adding: 1. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, upon its completion.</p>
+
+<p>The other companies march squarely up to the turning point; each
+changes direction by the same commands and means as the first and in
+such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding company.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_281"><b>281.</b></a> Being in line of companies or close line: 1. <span class="sans">Battalion right
+(left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Battalion</span>, 4. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The right company changes direction to the right; the other companies
+are conducted by the shortest line to their places abreast of the
+first.</p>
+
+<p>The fourth command is given when the right company has advanced the
+desired distance in the new direction; that company halts; the others
+halt successively upon arriving on the line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_282"><b>282.</b></a> Being in column of squads, the battalion changes direction by the
+same commands and in the manner prescribed for the company.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Mass Formations.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_282half">282&#189;.</a></b> Being in column of squads, to form a line of columns of
+companies or company subdivisions, facing in any desired direction, at
+any desired interval, on the right or left of the leading element of
+the battalion: 1. <span class="sans">Line of companies (half companies, platoons), at
+(so many) paces, guide right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>, 3. <span class="sans">Battalion</span>, 4.
+<span class="sans">HALT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The leading company (or subdivision) marches in the direction
+previously indicated by the major until the command halt is given and
+then halts. Each succeeding company (or sub<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg&#160;79]</a></span>division) marches by the
+most direct route to its place at the prescribed interval on the left
+(right) of the next preceding company (or subdivision), halting when
+it is abreast of the leading element of the battalion.</p>
+
+<p>If the battalion be in any formation other than column of squads, the
+major indicates the desired direction to the leading element. The
+entire command forms column of squads and executes the movement in
+conformity with the principles indicated above. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 19.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_283"><b>283.</b></a> Being in line, line of companies, or column of companies: 1.
+<span class="sans">Close on first (fourth) company</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast; if marching, it is
+halted; each of the other companies is conducted toward it and is
+halted in proper order in close column.</p>
+
+<p>If the battalion is in line, companies form successively in rear of
+the indicated company; if in column of squads, companies in rear of
+the leading company form on the left of it.</p>
+
+<p>In close column formed from line on the first company, the left guides
+cover; formed on the fourth company, right guides cover. If formed on
+the leading company, the guide remains as before the formation. In
+close line, the guides are halted abreast of the guide of the leading
+company.</p>
+
+<p>The battalion in column closes on the leading company only.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 19.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Extend the Mass.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_284"><b>284.</b></a> Being in close column or in close line: 1. <span class="sans">Extend on first
+(fourth) company</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Being in close line: If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast;
+if marching, it halts; each of the other companies is conducted away
+from the indicated company and is halted in its proper order in line
+of companies.</p>
+
+<p>Being in close column, the extension is made on the fourth company
+only. If marching, the leading company continues to march; companies
+in rear are halted and successively resume the march in time to follow
+at full distance. If at halt, the leading company marches; companies
+in rear successively march in time to follow at full distance.</p>
+
+<p>Close column is not extended in double time.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_285"><b>285.</b></a> Being in close column: 1. <span class="sans">Right (left) front into line</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>. Executed as from column of companies.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg&#160;80]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_286"><b>286.</b></a> Being in close column: 1. <span class="sans">Column of squads, first (fourth)
+company, squads right (left)</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The designated company marches in column of squads to the right. Each
+of the other companies executes the same movement in time to follow
+the preceding company in column.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_287"><b>287.</b></a> Being in close line: 1. <span class="sans">Column of squads, first (fourth)
+company, forward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The designated company moves forward. The other companies (halting if
+in march) successively take up the march and follow in column.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Route Step and At Ease.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_288"><b>288.</b></a> The battalion marches in <span class="sans">route step</span> and <span class="sans">at ease</span> as prescribed
+in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY">School of the Company</a>. When marching in column of companies or
+platoons, the guides maintain the trace and distance.</p>
+
+<p>In route marches the major marches at the head of the column; when
+necessary, the file closers may be directed to march at the head and
+rear of their companies.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Assembly.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_289"><b>289.</b></a> The battalion being wholly or partially deployed, or the
+companies being separated: 1. <span class="sans">Assemble</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The major places himself opposite to or designates the element or
+point on which the battalion is to assemble. Companies are assembled
+and marched to the indicated point. As the companies arrive the major
+or adjutant indicates the formation to be taken.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg&#160;81]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3><a name="COMBAT_PRINCIPLES"></a>COMBAT PRINCIPLES.</h3>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Orders.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_290"><b>290.</b></a> The following references to orders are applicable to attack or
+defense.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_291"><b>291.</b></a> In extended order, the company is the largest unit to execute
+movements by prescribed commands or means. The major, assembling his
+captains if practicable, directs the disposition of the battalion by
+means of <span class="sans">tactical orders</span>. He controls its subsequent movements by
+such <span class="sans">orders</span> or <span class="sans">commands</span> as are suitable to the occasion.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_292"><b>292.</b></a> In every disposition of the battalion for combat the major's
+order should give subordinates sufficient information of the enemy, of
+the position of supporting and neighboring troops, and of the object
+sought to enable them to conform intelligently to the general plan.</p>
+
+<p>The order should then designate the companies which are to constitute
+the <span class="sans">firing line</span> and those which are to constitute the <span class="sans">support</span>. In
+attack, it should designate the direction or the objective, the order
+and front of the companies on the firing line, and should designate
+the right or left company as base company. In defense, it should
+describe the front of each company and, if necessary, the sector to be
+observed by each.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_293"><b>293.</b></a> When the battalion is operating alone, the major provides for the
+reconnaissance and protection of his flanks; if part of a larger
+force, the major makes similar provisions, when necessary, without
+orders from higher authority, unless such authority has specifically
+directed other suitable reconnaissance and protection.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_294"><b>294.</b></a> When the battalion is deployed upon the initiative of the major,
+he will indicate whether extra ammunition shall be issued; if deployed
+in pursuance of orders of higher authority, the major will cause the
+issue of extra ammunition, unless such authority has given directions
+to the contrary.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg&#160;82]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Deployment.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_295"><b>295.</b></a> The following principles of deployment are applicable to attack
+or defense.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_296"><b>296.</b></a> A premature deployment involves a long, disorganizing and
+fatiguing advance of the skirmish line, and should be avoided. A
+greater evil is to be caught by heavy fire when in dense column or
+other close order formation; hence advantage should be taken of cover
+in order to retain the battalion in close order formation until
+exposure to heavy hostile fire may reasonably be anticipated.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_297"><b>297.</b></a> The major regulates the depth of the deployment and the extent
+and density of the firing line, subject to such restrictions as a
+senior may have imposed.</p>
+
+<p>Companies or designated subdivisions and detachments are conducted by
+their commanders in such manner as best to accomplish the mission
+assigned to them under the major's orders. Companies designated for
+the firing line march independently to the place of deployment, form
+skirmish line, and take up the advance. They conform, in general, to
+the base company.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_298"><b>298.</b></a> The commander of a battalion, whether it is operating alone or as
+part of a larger force, should hold a part of his command out of the
+firing line. By the judicious use of this force the major can exert an
+influence not otherwise possible over his firing line and can control,
+within reasonable limits, an action once begun. So if his battalion be
+assigned to the <span class="sans">firing line</span> the major will cause one, two, or three
+companies to be deployed on the firing line, retaining the remaining
+companies or company as a <span class="sans">support</span> for that firing line. The division
+of the battalion into firing line and support will depend upon the
+front to be covered and the nature and anticipated severity of the
+action.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_299"><b>299.</b></a> If the battalion be part of a larger command, the number of
+companies in the firing line will generally be determinable from the
+regimental commander's order; the remainder constitutes the support.
+If the battalion is acting alone, the support must be strong enough to
+maintain the original fire power of the firing line, to protect the
+flanks, and to perform the functions of a reserve, whatever be the
+issue of the action. See <a href="#para_346">paragraph 346</a>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg&#160;83]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_300"><b>300.</b></a> If the battalion is operating alone, the support may, according
+to circumstances, be held in one or two bodies and placed behind the
+center, or one or both flanks of the firing line, or echeloned beyond
+a flank. If the battalion is part of a larger force, the support is
+generally held in one body.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_301"><b>301.</b></a> The distance between the firing line and the supporting group or
+groups will vary between wide limits; it should be as short as the
+necessity for protection from heavy losses will permit. When cover is
+available, the support should be as close as 50 to 100 yards; when
+such cover is not available, it should not be closer than 300 yards.
+It may be as far as 500 yards in rear if good cover is there
+obtainable and is not obtainable at a lesser distance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_302"><b>302.</b></a> In exceptional cases, as in a meeting engagement, it may be
+necessary to place an entire battalion or regiment in the firing line
+at the initial deployment, the support being furnished by other
+troops. Such deployment causes the early mingling of the larger units,
+thus rendering leadership and control extremely difficult. The
+necessity for such deployment will increase with the inefficiency of
+the commander and of the service of information.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Fire.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_303"><b>303.</b></a> Fire direction and fire control are functions of company and
+platoon commanders. The major makes the primary apportionment of the
+target&#8212;in defense, by assigning sectors of fire; in attack, by
+assigning the objective. In the latter case each company in the firing
+line takes as its target that part of the general objective which lies
+in its front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_304"><b>304.</b></a> The major should indicate the point or time at which the fire
+fight is to open. He may do this in his order for deployment or he may
+follow the firing line close enough to do so at the proper time. If it
+be impracticable for him to do either, the senior officer with the
+firing line, in each battalion, selects the time for opening fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Attack.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_305"><b>305.</b></a> The battalion is the <span class="sans">attack unit</span>, whether operating alone or as
+part of a larger unit.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_306"><b>306.</b></a> If his battalion be one of several in the firing line, the major,
+in executing his part of the attack, pushes his battalion<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg&#160;84]</a></span> forward as
+vigorously as possible within the front, or section, assigned to it.
+The great degree of independence allowed to him as to details demands,
+in turn, the exercise of good judgment on his part. Better leadership,
+better troops, and more favorable terrain enable one battalion to
+advance more rapidly in attack than another less fortunate, and such a
+battalion will insure the further advance of the others. The leading
+battalion should not, however, become isolated; isolation may lead to
+its destruction.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_307"><b>307.</b></a> The deployment having been made, the firing line advances without
+firing. The predominant idea must be to close with the enemy as soon
+as possible without ruinous losses. The limited supply of ammunition
+and the uncertainty of resupply, the necessity for securing fire
+superiority in order to advance within the shorter ranges, and the
+impossibility of accomplishing this at ineffective ranges, make it
+imperative that fire be not opened as long as the advance can be
+continued without demoralizing losses. The attack which halts to open
+fire at extreme range (over 1,200 yards) is not likely ever to reach
+its destination. Every effort should be made, by using cover or
+inconspicuous formations, or by advancing the firing line as a whole,
+to arrive within 800 yards of the enemy before opening fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_308"><b>308.</b></a> Except when the enemy's artillery is able to effect an unusual
+concentration of fire, its fire upon deployed infantry causes losses
+which are unimportant when compared with those inflicted by his
+infantry; hence the attacking infantry should proceed to a position as
+described above, and from which an effective fire can be directed
+against the hostile infantry with a view to obtaining fire
+superiority. The effectiveness of the enemy's fire must be reduced so
+as to permit further advance. The more effective the fire to which the
+enemy is subjected the less effective will be his fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_309"><b>309.</b></a> Occasionally the fire of adjacent battalions, or of infantry
+employing fire of position, or of supporting artillery, will permit
+the further advance of the entire firing line from this point, but it
+will generally be necessary to advance by rushes of fractions of the
+line.</p>
+
+<p>The fraction making the rush should be as large as the hostile fire
+and the necessity for maintaining fire superiority will permit.
+Depending upon circumstances, the strength of the fraction may vary
+from a company to a few men.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg&#160;85]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The advance is made as rapidly as possible without losing fire
+superiority. The smaller the fraction which rushes, the greater the
+number of rifles which continue to fire upon the enemy. On the other
+hand, the smaller the fraction which rushes the slower will be the
+progress of the attack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_310"><b>310.</b></a> Enough rifles must continue in action to insure the success of
+each rush. Frequently the successive advances of the firing line must
+be effected by rushes of fractions of decreased size; that is,
+advances by rushes may first be made by company, later by half company
+or platoon, and finally by squads or files; but no subsequent
+opportunity to <span class="sans">increase</span> the rate of advance, such as better cover or
+a decrease of the hostile fire, should be overlooked.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_311"><b>311.</b></a> Whenever possible, the rush is begun by a flank fraction of the
+firing line. In the absence of express directions from the major, each
+captain of a flank company determines when an advance by rushes shall
+be attempted. A flank company which inaugurates an advance by rushes
+becomes the base company, if not already the base. An advance by
+rushes having been inaugurated on one flank, the remainder of the
+firing line conforms; fractions rush successively from that flank and
+halt on the line established by the initial rush.</p>
+
+<p>The fractions need not be uniform in size; each captain indicates how
+his company shall rush, having due regard to the ground and the state
+of the fire fight.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_312"><b>312.</b></a> A fraction about to rush is sent forward when the remainder of
+the line is firing vigorously; otherwise the chief advantage of this
+method of advancing is lost.</p>
+
+<p>The length of the rush will vary from 30 to 80 yards, depending upon
+the existence of cover, positions for firing, and the hostile fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_313"><b>313.</b></a> When the entire firing line of the battalion has advanced to the
+new line, fresh opportunities to advance are sought as before.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_314"><b>314.</b></a> Two identical situations will never confront the battalion; hence
+at drill it is prohibited to arrange the details of an advance before
+the preceding one has been concluded, or to employ a fixed or
+prearranged method of advancing by rushes.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_315"><b>315.</b></a> The major posts himself so as best to direct the reenforcing of
+the firing line from the support. When all or nearly all of the
+support has been absorbed by the firing line, he joins, and takes full
+charge of, the latter.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg&#160;86]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_316"><b>316.</b></a> The reenforcing of the firing line by driblets of a squad or a
+few men has no appreciable effect. The firing line requires either no
+reenforcement or a strong one. Generally one or two platoons will be
+sent forward under cover of a heavy fire of the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_317"><b>317.</b></a> To facilitate control and to provide intervals in which
+reenforcements may be placed, the companies in the firing line should
+be kept closed in on their centers as they become depleted by
+casualties during the advance.</p>
+
+<p>When this is impracticable, reenforcements must mingle with and
+thicken the firing line. In battle the latter method will be the rule
+rather than the exception, and to familiarize the men with such
+conditions the combat exercises of the battalion should include both
+methods of reenforcing. Occasionally, to provide the necessary
+intervals for reenforcing by either of these methods, the firing line
+should be thinned by causing men to drop out and simulate losses
+during the various advances. Under ordinary conditions the depletion
+of the firing line for this purpose will be from one-fifth to one-half
+of its strength.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_318"><b>318.</b></a> The major or senior officer in the firing line determines when
+bayonets shall be fixed and gives the proper command or signal. It is
+repeated by all parts of the firing line. Each man who was in the
+front rank prior to deployment, as soon as he recognizes the command
+or signal, suspends firing, quickly fixes his bayonet, and immediately
+resumes firing; after which the other men suspend firing, fix
+bayonets, and immediately resume firing. The support also fixes
+bayonets. The concerted fixing of the bayonet by the firing line at
+drill does not simulate battle conditions and should not be required.
+It is essential that there be no marked pause in the firing. Bayonets
+will be fixed generally before or during the last, or second last,
+advance preceding the charge.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_319"><b>319.</b></a> Subject to orders from higher authority, the major determines the
+point from which the charge is to be made. The firing line having
+arrived at that point and being in readiness, the major causes the
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE41">charge</a></span> to be sounded. The signal is repeated by the musicians of all
+parts of the line. The company officers lead the charge. The
+skirmishers spring forward shouting, run with bayonets at charge, and
+close with the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>The further conduct of the charging troops will depend upon
+circumstances; they may halt and engage in bayonet combat or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg&#160;87]</a></span> in
+pursuing fire; they may advance a short distance to obtain a field of
+fire or to drive the enemy from the vicinity; they may assemble or
+reorganize, etc. If the enemy vacates his position every effort should
+be made to open fire at once on the retreating mass, reorganization of
+the attacking troops being of secondary importance to the infliction
+of further losses upon the enemy and to the increase of his confusion.
+In combat exercises the major will assume a situation and terminate
+the assault accordingly.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Defense.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_320"><b>320.</b></a> In defense, as in attack, the battalion is the tactical unit best
+suited to independent assignment. Defensive positions are usually
+divided into sections and a battalion assigned to each.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_321"><b>321.</b></a> The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover trenches
+and obstacles as are to be constructed. He assigns companies to
+construct them and details the troops to occupy them.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_322"><b>322.</b></a> The major reenforces the firing line in accordance with the
+principles applicable to, and explained in connection with, the
+attack, maintaining no more rifles in the firing line than are
+necessary to prevent the enemy's advance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_323"><b>323.</b></a> The supply of ammunition being usually ample, fire is opened as
+soon as it is possible to break up the enemy's formation, stop his
+advance, or inflict material loss, but this rule must be modified to
+suit the ammunition supply.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_324"><b>324.</b></a> The major causes the firing line and support to fix bayonets when
+an assault by the enemy is imminent. Captains direct this to be done
+if they are not in communication with the major and the measure is
+deemed advisable.</p>
+
+<p>Fire alone will not stop a determined, skillfully conducted attack.
+The defender must have equal tenacity; if he can stay in his trench or
+position and cross bayonets, he will at least have neutralized the
+hostile first line, and the combat will be decided by reserves.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_325"><b>325.</b></a> If ordered or compelled to withdraw under hostile infantry fire
+or in the presence of hostile infantry, the support will be posted so
+as to cover the retirement of the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_326"><b>326.</b></a> When the battalion is operating alone, the support must be strong
+and must be fed sparingly into the firing line, especially if a
+counterattack is planned. Opportunities for counterattack should be
+sought at all times.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg&#160;88]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="THE_REGIMENT" id="THE_REGIMENT"></a>THE REGIMENT.</h2>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><a name="PLATE_IV"></a>
+<img src="images/plate4.png" width="491" height="536" alt="Plate IV (regiment diagram)" title="Plate IV (regiment diagram)" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b>Plate IV. THE REGIMENT.</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><a href="images/plate4lg.png">[Enlarge]</a></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_327"><b>327.</b></a> Normally, the regiment consists of three battalions, but these
+regulations are applicable to a regiment of two or more battalions.
+Special units, such as band, machine-gun company, and mounted scouts,
+have special formations for their own use.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg&#160;89]</a></span> Movements herein
+prescribed are for the battalions; special units conform thereto
+unless otherwise prescribed or directed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_328"><b>328.</b></a> The colonel is responsible for the theoretical instruction and
+practical training of the regiment as a whole. Under his immediate
+supervision the training of the units of the regiment is conducted by
+their respective commanders.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_329"><b>329.</b></a> The colonel either gives his commands or orders orally, by bugle,
+or by signal, or communicates them by staff officers or orderlies.</p>
+
+<p>Each major gives the appropriate commands or orders, and, in
+close-order movements, causes his battalion to execute the necessary
+movements at his command of execution. Each major ordinarily moves his
+battalion from one formation to another, in column of squads, in the
+most convenient manner, and, in the presence of the enemy, in the most
+direct manner consistent with cover.</p>
+
+<p>Commanders of the special units observe the same principles as to
+commands and movements. They take places in the new formation as
+directed by the colonel; in the absence of such directions they
+conform as nearly as practicable to <a href="#PLATE_IV">Plate IV</a>, maintaining their
+relative positions with respect to the flank or end of the regiment on
+which they are originally posted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_330"><b>330.</b></a> When the regiment is formed, and during ceremonies, the
+lieutenant colonel is posted 2 paces to the left of, and 1 pace less
+advanced than the colonel. In movements subsequent to the formation of
+the regiment and other than ceremonies, the lieutenant colonel is on
+the left of the colonel.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_331"><b>331.</b></a> In whatever formation the regiment may be, the battalions retain
+their permanent administrative designations of <span class="sans">first</span>, <span class="sans">second</span>,
+<span class="sans">third battalion</span>. For convenience, they may be designated, when in
+line, as <span class="sans">right</span>, <span class="sans">center</span>, or <span class="sans">left battalion</span>; when in column, as
+<span class="sans">leading</span>, <span class="sans">center</span>, or <span class="sans">rear battalion</span>. These designations apply to
+the actual positions of the battalions in line or column.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_332"><b>332.</b></a> Except at ceremonies, or when rendering honors, or when otherwise
+directed, after the regiment is formed, the battalions march and stand
+<span class="sans">at ease</span> during subsequent movements.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg&#160;90]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3><a name="CLOSE_ORDER3"></a>CLOSE ORDER.</h3>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Form the Regiment.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_333"><b>333.</b></a> Unless otherwise directed, the battalions are posted from right
+to left, or from head to rear, according to the rank of the battalion
+commanders present, the senior on the right or at the head. A
+battalion whose major is in command of the regiment retains its place.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_334"><b>334.</b></a> For ordinary purposes, the regiment is formed in column of squads
+or in column of masses.</p>
+
+<p>The adjutant informs the majors what the formation is to be. The
+battalions and special units having been formed, he posts himself and
+draws saber. <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">Adjutant's call</a></span> is sounded, or the adjutant signals
+<span class="sans">assemble</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If forming in column of squads, the adjutant posts himself so as to be
+facing the column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be
+occupied by the leading guide of the regiment; if forming in column of
+masses, he posts himself so as to be facing the right guides of the
+column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be occupied
+by the right guide of the leading company. Later, he moves so as best
+to observe the formation.</p>
+
+<p>The battalions are halted, at attention, in column of squads or close
+column, as the case may be, successively from the front in their
+proper order and places. The band takes its place when the leading
+battalion has halted. Other special units take their places in turn
+when the rear battalion has halted.</p>
+
+<p>The majors and the commanders of the machine-gun company and mounted
+scouts (or detachment) each, when his command is in place, salutes the
+adjutant and commands: <span class="sans">At ease</span>; the adjutant returns the salutes.
+When all have saluted and the band is in place, the adjutant rides to
+the colonel, reports: <span class="sans">Sir, the regiment is formed</span>, and takes his
+post. The colonel draws saber.</p>
+
+<p>The formation in column of squads may be modified to the extent
+demanded by circumstances. Prior to the formation the adjutant
+indicates the point where the head of the column is to rest and the
+direction in which it is to face: he then posts himself so as best to
+observe the formation. At <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">adjutant's call</a></span> or <span class="sans">assemble</span> the leading
+battalion marches to, and halts at, the indicated point. The other
+battalions take positions from which they may conveniently follow in
+their proper places.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg&#160;91]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_335"><b>335.</b></a> For ceremonies, or when directed, the regiment is formed in line
+or line of masses.</p>
+
+<p>The adjutant posts himself so as to be 6 paces to the right of the
+right or leading company of the right battalion when the regiment is
+formed and faces in the direction in which the line is to extend.
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">Adjutant's call</a></span> is sounded; the band plays.</p>
+
+<p>The adjutant indicates to the adjutant of the right battalion the
+point of rest and the direction in which the line is to extend, and
+then takes post facing the regiment midway between the post of the
+colonel and the center of the regiment. Each of the other battalion
+adjutants precedes his battalion to the line and marks its point of
+rest.</p>
+
+<p>The battalions, arriving from the rear, each in line or close column,
+as the case may be, are halted on the line successively from right to
+left in their proper order and places. Upon halting, each major
+commands: 1. <span class="sans">Right</span>, 2. <span class="sans">DRESS</span>. The battalion adjutant assists in
+aligning the battalion and then takes his post.</p>
+
+<p>The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the
+right battalion has halted; it ceases playing when the left battalion
+has halted. The machine-gun company and the mounted scouts (or
+detachment) take their places in line after the center battalion has
+halted.</p>
+
+<p>The colonel and those who accompany him take post.</p>
+
+<p>When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and all
+others have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. <span class="sans">Present</span>,
+2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>. He then turns about and reports to the colonel: <span class="sans">Sir, the
+regiment is formed</span>; the colonel directs the adjutant: <span class="sans">Take your
+post, Sir</span>, draws saber and brings the regiment to the order. The
+adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the colonel.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Dismiss the Regiment.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_336"><b>336.</b></a> Being in any formation: <span class="sans">DISMISS YOUR BATTALIONS</span>. Each major
+marches his battalion off and dismisses it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Movements by the Regiment.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_337"><b>337.</b></a> The regiment executes the <span class="sans">halt</span>, <span class="sans">rests</span>, <span class="sans">facings</span>, <span class="sans">steps</span> and
+<span class="sans">marchings</span>, <span class="sans">manual of arms</span>, resumes <span class="sans">attention</span>, <span class="sans">kneels</span>, <span class="sans">lies
+down</span>, <span class="sans">rises</span>, <span class="sans">stacks</span> and <span class="sans">takes arms</span>, as explained in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SOLDIER">Schools
+of the Soldier</a> and <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">Squad</a>, substituting in the commands, when
+necessary, <span class="sans">battalions</span> for <span class="sans">squad</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg&#160;92]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The regiment executes <span class="sans">squads right (left)</span>, <span class="sans">squads right (left)
+about</span>, <span class="sans">route step</span> and <span class="sans">at ease</span>, <span class="sans">obliques</span> and resumes the direct
+march as explained in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY">School of the Company</a>.</p>
+
+<p>The regiment in column of files, twos, squads, or platoons, changes
+direction, and in column of squads forms column of twos or files and
+re-forms column of twos or squads, as explained in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY">School of the
+Company</a>. In column of companies, it changes direction as explained in
+the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_BATTALION">School of the Battalion</a>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_338"><b>338.</b></a> When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution, by
+battalions, companies, or platoons, of movements prescribed in the
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_COMPANY">School of the Company</a> or
+<a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_BATTALION">Battalion</a>, the colonel may cause such
+movements to be executed by prefixing, where necessary, <span class="sans">battalions
+(companies, platoons)</span>, to the commands prescribed therein.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_339"><b>339.</b></a> The column of squads is the usual column of march; to shorten the
+column, if conditions permit, a double column of squads may be used,
+the companies of each battalion marching abreast in two columns.
+Preliminary to an engagement, the regiment or its units will be placed
+in the formation best suited to its subsequent tactical employment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_340"><b>340.</b></a> To assume any formation, the colonel indicates to the majors the
+character of the formation desired, the order of the battalions, and
+the point of rest. Each battalion is conducted by its major, and is
+placed in its proper order in the formation, by the most convenient
+means and route.</p>
+
+<p>Having halted in a formation, no movements for the purpose of
+correcting minor discrepancies in alignments, intervals, or distances
+are made unless specially directed by the colonel or necessitated by
+conditions of cover.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_341"><b>341.</b></a> To correct intervals, distances, and alignments, the colonel
+directs one or more of the majors to rectify their battalions. Each
+major so directed causes his battalion to correct its alignment,
+intervals, and distances, and places it in its proper position in the
+formation.</p>
+
+
+<h3><a name="COMBAT_PRINCIPLES2"></a>COMBAT PRINCIPLES.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_342"><b>342.</b></a> The regiment is deployed by the colonel's order to the commanders
+of battalions and special units. The order should give them
+information of the situation and of the proposed plan of action. In
+attack, the order should assign to each battalion not in reserve its
+objective or line of advance. In defense, it should assign to each its
+sector. In either case it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg&#160;93]</a></span> should designate the troops for, and the
+position of, the reserve and prescribe the employment of the machine
+guns and mounted scouts.</p>
+
+<p>Both in attack and defense the order may fix the front to be covered
+in the deployment.</p>
+
+<p>Encroachment upon the proper functions of subordinates and unnecessary
+details should be studiously avoided. When the regiment deploys, the
+colonel habitually places the band at the disposal of the surgeon for
+employment in caring for the wounded. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_343"><b>343.</b></a> The regiment, when operating alone and attacking, should
+undertake an enveloping attack if it does not result in overextension.</p>
+
+<p>Assuming a regiment of 1,500 rifles, an extension of more than 1,000
+yards between its extreme flanks when making an enveloping attack
+alone is seldom justifiable; when part of a battle line, a front of
+500 yards can rarely be exceeded.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_344"><b>344.</b></a> In defense the front occupied when acting alone or posted on or
+near the flank of a battle line should seldom exceed 600 yards; when
+posted as an interior regiment, the front may be increased to 800
+yards. The front may be somewhat longer than in the attack, since
+smaller battalion supports are justifiable. When the regiment is
+operating alone, however, the regimental reserve should be as strong
+in the defense as in the attack unless the flanks are secure.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_345"><b>345.</b></a> The colonel should always hold out a reserve&#8212;generally one
+battalion; but when the regiment is operating alone, it is generally
+advisable to hold out more at first.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_346"><b>346.</b></a> Whereas the support held out in each battalion of the firing line
+is intended to thicken the diminishing firing line at the proper times
+and sometimes to lengthen it, the reserve held out in a regiment
+operating alone is used for this purpose only as a last resort. Its
+primary functions are: In attack, to protect the flanks, to improve
+fully the advantage following a victory, or to cover defeat; in
+defense, to prolong the firing line, to effect a counterattack, or to
+cover withdrawal. It is the colonel's chief means of influencing an
+action once begun. It should be conserved to await the proper moment
+for its employment; the combat will seldom come to a successful issue
+without its employment in some form.</p>
+
+<p>The reserve of a regiment operating as part of a large force becomes a
+local reserve. It replaces depleted supports and in attack strengthens
+and protects the firing line in the charge.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg&#160;94]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="THE_BRIGADE" id="THE_BRIGADE"></a>THE BRIGADE.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_347"><b>347.</b></a> The brigade does not engage in prescribed drills. It engages in
+route marches and battle or other tactical exercises. These are
+conducted pursuant to commands or orders formulated to suit the
+conditions of the proposed movement or exercise, and, in general, in
+accordance with the principles applicable to the regiment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_348"><b>348.</b></a> A brigade of about 4,000 rifles, as part of a general battle
+line, would be deployed on a front of not more than 1,200 yards in
+attack or 1,600 yards in defense.</p>
+
+<p>When acting alone the distance between extreme flanks in an enveloping
+attack should not exceed 2,000 yards at the time the attacking
+infantry opens fire.</p>
+
+<p>When acting alone, the front in defense should not exceed 1,600 yards.</p>
+
+<p>These limits apply to the original deployment of the brigade for
+combat and presuppose an enemy of equal or nearly equal training and
+morale. The limits necessitated by the subsequent progress of the
+combat can not be foreseen.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_349"><b>349.</b></a> Units larger than the brigade are generally composed of all arms.
+Combined tactics are considered in the Field Service Regulations.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg&#160;95]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="Part_II_COMBAT" id="Part_II_COMBAT"></a><span class="smcap">Part II</span>.&#8212;COMBAT.</h2>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="INTRODUCTION2" id="INTRODUCTION2"></a>INTRODUCTION.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_350"><b>350.</b></a> Part II of these regulations treats only of the basic principles
+of combat tactics as applied to infantry and to the special units,
+such as machine guns and mounted scouts, which form a part of infantry
+regiments and battalions.</p>
+
+<p>The combat tactics of the arms combined are considered in Field
+Service Regulations.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_351"><b>351.</b></a> Modern combat demands the highest order of training, discipline,
+leadership, and morale on the part of the infantry. Complicated
+maneuvers are impracticable; efficient leadership and a determination
+to win by simple and direct methods must be depended upon for success.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_352"><b>352.</b></a> The duties of infantry are many and difficult. All infantry must
+be fit to cope with all conditions that may arise. Modern war requires
+but one kind of infantry&#8212;good infantry.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_353"><b>353.</b></a> The infantry must take the offensive to gain decisive results.
+Both sides are therefore likely to attempt it, though not necessarily
+at the same time or in the same part of a long battle line.</p>
+
+<p>In the local combats which make up the general battle the better
+endurance, use of ground, fire efficiency, discipline, and training
+will win. It is the duty of the infantry to win the local successes
+which enable the commanding general to win the battle.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_354"><b>354.</b></a> The infantry must have the tenacity to hold every advantage
+gained, the individual and collective discipline and skill needed to
+master the enemy's fire, the determination to close with the enemy in
+attack, and to meet him with the bayonet in defense. Infantry must be
+trained to bear the heaviest burdens and losses, both of combat and
+march.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg&#160;96]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Good infantry can defeat an enemy greatly superior in numbers, but
+lacking in training, discipline, leadership, and morale.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_355"><b>355.</b></a> It is impossible to establish fixed forms or to give general
+instructions that will cover all cases. Officers and noncommissioned
+officers must be so trained that they can apply suitable means and
+methods to each case as it arises. Study and practice are necessary to
+acquire proper facility in this respect. Theoretical instruction can
+not replace practical instruction; the former supplies correct ideas
+and gives to practical work an interest, purpose, and definiteness not
+otherwise obtainable.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_356"><b>356.</b></a> After the mechanism of extended order drill has been learned with
+precision in the company, every exercise should be, as far as
+practicable, in the nature of a maneuver (combat exercise) against an
+<span class="sans">imaginary</span>, <span class="sans">outlined</span>, or <span class="sans">represented</span> enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Company extended order drill may be conducted without reference to a
+tactical situation, but a combat exercise, whatever may be the size of
+the unit employed, should be conducted under an assumed tactical
+situation.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_357"><b>357.</b></a> An effective method of conducting a combat exercise is to outline
+the enemy with a few men equipped with flags. The umpire or inspector
+states the situation and the commander leads his troops with due
+regard to the assumptions made.</p>
+
+<p>Changes in the situation, the results of reconnaissance, the character
+of artillery fire, etc., are made known to the commander when
+necessary by the umpire or inspector, who, in order to observe and
+influence the conduct of the exercise, remains in rear of the firing
+line. From this position he indicates, with the aid of prearranged
+signals, the character of the fire and movements of the hostile
+infantry. These signals are intended for the men outlining the enemy.
+These men repeat the signals; all officers and men engaged in the
+exercise and in sight of the outlined enemy are thus informed of the
+enemy's action and the exercise is conducted accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>Assistant umpires, about one for each company in the firing line, may
+assist in indicating hostile fire and movements and in observing the
+conduct of the exercise.</p>
+
+<p>An outlined enemy may be made to attack or defend.</p>
+
+<p>Situations should be simple and natural. During or after the exercise
+the umpire or inspector should call attention to any improper
+movements or incorrect methods of execution. He will prohibit all
+movements of troops or individuals that would<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg&#160;97]</a></span> be impossible if the
+enemy were real. The slow progress of events to be expected on the
+battle field can hardly be simulated, but the umpire or inspector will
+prevent undue haste and will attempt to enforce a reasonably slow rate
+of progress.</p>
+
+<p>The same exercise should not be repeated over the same ground and
+under the same situation. Such repetitions lead to the adoption of a
+fixed mode of attack or defense and develop mere drill masters. Fixed
+or prearranged systems are prohibited.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="LEADERSHIP" id="LEADERSHIP"></a>LEADERSHIP.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="GENERAL_CONSIDERATIONS"></a>General Considerations.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_358"><b>358.</b></a> The art of leadership consists of applying sound tactical
+principles to concrete cases on the battle field.</p>
+
+<p>Self-reliance, initiative, aggressiveness, and a conception of
+teamwork are the fundamental characteristics of successful leadership.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_359"><b>359.</b></a> A correct grasp of the situation and a definite plan of action
+form the soundest basis for a successful combat.</p>
+
+<p>A good plan once adopted and put into execution should not be
+abandoned unless it becomes clear that it can not succeed.
+Afterthoughts are dangerous, except as they aid in the execution of
+details in the original plan.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_360"><b>360.</b></a> Combats that do not promise success or some real advantage to the
+general issue should be avoided; they cause unnecessary losses, impair
+the morale of one's own troops, and raise that of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_361"><b>361.</b></a> Complicated maneuvers are not likely to succeed in war. All plans
+and the methods adopted for carrying them into effect must be simple
+and direct.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_362"><b>362.</b></a> Order and cohesion must be maintained within the units if success
+is to be expected.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_363"><b>363.</b></a> Officers must show themselves to be true leaders. They must act
+in accordance with the spirit of their orders and must require of
+their troops the strictest discipline on the field of battle.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_364"><b>364.</b></a> The best results are obtained when leaders know the capacity and
+traits of those whom they command; hence in making detachments units
+should not be broken up, and a deployment that would cause an
+intermingling of the larger units in the firing line should be
+avoided.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg&#160;98]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_365"><b>365.</b></a> Leading is difficult when troops are deployed. A high degree of
+training and discipline and the use of close order formations to the
+fullest extent possible are therefore required.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_366"><b>366.</b></a> In order to lighten the severe physical strain inseparable from
+infantry service in campaign, constant efforts must be made to spare
+the troops unnecessary hardship and fatigue; but when necessity
+arises, the limit of endurance must be exacted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_367"><b>367.</b></a> When officers or men belonging to fighting troops leave their
+proper places to carry back, or to care for, wounded during the
+progress of the action, they are guilty of skulking. This offense must
+be repressed with the utmost vigor.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_368"><b>368.</b></a> The complete equipment of the soldier is carried into action
+unless the weather or the physical condition of the men renders such
+measure a severe hardship. In any event, only the pack<a name="FNanchor_2_2" id="FNanchor_2_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_2_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a> will be laid
+aside. The determination of this question rests with the regimental
+commander. The complete equipment affords to men lying prone
+considerable protection against shrapnel.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_369"><b>369.</b></a> The post of the commander must be such as will enable him to
+observe the progress of events and to communicate his orders.
+Subordinate commanders, in addition, must be in position to transmit
+the orders of superiors.</p>
+
+<p>Before entering an action the commander should be as far to the front
+as possible in order that he personally may see the situation, order
+the deployment, and begin the action strictly in accordance with his
+own wishes.</p>
+
+<p>During the action, he must, as a rule, leave to the local leaders the
+detailed conduct of the firing line, posting himself either with his
+own reserve or in such a position that he is in constant, direct, and
+easy communication with it.</p>
+
+<p>A commander takes full and direct charge of his firing line only when
+the line has absorbed his whole command.</p>
+
+<p>When their troops are victorious, all commanders should press forward
+in order to clinch the advantage gained and to use their reserves to
+the best advantage.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_370"><b>370.</b></a> The latitude allowed to officers is in direct proportion to the
+size of their commands. Each should see to the general execution of
+his task, leaving to the proper subordinates the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg&#160;99]</a></span> supervision of
+details, and interfering only when mistakes are made that threaten to
+seriously prejudice the general plan.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="TEAMWORK"></a>Teamwork.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_371"><b>371.</b></a> The comparatively wide fronts of deployed units increase the
+difficulties of control. Subordinates must therefore be given great
+latitude in the execution of their tasks. The success of the whole
+depends largely upon how well each subordinate coordinates his work
+with the general plan.</p>
+
+<p>A great responsibility is necessarily thrown upon subordinates, but
+responsibility stimulates the right kind of an officer.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_372"><b>372.</b></a> In a given situation it is far better <span class="sans">to do any intelligent
+thing</span> consistent with the aggressive execution of the general plan,
+than to search hesitatingly for the ideal. This is the true rule of
+conduct for subordinates who are required to act upon their own
+initiative.</p>
+
+<p>A subordinate who is reasonably sure that his intended action is such
+as would be ordered by the commander, were the latter present and in
+possession of the facts, has enough encouragement to go ahead
+confidently. He must possess the loyalty to carry out the plans of his
+superior and the keenness to recognize and to seize opportunities to
+further the general plan.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_373"><b>373.</b></a> Independence must not become license. Regardless of the number of
+subordinates who are apparently supreme in their own restricted
+spheres, there is but one battle and but one supreme will to which all
+must conform.</p>
+
+<p>Every subordinate must therefore work for the general result. He does
+all in his power to insure cooperation between the subdivisions under
+his command. He transmits important information to adjoining units or
+to superiors in rear and, with the assistance of information received,
+keeps himself and his subordinates duly posted as to the situation.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_374"><b>374.</b></a> When circumstances render it impracticable to consult the
+authority issuing an order, officers should not hesitate to vary from
+such order when it is clearly based upon an incorrect view of the
+situation, is impossible of execution, or has been rendered
+impracticable on account of changes which have occurred since its
+promulgation. In the application of this rule the responsibility for
+mistakes rests upon the subordinate, but<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg&#160;100]</a></span> unwillingness to assume
+responsibility on proper occasions is indicative of weakness.</p>
+
+<p>Superiors should be careful not to censure an apparent disobedience
+where the act was done in the proper spirit and to advance the general
+plan.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_375"><b>375.</b></a> When the men of two or more units intermingle in the firing line,
+all officers and men submit at once to the senior. Officers and
+platoon guides seek to fill vacancies caused by casualties. Each
+seizes any opportunity to exercise the functions consistent with his
+grade, and all assist in the maintenance of order and control.</p>
+
+<p>Every lull in the action should be utilized for as complete
+restoration of order in the firing line as the ground or other
+conditions permit.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_376"><b>376.</b></a> Any officer or noncommissioned officer who becomes separated from
+his proper unit and can not rejoin must at once place himself and his
+command at the disposal of the nearest higher commander.</p>
+
+<p>Anyone having completed an assigned task must seek to rejoin his
+proper command. Failing in this, he should join the nearest troops
+engaged with the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_377"><b>377.</b></a> Soldiers are taught the necessity of remaining with their
+companies, but those who become detached must join the nearest company
+and serve with it until the battle is over or reorganization is
+ordered.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="ORDERS"></a>Orders.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_378"><b>378.</b></a> Commands are deployed and enter the combat by the orders of the
+commander to the subordinate commanders.</p>
+
+<p>The initial combat orders of the division are almost invariably
+written; those of the brigade are generally so. The written order is
+preferable and is used whenever time permits.</p>
+
+<p>If time permits, subsequent orders are likewise written, either as
+field orders or messages.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_379"><b>379.</b></a> The initial combat orders of regiments and smaller units are
+given verbally. For this purpose the subordinates for whom the orders
+are intended are assembled, if practicable, at a place from which the
+situation and plan can be explained.</p>
+
+<p>Subsequent orders are verbal or in the form of verbal or written
+messages. Verbal messages should not be used unless they are short and
+unmistakable.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg&#160;101]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_380"><b>380.</b></a> The initial combat order of any commander or subordinate is based
+upon his definite plan for executing the task confronting him.</p>
+
+<p>Whenever possible the formation of the plan is preceded by a personal
+reconnaissance of the terrain and a careful consideration of all
+information of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_381"><b>381.</b></a> The combat order gives such information of the enemy and of
+neighboring or supporting friendly troops as will enable subordinates
+to understand the situation.</p>
+
+<p>The general plan of action is stated in brief terms, but enough of the
+commander's intentions is divulged to guide the subsequent actions of
+the subordinates.</p>
+
+<p>Clear and concise instructions are given as to the action to be taken
+in the combat by each part of the command. In this way the commander
+assigns tasks, fronts, objectives, sectors or areas, etc., in
+accordance with his plan. If the terms employed convey definite ideas
+and leave no loopholes, the conduct of subordinates will generally be
+correspondingly satisfactory.</p>
+
+<p>Such miscellaneous matter relating to special troops, trains,
+ammunition, and future movements of the commander is added as concerns
+the combat itself.</p>
+
+<p>Combat orders should prescribe communication, reconnaissance, flank
+protection, etc., when some special disposition is desired or when an
+omission on the part of a subordinate may reasonably be feared.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_382"><b>382.</b></a> When issuing orders, a commander should indicate clearly <span class="sans">what</span>
+is to be done by each subordinate, but not <span class="sans">how</span> it is to be done. He
+should not encroach upon the functions of a subordinate by prescribing
+details of execution unless he has good reason to doubt the ability or
+judgment of the subordinate, and can not substitute another.</p>
+
+<p>Although general in its terms, an order must be definite and must be
+the expression of a fixed decision. Ambiguity or vagueness indicates
+either vacillation or the inability to formulate orders.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_383"><b>383.</b></a> Usually the orders of a commander are intended for, and are given
+to, the commanders of the next lower units, but in an emergency a
+commander should not hesitate to give orders directly to any
+subordinate. In such case he should promptly inform the intermediate
+commander concerned.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg&#160;102]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="COMMUNICATION"></a>Communication.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_384"><b>384.</b></a> Communication is maintained by means of staff officers,
+messengers, relay systems, connecting files, visual signals,
+telegraph, or telephone.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_385"><b>385.</b></a> The signal corps troops of the division establish lines of
+information from division to brigade headquarters. The further
+extension of lines of information in combat by signal troops is
+exceptional.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_386"><b>386.</b></a> Each regiment, employing its own personnel, is responsible for
+the maintenance of communication from the colonel back to the brigade
+and forward to the battalions. For this purpose the regiment uses the
+various means which may be furnished it. The staff and orderlies,
+regimental and battalion, are practiced in the use of these means and
+in messenger service. Orderlies carry signal flags.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_387"><b>387.</b></a> Connection between the firing line and the major or colonel is
+practically limited to the prescribed flag, arm, and bugle signals.
+Other means can only be supplemental. Company musicians carry company
+flags and are practiced in signaling.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_388"><b>388.</b></a> The artillery generally communicates with the firing line by
+means of its own staff officers or through an agent who accompanies
+some unit in or near the front. The infantry keeps him informed as to
+the situation and affords him any reasonable assistance. When the
+infantry is dependent upon the artillery for fire support, perfect
+coordination through this representative is of great importance.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="COMBAT_RECONNAISSANCE" id="COMBAT_RECONNAISSANCE"></a>COMBAT RECONNAISSANCE.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_389"><b>389.</b></a> Combat reconnaissance is of vital importance and must not be
+neglected. By proper preliminary reconnaissance, deployments on wrong
+lines, or in a wrong direction, and surprises may generally be
+prevented.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_390"><b>390.</b></a> Troops deployed and under fire can not change front and thus they
+suffer greatly when enfiladed. Troops in close order formation may
+suffer heavy losses in a short time if subjected to hostile fire. In
+both formations troops must be protected by proper reconnaissance and
+warning.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg&#160;103]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_391"><b>391.</b></a> The difficulty of reconnaissance increases in proportion to the
+measures adopted by the enemy to screen himself.</p>
+
+<p>The strength of the reconnoitering party is determined by the
+character of the information desired and the nature of the hostile
+screen. In exceptional cases as much as a battalion may be necessary
+in order to break through the hostile screen and enable the commander
+or officer in charge to reconnoiter in person.</p>
+
+<p>A large reconnoitering party is conducted so as to open the way for
+small patrols, to serve as a supporting force or rallying point for
+them, and to receive and transmit information. Such parties maintain
+signal communication with the main body if practicable.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_392"><b>392.</b></a> Each separate column moving forward to deploy must reconnoiter to
+its front and flank and keep in touch with adjoining columns. The
+extent of the reconnaissance to the flank depends upon the isolation
+of the columns.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_393"><b>393.</b></a> Before an attack a reconnaissance must be made to determine the
+enemy's position, the location of his flanks, the character of the
+terrain, the nature of the hostile field works, etc., in order to
+prevent premature deployment and the resulting fatigue and loss of
+time.</p>
+
+<p>It will frequently be necessary to send forward a thin skirmish line
+in order to induce the enemy to open fire and reveal his position.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_394"><b>394.</b></a> It will frequently be impossible to obtain satisfactory
+information until after the action has begun. The delay that may be
+warranted for the purpose of reconnaissance depends upon the nature of
+the attack and the necessity for promptness. For example, in a meeting
+engagement, and sometimes in a holding attack, the reconnaissance may
+have to be hasty and superficial, whereas in an attack against an
+enemy carefully prepared for defense there will generally be both time
+and necessity for thorough reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_395"><b>395.</b></a> In defense, reconnaissance must be kept up to determine the
+enemy's line of advance, to ascertain his dispositions, to prevent his
+reconnaissance, etc.</p>
+
+<p>Patrols or parties posted to prevent hostile reconnaissance should
+relieve the main body of the necessity of betraying its position by
+firing on small bodies of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_396"><b>396.</b></a> Reconnaissance continues throughout the action.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg&#160;104]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>A firing or skirmish line can take care of its front, but its flanks
+are especially vulnerable to modern firearms. The moral effect of
+flanking fire is as great as the physical effect. Hence, combat
+patrols to give warning or covering detachments to give security are
+indispensable on exposed flanks. This is equally true in attack or
+defense.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_397"><b>397.</b></a> The fact that cavalry patrols are known to be posted in a certain
+direction does not relieve infantry commanders of the responsibility
+for reconnaissance and security.</p>
+
+<p>To be surprised by an enemy at short range is an unpardonable offense.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_398"><b>398.</b></a> The commander of a battalion on a flank of a general line
+invariably provides for the necessary reconnaissance and security on
+that flank unless higher authority has specifically ordered it. In any
+event, he sends out combat patrols as needed.</p>
+
+<p>Where his battalion is on a flank of one section of the line and a
+considerable interval lies between his battalion and the next section,
+he makes similar provision.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_399"><b>399.</b></a> Battalion commanders in the first line establish patrols to
+observe and report the progress or conduct of adjoining troops when
+these can not be seen.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="FIRE_SUPERIORITY" id="FIRE_SUPERIORITY"></a>FIRE SUPERIORITY.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="PURPOSE"></a>PURPOSE AND NATURE.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_400"><b>400.</b></a> In a decisive battle success depends on gaining and maintaining
+fire superiority. Every effort must be made to gain it early and then
+to keep it.</p>
+
+<p>Attacking troops must first gain fire superiority in order to reach
+the hostile position. Over open ground attack is possible only when
+the attacking force has a decided fire superiority. With such
+superiority the attack is not only possible, but success is probable
+and without ruinous losses.</p>
+
+<p>Defending troops can prevent a charge only when they can master the
+enemy's fire and inflict heavy losses upon him.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_401"><b>401.</b></a> To obtain fire superiority it is necessary to produce a heavy
+volume of accurate fire. Every increase in the effectiveness of the
+fire means a corresponding decrease in the effectiveness of the
+enemy's fire.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg&#160;105]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The volume and accuracy of fire will depend upon several
+considerations:</p>
+
+<p>(<i>a</i>) <span class="sans">The number of rifles employed.</span> On a given front the greatest
+volume of fire is produced by a firing line having only sufficient
+intervals between men to permit the free use of their rifles. The
+maximum density of a firing line is therefore about one man per yard
+of front.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>b</i>) The <span class="sans">rate</span> of fire affects its volume; an excessive rate reduces
+its accuracy.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>c</i>) <span class="sans">The character of the target</span> influences both volume and
+accuracy. Larger dimensions, greater visibility, and shorter range
+increase the rate of fire; greater density increases the effect.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>d</i>) <span class="sans">Training and discipline</span> have an important bearing on the rate
+or volume of fire, but their greatest influence is upon accuracy.</p>
+
+<p>The firing efficiency, of troops is reduced by fatigue and adverse
+psychological influences.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>e</i>) <span class="sans">Fire direction and control</span> improve collective accuracy. The
+importance of fire direction increases rapidly with the range. Control
+exerts a powerful influence at all ranges.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="FIRE_DIRECTION"></a>FIRE DIRECTION AND CONTROL.</span></h4>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Opening Fire.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_402"><b>402.</b></a> Beyond effective ranges important results can be expected only
+when the target is large and distinct and much ammunition is used.</p>
+
+<p>Long-range fire is permissible in pursuit on account of the moral
+effect of any fire under the circumstances. At other times such fire
+is of doubtful value.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_403"><b>403.</b></a> In attack, the desire to open fire when losses are first felt
+must be repressed. Considerations of time, target, ammunition, and
+morale make it imperative that the attack withhold its fire and press
+forward to a first firing position close to the enemy. The attacker's
+target will be smaller and fainter than the one he presents to the
+enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_404"><b>404.</b></a> In defense, more ammunition is available, ranges are more easily
+determined, and the enemy usually presents a larger target. The
+defender may therefore open fire and expect results<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg&#160;106]</a></span> at longer ranges
+than the attacker, and particularly if the defenders intend a delaying
+action only.</p>
+
+<p>If the enemy has a powerful artillery, it will often be best for the
+defending infantry to withhold its fire until the enemy offers a
+specially favorable target. Vigorous and well-directed bursts of fire
+are then employed. The troops should therefore be given as much
+artificial protection as time and means permit, and at an agreed
+signal expose themselves as much as necessary and open fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_405"><b>405.</b></a> In unexpected, close encounters a great advantage accrues to the
+side which first opens rapid and accurate fire with battle sight.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Use of Ground.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_406"><b>406.</b></a> The position of the firers must afford a suitable field of fire.</p>
+
+<p>The ground should permit constant observation of the enemy, and yet
+enable the men to secure some cover when not actually firing.</p>
+
+<p>Troops whose target is for the moment hidden by unfavorable ground,
+either move forward to better ground or seek to execute cross fire on
+another target.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_407"><b>407.</b></a> The likelihood of a target being hit depends to a great extent
+upon its visibility. By skillful use of ground, a firing line may
+reduce its visibility without loss of fire power. Sky lines are
+particularly to be avoided.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Choice of Target.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_408"><b>408.</b></a> The target chosen should be the hostile troops most dangerous to
+the firers. These will usually be the nearest hostile infantry. When
+no target is specially dangerous, that one should be chosen which
+promises the most hits.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_409"><b>409.</b></a> Frequent changes of target impair the fire effect. Random changes
+to small, unimportant targets impair fire discipline and accomplish
+nothing. Attention should be confined to the main target until
+substantial reason for change is apparent.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_410"><b>410.</b></a> An opportunity to deliver flanking fire, especially against
+artillery protected in front by shields, is an example warranting
+change of target and should never be overlooked. Such fire demoralizes
+the troops subjected to it, even if the losses in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg&#160;107]</a></span>flicted are small.
+In this manner a relatively small number of rifles can produce
+important results.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Range.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_411"><b>411.</b></a> Beyond close range, the correct setting of the rear sight is of
+primary importance, provided the troops are trained and well in hand.
+The necessity for correct sight setting increases rapidly with the
+range. Its importance decreases as the quality of the troops decrease,
+for the error in sight setting, except possibly at very long ranges,
+becomes unimportant when compared with the error in holding and
+aiming.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_412"><b>412.</b></a> In attack, distances must usually be estimated and corrections
+made as errors are observed. Mechanical range finders and ranging
+volleys are practicable at times.</p>
+
+<p>In defense, it is generally practicable to measure more accurately the
+distances to visible objects and to keep a record of them for future
+use.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Distribution of Fire and Target.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_413"><b>413.</b></a> The purpose of fire superiority is to get hits whenever possible,
+but at all events to keep down the enemy's fire and render it
+harmless. To accomplish this the target must be covered with fire
+throughout its whole extent. Troops who are not fired upon will fire
+with nearly peace-time accuracy.</p>
+
+<p>The target is roughly divided and a part is assigned to each unit. No
+part of the target is neglected. In attack, by a system of overlapping
+in assigning targets to platoons, the entire hostile line can be kept
+under fire even during a rush.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Observation.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_414"><b>414.</b></a> The correctness of the sight setting and the distribution of fire
+over the target can be verified only by careful observation of the
+target, the adjacent ground, and the effect upon the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_415"><b>415.</b></a> Observation only can determine whether the fire fight is being
+properly conducted. If the enemy's fire is losing in accuracy and
+effect, the observer realizes that his side is gaining superiority. If
+the enemy's fire remains or becomes effective and persistent, he
+realizes that corrective measures are necessary to increase either
+volume or accuracy, or both.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg&#160;108]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Discipline.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_416"><b>416.</b></a> Discipline makes good direction and control possible and is the
+distinguishing mark of trained troops.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_417"><b>417.</b></a> The discipline necessary in the firing line will be absent unless
+officers and noncommissioned officers can make their will known to the
+men. In the company, therefore, communication must be by simple
+signals which, in the roar of musketry, will attract the attention and
+convey the correct meaning.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Expenditure of Ammunition.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_418"><b>418.</b></a> In attack the supply is more limited than in defense. Better
+judgment must be exercised in expenditure. Ordinarily, troops in the
+firing line of an attack can not expect to have that day more
+ammunition than they carry into the combat, except such additions as
+come from the distribution of ammunition of dead and wounded and the
+surplus brought by reinforcements.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_419"><b>419.</b></a> When a certain fire effect is required, the necessary ammunition
+must be expended without hesitation. Several hours of firing may be
+necessary to gain fire superiority. True economy can be practiced only
+by closing on the enemy before first opening fire and thereafter
+suspending fire when there is nothing to shoot at.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Supporting Artillery.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_420"><b>420.</b></a> Artillery fire is the principal aid to the infantry in gaining
+and keeping fire superiority, not only by its hits, but by the moral
+effect it produces on the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_421"><b>421.</b></a> In attack, artillery assists the forward movement of the
+infantry. It keeps down the fire of the hostile artillery and seeks to
+neutralize the hostile infantry by inflicting losses upon it,
+destroying its morale, driving it to cover, and preventing it from
+using its weapons effectively.</p>
+
+<p>In defense, it ignores the hostile artillery when the enemy's attack
+reaches a decisive stage and assists in checking the attack, joining
+its fire power to that of the defending infantry.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_422"><b>422.</b></a> Troops should be accustomed to being fired over by friendly
+artillery and impressed with the fact that the artillery should
+continue firing upon the enemy until the last possible<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg&#160;109]</a></span> moment. The
+few casualties resulting from shrapnel bursting short are trifling
+compared with those that would result from the increased effectiveness
+of the enemy's infantry fire were the friendly artillery to cease
+firing.</p>
+
+<p>Casualties inflicted by supporting artillery are not probable until
+the opposing infantry lines are less than 200 yards apart.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_423"><b>423.</b></a> When the distance between the hostile infantry lines becomes so
+short as to render further use of friendly artillery inadvisable, the
+commander of the infantry firing line, using a preconcerted signal,<a name="FNanchor_3_3" id="FNanchor_3_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_3_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a>
+informs the artillery commander. The latter usually increases the
+range in order to impede the strengthening of the enemy's foremost
+line.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Fire of Position.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_424"><b>424.</b></a> Infantry is said to execute fire of position when it is posted so
+as to assist an attack by firing over the heads, or off the flank, of
+the attacking troops and is not itself to engage in the advance; or
+when, in defense, it is similarly posted to augment the fire of the
+main firing line.</p>
+
+<p>Machine guns serve a like purpose.</p>
+
+<p>In a decisive action, fire of position should be employed whenever the
+terrain permits and reserve infantry is available.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="DEPLOYMENT" id="DEPLOYMENT"></a>DEPLOYMENT.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_425"><b>425.</b></a> Troops are massed preparatory to deployment when the nature of
+their deployment can not be foreseen or it is desirable to shorten the
+column or to clear the road. Otherwise, in the deployment of large
+commands, whether in march column, in bivouac, or massed, and whether
+forming for attack or for defense, they are ordinarily first formed
+into a line of columns to facilitate the extension of the front prior
+to deploying.</p>
+
+<p>The rough line or lines of columns thus formed enable troops to take
+advantage of the terrain in advancing and shorten the time occupied in
+forming the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_426"><b>426.</b></a> In deploying the division each brigade is assigned a definite
+task or objective. On receipt of his orders, the brigade<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg&#160;110]</a></span> commander
+conducts his brigade in column or in line of regiments until it is
+advisable that it be broken into smaller columns. He then issues his
+order, assigning to each regiment its task, if practicable. In a
+similar manner the regimental commanders lead their regiments forward
+in column, or in line of columns, until the time arrives for issuing
+the regimental order. It is seldom advisable to break up the battalion
+before issuing orders for its deployment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_427"><b>427.</b></a> Each subordinate commander, after receiving his order for the
+action, should precede his command as far as possible, in order to
+reconnoiter the ground personally, and should prepare to issue his
+orders promptly.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_428"><b>428.</b></a> Each commander of a column directs the necessary reconnaissance
+to front and flank; by this means and by a judicious choice of ground
+he guards against surprise.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_429"><b>429.</b></a> The premature formation of the firing line causes unnecessary
+fatigue and loss of time, and may result in a faulty direction being
+taken. Troops once deployed make even minor changes of direction with
+difficulty, and this difficulty increases with the length of the
+firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_430"><b>430.</b></a> In the larger units, when the original deployment is found to be
+in the wrong direction, it will usually be necessary to deploy the
+reserve on the correct front and withdraw and assemble the first line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_431"><b>431.</b></a> To gain decisive results, it will generally be necessary to use
+all the troops at some stage of the combat. But in the beginning,
+while the situation is uncertain, care should be taken not to engage
+too large a proportion of the command. On the other hand, there is no
+greater error than to employ too few and to sacrifice them by
+driblets.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_432"><b>432.</b></a> When it is intended to fight to a decision, fire superiority is
+essential. To gain this, two things are necessary: A heavy fire and a
+fire well directed and controlled. Both of these are best obtained
+when the firing line is as dense as practicable, while leaving the men
+room for the free use of their rifles.</p>
+
+<p>If the men are too widely separated, direction and control are very
+difficult, often impossible, and the intensity of fire is slight in
+proportion to the front occupied.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_433"><b>433.</b></a> In an attack or stubborn defense the firing line should have a
+density of one man per yard of front occupied.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg&#160;111]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Where the tactical situation demands the holding of a line too long to
+be occupied throughout at this density, it is generally better to
+deploy companies or platoons at one man per yard, leaving gaps in the
+line between them, than to distribute the men uniformly at increased
+intervals.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_434"><b>434.</b></a> A relatively thin firing line may be employed when merely
+covering the movements of other forces; when on the defensive against
+poor troops; when the final action to be taken has not yet been
+determined; and, in general, when fire superiority is not necessary.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_435"><b>435.</b></a> The length of the firing line that the whole force may employ
+depends upon the density of the line and the <span class="sans">strength in rear</span>
+required by the situation.</p>
+
+<p>Supports and reserves constitute the strength in rear.</p>
+
+<p>In a decisive attack they should be at least strong enough to replace
+a heavy loss in the original firing line and to increase the charging
+line to a density of at least one and one-half men per yard and still
+have troops in rear for protection and for the other purposes
+mentioned above.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_436"><b>436.</b></a> In the original deployment the strength of the reserve held out
+by each commander comprises from one-sixth to two-thirds of his unit,
+depending upon the nature of the service expected of the reserve.</p>
+
+<p>A small force in a covering or delaying action requires very little
+strength in rear, while a large force fighting a decisive battle
+requires much. Therefore, depending upon circumstances, the original
+deployment, including the strength in rear, may vary from 1 to 10 men
+per yard. Against an enemy poorly disciplined and trained, or lacking
+in morale, a thinner deployment is permissible.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_437"><b>437.</b></a> The density of the whole deployment increases with the size of
+the command, because the larger the command the greater the necessity
+for reserves. Thus, a battalion acting alone may attack with two men
+per yard of front, but a regiment, with three battalions, may only
+double the front of the one battalion.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_438"><b>438.</b></a> By the assignment of divisions or larger units to parts of a line
+of battle several miles long, a series of semi-independent battle, or
+local combat, districts are created.</p>
+
+<p>The general deployment for a long line of battle comprising several
+battle districts is not directly considered in these regula<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg&#160;112]</a></span>tions. The
+deployments treated of herein are those of the infantry within such
+districts.</p>
+
+<p>The density of deployment in these districts may vary greatly,
+depending upon the activity expected in each. Within these battle
+districts, as well as in smaller forces acting alone, parts of the
+line temporarily of less importance may be held weakly, in order to
+economize troops and to have more at the decisive point.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_439"><b>439.</b></a> The front that a unit may occupy when deployed depends also upon
+whether its flanks are secured. If both flanks are secured by other
+troops, the unit may increase its front materially by reducing its
+reserve or supports. If only one flank is so secured, the front may
+still be somewhat increased, but the exposed flank must be guarded by
+posting the supports or reserve toward that flank.</p>
+
+<p>Natural obstacles that secure the flanks have practically the same
+effect upon deployment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_440"><b>440.</b></a> Except when assigned as supports or reserve, regiments in the
+brigade, battalions in the regiment, and companies in the battalion
+are, when practicable, deployed side by side.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_441"><b>441.</b></a> In the deployment, battalions establish the firing line, each
+furnishing its own support.</p>
+
+<p>In each unit larger than the battalion a reserve is held out, its
+strength depending upon circumstances. In general, the reserve is
+employed by the commander to meet or improve conditions brought about
+by the action of the firing line. It must not be too weak or too split
+up. It must be posted where the commander believes it will be needed
+for decisive action, or where he desires to bring about such action.
+When necessary, parts of it reenforce or prolong the firing line.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="ATTACK" id="ATTACK"></a>ATTACK.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_442"><b>442.</b></a> An attack is bound to succeed if fire superiority is gained and
+properly used.</p>
+
+<p>To gain this superiority generally requires that the attack employ
+more rifles than the defense; this in turn means a longer line, as
+both sides will probably hold a strong firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_443"><b>443.</b></a> With large forces, a direct frontal attack gives the attacker
+little opportunity to bring more rifles to bear. However, if the enemy
+is unduly extended, a frontal attack may give very decisive results.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg&#160;113]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_444"><b>444.</b></a> Owing to the difficulty of control and the danger of the parts
+being defeated in detail, wide turning movements are seldom allowable
+except in large forces.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_445"><b>445.</b></a> If the attack can be so directed that, while the front is
+covered, another fraction of the command strikes a flank more or less
+obliquely (an enveloping attack) the advantages gained are a longer
+line and more rifles in action; also a converging fire opposed to the
+enemy's diverging fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_446"><b>446.</b></a> An envelopment of both flanks should never be attempted without a
+very decided superiority in numbers.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_447"><b>447.</b></a> The enveloping attack will nearly always result locally in a
+frontal attack, for it will be met by the enemy's reserve. The
+advantage of envelopment lies in the longer concentric line, with its
+preponderance of rifles and its converging fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_448"><b>448.</b></a> Cooperation between the frontal and enveloping attacks is
+essential to success. Both should be pushed vigorously and
+simultaneously, and ordinarily both should move simultaneously to the
+charge; but at the final stage of the attack conditions may sometimes
+warrant one in charging while the other supports it with fire.</p>
+
+<p>The envelopment of a flank is brought about with difficulty when made
+by troops already deployed in another direction or by their reserves.
+The two attacks should be deployed at a suitable distance apart, with
+the lines of attack converging in rear of the hostile position. The
+troops that are to make the enveloping attack should deploy in the
+proper direction at the start and should be given orders which enable
+them to gain their point of deployment in the most direct and
+practical manner.</p>
+
+<p>The enveloping attack is generally made the stronger, especially in
+small forces.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="DEPLOYMENT_ATTACK"></a>DEPLOYMENT FOR ATTACK.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_449"><b>449.</b></a> Where open terrain exposes troops to hostile artillery fire it
+may be necessary to make the deployment 2 miles or more from the
+hostile position.</p>
+
+<p>The foreground should be temporarily occupied by covering troops. If
+the enemy occupies the foreground with detachments, the covering
+troops must drive them back.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_450"><b>450.</b></a> To enable large forces to gain ground toward the enemy, it may
+sometimes be cheaper and quicker in the end to move well<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg&#160;114]</a></span> forward and
+to deploy at night. In such case the area in which the deployment is
+to be made should, if practicable, be occupied by covering troops
+before dark.</p>
+
+<p>The deployment will be made with great difficulty unless the ground
+has been studied by daylight. The deployment gains little unless it
+establishes the firing line well within effective range of the enemy's
+main position. (See <a href="#NIGHT_OPERATIONS">Night Operations</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_451"><b>451.</b></a> Each unit assigned a task deploys when on its direction line, or
+opposite its objective, and when it has no longer sufficient cover for
+advancing in close order. In the firing line, intervals of 25 to 50
+yards should be maintained as long as possible between battalions. In
+the larger units it may be necessary to indicate on the map the
+direction or objective, but to battalion commanders it should be
+pointed out on the ground.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_452"><b>452.</b></a> The reserve is kept near enough to the firing line to be on hand
+at the decisive stage. It is posted with reference to the attack, or
+to that part of the attacking line, from which the greater results are
+expected; it is also charged with flank protection, but should be kept
+intact.</p>
+
+<p>Supports are considered in paragraphs <a href="#para_225">225</a> to 228, inclusive, and
+<a href="#para_298">298</a>
+to 302, inclusive.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="ADVANCING_ATTACK"></a>ADVANCING THE ATTACK.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_453"><b>453.</b></a> The firing line must ordinarily advance a long distance before it
+is justified in opening fire. It can not combat the enemy's artillery,
+and it is at a disadvantage if it combats the defender's long-range
+rifle fire. Hence it ignores both and, by taking full advantage of
+cover and of the discipline of the troops, advances to a first firing
+position at the shortest range possible.</p>
+
+<p>Formations for crossing this zone with the minimum loss are considered
+in paragraphs <a href="#para_212">212</a> to 220, inclusive. These and other methods of
+crossing such zones should be studied and practiced.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_454"><b>454.</b></a> The best protection against loss while advancing is to escape the
+enemy's view.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_455"><b>455.</b></a> Each battalion finds its own firing position, conforming to the
+general advance as long as practicable and taking advantage of the
+more advanced position of an adjacent battalion in order to gain
+ground.</p>
+
+<p>The position from which the attack opens fire is further considered in
+paragraphs <a href="#para_306">306</a> to 308, inclusive.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg&#160;115]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_456"><b>456.</b></a> It will frequently become necessary for infantry moving to the
+attack to pass through deployed artillery. This should be done so as
+to interfere as little as possible with the latter's fire, and never
+so as to cause that fire to cease entirely. As far as practicable,
+advantage should be taken of intervals in the line, if any. An
+understanding between artillery and infantry commanders should be had,
+so as to effect the movement to the best advantage.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_457"><b>457.</b></a> In advancing the attack, advanced elements of the firing line or
+detachments in front of it should not open fire except in defense or
+to clear the foreground of the enemy. Fire on the hostile main
+position should not be opened until all or nearly all of the firing
+line can join in the fire.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="FIRE_ATTACK"></a>THE FIRE ATTACK.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_458"><b>458.</b></a> At the first firing position the attack seeks to gain fire
+superiority. This may necessitate a steady, accurate fire for a long
+time. The object is to subdue the enemy's fire and keep it subdued so
+that the attacking troops may advance from this point to a favorable
+place near the enemy from which the charge may be made. Hence, in the
+advance by rushes, sufficient rifles must be kept constantly in action
+to keep down the enemy's fire; this determines the size of the
+fraction rushing.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_459"><b>459.</b></a> To advance without fire superiority against a determined defense
+would result in such losses as to bring the attack to a standstill or
+to make the apparent success barren of results.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_460"><b>460.</b></a> Diminution of the enemy's fire and a pronounced loss in
+effectiveness are the surest signs that fire superiority has been
+gained and that a part of the firing line can advance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_461"><b>461.</b></a> The men must be impressed with the fact that, having made a
+considerable advance under fire and having been checked, it is
+suicidal to turn back in daylight.</p>
+
+<p>If they can advance no farther, they must intrench and hold on until
+the fall of darkness or a favorable turn in the situation develops.</p>
+
+<p>Intrenching is resorted to only when necessary. Troops who have
+intrenched themselves under fire are moved forward again with
+difficulty.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_462"><b>462.</b></a> Supports and reserves occupying intrenchments vacated by the
+firing line should improve them, but they must not be held back or
+diverted from their true missions on this account.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg&#160;116]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_463"><b>463.</b></a> Paragraphs <a href="#para_309">309</a> to 317, inclusive, deal more in detail with the
+conduct of the fire attack.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="CHARGE"></a>THE CHARGE.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_464"><b>464.</b></a> Fire superiority beats down the enemy's fire, destroys his
+resistance and morale, and enables the attacking troops to close on
+him, but an actual or threatened occupation of his position is needed
+to drive him out and defeat him.</p>
+
+<p>The psychological moment for the charge can not be determined far in
+advance. The tactical instinct of the responsible officer must decide.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_465"><b>465.</b></a> The defenders, if subjugated by the fire attack, will frequently
+leave before the charge begins. On the other hand, it may be necessary
+to carry the fire attack close to the position and follow it up with a
+short dash and a bayonet combat. Hence the distance over which the
+charge may be made will vary between wide limits. It may be from 25 to
+400 yards.</p>
+
+<p>The charge should be made at the earliest moment that promises
+success; otherwise the full advantage of victory will be lost.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_466"><b>466.</b></a> The commander of the attacking line should indicate his approval,
+or give the order, before the charge is made. Subordinate commanders,
+usually battalion commanders, whose troops are ready to charge signal
+that fact to the commander. It may be necessary for them to wait until
+other battalions or other parts of the line are ready or until the
+necessary reserves arrive.</p>
+
+<p>At the signal for the charge the firing line and nearby supports and
+reserves rush forward. See paragraphs <a href="#para_318">318</a> and
+<a href="#para_319">319</a>.</p>
+
+<p>The charge is made simultaneously, if possible, by all the units
+participating therein, but, once committed to the assault, battalions
+should be pushed with the utmost vigor and no restraint placed on the
+ardor of charging troops by an attempt to maintain alignment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_467"><b>467.</b></a> Before ordering the charge the commander should see that enough
+troops are on hand to make it a success. Local reserves joining the
+firing line in time to participate in the charge give it a strong
+impetus. Too dense a mass should be avoided.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg&#160;117]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_468"><b>468.</b></a> The line should be strengthened by prolongation, if practicable,
+and remaining troops kept in formation for future use; but rather than
+that the attack should fail, the last formed body will be sent in,
+unless it is very apparent that it can do no good.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_469"><b>469.</b></a> To arrive in the hostile position with a very compact firing line
+and a few formed supports is sufficient for a victory, but an
+additional force kept well in hand for pursuit is of inestimable
+value.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_470"><b>470.</b></a> A premature charge by a part of the line should be avoided, but
+if begun, the other parts of the line should join at once if there is
+any prospect of success. Under exceptional conditions a part of the
+line may be compelled to charge without authority from the rear. The
+intention to do so should be signaled to the rear.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_471"><b>471.</b></a> Confidence in their ability to use the bayonet gives the
+assaulting troops the promise of success.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_472"><b>472.</b></a> If the enemy has left the position when the charging troops reach
+it, the latter should open a rapid fire upon the retreating enemy, if
+he is in sight. It is not advisable for the mixed and disordered units
+to follow him, except to advance to a favorable firing position or to
+cover the reorganization of others.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_473"><b>473.</b></a> The nearest formed bodies accompanying or following the charge
+are sent instantly in pursuit. Under cover of these troops order is
+restored in the charging line. If the captured position is part of a
+general line or is an advanced post, it should be intrenched and
+occupied at once.</p>
+
+<p>The exhaustion of officers and men must not cause the neglect of
+measures to meet a counterattack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_474"><b>474.</b></a> If the attack receives a temporary setback and it is intended to
+strengthen and continue it, officers will make every effort to stop
+the rearward movement and will reestablish the firing line in a
+covered position as close as possible to the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_475"><b>475.</b></a> If the attack must be abandoned, the rearward movement should
+continue with promptness until the troops reach a feature of the
+terrain that facilitates the task of checking and reorganizing them.
+The point selected should be so far to the rear as to prevent
+interference by the enemy before the troops are ready to resist. The
+withdrawal of the attacking troops<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg&#160;118]</a></span> should be covered by the artillery
+and by reserves, if any are available.</p>
+
+<p>See <a href="#NIGHT_OPERATIONS">Night Operations</a>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="PURSUIT"></a>PURSUIT.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_476"><b>476.</b></a> To reap the full fruits of victory a vigorous pursuit must be
+made. The natural inclination to be satisfied with a successful charge
+must be overcome. The enemy must be allowed no more time to reorganize
+than is positively unavoidable.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_477"><b>477.</b></a> The part of the reserve that is still formed or is best under
+control is sent forward in pursuit and vigorously attacks the enemy's
+main body or covering detachments wherever found.</p>
+
+<p>The artillery delivers a heavy fire upon the retreating enemy; the
+disordered attacking troops secure the position, promptly re-form, and
+become a new reserve.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_478"><b>478.</b></a> If the captured position is a section of the general line, the
+breach should be heavily occupied, made wider, and strongly secured by
+drawing on all reserves in the vicinity.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_479"><b>479.</b></a> After the pursuit from the immediate battle field, pursuit by
+parallel roads is especially effective where large commands are
+concerned.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_480"><b>480.</b></a> Artillery and cavalry are very effective in pursuit.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="ATTACK_FORTIFICATIONS"></a>ATTACK OF FORTIFICATIONS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_481"><b>481.</b></a> Few modifications enter into the problem of attacking
+fortifications. Such as are to be considered relate chiefly to the
+greater time and labor of advancing, the more frequent use of darkness
+and the use of hand grenades to augment the fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_482"><b>482.</b></a> If the enemy is strongly fortified and time permits, it may be
+advisable to wait and approach the charging point under cover of
+darkness. The necessary reconnaissance and arrangements should be made
+before dark. If the charge is not to be made at once, the troops
+intrench the advanced position, using sand bags if necessary. Before
+daylight the foreground should be cleared of obstacles.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_483"><b>483.</b></a> If the distance is short and other conditions are favorable, the
+charge may be made without fire preparation. If made, it should be
+launched with spirit and suddenness at the break of day. (See
+<a href="#NIGHT_OPERATIONS">Night
+Operations</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_484"><b>484.</b></a> In siege operations troops are usually advanced to the charging
+point by sapping. This method, however, presupposes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg&#160;119]</a></span> that an early
+victory is not necessary or that it is clearly inadvisable to attempt
+more direct methods.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="HOLDING_ATTACK"></a>HOLDING ATTACK.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_485"><b>485.</b></a> The holding attack must be vigorous enough to hold the enemy in
+position and must present a front strong enough to conceal the
+secondary nature of the attack.</p>
+
+<p>The holding attack need have comparatively little strength in rear,
+but conceals the fact by a firing line not distinguishable from that
+of a decisive attack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_486"><b>486.</b></a> Supports and reserves are kept at short distances. Their strength
+is less if the object is merely to hold the enemy fast than if the
+object is, in addition, to compel him to use up reserves.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_487"><b>487.</b></a> Holding attacks which may later develop into decisive attacks
+should be correspondingly strong in rear.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_488"><b>488.</b></a> All feint attacks should employ dense firing lines. Their
+weakness is in rear and is concealed.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="DEFENSE" id="DEFENSE"></a>DEFENSE.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="POSITIONS"></a>POSITIONS AND INTRENCHMENTS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_489"><b>489.</b></a> The first requirement of a good position is a clear field of fire
+and view to the front and exposed flanks to a distance of 600 to 800
+yards or more. The length of front should be suitable to the size of
+the command and the flanks should be secure. The position should have
+lateral communication and cover for supports and reserves. It should
+be one which the enemy can not avoid, but must attack or give up his
+mission.</p>
+
+<p>A position having all these advantages will rarely, if ever, be found.
+The one should be taken which conforms closest to the description.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_490"><b>490.</b></a> The natural cover of the position should be fully utilized. In
+addition, it should be strengthened by fieldworks and obstacles.</p>
+
+<p>The best protection is afforded by deep, narrow, inconspicuous
+trenches. If little time is available, as much as practicable must be
+done. That the fieldworks may not be needed should not cause their
+construction to be omitted, and the fact that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg&#160;120]</a></span> they have been
+constructed should not influence the action of a commander, if
+conditions are found to be other than expected.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_491"><b>491.</b></a> When time and troops are available the preparations include the
+necessary communicating and cover trenches, head cover, bombproofs,
+etc. The fire trenches should be well supplied with ammunition.</p>
+
+<p>The supports are placed close at hand in cover trenches when natural
+cover is not available.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_492"><b>492.</b></a> Dummy trenches frequently cause the hostile artillery to waste
+time and ammunition and to divert its fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_493"><b>493.</b></a> The location, extent, profile, garrison, etc., of fieldworks are
+matters to be decided by the infantry commanders. Officers must be
+able to choose ground and properly intrench it. (See <a href="#INTRENCHMENTS">Intrenchments</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_494"><b>494.</b></a> In combat exercises, when it is impracticable to construct the
+trenches appropriate to the exercise, their trace may be outlined by
+bayonets, sticks, or other markers, and the responsible officers
+required to indicate the profile selected, method and time of
+construction, garrisons, etc.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="DEPLOYMENT_FOR_DEFENSE"></a>DEPLOYMENT FOR DEFENSE.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_495"><b>495.</b></a> The density of the whole deployment depends upon the expected
+severity of the action, the character of the enemy, the condition of
+the flanks, the field of fire, the terrain, and the available
+artificial or natural protection for the troops.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_496"><b>496.</b></a> If exposed, the firing line should be as dense in defense as in
+attack. If the firing line is well intrenched and has a good field of
+fire, it may be made thinner.</p>
+
+<p>Weaker supports are permissible. For the same number of troops the
+front occupied on the defensive may therefore be longer than on the
+offensive, the battalions placing more companies in the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_497"><b>497.</b></a> If it is intended only to delay the enemy, a fairly strong
+deployment is sufficient, but if decisive results are desired, a
+change to the offensive must be contemplated and the corresponding
+strength in rear provided. This strength is in the reserve, which
+should be as large as the demands of the firing line and supports
+permit. Even in a passive defense the reserve should be as strong as
+in the attack, unless the flanks are protected by other means.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg&#160;121]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_498"><b>498.</b></a> Supports are posted as close to the firing line as practicable
+and reinforce the latter according to the principles explained in the
+attack. When natural cover is not sufficient for the purpose,
+communicating and cover trenches are constructed. If time does not
+permit their construction, it is better to begin the action with a
+very dense firing line and no immediate supports than to have supports
+greatly exposed in rear.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_499"><b>499.</b></a> The reserve should be posted so as to be entirely free to act as
+a whole, according to the developments. The distance from firing line
+to reserve is generally greater than in the attack. By reason of such
+a location the reserve is best able to meet a hostile enveloping
+attack; it has a better position from which to make a counter attack;
+it is in a better position to cover a withdrawal and permit an orderly
+retreat.</p>
+
+<p>The distance from firing line to reserve increases with the size of
+the reserve.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_500"><b>500.</b></a> When the situation is no longer in doubt, the reserve should be
+held in rear of the flank which is most in danger or offers the best
+opportunity for counterattack. Usually the same flank best suits both
+purposes.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_501"><b>501.</b></a> In exceptional cases, on broad fronts, it may be necessary to
+detach a part of the reserve to protect the opposite flank. This
+detachment should be the smallest consistent with its purely
+protective mission.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_502"><b>502.</b></a> The commander assigns to subordinates the front to be occupied by
+them. These, in turn, subdivide the front among their next lower units
+in the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_503"><b>503.</b></a> An extended position is so divided into sections that each has,
+if practicable, a field of fire naturally made distinct by the
+terrain.</p>
+
+<p>Unfavorable and unimportant ground will ordinarily cause gaps to exist
+in the line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_504"><b>504.</b></a> The size of the unit occupying each section depends upon the
+latter's natural strength, front, and importance. If practicable,
+battalions should be kept intact and assigned as units to sections or
+parts of sections.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_505"><b>505.</b></a> Where important dead space lies in front of one section, an
+adjoining section should be instructed to cover it with fire when
+necessary, or machine guns should be concealed for the like purpose.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_506"><b>506.</b></a> Advanced posts, or any other form of unnecessary dispersion,
+should be avoided.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg&#160;122]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_507"><b>507.</b></a> Unless the difficulty of moving the troops into the position be
+great, most of the troops of the firing line are held in rear of it
+until the infantry attack begins. The position itself is occupied by a
+small garrison only, with the necessary outguards or patrols in front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_508"><b>508.</b></a> Fire alone can not be depended upon to stop the attack. The
+troops must be determined to resort to the bayonet, if necessary.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_509"><b>509.</b></a> If a night attack or close approach by the enemy is expected,
+troops in a prepared position should strengthen the outguards and
+firing line and construct as numerous and effective obstacles as
+possible. Supports and local reserves should move close to the firing
+line and should, with the firing line, keep bayonets fixed. If
+practicable, the front should be illuminated, preferably from the
+flanks of the section.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_510"><b>510.</b></a> Only short range fire is of any value in resisting night attacks.
+The bayonet is the chief reliance. (See <a href="#NIGHT_OPERATIONS">Night Operations</a>.)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="COUNTERATTACK"></a>COUNTERATTACK.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_511"><b>511.</b></a> The passive defense should be assumed only when circumstances
+force it. Only the offensive wins.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_512"><b>512.</b></a> An active defense seeks a favorable decision. A favorable
+decision can not be expected without counterattack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_513"><b>513.</b></a> A passive defense in a position whose flanks are not protected by
+natural obstacles is generally out of the question.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_514"><b>514.</b></a> Where the defense is assumed with a view to making a
+counterattack, the troops for the counterattack should be held in
+reserve until the time arrives for such attack. The defensive line
+should be held by as few troops as possible in order that the force
+for the offensive may be as large as possible.</p>
+
+<p>The force for the counterattack should be held echeloned in rear of
+the flank which offers it the greatest advantage for the proposed
+attack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_515"><b>515.</b></a> The counterattack should be made vigorously and at the proper
+time. It will usually be made:</p>
+
+<p>By launching the reserve against the enemy's flank when his attack is
+in full progress. This is the most effective form of counterattack.</p>
+
+<p>Straight to the front by the firing line and supports after repulsing
+the enemy's attack and demoralizing him with pursuing fire.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg&#160;123]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Or, by the troops in rear of the firing line when the enemy has
+reached the defensive position and is in disorder.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_516"><b>516.</b></a> Minor counterattacks are sometimes necessary in order to drive
+the enemy from important positions gained by him.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="DELAYING"></a>DELAYING ACTION.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_517"><b>517.</b></a> When a position is taken merely to delay the enemy and to
+withdraw before becoming closely engaged, the important considerations
+are:</p>
+
+<p>The enemy should be forced to deploy early. The field of fire should
+therefore be good at distances from 500 to 1,200 yards or more; a good
+field of fire at close range is not necessary.</p>
+
+<p>The ground in rear of the position should favor the withdrawal of the
+firing line by screening the troops from the enemy's view and fire as
+soon as the position is vacated.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_518"><b>518.</b></a> A thin firing line using much ammunition will generally answer
+the purpose. Supports are needed chiefly to protect the flanks.</p>
+
+<p>The reserve should be posted well in rear to assist in the withdrawal
+of the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_519"><b>519.</b></a> Artillery is especially valuable to a delaying force.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="MEETING_ENGAGEMENTS" id="MEETING_ENGAGEMENTS"></a>MEETING ENGAGEMENTS.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_520"><b>520.</b></a> Meeting engagements are characterized by the necessity for hasty
+reconnaissance, or the almost total absence of reconnaissance; by the
+necessity for rapid deployment, frequently under fire; and usually by
+the absence of trenches or other artificial cover. These conditions
+give further advantages to the offensive.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_521"><b>521.</b></a> The whole situation will usually indicate beforehand the proper
+general action to be taken on meeting the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_522"><b>522.</b></a> Little fresh information can be expected. The boldness,
+initiative, and determination of the commander must be relied upon.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_523"><b>523.</b></a> A meeting engagement affords an ideal opportunity to the
+commander who has intuition and quick decision and who is willing to
+take long chances. His opponent is likely to be overcautious.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg&#160;124]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_524"><b>524.</b></a> The amount of information that the commander is warranted in
+awaiting before taking final action depends entirely upon his mission.
+One situation may demand a blind attack; another may demand rapid,
+partial deployment for attack, but careful and time-consuming
+reconnaissance before the attack is launched.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_525"><b>525.</b></a> A great advantage accrues to the side which can deploy the
+faster. The advantage of a close-order formation, favoring rapid
+deployment, becomes more pronounced with the size of the force.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_526"><b>526.</b></a> The first troops to deploy will be able to attack with longer
+firing lines and weaker supports than are required in the ordinary
+case. But if the enemy succeeds in deploying a strong, defensive line,
+the attack must be strengthened accordingly before it is wasted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_527"><b>527.</b></a> If the situation warrants the advance, the leading troops seek to
+deploy faster than the enemy, to reach his flanks, check his
+deployment, and get information. In any event, they seek to cover the
+deployment of their own troops in rear&#8212;especially the artillery&#8212;and
+to seize important ground.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_528"><b>528.</b></a> The commander of a long column which meets the enemy should be
+with the advance guard to receive information promptly and to
+reconnoiter. If he decides to fight, the advance guard must hold the
+enemy while the commander formulates a plan of action, issues the
+necessary orders, and deploys the main body. Meantime, the column
+should be closing up, either in mass or to form line of columns, so
+that the deployment, when determined upon, may be made more promptly.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_529"><b>529.</b></a> The action of the advance guard, prior to the receipt of orders,
+depends upon the situation. Whether to attack determinedly or only as
+a feint, or to assume the defensive, depends upon the strength of the
+advance guard, the terrain, the character of the hostile force
+encountered, and the mission and intentions of the commander of the
+whole.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_530"><b>530.</b></a> If the enemy is beforehand or more aggressive, or if the advance
+guard is too weak, it may be necessary to put elements of the main
+body into action as fast as they arrive, in order to check him. This
+method should be avoided; it prevents the formation and execution of a
+definite plan and compels piecemeal action. The best results are
+obtained when the main body is used as a whole.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg&#160;125]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="WITHDRAWAL_FROM_ACTION" id="WITHDRAWAL_FROM_ACTION"></a>WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_531"><b>531.</b></a> The withdrawal of a defeated force can generally be effected only
+at a heavy cost. When it is no longer possible to give the action a
+favorable turn and the necessity for withdrawal arises, every effort
+must be made to place distance and a rear guard between the enemy and
+the defeated troops.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_532"><b>532.</b></a> Artillery gives especially valuable assistance in the withdrawal.
+The long-range fire of machine guns should also be employed. Cavalry
+assists the withdrawal by charging the pursuing troops or by taking
+flank positions and using fire action.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_533"><b>533.</b></a> If an intact reserve remains it should be placed in a covering
+position, preferably on a flank, to check the pursuit and thus enable
+the defeated troops to withdraw beyond reach of hostile fire.</p>
+
+<p>The covering position of the reserve should be at some distance from
+the main action, but close enough to bring the withdrawing troops
+quickly under the protection of its fire. It should have a good field
+of fire at effective and long ranges and should facilitate its own
+safe and timely withdrawal.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_534"><b>534.</b></a> If the general line is divided, by terrain or by organization,
+into two or more parts, the firing line of the part in the least
+danger from pursuit should be withdrawn first. A continuous firing
+line, whose parts are dependent upon one another for fire support,
+should be withdrawn as a whole, retiring by echelon at the beginning
+of the withdrawal. Every effort must be made to restore the
+organizations, regain control, and form column of march as soon as the
+troops are beyond the reach of hostile fire.</p>
+
+<p>As fast as possible without delaying the march, companies, and the
+larger units should be re-formed, so that the command will again be
+well in hand.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_535"><b>535.</b></a> The commander of the whole, having given orders for withdrawal,
+should go to the rear, select a rendezvous point, and devote himself
+to the reorganization of his command.</p>
+
+<p>The rendezvous point is selected with regard to the natural channels
+of movement approximately straight to the rear. It should be distant
+from the battle field and should facilitate the gathering and
+protection of the command.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg&#160;126]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>SUMMARY.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_536"><b>536.</b></a> 1. Avoid combats that offer no chance of victory or other
+valuable results.</p>
+
+<p>2. Make every effort for the success of the general plan and avoid
+spectacular plays that have no bearing on the general result.</p>
+
+<p>3. Have a definite plan and carry it out vigorously. Do not vacillate.</p>
+
+<p>4. Do not attempt complicated maneuvers.</p>
+
+<p>5. Keep the command in hand; avoid undue extension and dispersion.</p>
+
+<p>6. Study the ground and direct the advance in such a way as to take
+advantage of all available cover and thereby diminish losses.</p>
+
+<p>7. Never deploy until the purpose and the proper direction are known.</p>
+
+<p>8. Deploy enough men for the immediate task in hand; hold out the rest
+and avoid undue haste in committing them to the action.</p>
+
+<p>9. Flanks must be protected either by reserves, fortifications, or the
+terrain.</p>
+
+<p>10. In a decisive action, gain and keep fire superiority.</p>
+
+<p>11. Keep up reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p>12. Use the reserve, but not until needed or a very favorable
+opportunity for its use presents itself. Keep some reserve as long as
+practicable.</p>
+
+<p>13. Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if the result is worth
+the cost.</p>
+
+<p>14. Spare the command all unnecessary hardship and exertion.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg&#160;127]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="MISCELLANEOUS" id="MISCELLANEOUS"></a>MISCELLANEOUS.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="MACHINE_GUNS"></a>MACHINE GUNS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_537"><b>537.</b></a> Machine guns must be considered as weapons of emergency. Their
+effectiveness combined with their mobility renders them of great value
+at critical, though infrequent, periods of an engagement.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_538"><b>538.</b></a> When operating against infantry only, they can be used to a great
+extent throughout the combat as circumstances may indicate, but they
+are quickly rendered powerless by efficient field artillery and will
+promptly draw artillery fire whenever they open. Hence their use in
+engagements between large commands must be for short periods and at
+times when their great effectiveness will be most valuable.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_539"><b>539.</b></a> Machine guns should be attached to the advance guard. In meeting
+engagements they will be of great value in assisting their own
+advance, or in checking the advance of the enemy, and will have
+considerable time to operate before hostile artillery fire can silence
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Care must be taken not to leave them too long in action.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_540"><b>540.</b></a> They are valuable to a rear guard which seeks to check a vigorous
+pursuit or to gain time.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_541"><b>541.</b></a> In attack, if fire of position is practicable, they are of great
+value. In this case fire should not be opened by the machine guns
+until the attack is well advanced. At a critical period in the attack,
+such fire, if suddenly and unexpectedly opened, will greatly assist
+the advancing line. The fire must be as heavy as possible and must be
+continued until masked by friendly troops or until the hostile
+artillery finds the machine guns.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_542"><b>542.</b></a> In the defense, machine guns should be used in the same general
+manner as described above for the attack. Concealment and patient
+waiting for critical moments and exceptional opportunities are the
+special characteristics of the machine gun service in decisive
+actions.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_543"><b>543.</b></a> As part of the reserve, machine guns have special importance. If
+they are with the troops told off to protect the flanks, and if they
+are well placed, they will often produce de<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg&#160;128]</a></span>cisive results against a
+hostile turning movement. They are especially qualified to cover a
+withdrawal or make a captured position secure.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_544"><b>544.</b></a> Machine guns should not be assigned to the firing line of an
+attack. They should be so placed that fire directed upon them is not
+likely to fall upon the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_545"><b>545.</b></a> A skirmish line can not advance by walking or running when
+hostile machine guns have the correct range and are ready to fire.
+Machine-gun fire is not specially effective against troops lying on
+the ground or crawling.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_546"><b>546.</b></a> When opposed by machine guns and without artillery to destroy
+them, infantry itself must silence them before it can advance.</p>
+
+<p>An infantry command that must depend upon itself for protection
+against machine guns should concentrate a large number of rifles on
+each gun in turn and until it has silenced it.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="AMMUNITION"></a>AMMUNITION SUPPLY.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_547"><b>547.</b></a> The method of supply of ammunition to the combat trains is
+explained in Field Service Regulations.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_548"><b>548.</b></a> The combat train is the immediate reserve supply of the
+battalion, and the major is responsible for its proper use. He will
+take measures to insure the maintenance of the prescribed allowance at
+all times.</p>
+
+<p>In the absence of instructions, he will cause the train to march
+immediately in rear of his battalion, and, upon separating from it to
+enter an engagement, will cause the ammunition therein to be issued.
+When emptied, he will direct that the wagons proceed to the proper
+rendezvous to be refilled. Ordinarily a rendezvous is appointed for
+each brigade and the necessary number of wagons sent forward to it
+from the ammunition column.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_549"><b>549.</b></a> When refilled, the combat wagons will rejoin their battalions,
+or, if the latter be engaged, will join or establish communication
+with the regimental reserve.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_550"><b>550.</b></a> Company commanders are responsible that the belts of the men in
+their companies are kept filled at all times, except when the
+ammunition is being expended in action. In the firing line the
+ammunition of the dead and wounded should be secured whenever
+practicable.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg&#160;129]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_551"><b>551.</b></a> Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first.
+Thirty rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as
+a reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_552"><b>552.</b></a> When necessary to resupply the firing line, ammunition will be
+sent forward with reenforcements, generally from the regimental
+reserve.</p>
+
+<p>Men will never be sent back from the firing line for ammunition. Men
+sent forward with ammunition remain with the firing line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_553"><b>553.</b></a> As soon as possible after an engagement the belts of the men and
+the combat wagons are resupplied to their normal capacities.
+Ammunition which can not be reloaded on combat wagons will be piled up
+in a convenient place and left under guard.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="MOUNTED"></a>MOUNTED SCOUTS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_554"><b>554.</b></a> The mounted scouts should be thoroughly trained in patrolling and
+reconnaissance. They are used for communication with neighboring
+troops, for patrolling off the route of march, for march outposts,
+outpost patrols, combat patrols, reconnaissance ahead of columns, etc.
+Their further use is, in general, confined to escort and messenger
+duty. They should be freely used for all these purposes, but for these
+purposes only.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_555"><b>555.</b></a> When infantry is acting alone, or when the cavalry of a mixed
+command has been sent to a distance, the mounted scouts are of special
+importance to covering detachments and should be used to make the
+reconnaissance which would otherwise fall to cavalry.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_556"><b>556.</b></a> In reconnaissance, scouts should be used in preference to other
+troops as much as possible. When not needed for mounted duty, they
+should be employed for necessary dismounted patrolling.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_557"><b>557.</b></a> Battalion staff officers should be specially trained in
+patrolling and reconnaissance work in order that they may be available
+when a mounted officer's patrol is required.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="NIGHT_OPERATIONS"></a>NIGHT OPERATIONS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_558"><b>558.</b></a> By employing night operations troops make use of the cover of
+darkness to minimize losses from hostile fire or to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg&#160;130]</a></span> escape
+observation. Night operations may also be necessary for the purpose of
+gaining time. Control is difficult and confusion is frequently
+unavoidable.</p>
+
+<p>It may be necessary to take advantage of darkness in order to assault
+from a point gained during the day, or to approach a point from which
+a daylight assault is to be made, or to effect both the approach and
+the assault.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_559"><b>559.</b></a> Offensive and defensive night operations should be practiced
+frequently in order that troops may learn to cover ground in the dark
+and arrive at a destination quietly and in good order, and in order to
+train officers in the necessary preparation and reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p>Only simple and well-appointed formations should be employed.</p>
+
+<p>Troops should be thoroughly trained in the necessary details&#8212;e.g.,
+night patrolling, night marching, and communication at night.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_560"><b>560.</b></a> The ground to be traversed should be studied by daylight and, if
+practicable, at night. It should be cleared of hostile detachments
+before dark, and, if practicable, should be occupied by covering
+troops.</p>
+
+<p>Orders must be formulated with great care and clearness. Each unit
+must be given a definite objective and direction, and care must be
+exercised to avoid collision between units.</p>
+
+<p>Whenever contact with the enemy is anticipated, a distinctive badge
+should be worn by all.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_561"><b>561.</b></a> Preparations must be made with secrecy. When the movement is
+started, and not until then, the officers and men should be acquainted
+with the general design, the composition of the whole force, and
+should be given such additional information as will insure cooperation
+and eliminate mistakes.</p>
+
+<p>During the movement every precaution must be taken to keep secret the
+fact that troops are abroad.</p>
+
+<p>Unfriendly guides must frequently be impressed. These should be
+secured against escape, outcry, or deception.</p>
+
+<p>Fire action should be avoided in offensive operations. In general,
+pieces should not be loaded. Men must be trained to rely upon the
+bayonet and to use it aggressively.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_562"><b>562.</b></a> Long night marches should be made only over well-defined routes.
+March discipline must be rigidly enforced. The troops should be
+marched in as compact a formation as practicable, with the usual
+covering detachments. Advance and rear<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg&#160;131]</a></span> guard distances should be
+greatly reduced. They are shortest when the mission is an offensive
+one. The connecting files are numerous.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_563"><b>563.</b></a> A night advance made with a view to making an attack by day
+usually terminates with the hasty construction of intrenchments in the
+dark. Such an advance should be timed so as to allow an hour or more
+of darkness for intrenching.</p>
+
+<p>An advance that is to terminate in an assault at the break of day
+should be timed so that the troops will not arrive long before the
+assault is to be made; otherwise the advantage of partial surprise
+will be lost and the enemy will be allowed to reenforce the threatened
+point.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_564"><b>564.</b></a> The night attack is ordinarily confined to small forces, or to
+minor engagements in a general battle, or to seizure of positions
+occupied by covering or advanced detachments. Decisive results are not
+often obtained.</p>
+
+<p>Poorly disciplined and untrained troops are unfit for night attacks or
+for night operations demanding the exercise of skill and care.</p>
+
+<p>Troops attacking at night can advance close to the enemy in compact
+formations and without suffering loss from hostile artillery or
+infantry fire. The defender is ignorant of the strength or direction
+of the attack.</p>
+
+<p>A force which makes a vigorous bayonet charge in the dark will often
+throw a much larger force into disorder.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_565"><b>565.</b></a> Reconnaissance should be made to ascertain the position and
+strength of the enemy and to study the terrain to be traversed.
+Officers who are to participate in the attack should conduct this
+reconnaissance. Reconnaissance at night is especially valuable.
+Features that are distinguishable at night should be carefully noted,
+and their distances from the enemy, from the starting point of the
+troops, and from other important points should be made known.</p>
+
+<p>Preparations should have in view as complete a surprise as possible.
+An attack once begun must be carried to its conclusion, even if the
+surprise is not as complete as was planned or anticipated.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_566"><b>566.</b></a> The time of night at which the attack should be made depends upon
+the object sought. If a decisive attack is intended, it will generally
+yield the best results if made just before daylight. If the object is
+merely to gain an intrenched position for further operations, an
+earlier hour is necessary in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg&#160;132]</a></span> order that the position gained may be
+intrenched under cover of darkness.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_567"><b>567.</b></a> The formation for attack must be simple. It should be carefully
+effected and the troops verified at a safe distance from the enemy.
+The attacking troops should be formed in compact lines and with strong
+supports at short distances. The reserve should be far enough in rear
+to avoid being drawn into the action until the commander so desires.
+Bayonets are fixed, pieces are not loaded.</p>
+
+<p>Darkness causes fire to be wild and ineffective. The attacking troops
+should march steadily on the enemy without firing, but should be
+prepared and determined to fight vigorously with the bayonet.</p>
+
+<p>In advancing to the attack the aim should be to get as close as
+possible to the enemy before being discovered, then to trust to the
+bayonet.</p>
+
+<p>If the assault is successful, preparations must be made at once to
+repel a counterattack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_568"><b>568.</b></a> On the defense, preparations to resist night attacks should be
+made by daylight whenever such attacks are to be feared.</p>
+
+<p>Obstacles placed in front of a defensive position are especially
+valuable to the defense at night. Many forms of obstacles which would
+give an attacker little concern in the daytime become serious
+hindrances at night.</p>
+
+<p>After dark the foreground should be illuminated whenever practicable
+and strong patrols should be pushed to the front.</p>
+
+<p>When it is learned that the enemy is approaching, the trenches are
+filled and the supports moved close to the firing line.</p>
+
+<p>Supports fix bayonets, but do not load. Whenever practicable and
+necessary they should be used for counterattacks, preferably against a
+hostile flank.</p>
+
+<p>The defender should open fire as soon as results may be expected. This
+fire may avert or postpone the bayonet combat, and it warns all
+supporting troops. It is not likely that fire alone can stop the
+attack. The defender must be resolved to fight with the bayonet.</p>
+
+<p>Ordinarily fire will not be effective at ranges exceeding 50 yards.</p>
+
+<p>A white rag around the muzzle of the rifle will assist in sighting the
+piece when the front sight is not visible.</p>
+
+<p>See paragraphs <a href="#para_450">450</a>, <a href="#para_482">482</a>,
+<a href="#para_483">483</a>, <a href="#para_509">509</a>, <a href="#para_510">510</a>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg&#160;133]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="INFANTRY_AGAINST_CAVALRY"></a>INFANTRY AGAINST CAVALRY.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_569"><b>569.</b></a> A cavalry charge can accomplish little against infantry, even in
+inferior numbers, unless the latter are surprised, become
+panic-stricken, run away, or can not use their rifles.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_570"><b>570.</b></a> A charge from the front is easily checked by a well-directed and
+sustained fire.</p>
+
+<p>If the charge is directed against the flank of the firing line, the
+supports, reserves, or machine guns should stop it. If this
+disposition is impracticable, part of the line must meet the charge by
+a timely change of front. If the flank company, or companies, in the
+firing line execute <span class="sans">platoons right</span>, the successive firing lines can
+ordinarily break a charge against the flank. If the cavalry line
+passes through the firing line, the latter will be little damaged if
+the men retain their presence of mind. They should be on the watch for
+succeeding cavalry lines and leave those that have passed through to
+friendly troops in rear.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_571"><b>571.</b></a> Men standing are in the best position to meet a charge, but other
+considerations may compel them to meet it lying prone.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_572"><b>572.</b></a> In a m&#234;l&#233;e, the infantryman with his bayonet has at least an even
+chance with the cavalryman, but the main dependence of infantry is
+rifle fire. Any formation is suitable that permits the free use of the
+necessary number of rifles.</p>
+
+<p>Ordinarily there will be no time to change or set sights. Fire at will
+at battle sight should be used, whatever the range may be. It will
+usually be unwise to open fire at long ranges.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_573"><b>573.</b></a> An infantry column that encounters cavalry should deploy at once.
+If attacked from the head or rear of the column, and if time is
+pressing, it may form a succession of skirmish lines. Infantry, by
+deploying 50 or 100 yards in rear of an obstacle, may check cavalry
+and hold it under fire beyond effective pistol range.</p>
+
+<p>In any situation, to try to escape the issue by running is the worst
+and most dangerous course the infantry can adopt.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_574"><b>574.</b></a> In attacking dismounted cavalry, infantry should close rapidly
+and endeavor to prevent remounting. Infantry which adopts this course
+will not be seriously checked by delaying cavalry.</p>
+
+<p>Every effort should be made to locate and open fire on the led
+horses.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg&#160;134]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="INFANTRY_AGAINST_ARTILLERY"></a>INFANTRY AGAINST ARTILLERY.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_575"><b>575.</b></a> A frontal attack against artillery has little chance of
+succeeding unless it can be started from cover at comparatively short
+range. Beyond short range, the frontal fire of infantry has little
+effect against the artillery personnel because of their protective
+shields.</p>
+
+<p>Machine guns, because their cone of fire is more compact, will have
+greater effect, but on the other hand they will have fewer
+opportunities and they are limited to fire attack only.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule, one's own artillery is the best weapon against hostile
+artillery.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_576"><b>576.</b></a> Artillery attacked in flank by infantry can be severely damaged.
+Oblique or flank fire will begin to have decisive effect when
+delivered at effective range from a point to one side of the
+artillery's line of fire and distant from it by about half the range.
+Artillery is better protected on the side of the caisson.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_577"><b>577.</b></a> Guns out of ammunition, but otherwise secure against infantry
+attack, may be immobilized by fire which will prevent their
+withdrawal, or by locating and driving off their limbers. Or they may
+be kept out of action by fire which will prevent the receipt of
+ammunition.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_578"><b>578.</b></a> Artillery when limbered is helpless against infantry fire. If
+caught at effective range while coming into action or while limbering,
+artillery can be severely punished by infantry fire.</p>
+
+<p>In attacking artillery that is trying to escape, the wheel horses are
+the best targets.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="ARTILLERY_SUPPORTS"></a>ARTILLERY SUPPORTS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_579"><b>579.</b></a> The purpose of the artillery support is to guard the artillery
+against surprise or attack.</p>
+
+<p>Artillery on the march or in action is ordinarily so placed as to be
+amply protected by the infantry. Infantry always protects artillery in
+its neighborhood.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_580"><b>580.</b></a> The detail of a support is not necessary except when the
+artillery is separated from the main body or occupies a position in
+which its flanks are not protected.</p>
+
+<p>The detail of a special support will be avoided whenever possible.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg&#160;135]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_581"><b>581.</b></a> The formation of an artillery support depends upon circumstances.
+On the march it may often be necessary to provide advance, flank, and
+rear protection. The country must be thoroughly reconnoitered by
+patrols within long rifle range.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_582"><b>582.</b></a> In action, the formation and location of the support must be such
+as to gain and give timely information of the enemy's approach and to
+offer actual resistance to the enemy beyond effective rifle range of
+the artillery's flanks. It should not be close enough to the artillery
+to suffer from fire directed at the artillery. In most cases a
+position somewhat to the flank and rear best fulfills these
+conditions.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_583"><b>583.</b></a> The support commander is charged only with the protection of the
+artillery. The tactical employment of each arm rests with its
+commander. The two should cooperate.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="INTRENCHMENTS"></a>INTRENCHMENTS.</span></h4>
+
+<h4>(<a href="#PLATE_V">Plate V.</a>)</h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_584"><b>584.</b></a> Ordinarily, infantry intrenches itself whenever it is compelled
+to halt for a considerable time in the presence of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Infantry charged with a resisting mission should intrench whenever
+there is any likelihood that the cover constructed will be of use.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_585"><b>585.</b></a> Except in permanent fortifications or in fortifications prepared
+long in advance, the infantry plans and constructs the field works
+that it will occupy.</p>
+
+<p>When performing their duties in this connection officers should bear
+in mind that profile and construction are simple matters compared with
+location and correct tactical use.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_586"><b>586.</b></a> Intrenchments enable the commander to hold a position with the
+least possible number of men and to prolong his line or increase his
+reserve.</p>
+
+<p>They are constructed with a view to giving cover which will diminish
+losses, but they must not be so built or placed as to interfere with
+the free use of the rifle. Fire effect is the first consideration.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_587"><b>587.</b></a> The trace of a fire trench or of a system of fire trenches
+depends upon the ground and the proposed density of the entire firing
+line. The trenches are laid out in company lengths, if possible.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg&#160;136]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Adjoining trenches should afford each other mutual support. The flanks
+and important gaps in the line should be protected by fire trenches
+echeloned in rear. (<a href="#PLATE_V">Fig. 6</a>).</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_588"><b>588.</b></a> To locate the trace, lie on the ground at intervals and select
+the best field of fire consistent with the requirements of the
+situation.</p>
+
+<p>A profile should be selected which will permit the fire to sweep the
+foreground, require the minimum of labor and time, and permit the best
+concealment. No fixed type can be prescribed. The type must be
+selected with due regard to the terrain, the enemy, time, tools,
+materials, soil, etc.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_589"><b>589.</b></a> <span class="sans">Hasty cover.</span> With the intrenching tool, troops can quickly
+throw up a low parapet about 3 feet thick which will furnish
+considerable cover against rifle fire, but scarcely any against
+shrapnel. Such cover is frequently of value to an attack that is
+temporarily unable to continue. In time, and particularly at night, it
+may be developed into a deep fire or cover trench.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_590"><b>590.</b></a> <span class="sans">Fire trenches</span> should be placed and constructed so as to give a
+good field of fire and to give the troops protection behind a vertical
+wall, preferably with some head or overhead cover. They should be
+concealed or inconspicuous in order to avoid artillery fire or to
+decrease its accuracy. They should have natural or artificial
+communication with their supports, but in establishing the trace this
+is a secondary consideration.</p>
+
+<p>The simplest form of fire trench is deep and narrow and has a flat,
+concealed parapet. (<a href="#PLATE_V">Fig. 1.</a>) In ordinary soil, and on a basis of two
+reliefs and tasks of 5 feet, it can be constructed in about two hours
+with intrenching tools.</p>
+
+<p>This trench affords fair cover for troops subjected to fire, but not
+actually firing. When it is probable that time will permit
+elaboration, the simple trench should be planned with a view to
+developing it ultimately into a more complete form. (Figs. 2 and 3.)
+Devices should be added to increase the security of the trench and the
+comfort of the men.</p>
+
+<p>Where the excavated earth is easily removed, a fire trench without
+parapet may be the one best suited to the soil and other conditions
+affecting the choice of profile. (<a href="#PLATE_V">Fig. 4.</a>) The enemy's infantry, as
+well as his artillery, will generally have great difficulty in seeing
+this type of trench.</p>
+
+<p>In very difficult soil, if the time is short, it may be necessary to
+dig a wider, shallower trench with a higher parapet.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg&#160;137]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><a name="PLATE_V"></a>
+<img src="images/plate5.png" width="496" height="726" alt="Plate V (trench diagram)" title="Plate V (trench diagram)" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b>Plate V.</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><a href="images/plate5lg.png">[Enlarge]</a></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg&#160;138]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Head cover, notches, and loop holes are of value to troops when
+firing, but many forms weaken and disclose the location of the
+parapet. Filled sandbags kept in the trench when the men are not
+firing may be thrown on the parapet to form notches or loopholes when
+the troops in the trench open fire and concealment of the trench is no
+longer necessary or possible.</p>
+
+<p>By the use of observation stations the maximum rest and security is
+afforded the troops. Stations are best located in the angles of
+traverses or at the end of the trench.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_591"><b>591.</b></a> Where the nature of the position makes it advisable to construct
+traverses at regular intervals it is generally best to construct a
+section of trench for each squad, with traverses between squads. (<a href="#PLATE_V">Fig.
+5.</a>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_592"><b>592.</b></a> <span class="sans">Cover trenches</span> are placed as closely as practicable to their
+respective fire trenches. Where natural cover is not available, each
+fire trench should have artificial cover in rear for its
+support&#8212;either a cover trench of its own or one in common with an
+adjoining fire trench.</p>
+
+<p>The cover trench is simple and rectangular in profile. Concealment is
+indispensable. It is generally concealed by the contour of the ground
+or by natural features, but to guard against hostile searching fire
+overhead cover is frequently advisable.</p>
+
+<p>Cover trenches should be made as comfortable as possible. It will
+often be advisable to make them extensive enough to provide cooking
+and resting facilities for the garrisons of the corresponding fire
+trenches.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_593"><b>593.</b></a> <span class="sans">Communicating trenches</span> are frequently necessary in order to
+connect fire trenches with their corresponding cover trenches where
+natural, covered communication is impracticable. They are generally
+rectangular in profile, deep, and narrow. They are traversed or
+zigzagged to escape enfilade.</p>
+
+<p>Returns or pockets should be provided for use as latrines, storerooms,
+dressing stations, passing points for troops, etc.</p>
+
+<p>Cover from observation while passing through the trench may insure
+against loss as effectively as material cover from the enemy's fire.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Communicating ways</span>, naturally or artificially screened from the
+enemy's view, sometimes provide sufficient cover for the passage of
+troops.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_594"><b>594.</b></a> <span class="sans">Dummy trenches</span> frequently draw the enemy's attention and fire
+and thus protect the true fire trench.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg&#160;139]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Any type is suitable which presents to the enemy the appearance of a
+true trench imperfectly concealed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_595"><b>595.</b></a> When it is uncertain whether time will permit the completion of
+all the work planned, work should proceed with due regard to the order
+of importance of the several operations. Ordinarily the order of
+importance will be:</p>
+
+<p>1. Clearing foreground to improve the field of fire and construction
+of fire trench.</p>
+
+<p>2. Head or overhead cover; concealment.</p>
+
+<p>3. Placing obstacles and recording ranges.</p>
+
+<p>4. Cover trenches for supports and local reserves.</p>
+
+<p>5. Communicating trenches.</p>
+
+<p>6. Widening and deepening of trenches; interior conveniences.</p>
+
+<p>See <a href="#para_568">paragraph 568</a>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="MINOR_WARFARE"></a>MINOR WARFARE.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_596"><b>596.</b></a> Minor warfare embraces both regular and irregular operations.</p>
+
+<p>Regular operations consist of minor actions involving small bodies of
+trained and organized troops on both sides.</p>
+
+<p>The tactics employed are in general those prescribed for the smaller
+units.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_597"><b>597.</b></a> Irregular operations consist of actions against unorganized or
+partially organized forces, acting in independent or semi-independent
+bodies. Such bodies have little or only crude training and are under
+nominal and loose leadership and control. They assemble, roam about,
+and disperse at will. They endeavor to win by stealth or by force of
+superior numbers, employing ambuscades, sudden dashes or rushes, and
+hand-to-hand fighting.</p>
+
+<p>Troops operating against such an enemy usually do so in small units,
+such as platoons, detachments, or companies, and the tactics employed
+must be adapted to meet the requirements of the situation. Frequently
+the enemy's own methods may be employed to advantage.</p>
+
+<p>In general, such operations should not be undertaken hastily; every
+preparation should be made to strike suddenly and to inflict the
+maximum punishment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_598"><b>598.</b></a> In general, the service of information will be insufficient;
+adequate reconnaissance will rarely be practicable.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg&#160;140]</a></span> March and bivouac
+formations must be such as to admit of rapid deployment and fire
+action in any direction.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_599"><b>599.</b></a> In the open country, where surprise is not probable, troops may
+be marched in column of squads preceded, within sight, by a squad as
+an advance party.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_600"><b>600.</b></a> In close country, where surprise is possible, the troops must be
+held in a close formation. The use of flank patrols becomes difficult.
+Occasionally, an advance party&#8212;never less than a squad&#8212;may be sent
+out. In general, however, such a party accomplishes little, since an
+enemy intent on surprise will permit it to pass unmolested and will
+fall upon the main body.</p>
+
+<p>Under such conditions, especially when the road or trail is narrow,
+the column of twos or files is a convenient formation, the officers
+placing themselves in the column so as to divide it into nearly equal
+parts. If rushed from a flank, such a column will be in readiness to
+face and fire toward either or both flank, the ranks being back to
+back; if rushed from the front, the head of the column may be
+deployed, the rest of the column closing up to support it and to
+protect its flanks and rear. In any event, the men should be taught to
+take some form of a closed back-to-back formation.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_601"><b>601.</b></a> The column may often be broken into two or more approximately
+equal detachments separated on the march by distances of 50 to 100
+yards. As a rule the detachments should not consist of less than 25
+men each. With this arrangement of the column, it will rarely be
+possible for an enemy to close simultaneously with all of the
+detachments, one or more being left unengaged and under control to
+support those engaged or to inflict severe punishment upon the enemy
+when he is repulsed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_602"><b>602.</b></a> The site for camp or bivouac should be selected with special
+reference to economical and effective protection against surprise.
+Double sentinels are posted on the avenues of approach and the troops
+sleep in readiness for instant action. When practicable, troops should
+be instructed in advance as to what they are to do in case of attack
+at night.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_603"><b>603.</b></a> Night operations are frequently advisable. With the small forces
+employed, control is not difficult. Irregular troops rarely provide
+proper camp protection, and they may frequently be surprised and
+severely punished by a properly conducted night march and attack.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg&#160;141]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="PATROLS"></a>PATROLS.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_604"><b>604.</b></a> The following paragraphs on patrols are placed here for
+convenience. They relate in particular to the conduct of the patrol
+and its leader, and apply to patrols employed in covering detachments
+as well as in combat reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_605"><b>605.</b></a> A patrol is a detachment sent out from a command to gain
+information of the country or of the enemy, or to prevent the enemy
+from gaining information. In special cases patrols may be given
+missions other than these.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_606"><b>606.</b></a> The commander must have clearly in mind the purpose for which the
+patrol is to be used in order that he may determine its proper
+strength, select its leader, and give the latter proper instructions.</p>
+
+<p>In general, a patrol should be sent out for one definite purpose only.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_607"><b>607.</b></a> The strength of a patrol varies from two or three men to a
+company. It should be strong enough to accomplish its purpose, and no
+stronger.</p>
+
+<p>If the purpose is to gain information only, a small patrol is better
+than a large one. The former conceals itself more readily and moves
+less conspicuously. For observing from some point in plain view of the
+command or for visiting or reconnoitering between outguards two men
+are sufficient.</p>
+
+<p>If messages are to be sent back, the patrol must be strong enough to
+furnish the probable number of messengers without reducing the patrol
+to less than two men. If hostile patrols are likely to be met and must
+be driven off, the patrol must be strong.</p>
+
+<p>In friendly territory, a weaker patrol may be used than would be used
+for the corresponding purpose in hostile territory.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_608"><b>608.</b></a> The character of the leader selected for the patrol depends upon
+the importance of the work in hand.</p>
+
+<p>For patrolling between the groups or along the lines of an outpost, or
+for the simpler patrols sent out from a covering detachment, the
+average soldier will be a competent leader.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_609"><b>609.</b></a> For a patrol sent out to gain information, or for a distant
+patrol sent out from a covering detachment, the leader must be
+specially selected. He must be able to cover large areas with few men;
+he must be able to estimate the strength of hostile forces, to report
+intelligently as to their dispositions, to read indications, and to
+judge as to the importance of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg&#160;142]</a></span> information gained. He must possess
+endurance, courage, and good judgment.</p>
+
+<p>His instructions should be full and clear. He must be made to
+understand exactly what is required of him, where to go and when to
+return. He should be given such information of the enemy and country
+as may be of value to him. He should be informed as to the general
+location of his own forces, particularly of those with whom he may
+come in contact. If possible, he should be given a map of the country
+he is to traverse, and in many cases his route may be specified.</p>
+
+<p>Besides his arms and ammunition, the patrol leader should have a
+compass, a watch, a pencil, a note book, and, when practicable, field
+message blanks and a map of the country.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader assembles the men detailed for the patrol. He
+inspects their arms and ammunition and satisfies himself that they are
+in suitable condition for the duty. He sees that none has any papers,
+maps, etc., that would be of value to the enemy if captured. He sees
+that their accouterments do not glisten or rattle when they move. He
+then repeats his instructions to the patrol and assures himself that
+every man understands them. He explains the signals to be used and
+satisfies himself that they are understood. He designates a man to
+take his place should he be disabled.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_610"><b>610.</b></a> The formation and movements of the patrol must be regulated so as
+to render probable the escape of at least one man should the patrol
+encounter a superior force. The formation will depend upon the nature
+of the ground traversed and the cover afforded. The leader must adopt
+the formation and measures best suited to the accomplishment of his
+object.</p>
+
+<p>In general, it should have the formation of a main body with advance,
+rear, and flank guards, though each be represented only by a single
+man.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_611"><b>611.</b></a> The distances separating the members of the patrol vary according
+to the ground. If too close together, they see no more than one man;
+if too widely separated they are likely to be lost to the control of
+the leader.</p>
+
+<p>With a patrol of four or five men the distances may vary from 25 to 50
+yards; with a larger patrol they may be as great as 100 yards.</p>
+
+<p>At times a column of files, separated by the distances prescribed, is
+a satisfactory formation.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg&#160;143]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_612"><b>612.</b></a> The country must be carefully observed as the patrol advances. In
+passing over a hill, the country beyond should first be observed by
+one man; houses, inclosures, etc., should be approached in a similar
+manner or avoided entirely; woods should generally be reconnoitered in
+a thin skirmish line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_613"><b>613.</b></a> The strength and composition of hostile troops must be observed.
+If they can not be counted, their strength may be estimated by the
+length of time a column consumes in passing a given point, or by the
+area covered if in camp.</p>
+
+<p>Patrol leaders should know, if practicable, the uniforms, guidons,
+etc., of the enemy, as it will assist in determining the class of
+troops seen when no other means for doing so are available.</p>
+
+<p>Insignia from the enemy's uniforms, picked up by patrols, often convey
+valuable information by indicating what troops are in the vicinity.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_614"><b>614.</b></a> Patrols avoid fighting, except in self-defense or in order to
+prevent the enemy's patrols from gaining valuable information, or when
+necessary in order to accomplish their mission. In such cases, a
+patrol should fight resolutely even though inferior in numbers.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_615"><b>615.</b></a> Information gained by patrols is generally of no value unless
+received in time to be of use to the commander. Patrol leaders must
+therefore send back information of importance as soon as it is gained
+unless the patrol itself is to return at once.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_616"><b>616.</b></a> If written, messages should state the place, date, hour, and
+minute of their dispatch. The information contained in them should be
+clearly and concisely expressed. They should be signed by the patrol
+leader.</p>
+
+<p>The authorized message book should be used and the form therein
+adhered to.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_617"><b>617.</b></a> If the message be an oral one, the patrol leader should require
+the messenger to repeat it before starting back. In general, an oral
+message should cover but one point. Except when there is little chance
+of error in transmission, messages should be written.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_618"><b>618.</b></a> When in friendly territory and not very far from friendly troops,
+one messenger is sufficient unless the message is very important. In
+hostile territory, either two men should go together or the message
+should be sent in duplicate by different routes.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg&#160;144]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_619"><b>619.</b></a> Whether the information gained is of sufficient importance to be
+reported at once or may await the return of the patrol is a question
+which must be decided in each case. In case of reasonable doubt, it is
+generally better to send the report promptly. If the patrol leader has
+received proper instructions before starting out and has the requisite
+ability to lead a patrol, he can generally decide such questions
+satisfactorily as they arise.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_620"><b>620.</b></a> Infantry patrols are generally used for work within 2 miles of
+supporting troops, but cases arise where they must go to greater
+distances.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_621"><b>621.</b></a> Patrols composed of mounted scouts are conducted like cavalry
+patrols and should be trained in accordance with the Cavalry Drill
+Regulations.</p>
+
+<p>For distant patrolling, a mounted patrol under an officer should be
+used.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_622"><b>622.</b></a> For controlling the movements of the patrol, the leader should,
+when necessary, make use of the arm signals prescribed in these
+regulations.</p>
+
+<p>On account of the short distances separating them, ordinary
+communication between members of the patrol is best effected quietly
+by word of mouth.</p>
+
+<p>When a member of a patrol is sent to a distant point, communication
+may be effected by means of simple, prearranged signals.</p>
+
+<p>When practicable, the patrol leader may communicate with the main body
+by means of visual signaling.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg&#160;145]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="Part_III_MARCHES_AND_CAMPS" id="Part_III_MARCHES_AND_CAMPS"></a><span class="smcap">Part III</span>.&#8212;MARCHES AND CAMPS.</h2>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="MARCHES" id="MARCHES"></a>MARCHES.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="TRAINING"></a>TRAINING AND DISCIPLINE.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_623"><b>623.</b></a> Marching constitutes the principal occupation of troops in
+campaign and is one of the heaviest causes of loss. This loss may be
+materially reduced by proper training and by the proper conduct of the
+march.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_624"><b>624.</b></a> The training of infantry should consist of systematic physical
+exercises to develop the general physique and of actual marching to
+accustom men to the fatigue of bearing arms and equipment.</p>
+
+<p>Before mobilization troops should be kept in good physical condition
+and so practiced as to teach them thoroughly the principles of
+marching. At the first opportunity after mobilization the men should
+be hardened to cover long distances without loss.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_625"><b>625.</b></a> With new or untrained troops, the process of hardening the men to
+this work must be gradual. Immediately after being mustered into the
+service the physical exercises and marching should be begun.
+Ten-minute periods of vigorous setting-up exercises should be given
+three times a day to loosen and develop the muscles. One march should
+be made each day, with full equipment, beginning with a distance of 2
+or 3 miles and increasing the distance daily as the troops become
+hardened, until a full day's march under full equipment may be made
+without exhaustion.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_626"><b>626.</b></a> A long march should not be made with untrained troops. If a long
+distance must be covered in a few days, the first march should be
+short, the length being increased each succeeding day.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_627"><b>627.</b></a> Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the
+care of feet. Shoes should not be too wide or too<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg&#160;146]</a></span> short. Sores and
+blisters on the feet should be promptly dressed during halts. At the
+end of the march feet should be bathed and dressed; the socks and, if
+practicable, the shoes should be changed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_628"><b>628.</b></a> The drinking of water on the march should be avoided. The thirst
+should be thoroughly quenched before starting on the march and after
+arrival in camp. On the march the use of water should, in general, be
+confined to gargling the mouth and throat or to an occasional small
+drink at most.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_629"><b>629.</b></a> Except for urgent reasons, marches should not begin before an
+hour after daylight, but if the distance to be covered necessitates
+either breaking camp before daylight or making camp after dark, it is
+better to do the former.</p>
+
+<p>Night marching should be avoided when possible.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_630"><b>630.</b></a> A halt of 15 minutes should be made after the first half or
+three-quarters of an hour of marching; thereafter a halt of 10 minutes
+is made in each hour. The number and length of halts may be varied,
+according to the weather, the condition of the roads, and the
+equipment carried by the men. When the day's march is long a halt of
+an hour should be made at noon and the men allowed to eat.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_631"><b>631.</b></a> The rate of march is regulated by the commander of the leading
+company of each regiment, or, if the battalions be separated by
+greater than normal distances, by the commander of the leading company
+of each battalion. He should maintain a uniform rate, uninfluenced by
+the movements of troops or mounted men in front of him.</p>
+
+<p>The position of companies in the battalion and of battalions in the
+regiment is ordinarily changed daily so that each in turn leads.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_632"><b>632.</b></a> The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the
+amount of straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at
+the end of the march.</p>
+
+<p>An officer of each company marches in its rear to prevent undue
+elongation and straggling.</p>
+
+<p>When necessary for a man to fall out on account of sickness, he should
+be given a permit to do so. This is presented to the surgeon, who will
+admit him to the ambulance, have him wait for the trains, or follow
+and rejoin his company at the first halt.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_633"><b>633.</b></a> Special attention should be paid to the rate of march. It is
+greater for trained than for untrained troops; for small commands than
+for large ones; for lightly burdened than for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg&#160;147]</a></span> heavily burdened
+troops. It is greater during cool than during hot weather. With
+trained troops, in commands of a regiment or less, marching over
+average roads, the rate should be from 2&#190; to 3 miles per hour. With
+larger commands carrying full equipment, the rate will be from 2 to
+2&#189; miles per hour.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_634"><b>634.</b></a> The marching capacity of trained infantry in small commands is
+from 20 to 25 miles per day. This distance will decrease as the size
+of the command increases. For a complete division the distance can
+seldom exceed 12&#189; miles per day unless the division camps in
+column.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_635"><b>635.</b></a> In large commands the marching capacity of troops is greatly
+reduced by faulty march orders and poor march discipline.</p>
+
+<p>The march order should contain such instructions as will enable the
+troops to take their proper places in column promptly. Delay or
+confusion in doing so should be investigated. On the other hand,
+organization commanders should be required to time their movements so
+that the troops will not be formed sooner than necessary.</p>
+
+<p>The halts and starts of the units of a column should be regulated by
+the watch and be simultaneous.</p>
+
+<p>Closing up during a halt, or changing gait to gain or lose distance
+should be prohibited.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 12.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="PROTECTION"></a>PROTECTION OF THE MARCH.</span></h4>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">General Considerations.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_636"><b>636.</b></a> A column on the march in the vicinity of the enemy is covered by
+detachments called &quot;advance guards,&quot; &quot;rear guards,&quot; or &quot;flank guards.&quot;
+The object of these covering detachments is to facilitate the advance
+of the main body and to protect it from surprise or observation.</p>
+
+<p>They facilitate the advance of the main body by promptly driving off
+small bodies of the enemy who seek to harass or delay it; by removing
+obstacles from the line of advance, by repairing roads, bridges, etc.,
+thus enabling the main body to advance uninterruptedly in convenient
+marching formations.</p>
+
+<p>They protect the main body by preventing the enemy from firing into it
+when in close formation; by holding the enemy and enabling the main
+body to deploy before coming under effective fire; by preventing its
+size and conditions from being observed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg&#160;148]</a></span> by the enemy; and, in
+retreat, by gaining time for it to make its escape or to reorganize
+its forces.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_637"><b>637.</b></a> Tactical units should not be broken in making details for
+covering detachments.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_638"><b>638.</b></a> The march order of the whole command should explain the
+situation, and, among other things, detail the commander and troops
+for each covering detachment. It should specify the route to be taken
+and the distance to be maintained between the main body and its
+covering detachments. It should order such reconnaissance as the
+commander specially desires to have made.</p>
+
+<p>The order of the commander of a covering detachment should clearly
+explain the situation to subordinates, assign the troops to the
+subdivisions, prescribe their distances, and order such special
+reconnaissance as may be deemed necessary in the beginning.</p>
+
+<p>An advance or flank guard commander marches well to the front and,
+from time to time, orders such additional reconnaissance or makes such
+changes in his dispositions as the circumstances of the case demand.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Advance Guards.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_639"><b>639.</b></a> An <span class="sans">advance guard</span> is a detachment of the main body which
+precedes and covers it on the march.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_640"><b>640.</b></a> The advance guard commander is responsible for its formation and
+conduct. He should bear in mind that its purpose is to facilitate and
+protect the march of the main body. Its own security must be effected
+by proper dispositions and reconnaissance, not by timid or cautious
+advance. It must advance at normal gait and search aggressively for
+information of the enemy. Its action when the enemy attempts to block
+it with a large force depends upon the situation and plans of the
+commander of the troops.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_641"><b>641.</b></a> The strength of the advance guard varies from one-twentieth to
+one-third of the main body, depending upon the size of the main body
+and the service expected of the advance guard.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_642"><b>642.</b></a> The formation of the advance guard must be such that the enemy
+will be met first by a patrol, then in turn by one or more larger
+detachments, each capable of holding the enemy until the next in rear
+has time to deploy before coming under effective fire.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_643"><b>643.</b></a> Generally an advance guard consisting of a battalion or more is
+divided primarily into the <span class="sans">reserve</span> and the <span class="sans">support</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg&#160;149]</a></span> When the
+advance guard consists of less than a battalion, the reserve is
+generally omitted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_644"><b>644.</b></a> In an advance guard consisting of two battalions or less, the
+reserve and support, if both are used, are approximately equal; in
+larger advance guards, the reserve is approximately two-thirds of the
+whole detachment.</p>
+
+<p>In an advance guard consisting of one battalion, the machine guns, if
+any, form part of the reserve. In an advance guard consisting of two
+or more battalions, the machine guns form part of the support.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_645"><b>645.</b></a> The <span class="sans">support</span> sends forward an <span class="sans">advance party</span>. The <span class="sans">advance
+party</span>, in turn, sends a patrol, called a <span class="sans">point</span>, still farther to
+the front. Patrols are sent out to the flanks when necessary. When the
+distance between parts of the advance guard or the nature of the
+country is such as to make direct communication difficult, connecting
+files march between the subdivisions to keep up communication. Each
+element of the column sends the necessary connecting files to its
+front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_646"><b>646.</b></a> A battalion acting as an advance guard should be formed about as
+follows: The <span class="sans">reserve</span>, two companies; the <span class="sans">support</span>, two companies;
+the <span class="sans">advance party</span>, three to eight squads (about a half company),
+depending upon the strength of the companies and the reconnaissance to
+be made; the <span class="sans">point</span>, a noncommissioned officer and three or four men.
+Or the reserve may be omitted. In such case the advance party will
+consist of one company preceded by a strong point. The remaining
+companies form the support.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_647"><b>647.</b></a> The distances separating the parts of an advance guard vary
+according to the mission of the whole force, the size of the advance
+guard, the proximity and character of the enemy, the nature of the
+country, etc. They increase as the strength of the main body
+increases; they are less when operating in rolling, broken country
+than in open country; when in pursuit of a defeated enemy than against
+an aggressive foe; when operating against cavalry than when against
+infantry.</p>
+
+<p>If there be a mounted point, it should precede the dismounted point by
+250 to 600 yards. The advance party may be stronger when there is a
+mounted point in front. The infantry maintains its gait without
+reference to the mounted point, the latter regulating its march on the
+former, (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_648"><b>648.</b></a> To afford protection to an infantry column, the country must be
+observed on each side of the road as far as the terrain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg&#160;150]</a></span> affords
+positions for effective rifle fire upon the column. If the country
+that it is necessary to observe be open to view from the road,
+<span class="sans">reconnaissance</span> is not necessary.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_649"><b>649.</b></a> The advance guard is responsible for the necessary reconnaissance
+of the country on both sides of the line of march.</p>
+
+<p>Special reconnaissance may be directed by the commander of the troops,
+or cavalry may be reconnoitering at considerable distances to the
+front and flanks, but this does not relieve the advance guard from the
+duty of local reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_650"><b>650.</b></a> This reconnaissance is effected by patrols sent out by the
+leading subdivisions of the advance guard. In a large advance guard
+the support commander orders the necessary reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p>Patrols should be sent to the flanks when necessary to reconnoiter a
+specified locality and should rejoin the column and their proper
+subdivision as soon as practicable. When the advance party is strong
+enough, the patrols should be sent out from it. When depleted by the
+patrols sent out, the advance party should be reenforced during a halt
+by men sent forward from the support. If it be impracticable to send
+patrols from the advance party, they will be sent from the support.</p>
+
+<p>Where the country is generally open to view, but localities in it
+might conceal an enemy of some size, reconnaissance is necessary.
+Where the road is exposed to fire and the view is restricted, a patrol
+should be sent to examine the country in the direction from which
+danger threatens. The object may be accomplished by sending patrols to
+observe from prominent points. When the ground permits and the
+necessity exists, patrols may be sent to march abreast of the column
+at distances which permit them to see important features not visible
+from the road.</p>
+
+<p>Mounted scouts or cavalry, when available, should be used for flank
+patrols.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_651"><b>651.</b></a> Cases may arise where the best means of covering the head and
+flanks of the column will be by a line of skirmishers extending for
+several hundred yards to both sides of the road, and deployed at
+intervals of from 10 to 50 yards. A column may thus protect itself
+when passing through country covered with high corn or similar
+vegetation. In such case, the vegetation forms a natural protection
+from rifle fire beyond very short ranges.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_652"><b>652.</b></a> Fixed rules for the strength, formation, or conduct of advance
+guards can not be given. Each case must be treated to meet conditions
+as they exist. That solution is generally the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg&#160;151]</a></span> best which, with the
+fewest men and unbroken units, amply protects the column and
+facilitates the advance.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Rear Guards.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_653"><b>653.</b></a> A <span class="sans">rear guard</span> is a detachment detailed to protect the main body
+from attack in rear. In a retreat, it checks pursuit and enables the
+main body to increase the distance between it and the enemy and to
+re-form if disorganized.</p>
+
+<p>The general formation is that of an advance guard reversed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_654"><b>654.</b></a> Its commander should take advantage of every favorable
+opportunity to delay the pursuers by obstructing the road or by taking
+up specially favorable positions from which to force the enemy to
+deploy. In this latter case care must be taken not to become so
+closely engaged as to render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. The
+position taken should be selected with reference to ease of withdrawal
+and ability to bring the enemy under fire at long range.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_655"><b>655.</b></a> In large commands artillery and cavalry form a very important
+part of the rear guard.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Flank Guards.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_656"><b>656.</b></a> A <span class="sans">flank guard</span> is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a
+column marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may be
+placed in position to protect the passage, or it may be so marched as
+to cover the passage.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_657"><b>657.</b></a> The object of the flank guard is to hold the enemy in check long
+enough to enable the main body to pass, or, like the advance guard, to
+enable the main body to deploy.</p>
+
+<p>Like all other detachments, it should be no larger than is necessary,
+and should not be detailed except when its protection is required.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_658"><b>658.</b></a> When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance
+from the main body should not exceed a mile and a half. Practicable
+communication must exist between it and the main body.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_659"><b>659.</b></a> The flank guard is marched as a separate command; that is, with
+advance or rear guards or both, as circumstances demand, and with
+patrolling on the exposed flank.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_660"><b>660.</b></a> At times it may be necessary for an advance-guard commander to
+send out large reconnoitering parties which temporarily assume the
+character and duties of a flank guard. Such parties should be given
+specific orders as to when and where they are to rejoin the column.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg&#160;152]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CAMPS" id="CAMPS"></a>CAMPS.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="SANITATION"></a>SANITATION.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_661"><b>661.</b></a> If the area of the available ground is sufficient and suitable,
+the camp of the battalion or regiment should conform to the plates
+published in the Field Service Regulations. Under similar favorable
+conditions, the brigade may camp in column or in line of columns. In
+the latter formation the interval between regiments should be about 50
+yards. When the camp site has a restricted area, intervals and
+distances are reduced.</p>
+
+<p>Under service conditions, camp sites that will permit the encampment
+of regiments and brigades as above indicated will not often be
+available and regularity must be sacrificed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_662"><b>662.</b></a> In large commands the halt order should assign camp sites to the
+next smaller commands, and the commanders of the latter should locate
+their respective commands to the best advantage on the area assigned
+them.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Selection of Camp Sites.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_663"><b>663.</b></a> In campaign, tactical necessity may leave little choice in the
+selection of camp sites, but under any conditions the requirements of
+sanitation should be given every consideration consistent with the
+tactical situation.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_664"><b>664.</b></a> Great care should be exercised in selecting sites. In general,
+the following principles govern:</p>
+
+<p>The site should be convenient to an abundant supply of pure water.</p>
+
+<p>Good roads should lead to the camp. Interior communication throughout
+the camp should be easy. A camp near a main road is undesirable on
+account of dust and noise.</p>
+
+<p>Wood, grass, forage, and supplies should be at hand or easily
+obtainable.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg&#160;153]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The ground should accommodate the command without crowding and without
+compelling the troops of one unit to pass through the camp of another.</p>
+
+<p>The site should be sufficiently high and rolling to drain off storm
+water readily, and, if the season be hot, to catch the breeze. In cold
+weather it should preferably have a southern exposure, with woods to
+the north to break the cold winds. In warm weather an eastern
+exposure, with the site moderately shaded by trees, is desirable.</p>
+
+<p>The site should be dry. For this reason porous soil, covered with
+stout turf and underlaid by a sandy or gravelly subsoil, is best. A
+site on clay soil, or where the ground water approaches the surface,
+is damp, cold, and unhealthful.</p>
+
+<p>Alluvial soils, marshy ground, and ground near the base of hills, or
+near thick woods or dense vegetation, are undesirable as camp sites on
+account of dampness. Ravines and depressions are likely to be unduly
+warm and to have insufficient or undesirable air currents.</p>
+
+<p>Proximity to marshes or stagnant water is undesirable on account of
+the dampness, mosquitoes, and the diseases which the latter transmit.
+The high banks of lakes or large streams often make desirable camp
+sites.</p>
+
+<p>Dry beds of streams should be avoided; they are subject to sudden
+freshet.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_665"><b>665.</b></a> The occupation of old camp sites is dangerous, since these are
+often permeated by elements of disease which persist for considerable
+periods. Camp sites must be changed promptly when there is evidence of
+soil pollution or when epidemic disease threatens, but the need for
+frequent changes on this account may be a reflection on the sanitary
+administration of the camp.</p>
+
+<p>A change of camp site is often desirable in order to secure a change
+of surroundings and to abandon areas which have become dusty and cut
+up.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Water Supply.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_666"><b>666.</b></a> Immediately on making camp a guard should be placed over the
+water supply. If the water be obtained from a stream, places should be
+designated for drawing water (1) for drinking and cooking, (2) for
+watering animals, (3) for bathing and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg&#160;154]</a></span> washing clothing. The first
+named should be drawn farthest up the stream; the others, in the order
+named, downstream.</p>
+
+<p>If the stream be small, the water supply may be increased by building
+a dam. Small springs may be dug out and each lined with a gabion, or a
+barrel or box with both ends removed, or with stones, the space
+between the lining and the earth being filled with puddled clay. A rim
+of clay should be built to keep out surface drainage. The same method
+may be used near swamps, streams, or lakes to increase or clarify the
+water supply.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_667"><b>667.</b></a> Water that is not known to be pure should be boiled 20 minutes;
+it should then be cooled and aerated by being poured repeatedly from
+one clean container to another, or it may be purified by approved
+apparatus supplied for the purpose.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_668"><b>668.</b></a> Arrangements should be made for men to draw water from the
+authorized receptacles by means of a spigot or other similar
+arrangement. The dipping of water from the receptacles, or the use of
+a common drinking cup, should be prohibited.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Kitchens.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_669"><b>669.</b></a> Camp kettles can be hung on a support consisting of a green pole
+lying in the crotches of two upright posts of the same character.</p>
+
+<p>A narrow trench for the fire, about 1 foot deep, dug under the pole,
+not only protects the fire from the wind but saves fuel. A still
+greater economy of fuel can be effected by digging a similar trench in
+the direction of the wind and slightly narrower than the diameter of
+the kettles. The kettles are then placed on the trench and the space
+between the kettles filled in with stones, clay, etc., leaving the
+flue running beneath the kettles. The draft can be improved by
+building a chimney of stones, clay, etc., at the leeward end of the
+flue.</p>
+
+<p>Four such trenches radiating from a common central chimney will give
+one flue for use whatever may be the direction of the wind.</p>
+
+<p>A slight slope of the flue, from the chimney down, provides for
+drainage and improves the draft.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_670"><b>670.</b></a> The lack of portable ovens can be met by ovens constructed of
+stone and covered with earth to better retain the heat. If no stone is
+available, an empty barrel, with one head<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg&#160;155]</a></span> out, is laid on its side,
+covered with wet clay to a depth of 6 or more inches and then with a
+layer of dry earth equally thick. A flue is constructed with the clay
+above the closed end of the barrel, which is then burned out with a
+hot fire. This leaves a baked clay covering for the oven.</p>
+
+<p>A recess can be similarly constructed with boards or even brushwood,
+supported on a horizontal pole resting on upright posts, covered and
+burnt out as in the case of the barrel.</p>
+
+<p>When clay banks are available, an oven may be excavated therein and
+used at once.</p>
+
+<p>To bake in such ovens, first heat them and then close flues and ends.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_671"><b>671.</b></a> Food must be protected from flies, dust, and sun. Facilities must
+be provided for cleaning and scalding the mess equipment of the men.
+Kitchens and the ground around them must be kept scrupulously clean.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_672"><b>672.</b></a> Solid refuse should be promptly burned, either in the kitchen
+fire or in an improvised crematory.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_673"><b>673.</b></a> In temporary camps, if the soil is porous, liquid refuse from the
+kitchens may be strained through gunny sacking into seepage pits dug
+near the kitchen. Flies must not have access to these pits. Boards or
+poles, covered with brush or grass and a layer of earth may be used
+for this purpose. The strainers should also be protected from flies.
+Pits of this kind, dug in clayey soil, will not operate successfully.
+All pits should be filled with earth before marching.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Disposal of Excreta.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_674"><b>674.</b></a> Immediately on arriving in camp sinks should be dug. This is a
+matter of fundamental sanitary importance, since the most serious
+epidemics of camp diseases are spread from human excreta.</p>
+
+<p>One sink is usually provided for each company and one for the officers
+of each battalion. Those for the men are invariably located on the
+side of camp opposite the kitchens. All sinks should be so placed that
+they can not pollute the water supply or camp site as a result of
+drainage or overflow. To insure this, their location and their
+distance from camp may be varied.</p>
+
+<p>When camp is made for a single night, shallow trenches, 12 inches deep
+and 15 to 18 inches wide, which the men may straddle, will suffice.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg&#160;156]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In more permanent camps, the trenches should be about 2 feet wide, 6
+feet deep, and 15 feet long. They should be provided with seats and
+back rests made of poles, and should be screened by brush or old tent
+flys.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_675"><b>675.</b></a> In cold weather the contents of sinks should be covered once
+daily with quicklime, ashes, or dry earth. When filled to within 2
+feet of the top, sinks should be discontinued and filled in.</p>
+
+<p>Open pits are dangerous during the fly season. However, the danger may
+be greatly reduced by covering the excreta with earth or by a thorough
+daily burning of the entire area of the trench. Combustible sweepings
+or straw, saturated with oil, may be used for this purpose.</p>
+
+<p>In fly season, trenches may be closed with seats covered down to the
+ground with muslin and supplied with self-closing lids. Urinal
+troughs, made of muslin and coated with oil or paint, should discharge
+into the trenches.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_676"><b>676.</b></a> In permanent camps special sanitary facilities for the disposal
+of excreta will ordinarily be provided.</p>
+
+<p>If necessary, urinal tubs may be placed in the company streets at
+night and removed at reveille. Their location should be plainly marked
+and thoroughly and frequently disinfected.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_677"><b>677.</b></a> When troops bivouac for the night the necessity for extensive
+sanitary precautions is not great; however, shallow sink trenches
+should be dug to prevent general pollution of the vicinity. If the
+cooking be collective, shallow kitchen sinks should be dug. If the
+cooking be individual, the men should be required to build their fires
+on the leeward flank of the camp or bivouac.</p>
+
+<p>Before marching, all trenches should be filled in.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="PROTECTION_OF_CAMP"></a>PROTECTION OF CAMP OR BIVOUAC.</span></h4>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">General Considerations.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_678"><b>678.</b></a> The outpost is a covering detachment detailed to secure the camp
+or bivouac against surprise and to prevent an attack upon it before
+the troops can prepare to resist.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_679"><b>679.</b></a> The size and disposition of the outpost will depend upon many
+circumstances, such as the size of the whole command, the proximity of
+the enemy and the situation with respect to him, the nature of the
+terrain, etc.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg&#160;157]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>A suitable strength may vary from a very small fraction to one-third
+of the whole force. For a single company in bivouac a few sentinels
+and patrols will suffice; for a large command a more elaborate outpost
+system must be provided. It should be no stronger than is consistent
+with reasonable security.</p>
+
+<p>The most economical protection is furnished by keeping close contact
+with the enemy by means of outpost patrols, in conjunction with
+resisting detachments on the avenues of approach.</p>
+
+<p>The outpost should be composed of complete organizations.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_680"><b>680.</b></a> In a brigade or smaller force on the march toward the enemy, the
+outpost is generally formed from the advance guard, and is relieved
+the following day when the new advance guard crosses the line of
+outguards. In a retreat, the detail for outpost duty is generally made
+from the main body. The new outpost becomes the rear guard the
+following day.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_681"><b>681.</b></a> When, as in large forces, an advance and rear guard performs such
+duty for several days, the outpost, during this period, is furnished
+by the advance or rear guards.</p>
+
+<p>When the command is small and stationary for several days, the outpost
+is relieved daily. In large commands, the outpost will, as a rule, be
+relieved at intervals of several days.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_682"><b>682.</b></a> The positions held by the subdivisions of the outpost should
+generally be prepared for defense, but conditions may render this
+unnecessary.</p>
+
+<p>Troops on outpost keep concealed as much as is consistent with the
+proper performance of their duties; especially do they avoid appearing
+on the sky line.</p>
+
+<p>Outpost troops do not render honors.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Distribution of Outpost Troops.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_683"><b>683.</b></a> The outpost will generally be divided into three parts. These, in
+order from the main body, are the <span class="sans">reserve</span>, the line of <span class="sans">supports</span>,
+and the line of <span class="sans">outguards</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The distances separating these parts, and their distance from the main
+body, will depend upon the object sought, the nature of the terrain,
+and the size of the command. There can be no uniformity in the
+distance between supports and reserve, nor between outguards and
+supports, even in the same outpost. The avenues of approach and the
+important features of the terrain will largely control their exact
+positions.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg&#160;158]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The outpost of a small force should ordinarily hold the enemy beyond
+effective rifle range of the main body until the latter can deploy.
+For the same purpose the outpost of a large force should hold the
+enemy beyond artillery range.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_684"><b>684.</b></a> The <span class="sans">reserve</span> constitutes the main body of the outpost and is
+held at some central point from which it can readily <span class="sans">support the
+troops in front</span> or <span class="sans">hold a rallying position</span> on which they may
+retire. The reserve may be omitted when the outpost consists of less
+than two companies.</p>
+
+<p>The reserve may comprise one-fourth to two-thirds of the strength of
+the outpost.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_685"><b>685.</b></a> The <span class="sans">supports</span> constitute a line of <span class="sans">supporting</span> and <span class="sans">resisting</span>
+detachments, varying in size from a half company to a battalion. They
+furnish the line of <span class="sans">outguards</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The supports are numbered consecutively from right to left. They are
+placed at the more important points on the outpost line, usually in
+the line on which resistance is to be made in case of attack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_686"><b>686.</b></a> As a general rule, roads exercise the greatest influence on the
+location of supports, and a support will generally be placed on or
+near a road. The section which it is to cover should be clearly
+defined by means of tangible lines on the ground and should be such
+that the support is centrally located therein.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_687"><b>687.</b></a> The <span class="sans">outguards</span> constitute the line of small detachments farthest
+to the front and nearest to the enemy. For convenience they are
+classified as <span class="sans">pickets</span>, <span class="sans">sentry squads</span>, and <span class="sans">cossack posts</span>. They
+are numbered consecutively from right to left in each support.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_688"><b>688.</b></a> A <span class="sans">picket</span> is a group consisting of two or more squads,
+ordinarily not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of
+outguards to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or
+more sentinels, double sentinels, sentry squads, or cossack posts for
+<span class="sans">observation</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Pickets are placed at the more important points in the line of
+outguards, such as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the
+number of small groups required to observe properly its sector.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_689"><b>689.</b></a> A <span class="sans">sentry squad</span> is a squad posted in <span class="sans">observation</span> at an
+indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the
+remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels.
+In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg&#160;159]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_690"><b>690.</b></a> A <span class="sans">cossack post</span> consists of four men. It is an <span class="sans">observation</span>
+group similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_691"><b>691.</b></a> At night, it will sometimes be advisable to place some of the
+outguards or their sentinels in a position different from that which
+they occupy in the daytime. In such case the ground should be
+carefully studied before dark and the change made at dusk. However, a
+change in the position of the outguard will be exceptional.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_692"><b>692.</b></a> <span class="sans">Sentinels</span> are generally used singly in daytime, but at night
+double sentinels will be required in most cases. Sentinels furnished
+by cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near their group. Those
+furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away.</p>
+
+<p>Every sentinel should be able to communicate readily with the body to
+which he belongs.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_693"><b>693.</b></a> Sentinel posts are numbered consecutively from right to left in
+each outguard. Sentry squads and cossack posts furnished by pickets
+are counted as sentinel posts.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_694"><b>694.</b></a> Instead of using outguards along the entire front of observation,
+part of this front may be covered by <span class="sans">patrols</span> only. These should be
+used to cover such sections of the front as can be crossed by the
+enemy only with difficulty and over which he is not likely to attempt
+a crossing after dark.</p>
+
+<p>In daylight much of the local patrolling may be dispensed with if the
+country can be seen from the posts of the sentinels. However, patrols
+should frequently be pushed well to the front unless the ground in
+that direction is exceptionally open.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_695"><b>695.</b></a> Patrols or sentinels must be the first troops which the enemy
+meets, and each body in rear must have time to prepare for the blow.
+These bodies cause as much delay as possible without sacrificing
+themselves, and gradually retire to the line where the outpost is to
+make its resistance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_696"><b>696.</b></a> Patrols must be used to keep up connection between the parts of
+the outpost except when, during daylight, certain fractions or groups
+are mutually visible. After dark this connection must be maintained
+throughout the outpost except where the larger subdivisions are
+provided with wire communication.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_697"><b>697.</b></a> In addition to ordinary outguards, the outpost commander may
+detail from the reserve one or more <span class="sans">detached posts</span> to cover roads or
+areas not in the general line assigned to the supports.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg&#160;160]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In like manner the commander of the whole force may order <span class="sans">detached
+posts</span> to be sent from the main body to cover important roads or
+localities not included in the outpost line.</p>
+
+<p>The number and strength of detached posts are reduced to the absolute
+needs of the situation.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Establishing the Outpost.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_698"><b>698.</b></a> The outpost is posted as quickly as possible so that the troops
+can the sooner obtain rest. Until the leading outpost troops are able
+to assume their duties, temporary protection, known as the <span class="sans">march
+outpost</span>, is furnished by the nearest available troops.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_699"><b>699.</b></a> The halt order of the commander, besides giving the necessary
+information and assigning camp sites to the parts of the command,
+details the troops to constitute the outpost, assigns a commander
+therefor, designates the general line to be occupied, and, when
+practicable, points out the position to be held in case of attack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_700"><b>700.</b></a> The outpost commander, upon receipt of this order, should issue
+the outpost order with the least practicable delay. In large commands
+it may often be necessary to give the order from the map, but usually
+the outpost commander will have to make some preliminary
+reconnaissance, unless he has an accurate and detailed map.</p>
+
+<p>The order gives such available information of the situation as is
+necessary to the complete and proper guidance of subordinates;
+designates the troops to constitute the supports; assigns their
+location and the sector each is to cover; provides for the necessary
+detached posts; indicates any special reconnaissance that is to be
+made; orders the location and disposition of the reserve; disposes of
+the train if same is ordered to join the outpost; and informs
+subordinates where information will be sent.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_701"><b>701.</b></a> Generally it is preferable for the outpost commander to give
+verbal orders to his support commanders from some locality which
+overlooks the terrain. The time and locality should be so selected
+that the support commanders may join their commands and conduct them
+to their positions without causing unnecessary delay to their troops.
+The reserve commander should, if possible, receive his orders at the
+same time as the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg&#160;161]</a></span> support commanders. Subordinates to whom he gives
+orders separately should be informed of the location of other parts of
+the outpost.</p>
+
+<p>In large outposts, written orders are frequently most convenient.</p>
+
+<p>After issuing the initial orders, the outpost commander inspects the
+outpost, orders the necessary changes or additions, and sends his
+superior a report of his dispositions.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_702"><b>702.</b></a> The <span class="sans">reserve</span> is marched to its post by its commander, who then
+sends out such detachments as have been ordered and places the rest in
+camp or bivouac, over which at least one sentinel should be posted.
+Connection must be maintained with the main body, the supports and
+nearby detached posts.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_703"><b>703.</b></a> The <span class="sans">supports</span> march to their posts, using the necessary covering
+detachments when in advance of the march outpost. A support
+commander's order should fully explain the situation to subordinates,
+or to the entire command, if it be small. It should detail the troops
+for the different outguards and, when necessary, define the sector
+each is to cover. It should provide the necessary sentinels at the
+post of the support, the patrols to be sent therefrom, and should
+arrange for the necessary intrenching. Connection should be maintained
+with adjoining supports and with the outguards furnished by the
+support.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_704"><b>704.</b></a> In posting his command the support commander must seek to cover
+his sector in such manner that the enemy can not reach, in dangerous
+numbers and unobserved, the position of the support or pass by it
+within the sector intrusted to the support. On the other hand, he must
+economize men on observation and patrol duty, for these duties are
+unusually fatiguing. He must practice the greatest economy of men
+consistent with the requirements of practical security.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_705"><b>705.</b></a> As soon as the posting of the support is completed, its commander
+carefully inspects the dispositions and corrects defects, if any, and
+reports the disposition of his support, including the patrolling
+ordered, to the outpost commander. This report is preferably made by
+means of a sketch.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_706"><b>706.</b></a> Each <span class="sans">outguard</span> is marched by its commander to its assigned
+station, and, especially in the case of a picket, is covered by the
+necessary patrolling to prevent surprise.</p>
+
+<p>Having reached the position, the commander explains the situation to
+his men and establishes reliefs for each sentinel,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg&#160;162]</a></span> and, if possible,
+for each patrol to be furnished. Besides these sentinels and patrols,
+a picket must have a sentinel at its post.</p>
+
+<p>The commander then posts the sentinels and points out to them the
+principal features, such as towns, roads, and streams, and gives their
+names. He gives the direction and location of the enemy, if known, and
+of adjoining parts of the outpost.</p>
+
+<p>He gives to patrols the same information and the necessary orders as
+to their routes and the frequency with which the same shall be
+covered. Each patrol should go over its route once before dark.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_707"><b>707.</b></a> Every picket should maintain connection by patrols with outguards
+on its right and left. Each commander will take precaution to conceal
+his outguard and will generally strengthen his position by
+intrenching.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg&#160;163]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="Part_IV_CEREMONIES_AND_INSPECTIONS" id="Part_IV_CEREMONIES_AND_INSPECTIONS"></a><span class="smcap">Part IV</span>.&#8212;CEREMONIES AND INSPECTIONS.</h2>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CEREMONIES" id="CEREMONIES"></a>CEREMONIES.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">General Rules for Ceremonies.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_708"><b>708.</b></a> The order in which the troops of the various arms are arranged
+for ceremonies is prescribed by Army Regulations.</p>
+
+<p>When forming for ceremonies the companies of the battalion and the
+battalions of the regiment are posted from right to left in line and
+from head to rear in column, in the order of rank of their respective
+commanders present in the formation, the senior on the right or at the
+head.</p>
+
+<p>The commander faces the command; subordinate commanders face to the
+front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_709"><b>709.</b></a> At the command <span class="sans">present arms</span>, given by the colonel, the
+lieutenant colonel and the colonel's staff salute; the major's staff
+salute at the major's command. Each staff returns to the carry or
+order when the command <span class="sans">order arms</span> is given by its chief.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_710"><b>710.</b></a> At the <span class="sans">assembly</span> for a ceremony companies are formed on their
+own parades and informally inspected.</p>
+
+<p>At <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">adjutant's call</a></span>, except for ceremonies involving a single
+battalion, each battalion is formed on its own parade, reports are
+received, and the battalion presented to the major. At the second
+sounding of <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">adjutant's call</a></span> the regiment is formed.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="REVIEWS"></a>REVIEWS.</span></h4>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">General Rules.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_711"><b>711.</b></a> The adjutant posts men or otherwise marks the points where the
+column changes direction in such manner that its flank in passing will
+be about 12 paces from the reviewing officer.</p>
+
+<p>The post of the reviewing officer, usually opposite the center of the
+line, is indicated by a marker.</p>
+
+<p>Officers of the same or higher grade, and distinguished personages
+invited to accompany the reviewing officer, place them<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg&#160;164]</a></span>selves on his
+left; their staffs and orderlies place themselves respectively on the
+left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer; all others
+who accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of
+his staff, their orderlies in rear. A staff officer is designated to
+escort distinguished personages and to indicate to them their proper
+positions.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_712"><b>712.</b></a> While riding around the troops, the reviewing officer may direct
+his staff, flag, and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing
+officer, or that only his personal staff and flag shall accompany him;
+in either case the commanding officer alone accompanies the reviewing
+officer. If the reviewing officer is accompanied by his entire staff,
+the staff officers of the commander place themselves on the right of
+the staff of the reviewing officer.</p>
+
+<p>The reviewing officer and others at the reviewing stand salute the
+color as it passes; when passing around the troops, the reviewing
+officer and those accompanying him salute the color when passing in
+front of it.</p>
+
+<p>The reviewing officer returns the salute of the commanding officer of
+the troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing officer do not
+salute. (<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 4 and 6.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_713"><b>713.</b></a> In passing in review, each staff salutes with its commander.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 4.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_714"><b>714.</b></a> After saluting the reviewing officer, the commanding officer of
+the troops turns out of the column, takes post on the right of the
+reviewing officer, and returns saber; the members of his staff
+accompanying him take post on the right of the reviewing officer's
+staff and return saber. When the rear element of his command has
+passed, without changing his position, the commanding officer of the
+troops salutes the reviewing officer; he and the members of his staff
+accompanying him then draw saber and rejoin his command. The
+commanding officer of the troops and the members of his staff are the
+only ones who turn out of the column.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 10.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_715"><b>715.</b></a> If the person reviewing the command is not mounted, the
+commanding officer and his staff on turning out of the column after
+passing the reviewing officer dismount preparatory to taking post. In
+such case, the salute of the commanding officer, prior to rejoining
+his command, is made with the hand before remounting.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_716"><b>716.</b></a> When the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor,
+each regimental color salutes at the command <span class="sans">present</span><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg&#160;165]</a></span> <span class="sans">arms</span>, given or
+repeated by the major of the battalion with which it is posted; and
+again in passing in review.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_717"><b>717.</b></a> The band of an organization plays while the reviewing officer is
+passing in front of and in rear of the organization.</p>
+
+<p>Each band, immediately after passing the reviewing officer, turns out
+of the column, takes post in front of and facing him, continues to
+play until its regiment has passed, then ceases playing and follows in
+rear of its regiment; the band of the following regiment commences to
+play as soon as the preceding band has ceased.</p>
+
+<p>While marching in review but one band in each brigade plays at a time,
+and but one band at a time when within 100 paces of the reviewing
+officer.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_718"><b>718.</b></a> If the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor,
+the band plays the prescribed <span class="sans">national air</span> or the field music sounds
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span>, <span class="sans">march</span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE30a">flourishes</a></span>, or <span class="sans">ruffles</span> when arms are
+presented. When passing in review at the moment the regimental color
+salutes, the musicians halted in front of the reviewing officer, sound
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span>, <span class="sans">march</span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE30a">flourishes</a></span>, or <span class="sans">ruffles</span>. (<i>C.I.D.R., No.
+6.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_719"><b>719.</b></a> The formation for review may be modified to suit the ground, and
+the <span class="sans">present arms</span> and the ride around the line by the reviewing
+officer may be dispensed with.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_720"><b>720.</b></a> If the post of the reviewing officer is on the left of the
+column, the troops march in review with the guide left; the commanding
+officer and his staff turn out of the column to the left, taking post
+as prescribed above, but to the left of the reviewing officer; in
+saluting, the captains give the command: 1. <span class="sans">Eyes</span>, 2. <span class="sans">LEFT</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_721"><b>721.</b></a> Except in the review of a single battalion, the troops pass in
+review in quick time only.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_722"><b>722.</b></a> In reviews of brigades or larger commands, each battalion, after
+the rear has passed the reviewing officer 50 paces, takes the double
+time for 100 yards in order not to interfere with the march of the
+column in rear; if necessary, it then turns out of the column and
+returns to camp by the most practicable route; the leading battalion
+of each regiment is followed by the other units of the regiment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_723"><b>723.</b></a> In a brigade or larger review a regimental commander may cause
+his regiment to stand <span class="sans">at ease</span>, <span class="sans">rest</span>, or <span class="sans">stack arms</span> and <span class="sans">fall
+out</span> and <span class="sans">resume attention</span>, so as not to interfere with the ceremony.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_724"><b>724.</b></a> When an organization is to be reviewed before an inspector junior
+in rank to the commanding officer, the command<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg&#160;166]</a></span>ing officer receives
+the review and is accompanied by the inspector, who takes post on his
+left.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Battalion Review.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_725"><b>725.</b></a> The battalion having been formed in line, the major faces to the
+front; the reviewing officer moves a few paces toward the major and
+halts; the major turns about and commands: 1. <span class="sans">Present</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>,
+and again turns about and salutes.</p>
+
+<p>The reviewing officer returns the salute; the major turns about,
+brings the battalion to order arms, and again turns to the front.</p>
+
+<p>The reviewing officer approaches to about 6 paces from the major, the
+latter salutes, takes post on his right, and accompanies him around
+the battalion. The band plays. The reviewing officer proceeds to the
+right of the band, passes in front of the captains to the left of the
+line and returns to the right, passing in rear of the file closers and
+the band.</p>
+
+<p>On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes, halts,
+and when the reviewing officer and staff have passed moves directly to
+his post in front of the battalion, faces it, and commands: 1. <span class="sans">Pass
+in review</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Squads right</span>, 3. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the first command the band changes direction if necessary, and
+halts.</p>
+
+<p>At the third command, given when the band has changed direction, the
+battalion moves off, the band playing; without command from the major
+the column changes direction at the points indicated, and column of
+companies at full distance is formed successively to the left at the
+second change of direction; the major takes his post 30 paces in front
+of the band immediately after the second change; the band having
+passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left out of the column,
+takes post in front of and facing the reviewing officer, and remains
+there until the review terminates.</p>
+
+<p>The major and staff salute, turn the head as in <span class="sans">eyes right</span>, and look
+toward the reviewing officer when the major is 6 paces from him; they
+return to the carry and turn the head and eyes to the front when the
+major has passed 6 paces beyond him.</p>
+
+<p>Without facing about, each captain or special unit commander, except
+the drum major, commands: 1. <span class="sans">Eyes</span>, in time to add, 2. <span class="sans">RIGHT</span>, when
+at 6 paces from the reviewing officer, and commands <span class="sans">FRONT</span> when at 6
+paces beyond him. At the command <span class="sans">eyes</span> the company officers armed
+with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the
+command <span class="sans">right</span> all turn head<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg&#160;167]</a></span> and eyes to the right, the company
+officers complete <span class="sans">present saber</span> and the noncommissioned officers
+armed with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the
+command <span class="sans">front</span> all turn head and eyes to the front, and officers and
+noncommissioned officers armed with the saber resume the carry saber;
+without arms in hand the first motion of the hand salute is made at
+the command <span class="sans">right</span> and the second motion not made until the command
+<span class="sans">front</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Noncommissioned staff officers, noncommissioned officers in command of
+subdivisions, and the drum major salute, turn the head and eyes,
+return to the front, resume the carry or drop the hand, at the points
+prescribed for the major. Officers and dismounted noncommissioned
+officers in command of subdivisions with arms in hand render the rifle
+or saber salute. Guides charged with the step, trace, and direction do
+not execute <span class="sans">eyes right</span>.</p>
+
+<p>If the reviewing officer is entitled to a salute from the colors, the
+regimental color salutes when at 6 paces from him, and is raised when
+at 6 paces beyond him.</p>
+
+<p>The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the reviewing
+officer, returns saber and remains there until the rear of the
+battalion has passed, then salutes, draws saber, and rejoins his
+battalion. The band ceases to play when the column has completed its
+second change of direction after passing the reviewing officer.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 10.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_726"><b>726.</b></a> When the battalion arrives at its original position in column,
+the major commands: 1. <span class="sans">Double time</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The band plays in double time.</p>
+
+<p>The battalion passes in review as before, except that in double time
+the command <span class="sans">eyes right</span> is omitted and there is no saluting except by
+the major when he leaves the reviewing officer.</p>
+
+<p>The review terminates when the rear company has passed the reviewing
+officer; the band then ceases to play, and, unless otherwise directed
+by the major, returns to the position it occupied before marching in
+review, or is dismissed; the major rejoins the battalion and brings it
+to <span class="sans">quick time</span>. The battalion then executes such movements as the
+reviewing officer may have directed, or is marched to its parade
+ground and dismissed.</p>
+
+<p>Marching past in double time may, in the discretion of the reviewing
+officer, be omitted; the review terminates when the major rejoins his
+battalion.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_727"><b>727.</b></a> At battalion review the major and his staff may be dismounted in
+the discretion of the commanding officer.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg&#160;168]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Regimental Review.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_728"><b>728.</b></a> The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses.</p>
+
+<p>In line the review proceeds as in the battalion, substituting
+&quot;colonel&quot; for &quot;major&quot; and &quot;regiment&quot; for &quot;battalion.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>To march the regiment in review, the colonel commands: <span class="sans">PASS IN
+REVIEW</span>. The band changes direction, if necessary, and halts. Each
+major then commands: 1. <span class="sans">Squads right</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The band marches at the command of the major of the leading battalion.</p>
+
+<p>At the second change of direction each major takes post 20 paces in
+front of his leading company.</p>
+
+<p>The rear of the column having passed the reviewing officer, the
+battalions, unless otherwise directed, are marched to their parades
+and dismissed.</p>
+
+<p>In line of masses, when the reviewing officer has passed around the
+regiment, the colonel commands: <span class="sans">PASS IN REVIEW</span>. The band changes
+direction, if necessary, and halts. The major of the right battalion
+then commands: 1. <span class="sans">Column of squads, first company, squads right</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>. At the third command the band and the leading company of the
+right battalion move off. Each company and battalion in rear moves off
+in time to follow at its proper distance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_729"><b>729.</b></a> The review of a small body of troops composed of different arms
+is conducted on the principles laid down for the regiment. The troops
+of each arm are formed and marched according to the drill regulations
+for that arm.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Review of Large Commands.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_730"><b>730.</b></a> A command consisting of one regiment, or less, and detachments of
+other arms is formed for review as ordered by the commanding officer.
+The principles of regimental review will be observed whenever
+practicable.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_731"><b>731.</b></a> In the review of a brigade or larger command the <span class="sans">present arms</span>
+and the ride around the line by the reviewing officer are omitted. The
+troops form and march in the order prescribed by the commanding
+officer.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="PARADES"></a>PARADES.</span></h4>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">General Rules.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_732"><b>732.</b></a> If dismounted, the officer receiving the parade, and his staff,
+stand at parade rest, with arms folded, while the band is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg&#160;169]</a></span> sounding
+off; they resume attention with the adjutant. If mounted, they remain
+at attention.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_733"><b>733.</b></a> At the command <span class="sans">report</span>, given by a battalion adjutant, the
+captains in succession from the right salute and report: <span class="sans">A (</span> or
+<span class="sans">other) company, present</span> or <span class="sans">accounted for</span>; or, <span class="sans">A (</span>or <span class="sans">other)
+company, (so many) officers</span> or <span class="sans">enlisted men absent</span>, and resume the
+order saber; at the same command given by the regimental adjutant, the
+majors similarly report their battalions.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Battalion Parade.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_734"><b>734.</b></a> At <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">adjutant's call</a></span> the battalion is formed in line but not
+presented. Lieutenants take their posts in front of the center of
+their respective platoons at the captain's command for dressing his
+company on the line. The major takes post at a convenient distance in
+front of the center and facing the battalion.</p>
+
+<p>The adjutant, from his post in front of the center of the battalion,
+after commanding: 1. <span class="sans">Guides</span>, 2. <span class="sans">POSTS</span>, adds: 1. <span class="sans">Parade</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">REST</span>; the battalion executes parade rest. The adjutant directs the
+band: <span class="sans">SOUND OFF</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the line of
+officers to the left of the line and back to its post on the right,
+when it ceases playing. At evening parade, when the band ceases
+playing, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE16">retreat</a></span> is sounded by the field music and, following the
+last note and while the flag is being lowered, the band plays the
+<span class="sans">Star Spangled Banner</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant comes to attention,
+and, as the last note ends, commands: 1. <span class="sans">Battalion</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ATTENTION</span>,
+3. <span class="sans">Present</span>, 4. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, and salutes, retaining that position until
+the last note of the National Anthem. He then turns about and reports:
+<span class="sans">Sir, the parade is formed</span>. The major directs the adjutant: <span class="sans">Take
+your post, Sir</span>. The adjutant moves at a trot (if dismounted, in quick
+time), passes by the major's right, and takes his post.</p>
+
+<p>The major draws saber and commands: 1. <span class="sans">Order</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, and adds
+such exercises in the manual of arms as he may desire. Officers,
+noncommissioned officers commanding companies or armed with the saber,
+and the color guard, having once executed order arms, remain in that
+position during the exercises in the manual.</p>
+
+<p>The major then directs the adjutant: <span class="sans">Receive the reports, Sir</span>. The
+adjutant, passing by the major's right, advances at a trot (if
+dismounted, in quick time) toward the center of the line,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg&#160;170]</a></span> halts
+midway between it and the major, and commands: <span class="sans">REPORT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The reports received, the adjutant turns about, and reports: <span class="sans">Sir, all
+are present or accounted for</span>; or <span class="sans">Sir, (so many) officers</span> or
+<span class="sans">enlisted men are absent</span>, including in the list of absentees those
+from the band and field music reported to him by the drum major prior
+to the parade.</p>
+
+<p>The major directs: <span class="sans">Publish the orders, Sir</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The adjutant turns about and commands: <span class="sans">Attention to orders</span>; he then
+reads the orders, and commands: 1. <span class="sans">Officers</span>, 2. <span class="sans">CENTER</span>, 3.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">center</span>, the company officers carry saber and face to
+the center. At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, they close to the center and face
+to the front; the adjutant turns about and takes his post.</p>
+
+<p>The officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior
+commands: 1. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>. The officers advance, the band
+playing; the left officer of the center or right center company is the
+guide, and marches on the major; the officers are halted at 6 paces
+from the major by the senior who commands: 1. <span class="sans">Officers</span>, 2. <span class="sans">HALT</span>.
+They halt and salute, returning to the carry saber with the major. The
+major then gives such instructions as he deems necessary, and
+commands: 1. <span class="sans">Officers</span>, 2. <span class="sans">POSTS</span>, 3. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">posts</span>, company officers face about.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span>, they step off with guide as before, and the
+senior commands: 1. <span class="sans">Officers</span>, 2. <span class="sans">HALT</span>, so as to halt 3 paces from
+the line; he then adds: 1. <span class="sans">POSTS</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">posts</span>, officers face outward and, at the command
+<span class="sans">march</span>, step off in succession at 4 paces distance, resume their
+posts and order saber; the lieutenants march directly to their posts
+in rear of their companies.</p>
+
+<p>The music ceases when all officers have resumed their posts.</p>
+
+<p>The major then commands: 1. <span class="sans">Pass in review</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Squads right</span>, 3.
+<span class="sans">MARCH</span>, and returns saber.</p>
+
+<p>The battalion marches according to the principles of review; when the
+last company has passed, the ceremony is concluded.</p>
+
+<p>The band continues to play while the companies are in march upon the
+parade ground. Companies are formed in column of squads, without
+halting, and are marched to their respective parades by their
+captains.</p>
+
+<p>When the company officers have saluted the major, he may direct them
+to form line with the staff, in which case they indi<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg&#160;171]</a></span>vidually move to
+the front, passing to the right and left of the major and staff, halt
+on the line established by the staff, face about, and stand at
+attention. The music ceases when the officers join the staff. The
+major causes the companies to pass in review under the command of
+their first sergeants by the same commands as before. The company
+officers return saber with the major and remain at attention.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 19.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Regimental Parade.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_735"><b>735.</b></a> The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses; the
+formation having proceeded up to, but not including the <span class="sans">present</span>, the
+parade proceeds as described for the battalion, with the following
+exceptions:</p>
+
+<p>&quot;Colonel&quot; is substituted for &quot;major,&quot; &quot;regiment&quot; for &quot;battalion,&quot; in
+the description, and &quot;battalions&quot; for &quot;battalion&quot; in the commands.</p>
+
+<p>Lieutenants remain in the line of file closers.</p>
+
+<p>After publishing the orders, the adjutant commands: 1. <span class="sans">Officers,
+center</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The company commanders remain at their posts with their companies.</p>
+
+<p>The field and staff officers form one line, closing on the center. The
+senior commands: 1. <span class="sans">Forward</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The second major is the guide and marches on the colonel.</p>
+
+<p>After being dismissed by the colonel, each major moves individually to
+the front, turns outward, and followed by his staff resumes his post
+by the most direct line. The colonel directs the lieutenant colonel to
+march the regiment in review; the latter moves to a point midway
+between the colonel and the regiment and marches the regiment in
+review as prescribed. If the lieutenant colonel is not present the
+colonel gives the necessary commands for marching the regiment in
+review.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans"><a name="ESCORTS"></a>ESCORTS.</span></h4>
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Escort of the Color.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_736"><b>736.</b></a> The regiment being in line, or line of masses, the colonel
+details a company, other than the color company, to receive and escort
+the national color to its place. During the ceremony the regimental
+color remains with the color guard at its post with the regiment.</p>
+
+<p>The band moves straight to its front until clear of the line of field
+officers, changes direction to the right, and is halted; the
+designated company forms column of platoons in rear of the band, the
+color bearer or bearers between the platoons.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg&#160;172]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The escort then marches without music to the colonel's office or
+quarters and is formed in line facing the entrance, the band on the
+right, the color bearer in the line of file closers.</p>
+
+<p>The color bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed by a
+sergeant of the escort, then goes to obtain the color.</p>
+
+<p>When the color bearer comes out, followed by the lieutenant and
+sergeant, he halts before the entrance, facing the escort; the
+lieutenant places himself on the right, the sergeant on the left of
+the color bearer; the escort presents arms, and the field music sounds
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span>; the first lieutenant and sergeant salute.</p>
+
+<p>Arms are brought to the order; the lieutenant and sergeant return to
+their posts; the company is formed in column of platoons, the band
+taking post in front of the column; the color bearer places himself
+between the platoons; the escort marches in quick time, with guide
+left, back to the regiment, the band playing; the march is so
+conducted that when the escort arrives at 50 paces in front of the
+right of the regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to
+its front; when the color arrives opposite its place in line, the
+escort is formed in line to the left; the color bearer, passing
+between the platoons, advances and halts 12 paces in front of the
+colonel.</p>
+
+<p>The color bearer having halted, the colonel, who has taken post 30
+paces in front of the center of his regiment, faces about, commands:
+1. <span class="sans">Present</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, resumes his front, and salutes; the field
+music sounds <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span>; and the color bearer executes the color
+salute at the command <span class="sans">present arms</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to the order, at
+which the color bearer resumes the carry and takes his post with the
+color company.</p>
+
+<p>The escort presents arms and comes to the order with the regiment, at
+the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it again in
+column of platoons, and, preceded by the band, marches it to its
+place, passing around the left flank of the regiment.</p>
+
+<p>The band plays until the escort passes the left of the line, when it
+ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear
+of the regiment.</p>
+
+<p>The regiment may be brought to a rest when the escort passes the left
+of the line. (<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 19.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_737"><b>737.</b></a> Escort of the color is executed by a battalion according to the
+same principles.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg&#160;173]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Escorts of Honor.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_738"><b>738.</b></a> Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiving and
+escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for
+this purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior
+discipline.</p>
+
+<p>The escort forms in line, opposite the place where the personage
+presents himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it
+will march. On the appearance of the personage, he is received with
+the honors due to his rank. The escort is formed into column of
+companies, platoons or squads, and takes up the march, the personage
+and his staff or retinue taking positions in rear of the column; when
+he leaves the escort, line is formed and the same honors are paid as
+before.</p>
+
+<p>When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the
+point where the personage is to be received, as for instance, where a
+courtyard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels is posted
+from that point to the escort, facing inward; the sentinels
+successively salute as he passes and are then relieved and join the
+escort.</p>
+
+<p>An officer is appointed to attend him and bear such communication as
+he may have to make to the commander of the escort.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Funeral Escort.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_739"><b>739.</b></a> The composition and strength of the escort are prescribed in Army
+Regulations.</p>
+
+<p>The escort is formed opposite the quarters of the deceased; the band
+on that flank of the escort toward which it is to march.</p>
+
+<p>Upon the appearance of the coffin, the commander commands: 1.
+<span class="sans">Present</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>, and the band plays an appropriate air; arms are
+then brought to the order.</p>
+
+<p>The escort is next formed into column of companies, platoons, or
+squads. If the escort be small, it may be marched in line. The
+procession is formed in the following order: 1. <span class="sans">Music</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Escort</span>,
+3. <span class="sans">Clergy</span>, 4. <span class="sans">Coffin and pallbearers</span>, 5. <span class="sans">Mourners</span>, 6. <span class="sans">Members
+of the former command of the deceased</span>, 7. <span class="sans">Other officers and
+enlisted men</span>, 8. <span class="sans">Distinguished persons</span>, 9. <span class="sans">Delegations</span>, 10.
+<span class="sans">Societies</span>, 11. <span class="sans">Civilians</span>. Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and
+7), with side arms, are in the order of rank, seniors in front.</p>
+
+<p>The procession being formed, the commander of the escort puts it in
+march.</p>
+
+<p>The escort marches slowly to solemn music; the column having arrived
+opposite the grave, line is formed facing it.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg&#160;174]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The coffin is then carried along the front of the escort to the grave;
+arms are presented, the music plays an appropriate air; the coffin
+having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and arms are
+brought to the order.</p>
+
+<p>The commander next commands: 1. <span class="sans">Parade</span>, 2. <span class="sans">REST</span>. The escort
+executes <span class="sans">parade rest</span>, officers and men inclining the head.</p>
+
+<p>When the funeral services are completed and the coffin lowered into
+the grave the commander causes the escort to resume attention and fire
+three rounds of blank cartridges, the muzzles of the pieces being
+elevated. When the escort is greater than a battalion, one battalion
+is designated to fire the volleys.</p>
+
+<p>A musician then sounds <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE19">taps</a></span>.</p>
+
+<p>The escort is then formed into column, marched in quick time to the
+point where it was assembled, and dismissed.</p>
+
+<p>The band does not play until it has left the inclosure.</p>
+
+<p>When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the
+escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may march <span class="sans">at ease</span> in
+quick time until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought
+to attention. The music does not play while marching <span class="sans">at ease</span>.</p>
+
+<p>In marching at attention, the field music may alternate with the band
+in playing.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_740"><b>740.</b></a> When arms are presented at the funeral of a person entitled to
+any of the following honors, the band plays the prescribed <span class="sans">national
+air</span>, or the field music sounds <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span>, <span class="sans">march</span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE30a">flourishes</a></span>,
+or <span class="sans">ruffles</span>, according to the rank of the deceased, after which the
+band plays an appropriate air. The commander of the escort, in forming
+column, gives the appropriate commands for the different arms.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 6.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_741"><b>741.</b></a> At the funeral of a mounted officer or enlisted man, his horse,
+in mourning caparison, follows the hearse.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_742"><b>742.</b></a> Should the entrance of the cemetery prevent the hearse
+accompanying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the column
+is halted at the entrance long enough to take the coffin from the
+hearse, when the column is again put in march. The Cavalry and
+Artillery, when unable to enter the inclosure, turn out of the column,
+face the column, and salute the remains as they pass.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_743"><b>743.</b></a> When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters of the
+deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are presented
+upon receiving the remains at the quarters and also as they are borne
+into the church.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_744"><b>744.</b></a> The commander of the escort, previous to the funeral, gives the
+clergyman and pallbearers all needful directions.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg&#160;175]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="INSPECTIONS" id="INSPECTIONS"></a>INSPECTIONS.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Company Inspection.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_745"><b>745.</b></a> Being in line at a halt: 1. <span class="sans">Open ranks</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span> the front rank executes right dress; the rear
+rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and execute
+right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective flanks and
+take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of
+their respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear
+rank, and file closers, takes post 3 paces in front of the right
+guide, facing to the left, and commands: 1. <span class="sans">FRONT</span>, 2. <span class="sans">PREPARE FOR
+INSPECTION</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain returns
+saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order saber, and
+stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection they carry saber,
+face about, and order saber. The captain may direct the lieutenants to
+accompany or assist him, in which case they return saber and, at the
+close of the inspection, resume their posts in front of the company,
+draw and carry saber.</p>
+
+<p>Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the right of
+the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, executes
+<span class="sans">inspection arms</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just
+above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain inspects
+the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in
+receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left
+hand at the balance and executes <span class="sans">order arms</span>.</p>
+
+<p>As the captain returns the piece the next man executes <span class="sans">inspection
+arms</span>, and so on through the company.</p>
+
+<p>Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes
+<span class="sans">order arms</span> as soon as the captain passes to the next man.</p>
+
+<p>The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to right
+in rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg&#160;176]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes <span class="sans">inspection
+saber</span>. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute <span class="sans">inspection pistol</span>
+by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding it diagonally
+across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the neck, muzzle
+pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to the holster as
+soon as the captain passes.</p>
+
+<p>Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing to the
+left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants and
+commands: 1. <span class="sans">Close ranks</span>, 2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span> the lieutenants resume their posts in line; the
+rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the
+file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_746"><b>746.</b></a> If the company is dismissed, rifles are put away. In quarters,
+headdress and accouterments are removed and the men stand near their
+respective bunks; in camp they stand covered, but without
+accouterments, in front of their tents.</p>
+
+<p>If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks and
+its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man will arrange
+the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters or permanent camp,
+or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter tent camp, in the
+same relative order as directed in <a href="#para_747">paragraph 747</a>.</p>
+
+<p>The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the
+quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and calls
+the men to attention on entering each squad room or on approaching the
+tents; the men stand at attention but do not salute. (<i>C.I.D.R., No.
+16.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_747" href="#APPENDIX_B">747.</a></b> If the inspection is to include an examination of the equipment
+while in ranks, the captain, after closing ranks, causes the company
+to stack arms, to march backward until 4 paces in rear of the stacks
+and to take intervals. He then commands: 1. <span class="sans">UNSLING EQUIPMENT</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">OPEN PACKS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the first command, each man unslings his equipment and places it on
+the ground at his feet, haversack to the front end of the pack 1 foot
+in front of toes.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs removed and
+unrolled, the longer edge of the pack along the lower edge of the
+cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg&#160;177]</a></span> tent pins, removes meat can,
+knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and places them on the
+right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon in the open meat can;
+removes the canteen and cup from the cover and places them on the left
+side of the haversack; unstraps and spreads out haversack so as to
+expose its contents; folds up the carrier to uncover the cartridge
+pockets; opens same; unrolls toilet articles and places them on the
+outer flap of the haversack; places underwear carried in pack on the
+left half of the open pack, with round fold parallel with front edge
+of pack; opens first-aid pouch and exposes contents to view. Special
+articles carried by individual men, such as flag kit, field glasses,
+compass, steel tape, notebook, etc., will be arranged on the right
+half of the open pack. Each man then resumes the attention. <a href="#PLATE_VI">Plate VI</a>
+shows the relative position of all articles except underwear and
+special articles.</p>
+
+<p>The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers as before,
+inspects the equipment, returns to the right, and commands: <span class="sans">CLOSE
+PACKS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up his
+haversack and its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, fork, and
+spoon, and the canteen and cup; closes cartridge pockets and first-aid
+pouch; restores special articles to their proper receptacles; rolls up
+and replaces pack in carrier; and, leaving the equipment in its
+position on the ground, resumes the attention.</p>
+
+<p>All equipments being packed, the captain commands: <span class="sans">SLING EQUIPMENT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The equipments are slung and belts fastened.</p>
+
+<p>The captain then causes the company to assemble and take arms. The
+inspection is completed as already explained.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 16.</i>)<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg&#160;178]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_748"><b>748.</b></a> Should the inspector be other than the captain, the latter, after
+commanding <span class="sans">front</span>, adds <span class="sans">REST</span>, and faces to the front. When the
+inspector approaches, the captain faces to the left, brings the
+company to attention, faces to the front, and salutes. The salute
+acknowledged, the captain carries saber, faces to the left, commands:
+<span class="sans">PREPARE FOR INSPECTION</span>, and again faces to the front.</p>
+
+<p>The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber and
+accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Battalion Inspection.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_749"><b>749.</b></a> If there be both inspection and review, the inspection may either
+precede or follow the review.</p>
+
+<p>The battalion being in column of companies at full distance, all
+officers dismounted, the major commands: 1. <span class="sans">Prepare for inspection</span>,
+2. <span class="sans">MARCH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the first command each captain commands: <span class="sans">Open ranks</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">march</span> the ranks are opened in each company, as in the
+inspection of the company.</p>
+
+<p>The field musicians join their companies.</p>
+
+<p>The drum major conducts the band to a position 30 paces in rear of the
+column, if not already there, and opens ranks.</p>
+
+<p>The major takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of the
+center of the leading company. The staff takes post as if mounted. The
+color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff.</p>
+
+<p>Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not take
+post in front of the column but accompany him.</p>
+
+<p>The inspector inspects the major, and, accompanied by the latter,
+inspects the staff officers.</p>
+
+<p>The major then commands: <span class="sans">REST</span>, returns saber, and, with his staff,
+accompanies the inspector.</p>
+
+<p>If the major is the inspector he commands: <span class="sans">REST</span>, returns saber, and
+inspects his staff, which then accompanies him.</p>
+
+<p>The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, then makes a
+minute inspection of the color guard, the noncommissioned staff, and
+the arms, accouterments, dress, and ammunition of each soldier of the
+several companies in succession, and inspects the band.</p>
+
+<p>The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of the
+color guard, noncommissioned staff, and band.</p>
+
+<p>The color guard and noncommissioned staff may be dismissed as soon as
+inspected.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg&#160;179]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><a name="PLATE_VI"></a>
+<img src="images/plate6.png" width="455" height="404" alt="Plate VI (pack)" title="Plate VI (pack)" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b>Plate VI.</b></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_750"><b>750.</b></a> As the inspector approaches each company its captain commands: 1.
+<span class="sans">Company</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ATTENTION</span>, 3. <span class="sans">PREPARE FOR INSPECTION</span>, and faces to
+the front; as soon as inspected he returns saber and accompanies the
+inspector. The inspection proceeds as in company inspection. At its
+completion the captain closes ranks and commands: <span class="sans">REST</span>. Unless
+otherwise directed by the inspector, the major directs that the
+company be marched to its parade and dismissed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_751"><b>751.</b></a> If the inspection will probably last a long time the rear
+companies may be permitted to stack arms and fall out; before the
+inspector approaches they fall in and take arms.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_752"><b>752.</b></a> The band plays during the inspection of the companies.</p>
+
+<p>When the inspector approaches the band the adjutant commands: <span class="sans">PREPARE
+FOR INSPECTION</span>.</p>
+
+<p>As the inspector approaches him each man raises his instrument in
+front of the body, reverses it so as to show both sides, and then
+returns it.</p>
+
+<p>Company musicians execute inspection similarly.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_753"><b>753.</b></a> At the inspection of quarters or camp the inspector is
+accompanied by the captain, followed by the other officers or by such
+of them as he may designate. The inspection is conducted as described
+in the company inspection.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Regimental Inspection.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_754"><b>754.</b></a> The commands, means, and principles are the same as described for
+a battalion.</p>
+
+<p>The colonel takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of
+the major of the leading battalion. His staff takes post as if
+mounted. The color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff.</p>
+
+<p>The inspector inspects the colonel and the lieutenant colonel, and,
+accompanied by the colonel, inspects the staff officers.</p>
+
+<p>The colonel then commands: <span class="sans">REST</span>, returns saber, and, with the
+lieutenant colonel and staff, accompanies the inspector.</p>
+
+<p>If the colonel is the inspector he commands: <span class="sans">REST</span>, returns saber,
+and inspects the lieutenant colonel and staff, all of whom then
+accompany him.</p>
+
+<p>The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, makes a minute
+inspection of the color guard, noncommissioned staff, each battalion
+in succession, and the band.</p>
+
+<p>On the approach of the inspector each major brings his battalion to
+attention. Battalion inspection follows.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg&#160;180]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="MUSTER" id="MUSTER"></a>MUSTER.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Regimental, Battalion, or Company Muster.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_755"><b>755.</b></a> Muster is preceded by an inspection, and, when practicable, by a
+review.</p>
+
+<p>The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field, staff, and
+band, the surgeon with the hospital roll; each captain with the roll
+of his company. A list of absentees, alphabetically arranged, showing
+cause and place of absence, accompanies each roll.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_756"><b>756.</b></a> Being in column of companies at open ranks, each captain, as the
+mustering officer approaches, brings his company to right shoulder
+arms, and commands: <span class="sans">ATTENTION TO MUSTER</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The mustering officer or captain then calls the names on the roll;
+each man, as his name is called, answers <span class="sans">Here</span> and brings his piece
+to order arms.</p>
+
+<p>After muster, the mustering officer, accompanied by the company
+commanders and such other officers as he may designate, verifies the
+presence of the men reported in hospital, on guard, etc.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_757"><b>757.</b></a> A company may be mustered in the same manner on its own parade
+ground, the muster to follow the company inspection.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="HONORS_AND_SALUTES" id="HONORS_AND_SALUTES"></a>HONORS AND SALUTES.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_758"><b>758.</b></a> Further rules governing honors, courtesies, etc., are prescribed
+in Army Regulations.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_759"><b>759.</b></a> (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and enlisted men
+not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, or mess, on
+every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being addressed, the
+officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting first.</p>
+
+<p>(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted
+men, the word &quot;attention&quot; is given by some one who perceives him, when
+all rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until the officer
+leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men at meals stop
+eating and remain seated at attention.</p>
+
+<p>(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer,
+faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing he faces
+an officer for the same purpose. If the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg&#160;181]</a></span> parties remain in the same
+place or on the same ground, such compliments need not be repeated.
+Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute an officer
+unless addressed by him.</p>
+
+<p>(4) Before addressing an officer, an enlisted man makes the prescribed
+salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or, if unarmed, with
+the right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply.</p>
+
+<p>(5) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formation, officers
+and enlisted men salute military persons as follows: With arms in
+hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (sentinels on interior guard
+duty excepted); without arms, the right-hand salute.</p>
+
+<p>(6) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted men
+salute military persons with the right-hand salute.</p>
+
+<p>(7) Officers and enlisted men will render the prescribed salutes in a
+military manner, the officer junior in rank, or the enlisted men,
+saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted, all
+entitled to the salute shall return it.</p>
+
+<p>(8) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign
+conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before addressing
+a superior officer not mounted.</p>
+
+<p>(9) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, but
+shall come to attention if at rest or at ease.</p>
+
+<p>(10) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. In
+general, it does not exceed 30 paces.</p>
+
+<p>(11) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a body
+of troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite the post of
+the commander.</p>
+
+<p>(12) In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street cars,
+and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal salutes
+may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to disturb or annoy
+civilians present.</p>
+
+<p>(13) Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same
+compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and
+Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers of
+their own regiment, corps, or arm of service.</p>
+
+<p>(14) Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the
+foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed with
+the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the proper
+performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute as
+prescribed in drill regulations. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg&#160;182]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_760"><b>760.</b></a> (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute
+officers of grades higher than the person commanding the unit, by
+first bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as required by
+subparagraph (5), <a href="#para_759">paragraph 759</a>. If the person saluted is of a junior
+or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention in the exchange of
+salutes.</p>
+
+<p>(2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their commanders will
+exchange salutes, both commands being at attention.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_761"><b>761.</b></a> Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually
+engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under campaign or
+simulated campaign conditions. Troops on the service of security pay
+no compliments whatever.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_762"><b>762.</b></a> If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and armed
+with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought to <span class="sans">present
+arms</span> or <span class="sans">present sabers</span> before its commander salutes in the
+following cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE11">to the
+color</a></span> or <span class="sans">to the standard</span> is sounded during ceremonies, or when a
+person is saluted who is its immediate or higher commander or a
+general officer, or when the national or regimental color is saluted.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_763"><b>763.</b></a> At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command shall
+render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position of
+salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at retreat and
+during ceremonies when <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span> is played, if no band is
+present. If not under arms, the organizations shall be brought to
+attention at the first note of the National Anthem, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span> or
+<span class="sans">to the standard</span>, and the salute rendered by the officer or
+noncommissioned officer in command as prescribed in regulations, as
+amended herein.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 17.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_764"><b>764.</b></a> Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when persons
+belonging to the military service are present, all officers and
+enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing toward
+the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward the flag).
+If in uniform, covered or uncovered, or in civilian clothes,
+uncovered, they shall salute at the first note of the anthem,
+retaining the position of salute until<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg&#160;183]</a></span> the last note of the anthem.
+If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover at the first note of
+the anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder and so
+remain until its close, except that in inclement weather the headdress
+may be slightly raised.</p>
+
+<p>The same rules apply when <a href="#BUGLE11"><span class="sans">to the color</span></a>
+or <span class="sans">to the standard</span> is
+sounded as when the National Anthem is played.</p>
+
+<p>When played by an Army band, the National Anthem shall be played
+through without repetition of any part not required to be repeated to
+make it complete.</p>
+
+<p>The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the playing
+of the National Anthem of the United States shall be shown toward the
+national anthem of any other country when played upon official
+occasions.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_765"><b>765.</b></a> Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will render
+honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as required by
+subparagraph (5), <a href="#para_759">paragraph 759</a>; if in civilian dress and covered,
+they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder
+with the right hand; if uncovered they will salute with the right-hand
+salute.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 17.</i>)</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg&#160;185]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="Part_V_MANUALS" id="Part_V_MANUALS"></a><span class="smcap">Part V</span>.&#8212;MANUALS.</h2>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="THE_COLOR" id="THE_COLOR"></a>THE COLOR.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_766"><b>766.</b></a> The word &quot;color&quot; implies the national color; it includes the
+regimental color when both are present.</p>
+
+<p>The rules prescribing the colors to be carried by regiments and
+battalions on all occasions are contained in Army Regulations.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_767"><b>767.</b></a> In garrison the colors, when not in use, are kept in the office
+or quarters of the colonel, and are escorted thereto and therefrom by
+the color guard. In camp the colors, when not in use, are in front of
+the colonel's tent. From reveille to retreat, when the weather
+permits, they are displayed uncased; from retreat to reveille and
+during inclement weather they are cased.</p>
+
+<p>Colors are said to be cased when furled and protected by the oil-cloth
+covering.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_768"><b>768.</b></a> The regimental color salutes in the ceremony of escort of the
+color, and when saluting an officer entitled to the honor, but in no
+other case.</p>
+
+<p>If marching, the salute is executed when at 6 paces from the officer
+entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed when 6 paces beyond him.</p>
+
+<p>The national color renders no salute. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 6.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">The Color Guard.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_769"><b>769.</b></a> The color guard consists of two color sergeants, who are the
+color bearers, and two experienced privates selected by the colonel.
+The senior color sergeant carries the national color; the junior color
+sergeant carries the regimental color. The regimental color, when
+carried, is always on the left of the national color, in whatever
+direction they may face.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg&#160;186]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_770"><b>770.</b></a> The color guard is formed and marched in one rank, the color
+bearers in the center. It is marched in the same manner and by the
+same commands as a squad, substituting, when necessary, <span class="sans">guard</span> for
+<span class="sans">squad</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_771"><b>771.</b></a> The color company is the center or right center company of the
+center or right center battalion. The color guard remains with that
+company unless otherwise directed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_772"><b>772.</b></a> In line the color guard is in the interval between the inner
+guides of the right and left center companies.</p>
+
+<p>In line of columns or in close line, the color guard is midway between
+the right and left center companies and on line with the captains.</p>
+
+<p>In column of companies or platoons the color guard is midway between
+the color company and the company in rear of the color company and
+equidistant from the flanks of the column.</p>
+
+<p>In close column the color guard is on the flank of the color company.</p>
+
+<p>In column of squads the color guard is in the column between the color
+company and the company originally on its left.</p>
+
+<p>When the regiment is formed in line of masses for ceremonies, the
+color forms on the left of the leading company of the center (right
+center) battalion. It rejoins the color company when the regiment
+changes from line of masses. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_773"><b>773.</b></a> The color guard when with a battalion that takes the battle
+formation, joins the regimental reserve, whose commander directs the
+color guard to join a certain company of the reserve. (<i>C.I.D.R., No.
+2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_774"><b>774.</b></a> The color guard executes neither loadings nor firings; in
+rendering honors, it executes all movements in the manual; in drill,
+all movements unless specially excused.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Receive the Color.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_775"><b>775.</b></a> The color guard, by command of the senior color sergeant,
+presents arms on receiving and parting with the color. After parting
+with the color, the color guard is brought to order arms by command of
+the senior member who is placed as the right man of the guard.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_776"><b>776.</b></a> At drills and ceremonies, excepting <span class="sans">escort of the color</span>, the
+color, if present, is received by the color company after its
+formation.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg&#160;187]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The formation of the color company completed, the captain faces to the
+front; the color guard, conducted by the senior sergeant, approaches
+from the front and halts at a distance of 10 paces from the captain,
+who then faces about, brings the company to the present, faces to the
+front, salutes, again faces about and brings the company to the order.
+The color guard comes to the present and order at the command of the
+captain, and is then marched by the color sergeant directly to its
+post on the left of the color company.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_777"><b>777.</b></a> When the battalion is dismissed the color guard escorts the color
+to the office or quarters of the colonel.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Manual of the Color.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_778"><b>778.</b></a> At the <span class="sans">carry</span> the heel of the pike rests in the socket of the
+sling; the right hand grasps the pike at the height of the shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>At the <span class="sans">order</span> the heel of the pike rests on the ground near the right
+toe, the right hand holding the pike in a vertical position.</p>
+
+<p>At <span class="sans">parade rest</span> the heel of the pike is on the ground, as at the
+<span class="sans">order</span>; the pike is held with both hands in front of the center of
+the body, left hand uppermost.</p>
+
+<p>The <span class="sans">order</span> is resumed at the command <span class="sans">attention</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The left hand assists the right when necessary.</p>
+
+<p>The <span class="sans">carry</span> is the habitual position when the troops are at a
+shoulder, port, or trail.</p>
+
+<p>The <span class="sans">order</span> and <span class="sans">parade rest</span> are executed with the troops.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">The color salute:</span> Being at a carry, slip the right hand up the pike
+to the height of the eye, then lower the pike by straightening the arm
+to the front.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg&#160;188]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="THE_BAND" id="THE_BAND"></a>THE BAND.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_779"><b>779.</b></a> The band is formed in two or more ranks, with sufficient
+intervals between the men and distances between the ranks to permit of
+a free use of the instruments.</p>
+
+<p>The field music, when united, forms with and in rear of the band; when
+the band is not present the posts, movements, and duties of the field
+music are the same as prescribed for the band; when a musician is in
+charge his position is on the right of the front rank. When the
+battalion or regiment turns about by squads, the band executes the
+countermarch; when the battalion or regiment executes <span class="sans">right</span>, <span class="sans">left</span>,
+or <span class="sans">about face</span>, the band faces in the same manner.</p>
+
+<p>In marching, each rank dresses to the right.</p>
+
+<p>In executing <span class="sans">open ranks</span> each rank of the band takes the distance of
+3 paces from the rank next in front; the drum major verifies the
+alignment.</p>
+
+<p>The field music sounds the <span class="sans">march</span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE30a">flourishes</a></span>, or <span class="sans">ruffles</span>, and
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span> at the signal of the drum major.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_780"><b>780.</b></a> The drum major is 3 paces in front of the center of the front
+rank, and gives the signals or commands for the movements of the band
+as for a squad, substituting in the commands <span class="sans">band</span> for <span class="sans">squad</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Signals of the Drum Major.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_781"><b>781.</b></a> Preparatory to a signal the staff is held with the right hand
+near the head of the staff, hand below the chin, back to the front,
+ferrule pointed upward and to the right.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Prepare to play:</span> Face toward the band and extend the right arm to
+its full length in the direction of the staff. <span class="sans">Play:</span> Bring the arm
+back to its original position in front of the body.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Prepare to cease playing:</span> Extend the right arm to its full length in
+the direction of the staff. <span class="sans">Cease playing:</span> Bring the arm back to its
+original position in front of the body.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To march:</span> Turn the wrist and bring the staff to the front, the
+ferrule pointing upward and to the front; extend the arm to its full
+length in the direction of the staff.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To halt:</span> Lower the staff into the raised left hand and raise the
+staff horizontally above the head with both hands, the arms<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg&#160;189]</a></span> extended;
+lower the staff with both hands to a horizontal position at the height
+of the hips.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To countermarch:</span> Face toward the band and give the signal <span class="sans">to
+march</span>. The countermarch is executed by each front-rank man to the
+right of the drum major turning to the right about, each to the left,
+turning to the left about, each followed by the men covering him. The
+drum major passes through the center.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To oblique:</span> Bring the staff to a horizontal position, the head of
+the staff opposite the neck, the ferrule pointing in the direction the
+oblique is to be made; extend the arm to its full length in the
+direction of the staff.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To march by the right flank:</span> Extend the arm to the right, the staff
+vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the rear.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To march by the left flank:</span> Extend the arm to the left, the staff
+vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the front.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To diminish front:</span> Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the
+height of the eyes, right hand at the height of the hip.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">To increase front:</span> Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the
+height of the hip, right hand at the height of the neck.</p>
+
+<p>The <span class="sans">march</span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE30a">flourishes</a></span>, or <span class="sans">ruffles</span>: Bring the staff to a vertical
+position, hand opposite the neck, back of the hand to the front,
+ferrule pointing down.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">To the color</a>:</span> Bring the staff to a horizontal position at the height
+of the neck, back of the hand to the rear, ferrule pointing to the
+left.</p>
+
+<p>When the band is playing, in marching, the drum major beats the time
+with his staff and supports the left hand at the hip, fingers in
+front, thumb to the rear.</p>
+
+<p>The drum major, with staff in hand, salutes by bringing his staff to a
+vertical position, head of the staff up and opposite the left
+shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>The drum major, marching in review with staff in hand, salutes by
+bringing his staff to a vertical position, head of the staff up and
+opposite the left shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>At a halt, and the band not playing, the drum major holds his staff
+with the ferrule touching the ground about 1 inch from toe of right
+foot, at an angle of about 60&#176;, ball pointing upward to the right,
+right hand grasping staff near the ball, back of the hand to the
+front: left hand at the hip, fingers in front, thumb to the rear.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 6.</i>)</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg&#160;190]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="MANUAL_OF_THE_SABER" id="MANUAL_OF_THE_SABER"></a>MANUAL OF THE SABER.</h2>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_782"><b>782.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Draw</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SABER</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">draw</span> unhook the saber with the thumb and first two
+fingers of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook, fingers
+lifting the upper ring; grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the
+upper band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize the grip with the
+right hand, and draw the blade 6 inches out of the scabbard, pressing
+the scabbard against the thigh with the left hand.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">saber</span> draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to its
+full extent to the right front, at an angle of about 45&#176; with the
+horizontal, the saber, edge down, in a straight line with the arm;
+make a slight pause and bring the back of the blade against the
+shoulder, edge to the front, arm nearly extended, hand by the side,
+elbow back, third and fourth fingers back of the grip; at the same
+time hook up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of the
+left hand, thumb through the upper ring, fingers supporting it; drop
+the left hand by the side.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">This is the position of carry saber dismounted.</span></p>
+
+<p>Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber unhook the
+scabbard before mounting; when mounted, in the first motion of <span class="sans">draw
+saber</span> they reach with the right hand over the bridle hand and without
+the aid of the bridle hand draw the saber as before; the right hand at
+the <span class="sans">carry</span> rests on the right thigh.</p>
+
+<p>On foot the scabbard is carried hooked up.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_783"><b>783.</b></a> When publishing orders, calling the roll, etc., the saber is held
+suspended from the right wrist by the saber knot; when the saber knot
+is used it is placed on the wrist before drawing saber and taken off
+after returning saber.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_784"><b>784.</b></a> Being at the order or carry: 1. <span class="sans">Present</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SABER</span> (or
+<span class="sans">ARMS</span>).</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">present</span> raise and carry the saber to the front, base
+of the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck,
+edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the hilt,
+thumb extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping the
+grip.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg&#160;191]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">saber</span>, or <span class="sans">arms</span>, lower the saber, point in
+prolongation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to the left,
+hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended. If mounted, the
+hand is held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front
+of the stirrup.</p>
+
+<p>In rendering honors with troops officers execute the first motion of
+the salute at the command <span class="sans">present</span>, the second motion at the command
+<span class="sans">arms</span>; enlisted men with the saber execute the first motion at the
+command <span class="sans">arms</span> and omit the second motion.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_785"><b>785.</b></a> Being at a carry: 1. <span class="sans">Order</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SABER</span> (or <span class="sans">ARMS</span>).</p>
+
+<p>Drop the point of the saber directly to the front, point on or near
+the ground, edge down, thumb on back of grip.</p>
+
+<p>Being at the <span class="sans">present saber</span>, should the next command be <span class="sans">order arms</span>,
+officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber <span class="sans">order
+saber</span>; if the command be other than <span class="sans">order arms</span>, they execute <span class="sans">carry
+saber</span>.</p>
+
+<p>When arms are brought to the order the officers or enlisted men with
+the saber drawn <span class="sans">order saber</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_786"><b>786.</b></a> The saber is held at the carry while giving commands, marching at
+attention, or changing position in quick time.</p>
+
+<p>When at the order sabers are brought to the carry when arms are
+brought to any position except the <span class="sans">present</span> or <span class="sans">parade rest</span>.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_787"><b>787.</b></a> Being at the order: 1. <span class="sans">Parade</span>, 2. <span class="sans">REST</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Take the position of parade rest except that the left hand is
+uppermost and rests on the right hand, point of saber on or near the
+ground in front of the center of the body, edge to the right.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">attention</span> resume the order saber and the position of
+the soldier.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_788"><b>788.</b></a> In marching in double time the saber is carried diagonally across
+the breast, edge to the front; the left hand steadies the scabbard.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_789"><b>789.</b></a> Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, on
+all duties under arms draw and return saber without waiting for
+command. All commands to soldiers under arms are given with the saber
+drawn.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_790"><b>790.</b></a> Being at a carry: 1. <span class="sans">Return</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SABER</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">return</span> carry the right hand opposite to and 6 inches
+from the left shoulder, saber vertical, edge to the left; at the same
+time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left hand and grasp it at
+the upper band.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg&#160;192]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">saber</span> drop the point to the rear and pass the blade
+across and along the left arm; turn the head slightly to the left,
+fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard, raise the right hand,
+insert and return the blade; free the wrist from the saber knot (if
+inserted in it), turn the head to the front, drop the right hand by
+the side; hook up the scabbard with the left hand, drop the left hand
+by the side.</p>
+
+<p>Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, when
+mounted, return saber without using the left hand; the scabbard is
+hooked up on dismounting.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_791"><b>791.</b></a> At inspection enlisted men with the saber drawn execute the first
+motion of <span class="sans">present saber</span> and turn the wrist to show both sides of the
+blade, resuming the carry when the inspector has passed.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg&#160;193]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="MANUAL_OF_TENT_PITCHING" id="MANUAL_OF_TENT_PITCHING"></a>MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Shelter Tents.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_792" href="#APPENDIX_B">792.</a></b> Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:
+<span class="sans">FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a
+file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
+sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the
+company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken
+from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guides, and file closers
+form on a convenient flank. Before forming column of platoons,
+preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be redivided into two
+or more platoons, regardless of the size of each. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_793" href="#APPENDIX_B">793.</a></b> The captain then causes the company to take intervals as
+described in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>, and commands: <span class="sans">PITCH TENTS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">pitch tents</span>, each man steps off obliquely to the
+right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt
+of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,
+barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man
+then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of
+the right heel.</p>
+
+<p>Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins removed;
+each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the rear,
+flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear-rank man's half
+on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; the guy loops at
+both ends of the lower half are passed through the buttonholes
+provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped end of the guy
+rope is then passed through both guy loops and secured, this at both
+ends of the tent. Each front-rank man inserts the muzzle of his rifle
+under the front end of the ridge and holds the rifle upright, sling to
+the front, heel of butt on the ground beside the bayonet. His
+rear-rank man pins down the front corners of the tent on the line of
+bayonets, stretching the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye
+of the front guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front
+of the rifle as to hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg&#160;194]</a></span>
+tent, each pins down a corner, stretching the sides and rear of the
+tent before securing; the rear-rank man then inserts an intrenching
+tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear end of the ridge
+inside the tent, the front-rank man pegging down the end of the rear
+guy ropes; the rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the
+rear-rank man working on the right.</p>
+
+<p>The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown back on
+the tent.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment and the
+contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention in front of
+his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin.</p>
+
+<p>To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes
+should all be of the same length.</p>
+
+<p>In shelter-tent camps, in localities where suitable material is
+procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used in lieu of the rifle
+and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the shelter tent.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 2, 5 and 8.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_794" href="#APPENDIX_B">794.</a></b> When the pack is not carried the company is formed for shelter
+tents, intervals are taken, arms are laid aside or on the ground, the
+men are dismissed and proceed to the wagon, secure their packs, return
+to their places, and pitch tents as heretofore described.</p>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_795" href="#APPENDIX_B">795.</a></b> Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching one tent as
+heretofore described, then pitching a second tent against the opening
+of the first, using one rifle to support both tents, and passing the
+front guy ropes over and down the sides of the opposite tents. The
+front corner of one tent is not pegged down, but is thrown back to
+permit an opening into the tent.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Single Sleeping Bag.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_796" href="#APPENDIX_B">796.</a></b> Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its short
+dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the right side
+of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left side by means
+of the tapes provided; fold the left half of the poncho over the
+blanket and button it together along the side and bottom.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Double Sleeping Bag.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_797" href="#APPENDIX_B">797.</a></b> Spread one poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg&#160;195]</a></span> poncho;
+tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes provided; spread
+a second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the right; button the two ponchos together along both
+sides and across the end.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Strike Shelter Tents.</span></h4>
+
+<p><b><a name="para_798" href="#APPENDIX_B">798.</a></b> The men standing in front of their tents: <span class="sans">STRIKE TENTS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are
+lowered, packs made up, and equipments slung, and the men stand at
+attention in the places originally occupied after taking intervals.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 8.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Common and Wall Tents.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_799"><b>799.</b></a> To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical wall
+tents: Mark line of tents by driving a wall pin on the spot to be
+occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal
+tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet,
+which will give a passage of two feet between tents. Spread tripod on
+the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is used.
+Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, and
+place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door (or
+doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the
+bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left
+(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the
+pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already
+driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the
+rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to
+complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops.
+Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front
+corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small
+amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven.
+According to the size of the tent one or two men, crawling under the
+tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or
+ridge pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes
+are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the
+tent to adjust it. The tent, steadied by the remaining men, one at
+each corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or
+storage type, corner poles will now be placed at the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg&#160;196]</a></span> four corners.
+The four corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of
+the large pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such
+distance as to hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth
+when the guy ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through
+each remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven
+in line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the
+tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly
+are placed over the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace
+ropes, when used, are then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed.
+(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 11.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_800"><b>800.</b></a> Rescinded. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 11.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Conical Wall Tent.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_801"><b>801.</b></a> Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using
+the hood lines with center pin as center, describe two concentric
+circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer
+circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3
+feet drive the other guy pin.</p>
+
+<p>In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case
+of pyramidal tents. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Strike Common, Wall, Pyramidal, and Conical Wall Tents.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_802"><b>802.</b></a> <span class="sans">STRIKE TENTS.</span></p>
+
+<p>The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy
+ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall
+tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle.</p>
+
+<p>One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is
+lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole
+fastened together, and the remaining pins collected.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">To Fold Tents.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_803"><b>803.</b></a> For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread the
+tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of side
+walls are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left;
+fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it
+rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent
+in two by carrying the top<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg&#160;197]</a></span> fold over clear to the foot; fold again in
+two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second
+from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the
+second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of
+the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the
+bundle; tie with the two exposed guys.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Method of Folding Pyramidal Tent.</span></h4>
+
+<p>The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof canvas
+pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by leaving the
+rear-corner wall pins in the ground with the wall loops attached, one
+man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding the square iron in a
+perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from
+the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of
+the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle.</p>
+
+<p>Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear
+corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and
+pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and return to
+the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side
+of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the
+front side of tent.</p>
+
+<p>Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described
+above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the
+tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each
+on itself.</p>
+
+<p>Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward
+toward the bottom of tent, and continue to fold around the square iron
+as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth, and parallel with
+the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the canvas
+kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of the
+canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the two on
+the center width, which should be pulled out and away from bottom edge
+to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one end, fold
+toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first and second
+widths) and fold again toward the center so that the already folded
+canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle width. Then
+fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. Then begin
+folding from opposite end,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg&#160;198]</a></span> folding the first width in half, then
+making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that
+already folded, turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take
+the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle
+over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle drawing tight. Turn
+bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise.</p>
+
+<p>When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by
+23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack.</p>
+
+<p>Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle
+width of canvas in the back wall. (<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 1 and 8.</i>)</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg&#160;199]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="MANUAL_OF_THE_BUGLE" id="MANUAL_OF_THE_BUGLE"></a>MANUAL OF THE BUGLE.</h2>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Warning Calls.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_804"><b>804.</b></a> <span class="sans"><a href="#bugle01">First call</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE02">guard mounting</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE03">full dress</a></span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE04">overcoats</a></span>,
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE05">drill</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE06">stable</a></span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE07">water</a></span>, and <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE08">boots and saddles</a></span> precede the
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE09">assembly</a></span> by such interval as may be prescribed by the commanding
+officer.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE20">Mess</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE22">church</a></span>, and <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE28">fatigue</a></span>, classed as service calls, may also be
+used as warning calls.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#bugle01">First call</a></span> is the first signal for formation for roll call and for
+all ceremonies except guard mounting.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE02">Guard mounting</a></span> is the first signal for guard mounting.</p>
+
+<p>The field music assembles at <span class="sans"><a href="#bugle01">first call</a></span> and <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE02">guard mounting</a></span>.</p>
+
+<p>In a mixed command, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE08">boots and saddles</a></span> is the signal to mounted
+troops that their formation is to be mounted; for mounted guard
+mounting or mounted drill, it immediately follows the signal <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE02">guard
+mounting</a></span> or <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE05">drill</a></span>.</p>
+
+<p>When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE03">full dress</a></span> or <a href="#BUGLE04">
+<span class="sans">overcoat</span> </a>call immediately follows <span class="sans">
+<a href="#bugle01">first call</a></span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE02">guard mounting</a></span>, or
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE08">boots and saddles</a></span>.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Formation Calls.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_805"><b>805.</b></a> <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE09">Assembly</a>:</span> The signal for companies or details to fall in.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">Adjutant's call</a>:</span> The signal for companies to form battalion; also
+for the guard details to form for guard mounting on the camp or
+garrison parade ground; it follows the <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE09">assembly</a></span> at such interval as
+may be prescribed by the commanding officer.</p>
+
+<p>It is also used as a signal for the battalions to form regiment,
+following the first <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE10">adjutant's call</a></span> at such interval as the
+commanding officer may prescribe.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE11">To the color</a>:</span> Is sounded when the color salutes.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Alarm Calls.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_806"><b>806.</b></a> <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE12">Fire call</a>:</span> The signal for the men to fall in, without arms, to
+extinguish fire.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE13">To arms</a>:</span> The signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on their
+company parade grounds as quickly as possible.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg&#160;200]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE14">To horse</a>:</span> The signal for mounted men to proceed under arms to their
+horses, saddle, mount and assemble at a designated place as quickly as
+possible. In extended order this signal is used to remount troops.</p>
+
+
+<h4><span class="sans">Service Calls.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_807"><b>807.</b></a> <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE17">Tattoo</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE19">taps</a></span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE20">mess</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE21">sick</a></span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE22">church</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE23">recall</a></span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE24">issue</a></span>,
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE25">officers'</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE26">captains'</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE27">first sergeants'</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE28">fatigue</a></span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE29">school</a></span>, and
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE30">the general</a></span>.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE30">The general</a></span> is the signal for striking tents and loading wagons
+preparatory to marching.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE15">Reveille</a></span> precedes the <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE09">assembly</a></span> for roll call; <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE16">retreat</a></span> follows
+the <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE09">assembly</a></span>, the interval between being only that required for
+formation and roll call, except when there is parade.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE19">Taps</a></span> is the signal for extinguishing lights; it is usually preceded
+by <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE18">call to quarters</a></span> by such interval as prescribed by Army
+Regulations.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE09">Assembly</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE15">reveille</a></span>, <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE16">retreat</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE10">adjutant's call</a></span>, <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE11">to the color</a></span>,
+the <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE30a">flourishes</a></span>, <span class="sans">ruffles</span>, and the <span class="sans">marches</span> are sounded by all the
+field music united; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the
+musician of the guard or orderly musician; he may also sound the
+<span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE09">assembly</a></span> when the musicians are not united.</p>
+
+<p>The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if marches
+be played before <span class="sans"><a href="#BUGLE15">reveille</a></span>, it is fired at the commencement of the
+first march.</p>
+
+<p>The evening gun is fired at the last note of <span class="sans">
+<a href="#BUGLE16">retreat</a></span>.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg&#160;201]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 35%;" />
+
+<h2><a name="BUGLE_CALLS"></a><span class="sansp">BUGLE CALLS.</span></h2>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="bugle01"></a>1. <span class="smcap">First Call.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/01.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/01.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music01.png" width="604" height="173" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE02"></a>2. <span class="smcap">Guard Mounting.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/02.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/02.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music02.png" width="604" height="175" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg&#160;202]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE03"></a>3. <span class="smcap">Full Dress.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/03.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/03.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music03.png" width="608" height="93" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE04"></a>4. <span class="smcap">Overcoats.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/04.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/04.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music04.png" width="606" height="62" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE05"></a>5. <span class="smcap">Drill.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/05.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/05.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music05.png" width="606" height="166" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE06"></a>6. <span class="smcap">Stable.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/06.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/06.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music06.png" width="604" height="359" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg&#160;203]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE07"></a>7. <span class="smcap">Water.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/07.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/07.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music07.png" width="484" height="82" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE08"></a>8. <span class="smcap">Boots and Saddles.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/08.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/08.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music08.png" width="605" height="78" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE09"></a>9. <span class="smcap">Assembly.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/09.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/09.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music09.png" width="607" height="165" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE10"></a>10. <span class="smcap">Adjutant's Call.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/10.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/10.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music10.png" width="603" height="176" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE11"></a>11. <span class="smcap">To the Color.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/11.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/11.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music11.png" width="606" height="266" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg&#160;204]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE12"></a>12. <span class="smcap">Fire.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/12.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/12.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music12.png" width="604" height="181" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE13"></a>13. <span class="smcap">To Arms.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/13.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/13.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music13.png" width="609" height="104" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg&#160;205]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE14"></a>14. <span class="smcap">To Horse.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/14.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/14.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music14.png" width="606" height="75" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE15"></a>15. <span class="smcap">Reveille.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/15.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/15.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music15.png" width="606" height="269" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE16"></a>16. <span class="smcap">Retreat.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/16.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/16.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music16.png" width="609" height="594" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg&#160;207]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE17"></a>17. <span class="smcap">Tattoo.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/17.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/17.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music17a.png" width="607" height="1005" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music17b.png" width="605" height="402" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg&#160;210]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE18"></a>18. <span class="smcap">Call to Quarters.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/18.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/18.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music18.png" width="605" height="169" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE19"></a>19. <span class="smcap">Taps.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/19.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/19.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music19.png" width="605" height="162" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE20"></a>20. <span class="smcap">Mess.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/20.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/20.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music20.png" width="604" height="167" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg&#160;211]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE21"></a>21. <span class="smcap">Sick.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/21.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/21.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music21.png" width="603" height="175" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE22"></a>22. <span class="smcap">Church.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/22.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/22.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music22.png" width="603" height="164" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE23"></a>23. <span class="smcap">Recall.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/23.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/23.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music23.png" width="605" height="170" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE24"></a>24. <span class="smcap">Issue.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/24.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/24.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music24.png" width="603" height="69" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg&#160;212]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE25"></a>25. <span class="smcap">Officers' Call.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/25.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/25.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music25.png" width="606" height="71" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE26"></a>26. <span class="smcap">Captains' Call.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/26.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/26.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music26.png" width="605" height="73" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE27"></a>27. <span class="smcap">First Sergeants' Call.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/27.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/27.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music27.png" width="604" height="79" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE28"></a>28. <span class="smcap">Fatigue.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/28.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/28.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music28.png" width="604" height="174" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg&#160;213]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE29"></a>29. <span class="smcap">School.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/29a.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/29a.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music29a.png" width="603" height="165" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp">29&#189;. <span class="smcap">The General's March.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/29b.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/29b.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music29b.png" width="605" height="271" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R. No. 8, Sept. 3, 1914.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg&#160;214]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE30"></a>30. <span class="smcap">The General.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/30a.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/30a.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music30a.png" width="609" height="566" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE30a"></a>30&#189;. <span class="smcap">Flourishes for Review.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/30b.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/30b.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music30b.png" width="405" height="71" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>(<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 35%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg&#160;215]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2><a name="BUGLE_SIGNALS"></a><span class="sansp">BUGLE SIGNALS.</span></h2>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">See <a href="#para_41">paragraph 41</a>.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp">31. <span class="smcap">Assemble.</span> MARCH.</span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">Same as <a href="#BUGLE09"> <span class="sans">Assembly</span>, No. 9</a>.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE32"></a>32. <span class="smcap">Attention.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/32.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/32.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music32.png" width="325" height="67" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp">33. <span class="smcap">Attention to Orders.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/33.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/33.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music33.png" width="325" height="79" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE34"></a>34. <span class="smcap">Forward.</span> MARCH.</span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/34.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/34.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music34.png" width="325" height="66" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE35"></a>35. <span class="smcap">Halt.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/35.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/35.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music35.png" width="127" height="64" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE36"></a>36. <span class="smcap">Double Time.</span> MARCH.</span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/36.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/36.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music36.png" width="405" height="69" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg&#160;216]</a></span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE37"></a>37. <span class="smcap">To the Rear.</span> MARCH.</span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/37.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/37.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music37.png" width="486" height="85" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE38"></a>38. <span class="smcap">Commence Firing.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/38.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/38.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music38.png" width="605" height="70" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE39"></a>39. <span class="smcap">Cease Firing.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/39.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/39.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music39.png" width="407" height="76" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE40"></a>40. <span class="smcap">Fix Bayonets.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/40.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/40.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music40.png" width="604" height="169" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<h3><span class="sansp"><a name="BUGLE41"></a>41. <span class="smcap">Charge.</span></span></h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">[<a href="music/41.midi">Listen</a>] [<a href="music/41.ly">Lilypond</a>]</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/music41.png" width="606" height="167" alt="music" title="music" /></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg&#160;217]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="APPENDIX_A" id="APPENDIX_A"></a>APPENDIX A.</h2>
+
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+<span class="smcap">War Department</span>,<br />
+<span class="smcap">Office of the Chief of Staff</span>,<br />
+<i>Washington, December 2, 1911.</i><br />
+</p>
+
+<p>The Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911, have been prepared for the use
+of troops armed with the United States magazine rifle, model 1903. For
+the guidance of organizations armed with the United States magazine
+rifle, model 1898, the following alternative paragraphs are published
+and will be considered as substitute paragraphs for the corresponding
+paragraphs in the text: <a href="#para_75">75</a> (in part), <a href="#para_96">96</a>,
+<a href="#para_98">98</a>, <a href="#para_99">99</a>, <a href="#para_134">134</a>,
+<a href="#para_139">139</a>, <a href="#para_141">141</a>, <a href="#para_142">142</a>,
+<a href="#para_148">148</a>, and <a href="#para_150">150</a>.</p>
+
+<p>By order of the Secretary of War:</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+<span class="smcap">Leonard Wood</span>,<br />
+<i>Major General, Chief of Staff</i>.<br />
+</p>
+
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+
+<p><b>75.</b>... Third. The cut-off is kept turned down, except when using the
+magazine....</p>
+
+<p><b>96.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Unfix, BAYONET.</span></p>
+
+<p>If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Take the position of
+parade rest, grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right
+hand, press the spring with the forefinger of the left hand, raise the
+bayonet until the handle is about 6 inches above the muzzle of the
+piece, drop the point to the left, back of hand toward the body, and,
+glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing
+between the left arm and body; regrasp the piece with the right hand
+and resume the order.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg&#160;218]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
+from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
+most convenient manner.</p>
+
+<p>If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
+most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
+original position.</p>
+
+<p>Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity, but
+not in cadence.</p>
+
+<p><b>98.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <span class="sans">Inspection</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command, take the position of port arms. (<span class="sans">TWO</span>) With
+the right hand open the magazine gate, turn the bolt handle up, draw
+the bolt back and glance at the magazine and chamber. Having found
+them empty, or having emptied them, raise the head and eyes to the
+front.</p>
+
+<p><b>99.</b> Being at inspection arms: 1. <span class="sans">Order (Right shoulder, port)</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle
+down, close the magazine gate, pull the trigger, and resume port arms.
+At the command <span class="sans">arms</span>, complete the movement ordered.</p>
+
+<p><b>134.</b> Pieces being loaded and in the position of load, to execute other
+movements with the pieces loaded: 1. <span class="sans">Lock</span>, 2. <span class="sans">PIECES</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">Pieces</span> turn the safety lock fully to the right.</p>
+
+<p>The safety lock is said to be at the &quot;ready&quot; when turned to the left,
+and at the &quot;safe&quot; when turned to the right.</p>
+
+<p>The cut-off is said to be &quot;on&quot; when turned up and &quot;off&quot; when turned
+down.</p>
+
+<p><b>139.</b> Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. <span class="sans">With dummy (blank or
+ball) cartridges</span>, 2. <span class="sans">LOAD</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">load</span> each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half
+right and carries the right foot to the right, about one foot, to such
+position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
+body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height
+of the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back,
+takes a cartridge between the thumb and first two fingers find places
+it in the receiver; places palm of the hand against the back of the
+bolt handle;<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg&#160;219]</a></span> thrusts the bolt home with a quick motion, turning down
+the handle, and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each
+rear-rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar position
+opposite the interval to the right of his front-rank man, muzzle of
+the piece extending beyond the front rank, and loads.</p>
+
+<p>A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
+as practicable in the position of load.</p>
+
+<p>If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is similar; if
+kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the
+elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down the left hand
+steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt
+resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.</p>
+
+<p>For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
+are designated as that of <span class="sans">load</span>.</p>
+
+<p><b>141.</b> <span class="sans">FILL MAGAZINE.</span></p>
+
+<p>Take the position of load, if not already there, open the gate of the
+magazine with the right thumb, take five cartridges from the box or
+belt, and place them, with the bullets to the front, in the magazine,
+turning the barrel slightly to the left to facilitate the insertion of
+the cartridges; close the gate and carry the right hand to the small
+of the stock.</p>
+
+<p>To load from the magazine the command <span class="sans">From magazine</span> will be given
+preceding that of <span class="sans">LOAD</span>; the <span class="sans">cut-off</span> will be turned up on coming to
+the position of <span class="sans">load</span>.</p>
+
+<p>To resume loading from the belt the command <span class="sans">From belt</span> will be given
+preceding the command <span class="sans">LOAD</span>; the <span class="sans">cut-off</span> will be turned down on
+coming to the position of <span class="sans">load</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The commands <span class="sans">from magazine</span> and <span class="sans">from belt</span>, indicating the change in
+the manner of loading, will not be repeated in subsequent commands.</p>
+
+<p>The words <span class="sans">from belt</span> apply to cartridge box as well as belt.</p>
+
+<p>In loading from the magazine care should be taken to push the bolt
+fully forward and turn the handle down before drawing the bolt back,
+as otherwise the extractor will not catch the cartridge in the
+chamber, and jamming will occur with the cartridge following.</p>
+
+<p>To fire from the magazine, the command <span class="sans">MAGAZINE FIRE</span> may be given at
+any time. The cut-off is turned up and an increased rate of fire is
+executed. After the magazine is exhausted the cut-off is turned down
+and the firing continued, loading from the belt.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg&#160;220]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Magazine fire</span> is employed only when, in the opinion of the platoon
+leader or company commander, the maximum rate of fire becomes
+necessary.</p>
+
+<p><b>142.</b> <span class="sans">UNLOAD.</span></p>
+
+<p>All take the position of load, turn the <span class="sans">cut-off</span> up, if not already
+there, turn the safety lock to the left, and alternately open and
+close the chamber until all the cartridges are ejected. After the last
+cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed and the trigger pulled. The
+cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the box or
+belt, and the piece brought to the order.</p>
+
+<p><b>148.</b> <span class="sans">CLIP FIRE.</span></p>
+
+<p>Turn the cut-off up; <span class="sans">fire at will</span> (reloading from the magazine)
+until the cartridges in the piece are exhausted; turn the cut-off
+down; fill magazine; reload and take the position of <span class="sans">suspend firing</span>.</p>
+
+<p><b>150.</b> <span class="sans">
+CEASE FIRING.</span> [<a href="#ERRATA">Errata</a>]</p>
+
+<p>Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cartridge is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the
+trigger is pulled, sights are laid down, and the piece is brought to
+the order.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sans">Cease firing</span> is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg&#160;221]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="APPENDIX_B" id="APPENDIX_B"></a>APPENDIX B.</h2>
+
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+<span class="smcap">War Department</span>,<br />
+<span class="smcap">Office of the Chief of Staff</span>,<br />
+<i>Washington, December 2, 1911.</i><br />
+</p>
+
+<p>Paragraphs <a href="#para_747">747</a>, <a href="#para_792">792</a>,
+<a href="#para_793">793</a>, <a href="#para_794">794</a>, <a href="#para_795">795</a>,
+<a href="#para_796">796</a>, <a href="#para_797">797</a>, and
+<a href="#para_798">798</a>, Infantry Drill
+Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the Infantry
+Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General Orders, No.
+23, War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, the
+alternative paragraphs published herewith will govern.</p>
+
+<p>By order of the Secretary of War:</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+<span class="smcap">Leonard Wood</span>,<br />
+<i>Major General, Chief of Staff.</i><br />
+</p>
+
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+
+<p><b>747.</b> If the inspection is to include an examination of the blanket
+rolls the captain, before dismissing the company and after inspecting
+the file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in place, closes
+ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company back to four paces from the
+stacks, takes intervals, and commands: 1. <span class="sans">Unsling</span>, 2. <span class="sans">PACKS</span>, 3.
+<span class="sans">Open</span>, 4. <span class="sans">PACKS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command each man unslings his roll and places it on the
+ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end of shelter
+half to the right.</p>
+
+<p>At the fourth command the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular to the
+front with the triangular end of the shelter half to the front,
+opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the contents of
+his roll for inspection and resumes the attention.</p>
+
+<p>The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file
+closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, draws
+saber and commands: 1. <span class="sans">Close</span>, 2. <span class="sans">PACKS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly spread
+on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the front, folds
+his blanket once across its length and places it upon the shelter
+half, fold toward the bottom, edge<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg&#160;222]</a></span> one-half inch from the square end,
+the same amount of canvas uncovered at the top and bottom. He then
+places the parts of the pole on the side of the blanket next the
+square end of shelter half, near and parallel to the fold, end of pole
+about 6 inches from the edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly
+near the opposite edge of the blanket and distributes the other
+articles carried in the roll; folds the triangular end and then the
+exposed portion of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket.</p>
+
+<p>The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the front
+and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly two and
+two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each pair stands on
+the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely and buckles the
+straps, passing the end of the strap through both keeper and buckle,
+back over the buckle and under the keeper. With the roll so lying on
+the ground that the edge of the shelter half can just be seen when
+looking vertically downward one end is bent upward and over to meet
+the other, a clove hitch is taken with the guy rope first around the
+end to which it is attached and then around the other end, adjusting
+the length of rope between hitches to suit the wearer.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his roll in
+the position it was in after being unslung and stands at attention.</p>
+
+<p>All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: 1. <span class="sans">Sling</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">PACKS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command the rolls are slung, the end containing the pole
+to the rear.</p>
+
+<p>The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain completes the
+inspection as before.</p>
+
+<p><b>792.</b> Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:
+<span class="sans">FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a
+file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
+sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the
+company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken
+from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, and file closers
+form on a convenient flank. Before forming column of platoons,
+preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be redivided into two
+or more platoons regardless of the size of each. (<i>C.I.D.R., No. 2.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><b>793.</b> The captain then causes the company to take intervals as
+described in the <a href="#SCHOOL_OF_THE_SQUAD">School of the Squad</a>, and commands: <span class="sans">PITCH TENTS</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg&#160;223]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">pitch tents</span>, each man steps off obliquely to the
+right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt
+of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,
+barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front rank man
+then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of
+the right heel. All unsling and open the blanket rolls and take out
+the shelter half, poles, and pins. Each then spreads his shelter half,
+triangle to the rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, rear
+rank man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together.
+Each front rank man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the
+halves, and holds the pole upright beside the bayonet placed in the
+ground; his rear rank man, using the pins in front, pins down the
+front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching the
+canvas taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and drives
+the pin at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the rope
+taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear rank man adjusts
+the pole and the front rank man drives the pins. The rest of the pins
+are then driven by both men, the rear rank man working on the right.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents of the
+blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front of his own
+half on line with the front guy rope pin.</p>
+
+<p>The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents are
+pitched, should all be of the same length. (<i>C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 8.</i>)</p>
+
+<p><b>794.</b> When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are taken as
+described above; the position of the front pole is marked with a
+bayonet and equipments are laid aside. The men then proceed to the
+wagon, secure their rolls, return to their places, and pitch tents as
+heretofore described.</p>
+
+<p><b>795.</b> To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the same commands
+as before, except <span class="sans">Take half interval</span> is given instead of <span class="sans">Take
+interval</span>. In taking interval each man follows the preceding man at 2
+paces. The captain then commands: <span class="sans">PITCH DOUBLE TENTS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide and
+with him pitches a single shelter tent.</p>
+
+<p>Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the bayonet.</p>
+
+<p>The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two single
+tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. Two guy ropes
+are used at each end, the guy pins being placed in front of the corner
+pins.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg&#160;224]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; and by
+numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling in on the left
+are numbered, counting off if necessary.</p>
+
+<p>All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent is to
+occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular ends to
+the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, first the
+ridges and then the square ends. The front corners of the tent are
+pinned by the front-rank men, the odd number holding the poles, the
+even number driving the pins. The rear-rank men similarly pin the rear
+corners.</p>
+
+<p>While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of the front
+rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted by the even
+number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the center eyes of the
+shelter halves in the following order: (1) The lower half of the front
+tent; (2) the lower half of the rear tent; (3) the upper half of the
+front tent; (4) the upper half of the rear tent. The guy ropes are
+then adjusted.</p>
+
+<p>The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned back,
+contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at <span class="sans">attention</span>, each
+opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent.</p>
+
+<p><b>796.</b> Omitted.</p>
+
+<p><b>797.</b> Omitted.</p>
+
+<p><b>798.</b> Omitted.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg&#160;225]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="APPENDIX_C" id="APPENDIX_C"></a>APPENDIX C.</h2>
+
+<h3>MANUAL OF THE BAYONET.</h3>
+
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+<span class="smcap">War Department</span>,<br />
+<span class="smcap">Office of the Chief of Staff</span>,<br />
+<i>Washington, February 20, 1918</i>.<br />
+</p>
+
+<p>The following Manual of the Bayonet, prepared by a board consisting of
+Capt. Herschel Tupes, First Infantry, and Capt. Grosvenor L. Townsend,
+First Infantry, is approved and issued for the information and
+government of the Regular Army and the Organized Militia of the United
+States.</p>
+
+<p>By order of the Secretary of War.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+<span class="smcap">Leonard Wood</span>,<br />
+<i>Major General, Chief of Staff</i>.<br />
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[Pg&#160;227]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 45%;" />
+<h2>MANUAL OF THE BAYONET.</h2>
+
+<h3>UNITED STATES ARMY.</h3>
+
+
+<p><a name="para_1a"><b>1.</b></a> The infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable the
+enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often necessary to
+obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed in the use of the
+rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_2a"><b>2.</b></a> The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier how to make
+effective use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat; to make him
+quick and proficient in handling his rifle; to give him an accurate
+eye and a steady hand; and to give him confidence in the bayonet in
+offense and defense. When skill in these exercises has been acquired,
+the rifle will still remain a most formidable weapon at close quarters
+should the bayonet be lost or disabled.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_3a"><b>3.</b></a> Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will be judged by
+the skill shown by individuals in personal combat. For this purpose
+pairs or groups of opponents, selected at random from among recruits
+and trained soldiers, should engage in assaults, using the fencing
+equipment provided for the purpose.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_4a"><b>4.</b></a> Officers and specially selected and thoroughly instructed
+noncommissioned officers will act as instructors.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_5a"><b>5.</b></a> Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as the soldier
+is familiar with the handling of his rifle and will progress, as far
+as practicable, in the order followed in the text.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_6a"><b>6.</b></a> Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground; but practice should
+also be had on uneven ground, especially in the attack and defense of
+intrenchments.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_7a"><b>7.</b></a> These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic drill.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_8a"><b>8.</b></a> The principles of the commands are the same as those given in
+paragraphs <a href="#para_9">9</a>, <a href="#para_15">15</a>, and
+<a href="#para_38">38</a>, Infantry Drill Regulations. Inter<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[Pg&#160;228]</a></span>vals and
+distances will be taken as in paragraphs <a href="#para_109">109</a> and
+<a href="#para_111">111</a>, Infantry Drill
+Regulations, except that, in formations for bayonet exercises, the men
+should be at least four paces apart in every direction.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_9a"><b>9.</b></a> Before requiring soldiers to take a position or execute a movement
+for the first time, the instructor executes the same for the purpose
+of illustration, after which he requires the soldiers to execute the
+movement individually. Movements prescribed in this manual will not be
+executed in cadence as the attempt to do so results in incomplete
+execution and lack of vigor. Each movement will be executed correctly
+as quickly as possible by every man. As soon as the movements are
+executed accurately, the commands are given rapidly, as expertness
+with the bayonet depends chiefly upon quickness of motion.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_10a"><b>10.</b></a> The exercises will be interrupted at first by short and frequent
+rests. The rests will be less frequent as proficiency is attained.
+Fatigue and exhaustion will be specially guarded against as they
+prevent proper interest being taken in the exercises and delay the
+progress of the instruction. Rests will be given from the position of
+order arms in the manner prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE BAYONET.</h3>
+
+<h4><span class="smcap">Nomenclature and Description.</span></h4>
+
+<p><a name="para_11a"><b>11.</b></a> The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon consisting of three
+principal parts, viz, the <i>blade</i>, <i>guard</i>, and <i>grip</i>.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet.png" width="651" height="283" alt="bayonet" title="bayonet" /></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[Pg&#160;229]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_12a"><b>12.</b></a> The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, back,
+grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from guard to point
+is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge 5.6 inches.
+Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches. The weight of the
+bayonet is 1 pound; weight of rifle without bayonet is 8.69 pounds.
+The center of gravity of the rifle, with bayonet fixed, is just in
+front of the rear sight.</p>
+
+
+<h3>I. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_13a"><b>13.</b></a> The instructor explains the importance of good footwork and
+impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and suppleness of
+body are as important for attack and defense as is the ability to
+parry and deliver a strong point or cut.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_14a"><b>14.</b></a> All foot movements should be made from the position of <i>guard</i>. As
+far as practicable, they will be made on the balls of the feet to
+insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule can be laid down
+as to the length of the various foot movements; this depends entirely
+on the situations occurring in combat.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_15a"><b>15.</b></a> The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
+commands:</p>
+
+<p>1. <span class="sans">Bayonet exercise</span>, 2. <span class="sans">GUARD</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">guard</span>, half face to the right, carry back and place
+the right foot about once and a half its length to the rear and about
+3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each other an angle of
+about 60&#176;, weight of the body balanced equally on the balls of the
+feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands on hips, fingers to the
+front, thumbs to the rear, head erect, head and eyes straight to the
+front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_16a"><b>16.</b></a> To resume the attention, 1. <span class="sans">Squad</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ATTENTION</span>. The men take
+the position of the soldier and fix their attention.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_17a"><b>17.</b></a> <span class="sans">ADVANCE.</span> Advance the left foot quickly about once its length,
+follow immediately with the right foot the same distance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_18a"><b>18.</b></a> <span class="sans">RETIRE.</span> Move the right foot quickly to the rear about once its
+length, follow immediately with the left foot the same distance.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_19a"><b>19.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Front</span>, 2. <span class="sans">PASS</span>. Place the right foot quickly about once its
+length in front of the left, advance the left foot to its proper
+position in front of the right.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[Pg&#160;230]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_20a"><b>20.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Rear</span>, 2. <span class="sans">PASS</span>. Place the left foot quickly about once its
+length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to its proper
+position in rear of the left.</p>
+
+<p>The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or to
+withdraw quickly therefrom.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_21a"><b>21.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Right</span>, 2. <span class="sans">STEP</span>. Step to the right with the right foot about
+once its length and place the left foot in its proper relative
+position.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_22a"><b>22.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Left</span>, 2. <span class="sans">STEP</span>. Step to the left with the left foot about
+once its length and place the right foot in its proper relative
+position.</p>
+
+<p>These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more
+favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. Better
+ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. In bayonet
+fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in stepping to the
+right or left is the one which at the moment bears the least weight.</p>
+
+
+<h3>II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_23a"><b>23.</b></a> The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are the
+same as already given for movements without the rifle.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_24a"><b>24.</b></a> The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
+commands:</p>
+
+<p>1. <span class="sans">Bayonet exercise</span>, 2. <span class="sans">GUARD</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the second command take the position of guard (see <a href="#para_15a">par. 15</a>); at the
+same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with
+the left hand just below the lower band, fingers between the stock and
+gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping
+the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip,
+elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_25a"><b>25.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Order</span>, 2. <span class="sans">ARMS</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of
+order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_26a"><b>26.</b></a> During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will be
+executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[Pg&#160;233]</a></span> which they
+may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet1.png" width="541" height="554" alt="bayonet exercise" title="bayonet exercise" /></p>
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b> <a href="#para_27a">Par. 27</a>. <a href="#para_24a">Par. 24</a>.</b></p>
+
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Attacks.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_27a"><b>27.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">THRUST.</span></p>
+
+<p>Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm,
+turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet at
+the point to be attacked, butt covering the right forearm. At the same
+time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of the
+body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot always on
+the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command.</p>
+
+<p>The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm,
+the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the
+attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach,
+chest, head, neck, and limbs.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet2.png" width="552" height="386" alt="bayonet exercise" title="bayonet exercise" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b> <a href="#para_28a">Par. 28</a>.</b></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_28a"><b>28.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">LUNGE.</span></p>
+
+<p>Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot
+is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must always
+be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately without
+command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot if, for
+any reason, it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In the
+latter case, the preparatory common <span class="sans">forward</span> will be given. Each
+method should be practiced.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet3.png" width="289" height="472" alt="bayonet exercise" title="bayonet exercise" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b> <a href="#para_29a">Par. 29</a>.</b></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_29a"><b>29.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Butt</span>, 2. <span class="sans">STRIKE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle
+against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about
+the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the
+rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command.</p>
+
+<p>The points of attack in their order of importance are, head, neck,
+stomach, and crotch.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_30a"><b>30.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Cut</span>, 2. <span class="sans">DOWN</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of
+attack. Guard is resumed without command.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_31a"><b>31.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Cut</span>, 2. <span class="sans">RIGHT (LEFT)</span>.</p>
+
+<p>With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left),
+directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without
+command.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[Pg&#160;235]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an
+enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false,
+or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in
+continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_32a"><b>32.</b></a> To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier will
+change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner, for
+example: 1. <span class="sans">To the right rear</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Cut</span>, 3. <span class="sans">DOWN</span>; 1. <span class="sans">To the
+right</span>, 2. <span class="sans">LUNGE</span>; 1. <span class="sans">To the left</span>, 2. <span class="sans">THRUST</span>, etc.</p>
+
+<p>Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the
+body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best
+accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot.</p>
+
+<p>These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
+guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet4.png" width="367" height="723" alt="bayonet exercise" title="bayonet exercise" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b> <a href="#para_33a">Par. 33</a>. <a href="#para_36a">Par. 36</a>.</b></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_33a"><b>33.</b></a> Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting and
+lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings or
+other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably
+suspended at desired heights.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_34a"><b>34.</b></a> The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by
+endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by
+directing the attack against one opening while looking at another.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_35a"><b>35.</b></a> The soldier should also experience the effect of actual resistance
+offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in attacks. This will
+be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_36a"><b>36.</b></a> Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the
+execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the
+bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can
+be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely
+together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is
+preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc.,
+are also suitable.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Defenses.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_37a"><b>37.</b></a> In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard is
+resumed, by command, after each parry. When the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[Pg&#160;238]</a></span> men have become
+proficient, the instructor will cause them to resume the position of
+guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_38a"><b>38.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Parry</span>, 2. <span class="sans">RIGHT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply
+to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6
+inches to the right.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_39a"><b>39.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Parry</span>, 2. <span class="sans">LEFT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to
+cover the point attacked.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet5.png" width="521" height="489" alt="bayonet exercise" title="bayonet exercise" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b> <a href="#para_40a">Par. 40</a>. <a href="#para_41a">Par 41</a>.</b></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_40a"><b>40.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Parry</span>, 2. <span class="sans">HIGH</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of
+vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front.</p>
+
+<p>When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may be
+supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This
+position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations,
+such as men mounted or on top of parapets.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet6.png" width="522" height="522" alt="bayonet exercise" title="bayonet exercise" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b> <a href="#para_41a">Par. 41</a>. <a href="#para_44a">Par. 44</a>.</b></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_41a"><b>41.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Low parry</span>, 2. <span class="sans">RIGHT (LEFT)</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height of the
+knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the right (left)
+to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened.</p>
+
+<p>These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist, leaves
+the head and body exposed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_42a"><b>42.</b></a> Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short
+motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far
+as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against <span class="sans">butt
+strike</span> are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point
+attacked.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_43a"><b>43.</b></a> To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the
+soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most
+convenient manner; for example: 1. <span class="sans">To the left rear</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Parry</span>, 3.
+<span class="sans">HIGH</span>; 1. <span class="sans">To the right</span>, 2. <span class="sans">Parry</span>, 3. <span class="sans">RIGHT</span>, etc.</p>
+
+<p>These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
+guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.</p>
+
+<p>In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is
+danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a
+vertical position.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[Pg&#160;240]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet7.png" width="273" height="504" alt="bayonet exercise" title="bayonet exercise" /></p>
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b> <a href="#para_44a">Par. 44</a>.</b></p>
+
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+
+<h3>III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_44a"><b>44.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Club rifle</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SWING</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn
+the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and
+muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at
+the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder farthest from the
+opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and
+knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet,
+shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity.
+<span class="sans">SWING.</span> Tighten the grasp of the hands and swing the rifle to the
+front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent and
+immediately return to the position of <span class="sans">club rifle</span> by completing the
+swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command,
+<span class="sans">SWING</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any
+guard or parry that may be interposed.</p>
+
+<p>Being at <span class="sans">club rifle</span>, order arms is resumed by command.</p>
+
+<p>The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_45a"><b>45.</b></a> The position of <span class="sans">club rifle</span> may be taken from any position of the
+rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in
+personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of
+the bayonet.</p>
+
+
+<h3>IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_46a"><b>46.</b></a> The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous
+attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by the single
+movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the
+reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an
+attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of
+the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied
+by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to
+the right or left may be accompanied by attacks or defenses.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_47a"><b>47.</b></a> Not more than three movements will be used in any combination. The
+instructor should first indicate the number of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[Pg&#160;242]</a></span> movements that are to
+be combined as <span class="sans">two movements</span> or <span class="sans">three movements</span>. The execution is
+determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard is
+taken upon the completion of the last movement only.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Examples</span>.</h3>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p>
+<span class="sans">Front pass and LUNGE.<br />
+Right step and THRUST.<br />
+Left step and low parry RIGHT.<br />
+Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE.<br />
+Lunge and cut RIGHT.<br />
+Parry right and parry HIGH.<br />
+Butt strike and cut DOWN.<br />
+Thrust and parry HIGH.<br />
+Parry high and LUNGE.<br />
+Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT.<br />
+Right step, parry left and cut DOWN.<br />
+To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN.<br />
+To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE.</span><br />
+</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><a name="para_48a"><b>48.</b></a> Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will be
+made against the dummies both in quick time and double time.</p>
+
+
+<h3>V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_49a"><b>49.</b></a> The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as far
+as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet exercises.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_50a"><b>50.</b></a> The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme
+importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack
+fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the
+opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent
+on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take
+the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the
+offensive and take immediate advantage of it.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_51a"><b>51.</b></a> Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing. Time
+for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a single
+hasty glance.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[Pg&#160;243]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_52a"><b>52.</b></a> In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be
+plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the point
+of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in night
+attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_53a"><b>53.</b></a> Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The
+point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in
+the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to
+the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for
+attack or defense.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_54a"><b>54.</b></a> Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left hand.
+His position of <span class="sans">guard</span> will not differ materially from that described
+in <a href="#para_24a">paragraph 24</a>. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge, he will be
+at a great disadvantage.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_55a"><b>55.</b></a> The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is particularly
+useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a sentry can
+strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_56a"><b>56.</b></a> Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the
+muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will
+be directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attack him with short,
+stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_57a"><b>57.</b></a> The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and
+lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and
+advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp
+parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed
+to a counter attack, which should follow promptly.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_58a"><b>58.</b></a> Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage by
+grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from behind.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_59a"><b>59.</b></a> In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must be
+made to get on his near or left side, because here his reach is much
+shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable such
+an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the horseman.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_60a"><b>60.</b></a> In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be best
+observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[Pg&#160;244]</a></span> approach
+generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within
+attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle
+of his body.</p>
+
+
+<h3>VI. FENCING EXERCISES.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_61a"><b>61.</b></a> Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of thrusts,
+parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will, the
+opponent replying with suitable parries and returns.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_62a"><b>62.</b></a> The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before
+the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such
+condition as will prevent accidents.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_63a"><b>63.</b></a> The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order,
+facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a
+distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as
+number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_64a"><b>64.</b></a> The opponents being at the order facing each other, the instructor
+commands: <span class="sans">SALUTE</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to
+the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and
+joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two.)
+Drop the arm smartly by the side.</p>
+
+<p>This salute is the fencing salute.</p>
+
+<p>All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will
+begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_65a"><b>65.</b></a> After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor
+commands: 1. <span class="sans">Fencing exercise</span>, 2. <span class="sans">GUARD</span>.</p>
+
+<p>At the command <span class="sans">guard</span> each man comes to the position of <span class="sans">guard</span>,
+heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing
+lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the
+opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the <span class="sans">engage</span> or <span class="sans">engage
+right</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_66a"><b>66.</b></a> Being at the <span class="sans">engage right</span>: <span class="sans">ENGAGE LEFT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his
+opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
+right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the en<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[Pg&#160;245]</a></span>gaged position,
+each man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the
+corresponding portion of the opponent's bayonet.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_67a"><b>67.</b></a> Being at <span class="sans">engage left</span>: <span class="sans">ENGAGE RIGHT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his
+opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
+left and <span class="sans">engages</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_68a"><b>68.</b></a> Being <span class="sans">engaged</span>: <span class="sans">ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The attack <span class="sans">engages left</span> and then immediately <span class="sans">engages right</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_69a"><b>69.</b></a> Being <span class="sans">engaged left</span>: <span class="sans">ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>The attack <span class="sans">engages right</span> and then immediately <span class="sans">engages left</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_70a"><b>70.</b></a> 1. <span class="sans">Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT)</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, COUNTER</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly
+drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original
+position.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_71a"><b>71.</b></a> In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage, a
+certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the
+play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This is
+necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended attack.
+It also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for his
+assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the movement is
+controlled by the left hand, the right remaining stationary.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_72a"><b>72.</b></a> After some exercise in <span class="sans">engage</span>, <span class="sans">engage left</span>, and <span class="sans">counter</span>,
+exercises will be given in the <span class="sans">assaults</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Assaults.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_73a"><b>73.</b></a> The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name, as
+head, heck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the
+knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are
+first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at
+the command <span class="sans">assault</span>. Number one executes the attack, and number two
+parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one
+parries.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_74a"><b>74.</b></a> For convenience in instruction <span class="sans">assaults</span> are divided into <span class="sans">simple
+attacks</span>, <span class="sans">counter attacks</span>, <span class="sans">attacks on the rifle</span>, and <span class="sans">feints</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[Pg&#160;246]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Simple Attacks.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_75a"><b>75.</b></a> Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement. There
+are three simple attacks&#8212;the <span class="sans">straight</span>, the <span class="sans">disengagement</span>, and the
+<span class="sans">counter disengagement</span>. They are not preceded by a feint.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_76a"><b>76.</b></a> In the <span class="sans">straight</span> the bayonet is directed straight at an opening
+from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle may, or
+may not, be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high or low,
+contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing the
+attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used in
+the engage may be continued in the attack.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage right</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number one, at neck</span> (head,
+chest, right leg, etc.), <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, parry right</span>; 3.
+<span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_77a"><b>77.</b></a> In the <span class="sans">disengagement</span> contact with the opponent's rifle is
+abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled <span class="sans">under</span> or <span class="sans">over</span>
+his bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This
+attack is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet
+from the moment contact is abandoned.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage right</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number one</span>, at stomach
+(left chest, left leg, etc.), <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, parry left</span>
+(etc.); 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_78a"><b>78.</b></a> In the <span class="sans">counter disengagement</span> a swift attack is made into the
+opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the
+engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral
+movement of the bayonet into the opening.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage right</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number two, engage left</span>; 2.
+<span class="sans">Number one</span>, at chest, <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 3. <span class="sans">Number two, parry left</span>; 4.
+<span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the
+opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_79a"><b>79.</b></a> A <span class="sans">counter attack</span> or <span class="sans">return</span> is one made instantly after or in
+continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible.
+This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter
+parry. The counter attack should also be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[Pg&#160;247]</a></span> made at, or just before, the
+full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made, a
+simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the
+opponent's body.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at <span class="sans">engage</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number two</span>, at chest, <span class="sans">lunge</span>; 2.
+<span class="sans">Number one, parry right</span>, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.),
+<span class="sans">thrust</span>; 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Attacks on the Rifle.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_80a"><b>80.</b></a> These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or disclosing
+an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the <span class="sans">press</span>,
+the <span class="sans">beat</span>, and the <span class="sans">twist</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_81a"><b>81.</b></a> In the <span class="sans">press</span> the attack quickly presses against the opponent's
+bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the attack
+is delivered.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number one, press</span>, and at chest,
+<span class="sans">thrust</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, parry right</span>; 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_82a"><b>82.</b></a> The attack by <span class="sans">disengagement</span> is particularly effective following
+<span class="sans">the press</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number one, press</span>, and at
+stomach, <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, low parry left</span>; 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_83a"><b>83.</b></a> The <span class="sans">beat</span> is an attack in which a sharp blow is struck against
+the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an
+opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when
+there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number one, beat</span>, and at stomach
+(chest, etc.), <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, parry left</span>; 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_84a"><b>84.</b></a> In the <span class="sans">twist</span> the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle or
+bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and a
+straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength
+on the part of the attack.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number one, twist</span>, and at
+stomach, <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, low parry, left</span>; 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Feints.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_85a"><b>85.</b></a> Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are
+made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[Pg&#160;248]</a></span> exposes the
+desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according
+to the number of such movements made by the attack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_86a"><b>86.</b></a> In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little force
+as possible is put into a feint.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage</span>, <span class="sans">Number one, feint</span> head <span class="sans">thrust</span>; at
+stomach, <span class="sans">lunge</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, parry right and low parry right</span>; 3.
+<span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes
+both parries.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_87a"><b>87.</b></a> In double feints first one part of the body and then another is
+threatened and a third attacked.</p>
+
+<p>Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number one, feint straight thrust</span>
+at chest; <span class="sans">disengagement</span> at chest; at stomach, <span class="sans">lunge</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number
+two, parry right, parry left</span>, and <span class="sans">low parry left</span>; 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_88a"><b>88.</b></a> An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the
+<span class="sans">press</span> or <span class="sans">beat</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_89a"><b>89.</b></a> In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried. When
+the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the attack the
+feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a counter
+feint.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_90a"><b>90.</b></a> A <span class="sans">counter feint</span> is a feint following the opponent's feint or
+following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined
+movements.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Combined Movements.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_91a"><b>91.</b></a> When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various foot
+movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor
+combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession,
+increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more
+skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently.</p>
+
+<p>1. Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage</span>, 1. <span class="sans">Number one, by disengagement</span>
+at chest, <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, parry left, right step</span> (left foot
+first), and <span class="sans">lunge</span>; 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p>2. Example: Being at <span class="sans">engage left</span>, <span class="sans">Number one, press</span> and <span class="sans">lunge</span>;
+2. <span class="sans">Number two, parry right, left step</span>, and <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 3. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[Pg&#160;249]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>3. Example: Being at the <span class="sans">engage</span>, <span class="sans">Number one, by disengagement</span> at
+chest, <span class="sans">thrust</span>; 2. <span class="sans">Number two, parry left, front pass</span>, and at head
+<span class="sans">butt strike</span>; 3. <span class="sans">Number one, right step</span>; 4. <span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_92a"><b>92.</b></a> Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as <span class="sans">cross
+counters</span>, and example No. 3 of movements known as <span class="sans">close counters</span>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_93a"><b>93.</b></a> A <span class="sans">chancery</span> is an attack by means of which the opponent is
+disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which
+disables his weapon.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_94a"><b>94.</b></a> When the different combinations are executed with sufficient skill
+the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized and
+executed at the command <span class="sans">assault</span>. The accuracy and celerity of the
+movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view to
+the correction of faulty execution.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_95a"><b>95.</b></a> It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to
+leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of
+instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the
+object of the drill.</p>
+
+
+<h3>VII. FENCING AT WILL.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_96a"><b>96.</b></a> As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to
+the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men,
+each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself.
+Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random
+attacks and defenses.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_97a"><b>97.</b></a> The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a time.
+Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn different
+methods of attack and defense from each other.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_98a"><b>98.</b></a> The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a
+view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards
+everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the
+movements and quick perception of the adversary's intentions.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_99a"><b>99.</b></a> Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent dodging
+to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be
+continually encouraged.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[Pg&#160;250]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="para_100a"><b>100.</b></a> In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents facing
+each other at the position of order arms, salute. They then
+immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles
+engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his
+opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided
+before the salute.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_101a"><b>101.</b></a> The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing salute
+having been rendered, the instructor commands, <span class="sans">At will</span>, 2.
+<span class="sans">ASSAULT</span>, after which either party has the right to attack. To
+interrupt the contest the instructor will command <span class="sans">HALT</span>, at which the
+combatants will immediately come to the order. To terminate the
+contest the instructor will command, 1. <span class="sans">Halt</span>, 2. <span class="sans">SALUTE</span>, at which
+the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove
+their masks.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_102a"><b>102.</b></a> When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one
+opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at
+<span class="sans">charge bayonet</span>, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver
+an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor
+commands, <span class="sans">HALT</span>, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in
+assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double
+time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a
+distance not exceeding 30 yards.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_103a"><b>103.</b></a> The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide
+doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest
+indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment
+on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies and
+explain how they may be avoided in the future.</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+<img src="images/bayonet8.png" width="373" height="444" alt="bayonet exercise" title="bayonet exercise" /></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center"><b> <a href="#para_104a">Par. 104</a>.</b></p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_104a"><b>104.</b></a> As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield the
+rifle left handed, that is on the left side of the body, left hand at
+the small Of the stock. Many men will be able to use this method to
+advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is wounded.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_105a"><b>105.</b></a> After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in
+fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When
+practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this
+character.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[Pg&#160;252]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of
+umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at
+once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the
+numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required
+in group fencing.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Rules for Fencing at Will.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_106a"><b>106.</b></a> 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit
+counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient
+force to disable.</p>
+
+<p>2. Upon receiving a hit, call out &quot;hit.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. A
+position of engage is taken.</p>
+
+<p>4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only
+when the first hit was not called.</p>
+
+<p>5. When it is necessary to stop the contest&#8212;for example, because of
+breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection&#8212;take the
+position of the order.</p>
+
+<p>6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will
+not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend
+himself.</p>
+
+<p>7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing.</p>
+
+<p>8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Suggestions for Fencing at Will.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_107a"><b>107.</b></a> When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's position
+and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to discover, if
+possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the adversary out
+and induce him to expose that part of the body at which the attack is
+to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a feint and then
+make the real attack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_108a"><b>108.</b></a> Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are
+difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more
+exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there
+is no previous warning of its delivery al<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">[Pg&#160;253]</a></span>though it should always be
+expected. Returns are made without lunging if the adversary can be
+reached by thrusts or cuts.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_109a"><b>109.</b></a> Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without
+knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and
+leads to instinctive returns&#8212;that is, habitual returns with certain
+attacks from certain parries&#8212;a fault which the skilled opponent will
+soon discover.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_110a"><b>110.</b></a> Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_111a"><b>111.</b></a> The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many
+forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible.
+Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted.</p>
+
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Hints for Instructors.</span></h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_112a"><b>112.</b></a> The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of
+his weapon, not only to show the various movements, but also to lead
+in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and
+arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as
+instructors by fencing with each other.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_113a"><b>113.</b></a> The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and his
+degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the instructor
+is demonstrating the combinations, feints, returns, and parries the
+rapidity of his attack should be regulated by the skill of the pupil
+and no more force than is necessary should be used. If the pupil
+exposes himself too much in the feints and parries the instructor
+will, by an attack, convince him of his error; but if these returns be
+too swiftly or too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious
+and the precision of his attack will be impaired. The object is to
+teach the pupil, not to give exhibitions of superior skill.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_114a"><b>114.</b></a> Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered and
+fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick advantage of
+such opportunities.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">[Pg&#160;254]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>VIII. COMPETITIONS.</h3>
+
+<p><a name="para_115a"><b>115.</b></a> In competitions between different organizations none but skillful
+fencers will be allowed to participate.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_116a"><b>116.</b></a> In contests between two men judges may assign values to hits as
+follows:</p>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+  <tbody>
+  <tr>
+    <td style="border-bottom: 2px solid black">&#160;</td>
+    <td style="border-bottom: 2px solid black">Thrusts and lunges.</td>
+    <td style="border-bottom: 2px solid black">Cuts.</td>
+    <td style="border-bottom: 2px solid black">Butt of rifle.</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>Stomach</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">4</td>
+    <td>&#160;</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">1</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>Chest</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">3</td>
+    <td>&#160;</td>
+    <td>&#160;</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>Head</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">3</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">2</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">3</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>Neck</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">2</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">2</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">2</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>Legs</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">1</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">1</td>
+    <td>&#160;</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>Arms and hands</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">1</td>
+    <td style="text-align: center">1</td>
+    <td>&#160;</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td colspan="4">Stepping out of bounds, 4 points.<br />
+    </td>
+    </tr>
+  </tbody>
+  </table>
+
+<p>&#160;</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_117a"><b>117.</b></a> When superiority between two men is decided by bouts, each bout
+will be decided by itself, i.e., points won in one bout can not be
+carried over to another.</p>
+
+<p><a name="para_118a"><b>118.</b></a> Details other than those mentioned above will be arranged by the
+officials of the competition.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 45%;" />
+
+<p style="text-align: right"><b>[C.I.D.R. 20.]</b></p>
+
+<h2><a name="ERRATA"></a>INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.</h2>
+
+<table style="width: 100%" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+  <tbody>
+  <tr>
+    <td><span class="smcap">Changes</span></td>
+    <td rowspan="2"><span style="font-size: 175%">}</span></td>
+    <td style="text-align: right">WAR DEPARTMENT,</td>
+  </tr>
+  <tr>
+    <td>No. 20</td>
+    <td style="text-align: right"><span class="smcap">Washington</span>, <i>August 18, 1917</i>.</td>
+  </tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><a href="#para_150">Paragraph 150</a> and paragraph 150 of
+<a href="#APPENDIX_A">Appendix A</a>, Infantry Drill
+Regulations (corrected to Apr. 15, 1917), are changed as follows, to
+correct error made in printing that edition:</p>
+
+<p><b>150.</b> (<a href="#Page_47">Page 47</a>.) <b>CEASE FIRING.</b></p>
+
+<p>Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load; those not loaded are loaded; sights are laid, pieces are locked
+and brought to the order.</p>
+
+<p><b>Cease firing</b> is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position, or to steady the men. (<i>C.I.D.R. No. 20, August 18, 1917.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>[300.73, A.G.O.]</p>
+
+<p><b>150.</b> (<a href="#Page_220">Page 220</a>,
+<a href="#APPENDIX_A">Appendix A</a>.) <b>CEASE FIRING.</b></p>
+
+<p>Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge
+is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights
+are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order.</p>
+
+<p><b>Cease firing</b> is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men. (<i>C.I.D.R. No. 20, August 18, 1917.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>[300.73, A.G.O.]</p>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">By order of the Secretary of War:</span></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: right">
+H.L. SCOTT,<br />
+<i>Major General, Chief of Staff</i>.<br />
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Official:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em">H.P. McCAIN,</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em"><i>The Adjutant General</i>.</span><br />
+</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 45%;" />
+
+<h3>Books necessary for citizens and for every man<br />
+interested in home
+defense and the military.</h3>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tbody>
+<tr><td>Field Service Regulations</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Regulations for the Army of the United States</td><td style="text-align: right">1.00</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Manual for Army Bakers</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Blue Jackets Manual</td><td style="text-align: right">1.00</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Sanitary Troops</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Manual of Physical Training</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Rules of Land Warfare</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Coast Artillery Drill Regulations</td><td style="text-align: right">1.00</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Provisional Drill &amp; Service Reg. For Field Artillery</td><td style="text-align: right">1.25</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Ship and Gun Drills</td><td style="text-align: right">.60</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Cavalry Drill Regulations</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Small Arms Firing Manual</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>United States Army Transport Service Regulations</td><td style="text-align: right">.50</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Manual for Army Cooks</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Engineer's Field Manual</td><td style="text-align: right">1.25</td></tr>
+<tr><td>The Deck and Boat Book</td><td style="text-align: right">.60</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Infantry Drill Regulations</td><td style="text-align: right">.50</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Drill Regulations for Machine Gun Companies</td><td style="text-align: right">.30</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Manual of Interior Guard Duty United States Army</td><td style="text-align: right">.50</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Signal Book United States Army</td><td style="text-align: right">.35</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Provisional Drill Regulations for 6' Howitzers</td><td style="text-align: right">1.25</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Drill Regulations for Field Companies of Signal Corps</td><td style="text-align: right">.75</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Gunnery and Explosive</td><td style="text-align: right">.35</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Manual for Court Martials</td><td style="text-align: right">1.10</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Manual for Medical Department</td><td style="text-align: right">1.10</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Army Horse in Accident &amp; Disease</td><td style="text-align: right">.85</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Non-Commissioned Officers and Privates Manual</td><td style="text-align: right">.50</td></tr>
+<tr><td>Provisional Drill Reg. for Horse and Light Artillery</td><td style="text-align: right">1.25</td></tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3>All the above Military and Naval text books have<br />
+been compiled by U.S.
+Army and Navy officers<br />
+and contain all changes to date.</h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center">
+MILITARY PUBLISHING CO.<br />
+42 BROADWAY<br />
+NEW YORK<br />
+</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>FOOTNOTES</h2>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_1_1" id="Footnote_1_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1_1"><span class="label">[1]</span> </a> Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_2_2" id="Footnote_2_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_2_2"><span class="label">[2]</span> </a> The &quot;pack&quot; includes blanket, poncho, and shelter tent.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_3_3" id="Footnote_3_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_3_3"><span class="label">[3]</span> </a> With a 4-foot white and red regimental signal flag.</p></div>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED STATES ARMY, 1911***</p>
+<p>******* This file should be named 20866-h.txt or 20866-h.zip *******</p>
+<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br />
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/6/20866">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/8/6/20866</a></p>
+<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.</p>
+
+<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.</p>
+
+
+
+<pre>
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>.
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a>
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a>
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a>
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7235b12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet1.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet1.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..757367a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet1.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet2.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet2.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73cfe3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet2.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet3.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet3.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..97e281a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet3.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet4.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet4.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e145ef2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet4.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet5.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet5.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9433b68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet5.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet6.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet6.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e272a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet6.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet7.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet7.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a32354
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet7.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/bayonet8.png b/20866-h/images/bayonet8.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45e6da0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/bayonet8.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/deco.png b/20866-h/images/deco.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb8b44a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/deco.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music01.png b/20866-h/images/music01.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f864551
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music01.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music02.png b/20866-h/images/music02.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cca3066
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music02.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music03.png b/20866-h/images/music03.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..59fbcc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music03.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music04.png b/20866-h/images/music04.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddbee79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music04.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music05.png b/20866-h/images/music05.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0dd4d37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music05.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music06.png b/20866-h/images/music06.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2faf89a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music06.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music07.png b/20866-h/images/music07.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13df8bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music07.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music08.png b/20866-h/images/music08.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8213cef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music08.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music09.png b/20866-h/images/music09.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed512bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music09.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music10.png b/20866-h/images/music10.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f45a69b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music10.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music11.png b/20866-h/images/music11.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45a7c1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music11.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music12.png b/20866-h/images/music12.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..012a54b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music12.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music13.png b/20866-h/images/music13.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..25ebee2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music13.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music14.png b/20866-h/images/music14.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db7be9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music14.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music15.png b/20866-h/images/music15.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa47c37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music15.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music16.png b/20866-h/images/music16.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95a1096
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music16.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music17a.png b/20866-h/images/music17a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9cb3e0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music17a.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music17b.png b/20866-h/images/music17b.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..caad8b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music17b.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music18.png b/20866-h/images/music18.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..258807d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music18.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music19.png b/20866-h/images/music19.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a310177
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music19.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music20.png b/20866-h/images/music20.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f82b3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music20.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music21.png b/20866-h/images/music21.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f1d399
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music21.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music22.png b/20866-h/images/music22.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..991e595
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music22.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music23.png b/20866-h/images/music23.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36864ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music23.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music24.png b/20866-h/images/music24.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fda6204
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music24.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music25.png b/20866-h/images/music25.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5945208
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music25.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music26.png b/20866-h/images/music26.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c69aef1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music26.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music27.png b/20866-h/images/music27.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..beb3bef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music27.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music28.png b/20866-h/images/music28.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0636afd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music28.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music29a.png b/20866-h/images/music29a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b99f69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music29a.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music29b.png b/20866-h/images/music29b.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bd8a7c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music29b.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music30a.png b/20866-h/images/music30a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a18aaec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music30a.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music30b.png b/20866-h/images/music30b.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2531742
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music30b.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music32.png b/20866-h/images/music32.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..245230a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music32.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music33.png b/20866-h/images/music33.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b120cd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music33.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music34.png b/20866-h/images/music34.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..38d4fb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music34.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music35.png b/20866-h/images/music35.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c9b123
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music35.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music36.png b/20866-h/images/music36.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65e6b09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music36.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music37.png b/20866-h/images/music37.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..904b8b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music37.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music38.png b/20866-h/images/music38.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d42871e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music38.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music39.png b/20866-h/images/music39.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7e3648
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music39.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music40.png b/20866-h/images/music40.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba76f35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music40.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/music41.png b/20866-h/images/music41.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..11a0b75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/music41.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate2.png b/20866-h/images/plate2.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5343a14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate2.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate2lg.png b/20866-h/images/plate2lg.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..27389a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate2lg.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate3.png b/20866-h/images/plate3.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bee70bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate3.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate3lg.png b/20866-h/images/plate3lg.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1dafe6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate3lg.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate4.png b/20866-h/images/plate4.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ed6f6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate4.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate4lg.png b/20866-h/images/plate4lg.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee76f76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate4lg.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate5.png b/20866-h/images/plate5.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c49b297
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate5.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate5lg.png b/20866-h/images/plate5lg.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28c2233
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate5lg.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/plate6.png b/20866-h/images/plate6.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b300494
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/plate6.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/rifle.png b/20866-h/images/rifle.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9896aed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/rifle.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/semaphore1.png b/20866-h/images/semaphore1.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..420f0d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/semaphore1.png
diff --git a/20866-h/images/semaphore2.png b/20866-h/images/semaphore2.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff9472f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/images/semaphore2.png
diff --git a/20866-h/music/01.ly b/20866-h/music/01.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9cdcaa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/01.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "1. First Call." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/8
+  \tempomark
+
+  \partial 8
+  \times 2/3 { g16[ c e] } |
+  g8 \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 |
+  e8 \times 2/3 { e16[ e e] } e8 |
+  c[ e c] | g r \bar "" \break
+
+  \times 2/3 { g16[ c e] } |
+  g8 \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 | g[ e c] |
+  g8 \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 | c\fermata r \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/01.midi b/20866-h/music/01.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a439538
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/01.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/02.ly b/20866-h/music/02.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a7c959
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/02.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "2. Guard Mounting." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 6/8
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c } c8] e[ c e] |
+  g[ e g] e[ c e] |
+  g4 r8  c,[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c } c8] |
+  e[ c e] g[ e g] |
+  e[ c g] c4 r8 |
+
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c } c8] e[ c e] |
+  g[ e g] e[ c e] |
+  g4 r8  c,[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c } c8] |
+  e[ c e] g[ e g] |
+  c,4\fermata r r \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/02.midi b/20866-h/music/02.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d6ea7db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/02.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/03.ly b/20866-h/music/03.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63d485d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/03.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "3. Full Dress." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/8
+  \once \override TextScript #'padding = #2
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8 \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 | % Triplet mark missing in original
+  e'4\fermata r8 |
+  c8 \times 2/3 { c16[ c c] } c8 |
+  g'4\fermata r8 |
+  e8\staccatissimo[ g\staccatissimo e\staccatissimo] |
+  c4\fermata r8 \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/03.midi b/20866-h/music/03.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..17e10b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/03.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/04.ly b/20866-h/music/04.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1fa58b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/04.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "4. Overcoats." }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+
+  g8[( c]) c4 |
+  g8[( c]) c4 |
+  g8[( c]) c4\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/04.midi b/20866-h/music/04.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a1b84a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/04.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/05.ly b/20866-h/music/05.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..78cb99c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/05.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "5. Drill." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \partial 8 c16[ c] |
+  c8[ g16 g] g8[ e'16 e] |
+  e8[ c16 c] c8 r8 |
+  g8[ c16 e] g8[ e] | \break
+
+  g4. c,16[ c] |
+  c8[ g16 g] g8[ e'16 e] |
+  e8[ c16 c] c4 |
+  g8[ g16 g] \times 2/3 {g8[ g g]} |
+  c4 r8 \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/05.midi b/20866-h/music/05.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57961f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/05.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/06.ly b/20866-h/music/06.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ab7f76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/06.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "6. Stable." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 6/8
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8[ g16 g g g] c8[ g c] |
+  e[ e16 e e e] e8[ c e] |
+  g[ g16 g g g] g8[ e c] |
+
+  g[ g16 g g g] g4\fermata r8 |
+  c[ c16 c c c] c4 e8 |
+  g,[ g16 g g g] g4 r8 |
+
+  e'[ e16 e e e] e4 g8 |
+  e[ c16 c c c] c4\fermata r8 |
+  g[ g16 g g g] c8[ g c] |
+
+  e[ e16 e e e] e8[ g, e'] |
+  g[ g16 g g g] g8[ e c] |
+  g[ g16 g g g] c4\fermata r8 \bar "||" % Fermata misplaced in original
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/06.midi b/20866-h/music/06.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43946ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/06.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/07.ly b/20866-h/music/07.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a845330
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/07.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=12\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "7. Water." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \times 2/3 { g8[ c e] } g8[ e] g[ e c e] |
+  g,4\fermata r \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/07.midi b/20866-h/music/07.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0e5629
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/07.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/08.ly b/20866-h/music/08.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..286a609
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/08.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "8. Boots and Saddles." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \times 2/3 { g8[ c e] } g8[ e]
+    \times 2/3 { c8[ g c] } \times 2/3 { c16[ c c] } c8 |
+  \times 2/3 { c8[ g c] } c8.[ c16] c8.[ c16] c4 \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/08.midi b/20866-h/music/08.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09651b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/08.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/09.ly b/20866-h/music/09.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52af0fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/09.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "9. Assembly." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Moderate. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \partial 4 g8.[ g16] |
+  c8.[ g16 c8. e16] c4 c8.[ c16] |
+  e8.[ c16 e8. g16] e4 c8.[ e16] | \break
+
+  g4 e8.[ c16] g4 g8.[ g16] |
+  c4 c8.[ c16] c4\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/09.midi b/20866-h/music/09.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1d0218
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/09.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/10.ly b/20866-h/music/10.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b509def
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/10.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "10. Adjutant's Call." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c''' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8[ e16 c] g'4 |
+  g8[ e16 c] g'4 |
+  g8[ e16 c] g8[ g'] |
+  e[ g16 e] c4 | \break
+
+  g'8[ e16 c] g'4 |
+  g8[ e16 c] g'4 |
+  g8[ e16 c] g8[ g'] |
+  e[ g16 e] c4 \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/10.midi b/20866-h/music/10.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76edd92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/10.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/11.ly b/20866-h/music/11.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d6d268
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/11.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "11. To the Color." }
+
+tempomark = { \once \override TextScript #'padding = #1
+              s1*0^\markup { \large \italic { Quick time. } } }
+end       = { \mark \markup { \large \italic "End." } }
+enddc     = { \mark \markup { \hspace #0 \raise #1 \large \italic "D.C." } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #right
+
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \partial 4 e8.[ e16] |
+  g4 c,8.[ c16] e4 g,8.[ g16] |
+  c4 c8.[ c16] c4 c8.[ e16] |
+
+  g4 g8.[ g16] e4 c8.[ e16] |
+  g2 g,4 e'8.[ e16] |
+  g4 c,8.[ c16] e4 g,8.[ g16] |
+
+  c4 c8.[ c16] c4 c8.[ e16] |
+  g8[ e c g] g'[ e c g] |
+  \partial 4*3 c4 c8.[ c16] c4 \end \bar "||" \break
+
+  \partial 4 g8.[ g16] |
+  c2 c8[ c16 c c8 c] |
+  e2 e8[ e16 e e8 e] |
+  g2 g8[ g16 g g8 g] |
+
+  e8[ g e16( c g8)] e'[ g e16( c g8)] |
+  g'[ g16 g g8 g] g4 \enddc \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/11.midi b/20866-h/music/11.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..317dffa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/11.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/12.ly b/20866-h/music/12.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa40242
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/12.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "12. Fire." }
+
+tempomark   = s1*0^\markup { \large \italic { Quick. } }
+repeatadlib = { \mark \markup { \hspace #0 \raise #1
+                \large \italic "Repeat at will." } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #right
+
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \once \override TextScript #'padding = #2
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \partial 4 g8.[ g16] |
+  e'2\fermata r4 g,8.[ g16] |
+  e'2\fermata r8. g,16[ c8. e16] |
+  g2 e8.[ e16] c8.[ c16] |
+
+  g2 r4 r8 e' |
+  c8.[ e16 g,8. e'16] c8.[ e16 g,8. e'16] |
+  c8.[ e16 g8. e16] c4 g |
+
+  c8.[ e16 g,8. e'16] c8.[ e16 g,8. e'16] |
+  c8.[ g16 e'8. g,16] c2\fermata \repeatadlib \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/12.midi b/20866-h/music/12.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7982cab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/12.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/13.ly b/20866-h/music/13.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cf953f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/13.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "13. To Arms." }
+
+tempomark   = { \once \override TextScript #'padding = #2
+                s1*0^\markup { \large \italic { Quick. } } }
+repeatadlib = { \mark \markup { \hspace #0 \raise #1
+                \large \italic "Repeat at will." } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c''' {
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #right
+
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \partial 4 g4 |
+  g2.\fermata g4 |
+  g2.\fermata r4 \bar "|:"
+  \times 2/3 { c,8[( g) e'] } \times 2/3 { c8[( g) e'] }
+   \times 2/3 { c8[( g) e'] } \times 2/3 { c8[( g) e'] } |
+
+  g8.[ g16 g8. g16] g2 |
+  g8.[ g16 g8. g16] g2 \repeatadlib \bar ":|"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/13.midi b/20866-h/music/13.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b941ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/13.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/14.ly b/20866-h/music/14.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..650b708
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/14.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "14. To Horse." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Presto. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8[ c16 e] g8[ e] g[ e c g] |
+  c2 r8 \times 2/3 { c16[ c c } c8 c] |
+  g'[ g] e[ e] c[ c] g4\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/14.midi b/20866-h/music/14.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..611331f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/14.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/15.ly b/20866-h/music/15.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..804e8c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/15.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "15. Reveille." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large \italic { Quick. } }
+end       = { \mark \markup { \large \italic "End." } }
+enddc     = { \mark \markup { \large \italic "D.C." } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #right
+
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \partial 8 g8 |
+  c8[ e16( c)] g8[ e'] |
+  c[ e16( c)] g8[ e'] |
+  c[ e16( c)] g8[ c] |
+  e4( c8)[ g] | \break
+
+  c[ e16( c)] g8[ e'] |
+  c[ e16( c)] g8[ e'] |
+  c[ e16( c)] g8[ g] |
+  \partial 4. c4. \end \bar "||"
+  \partial 8 e8 |
+  e[ e e e] | \break
+
+  g4( e8)[ c] |
+  e[ c e c] |
+  e4( c8)[ e] |
+  e[ e e e] |
+  g4( e8)[ c] |
+  e[ c g g] |
+  c4. \enddc \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/15.midi b/20866-h/music/15.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af06d50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/15.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/16.ly b/20866-h/music/16.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8569f94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/16.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "16. Retreat." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Moderate. } }
+
+global = {
+ \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+ \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+ \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+ \clef treble
+ \key c \major
+ \autoBeamOff
+ \time 2/4
+}
+
+top = \relative c'' {
+ \global
+ \tempomark
+ c4 c8.[ c16] |
+ g'2 |
+ e4 g8.[ e16] |
+ c4. g8 |
+ c4 e |
+ c4. g8 |
+
+ c8.[ e16 g8. e16] |
+ c4 g8.[ g16] |
+ c8.[ g16] c[ g c e] |
+ g2 |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] |
+
+ e4. e8 |
+ g[ e g e] |
+ c4 r |
+ c g |
+ c2 |
+ c4 g |
+ c2 |
+
+ c4 g |
+ c8.[ g16] c[ g c e] |
+ g8.[ e16] g[ e g e] |
+ c4 \fermata r \bar "||"
+}
+
+middle = \relative c'' {
+ \global
+ c4 c8.[ c16] |
+ g2 |
+ c4 g8.[ g16] |
+ c4. g8 |
+ c4 c |
+ c4. g8 |
+
+ c8.[ g16 c8. e16] |
+ c4 g8.[ g16] |
+ c4 c8[ e] |
+ e2 |
+ e4 e8.[ e16] |
+
+ c4. c8 |
+ e[ g e g] |
+ e4 r |
+ e g |
+ e2 |
+ e4 g |
+ e2 |
+
+ e4 g |
+ e e8[ e] |
+ e4 e8[ e] |
+ e4 \fermata r \bar "||"
+}
+
+bottom = \relative c' {
+ \global
+ c4 c8.[ c16] |
+ c2 |
+ g'4 g8.[ g16] |
+ c,4. g'8 |
+ c,4 g' |
+ c,4. g'8 |
+
+ c8.[ c16 c8. c16] |
+ c4 g8.[ g16] |
+ c4 c8[ c] |
+ c2 |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] |
+
+ c4. c8 |
+ c[ c c c] |
+ c4 r |
+ g g |
+ g2 |
+ g4 g |
+ g2 |
+
+ g4 g |
+ g g8[ g] |
+ g4 g8[ g] |
+ c,4 \fermata r \bar "||"
+}
+
+\score {
+ <<
+  \new Staff = "top" \top
+  \new Staff = "middle" \middle
+  \new Staff = "bottom" \bottom
+ >>
+
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/16.midi b/20866-h/music/16.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3556854
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/16.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/17.ly b/20866-h/music/17.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..489f55d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/17.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "17. Tattoo." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+global = {
+ \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+ \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+ \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+ \clef treble
+ \key c \major
+ \autoBeamOff
+ \time 4/4
+}
+
+top = \relative c'' {
+ \global
+ \tempomark
+ c4. g8 c8.[ g16 c8. g16] |
+ c4 g' e c |
+ g g8.[ g16] g4 g |
+
+ c e g r |
+ c,4. g8 c8.[ g16 c8. g16] |
+ c4 e g e8[ c] |
+
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 g |
+ c c8.[ c16] c2 \fermata \bar "||"
+ r2 r4 g8.[ g16] |
+ c4 c8.[ c16] c4 g8.[ c16] |
+
+ e4 e8.[ e16] e4 c8.[ e16] |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 e8.[ c16] |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 \fermata r |
+
+ e' g e c |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 c8[ e] |
+ g4 e8[ c] g'[ g] e[ c] |
+
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 r8. e'16 |
+ c4( g8) r16 e' c4( g8) r16 e' |
+ c8[ c] g[ e'] c4 g |
+
+ \times 2/3 { c8[ c c] } \times 2/3 { e8[ e e] } c4 g \fermata |
+ e' e c c |
+ g g8.[ g16] g4 c8[ e] |
+
+ g4 e8[ c] g'[ g] e[ c] |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 r8 c, |
+
+ g'2. r8 c, |
+ g'2. r8 c, |
+ g'4 g8.[ g16] c4 e~ |
+ \once \override Voice.Script #'padding = #1
+ e2 \fermata \bar "||"
+}
+
+middle = \relative c'' {
+ \global
+ c4. g8 c8.[ g16 c8. g16] |
+ c4 e c e |
+ g, g8.[ g16] g4 g |
+
+ c g e' r |
+ c4. g8 c8.[ g16 c8. g16] |
+ c4 g e' c |
+
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 g |
+ c e8.[ e16] e2 \fermata |
+ r2 r4 g,8.[ g16] |
+ c4 c8.[ c16] c4 g8.[ c16] |
+
+ c4 c8.[ c16] c4 c8.[ c16] |
+ e4 e8.[ e16] e4 c8.[ c16] |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 \fermata r |
+
+ e' e c c |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 c8[ c] |
+ e4 c8[ g] e'[ e] c[ g] |
+
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 r8. e'16 |
+ c4( g8) r16 e' c4( g8) r16 e' |
+ c8[ c] g[ g] g4 g |
+
+ \times 2/3 { c8[ c c] } \times 2/3 { e8[ e e] } c4 g \fermata |
+ e' g e c |
+ g g8.[ g16] g4 g8[ c] |
+
+ e4 c8[ g] e'[ e] c[ g] |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 r8 c, |
+
+ g'2. r8 c, |
+ g'2. r8 c, |
+ g'4 g8.[ g16] c4 c~ |
+ c2 \fermata \bar "||"
+}
+
+bottom = \relative c' {
+ \global
+ c4. g'8 c,8.[ g'16 c,8. g'16] |
+ c,4 c' g c |
+ g g8.[ g16] g4 g |
+
+ c, g' c r |
+ c,4. g'8 c,8.[ g'16 c,8. g'16] |
+ c,4 c' g c, |
+
+ g'4 g8.[ g16] g4 g |
+ c, c8.[ c16] c2 \fermata |
+ r2 r4 g'8.[ g16] |
+ c4 c8.[ c16] c4 c8.[ c16] |
+
+ c4 c8.[ c16] c4 c8.[ c16] |
+ c4 c8.[ c16] c4 c8.[ c16] |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 \fermata r |
+
+ g c c, g' |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 g8[ g] |
+ c4 c8[ c] c[ c] c[ c] |
+
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 r8. c16 |
+ c,4~ c8 r16 c' c,4~ c8 r16 c' |
+ c,8[ c] g'[ g] g4 g |
+
+ g c c g \fermata |
+ g c c, g' |
+ g g8.[ g16] g4 g8[ c] |
+
+ e4 c8[ c] c[ c] c[ c] |
+ g4 g8.[ g16] g4 r8 c, |
+
+ g'2. r8 c, |
+ g'2. r8 c, |
+ g'4 g8.[ g16] g4 g~ |
+ g2 \fermata \bar "||"
+}
+
+\score {
+ <<
+  \new Staff = "top" \top
+  \new Staff = "middle" \middle
+  \new Staff = "bottom" \bottom
+ >>
+
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/17.midi b/20866-h/music/17.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ffb5f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/17.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/18.ly b/20866-h/music/18.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d9d902
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/18.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+\version "2.10"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "18. Call to Quarters." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Slow. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/2
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c4 e g2 |
+  r2. g,4 |
+  c c8.[ c16] c4 e8[ c] |
+  g4 c2 c8.[ e16] |
+  g4 \times 2/3 { g8[ e g] } e4 \times 2/3 { e8[ c e] } | \break
+
+  c4 \times 2/3 { c8[ e c] } g2 |
+  c4 e g e |
+  c e g, c |
+  c, \fermata g' \fermata c2 \fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4 = 84 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/18.midi b/20866-h/music/18.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bcbd5cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/18.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/19.ly b/20866-h/music/19.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..804578b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/19.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+\version "2.10"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "19. Taps." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Slow. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \partial 4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8.[ g16] |
+  c2. \fermata g8.[ c16] |
+  e2. \fermata g,8[ c] |
+  e4 g,8[ c] e4 g,8[ c] | \break
+
+  e2. \fermata c8.[ e16] |
+  g2 e4 c |
+  g2. g8.[ g16] |
+  c2. \fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4 = 84 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/19.midi b/20866-h/music/19.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dec4b55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/19.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/20.ly b/20866-h/music/20.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..909c4ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/20.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "20. Mess." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8[ e c e] |
+  c4 c8 r |
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ e] |
+  c4 r |
+
+  e8[ g e g] |
+  e4 e8 r |
+  e8[ \times 2/3 { e16 e e] } e8[ g] |
+  e4 r |
+
+  g,8[ c g c] |
+  g4 g8 r |
+  g8[ \times 2/3 { g16 g g] } g8[ c] |
+  g4 \fermata r \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/20.midi b/20866-h/music/20.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..897648d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/20.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/21.ly b/20866-h/music/21.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c26272
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/21.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "21. Sick." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \partial 4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \times 2/3 { g8[ c e] } |
+  g4 \times 2/3 { e8[ c g] } |
+  c4 c |
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } \times 2/3 { c8[ g c] } |
+  e4 \times 2/3 { g,8[ c e] } | \break
+
+  g4 \times 2/3 { e8[ c g] } |
+  c4 c |
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } \times 2/3 { c8[ g c] } |
+  c8.[ c16 c8. c16] |
+  c4 \fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/21.midi b/20866-h/music/21.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ab2c4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/21.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/22.ly b/20866-h/music/22.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06b2955
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/22.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+\version "2.10"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "22. Church." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Slow. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g4. c8 e2 \fermata |
+  c4 e g,2 \fermata |
+  c4. e8 g2 \fermata |
+  e4 c g4. \fermata g8 |
+  c8[ c16 e] c8[ e] g,[ g] g4 |
+
+  c8[ c16 e] c8[ e] g[ g] g,4 |
+  c8[ c16 e] c8[ e] g,[ g] g4 |
+  c8[ c16 e] g8[ e] c2 \fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4 = 84 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/22.midi b/20866-h/music/22.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5da0c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/22.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/23.ly b/20866-h/music/23.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b60cf4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/23.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "23. Recall." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Moderato. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ c] |
+  e4 c8[ e] |
+  g8[ \times 2/3 { g16 g g] } g8[ e] |
+  g[ e] c4 |
+
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ c] |
+  e4 c8[ e] |
+  g8[ \times 2/3 { g16 g g] } g8[ e] |
+  c4 r \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/23.midi b/20866-h/music/23.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29c4c78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/23.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/24.ly b/20866-h/music/24.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22a3145
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/24.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "24. Issue." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Allegro. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/8
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8[ c e] |
+  g[ e c] |
+  g \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 |
+  c[ c16 e g8] |
+
+  <g, c>[ <c e> <e g>] |
+  g[ e c] |
+  g \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 |
+  c4 r8 \bar "||"
+  % Mark over rest in original, which may be a misplaced half-inked fermata
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/24.midi b/20866-h/music/24.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2dfb38e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/24.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/25.ly b/20866-h/music/25.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8eaae9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/25.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "25. Officers' Call." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 6/8
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8[ c16 e g8] e[ c16 e g8] |
+  e[ c16 e g8] e4. |
+
+  c8[ c16 e g8] e[ c16 e g8] |
+  e[ c g] c4. \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/25.midi b/20866-h/music/25.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..79d462f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/25.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/26.ly b/20866-h/music/26.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe46dcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/26.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "26. Captains' Call." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 6/8
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8[ c16 e g8] e[ c16 e g8] |
+  e[ c16 e g8] e4 c8 |
+  e4.~ e4 g,8 |
+  e'2\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/26.midi b/20866-h/music/26.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d78825
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/26.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/27.ly b/20866-h/music/27.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..840d453
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/27.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "27. First Sergeants' Call." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  \times 2/3 { g16[ c e] } g8[ \times 2/3 { g16 g g } g8] |
+  \times 2/3 { g,16[ c e] } g8[ \times 2/3 { g16 g g } g8] |
+  \times 2/3 { g,16[ c e] } g8[ \times 2/3 { g16 g g } g8] \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/27.midi b/20866-h/music/27.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6b297b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/27.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/28.ly b/20866-h/music/28.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ffc400f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/28.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "28. Fatigue." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/8
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8[ e c] |
+  g' \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 |
+  c,[ e c] |
+  g4 r8 |
+  c[ e c] |
+
+  g' \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 |
+  c,[ e c] |
+  g4 r8 | \break
+  c[ e c] |
+
+  g' \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8 |
+  c,[ e c] |
+  g'4 r8 |
+  c, \times 2/3 { c16[ c c] } c8 |
+  c4\fermata r8 \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/28.midi b/20866-h/music/28.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2305bf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/28.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/29a.ly b/20866-h/music/29a.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5da9b20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/29a.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "29. School." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark
+  \partial 8 
+
+  g16[ g] |
+  c4 r |
+  c\fermata r8 g16[ g] |
+  c4 r |
+  c\fermata r |
+  g8[ g c c] |
+  e4( c) | \break
+
+  e8[ e] g,[ g] |
+  c[ e] c4 |
+  g8[ g c c] |
+  e4( c) |
+  e8[ e] g,[ g] |
+  c4\fermata r8 \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/29a.midi b/20866-h/music/29a.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b35b65f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/29a.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/29b.ly b/20866-h/music/29b.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e4f46f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/29b.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "29½. The General's March." }
+% Period after "29½" missing in original, but present in number 30½.
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic { Quick time. } } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c4 g8.[ g16] g2 |
+  e'4 g,8.[ g16] g2 |
+  c4 c8.[ e16] g4 \times 2/3 { g,8[ c e] } |
+
+  g4 g8.[ g16] g2 |
+  e4 c8.[ g16] g'4 e8.[ c16] |
+  g4 g8.[ g16] g4 g8.[ g16] |
+
+  c4 c8.[ g16] e'2 |
+  e4 e8.[ c16] g'2 |
+
+  e4 \times 2/3 { g,8[ c e] } g4 \times 2/3 { g,8[ c g'] } |
+  e4 c8.[ c16] c2\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
+\markup { \large { ( \italic{ C. I. D. R. No. 8, Sept. 3, 1914. } ) } }
diff --git a/20866-h/music/29b.midi b/20866-h/music/29b.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23e8dda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/29b.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/30a.ly b/20866-h/music/30a.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3f40f64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/30a.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "30. The General." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ c c c] |
+  c[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ c e c] |
+  g'[ \times 2/3 { g16 g g] } g8[ g e c] |
+
+  g4 g r |
+  c8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ c c c] |
+  c[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ c e g] |
+
+  c,[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ c] g[ g] |
+  c4 c r |
+  g8.[ g16] g8.[ g16] g8.[ g16] |
+
+  g8.[ e'16] \times 2/3 { c8[ g' e] } \times 2/3 { c8[ e c] } |
+  g8.[ g16] g8.[ g16] g8.[ g16] |
+  \times 2/3 { c8[ g e'] } c4 r |
+
+  g8.[ g16] g8.[ g16] g8.[ g16] |
+  \times 2/3 { c8[ g e'] } \times 2/3 { c8[ g e'] } \times 2/3 { g,8[ c e] } |
+  g8[ \times 2/3 { g,16 g g] } g8[ g] g8.[ e'16] |
+
+  c4 r8 \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8.[ g16] |  % r4 in original
+  c4 r8 \times 2/3 { g16[ g g] } g8.[ e'16] | % r4 in original
+  c2 r4 \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/30a.midi b/20866-h/music/30a.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1a326f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/30a.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/30b.ly b/20866-h/music/30b.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c272c31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/30b.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=10\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "30½. Flourishes for Review." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8[ g16 g] g8[ g16 g] |
+  c2\fermata \bar "||" % Extra r4 at the end of this bar in original
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
+\markup { \large { ( \italic{ C. I. D. R., No. 2. } ) } }
diff --git a/20866-h/music/30b.midi b/20866-h/music/30b.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa87326
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/30b.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/32.ly b/20866-h/music/32.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cdbb2e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/32.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+\version "2.10"
+\paper{ line-width=8\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "32. Attention." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Slow. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+  \partial 16
+
+  c16 |
+  e4.. g,16 |
+  e'2\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=84 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/32.midi b/20866-h/music/32.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4642086
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/32.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/33.ly b/20866-h/music/33.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04b7680
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/33.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+\version "2.10"
+\paper{ line-width=8\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "33. Attention to Orders." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Slow. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \once \override TextScript #'padding = #2
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8.[ c16] e8 r |
+  g,8.[ c16] e8 r \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=84 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/33.midi b/20866-h/music/33.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9628dc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/33.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/34.ly b/20866-h/music/34.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3fa93a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/34.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=8\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "34. Forward. MARCH." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Slow. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c4 c r |
+  c2.\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/34.midi b/20866-h/music/34.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..33ca041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/34.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/35.ly b/20866-h/music/35.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23580d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/35.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=3\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "35. Halt." }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/4
+
+  c2.\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/35.midi b/20866-h/music/35.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f7933ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/35.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/36.ly b/20866-h/music/36.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28d2ec7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/36.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=10\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "36. Double Time. MARCH." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/8
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8-.[ c-.] r |
+  c-.[ c-.] r |
+  c-.[ c-.] r |
+  c4.\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/36.midi b/20866-h/music/36.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0e0c97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/36.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/37.ly b/20866-h/music/37.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a0f0f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/37.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+\version "2.10"
+\paper{ line-width=12\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "37. To the Rear. MARCH." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Slow. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c''' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g4 \times 2/3 { e8[ c g] } |
+  g4 c |
+  c r |
+  c2\fermata \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=84 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/37.midi b/20866-h/music/37.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e8e088
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/37.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/38.ly b/20866-h/music/38.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51136fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/38.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "38. Commence Firing." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+  \partial 8
+
+  e8 |
+  c4. e16[ c] |
+  g4. e'8 |
+  c4. e16[ c] |
+  g4. \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/38.midi b/20866-h/music/38.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9581bc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/38.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/39.ly b/20866-h/music/39.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b81de98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/39.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=10\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "39. Cease Firing." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 4/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  g8[ c16 e] g8[ e] g[ e c g] |
+  c2\fermata r \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/39.midi b/20866-h/music/39.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f12315
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/39.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/40.ly b/20866-h/music/40.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae80125
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/40.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "40. Fix Bayonets." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+rit       = s1*0^\markup { \italic rit. }
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 2/4
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c8[ c16 c] g'4\fermata |
+  c,8[ c16 c] g'4\fermata |
+  c,8[ \times 2/3 { c16 c c] } c8[ c] | \break
+  % Triplet mark missing throughout in original
+
+  e8[ \times 2/3 { e16 e e] } e8[ e] |
+  g8[ \times 2/3 { g16 g g] } \rit g8-^[ g-^] |
+  g4\fermata r \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=120 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/40.midi b/20866-h/music/40.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..893c8b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/40.midi
diff --git a/20866-h/music/41.ly b/20866-h/music/41.ly
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0950d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/41.ly
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+\version "2.8"
+\paper{ line-width=15\cm indent=0\mm }
+
+\header{ tagline="" title=\markup \smallCaps "41. Charge." }
+
+tempomark = s1*0^\markup { \large { \italic Quick. } }
+repeatadlib = { \mark \markup { \hspace #0 \raise #1
+                \large \italic "Repeat at will." } }
+
+
+\score {
+ \new Staff \relative c'' {
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
+  \override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #right
+
+  \set Staff.midiInstrument = #"trumpet"
+  \set Score.barNumberVisibility = ##f
+  \override Voice.Rest #'style = #'classical
+  \clef treble
+  \key c \major
+  \autoBeamOff
+  \time 3/8
+  \tempomark 
+
+  c16.[ c32] c16.[ c32] c16.[ c32] |
+  c16.[ c32] c16.[ c32] c16.[ c32] |
+  g'16.[ e32] g16.[ e32] g16.[ e32] | \break
+
+  c16.[ c32] c16.[ c32] c16.[ c32] |
+  g'16.[ e32] g16.[ e32] g16.[ e32] |
+  c4. \repeatadlib \bar "||"
+
+ }
+ \layout { }
+ \midi { \tempo 4=100 }
+}
diff --git a/20866-h/music/41.midi b/20866-h/music/41.midi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..274607a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-h/music/41.midi
diff --git a/20866-page-images/f001.png b/20866-page-images/f001.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d496a51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/f001.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/f002.png b/20866-page-images/f002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9db6298
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/f002.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/f003.png b/20866-page-images/f003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b57fe3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/f003.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/f004.png b/20866-page-images/f004.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9820d3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/f004.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/f005.png b/20866-page-images/f005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7e49ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/f005.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/f006.png b/20866-page-images/f006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..066ba0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/f006.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/f007.png b/20866-page-images/f007.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1696f83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/f007.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p009.png b/20866-page-images/p009.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84d65cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p009.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p010.png b/20866-page-images/p010.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5f1ac7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p010.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p011.png b/20866-page-images/p011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09dc29e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p011.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p012.png b/20866-page-images/p012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ae164a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p012.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p013.png b/20866-page-images/p013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a80e94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p013.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p014.png b/20866-page-images/p014.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3fa617
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p014.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p015.png b/20866-page-images/p015.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98f96d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p015.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p016.png b/20866-page-images/p016.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..771edd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p016.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p017.png b/20866-page-images/p017.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..012f28b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p017.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p018.png b/20866-page-images/p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3bb081
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p018.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p019.png b/20866-page-images/p019.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dbef8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p019.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p020.png b/20866-page-images/p020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a353dd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p020.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p021.png b/20866-page-images/p021.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5defac6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p021.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p022.png b/20866-page-images/p022.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..945901b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p022.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p023.png b/20866-page-images/p023.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8bf3d72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p023.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p024.png b/20866-page-images/p024.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f52dd27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p024.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p025.png b/20866-page-images/p025.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5831df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p025.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p026.png b/20866-page-images/p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..098f9ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p026.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p027.png b/20866-page-images/p027.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5da9f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p027.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p028.png b/20866-page-images/p028.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b01dc97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p028.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p029.png b/20866-page-images/p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1113f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p029.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p030-insert.png b/20866-page-images/p030-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94a7e21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p030-insert.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p030.png b/20866-page-images/p030.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..483a4ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p030.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p031.png b/20866-page-images/p031.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13f15ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p031.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p032.png b/20866-page-images/p032.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b7e011
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p032.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p033.png b/20866-page-images/p033.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc349bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p033.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p034.png b/20866-page-images/p034.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61e02bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p034.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p035.png b/20866-page-images/p035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20535a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p035.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p036.png b/20866-page-images/p036.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a31800f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p036.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p037.png b/20866-page-images/p037.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57104e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p037.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p038.png b/20866-page-images/p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d75d142
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p038.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p039.png b/20866-page-images/p039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bdf9d73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p039.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p040.png b/20866-page-images/p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68edad3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p040.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p041.png b/20866-page-images/p041.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..238422d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p041.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p042.png b/20866-page-images/p042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71faae1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p042.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p043.png b/20866-page-images/p043.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd43ba1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p043.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p044.png b/20866-page-images/p044.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3b1236
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p044.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p045.png b/20866-page-images/p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0987975
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p045.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p046.png b/20866-page-images/p046.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6f9809
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p046.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p047.png b/20866-page-images/p047.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40215c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p047.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p048.png b/20866-page-images/p048.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ff9b16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p048.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p049.png b/20866-page-images/p049.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96c6260
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p049.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p050.png b/20866-page-images/p050.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be83571
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p050.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p051.png b/20866-page-images/p051.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..16c84ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p051.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p052.png b/20866-page-images/p052.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8c8e6e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p052.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p053.png b/20866-page-images/p053.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f990bb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p053.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p054.png b/20866-page-images/p054.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72d9ac6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p054.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p055.png b/20866-page-images/p055.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1fc697
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p055.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p056.png b/20866-page-images/p056.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..669a15a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p056.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p057.png b/20866-page-images/p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70bc634
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p057.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p058.png b/20866-page-images/p058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2426c35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p058.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p059.png b/20866-page-images/p059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7adfc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p059.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p060.png b/20866-page-images/p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a57327d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p060.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p061.png b/20866-page-images/p061.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc28a23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p061.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p062.png b/20866-page-images/p062.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30df2b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p062.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p063.png b/20866-page-images/p063.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5feae2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p063.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p064.png b/20866-page-images/p064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba8438d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p064.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p065.png b/20866-page-images/p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3334888
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p065.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p066.png b/20866-page-images/p066.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec5ac6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p066.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p067.png b/20866-page-images/p067.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0a49b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p067.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p068.png b/20866-page-images/p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c806c86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p068.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p069.png b/20866-page-images/p069.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..129818b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p069.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p070.png b/20866-page-images/p070.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81c63c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p070.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p071.png b/20866-page-images/p071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4bfab09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p071.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p072.png b/20866-page-images/p072.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75123f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p072.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p073.png b/20866-page-images/p073.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ae7f40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p073.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p074.png b/20866-page-images/p074.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f806027
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p074.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p075.png b/20866-page-images/p075.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..adaf1a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p075.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p076.png b/20866-page-images/p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..caf56c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p076.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p077.png b/20866-page-images/p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4e242e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p077.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p078.png b/20866-page-images/p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddddce2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p078.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p079.png b/20866-page-images/p079.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3bf3e68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p079.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p080.png b/20866-page-images/p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a1c62d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p080.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p081.png b/20866-page-images/p081.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..717a1d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p081.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p082.png b/20866-page-images/p082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8964583
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p082.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p083.png b/20866-page-images/p083.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7591b84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p083.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p084.png b/20866-page-images/p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d4ef12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p084.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p085.png b/20866-page-images/p085.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8975d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p085.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p086.png b/20866-page-images/p086.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..80eb906
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p086.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p087.png b/20866-page-images/p087.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82fd8d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p087.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p088.png b/20866-page-images/p088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f8444ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p088.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p089.png b/20866-page-images/p089.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..55e6ed0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p089.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p090.png b/20866-page-images/p090.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ca55cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p090.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p091.png b/20866-page-images/p091.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e3a026
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p091.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p092.png b/20866-page-images/p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..028e627
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p092.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p093.png b/20866-page-images/p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20281c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p093.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p094.png b/20866-page-images/p094.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3eca7b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p094.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p095.png b/20866-page-images/p095.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44c1578
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p095.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p096.png b/20866-page-images/p096.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50cf33a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p096.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p097.png b/20866-page-images/p097.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a724eb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p097.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p098.png b/20866-page-images/p098.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a316e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p098.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p099.png b/20866-page-images/p099.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0000f1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p099.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p100.png b/20866-page-images/p100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6151ce0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p100.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p101.png b/20866-page-images/p101.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e382c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p101.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p102.png b/20866-page-images/p102.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a07689
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p102.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p103.png b/20866-page-images/p103.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b66b61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p103.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p104.png b/20866-page-images/p104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5fce39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p104.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p105.png b/20866-page-images/p105.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3505993
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p105.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p106.png b/20866-page-images/p106.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff11ea0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p106.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p107.png b/20866-page-images/p107.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54cdad4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p107.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p108.png b/20866-page-images/p108.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c9f367
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p108.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p109.png b/20866-page-images/p109.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..962e2e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p109.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p110.png b/20866-page-images/p110.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f30e7ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p110.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p111.png b/20866-page-images/p111.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5432b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p111.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p112.png b/20866-page-images/p112.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6268fff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p112.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p113.png b/20866-page-images/p113.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50c32f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p113.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p114.png b/20866-page-images/p114.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3eb489
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p114.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p115.png b/20866-page-images/p115.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2e0725
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p115.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p116.png b/20866-page-images/p116.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a650b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p116.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p117.png b/20866-page-images/p117.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..54526f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p117.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p118.png b/20866-page-images/p118.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d2d629c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p118.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p119.png b/20866-page-images/p119.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8220a3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p119.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p120.png b/20866-page-images/p120.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d19e3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p120.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p121.png b/20866-page-images/p121.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d505d74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p121.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p122.png b/20866-page-images/p122.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..201ce55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p122.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p123.png b/20866-page-images/p123.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b516be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p123.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p124.png b/20866-page-images/p124.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ac0a90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p124.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p125.png b/20866-page-images/p125.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d93047b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p125.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p126.png b/20866-page-images/p126.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1ea88e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p126.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p127.png b/20866-page-images/p127.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b086529
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p127.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p128.png b/20866-page-images/p128.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6721329
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p128.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p129.png b/20866-page-images/p129.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83c34bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p129.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p130.png b/20866-page-images/p130.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e74dead
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p130.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p131.png b/20866-page-images/p131.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7cb712
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p131.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p132.png b/20866-page-images/p132.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..737910d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p132.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p133.png b/20866-page-images/p133.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..058a7a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p133.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p134.png b/20866-page-images/p134.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f435487
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p134.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p135.png b/20866-page-images/p135.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc6980b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p135.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p136.png b/20866-page-images/p136.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..609dd98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p136.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p137.png b/20866-page-images/p137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b73df5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p137.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p138.png b/20866-page-images/p138.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3f3f58a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p138.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p139.png b/20866-page-images/p139.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ba4b62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p139.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p140.png b/20866-page-images/p140.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..013756e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p140.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p141.png b/20866-page-images/p141.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c68eda8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p141.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p142.png b/20866-page-images/p142.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4cd5ac8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p142.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p143.png b/20866-page-images/p143.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56fb970
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p143.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p144.png b/20866-page-images/p144.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..119e4f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p144.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p145.png b/20866-page-images/p145.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..743ea74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p145.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p146.png b/20866-page-images/p146.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a428af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p146.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p147.png b/20866-page-images/p147.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1bd478
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p147.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p148.png b/20866-page-images/p148.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3dfa82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p148.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p149.png b/20866-page-images/p149.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2f6e91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p149.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p150.png b/20866-page-images/p150.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e5edf38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p150.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p151.png b/20866-page-images/p151.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd1da97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p151.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p152.png b/20866-page-images/p152.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..292cac9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p152.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p153.png b/20866-page-images/p153.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72c3d51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p153.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p154.png b/20866-page-images/p154.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8c0ec85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p154.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p155.png b/20866-page-images/p155.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8389a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p155.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p156.png b/20866-page-images/p156.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b81573d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p156.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p157.png b/20866-page-images/p157.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de65449
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p157.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p158.png b/20866-page-images/p158.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..685d279
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p158.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p159.png b/20866-page-images/p159.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e71d56a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p159.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p160.png b/20866-page-images/p160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee34061
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p160.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p161.png b/20866-page-images/p161.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..984a848
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p161.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p162.png b/20866-page-images/p162.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1dec0b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p162.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p163.png b/20866-page-images/p163.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba02270
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p163.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p164.png b/20866-page-images/p164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a23957
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p164.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p165.png b/20866-page-images/p165.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..100c41d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p165.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p166.png b/20866-page-images/p166.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91f4423
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p166.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p167.png b/20866-page-images/p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52b3cec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p167.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p168.png b/20866-page-images/p168.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..abec5e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p168.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p169.png b/20866-page-images/p169.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8536a30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p169.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p170.png b/20866-page-images/p170.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..896ff13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p170.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p171.png b/20866-page-images/p171.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c18d305
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p171.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p172.png b/20866-page-images/p172.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39a10b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p172.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p173.png b/20866-page-images/p173.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f06af7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p173.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p174.png b/20866-page-images/p174.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7913ab1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p174.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p175.png b/20866-page-images/p175.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..01424b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p175.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p176.png b/20866-page-images/p176.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b3d9c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p176.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p177.png b/20866-page-images/p177.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e242f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p177.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p178-insert.png b/20866-page-images/p178-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..711f7db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p178-insert.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p178.png b/20866-page-images/p178.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..857333b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p178.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p179.png b/20866-page-images/p179.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a308ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p179.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p180.png b/20866-page-images/p180.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4bdf4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p180.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p181.png b/20866-page-images/p181.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d84f2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p181.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p182.png b/20866-page-images/p182.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6c9646
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p182.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p183.png b/20866-page-images/p183.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa76201
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p183.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p184.png b/20866-page-images/p184.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dea9708
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p184.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p185.png b/20866-page-images/p185.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..33a68d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p185.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p186.png b/20866-page-images/p186.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6394996
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p186.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p187.png b/20866-page-images/p187.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ca3d72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p187.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p188.png b/20866-page-images/p188.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45b5985
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p188.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p189.png b/20866-page-images/p189.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b8c5aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p189.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p190.png b/20866-page-images/p190.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e4d468
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p190.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p191.png b/20866-page-images/p191.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..513610e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p191.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p192.png b/20866-page-images/p192.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..66281e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p192.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p193.png b/20866-page-images/p193.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..927f607
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p193.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p194.png b/20866-page-images/p194.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c86b936
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p194.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p195.png b/20866-page-images/p195.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddd7913
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p195.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p196.png b/20866-page-images/p196.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e23f36a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p196.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p197.png b/20866-page-images/p197.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddcdca0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p197.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p198.png b/20866-page-images/p198.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..295b1a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p198.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p199.png b/20866-page-images/p199.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d3b582
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p199.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p200.png b/20866-page-images/p200.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d79d46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p200.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p201.png b/20866-page-images/p201.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0eca81f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p201.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p202.png b/20866-page-images/p202.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7155e41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p202.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p203.png b/20866-page-images/p203.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39854ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p203.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p204.png b/20866-page-images/p204.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ceef12e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p204.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p205.png b/20866-page-images/p205.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2dfe7bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p205.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p206.png b/20866-page-images/p206.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0d8730
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p206.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p207.png b/20866-page-images/p207.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3372262
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p207.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p208.png b/20866-page-images/p208.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cdacee4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p208.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p209.png b/20866-page-images/p209.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8687c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p209.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p210.png b/20866-page-images/p210.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f680c66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p210.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p211.png b/20866-page-images/p211.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5bc7526
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p211.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p212.png b/20866-page-images/p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2db7a28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p212.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p213.png b/20866-page-images/p213.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddda5c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p213.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p214.png b/20866-page-images/p214.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..227a749
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p214.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p215.png b/20866-page-images/p215.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4aa8ae1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p215.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p216.png b/20866-page-images/p216.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..280d210
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p216.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p217.png b/20866-page-images/p217.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3b1bd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p217.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p218.png b/20866-page-images/p218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2dccbb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p218.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p219.png b/20866-page-images/p219.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a14193b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p219.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p220.png b/20866-page-images/p220.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..24d273d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p220.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p221.png b/20866-page-images/p221.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee0ca79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p221.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p222.png b/20866-page-images/p222.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aed0793
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p222.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p223.png b/20866-page-images/p223.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d9dbffc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p223.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p224.png b/20866-page-images/p224.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d2f993
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p224.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p225.png b/20866-page-images/p225.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae6ccbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p225.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p227.png b/20866-page-images/p227.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3064149
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p227.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p228.png b/20866-page-images/p228.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef5318a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p228.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p229.png b/20866-page-images/p229.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8452f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p229.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p230.png b/20866-page-images/p230.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a111df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p230.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p231.png b/20866-page-images/p231.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04a9ccb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p231.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p232.png b/20866-page-images/p232.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36a47b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p232.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p233.png b/20866-page-images/p233.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f275382
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p233.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p234.png b/20866-page-images/p234.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b032fcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p234.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p235.png b/20866-page-images/p235.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e70ad7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p235.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p236.png b/20866-page-images/p236.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f399ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p236.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p237.png b/20866-page-images/p237.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6a1ca3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p237.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p238.png b/20866-page-images/p238.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ebb850
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p238.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p239.png b/20866-page-images/p239.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..591f243
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p239.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p240.png b/20866-page-images/p240.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b5d878
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p240.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p241.png b/20866-page-images/p241.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb27963
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p241.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p242.png b/20866-page-images/p242.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c7f781
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p242.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p243.png b/20866-page-images/p243.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f7911c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p243.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p244.png b/20866-page-images/p244.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca77fd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p244.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p245.png b/20866-page-images/p245.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4532ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p245.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p246.png b/20866-page-images/p246.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8424c2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p246.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p247.png b/20866-page-images/p247.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dda4927
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p247.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p248.png b/20866-page-images/p248.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4a9256
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p248.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p249.png b/20866-page-images/p249.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b41004b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p249.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p250.png b/20866-page-images/p250.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a027670
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p250.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p251.png b/20866-page-images/p251.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8e8f74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p251.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p252.png b/20866-page-images/p252.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee1ace8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p252.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p253.png b/20866-page-images/p253.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d004154
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p253.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p254.png b/20866-page-images/p254.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb5efe4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p254.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p255.png b/20866-page-images/p255.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e661b2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p255.png
diff --git a/20866-page-images/p256.png b/20866-page-images/p256.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06fdbaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866-page-images/p256.png
diff --git a/20866.txt b/20866.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a24cdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11016 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Infantry Drill Regulations, United States
+Army, 1911, by United States War Department
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: Infantry Drill Regulations, United States Army, 1911
+       Corrected to April 15, 1917 (Changes Nos. 1 to 19)
+
+
+Author: United States War Department
+
+
+
+Release Date: March 20, 2007  [eBook #20866]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED
+STATES ARMY, 1911***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Bethanne M. Simms, Linda Cantoni, and the Project
+Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net).
+Special thanks to Daniel Emerson Griffith for creating the Lilypond sound
+and image files for the bugle calls.
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+      file which includes sound clips of bugal calls and
+      the numerous original graphic illustrations.
+      See 20866-h.htm or 20866-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/1/20866/20866-h/20866-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/1/20866/20866-h.zip)
+
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+      Nearly all of the italicized text in the original book is
+      also in bold typeface. For ease of reading, bold typeface
+      is not indicated in this e-book. Both bold and italics are
+      indicated by _underscores_.
+
+
+
+
+
+Infantry Drill Regulations
+
+UNITED STATES ARMY
+
+1911
+
+CORRECTED TO APRIL 15, 1917
+(Changes Nos. 1 to 19)
+
+
+MILITARY PUBLISHING CO.
+42 BROADWAY
+NEW YORK
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT
+Document No. 394
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF
+
+
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT,
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
+_Washington, August 19, 1911._
+
+The following System of Drill Regulations for Infantry, prepared by a
+board of officers consisting of Lieut. Col. John F. Morrison,
+Infantry; Capt. Merch B. Stewart, Eighth Infantry; and Capt. Alfred W.
+Bjornstad, Twenty-eighth Infantry, is approved and is published for
+the information and government of the Regular Army and the Organized
+Militia of the United States. With a view to insure uniformity
+throughout the Army, all infantry drill formations not embraced in
+this system are prohibited, and those herein prescribed will be
+strictly observed.
+
+By order of the Secretary of War:
+
+LEONARD WOOD,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff._
+
+
+
+
+TABLE OF CONTENTS.
+
+
+PART I--_Drill._                                  Paragraph.
+
+ 1. Introduction                                        1-30
+ 2. Orders, commands and signals                       31-47
+ 3. School of the soldier                             48-100
+ 4. School of the squad                              101-158
+ 5. School of the company                            159-257
+      (_a_) Close order                              167-198
+      (_b_) Extended order                           199-231
+      (_c_) Fire                                     232-257
+ 6. The battalion                                    258-326
+      (_a_) Close order                              263-289
+      (_b_) Combat principles                        290-326
+ 7. The regiment                                     327-346
+      (_a_) Close order                              333-341
+      (_b_) Combat principles                        342-346
+ 8. The brigade                                      347-349
+
+PART II--_Combat._
+
+ 1. Introduction                                     350-357
+ 2. Leadership                                       358-388
+      (_a_) General considerations                   358-370
+      (_b_) Teamwork                                 371-377
+      (_c_) Orders                                   378-383
+      (_d_) Communication                            384-388
+ 3. Combat reconnaissance                            389-399
+ 4. Fire superiority                                 400-424
+      (_a_) Purpose and nature                       400-401
+      (_b_) Fire direction and control               402-424
+ 5. Deployment                                       425-441
+ 6. Attack                                           442-488
+      (_a_) Deployment for attack                    449-452
+      (_b_) Advancing the attack                     453-457
+      (_c_) The fire attack                          458-463
+      (_d_) The charge                               464-475
+      (_e_) Pursuit                                  476-480
+      (_f_) Attack of fortifications                 481-484
+      (_g_) Holding attack                           485-488
+ 7. Defense                                          489-519
+      (_a_) Positions and intrenchments              489-494
+      (_b_) Deployment for defense                   495-510
+      (_c_) Counterattack                            511-516
+      (_d_) Delaying action                          517-519
+ 8. Meeting engagements                              520-530
+ 9. Withdrawal from action                           531-535
+10. Miscellaneous                                    537-622
+      (_a_) Machine guns                             537-546
+      (_b_) Ammunition supply                        547-553
+      (_c_) Mounted scouts                           554-557
+      (_d_) Night operations                         558-568
+      (_e_) Infantry against Cavalry                 569-574
+      (_f_) Infantry against Artillery               575-578
+      (_g_) Artillery supports                       579-583
+      (_h_) Intrenchments                            584-595
+      (_i_) Minor warfare                            596-603
+      (_j_) Patrols                                  604-622
+
+PART III--_Marches and camps._
+
+ 1. Marches                                          623-660
+      (_a_) Training and discipline                  623-635
+      (_b_) Protection of the march                  636-660
+ 2. Camps                                            661-707
+      (_a_) Sanitation                               661-677
+      (_b_) Protection of camp or bivouac            678-707
+
+PART IV--_Ceremonies and inspections._
+
+ 1. Ceremonies                                       708-765
+      (_a_) Reviews                                  711-731
+      (_b_) Parades                                  732-735
+      (_c_) Escorts                                  736-744
+ 2. Inspections                                      745-754
+ 3. Muster                                           755-757
+ 4. Honors and salutes                               758-765
+
+PART V.--_Manuals._
+
+ 1. The color                                        766-778
+ 2. The band                                         779-781
+ 3. Manual of the saber                              782-791
+ 4. Manual of tent pitching                          792-803
+ 5. Manual of the bugle                              804-807
+      (_a_) Bugle calls.
+      (_b_) Bugle signals.
+
+
+
+
+INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
+
+UNITED STATES ARMY, 1911.
+
+
+
+
+DEFINITIONS.
+
+
+_Alignment:_ A straight line upon which several elements are formed,
+or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements upon a
+straight line.
+
+_Base:_ The element on which a movement is regulated.
+
+_Battle sight:_ The position of the rear sight when the leaf is laid
+down.
+
+_Center:_ The middle point or element of a command.
+
+_Column:_ A formation in which the elements are placed one behind
+another.
+
+_Deploy:_ To extend the front. In general to change from column to
+line, or from close order to extended order.
+
+_Depth:_ The space from head to rear of any formation, including the
+leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12
+inches.
+
+_Distance:_ Space between elements in the direction of depth. Distance
+is measured from the back of the man in front to the breast of the man
+in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 inches in both line and
+column.
+
+_Element:_ A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, forming
+part of a still larger body.
+
+_File:_ Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the
+rear rank. The front-rank man is the _file leader_. A file which has
+no rear-rank man is a _blank file_. The term _file_ applies also to a
+single man in a single-rank formation.
+
+_File closers:_ Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a
+company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, all men
+posted in the line of file closers.
+
+_Flank:_ The right or left of a command in line or in column; also the
+element on the right or left of the line.
+
+_Formation:_ Arrangement of the elements of a command. The placing of
+all fractions in their order in line, in column, or for battle.
+
+_Front:_ The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in line
+or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 inches. Front
+also denotes the direction of the enemy.
+
+_Guide:_ An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom the
+command or elements thereof regulates its march.
+
+_Head:_ The leading element of a column.
+
+_Interval:_ Space between elements of the same line. The interval
+between men in ranks is 4 inches and is measured from elbow to elbow.
+Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured from the left elbow of
+the left man or guide of the group on the right, to the right elbow of
+the right man or guide of the group on the left.
+
+_Left:_ The left extremity or element of a body of troops.
+
+_Line:_ A formation in which the different elements are abreast of
+each other.
+
+_Order, close:_ The formation in which the units, in double rank, are
+arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and distances.
+
+_Order, extended:_ The formation in which the units are separated by
+intervals greater than in close order.
+
+_Pace:_ Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time.
+
+_Point of rest:_ The point at which a formation begins. Specifically,
+the point toward which units are aligned in successive movements.
+
+_Rank:_ A line of men placed side by side.
+
+_Right:_ The right extremity or element of a body of troops.
+
+
+
+
+PART I.--DRILL.
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+1. Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training;
+success may be looked for only when the training is intelligent and
+thorough.
+
+2. Commanding officers are accountable for the proper training of
+their respective organizations within the limits prescribed by
+regulations and orders.
+
+The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency.
+The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon its
+effectiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in the training
+of the units of an organization are indispensable to the efficiency of
+the whole; it is by such means alone that the requisite teamwork may
+be developed.
+
+3. Simple movements and elastic formations are essential to correct
+training for battle.
+
+4. The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the
+principles for training and for increasing the probability of success
+in battle.
+
+In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be sought.
+Quibbling over the minutiae of form is indicative of failure to grasp
+the spirit.
+
+5. The principles of combat are considered in Part II of these
+regulations. They are treated in the various schools included in Part
+I only to the extent necessary to indicate the functions of the
+various commanders and the division of responsibility between them.
+The amplification necessary to a proper understanding of their
+application is to be sought in Part II.
+
+6. The following important distinctions must be observed:
+
+(_a_) Drills executed at _attention_ and the ceremonies are
+_disciplinary exercises_ designed to teach precise and soldierly
+movement, and to inculcate that prompt and subconscious obedience
+which is essential to proper military control. To this end, smartness
+and precision should be exacted in the execution of every detail. Such
+drills should be frequent, but short.
+
+(_b_) The purpose of _extended order drill_ is to teach the
+_mechanism_ of deployment, of the firings, and, in general, of the
+employment of troops in combat. Such drills are in the nature of
+disciplinary exercises and should be frequent, thorough, and exact in
+order to habituate men to the firm control of their leaders. Extended
+order drill is executed _at ease_. The company is the largest unit
+which executes extended order drill.
+
+(_c_) _Field exercises_ are for instruction in the duties incident to
+campaign. Assumed situations are employed. Each exercise should
+conclude with a discussion, on the ground, of the exercise and
+principles involved.
+
+(_d_) The _combat exercise, a form of field exercise_ of the company,
+battalion, and larger units, consists of the _application of tactical
+principles_ to assumed situations, employing in the execution the
+appropriate formations and movements of close and extended order.
+
+Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle
+conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men with
+such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently be
+consolidated to provide war-strength organizations. Officers and
+noncommissioned officers not required to complete the full quota of
+the units participating are assigned as observers or umpires.
+
+The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; thorough
+training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals is necessary.
+
+The exercise should be followed by a brief drill at attention in order
+to restore smartness and control.
+
+7. In field exercises the enemy is said to be _imaginary_ when his
+position and force are merely assumed; _outlined_ when his position
+and force are indicated by a few men; _represented_ when a body of
+troop acts as such.
+
+
+_General Rules for Drills and Formations._
+
+8. When the _preparatory_ command consists of more than one part, its
+elements are arranged as follows:
+
+(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions or
+elements of an organization: (_a_) Description of the movement; (_b_)
+how executed, or on what element executed.
+
+(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivisions of
+an organization: (_a_) The designation of the subdivisions; (_b_) the
+movement to be executed.
+
+9. Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained as
+toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute the word "left"
+for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation of the
+corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are given
+for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The substitute
+word of the command is placed within parentheses.
+
+10. Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when
+marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the command for
+movements involving marching need not be prefaced by _forward_, as 1.
+_Column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+11. Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in double
+time.
+
+If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command _double time_
+precedes the command of execution.
+
+12. In successive movements executed in double time the leading or
+base unit marches in _quick time_ when not otherwise prescribed; the
+other units march in _double time_ to their places in the formation
+ordered and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. If
+marching in double time, the command _double time_ is omitted. The
+leading or base unit marches in _quick time_; the other units continue
+at double time to their places in the formation ordered and then
+conform to the gait of the leading or base unit.
+
+13. To hasten the execution of a movement begun in quick time, the
+command: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_, is given. The leading or base
+unit continues to march in quick time, or remains at halt if already
+halted; the other units complete the execution of the movement in
+double time and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit.
+
+14. To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the
+correction of errors, the command: 1. _In place_, 2. _HALT_, is given.
+All halt and stand fast, without changing the position of the pieces.
+To resume the movement the command: 1. _Resume_, 2. _MARCH_, is given.
+
+15. To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt, to begin
+anew a movement improperly begun, the command, _AS YOU WERE_, is
+given, at which the movement ceases and the former position is
+resumed.
+
+16. Unless otherwise announced, the guide of a company or subdivision
+of a company in line is _right_; of a battalion in line or line of
+subdivisions or of a deployed line, _center_; of a rank in column of
+squads, toward the side of the guide of the company.
+
+To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change the
+guide: _Guide (right, left_, or _center)_.
+
+In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point of
+rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced.
+
+The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with a
+movement, follows the command of execution for that movement.
+Exception: 1. _As skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2.
+_MARCH_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+17. _The turn on the fixed pivot_ by subdivisions is used in all
+formations from line into column and the reverse.
+
+_The turn on the moving pivot_ is used by subdivisions of a column in
+executing changes of direction.
+
+18. Partial changes of direction may be executed:
+
+By interpolating in the preparatory command the word _half_, as
+_Column half right (left)_, or _Right (left) half turn_. A change of
+direction of 45 deg. is executed.
+
+By the command: _INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT)_. The guide, or guiding
+element, moves in the indicated direction and the remainder of the
+command conforms. This movement effects slight changes of direction.
+
+19. The designations _line of platoons_, _line of companies_, _line of
+battalions_, etc., refer to the formations in which the platoons,
+companies, battalions, etc., each in column of squads, are in line.
+
+20. Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in forming
+line to the right or left the subdivisions will have their proper
+intervals.
+
+In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is
+charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve the
+trace, step, and distance.
+
+21. In close order, all details, detachments, and other bodies of
+troops are habitually formed in double rank.
+
+To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in and in
+alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand upon the hip,
+fingers pointing downward. In the first case the hand is dropped by
+the side when the next man on the left has his interval; in the second
+case, at the command _front_.
+
+22. The posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, special units
+(such as band or machine-gun company), etc., in the various formations
+of the company, battalion, or regiment, are shown in plates.
+
+In all changes from one formation to another involving a change of
+post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken by the most
+convenient route as soon as practicable after the command of execution
+for the movement; officers and noncommissioned officers who have
+prescribed duties in connection with the movement ordered, take their
+new posts when such duties are completed.
+
+As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever
+their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty to
+rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks.
+
+23. Except at ceremonies, the special units have no fixed places. They
+take places as directed; in the absence of directions, they conform as
+nearly as practicable to the plates, and in subsequent movements
+maintain their relative positions with respect to the flank or end of
+the command on which they were originally posted.
+
+24. General, field, and staff officers are habitually mounted. The
+staff of an officer forms in single rank 3 paces in rear of him, the
+right of the rank extending 1 pace to the right of a point directly in
+rear of him. Members of the staff are arranged in order from right to
+left as follows: General staff officers, adjutant, aids, other staff
+officers, arranged in each classification in order of rank, the senior
+on the right. The flag of the general officer and the orderlies are 3
+paces in rear of the staff, the flag on the right. When necessary to
+reduce the front of the staff and orderlies, each line executes _twos
+right_ or _fours right_, as explained in the Cavalry Drill
+Regulations, and follows the commander.
+
+When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return saber
+with their chief.
+
+25. In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns to the
+left.
+
+When the commander faces to give commands, the staff, flag, and
+orderlies do not change position.
+
+26. When making or receiving official reports, or on meeting out of
+doors, all officers will salute.
+
+Military courtesy requires the junior to salute first, but when the
+salute is introductory to a report made at a military ceremony or
+formation, to the representative of a common superior (as, for
+example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the officer
+making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first; the officer
+to whom the report is made will acknowledge by saluting that he has
+received and understood the report.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 17._)
+
+27. For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment or smaller
+unit, except those belonging to the machine-gun organizations, are
+consolidated into a detachment; the senior present commands if no
+officer is in charge. The detachment is formed as a platoon or squad
+of cavalry in line or column of fours; noncommissioned staff officers
+are on the right or in the leading ranks.
+
+28. For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff officers as are
+dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the color, in order of rank
+from right to left. In column of squads they march as file closers.
+
+29. Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned staff officers and
+orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless otherwise directed.
+If mounted, the noncommissioned staff officers are ordinarily posted
+on the right or at the head of the orderlies.
+
+30. In all formations and movements a noncommissioned officer
+commanding a platoon or company carries his piece as the men do, if he
+is so armed, and takes the same post as an officer in like situation.
+When the command is formed in line for ceremonies, a noncommissioned
+officer commanding a company takes post on the right of the right
+guide after the company has been aligned.
+
+
+
+
+ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS.
+
+
+31. _Commands_ only are employed in drill at attention. Otherwise
+either a _command_, _signal_, or _order_ is employed, as best suits
+the occasion, or one may be used in conjunction with another.
+
+32. Signals should be freely used in instruction, in order that
+officers and men may readily know them. In making arm signals the
+saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand.
+
+33. Officers and men fix their attention at the first word of command,
+the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first motion of the
+signal. A signal includes both the preparatory command and the command
+of execution; the movement commences as soon as the signal is
+understood, unless otherwise prescribed.
+
+34. Except in movements executed at _attention_, commanders or leaders
+of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or signals whenever such
+repetition is deemed necessary to insure prompt and correct execution.
+
+Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon leaders,
+guides, and musicians are equipped with whistles.
+
+The major and his staff will use a whistle of distinctive tone; the
+captain and company musicians a second and distinctive whistle; the
+platoon leaders and guides a third distinctive whistle.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 15._)
+
+35. Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential as a
+substitute for the voice under conditions which render the voice
+inadequate.
+
+Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed upon to
+facilitate the solution of such special difficulties as the particular
+situation is likely to develop, but it must be remembered that
+simplicity and certainty are indispensable qualities of a signal.
+
+
+_Orders._
+
+36. In these regulations an _order_ embraces instructions or
+directions given orally or in writing in terms suited to the
+particular occasion and not prescribed herein.
+
+_Orders_ are employed only when the _commands_ prescribed herein do
+not sufficiently indicate the will of the commander.
+
+Orders are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383, inclusive.
+
+
+_Commands._
+
+37. In these regulations a _command_ is the will of the commander
+expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein.
+
+38. There are two kinds of commands:
+
+The _preparatory_ command, such as _forward_, indicates the movement
+that is to be executed.
+
+The command of _execution_, such as _MARCH_, _HALT_, or _ARMS_, causes
+the execution.
+
+_Preparatory_ commands are distinguished by _italics_, those of
+_execution_ by _CAPITALS_.
+
+Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands
+prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit
+concerned.
+
+The _preparatory_ command should be given at such an interval of time
+before the command of _execution_ as to admit of being properly
+understood: the command of _execution_ should be given at the instant
+the movement is to commence.
+
+The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness
+proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.
+
+Each _preparatory_ command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising
+inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of
+_execution_ may be more energetic.
+
+The command of _execution_ is firm in tone and brief.
+
+39. Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion repeat such
+commands of their superiors as are to be executed by their units,
+facing their units for that purpose. The battalion is the largest unit
+that executes a movement at the command of execution of its commander.
+
+40. When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face toward
+them.
+
+Indifference in giving commands must be avoided as it leads to laxity
+in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at all times.
+
+
+_Bugle Signals._
+
+41. The authorized bugle signals are published in Part V of these
+regulations.
+
+The following bugle signals may be used off the battle field, when not
+likely to convey information to the enemy:
+
+_Attention:_ Troops are brought to attention.
+
+_Attention to orders:_ Troops fix their attention.
+
+_Forward, march:_ Used also to execute quick time from double time.
+
+_Double time, march._
+
+_To the rear, march:_ In close order, execute _squads right about_.
+
+_Halt._
+
+_Assemble, march._
+
+The following bugle signals may be used on the battle field:
+
+_Fix bayonets._
+
+_Charge._
+
+_Assemble, march._
+
+These signals are used only when intended for the entire firing line;
+hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit (for
+example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct section of
+the battle field. Exception: _Fix bayonet_. (See par. 318.)
+
+The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on the
+battle field. Their principal uses are in field exercises and practice
+firing.
+
+_Commence firing:_ Officers charged with fire direction and control
+open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, the
+signal is equivalent to _fire at will_.
+
+_Cease firing:_ All parts of the line execute _cease firing_ at once.
+
+These signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, except
+when such unit is independent or detached from its regiment.
+
+
+_Whistle Signals._
+
+42. _Attention to orders._ A _short blast_ of the whistle. This signal
+is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fix the attention
+of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to giving
+commands, orders, or signals.
+
+When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing and
+fixes his attention at a _short blast_ of his platoon leader's
+whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are
+repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a squad leader's
+attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of his platoon
+leader, or if there are no orders or commands to convey to his squad
+he resumes firing at once.
+
+_Suspend firing._ A _long blast_ of the whistle.
+
+All other whistle signals are prohibited.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 15._)
+
+
+_Arm Signals._
+
+43. The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals either
+arm may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing line
+"repeat back" at once to prevent misunderstanding.
+
+_Forward, march._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold
+the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march.
+
+This signal is also used to execute quick time from double time.
+
+_Halt._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and
+hold the arm vertically.
+
+_Double time, march._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust
+the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times.
+
+_Squads right, march._ Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times
+between the vertical and horizontal positions.
+
+_Squads left, march._ Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it downward to the side and swing it several times between the
+downward and horizontal positions.
+
+_Squads right about, march_ (if in close order) or, _To the rear,
+march_ (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically above the
+head; carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several
+times between the vertical and downward positions.
+
+_Change direction_ or _Column right (left), march._ The hand on the
+side toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried
+across the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then
+swing in a horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new
+direction.
+
+_As skirmishers, march._ Raise both arms laterally until horizontal.
+
+_As skirmishers, guide center, march._ Raise both arms laterally until
+horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return
+to the horizontal; repeat several times.
+
+_As skirmishers, guide right (left), march._ Raise both arms laterally
+until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in
+the horizontal position; swing the other upward until vertical and
+return it to the horizontal; repeat several times.
+
+_Assemble, march._ Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and
+describe horizontal circles.
+
+_Range_, or _Change elevation._ To announce _range_, extend the arm
+toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist
+closed; by keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; by
+opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number
+equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short
+horizontal line with forefinger. _To change elevation_, indicate the
+_amount of increase_ or _decrease_ by fingers as above; point upward
+to indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease.
+
+_What range are you using?_ or _What is the range?_ Extend the arms
+toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting
+on the other hand, fist closed.
+
+_Are you ready?_ or _I am ready._ Raise the hand, fingers extended and
+joined, palm toward the person addressed.
+
+_Commence firing._ Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm
+down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body.
+
+_Fire faster._ Execute rapidly the signal "Commence firing."
+
+_Fire slower._ Execute slowly the signal "Commence firing."
+
+_To swing the cone of fire to the right, or left._ Extend the arm in
+full length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to
+right (left), and point in the direction of the new target.
+
+_Fix bayonet._ Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix
+bayonet" (par. 95).
+
+_Suspend firing._ Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal
+position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front.
+
+_Cease firing._ Raise the forearm as in _suspend firing_ and swing it
+up and down several times in front of the face.
+
+_Platoon._ Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader;
+describe small circles with the hand. (See par. 44.)
+
+_Squad._ Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing
+the hand up and down from the wrist. (See par. 44.)
+
+_Rush._ Same as _double time_. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 14._)
+
+44. The signals _platoon_ and _squad_ are intended primarily for
+communication between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal
+_platoon_ or _squad_ indicates that the platoon commander is to cause
+the signal which follows to be executed by platoon or squad.
+
+
+_Flag Signals._
+
+45. The signal flags described below are carried by the company
+musicians in the field.
+
+In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the permanent
+battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are as
+shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, within
+their respective battalions, in the order given below.
+
+First battalion:
+  Company A. Red field, white square.
+  Company B. Red field, blue square.
+  Company C. Red field, white diagonals.
+  Company D. Red field, blue diagonals.
+
+Second battalion:
+  Company E. White field, red square.
+  Company F. White field, blue square.
+  Company G. White field, red diagonals.
+  Company H. White field, blue diagonals.
+
+Third battalion:
+  Company I. Blue field, red square.
+  Company K. Blue field, white square.
+  Company L. Blue field, red diagonals.
+  Company M. Blue field, white diagonals.
+
+46. In addition to their use in visual signaling, these flags serve to
+mark the assembly point of the company when disorganized by combat,
+and to mark the location of the company in bivouac and elsewhere, when
+such use is desirable.
+
+47. (1) For communication between the firing line and the reserve or
+commander in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal Corps codes) are
+prescribed and should be memorized. In transmission, their concealment
+from the enemy's view should be insured. In the absence of signal
+flags, the headdress or other substitute may be used.
+
+--------------+--------------------------------+---------------------------
+ Letter of    |If signaled from the rear to    |If signaled from the firing
+ alphabet.    |      the firing line.          |     line to the rear.
+--------------+--------------------------------+---------------------------
+AM            |Ammunition going forward.       |Ammunition required.
+CCC           |Charge (mandatory at all times).|Am about to charge if no
+              |                                | instructions to the
+              |                                | contrary.
+CF            |Cease firing.                   |Cease firing.
+DT            |Double time or "rush".          |Double time or "rush".
+F             |Commence firing.                |Commence firing.
+FB            |Fix bayonets.                   |Fix bayonets.
+FL            |Artillery fire is causing us    |Artillery fire is causing
+              | losses.                        | us losses.
+G             |Move forward.                   |Preparing to move forward.
+HHH           |Halt.                           |Halt.
+K             |Negative.                       |Negative.
+LT            |Left.                           |Left.
+O             |What is the (R.N. etc.)?        |What is the (R.N. etc.)?
+(Ardois       | Interrogatory.                 | Interrogatory.
+and           |                                |
+semaphore     |                                |
+only.)        |                                |
+_ _ __ __ _ _ |                                |
+              |What is the (R.N. etc.)?        |What is the (R.N. etc.)?
+(All          | Interrogatory.                 | Interrogatory.
+methods       |                                |
+but ardois    |                                |
+and           |                                |
+semaphore.)   |                                |
+P             |Affirmative.                    |Affirmative.
+R             |Acknowledgment.                 |Acknowledgment.
+RN            |Range.                          |Range.
+RT            |Right.                          |Right.
+SSS           |Support going forward.          |Support needed.
+SUF           |Suspend firing.                 |Suspend firing.
+T             |Target.                         |Target.
+--------------+--------------------------------+---------------------------
+
+(2) THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE.
+
+(See illustrations on pages following.)
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 13._)
+
+
+TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+
+
+SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.
+
+
+48. The instructor explains briefly each movement, first executing it
+himself if practicable. He requires the recruits to take the proper
+positions unassisted and does not touch them for the purpose of
+correcting them, except when they are unable to correct themselves. He
+avoids keeping them too long at the same movement, although each
+should be understood before passing to another. He exacts by degrees
+the desired precision and uniformity.
+
+49. In order that all may advance as rapidly as their abilities
+permit, the recruits are grouped according to proficiency as
+instruction progresses. Those who lack aptitude and quickness are
+separated from the others and placed under experienced drill masters.
+
+
+_INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS._
+
+50. For preliminary instruction a number of recruits, usually not
+exceeding three or four, are formed as a squad in single rank.
+
+
+_Position of the Soldier, or Attention._
+
+51. Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conformation
+of the man permits.
+
+Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 deg.
+
+Knees straight without stiffness.
+
+Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on
+hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally.
+
+Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the
+trousers.
+
+Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis
+of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front.
+
+Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the
+feet.
+
+
+_The Rests._
+
+52. Being at a halt, the commands are: _FALL OUT_; _REST_; _AT EASE_;
+and 1. _Parade_, 2. _Rest_.
+
+At the command _fall out_, the men may leave the ranks, but are
+required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former
+places, at attention, at the command _fall in_.
+
+At the command _rest_ each man keeps one foot in place, but is not
+required to preserve silence or immobility.
+
+At the command _at ease_ each man keeps one foot in place and is
+required to preserve silence but not immobility.
+
+53. 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to
+the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without
+constraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left
+hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the
+right hand; preserve silence and steadiness of position.
+
+54. To resume the attention: 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_. The men take
+the position of the soldier.
+
+
+_Eyes Right or Left._
+
+55. 1. _Eyes_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_, 3. _FRONT_.
+
+At the command _right_, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed
+on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in, the same
+rank. At the command _front_, turn the head and eyes to the front.
+
+
+_Facings._
+
+56. To the flank: 1. _Right (left)_, 2. _FACE_.
+
+Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning
+on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the
+left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is
+executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner.
+
+_Right (left) half face_ is executed similarly, facing 45 deg.
+
+"To face in marching" and advance, turn on the ball of either foot and
+step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; to face in
+marching without gaining ground in the new direction, turn on the ball
+of either foot and mark time.
+
+57. To the rear: 1. _About_, 2. _FACE_.
+
+Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the rear
+and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the
+position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on
+the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the
+left.
+
+
+_Salute with the Hand._
+
+58. 1. _Hand_, 2. _SALUTE_.
+
+Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches
+the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb
+and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at
+about 45 deg., hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward
+the person saluted. (_TWO_) Drop the arm smartly by the side.
+
+For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes," paragraphs
+758-765.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 3, 6, and 18._)
+
+
+_STEPS AND MARCHINGS._
+
+59. All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right step,
+begin with the left foot.
+
+60. The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured
+from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per
+minute.
+
+The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence
+is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.
+
+The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by
+calling _one, two, three, four_, or _left, right_, the instant the
+left and right foot, respectively, should be planted.
+
+61. All steps and marchings and movements involving march are executed
+in _quick time_ unless the squad be marching in _double time_, or
+_double time_ be added to the command; in the latter case _double
+time_ is added to the preparatory command. Example: 1. _Squad right,
+double time_, 2. _MARCH_ (School of the Squad).
+
+
+_Quick Time._
+
+62. Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. _Forward_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+At the command _forward_, shift the weight of the body to the right
+leg, left knee straight.
+
+At the command _march_, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30
+inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without
+shock; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as
+above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally.
+
+63. Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in double
+time: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the
+right leg. At the command _march_, raise the forearms, fingers closed,
+to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy run
+with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging
+motion to the arms.
+
+If marching in quick time, at the command _march_, given as either
+foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then step
+off in double time.
+
+64. To resume the quick time: 1. _Quick time_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as either foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick
+time, dropping the hands by the sides.
+
+
+_To Mark Time._
+
+65. Being in march: 1. _Mark time_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as either foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and
+continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches
+and planting it on line with the other.
+
+Being at a halt, at the command _march_, raise and plant the feet as
+described above.
+
+
+_The Half Step._
+
+66. 1. _Half step_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time.
+
+67. _Forward_, _half step_, _halt_, and _mark time_ may be executed
+one from the other in quick or double time.
+
+To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. _Forward_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+
+_Side Step._
+
+68. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. _Right (left) step_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the left
+foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time.
+
+The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
+double time.
+
+If at order arms, the side step is executed _at trail_ without
+command.
+
+
+_Back Step._
+
+69. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. _Backward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.
+
+The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
+double time.
+
+If at order arms, the back step is executed _at trail_ without
+command.
+
+
+_To Halt._
+
+70. To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. _Squad_, 2.
+_HALT_.
+
+At the command _halt_, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant
+the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first foot by the
+side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides.
+
+
+_To March by the Flank._
+
+71. Being in march: 1. _By the right (left) flank_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching
+and step off in the new direction with the right foot.
+
+
+_To March to the Rear._
+
+72. Being in march: 1. _To the rear_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about on the balls
+of both feet and immediately step off with the left foot.
+
+If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four steps
+in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot.
+
+
+_Change Step._
+
+73. Being in march: 1. _Change step_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
+advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the right foot near
+the heel of the left and step off with the left foot.
+
+The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command
+_march_ being given as the left foot strikes the ground.
+
+
+_MANUAL OF ARMS._
+
+74. As soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, nomenclature
+(Pl. I), and care of his rifle; when fair progress has been made in
+the instruction without arms, he is taught the manual of arms;
+instruction without arms and that with arms alternate.
+
+75. The following rules govern the carrying of the piece:
+
+First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the chamber
+or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so loaded, or
+supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with
+the _safety lock_ turned to the "safe." At all other times it is
+carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled.
+
+Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are immediately
+inspected at the commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_; 3. _Order
+(Right shoulder, port)_, 4. _ARMS_.
+
+A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.
+
+If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed
+and placed in the belt.
+
+Third. The cut-off is kept turned "off" except when cartridges are
+actually used.
+
+Fourth. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, on guard,
+or for combat.
+
+Fifth. _Fall in_ is executed with the piece at the order arms. _Fall
+out_, _rest_, and _at ease_ are executed as without arms. On resuming
+_attention_ the position of order arms is taken.
+
+Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece is
+brought to the right shoulder at the command _march_, the three
+motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be
+executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command with the
+words _at trail_; as, 1. _At trail, forward_, 2. _MARCH_; the trail is
+taken at the command _march_.
+
+When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval or
+distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the piece
+to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting.
+
+Seventh. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The execution
+of the order begins when the halt is completed.
+
+Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without
+arms.
+
+[Illustration: Plate I. [Transcriber's Note: Plate number omitted in
+original.]]
+
+76. The following rules govern the execution of the manual of arms:
+
+First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of
+gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps the piece; the sling is
+included in the grasp of the hand.
+
+Second. In all positions of the piece "diagonally across the body" the
+position of the piece, left arm and hand are the same as in port arms.
+
+Third. In resuming the order from any position in the manual, the
+motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the piece about 3
+inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand above and
+near the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended and joined,
+forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all fingers of the
+right hand grasping the piece. To complete the order, lower the piece
+gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left quickly by the
+side, and take the position of order arms.
+
+Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to the ground, or
+other similar abuse of the rifle to produce effect in executing the
+manual, is prohibited.
+
+Fourth. The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the recruits
+are first required to give their whole attention to the details of the
+motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they become
+accustomed to handling their pieces. The instructor may require them
+to count aloud in cadence with the motions.
+
+Fifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are, for the
+purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail;
+in this case the command of _execution_ determines the prompt
+execution of the first motion, and the commands, _two_, _three_,
+_four_, that of the other motions.
+
+To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: _By
+the numbers_; all movements divided into motions are then executed as
+above explained until he cautions: _Without the numbers_; or commands
+movements other than those in the manual of arms.
+
+Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of the
+manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the
+previous position of the piece.
+
+Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may be
+carried in any manner directed.
+
+77. _Position of order arms standing:_ The butt rests evenly on the
+ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and
+touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand
+holding the piece between the thumb and fingers.
+
+78. Being at order arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+With the right hand carry the piece in front of the center of the
+body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at
+the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (_TWO_)
+Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand.
+
+79. Being at order arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the
+small of the stock; the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up,
+sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck
+with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting
+against the body; the piece in a vertical plane parallel to the front.
+
+80. Being at present arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Carry the piece diagonally across the body and take the position of
+port arms.
+
+81. Being at port arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center of the
+body and take the position of present arms.
+
+82. Being at present or port arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the right
+with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just above the
+lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last
+position in coming to the order. (_TWO_) Complete the order.
+
+83. Being at order arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel
+between the first two fingers. (_TWO_) Without changing the grasp of
+the right hand, place the piece on the right shoulder, barrel up and
+inclined at an angle of about 45 deg. from the horizontal, trigger guard
+in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the piece in
+a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left hand,
+thumb and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip
+of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow
+down. (_THREE_) Drop the left hand by the side.
+
+84. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (_TWO_),
+(_THREE_) Execute order arms as described from port arms.
+
+85. Being at port arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Change the right hand to the butt. (_TWO_), (_THREE_) As in right
+shoulder arms from order arms.
+
+86. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the
+body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (_TWO_) Change
+the right hand to the small of the stock.
+
+87. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Execute port arms. (_THREE_) Execute present arms.
+
+88. Being at present arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Execute port arms. (_TWO_), (_THREE_), (_FOUR_) Execute right shoulder
+arms as from port arms.
+
+89. Being at port arms: 1. _Left shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder,
+barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same
+time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second
+fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (_TWO_) Drop the right
+hand by the side.
+
+Being at left shoulder arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. (_TWO_)
+Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, regrasp it with the
+left, and take the position of port arms.
+
+_Left shoulder arms_ may be ordered directly from the order, right
+shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command _arms_ execute
+_port arms_ and continue in cadence to the position ordered.
+
+90. Being at order arms: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_.
+
+Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly
+bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the body, barrel to
+the left; grasp the piece with the left hand just below the stacking
+swivel, and with the right hand below and against the left.
+
+Being at parade rest: 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_.
+
+Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the right
+hip.
+
+91. Being at order arms: 1. _Trail_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle
+forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30 deg. with the
+vertical.
+
+When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the
+piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered until the
+piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used.
+
+92. Being at trail arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order.
+
+
+_Rifle Salute._
+
+93. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Rifle_, 2. _SALUTE_.
+
+Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm
+horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and joined,
+forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the person
+saluted. (_TWO_) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes to the
+front. (_C.I.D.R., No. 6._)
+
+94. Being at order or trail arms: 1. _Rifle_, 2. _SALUTE_.
+
+Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down,
+thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against piece near
+the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (_TWO_) Drop the left hand
+by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front.
+
+For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes" (pars. 758-765).
+
+
+_The Bayonet._
+
+95. Being at order arms: 1. _Fix_, 2. _BAYONET_.
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
+grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward the body;
+draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing
+at the muzzle; resume the order.
+
+If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet with the
+left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner.
+
+96. Being at order arms: 1. _Unfix_, 2. _BAYONET_.
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
+grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing
+the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise the bayonet
+until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece;
+drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and,
+glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing
+between the left arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right
+hand and resume the order.
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
+from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
+most convenient manner.
+
+If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
+most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
+original position.
+
+Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity but
+not in cadence.
+
+97. _CHARGE BAYONET._ Whether executed at halt or in motion, the
+bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of _guard_ in
+the Manual for Bayonet Exercise.
+
+Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in the
+Manual for Bayonet Exercise.
+
+
+_The Inspection._
+
+98. Being at order arms: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+At the second command take the position of port arms. (_TWO_) Seize
+the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn
+the handle up, draw the bolt back, and glance at the chamber. Having
+found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes
+to the front.
+
+99. Being at inspection arms: 1. _Order (Right shoulder, port)_, 2.
+_ARMS_.
+
+At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, turn the handle
+down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command arms,
+complete the movement ordered.
+
+
+_To Dismiss the Squad._
+
+100. Being at halt: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Port_, 4. _ARMS_,
+5. _DISMISSED_.
+
+
+
+
+SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.
+
+
+101. Soldiers are grouped into squads for purposes of instruction,
+discipline, control, and order.
+
+102. The squad proper consists of a corporal and seven privates.
+
+The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to make the
+squad a fixed unit and to facilitate the control and movement of the
+company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and less than 12,
+they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess above 8 being posted
+as file closers. If the number grouped is greater than 11, 2 or more
+squads are formed and the group is termed a platoon.
+
+For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified.
+
+103. The corporal is the squad leader, and when absent is replaced by
+a designated private. If no private is designated, the senior in
+length of service acts as leader.
+
+The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the front
+rank of the squad.
+
+When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear rank
+man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank until the
+corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear rank man steps
+back into the rear rank.
+
+104. In battle officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve the
+integrity of squads; they designate new leaders to replace those
+disabled, organize new squads when necessary, and see that every man
+is placed in a squad.
+
+Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to which they
+belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated
+therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon
+leaders, whether these be of their own or of another organization.
+
+105. The squad executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and
+_marchings_, and the _manual of arms_ as explained in the School of
+the Soldier.
+
+
+_To Form the Squad._
+
+106. To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces in front
+of where the center is to be and commands: _FALL IN_.
+
+The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are arranged
+by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in order of
+height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand as soon as
+the man on his left has his interval. The rear rank forms with
+distance of 40 inches.
+
+The instructor then commands: _COUNT OFF_.
+
+At this command all except the right file execute _eyes right_, and
+beginning on the right, the men in each rank count _one_, _two_,
+_three_, _four_; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as he
+counts.
+
+Pieces are then inspected.
+
+
+_Alignments._
+
+107. To align the squad, the base file or files having been
+established: 1. _Right (Left)_, 2. _DRESS_, 3. _FRONT_.
+
+At the command _dress_ all men place the left hand upon the hip
+(whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the base
+file, when on or near the new line executes _eyes right_, and, taking
+steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his right arm rests
+lightly against the arm of the man on his right, and so that his eyes
+and shoulders are in line with those of the men on his right; the rear
+rank men cover in file.
+
+The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from the right
+flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, or in advance,
+of the line; only the men designated move.
+
+At the command _front_, given when the ranks are aligned, each man
+turns his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand by his
+side.
+
+In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, or
+parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique
+directions.
+
+Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a
+considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed by
+marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, as the
+case may be, without other command, and at the trail.
+
+108. To preserve the alignment when marching: _GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT)_.
+
+The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, yielding
+to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from the opposite
+direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually opening out
+or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly lengthening or
+shortening the step; the rear rank men cover their file leaders at 40
+inches.
+
+In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated flank,
+conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, the leading man
+of the front rank is the guide.
+
+
+_To Take Intervals and Distances._
+
+109. Being in line at a halt: 1. _Take interval_, 2. _To the right
+(left)_, 3. _MARCH_, 4. _Squad_, 5. _HALT_.
+
+At the second command the rear-rank men march backward 4 steps and
+halt; at the command _march_ all face to the right and the leading man
+of each rank steps off; the other men step off in succession, each
+following the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank men marching abreast
+of their file leaders.
+
+At the command _halt_, given when all have their intervals, all halt
+and face to the front.
+
+110. Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. _Assemble, to the
+right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear-rank man on the
+right closes to 40 inches. The other men face to the right, close by
+the shortest line, and face to the front.
+
+111. Being in line at a halt and having counted off: 1. _Take
+distance_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+At the command _march_ No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to the
+front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of
+the rear rank, in the order named, move straight to the front, each
+stepping off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command
+_halt_ is given when all have their distances.
+
+In case more than one squad is in line, each squad executes the
+movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is right.
+
+112. Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. _Assemble_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to
+their proper places in line.
+
+
+_To Stack and Take Arms._
+
+113. Being in line at a halt: _STACK ARMS_.
+
+Each even number of the front rank grasps his piece with the left hand
+at the upper band and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the
+front, muzzle inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center
+of the interval on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the
+stacking swivel; each even number of the rear rank then passes his
+piece, barrel to the rear, to his file leader, who grasps it between
+the bands with his right hand and throws the butt about 2 feet in
+advance of that of his own piece and opposite the right of the
+interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and
+forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages with that of
+his own piece; each odd number of the front rank raises his piece with
+the right hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front; the left
+hand, guiding the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the
+swivel of his own piece with the free hook of that of the even number
+of the rear rank; he then turns the barrel outward into the angle
+formed by the other two pieces and lowers the butt to the ground, to
+the right of and against the toe of his right shoe.
+
+The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the even numbers
+of the front rank.
+
+When each man has finished handling pieces, he takes the position of
+the soldier.
+
+114. Being in line behind the stacks: _TAKE ARMS_.
+
+The loose pieces are returned by the even numbers of the front rank;
+each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece with the left
+hand, the piece of his rear-rank man with his right hand, grasping
+both between the hands; each odd number of the front rank grasps his
+piece in the same way with the right hand, disengages it by raising
+the butt from the ground and then, turning the piece to the right,
+detaches it from the stack; each even number of the front rank
+disengages and detaches his piece by turning it to the left, and then
+passes the piece of his rear-rank man to him, and all resume the
+order.
+
+115. Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 1 rear rank
+takes the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking the stack;
+the stacks made or broken, he resumes his post.
+
+Pieces not used in making the stack are termed _loose pieces_.
+
+Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed.
+
+
+_The Oblique March._
+
+116. For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in column or
+correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face half right
+or half left, points out to the men their relative positions, and
+explains that these are to be maintained in the oblique march.
+
+117. 1. _Right (Left) oblique_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Each man steps off in a direction 45 deg. to the right of his original
+front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders
+parallel to those of the guide (the man on the right front of the line
+or column), and so regulates his steps that the ranks remain parallel
+to their original front.
+
+At the command _halt_ the men halt faced to the front.
+
+To resume the original direction: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight to
+the front.
+
+If at _half step_ or _mark time_ while obliquing, the oblique march is
+resumed by the commands: 1. _Oblique_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+
+_To Turn on Moving Pivot._
+
+118. Being in line: 1. _Right (Left) turn_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The movement is executed by each rank successively and on the same
+ground. At the second command, the pivot man of the front rank faces
+to the right in marching and takes the half step; the other men of the
+rank oblique to the right until opposite their places in line, then
+execute a second right oblique and take the half step on arriving
+abreast of the pivot man. All glance toward the marching flank while
+at half step and take the full step without command as the last man
+arrives on the line.
+
+_Right (Left) half turn_ is executed in a similar manner. The pivot
+man makes a half change of direction to the right and the other men
+make quarter changes in obliquing. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+_To Turn on Fixed Pivot._
+
+119. Being in line, to turn and march: 1. _Squad right (left)_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank faces to
+the right in marching and marks time; the other front rank men oblique
+to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time.
+In the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by
+the second and first, moves straight to the front until in rear of his
+front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and mark time;
+the other number of the rear rank moves straight to the front four
+paces and places himself abreast of the man on his right. Men on the
+new line glance toward the marching flank while marking time and, as
+the last man arrives on the line, both ranks execute _forward, march_,
+without command.
+
+120. Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. _Squad right (left)_, 2.
+_MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is
+executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men,
+on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is
+given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last
+man arrives on the line.
+
+121. Being in line, to turn about and march: 1. _Squad right (left)
+about_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the second command, the front rank twice executes _squad right_,
+initiating the second _squad right_ when the man on the marching flank
+has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rear rank the third man from
+the right, followed by the second and first in column, moves straight
+to the front until on the prolongation of the line to be occupied by
+the rear rank; changes direction to the right; moves in the new
+direction until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the
+right in marching, mark time, and glance toward the marching flank.
+The fourth man marches on the left of the third to his new position;
+as he arrives on the line, both ranks execute _forward, march_,
+without command.
+
+122. Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. _Squad right (left)
+about_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is
+executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men,
+on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is
+given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last
+man arrives on the line.
+
+
+_To Follow the Corporal._
+
+123. Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad without
+unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in front of it and
+commands: _FOLLOW ME_.
+
+If in line or skirmish line, No. 2 of the front rank follows in the
+trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; the other men conform to the
+movements of No. 2, guiding on him and maintaining their relative
+positions.
+
+If in column; the head of the column follows the corporal.
+
+
+_To Deploy as Skirmishers._
+
+124. Being in any formation, assembled: 1. _As skirmishers_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+The corporal places himself in front of the squad, if not already
+there. Moving at a run, the men place themselves abreast of the
+corporal at half-pace intervals, Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. 3 and
+4 on his left, rear-rank men on the right of their file leaders, extra
+men on the left of No. 4; all then conform to the corporal's gait.
+
+When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly formed on
+No. 2 of the front rank, who stands fast or continues the march, as
+the case may be; the corporal places himself in front of the squad
+when advancing and in rear when halted.
+
+When deployed as skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieces at the
+trail unless otherwise ordered.
+
+The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No. 2 front rank
+is the guide.
+
+125. The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half pace,
+resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The front of a
+squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces.
+
+
+_To Increase or Diminish Intervals._
+
+126. If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than the
+normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to increase or
+decrease the interval: 1. _As skirmishers, (so many) paces_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If already
+deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the guide.
+
+
+_The Assembly._
+
+127. Being deployed: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places.
+
+If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time,
+form, and follow him.
+
+The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed.
+
+
+_Kneeling and Lying Down._
+
+128. If standing: _KNEEL_.
+
+Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left
+rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly as
+possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; piece
+remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the
+lower band.
+
+129. If standing or kneeling: _LIE DOWN_.
+
+Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the left foot
+and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35 deg. to the right;
+piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the
+front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand
+grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the
+position of order arms, lying down.
+
+130. If kneeling or lying down: _RISE_.
+
+If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the
+left heel.
+
+If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to the front,
+on the ground marked by the knees.
+
+131. If lying down: _KNEEL_. Raise the body on both knees; take the
+position of kneel.
+
+132. In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying down are
+ordinarily used only for the better utilization of cover.
+
+When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken in lieu
+of the position kneeling.
+
+
+_LOADINGS AND FIRINGS._
+
+133. The commands for loading and firing are the same whether
+standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at
+a halt.
+
+When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does not
+load, aim, or fire.
+
+The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading.
+
+Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only.
+
+134. Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without command
+until the command _unload_, or _inspection arms_, fresh clips being
+inserted when the magazine is exhausted.
+
+135. The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may be
+done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are indicated
+before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted when the
+target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such case battle sight
+is used if no sight setting is announced.
+
+136. The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight
+setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be
+repeated until a change of either or both is necessary.
+
+Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or
+target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until a change
+is ordered.
+
+137. If the men are not already in the position of load, that position
+is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the announcement
+is omitted, the position is taken at the first command for firing.
+
+138. When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate firing
+is discretionary with each man.
+
+
+_To Load._
+
+139. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. _With dummy (blank or
+ball) cartridges_, 2. _LOAD_.
+
+At the command _load_ each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half
+right and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such
+position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
+body; raises, or lowers, the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height
+of the breast, and turns the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns
+and draws the bolt back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in
+the clip slots, places the thumb on the powder space of the top
+cartridge, the fingers extending around the piece and tips resting on
+the magazine floor plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by
+pressing down with the thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts the
+bolt home, turning down the handle; turns the safety lock to the
+"safe" and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each rear rank
+man moves to the right front, takes a similar position opposite the
+interval to the right of his front rank man, muzzle of the piece
+extending beyond the front rank, and loads.
+
+A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
+as practicable in the position of load.
+
+If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if
+kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the
+elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left hand
+steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt
+resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.
+
+For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
+are designated as that of _load_.
+
+140. For instruction in loading: 1. _Simulate_, 2. _LOAD_.
+
+Executed as above described except that the cut-off remains "off" and
+the handling of cartridges is simulated.
+
+The recruits are first taught to _simulate_ loading and firing; after
+a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges
+may be used.
+
+141. The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine
+"off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while "off" or
+"on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in the
+proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to
+be regarded as exceptional.
+
+
+_To Unload._
+
+142. _UNLOAD._
+
+Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt
+alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected.
+After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first
+thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding
+it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and
+back to engage it under the bolt and then thrusting the bolt home; the
+trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and
+returned to the belt and the piece is brought to the order.
+
+
+_To Set the Sight._
+
+143. _RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.)_, or _BATTLE SIGHT_.
+
+The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains
+and verifies sight settings.
+
+
+_To Fire by Volley._
+
+144. 1. _READY_, 2. _AIM_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _FIRE_.
+
+At the command _ready_ turn the safety lock to the "ready;" at the
+command _aim_ raise the piece with both hands and support the butt
+firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb clasping
+the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the piece, right
+elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forward and a
+little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right
+eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as to perceive the
+object aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against
+the front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight
+is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight.
+
+Each rear-rank man aims through the interval to the right of his file
+leader and leans slightly forward to advance the muzzle of his piece
+beyond the front rank.
+
+In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of
+elbow in front of kneecap. In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported
+by the knees.
+
+In aiming lying down, raise the piece with both hands; rest on both
+elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder.
+
+At the command _fire_ press the finger against the trigger; fire
+without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the piece;
+lower the piece in the position of _Load_ and load. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+2._)
+
+145. To continue the firing: 1. _AIM_, 2. _Squad_, 3. _FIRE_.
+
+Each command is executed as previously explained. _Load_ (from
+magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with
+the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready."
+
+
+_To Fire at Will._
+
+146. _FIRE AT WILL._
+
+Each man, independently of the others, comes to the _ready_, aims
+carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, _fires_,
+_loads_, and continues the firing until ordered to _suspend_ or _cease
+firing_.
+
+147. To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the
+instructor shouts: _FASTER (SLOWER)_.
+
+Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at
+effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum
+of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate
+the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to combat
+conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are
+designated.
+
+
+_To Fire by Clip._
+
+148. _CLIP FIRE._
+
+Executed in the same manner as _fire at will_, except that each man,
+after having exhausted the cartridges then in the piece, _suspends
+firing_.
+
+
+_To Suspend Firing._
+
+149. The instructor blows a _long blast_ of the whistle and repeats
+same, if necessary, or commands: _SUSPEND FIRING_.
+
+Firing stops; pieces are held loaded and locked, in a position of
+readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. The
+men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at
+which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear.
+
+This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to _cease firing_.
+
+
+_To Cease Firing._
+
+150. _CEASE FIRING._
+
+Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge
+is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights
+are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order.
+
+_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 7._)
+
+151. Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any time
+after the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has
+actually commenced or not.
+
+
+_THE USE OF COVER._
+
+152. The recruit should be given careful instruction in the individual
+use of cover.
+
+It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural
+cover, he must be able to tire easily and effectively upon the enemy;
+if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as
+possible; he must conceal himself as much as possible while firing and
+while advancing. While setting his sight he should be under cover or
+lying prone.
+
+153. To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time
+concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in
+simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching
+positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from
+depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to
+fire around the right side of his concealment whenever possible, or,
+when this is not possible, to rise enough to fire over the top of his
+concealment.
+
+When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with
+reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper
+position for firing.
+
+154. The evil of remaining too long in one place, however good the
+concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to advance from
+cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving his
+concealment.
+
+It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an
+enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from
+a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and
+throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing
+from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle
+grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right
+leg.
+
+155. He should be taught that, when fired on while acting
+independently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then
+endeavor to locate his enemy.
+
+156. The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued
+in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then be taught
+that the proper advance of the platoon or company and the
+effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the question
+of cover for individuals. He should also be taught that he may not
+move about or shift his position in the firing line except the better
+to see the target.
+
+
+_OBSERVATION._
+
+157. The ability to use his eyes accurately is of great importance to
+the soldier. The recruit should be trained in observing his
+surrounding from positions and when on the march.
+
+He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military features of
+the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in counting
+distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and forms.
+
+158. In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they
+should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming
+point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a
+designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone
+position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked
+eye and with field glasses. Similarly, they should be trained in
+estimating distances.
+
+
+
+
+SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
+
+
+159. The captain is responsible for the theoretical and practical
+instruction of his officers and noncommissioned officers, not only in
+the duties of their respective grades, but in those of the next higher
+grades.
+
+160. The company in line is formed in double rank with the men
+arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from right to
+left, the tallest on the right.
+
+The original division into squads is effected by the command: _COUNT
+OFF_. The squads, successively from the right, count off as in the
+School of the Squad, corporals placing themselves as Nos. 4 of the
+front rank. If the left squad contains less than six men, it is either
+increased to that number by transfers from other squads or is broken
+up and its members assigned to other squads and posted in the line of
+file closers. These squad organizations are maintained, by transfers
+if necessary, until the company becomes so reduced in numbers as to
+necessitate a new division into squads. No squad will contain less
+than six men.
+
+161. The company is further divided into two, three, or four platoons,
+each consisting of not less than two nor more than four squads. In
+garrison or ceremonies the strength of platoons may exceed four
+squads.
+
+162. At the formation of the company the platoons or squads are
+numbered consecutively from right to left and these designations do
+not change.
+
+For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the
+designations, _right_, _center_, _left_, when in line, and _leading_,
+_center_, _rear_, when in column, are applied to platoons or squads.
+These designations apply to the actual right, left, center, head, or
+rear, in whatever direction the company may be facing. The _center
+squad_ is the middle or right middle squad of the company.
+
+The designation "So-and-so's" squad or platoon may also be used.
+
+163. Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants and noncommissioned
+officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1, right; 2, left; 3, center
+(right center); 4, left center.
+
+[Illustration: Plate II. THE COMPANY.]
+
+The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, one
+to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned to
+platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, its
+guide, or guides, accompany the platoon leader.
+
+During battle, these assignments are not changed: vacancies are filled
+by noncommissioned officers of the platoon, or by the nearest
+available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with
+reenforcing troops.
+
+164. The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When not
+commanding a platoon, he is posted as a file closer opposite the third
+file from the outer flank of the first platoon; and when the company
+is deployed he accompanies the captain.
+
+The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned according to his
+rank as a sergeant.
+
+Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle, are in
+ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed, they are posted in
+the line of file closers.
+
+Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. When
+the company is deployed, they accompany the captain.
+
+165. The company executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and
+_marchings_, _manual of arms_, _loadings_ and _firings_, _takes
+intervals_ and _distances_ and _assembles_, _increases_ and
+_diminishes intervals_, resumes _attention_, _obliques_, resumes the
+direct march, preserves alignments, _kneels_, _lies down_, _rises_,
+_stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the Schools of the Soldier
+and the Squad, substituting in the commands _company_ for _squad_.
+
+The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc.,
+substituting their designation for _squad_ in the commands. In the
+same manner these execute the movements prescribed for the company,
+whenever possible, substituting their designation for _company_ in the
+commands.
+
+166. A company so depleted as to make division into platoons
+impracticable is led by the captain as a single platoon, but retains
+the designation of company. The lieutenants and first sergeant assist
+in fire control; the other sergeants place themselves in the firing
+line as skirmishers.
+
+
+CLOSE ORDER.
+
+_Rules._
+
+167. The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear, platoons,
+are the right and left, or leading and rear, guides, respectively, of
+the company when it is in line or in column of squads. Other guides
+are in the line of file closers.
+
+In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of
+the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if
+in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to
+flanks of the platoon does not change.
+
+168. The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank
+opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to
+the other flank, the captain commands: 1. _File closers on left
+(right) flank_; 2. _MARCH_. The file closers dart through the column;
+the captain and guides change.
+
+In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the side
+of the guide.
+
+169. Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or
+firings.
+
+Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual
+of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at
+the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements.
+
+170. In _taking intervals and distances_, unless otherwise directed,
+the right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in
+the line of file closers, and, with them, take a distance of 4 paces
+from the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command _march_, the
+file closers face to the flank and each steps off with the file
+nearest him. In _assembling_ the guides and file closers resume their
+positions in line.
+
+171. In movements executed simultaneously by platoons (as _platoons
+right_ or _platoons, column right_), platoon leaders repeat the
+preparatory command (_platoon right_, etc.), applicable to their
+respective platoons. The command of execution is given by the captain
+only.
+
+
+_To Form the Company._
+
+172. At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant takes position
+6 paces in front of where the center of the company is to be, faces
+it, draws saber, and commands: _FALL IN_.
+
+The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front,
+where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the
+center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first
+sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the
+right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their
+posts.
+
+The first sergeant commands: _REPORT_. Remaining in position at the
+order, the squad leaders, in succession from the right, salute and
+report: _All present_; or, _Private(s) ---- absent_. The first
+sergeant does not return the salutes of the squad leaders; he then
+commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Order_, 4. _ARMS_, faces
+about, salutes the captain, reports: _Sir, all present or accounted
+for_, or the names of the unauthorized absentees, and, without
+command, takes his post.
+
+If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant
+commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Right shoulder_, 4. _ARMS_,
+and calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers _here_
+and executes order arms. The sergeant then effects the division into
+squads and reports the company as prescribed above.
+
+The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, and
+facing, the company in time to receive the report of the first
+sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber.
+
+The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has reported
+and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not under arms, is
+formed in like manner omitting reference to arms.
+
+173. For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company,
+when small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close
+order movements only are executed. The single rank executes all
+movements as explained for the front rank of a company.
+
+
+_To Dismiss the Company._
+
+174. Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first sergeant:
+_Dismiss the company_. The officers fall out; the first sergeant
+places himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front and 2 paces
+from the nearest flank of the company, salutes, faces toward opposite
+flank of the company, and commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3.
+_Port_, 4. _ARMS_, 5. _DISMISSED_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+_Alignments._
+
+175. The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School of the
+Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file. The
+rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the front
+and covers his file leader.
+
+At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation of the
+line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is
+made, verifies the alignment, and commands: _FRONT_.
+
+Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify
+alignments.
+
+
+_Movements on the Fixed Pivot._
+
+176. Being in line, to turn the company: 1. _Company right (left)_, 2.
+_MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_; or, 3. _Forward_, 4. _MARCH_.
+
+At the second command the right-flank man in the front rank faces to
+the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank men oblique
+to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time; in
+the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by the
+second and first, moves straight to the front until in rear of his
+front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and mark time;
+the remaining men of the rear rank move straight to the front 4 paces,
+oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the third man, cover
+their file leaders, and mark time; the right guide steps back, takes
+post on the flank, and marks time.
+
+The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace in rear of the
+new line.
+
+The command _halt_ may be given at any time after the movement begins;
+only those halt who are in the new position. Each of the others halts
+upon arriving on the line, aligns himself to the right, and executes
+_front_ without command.
+
+177. Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the reverse: 1.
+_Platoons right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_; or 3.
+_Forward_, 4. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company.
+
+Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on the flank
+toward which the movement is to be executed are covering. This is
+effected by previously announcing the guide to that flank.
+
+178. Being in line, to form column of squads, or the reverse; or,
+being in line of platoons, to form column of platoons, or the reverse:
+1. _Squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Squads right (left)_, 2.
+_MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad.
+
+If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side of the
+file closers, they dart through the column and take posts in rear of
+the company at the second command. If the column of squads be formed
+from line, the file closers take posts on the pivot flank, abreast of
+and 4 inches from the nearest rank. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+_Movements on the Moving Pivot._
+
+179. Being in line, to change direction: 1. _Right (Left) turn_, 2.
+_MARCH_, 3. _Forward_, 4. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed as described in the School of the Squad, except that the men
+do not glance toward the marching flank and that all take the full
+step at the fourth command. The right guide is the pivot of the front
+rank. Each rear-rank man obliques on the same ground as his file
+leader.
+
+180. Being in column of platoons, to change direction: 1. _Column
+right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the first command the leader of the leading platoon commands:
+_Right turn_. At the command _march_ the leading platoon turns to the
+right on moving pivot; its leader commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_,
+on completion of the turn. Rear platoons march squarely up to the
+turning point of the leading platoon and turn at command of their
+leaders.
+
+181. Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. _Column right
+(left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns to the
+right on moving pivot as in the School of the Squad; the other ranks,
+without command, turn successively on the same ground and in a similar
+manner.
+
+182. Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons or the
+reverse: 1. _Platoons, column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company.
+
+183. Being in line, to form column of squads and change direction: 1.
+_Squads right (left), column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Right
+(Left) by squads_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+In the first case the right squad initiates the _column right_ as soon
+as it has completed the _squad right_.
+
+In the second case, at the command _march_, the right squad marches
+_forward_; the remainder of the company executes _squads right,
+column left_, and follows the right squad. The right guide, when he
+has posted himself in front of the right squad, takes four short
+steps, then resumes the full step; the right squad conforms.
+
+184. Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1. _Squads right (left),
+platoons, column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Platoons, right
+(left) by squads_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company in the preceding
+paragraph.
+
+
+_Facing or Marching to the Rear._
+
+185. Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of platoons or
+squads, to face or march to the rear: 1. _Squads right (left) about_,
+2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Squads right (left) about_, 2. _MARCH_, 3.
+_Company_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad.
+
+If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closers
+turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, each
+darts through the nearest interval between squads. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+2._)
+
+186. To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. _About_, 2. _FACE_, 3.
+_Forward_, 4. _MARCH_.
+
+If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now the
+front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their relative
+positions. No other movement is executed until the line is faced to
+the original front.
+
+
+_On Right (Left) Into Line._
+
+187. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line on right or
+left: 1. _On right (left) into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4.
+_HALT_, 5. _FRONT_.
+
+At the first command the leader of the leading unit commands: _Right
+turn_. The leaders of the other units command: _Forward_, if at a
+halt. At the second command, the leading unit turns to the right on
+moving pivot. The command _halt_ is given when the leading unit has
+advanced the desired distance in the new direction; it halts; its
+leader then commands: _Right dress_.
+
+The units in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, when
+opposite the right of its place in line, executes _right turn_ at the
+command of its leader; each is halted on the line at the command of
+its leader, who then commands: _Right dress_. All dress on the first
+unit in line.
+
+If executed in double time, the leading squad marches in double time
+until halted.
+
+
+_Front Into Line._
+
+188. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line to the front:
+1. _Right (Left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4.
+_HALT_, 5. _FRONT_.
+
+At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the leading
+one command: _Right oblique_. If at a halt, the leader of the leading
+unit commands: _Forward_. At the second command the leading unit moves
+straight forward; the rear units oblique as indicated. The command
+_halt_ is given when the leading unit has advanced the desired
+distance; it halts; its leader then commands: _Left dress_. Each of
+the rear units, when opposite its place in line, resumes the original
+direction at the command of its leader; each is halted on the line at
+the command of its leader, who then commands: _Left dress_. All dress
+on the first unit in line.
+
+189. Being in column of squads to form column of platoons, or being in
+line of platoons, to form the company in line: 1. _Platoons, right
+(left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_, 5.
+_FRONT_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company. In forming the
+company in line, the dress is on the left squad of the left platoon.
+If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders verify the alignment
+before taking their posts; the captain commands _front_ when the
+alignments have been verified.
+
+When _front into line_ is executed in double time the commands for
+halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is toward the side of
+the first unit in line.
+
+
+_AT EASE AND ROUTE STEP._
+
+190. The column of squads is the habitual column of route, but _route
+step_ and _at ease_ are applicable to any marching formation.
+
+191. To march at route step: 1. _Route step_, 2. _MARCH_. Sabers are
+carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry their pieces at
+will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not required to preserve
+silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks cover and preserve their
+distance. If halted from route step, the men stand _at rest_.
+
+192. To march at ease: 1. _At ease_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The company marches as in route step, except that silence is
+preserved; when halted, the men remain _at ease_.
+
+193. Marching at route step or at ease: 1. _Company_, 2. _ATTENTION_.
+
+At the command _attention_ the pieces are brought to the right
+shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed.
+
+
+_TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS._
+
+194. Being in column of squads: 1. _Right (left) by twos_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_ all files except the two right files of the
+leading squad execute _in place halt_; the two left files of the
+leading squad oblique to the right when disengaged and follow the
+right files at the shortest practicable distance. The remaining squads
+follow successively in like manner. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+195. Being in column of squads or twos: 1. _Right (left) by file_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, all files execute _in place halt_ except the
+right file of the leading two or squad. The left file or files of the
+leading two or squad oblique successively to the right when disengaged
+and each follows the file on its right at the shortest practicable
+distance. The remaining twos or squads follow successively in like
+manner. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+196. Being in column of files or twos, to form column of squads; or,
+being in column of files, to form column of twos: 1. _Squads (Twos),
+right (left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_, the leading file or files halt. The remainder
+of the squad, or two, obliques to the right and halts on line with the
+leading file or files. The remaining squads or twos close up and
+successively form in rear of the first in like manner.
+
+The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered _right_ or
+_left_, so as to restore the files to their normal relative positions
+in the two or squad.
+
+197. The movements prescribed in the three preceding paragraphs are
+difficult of execution at attention and have no value as disciplinary
+exercises.
+
+198. Marching by twos or files can not be executed without serious
+delay and waste of road space. Every reasonable precaution will be
+taken to obviate the necessity for these formations.
+
+
+EXTENDED ORDER.
+
+_Rules for Deployment._
+
+199. The command _guide right (left_ or _center)_ indicates the base
+squad for the deployment; if in line it designates the actual _right
+(left_ or _center)_ squad; if in column the command _guide right
+(left)_ designates the _leading_ squad, and the command _guide center_
+designates the _center_ squad. After the deployment is completed, the
+guide is _center_ without command, unless otherwise ordered.
+
+200. At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, from either
+column of squads or line, each squad leader (except the leader of the
+base squad, when his squad does not advance), cautions his squad,
+_follow me_ or _by the right (left) flank_, as the case may be; at the
+command _march_, he steps in front of his squad and leads it to its
+place in line.
+
+201. Having given the command for forming skirmish line, the captain,
+if necessary, indicates to the corporal of the base squad the point on
+which the squad is to march; the corporal habitually looks to the
+captain for such directions.
+
+202. The base squad is deployed as soon as it has sufficient interval.
+The other squads are deployed as they arrive on the general line; each
+corporal halts in his place in line and commands or signals, _as
+skirmishers_; the squad deploys and halts abreast of him.
+
+If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before
+arriving on the line.
+
+203. Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the guide.
+Within their respective fronts, individuals or units march so as best
+to secure cover or to facilitate the advance, but the general and
+orderly progress of the whole is paramount.
+
+On halting, a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the
+enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying down
+if necessary.
+
+204. The company in skirmish line _advances_, _halts_, moves _by the
+flank_, or _to the rear_, _obliques_, resumes _the direct march_,
+passes from _quick_ to _double time_ and the reverse by the same
+commands and in a similar manner as in close order; if at a halt, the
+movement _by the flank_ or _to the rear_ is executed by the same
+commands as when marching. _Company right (left, half right, half
+left)_ is executed as explained for the front rank, skirmish intervals
+being maintained.
+
+205. A platoon or other part of the company is deployed and marched in
+the same manner as the company, substituting in the commands,
+_platoon_ (_detachment_, etc.) for _company_.
+
+
+_Deployments._
+
+206. Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: 1. _As
+skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to the
+front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, the captain
+commands: 1. _Company_, 2. _HALT_. If the guide be _right (left)_, the
+other corporals move to the _left (right)_ front, and, in succession
+from the base, place their squads on the line; if the guide be center,
+the other corporals move to the _right_ or _left_ front, according as
+they are on the right or left of the center squad, and in succession
+from the center squad place their squads on the line.
+
+If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the other
+squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; interior
+squads may be moved when squads more distant from the base have gained
+comfortable marching distance.
+
+207. Being in column of squads, to form skirmish line to the front: 1.
+_As skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If marching, the corporal of the base squad deploys it and moves
+straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad without
+advancing. If the guide be _right (left)_, the other corporals move to
+the _left (right) front_, and, in succession from the base, place
+their squads on the line; if the guide be _center_, the corporals in
+front of the center squad move to the right (if at a halt, to the
+right rear), the corporals in rear of the center squad move to the
+left front, and each, in succession from the base, places his squad on
+the line.
+
+The column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands and in
+like manner.
+
+208. The company in line or in column of squads may be deployed in an
+oblique direction by the same commands. The captain points out the
+desired direction; the corporal of the base squad moves in the
+direction indicated; the other corporals conform.
+
+209. To form skirmish line to the flank or rear the line or the column
+of squads is turned by squads to the flank or rear and then deployed
+as described.
+
+210. The intervals between men are increased or decreased as described
+in the School of the Squad, adding to the preparatory command, _guide
+right (left_ or _center)_ if necessary.
+
+
+_The Assembly._
+
+211. The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, the
+element on which the company is to assemble and commands: 1.
+_Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated point
+and the company is re-formed in line. If assembled by platoons, these
+are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, and the
+company is re-formed in line.
+
+Platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. _Platoons, assemble_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+Executed by each platoon as described for the company.
+
+One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. _Such
+platoon(s), assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Executed by the designated platoon or platoons as described for the
+company.
+
+
+_The Advance._
+
+212. The advance of a company into an engagement (whether for attack
+or defense) is conducted in close order, preferably column of squads,
+until the probability of encountering hostile fire makes it advisable
+to deploy. After deployment, and before opening fire, the advance of
+the company may be continued in skirmish line or other suitable
+formation, depending upon circumstances. The advance may often be
+facilitated, or better advantage taken of cover, or losses reduced by
+the employment of the _platoon_ or _squad columns_ or by the use of a
+_succession of thin lines_. The selection of the method to be used is
+made by the captain or major, the choice depending upon conditions
+arising during the progress of the advance. If the deployment is found
+to be premature, it will generally be best to assemble the company and
+proceed in close order.
+
+Patrols are used to provide the necessary security against surprise.
+
+213. Being in skirmish line: 1. _Platoon columns_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their
+respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march to
+the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in like
+manner to the right; each platoon lender thus conducts the march of
+his platoon in double column of files; platoon guides follow in rear
+of their respective platoons to insure prompt and orderly execution of
+the advance.
+
+214. Being in skirmish line: 1. _Squad columns_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Each squad leader moves to the front; the members of each squad
+oblique toward and follow their squad leader in single file at easy
+marching distances.
+
+215. _Platoon columns_ are profitably used where the ground is so
+difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to take
+advantage of the few favorable routes; no two platoons should march
+within the area of burst of a single shrapnel.[1] _Squad columns_ are
+of value principally in facilitating the advance over rough or
+brush-grown ground; they afford no material advantage in securing
+cover.
+
+[Footnote 1: Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.]
+
+216. To deploy platoon or squad columns: 1. _As skirmishers_, 2.
+_MARCH_.
+
+Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place
+themselves in their original positions on the line.
+
+217. Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The platoon or squad leaders signal _assemble_. The men of each
+platoon or squad, as the case may be, advance and, moving to the right
+and left, take their proper places in line, each unit assembling on
+the leading element of the column and re-forming in line. The platoon
+or squad leaders conduct their units toward the element or point
+indicated by the captain, and to their places in line; the company is
+re-formed in line.
+
+218. Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of thin lines:
+1. _(Such numbers), forward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The captain points out in advance the selected position in front of
+the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves to the
+front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals as nearly
+as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable distance
+(generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon the terrain and the
+character of the hostile fire), a second is sent forward by similar
+commands, and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has
+advanced. Upon arriving at the indicated position, the first line is
+halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, halt on line with the first
+and the men take their proper places in the skirmish line.
+
+Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and the men of a
+squad are sent forward in order from right to left as deployed. The
+first line is led by the platoon leader of the right platoon, the
+second by the guide of the right platoon, and so on in order from
+right to left.
+
+The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions demand a
+faster gait.
+
+The company having arrived at the indicated position, a further
+advance by the same means may be advisable.
+
+219. The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide
+stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery fire or heavy,
+long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its
+purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to
+engaging in a fire fight. This method of advancing results in serious
+(though temporary) loss of control over the company. Its advantage
+lies in the fact that it offers a less definite target, hence is less
+likely to draw fire.
+
+220. The above are suggestions. Other and better formations may be
+devised to fit particular cases. The best formation is the one which
+advances the line farthest with the least loss of men, time, and
+control.
+
+
+_The Fire Attack._
+
+221. The principles governing the advance of the firing line in attack
+are considered in the School of the Battalion.
+
+When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as a whole by
+ordinary means, it advances by rushes.
+
+222. Being in skirmish line: 1. _By platoon_ (_two platoons, squad,
+four men_, etc.), _from the right (left)_, 2. _RUSH_.
+
+The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges the
+details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it
+into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he designates the
+leader for the indicated fraction. When about to rush, he causes the
+men of the fraction to cease firing and to hold themselves flat, but
+in readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at
+the signal of the platoon leader, if the latter be not the leader of
+the rush) commands: _Follow me_, and, running at top speed, leads the
+fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open
+fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been
+previously designated.
+
+The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next
+like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader, without further
+command of the captain, and so on, successively, until the entire
+company is on the line established by the first rush.
+
+If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior platoon
+leader conforms to the action of the senior.
+
+A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase or
+decrease the size of the fractions to complete the movement.
+
+223. When the company forms a part of the firing line, the rush of the
+company as a whole is conducted by the captain, as described for a
+platoon in the preceding paragraph. The captain leads the rush;
+platoon leaders lead their respective platoons; platoon guides follow
+the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance.
+
+224. When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes
+impracticable, any method of advance that _brings the attack closer to
+the enemy_, such as crawling, should be employed.
+
+For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 318 and 319.
+
+
+_The Company in Support._
+
+225. To enable it to follow or reach the firing line, the support
+adopts suitable formations, following the principles explained in
+paragraphs 212-218.
+
+The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. If after
+deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it for some time in
+close formation, it should be reassembled. It is redeployed when
+necessary.
+
+226. The movements of the support as a whole and the dispatch of
+reenforcements from it to the firing line are controlled by the major.
+
+A reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence and will
+be avoided whenever practicable.
+
+The captain of a company in support is constantly on the alert for the
+major's signals or commands.
+
+227. A reenforcement sent to the firing line joins it deployed as
+skirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement places it in an interval
+in the line, if one exists, and commands it thereafter as a unit. If
+no such suitable interval exists, the reenforcement is advanced with
+increased intervals between skirmishers; each man occupies the nearest
+interval in the firing line, and each then obeys the orders of the
+nearest squad leader and platoon leader.
+
+228. A reenforcement joins the firing line as quickly as possible
+without exhausting the men.
+
+229. The original platoon division of the companies in the firing line
+should be maintained and should not be broken up by the mingling of
+reenforcements.
+
+Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying a
+reenforcement take over the duties of others of like grade who have
+been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to exercise their
+normal functions. Conditions will vary and no rules can be prescribed.
+It is essential that all assist in mastering the increasing
+difficulties of control.
+
+
+_The Company Acting Alone._
+
+230. In general, the company, when acting alone, is employed according
+to the principles applicable to the battalion acting alone; the
+captain employs platoons as the major employs companies, making due
+allowance for the difference in strength.
+
+The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed with.
+
+231. The company must be well protected against surprise. Combat
+patrols on the flanks are specially important. Each leader of a flank
+platoon details a man to watch for the signals of the patrol or
+patrols on his flank.
+
+
+FIRE.
+
+232. Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra ammunition is issued
+before the company deploys for combat.
+
+In close order the company executes the firings at the command of the
+captain, who posts himself in rear of the center of the company.
+
+Usually the firings in close order consist of saluting volleys only.
+
+233. When the company is deployed, the men execute the firings at the
+command of their platoon leaders; the latter give such commands as are
+necessary to carry out the captain's directions, and, from time to
+time, add such further commands as are necessary to continue, correct,
+and control the fire ordered.
+
+234. The voice is generally inadequate for giving commands during fire
+and must be replaced by signals of such character that proper fire
+direction and control is assured. To attract attention, signals must
+usually be preceded by the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of
+the firing line about to rush should, if practicable, avoid using the
+long blast signal as an aid to _cease firing_. Officers and men behind
+the firing line can not ordinarily move freely along the line, but
+must depend on mutual watchfulness and the proper use of the
+prescribed signals. All should post themselves so as to see their
+immediate superiors and subordinates.
+
+235. The musicians assist the captain by observing the enemy, the
+target, and the fire effect, by transmitting commands or signals, and
+by watching for signals.
+
+236. Firing with blank cartridges at an _outlined_ or _represented_
+enemy at distances less than 100 yards is prohibited.
+
+237. The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation
+thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in
+marksmanship, are treated in the Small-Arms Firing Manual.
+
+
+_Ranges._
+
+238. For convenience of reference ranges are classified as follows:
+
+     0 to 600 yards, close range.
+     600 to 1,200 yards, effective range.
+     1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range.
+     2,000 yards and over, distant range.
+
+239. The distance to the target must be determined as accurately as
+possible and the sights set accordingly. Aside from training and
+morale, this is the most important single factor in securing effective
+fire at the longer ranges.
+
+240. Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most
+accurate and only practicable method of determining the range will
+generally be to take the mean of several estimates.
+
+Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate
+estimators in the company, are designated as _range estimators_ and
+are specially trained in estimating distances.
+
+Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range
+estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of
+their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+
+_Classes of Firing._
+
+241. _Volley firing_ has limited application. In defense it may be
+used in the early stages of the action if the enemy presents a large,
+compact target. It may be used by troops executing _fire of position_.
+When the ground near the target is such that the strike of bullets can
+be seen from the firing line, _ranging volleys_ may be used to correct
+the sight setting.
+
+In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon.
+
+242. _Fire at will_ is the class of fire normally employed in attack
+or defense.
+
+243. _Clip fire_ has limited application. It is principally used: 1.
+In the early stages of combat, to steady the men by habituating them
+to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short burst of fire.
+
+
+_The Target._
+
+244. Ordinarily the major will assign to the company an objective in
+attack or sector in defense; the company's target will lie within the
+limits so assigned. In the choice of target, tactical considerations
+are paramount; the nearest hostile troops within the objective or
+sector will thus be the usual target. This will ordinarily be the
+hostile firing line; troops in rear are ordinarily proper targets for
+artillery, machine guns, or, at times, infantry employing fire of
+position.
+
+Change of target should not be made without excellent reasons
+therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under
+conditions which make them more to be feared than the troops
+comprising the former target.
+
+245. The distribution of fire over the entire target is of special
+importance.
+
+The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each
+platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his
+position in the company. Men are so instructed that each fires on
+that part of the target which is directly opposite him.
+
+246. All parts of the target are equally important. Care must be
+exercised that the men do not slight its less visible parts. A section
+of the target not covered by fire represents a number of the enemy
+permitted to fire coolly and effectively.
+
+247. If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders
+select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the
+_aiming target_, and direct a sight setting which will carry the cone
+of fire into the target.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+
+_Fire Direction._
+
+248. When the company is large enough to be divided into platoons, it
+is impracticable for the captain to command it directly in combat. His
+efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to
+enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly
+what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct
+serious errors or omissions.
+
+249. The captain _directs_ the fire of the company or of designated
+platoons. He designates the target, and, when practicable, allots a
+part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action
+he determines the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates
+the class of fire to be employed and the time to open fire.
+Thereafter, he observes the fire effect, corrects material errors in
+sight setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and
+causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as may be received
+from the rear.
+
+
+_Fire Control._
+
+250. In combat the platoon is the _fire unit_. From 20 to 35 rifles
+are as many as one leader can control effectively.
+
+251. Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or
+directions of the captain, having first taken such precautions to
+insure correct sight setting and clear description of the target or
+aiming target as the situation permits or requires; thereafter, he
+gives such additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact
+compliance with the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when
+necessary. He designates an aiming target when the target can not be
+seen with the naked eye.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+252. In general, _platoon leaders_ observe the target and the effect
+of their fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands or
+signals; they observe and regulate the rate of fire. The _platoon
+guides_ watch the firing line and check every breach of fire
+discipline. _Squad leaders_ transmit commands and signals when
+necessary, observe the conduct of their squads and abate excitement,
+assist in enforcing fire discipline and participate in the firing.
+
+253. The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control.
+Loss of control is an evil which robs success of its greatest results.
+To avoid or delay such loss should be the constant aim of all.
+
+Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight
+setting and target, and resume a well directed fire.
+
+
+_Fire Discipline._
+
+254. "Fire discipline implies, besides a habit of obedience, a control
+of the rifle by the soldier, the result of training, which will enable
+him in action to make hits instead of misses. It embraces taking
+advantage of the ground; care in setting the sight and delivery of
+fire; constant attention to the orders of the leaders, and careful
+observation of the enemy; an increase of fire when the target is
+favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy disappears; economy
+of ammunition." (Small-Arms Firing Manual.)
+
+In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position and thus
+reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate value of
+hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire
+superiority.
+
+Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each
+man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the
+proper target.
+
+255. To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire
+discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire should be as rapid as
+is consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the
+visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper
+rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man, usually
+rendering cautions or commands unnecessary.
+
+In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt preceding
+the assault, and in pursuing fire.
+
+256. In an advance by rushes, leaders of troops in firing positions
+are responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover the advance of
+each rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change slightly the
+direction of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of advanced
+portions of the firing line.
+
+257. In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon
+leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point
+where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly
+with vigorous fire.
+
+
+
+
+SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
+
+
+258. The battalion being purely a tactical unit, the major's duties
+are primarily those of an instructor in drill and tactics and of a
+tactical commander. He is responsible for the theoretical and
+practical training of the battalion. He supervises the training of the
+companies of the battalion with a view to insuring the thoroughness
+and uniformity of their instruction.
+
+In the instruction of the battalion as a whole, his efforts will be
+directed chiefly to the development of tactical efficiency, devoting
+only such time to the mechanism of drill and to the ceremonies as may
+be necessary in order to insure precision, smartness, and proper
+control.
+
+259. The movements explained herein are on the basis of a battalion of
+four companies; they may be executed by a battalion of two or more
+companies, not exceeding six.
+
+260. The companies are generally arranged from right to left according
+to the rank of the captains present at the formation. The arrangement
+of the companies may be varied by the major or higher commander.
+
+After the battalion is formed, no cognizance is taken of the relative
+order of the companies.
+
+261. In whatever direction the battalion faces, the companies are
+designated numerically from right to left in line, and from head to
+rear in column, _first company_, _second company_, etc.
+
+The terms _right_ and _left_ apply to actual right and left as the
+line faces; if the about by squads be executed when in line, the right
+company becomes the left company and the right center becomes the left
+center company.
+
+The designation center company indicates the right center or the
+actual center company according as the number of companies is even or
+odd.
+
+262. The band and other special units, when attached to the battalion,
+take the same post with respect to it as if it were the nearest
+battalion shown in Plate IV.
+
+
+CLOSE ORDER.
+
+_Rules._
+
+[Illustration: Plate III. THE BATTALION.]
+
+263. Captains repeat such preparatory commands as are to be
+immediately executed by their companies, as _forward_, _squads right_,
+etc.; the men execute the commands _march_, _halt_, etc., if applying
+to their companies, when given by the major. In movements executed in
+route step or at ease the captains repeat the command of execution, if
+necessary. Captains do not repeat the major's commands in executing
+the manual of arms, nor those commands which are not essential to the
+execution of a movement by their companies, as _column of squads_,
+_first company_, _squads right_, etc.
+
+In giving commands or cautions captains may prefix the proper letter
+designations of their companies, as _A Company, HALT_; _B Company,
+squads right_, etc.
+
+264. At the command _guide center (right_ or _left)_, captains
+command: _Guide right_ or _left_, according to the positions of their
+companies. _Guide center_ designates the left guide of the center
+company.
+
+265. When the companies are to be dressed, captains place themselves
+on that flank toward which the dress is to be made, as follows:
+
+The battalion in line: Beside the guide (or the flank file of the
+front rank, if the guide is not in line) and facing to the front.
+
+The battalion in column of companies: Two paces from the guide, in
+prolongation of and facing down the line.
+
+Each captain, after dressing his company, commands: _FRONT_, and takes
+his post.
+
+The battalion being in line and unless otherwise prescribed, at the
+captain's command _dress_, or at the command _halt_, when it is
+prescribed that the company shall dress, the guide on the flank away
+from the point of rest, with his piece at right shoulder, dresses
+promptly on the captain and the companies beyond. During the dress he
+moves, if necessary, to the right and left only; the captain dresses
+the company on the line thus established. The guide takes the position
+of order arms at the command _front_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+266. The battalion executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_
+and _marchings_, _manual of arms_, resumes _attention_, _kneels_,
+_lies down_, _rises_, _stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the
+Schools of the Soldier and Squad, substituting in the commands
+_battalion_ for _squad_.
+
+The battalion executes _squads right (left)_, _squads right (left)
+about_, _route step_ and _at ease_, and _obliques_ and resumes the
+_direct march_, as explained in the School of the Company.
+
+267. The battalion in column of platoons, squads, twos, or files
+changes direction; in column of squads forms column of twos or files
+and re-forms columns of twos or squads, as explained in the School of
+the Company.
+
+268. When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution by
+companies or platoons of movements in the School of the Company the
+major may cause such movement to be executed by prefixing, when
+necessary, _companies (platoons)_ to the commands prescribed therein:
+as 1. _Companies, right front into line_, 2. _MARCH_. To complete such
+simultaneous movements, the commands _halt_ or _march_, if
+prescribed, are given by the major. The command _front_, when
+prescribed, is given by the captains.
+
+269. The battalion as a unit executes the loadings and firings only in
+firing saluting volleys. The commands are as for the company,
+substituting _battalion_ for _company_. At the first command for
+loading, captains take post in rear of the center of their respective
+companies. At the conclusion of the firing, the captains resume their
+posts in line.
+
+On other occasions, when firing in close order is necessary, it is
+executed by company or other subdivision under instructions from the
+major.
+
+
+_To Form the Battalion._
+
+270. For purposes other than ceremonies: The battalion is formed in
+column of squads. The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts
+himself so as to be facing the column, when formed, and 6 paces in
+front of the place to be occupied by the leading guide of the
+battalion; he draws saber; _adjutant's call_ is sounded or the
+adjutant signals _assemble_.
+
+The companies are formed, at attention, in column of squads in their
+proper order. Each captain, after halting his company, salutes the
+adjutant; the adjutant returns the salute and, when the last captain
+has saluted, faces the major and reports: _Sir, the battalion is
+formed_. He then joins the major.
+
+271. For ceremonies or when directed: The battalion is formed in line.
+
+The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts himself so as to
+be 6 paces to the right of the right company when line is formed, and
+faces in the direction in which the line is to extend. He draws saber;
+_adjutant's call_ is sounded; the band plays if present.
+
+The right company is conducted by its captain so as to arrive from the
+rear, parallel to the line; its right and left guides precede it on
+the line by about 20 paces, taking post facing to the right at order
+arms, so that their elbows will be against the breasts of the right
+and left files of their company when it is dressed. The guides of the
+other companies successively prolong the line to the left in like
+manner and the companies approach their respective places in line as
+explained for the right company. The adjutant, from his post, causes
+the guides to cover.
+
+When about 1 pace in rear of the line, each company is halted and
+dressed to the right against the arms of the guides.
+
+The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the
+right company is halted; it ceases playing when the left company has
+halted.
+
+When the guides of the left company have been posted, the adjutant,
+moving by the shortest route, takes post facing the battalion midway
+between the post of the major and the center of the battalion.
+
+The major, staff, noncommissioned staff, and orderlies take their
+posts.
+
+When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and others
+have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. _Guides_, 2.
+_POSTS_, 3. _Present_, 4. _ARMS_. At the second command guides take
+their places in the line. The adjutant then turns about and reports to
+the major: _Sir, the battalion is formed_; the major directs the
+adjutant: _Take your post, Sir_; draws saber and brings the battalion
+to the order. The adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the
+major.
+
+
+_To Dismiss the Battalion._
+
+272. _DISMISS YOUR COMPANIES._
+
+Staff and noncommissioned staff officers fall out; each captain
+marches his company off and dismisses it.
+
+
+_To Rectify the Alignment._
+
+273. Being in line at a halt, to align the battalion: 1. _Center
+(right_ or _left)_, 2. _DRESS_.
+
+The captains dress their companies successively toward the center
+(right or left) guide of the battalion, each as soon as the captain
+next toward the indicated guide commands: _Front_. The captains of the
+center companies (if the dress is _center_) dress them without waiting
+for each other.
+
+274. To give the battalion a new alignment: 1. _Guides center (right_
+or _left) company on the line_, 2. _Guides on the line_, 3. _Center
+(right_ or _left)_, 4. _DRESS_, 5. _Guides_, 6. _POSTS_.
+
+At the first command, the designated guides place themselves on the
+line (par. 271) facing the center (right or left). The major
+establishes them in the direction he wishes to give the battalion.
+
+At the second command, the guides of the other companies take posts,
+facing the center (right or left), so as to prolong the line.
+
+At the command _dress_, each captain dresses his company to the flank
+toward which the guides of his company face.
+
+At the command _posts_, given when all companies have completed the
+dress, the guides return to their posts.
+
+
+_To Rectify the Column._
+
+275. Being in column of companies, or in close column, at a halt, if
+the guides do not cover or have not their proper distances, and it is
+desired to correct them, the major commands: 1. _Right (left)_, 2.
+_DRESS_.
+
+Captains of companies in rear of the first place their right guides so
+as to cover at the proper distance; each captain aligns his company to
+the right and commands: _FRONT_.
+
+
+_On Right (Left) into Line._
+
+276. Being in column of squads or companies: 1. _On right (left) into
+line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the
+leading company commands: _Squads right_. If at a halt each captain in
+rear commands: _Forward_. At the second command the leading company
+marches in line to the right; the companies in rear continue to march
+to the front and form successively on the left, each, when opposite
+its place, being marched in line to the right.
+
+The fourth command is given when the first company has advanced the
+desired distance in the new direction; it halts and is dressed to the
+right by its captain; the others complete the movement, each being
+halted 1 pace in rear of the line established by the first company,
+and then dressed to the right.
+
+Being in column of companies: At the first command, the captain of the
+first company commands: _Right turn_. If at a halt, each captain in
+rear commands: _Forward_. Each of the captains in rear of the leading
+company gives the command: 1. _Right turn_, in time to add, 2.
+_MARCH_, when his company arrives opposite the right of its place in
+line.
+
+The fourth command is given and the movement completed as explained
+above.
+
+Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each
+captain places himself so as to march beside the right guide after his
+company forms line or changes direction to the right.
+
+If executed in double time, the leading company marches in double time
+until halted.
+
+
+_Front into Line._
+
+277. Being in column of squads or companies: 1. _Right (Left) front
+into line_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the
+leading company commands: _Column right_; the captains of the
+companies in rear, _column half right_. At the second command the
+leading company executes column right, and, as the last squad
+completes the change of direction, is formed in line to the left,
+halted, and dressed to the left. Each of the companies in rear is
+conducted by the most convenient route to the rear of the right of the
+preceding company, thence to the right, parallel to and 1 pace in rear
+of the new line; when opposite its place, it is formed in line to the
+left, halted, and dressed to the left.
+
+Being in column of companies: If marching, the captain of the leading
+company gives the necessary commands to halt his company at the second
+command; if at a halt, the leading company stands fast. At the first
+command, the captain of each company in rear commands: _Squads right_,
+or _Right by squads_, and after the second command conducts his
+company by the most convenient route to its place in line, as
+described above.
+
+Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each
+captain halts when opposite or at the point where the left of his
+company is to rest.
+
+
+_To Form Column of Companies Successively to the Right or Left._
+
+278. Being in column of squads: 1. _Column of companies, first
+company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The leading company executes _squads right_ and moves forward. The
+other companies move forward in column of squads and successively
+march in line to the right on the same ground as the leading company
+and in such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding
+company.
+
+
+_To Form Column of Squads Successively to the Right or Left._
+
+279. Being in column of companies: 1. _Column of squads, first
+company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The leading company executes _squads right_ and moves forward. The
+other companies move forward in column of companies and successively
+march in column of squads to the right on the same ground as the
+leading company.
+
+
+_To Change Direction._
+
+280. Being in column of companies or close column: 1. _Column right
+(left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The captain of the first company commands: _Right turn_.
+
+The leading company turns to the right on moving pivot, the captain
+adding: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_, upon its completion.
+
+The other companies march squarely up to the turning point; each
+changes direction by the same commands and means as the first and in
+such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding company.
+
+281. Being in line of companies or close line: 1. _Battalion right
+(left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4. _HALT_.
+
+The right company changes direction to the right; the other companies
+are conducted by the shortest line to their places abreast of the
+first.
+
+The fourth command is given when the right company has advanced the
+desired distance in the new direction; that company halts; the others
+halt successively upon arriving on the line.
+
+282. Being in column of squads, the battalion changes direction by the
+same commands and in the manner prescribed for the company.
+
+
+_Mass Formations._
+
+282 1-2. Being in column of squads, to form a line of columns of
+companies or company subdivisions, facing in any desired direction, at
+any desired interval, on the right or left of the leading element of
+the battalion: 1. _Line of companies (half companies, platoons), at
+(so many) paces, guide right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4.
+_HALT_.
+
+The leading company (or subdivision) marches in the direction
+previously indicated by the major until the command halt is given and
+then halts. Each succeeding company (or subdivision) marches by the
+most direct route to its place at the prescribed interval on the left
+(right) of the next preceding company (or subdivision), halting when
+it is abreast of the leading element of the battalion.
+
+If the battalion be in any formation other than column of squads, the
+major indicates the desired direction to the leading element. The
+entire command forms column of squads and executes the movement in
+conformity with the principles indicated above. (_C.I.D.R., No. 19._)
+
+283. Being in line, line of companies, or column of companies: 1.
+_Close on first (fourth) company_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast; if marching, it is
+halted; each of the other companies is conducted toward it and is
+halted in proper order in close column.
+
+If the battalion is in line, companies form successively in rear of
+the indicated company; if in column of squads, companies in rear of
+the leading company form on the left of it.
+
+In close column formed from line on the first company, the left guides
+cover; formed on the fourth company, right guides cover. If formed on
+the leading company, the guide remains as before the formation. In
+close line, the guides are halted abreast of the guide of the leading
+company.
+
+The battalion in column closes on the leading company only.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 19._)
+
+
+_To Extend the Mass._
+
+284. Being in close column or in close line: 1. _Extend on first
+(fourth) company_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+Being in close line: If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast;
+if marching, it halts; each of the other companies is conducted away
+from the indicated company and is halted in its proper order in line
+of companies.
+
+Being in close column, the extension is made on the fourth company
+only. If marching, the leading company continues to march; companies
+in rear are halted and successively resume the march in time to follow
+at full distance. If at halt, the leading company marches; companies
+in rear successively march in time to follow at full distance.
+
+Close column is not extended in double time.
+
+285. Being in close column: 1. _Right (left) front into line_, 2.
+_MARCH_. Executed as from column of companies.
+
+286. Being in close column: 1. _Column of squads, first (fourth)
+company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The designated company marches in column of squads to the right. Each
+of the other companies executes the same movement in time to follow
+the preceding company in column.
+
+287. Being in close line: 1. _Column of squads, first (fourth)
+company, forward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The designated company moves forward. The other companies (halting if
+in march) successively take up the march and follow in column.
+
+
+_Route Step and At Ease._
+
+288. The battalion marches in _route step_ and _at ease_ as prescribed
+in the School of the Company. When marching in column of companies or
+platoons, the guides maintain the trace and distance.
+
+In route marches the major marches at the head of the column; when
+necessary, the file closers may be directed to march at the head and
+rear of their companies.
+
+
+_Assembly._
+
+289. The battalion being wholly or partially deployed, or the
+companies being separated: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The major places himself opposite to or designates the element or
+point on which the battalion is to assemble. Companies are assembled
+and marched to the indicated point. As the companies arrive the major
+or adjutant indicates the formation to be taken.
+
+
+COMBAT PRINCIPLES.
+
+_Orders._
+
+290. The following references to orders are applicable to attack or
+defense.
+
+291. In extended order, the company is the largest unit to execute
+movements by prescribed commands or means. The major, assembling his
+captains if practicable, directs the disposition of the battalion by
+means of _tactical orders_. He controls its subsequent movements by
+such _orders_ or _commands_ as are suitable to the occasion.
+
+292. In every disposition of the battalion for combat the major's
+order should give subordinates sufficient information of the enemy, of
+the position of supporting and neighboring troops, and of the object
+sought to enable them to conform intelligently to the general plan.
+
+The order should then designate the companies which are to constitute
+the _firing line_ and those which are to constitute the _support_. In
+attack, it should designate the direction or the objective, the order
+and front of the companies on the firing line, and should designate
+the right or left company as base company. In defense, it should
+describe the front of each company and, if necessary, the sector to be
+observed by each.
+
+293. When the battalion is operating alone, the major provides for the
+reconnaissance and protection of his flanks; if part of a larger
+force, the major makes similar provisions, when necessary, without
+orders from higher authority, unless such authority has specifically
+directed other suitable reconnaissance and protection.
+
+294. When the battalion is deployed upon the initiative of the major,
+he will indicate whether extra ammunition shall be issued; if deployed
+in pursuance of orders of higher authority, the major will cause the
+issue of extra ammunition, unless such authority has given directions
+to the contrary.
+
+
+_Deployment._
+
+295. The following principles of deployment are applicable to attack
+or defense.
+
+296. A premature deployment involves a long, disorganizing and
+fatiguing advance of the skirmish line, and should be avoided. A
+greater evil is to be caught by heavy fire when in dense column or
+other close order formation; hence advantage should be taken of cover
+in order to retain the battalion in close order formation until
+exposure to heavy hostile fire may reasonably be anticipated.
+
+297. The major regulates the depth of the deployment and the extent
+and density of the firing line, subject to such restrictions as a
+senior may have imposed.
+
+Companies or designated subdivisions and detachments are conducted by
+their commanders in such manner as best to accomplish the mission
+assigned to them under the major's orders. Companies designated for
+the firing line march independently to the place of deployment, form
+skirmish line, and take up the advance. They conform, in general, to
+the base company.
+
+298. The commander of a battalion, whether it is operating alone or as
+part of a larger force, should hold a part of his command out of the
+firing line. By the judicious use of this force the major can exert an
+influence not otherwise possible over his firing line and can control,
+within reasonable limits, an action once begun. So if his battalion be
+assigned to the _firing line_ the major will cause one, two, or three
+companies to be deployed on the firing line, retaining the remaining
+companies or company as a _support_ for that firing line. The division
+of the battalion into firing line and support will depend upon the
+front to be covered and the nature and anticipated severity of the
+action.
+
+299. If the battalion be part of a larger command, the number of
+companies in the firing line will generally be determinable from the
+regimental commander's order; the remainder constitutes the support.
+If the battalion is acting alone, the support must be strong enough to
+maintain the original fire power of the firing line, to protect the
+flanks, and to perform the functions of a reserve, whatever be the
+issue of the action. See paragraph 346.
+
+300. If the battalion is operating alone, the support may, according
+to circumstances, be held in one or two bodies and placed behind the
+center, or one or both flanks of the firing line, or echeloned beyond
+a flank. If the battalion is part of a larger force, the support is
+generally held in one body.
+
+301. The distance between the firing line and the supporting group or
+groups will vary between wide limits; it should be as short as the
+necessity for protection from heavy losses will permit. When cover is
+available, the support should be as close as 50 to 100 yards; when
+such cover is not available, it should not be closer than 300 yards.
+It may be as far as 500 yards in rear if good cover is there
+obtainable and is not obtainable at a lesser distance.
+
+302. In exceptional cases, as in a meeting engagement, it may be
+necessary to place an entire battalion or regiment in the firing line
+at the initial deployment, the support being furnished by other
+troops. Such deployment causes the early mingling of the larger units,
+thus rendering leadership and control extremely difficult. The
+necessity for such deployment will increase with the inefficiency of
+the commander and of the service of information.
+
+
+_Fire._
+
+303. Fire direction and fire control are functions of company and
+platoon commanders. The major makes the primary apportionment of the
+target--in defense, by assigning sectors of fire; in attack, by
+assigning the objective. In the latter case each company in the firing
+line takes as its target that part of the general objective which lies
+in its front.
+
+304. The major should indicate the point or time at which the fire
+fight is to open. He may do this in his order for deployment or he may
+follow the firing line close enough to do so at the proper time. If it
+be impracticable for him to do either, the senior officer with the
+firing line, in each battalion, selects the time for opening fire.
+
+
+_Attack._
+
+305. The battalion is the _attack unit_, whether operating alone or as
+part of a larger unit.
+
+306. If his battalion be one of several in the firing line, the major,
+in executing his part of the attack, pushes his battalion forward as
+vigorously as possible within the front, or section, assigned to it.
+The great degree of independence allowed to him as to details demands,
+in turn, the exercise of good judgment on his part. Better leadership,
+better troops, and more favorable terrain enable one battalion to
+advance more rapidly in attack than another less fortunate, and such a
+battalion will insure the further advance of the others. The leading
+battalion should not, however, become isolated; isolation may lead to
+its destruction.
+
+307. The deployment having been made, the firing line advances without
+firing. The predominant idea must be to close with the enemy as soon
+as possible without ruinous losses. The limited supply of ammunition
+and the uncertainty of resupply, the necessity for securing fire
+superiority in order to advance within the shorter ranges, and the
+impossibility of accomplishing this at ineffective ranges, make it
+imperative that fire be not opened as long as the advance can be
+continued without demoralizing losses. The attack which halts to open
+fire at extreme range (over 1,200 yards) is not likely ever to reach
+its destination. Every effort should be made, by using cover or
+inconspicuous formations, or by advancing the firing line as a whole,
+to arrive within 800 yards of the enemy before opening fire.
+
+308. Except when the enemy's artillery is able to effect an unusual
+concentration of fire, its fire upon deployed infantry causes losses
+which are unimportant when compared with those inflicted by his
+infantry; hence the attacking infantry should proceed to a position as
+described above, and from which an effective fire can be directed
+against the hostile infantry with a view to obtaining fire
+superiority. The effectiveness of the enemy's fire must be reduced so
+as to permit further advance. The more effective the fire to which the
+enemy is subjected the less effective will be his fire.
+
+309. Occasionally the fire of adjacent battalions, or of infantry
+employing fire of position, or of supporting artillery, will permit
+the further advance of the entire firing line from this point, but it
+will generally be necessary to advance by rushes of fractions of the
+line.
+
+The fraction making the rush should be as large as the hostile fire
+and the necessity for maintaining fire superiority will permit.
+Depending upon circumstances, the strength of the fraction may vary
+from a company to a few men.
+
+The advance is made as rapidly as possible without losing fire
+superiority. The smaller the fraction which rushes, the greater the
+number of rifles which continue to fire upon the enemy. On the other
+hand, the smaller the fraction which rushes the slower will be the
+progress of the attack.
+
+310. Enough rifles must continue in action to insure the success of
+each rush. Frequently the successive advances of the firing line must
+be effected by rushes of fractions of decreased size; that is,
+advances by rushes may first be made by company, later by half company
+or platoon, and finally by squads or files; but no subsequent
+opportunity to _increase_ the rate of advance, such as better cover or
+a decrease of the hostile fire, should be overlooked.
+
+311. Whenever possible, the rush is begun by a flank fraction of the
+firing line. In the absence of express directions from the major, each
+captain of a flank company determines when an advance by rushes shall
+be attempted. A flank company which inaugurates an advance by rushes
+becomes the base company, if not already the base. An advance by
+rushes having been inaugurated on one flank, the remainder of the
+firing line conforms; fractions rush successively from that flank and
+halt on the line established by the initial rush.
+
+The fractions need not be uniform in size; each captain indicates how
+his company shall rush, having due regard to the ground and the state
+of the fire fight.
+
+312. A fraction about to rush is sent forward when the remainder of
+the line is firing vigorously; otherwise the chief advantage of this
+method of advancing is lost.
+
+The length of the rush will vary from 30 to 80 yards, depending upon
+the existence of cover, positions for firing, and the hostile fire.
+
+313. When the entire firing line of the battalion has advanced to the
+new line, fresh opportunities to advance are sought as before.
+
+314. Two identical situations will never confront the battalion; hence
+at drill it is prohibited to arrange the details of an advance before
+the preceding one has been concluded, or to employ a fixed or
+prearranged method of advancing by rushes.
+
+315. The major posts himself so as best to direct the reenforcing of
+the firing line from the support. When all or nearly all of the
+support has been absorbed by the firing line, he joins, and takes full
+charge of, the latter.
+
+316. The reenforcing of the firing line by driblets of a squad or a
+few men has no appreciable effect. The firing line requires either no
+reenforcement or a strong one. Generally one or two platoons will be
+sent forward under cover of a heavy fire of the firing line.
+
+317. To facilitate control and to provide intervals in which
+reenforcements may be placed, the companies in the firing line should
+be kept closed in on their centers as they become depleted by
+casualties during the advance.
+
+When this is impracticable, reenforcements must mingle with and
+thicken the firing line. In battle the latter method will be the rule
+rather than the exception, and to familiarize the men with such
+conditions the combat exercises of the battalion should include both
+methods of reenforcing. Occasionally, to provide the necessary
+intervals for reenforcing by either of these methods, the firing line
+should be thinned by causing men to drop out and simulate losses
+during the various advances. Under ordinary conditions the depletion
+of the firing line for this purpose will be from one-fifth to one-half
+of its strength.
+
+318. The major or senior officer in the firing line determines when
+bayonets shall be fixed and gives the proper command or signal. It is
+repeated by all parts of the firing line. Each man who was in the
+front rank prior to deployment, as soon as he recognizes the command
+or signal, suspends firing, quickly fixes his bayonet, and immediately
+resumes firing; after which the other men suspend firing, fix
+bayonets, and immediately resume firing. The support also fixes
+bayonets. The concerted fixing of the bayonet by the firing line at
+drill does not simulate battle conditions and should not be required.
+It is essential that there be no marked pause in the firing. Bayonets
+will be fixed generally before or during the last, or second last,
+advance preceding the charge.
+
+319. Subject to orders from higher authority, the major determines the
+point from which the charge is to be made. The firing line having
+arrived at that point and being in readiness, the major causes the
+_charge_ to be sounded. The signal is repeated by the musicians of all
+parts of the line. The company officers lead the charge. The
+skirmishers spring forward shouting, run with bayonets at charge, and
+close with the enemy.
+
+The further conduct of the charging troops will depend upon
+circumstances; they may halt and engage in bayonet combat or in
+pursuing fire; they may advance a short distance to obtain a field of
+fire or to drive the enemy from the vicinity; they may assemble or
+reorganize, etc. If the enemy vacates his position every effort should
+be made to open fire at once on the retreating mass, reorganization of
+the attacking troops being of secondary importance to the infliction
+of further losses upon the enemy and to the increase of his confusion.
+In combat exercises the major will assume a situation and terminate
+the assault accordingly.
+
+
+_Defense._
+
+320. In defense, as in attack, the battalion is the tactical unit best
+suited to independent assignment. Defensive positions are usually
+divided into sections and a battalion assigned to each.
+
+321. The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover trenches
+and obstacles as are to be constructed. He assigns companies to
+construct them and details the troops to occupy them.
+
+322. The major reenforces the firing line in accordance with the
+principles applicable to, and explained in connection with, the
+attack, maintaining no more rifles in the firing line than are
+necessary to prevent the enemy's advance.
+
+323. The supply of ammunition being usually ample, fire is opened as
+soon as it is possible to break up the enemy's formation, stop his
+advance, or inflict material loss, but this rule must be modified to
+suit the ammunition supply.
+
+324. The major causes the firing line and support to fix bayonets when
+an assault by the enemy is imminent. Captains direct this to be done
+if they are not in communication with the major and the measure is
+deemed advisable.
+
+Fire alone will not stop a determined, skillfully conducted attack.
+The defender must have equal tenacity; if he can stay in his trench or
+position and cross bayonets, he will at least have neutralized the
+hostile first line, and the combat will be decided by reserves.
+
+325. If ordered or compelled to withdraw under hostile infantry fire
+or in the presence of hostile infantry, the support will be posted so
+as to cover the retirement of the firing line.
+
+326. When the battalion is operating alone, the support must be strong
+and must be fed sparingly into the firing line, especially if a
+counterattack is planned. Opportunities for counterattack should be
+sought at all times.
+
+
+
+
+THE REGIMENT.
+
+
+[Illustration: Plate IV. THE REGIMENT.]
+
+327. Normally, the regiment consists of three battalions, but these
+regulations are applicable to a regiment of two or more battalions.
+Special units, such as band, machine-gun company, and mounted scouts,
+have special formations for their own use. Movements herein
+prescribed are for the battalions; special units conform thereto
+unless otherwise prescribed or directed.
+
+328. The colonel is responsible for the theoretical instruction and
+practical training of the regiment as a whole. Under his immediate
+supervision the training of the units of the regiment is conducted by
+their respective commanders.
+
+329. The colonel either gives his commands or orders orally, by bugle,
+or by signal, or communicates them by staff officers or orderlies.
+
+Each major gives the appropriate commands or orders, and, in
+close-order movements, causes his battalion to execute the necessary
+movements at his command of execution. Each major ordinarily moves his
+battalion from one formation to another, in column of squads, in the
+most convenient manner, and, in the presence of the enemy, in the most
+direct manner consistent with cover.
+
+Commanders of the special units observe the same principles as to
+commands and movements. They take places in the new formation as
+directed by the colonel; in the absence of such directions they
+conform as nearly as practicable to Plate IV, maintaining their
+relative positions with respect to the flank or end of the regiment on
+which they are originally posted.
+
+330. When the regiment is formed, and during ceremonies, the
+lieutenant colonel is posted 2 paces to the left of, and 1 pace less
+advanced than the colonel. In movements subsequent to the formation of
+the regiment and other than ceremonies, the lieutenant colonel is on
+the left of the colonel.
+
+331. In whatever formation the regiment may be, the battalions retain
+their permanent administrative designations of _first_, _second_,
+_third battalion_. For convenience, they may be designated, when in
+line, as _right_, _center_, or _left battalion_; when in column, as
+_leading_, _center_, or _rear battalion_. These designations apply to
+the actual positions of the battalions in line or column.
+
+332. Except at ceremonies, or when rendering honors, or when otherwise
+directed, after the regiment is formed, the battalions march and stand
+_at ease_ during subsequent movements.
+
+
+CLOSE ORDER.
+
+_To Form the Regiment._
+
+333. Unless otherwise directed, the battalions are posted from right
+to left, or from head to rear, according to the rank of the battalion
+commanders present, the senior on the right or at the head. A
+battalion whose major is in command of the regiment retains its place.
+
+334. For ordinary purposes, the regiment is formed in column of squads
+or in column of masses.
+
+The adjutant informs the majors what the formation is to be. The
+battalions and special units having been formed, he posts himself and
+draws saber. _Adjutant's call_ is sounded, or the adjutant signals
+_assemble_.
+
+If forming in column of squads, the adjutant posts himself so as to be
+facing the column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be
+occupied by the leading guide of the regiment; if forming in column of
+masses, he posts himself so as to be facing the right guides of the
+column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be occupied
+by the right guide of the leading company. Later, he moves so as best
+to observe the formation.
+
+The battalions are halted, at attention, in column of squads or close
+column, as the case may be, successively from the front in their
+proper order and places. The band takes its place when the leading
+battalion has halted. Other special units take their places in turn
+when the rear battalion has halted.
+
+The majors and the commanders of the machine-gun company and mounted
+scouts (or detachment) each, when his command is in place, salutes the
+adjutant and commands: _At ease_; the adjutant returns the salutes.
+When all have saluted and the band is in place, the adjutant rides to
+the colonel, reports: _Sir, the regiment is formed_, and takes his
+post. The colonel draws saber.
+
+The formation in column of squads may be modified to the extent
+demanded by circumstances. Prior to the formation the adjutant
+indicates the point where the head of the column is to rest and the
+direction in which it is to face: he then posts himself so as best to
+observe the formation. At _adjutant's call_ or _assemble_ the leading
+battalion marches to, and halts at, the indicated point. The other
+battalions take positions from which they may conveniently follow in
+their proper places.
+
+335. For ceremonies, or when directed, the regiment is formed in line
+or line of masses.
+
+The adjutant posts himself so as to be 6 paces to the right of the
+right or leading company of the right battalion when the regiment is
+formed and faces in the direction in which the line is to extend.
+_Adjutant's call_ is sounded; the band plays.
+
+The adjutant indicates to the adjutant of the right battalion the
+point of rest and the direction in which the line is to extend, and
+then takes post facing the regiment midway between the post of the
+colonel and the center of the regiment. Each of the other battalion
+adjutants precedes his battalion to the line and marks its point of
+rest.
+
+The battalions, arriving from the rear, each in line or close column,
+as the case may be, are halted on the line successively from right to
+left in their proper order and places. Upon halting, each major
+commands: 1. _Right_, 2. _DRESS_. The battalion adjutant assists in
+aligning the battalion and then takes his post.
+
+The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the
+right battalion has halted; it ceases playing when the left battalion
+has halted. The machine-gun company and the mounted scouts (or
+detachment) take their places in line after the center battalion has
+halted.
+
+The colonel and those who accompany him take post.
+
+When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and all
+others have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. _Present_,
+2. _ARMS_. He then turns about and reports to the colonel: _Sir, the
+regiment is formed_; the colonel directs the adjutant: _Take your
+post, Sir_, draws saber and brings the regiment to the order. The
+adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the colonel.
+
+
+_To Dismiss the Regiment._
+
+336. Being in any formation: _DISMISS YOUR BATTALIONS_. Each major
+marches his battalion off and dismisses it.
+
+
+_Movements by the Regiment._
+
+337. The regiment executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and
+_marchings_, _manual of arms_, resumes _attention_, _kneels_, _lies
+down_, _rises_, _stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the Schools
+of the Soldier and Squad, substituting in the commands, when
+necessary, _battalions_ for _squad_.
+
+The regiment executes _squads right (left)_, _squads right (left)
+about_, _route step_ and _at ease_, _obliques_ and resumes the direct
+march as explained in the School of the Company.
+
+The regiment in column of files, twos, squads, or platoons, changes
+direction, and in column of squads forms column of twos or files and
+re-forms column of twos or squads, as explained in the School of the
+Company. In column of companies, it changes direction as explained in
+the School of the Battalion.
+
+338. When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution, by
+battalions, companies, or platoons, of movements prescribed in the
+School of the Company or Battalion, the colonel may cause such
+movements to be executed by prefixing, where necessary, _battalions
+(companies, platoons)_, to the commands prescribed therein.
+
+339. The column of squads is the usual column of march; to shorten the
+column, if conditions permit, a double column of squads may be used,
+the companies of each battalion marching abreast in two columns.
+Preliminary to an engagement, the regiment or its units will be placed
+in the formation best suited to its subsequent tactical employment.
+
+340. To assume any formation, the colonel indicates to the majors the
+character of the formation desired, the order of the battalions, and
+the point of rest. Each battalion is conducted by its major, and is
+placed in its proper order in the formation, by the most convenient
+means and route.
+
+Having halted in a formation, no movements for the purpose of
+correcting minor discrepancies in alignments, intervals, or distances
+are made unless specially directed by the colonel or necessitated by
+conditions of cover.
+
+341. To correct intervals, distances, and alignments, the colonel
+directs one or more of the majors to rectify their battalions. Each
+major so directed causes his battalion to correct its alignment,
+intervals, and distances, and places it in its proper position in the
+formation.
+
+
+_COMBAT PRINCIPLES._
+
+342. The regiment is deployed by the colonel's order to the commanders
+of battalions and special units. The order should give them
+information of the situation and of the proposed plan of action. In
+attack, the order should assign to each battalion not in reserve its
+objective or line of advance. In defense, it should assign to each its
+sector. In either case it should designate the troops for, and the
+position of, the reserve and prescribe the employment of the machine
+guns and mounted scouts.
+
+Both in attack and defense the order may fix the front to be covered
+in the deployment.
+
+Encroachment upon the proper functions of subordinates and unnecessary
+details should be studiously avoided. When the regiment deploys, the
+colonel habitually places the band at the disposal of the surgeon for
+employment in caring for the wounded. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+343. The regiment, when operating alone and attacking, should
+undertake an enveloping attack if it does not result in overextension.
+
+Assuming a regiment of 1,500 rifles, an extension of more than 1,000
+yards between its extreme flanks when making an enveloping attack
+alone is seldom justifiable; when part of a battle line, a front of
+500 yards can rarely be exceeded.
+
+344. In defense the front occupied when acting alone or posted on or
+near the flank of a battle line should seldom exceed 600 yards; when
+posted as an interior regiment, the front may be increased to 800
+yards. The front may be somewhat longer than in the attack, since
+smaller battalion supports are justifiable. When the regiment is
+operating alone, however, the regimental reserve should be as strong
+in the defense as in the attack unless the flanks are secure.
+
+345. The colonel should always hold out a reserve--generally one
+battalion; but when the regiment is operating alone, it is generally
+advisable to hold out more at first.
+
+346. Whereas the support held out in each battalion of the firing line
+is intended to thicken the diminishing firing line at the proper times
+and sometimes to lengthen it, the reserve held out in a regiment
+operating alone is used for this purpose only as a last resort. Its
+primary functions are: In attack, to protect the flanks, to improve
+fully the advantage following a victory, or to cover defeat; in
+defense, to prolong the firing line, to effect a counterattack, or to
+cover withdrawal. It is the colonel's chief means of influencing an
+action once begun. It should be conserved to await the proper moment
+for its employment; the combat will seldom come to a successful issue
+without its employment in some form.
+
+The reserve of a regiment operating as part of a large force becomes a
+local reserve. It replaces depleted supports and in attack strengthens
+and protects the firing line in the charge.
+
+
+
+
+THE BRIGADE.
+
+
+347. The brigade does not engage in prescribed drills. It engages in
+route marches and battle or other tactical exercises. These are
+conducted pursuant to commands or orders formulated to suit the
+conditions of the proposed movement or exercise, and, in general, in
+accordance with the principles applicable to the regiment.
+
+348. A brigade of about 4,000 rifles, as part of a general battle
+line, would be deployed on a front of not more than 1,200 yards in
+attack or 1,600 yards in defense.
+
+When acting alone the distance between extreme flanks in an enveloping
+attack should not exceed 2,000 yards at the time the attacking
+infantry opens fire.
+
+When acting alone, the front in defense should not exceed 1,600 yards.
+
+These limits apply to the original deployment of the brigade for
+combat and presuppose an enemy of equal or nearly equal training and
+morale. The limits necessitated by the subsequent progress of the
+combat can not be foreseen.
+
+349. Units larger than the brigade are generally composed of all arms.
+Combined tactics are considered in the Field Service Regulations.
+
+
+
+
+PART II.--COMBAT.
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+350. Part II of these regulations treats only of the basic principles
+of combat tactics as applied to infantry and to the special units,
+such as machine guns and mounted scouts, which form a part of infantry
+regiments and battalions.
+
+The combat tactics of the arms combined are considered in Field
+Service Regulations.
+
+351. Modern combat demands the highest order of training, discipline,
+leadership, and morale on the part of the infantry. Complicated
+maneuvers are impracticable; efficient leadership and a determination
+to win by simple and direct methods must be depended upon for success.
+
+352. The duties of infantry are many and difficult. All infantry must
+be fit to cope with all conditions that may arise. Modern war requires
+but one kind of infantry--good infantry.
+
+353. The infantry must take the offensive to gain decisive results.
+Both sides are therefore likely to attempt it, though not necessarily
+at the same time or in the same part of a long battle line.
+
+In the local combats which make up the general battle the better
+endurance, use of ground, fire efficiency, discipline, and training
+will win. It is the duty of the infantry to win the local successes
+which enable the commanding general to win the battle.
+
+354. The infantry must have the tenacity to hold every advantage
+gained, the individual and collective discipline and skill needed to
+master the enemy's fire, the determination to close with the enemy in
+attack, and to meet him with the bayonet in defense. Infantry must be
+trained to bear the heaviest burdens and losses, both of combat and
+march.
+
+Good infantry can defeat an enemy greatly superior in numbers, but
+lacking in training, discipline, leadership, and morale.
+
+355. It is impossible to establish fixed forms or to give general
+instructions that will cover all cases. Officers and noncommissioned
+officers must be so trained that they can apply suitable means and
+methods to each case as it arises. Study and practice are necessary to
+acquire proper facility in this respect. Theoretical instruction can
+not replace practical instruction; the former supplies correct ideas
+and gives to practical work an interest, purpose, and definiteness not
+otherwise obtainable.
+
+356. After the mechanism of extended order drill has been learned with
+precision in the company, every exercise should be, as far as
+practicable, in the nature of a maneuver (combat exercise) against an
+_imaginary_, _outlined_, or _represented_ enemy.
+
+Company extended order drill may be conducted without reference to a
+tactical situation, but a combat exercise, whatever may be the size of
+the unit employed, should be conducted under an assumed tactical
+situation.
+
+357. An effective method of conducting a combat exercise is to outline
+the enemy with a few men equipped with flags. The umpire or inspector
+states the situation and the commander leads his troops with due
+regard to the assumptions made.
+
+Changes in the situation, the results of reconnaissance, the character
+of artillery fire, etc., are made known to the commander when
+necessary by the umpire or inspector, who, in order to observe and
+influence the conduct of the exercise, remains in rear of the firing
+line. From this position he indicates, with the aid of prearranged
+signals, the character of the fire and movements of the hostile
+infantry. These signals are intended for the men outlining the enemy.
+These men repeat the signals; all officers and men engaged in the
+exercise and in sight of the outlined enemy are thus informed of the
+enemy's action and the exercise is conducted accordingly.
+
+Assistant umpires, about one for each company in the firing line, may
+assist in indicating hostile fire and movements and in observing the
+conduct of the exercise.
+
+An outlined enemy may be made to attack or defend.
+
+Situations should be simple and natural. During or after the exercise
+the umpire or inspector should call attention to any improper
+movements or incorrect methods of execution. He will prohibit all
+movements of troops or individuals that would be impossible if the
+enemy were real. The slow progress of events to be expected on the
+battle field can hardly be simulated, but the umpire or inspector will
+prevent undue haste and will attempt to enforce a reasonably slow rate
+of progress.
+
+The same exercise should not be repeated over the same ground and
+under the same situation. Such repetitions lead to the adoption of a
+fixed mode of attack or defense and develop mere drill masters. Fixed
+or prearranged systems are prohibited.
+
+
+
+
+LEADERSHIP.
+
+
+_General Considerations._
+
+358. The art of leadership consists of applying sound tactical
+principles to concrete cases on the battle field.
+
+Self-reliance, initiative, aggressiveness, and a conception of
+teamwork are the fundamental characteristics of successful leadership.
+
+359. A correct grasp of the situation and a definite plan of action
+form the soundest basis for a successful combat.
+
+A good plan once adopted and put into execution should not be
+abandoned unless it becomes clear that it can not succeed.
+Afterthoughts are dangerous, except as they aid in the execution of
+details in the original plan.
+
+360. Combats that do not promise success or some real advantage to the
+general issue should be avoided; they cause unnecessary losses, impair
+the morale of one's own troops, and raise that of the enemy.
+
+361. Complicated maneuvers are not likely to succeed in war. All plans
+and the methods adopted for carrying them into effect must be simple
+and direct.
+
+362. Order and cohesion must be maintained within the units if success
+is to be expected.
+
+363. Officers must show themselves to be true leaders. They must act
+in accordance with the spirit of their orders and must require of
+their troops the strictest discipline on the field of battle.
+
+364. The best results are obtained when leaders know the capacity and
+traits of those whom they command; hence in making detachments units
+should not be broken up, and a deployment that would cause an
+intermingling of the larger units in the firing line should be
+avoided.
+
+365. Leading is difficult when troops are deployed. A high degree of
+training and discipline and the use of close order formations to the
+fullest extent possible are therefore required.
+
+366. In order to lighten the severe physical strain inseparable from
+infantry service in campaign, constant efforts must be made to spare
+the troops unnecessary hardship and fatigue; but when necessity
+arises, the limit of endurance must be exacted.
+
+367. When officers or men belonging to fighting troops leave their
+proper places to carry back, or to care for, wounded during the
+progress of the action, they are guilty of skulking. This offense must
+be repressed with the utmost vigor.
+
+368. The complete equipment of the soldier is carried into action
+unless the weather or the physical condition of the men renders such
+measure a severe hardship. In any event, only the pack[2] will be laid
+aside. The determination of this question rests with the regimental
+commander. The complete equipment affords to men lying prone
+considerable protection against shrapnel.
+
+[Footnote 2: The "pack" includes blanket, poncho, and shelter tent.]
+
+369. The post of the commander must be such as will enable him to
+observe the progress of events and to communicate his orders.
+Subordinate commanders, in addition, must be in position to transmit
+the orders of superiors.
+
+Before entering an action the commander should be as far to the front
+as possible in order that he personally may see the situation, order
+the deployment, and begin the action strictly in accordance with his
+own wishes.
+
+During the action, he must, as a rule, leave to the local leaders the
+detailed conduct of the firing line, posting himself either with his
+own reserve or in such a position that he is in constant, direct, and
+easy communication with it.
+
+A commander takes full and direct charge of his firing line only when
+the line has absorbed his whole command.
+
+When their troops are victorious, all commanders should press forward
+in order to clinch the advantage gained and to use their reserves to
+the best advantage.
+
+370. The latitude allowed to officers is in direct proportion to the
+size of their commands. Each should see to the general execution of
+his task, leaving to the proper subordinates the supervision of
+details, and interfering only when mistakes are made that threaten to
+seriously prejudice the general plan.
+
+
+_Teamwork._
+
+371. The comparatively wide fronts of deployed units increase the
+difficulties of control. Subordinates must therefore be given great
+latitude in the execution of their tasks. The success of the whole
+depends largely upon how well each subordinate coordinates his work
+with the general plan.
+
+A great responsibility is necessarily thrown upon subordinates, but
+responsibility stimulates the right kind of an officer.
+
+372. In a given situation it is far better _to do any intelligent
+thing_ consistent with the aggressive execution of the general plan,
+than to search hesitatingly for the ideal. This is the true rule of
+conduct for subordinates who are required to act upon their own
+initiative.
+
+A subordinate who is reasonably sure that his intended action is such
+as would be ordered by the commander, were the latter present and in
+possession of the facts, has enough encouragement to go ahead
+confidently. He must possess the loyalty to carry out the plans of his
+superior and the keenness to recognize and to seize opportunities to
+further the general plan.
+
+373. Independence must not become license. Regardless of the number of
+subordinates who are apparently supreme in their own restricted
+spheres, there is but one battle and but one supreme will to which all
+must conform.
+
+Every subordinate must therefore work for the general result. He does
+all in his power to insure cooperation between the subdivisions under
+his command. He transmits important information to adjoining units or
+to superiors in rear and, with the assistance of information received,
+keeps himself and his subordinates duly posted as to the situation.
+
+374. When circumstances render it impracticable to consult the
+authority issuing an order, officers should not hesitate to vary from
+such order when it is clearly based upon an incorrect view of the
+situation, is impossible of execution, or has been rendered
+impracticable on account of changes which have occurred since its
+promulgation. In the application of this rule the responsibility for
+mistakes rests upon the subordinate, but unwillingness to assume
+responsibility on proper occasions is indicative of weakness.
+
+Superiors should be careful not to censure an apparent disobedience
+where the act was done in the proper spirit and to advance the general
+plan.
+
+375. When the men of two or more units intermingle in the firing line,
+all officers and men submit at once to the senior. Officers and
+platoon guides seek to fill vacancies caused by casualties. Each
+seizes any opportunity to exercise the functions consistent with his
+grade, and all assist in the maintenance of order and control.
+
+Every lull in the action should be utilized for as complete
+restoration of order in the firing line as the ground or other
+conditions permit.
+
+376. Any officer or noncommissioned officer who becomes separated from
+his proper unit and can not rejoin must at once place himself and his
+command at the disposal of the nearest higher commander.
+
+Anyone having completed an assigned task must seek to rejoin his
+proper command. Failing in this, he should join the nearest troops
+engaged with the enemy.
+
+377. Soldiers are taught the necessity of remaining with their
+companies, but those who become detached must join the nearest company
+and serve with it until the battle is over or reorganization is
+ordered.
+
+
+_Orders._
+
+378. Commands are deployed and enter the combat by the orders of the
+commander to the subordinate commanders.
+
+The initial combat orders of the division are almost invariably
+written; those of the brigade are generally so. The written order is
+preferable and is used whenever time permits.
+
+If time permits, subsequent orders are likewise written, either as
+field orders or messages.
+
+379. The initial combat orders of regiments and smaller units are
+given verbally. For this purpose the subordinates for whom the orders
+are intended are assembled, if practicable, at a place from which the
+situation and plan can be explained.
+
+Subsequent orders are verbal or in the form of verbal or written
+messages. Verbal messages should not be used unless they are short and
+unmistakable.
+
+380. The initial combat order of any commander or subordinate is based
+upon his definite plan for executing the task confronting him.
+
+Whenever possible the formation of the plan is preceded by a personal
+reconnaissance of the terrain and a careful consideration of all
+information of the enemy.
+
+381. The combat order gives such information of the enemy and of
+neighboring or supporting friendly troops as will enable subordinates
+to understand the situation.
+
+The general plan of action is stated in brief terms, but enough of the
+commander's intentions is divulged to guide the subsequent actions of
+the subordinates.
+
+Clear and concise instructions are given as to the action to be taken
+in the combat by each part of the command. In this way the commander
+assigns tasks, fronts, objectives, sectors or areas, etc., in
+accordance with his plan. If the terms employed convey definite ideas
+and leave no loopholes, the conduct of subordinates will generally be
+correspondingly satisfactory.
+
+Such miscellaneous matter relating to special troops, trains,
+ammunition, and future movements of the commander is added as concerns
+the combat itself.
+
+Combat orders should prescribe communication, reconnaissance, flank
+protection, etc., when some special disposition is desired or when an
+omission on the part of a subordinate may reasonably be feared.
+
+382. When issuing orders, a commander should indicate clearly _what_
+is to be done by each subordinate, but not _how_ it is to be done. He
+should not encroach upon the functions of a subordinate by prescribing
+details of execution unless he has good reason to doubt the ability or
+judgment of the subordinate, and can not substitute another.
+
+Although general in its terms, an order must be definite and must be
+the expression of a fixed decision. Ambiguity or vagueness indicates
+either vacillation or the inability to formulate orders.
+
+383. Usually the orders of a commander are intended for, and are given
+to, the commanders of the next lower units, but in an emergency a
+commander should not hesitate to give orders directly to any
+subordinate. In such case he should promptly inform the intermediate
+commander concerned.
+
+
+_Communication._
+
+384. Communication is maintained by means of staff officers,
+messengers, relay systems, connecting files, visual signals,
+telegraph, or telephone.
+
+385. The signal corps troops of the division establish lines of
+information from division to brigade headquarters. The further
+extension of lines of information in combat by signal troops is
+exceptional.
+
+386. Each regiment, employing its own personnel, is responsible for
+the maintenance of communication from the colonel back to the brigade
+and forward to the battalions. For this purpose the regiment uses the
+various means which may be furnished it. The staff and orderlies,
+regimental and battalion, are practiced in the use of these means and
+in messenger service. Orderlies carry signal flags.
+
+387. Connection between the firing line and the major or colonel is
+practically limited to the prescribed flag, arm, and bugle signals.
+Other means can only be supplemental. Company musicians carry company
+flags and are practiced in signaling.
+
+388. The artillery generally communicates with the firing line by
+means of its own staff officers or through an agent who accompanies
+some unit in or near the front. The infantry keeps him informed as to
+the situation and affords him any reasonable assistance. When the
+infantry is dependent upon the artillery for fire support, perfect
+coordination through this representative is of great importance.
+
+
+
+
+COMBAT RECONNAISSANCE.
+
+
+389. Combat reconnaissance is of vital importance and must not be
+neglected. By proper preliminary reconnaissance, deployments on wrong
+lines, or in a wrong direction, and surprises may generally be
+prevented.
+
+390. Troops deployed and under fire can not change front and thus they
+suffer greatly when enfiladed. Troops in close order formation may
+suffer heavy losses in a short time if subjected to hostile fire. In
+both formations troops must be protected by proper reconnaissance and
+warning.
+
+391. The difficulty of reconnaissance increases in proportion to the
+measures adopted by the enemy to screen himself.
+
+The strength of the reconnoitering party is determined by the
+character of the information desired and the nature of the hostile
+screen. In exceptional cases as much as a battalion may be necessary
+in order to break through the hostile screen and enable the commander
+or officer in charge to reconnoiter in person.
+
+A large reconnoitering party is conducted so as to open the way for
+small patrols, to serve as a supporting force or rallying point for
+them, and to receive and transmit information. Such parties maintain
+signal communication with the main body if practicable.
+
+392. Each separate column moving forward to deploy must reconnoiter to
+its front and flank and keep in touch with adjoining columns. The
+extent of the reconnaissance to the flank depends upon the isolation
+of the columns.
+
+393. Before an attack a reconnaissance must be made to determine the
+enemy's position, the location of his flanks, the character of the
+terrain, the nature of the hostile field works, etc., in order to
+prevent premature deployment and the resulting fatigue and loss of
+time.
+
+It will frequently be necessary to send forward a thin skirmish line
+in order to induce the enemy to open fire and reveal his position.
+
+394. It will frequently be impossible to obtain satisfactory
+information until after the action has begun. The delay that may be
+warranted for the purpose of reconnaissance depends upon the nature of
+the attack and the necessity for promptness. For example, in a meeting
+engagement, and sometimes in a holding attack, the reconnaissance may
+have to be hasty and superficial, whereas in an attack against an
+enemy carefully prepared for defense there will generally be both time
+and necessity for thorough reconnaissance.
+
+395. In defense, reconnaissance must be kept up to determine the
+enemy's line of advance, to ascertain his dispositions, to prevent his
+reconnaissance, etc.
+
+Patrols or parties posted to prevent hostile reconnaissance should
+relieve the main body of the necessity of betraying its position by
+firing on small bodies of the enemy.
+
+396. Reconnaissance continues throughout the action.
+
+A firing or skirmish line can take care of its front, but its flanks
+are especially vulnerable to modern firearms. The moral effect of
+flanking fire is as great as the physical effect. Hence, combat
+patrols to give warning or covering detachments to give security are
+indispensable on exposed flanks. This is equally true in attack or
+defense.
+
+397. The fact that cavalry patrols are known to be posted in a certain
+direction does not relieve infantry commanders of the responsibility
+for reconnaissance and security.
+
+To be surprised by an enemy at short range is an unpardonable offense.
+
+398. The commander of a battalion on a flank of a general line
+invariably provides for the necessary reconnaissance and security on
+that flank unless higher authority has specifically ordered it. In any
+event, he sends out combat patrols as needed.
+
+Where his battalion is on a flank of one section of the line and a
+considerable interval lies between his battalion and the next section,
+he makes similar provision.
+
+399. Battalion commanders in the first line establish patrols to
+observe and report the progress or conduct of adjoining troops when
+these can not be seen.
+
+
+
+
+FIRE SUPERIORITY.
+
+
+_PURPOSE AND NATURE._
+
+400. In a decisive battle success depends on gaining and maintaining
+fire superiority. Every effort must be made to gain it early and then
+to keep it.
+
+Attacking troops must first gain fire superiority in order to reach
+the hostile position. Over open ground attack is possible only when
+the attacking force has a decided fire superiority. With such
+superiority the attack is not only possible, but success is probable
+and without ruinous losses.
+
+Defending troops can prevent a charge only when they can master the
+enemy's fire and inflict heavy losses upon him.
+
+401. To obtain fire superiority it is necessary to produce a heavy
+volume of accurate fire. Every increase in the effectiveness of the
+fire means a corresponding decrease in the effectiveness of the
+enemy's fire.
+
+The volume and accuracy of fire will depend upon several
+considerations:
+
+(_a_) _The number of rifles employed._ On a given front the greatest
+volume of fire is produced by a firing line having only sufficient
+intervals between men to permit the free use of their rifles. The
+maximum density of a firing line is therefore about one man per yard
+of front.
+
+(_b_) The _rate_ of fire affects its volume; an excessive rate reduces
+its accuracy.
+
+(_c_) _The character of the target_ influences both volume and
+accuracy. Larger dimensions, greater visibility, and shorter range
+increase the rate of fire; greater density increases the effect.
+
+(_d_) _Training and discipline_ have an important bearing on the rate
+or volume of fire, but their greatest influence is upon accuracy.
+
+The firing efficiency, of troops is reduced by fatigue and adverse
+psychological influences.
+
+(_e_) _Fire direction and control_ improve collective accuracy. The
+importance of fire direction increases rapidly with the range. Control
+exerts a powerful influence at all ranges.
+
+
+_FIRE DIRECTION AND CONTROL._
+
+_Opening Fire._
+
+402. Beyond effective ranges important results can be expected only
+when the target is large and distinct and much ammunition is used.
+
+Long-range fire is permissible in pursuit on account of the moral
+effect of any fire under the circumstances. At other times such fire
+is of doubtful value.
+
+403. In attack, the desire to open fire when losses are first felt
+must be repressed. Considerations of time, target, ammunition, and
+morale make it imperative that the attack withhold its fire and press
+forward to a first firing position close to the enemy. The attacker's
+target will be smaller and fainter than the one he presents to the
+enemy.
+
+404. In defense, more ammunition is available, ranges are more easily
+determined, and the enemy usually presents a larger target. The
+defender may therefore open fire and expect results at longer ranges
+than the attacker, and particularly if the defenders intend a delaying
+action only.
+
+If the enemy has a powerful artillery, it will often be best for the
+defending infantry to withhold its fire until the enemy offers a
+specially favorable target. Vigorous and well-directed bursts of fire
+are then employed. The troops should therefore be given as much
+artificial protection as time and means permit, and at an agreed
+signal expose themselves as much as necessary and open fire.
+
+405. In unexpected, close encounters a great advantage accrues to the
+side which first opens rapid and accurate fire with battle sight.
+
+
+_Use of Ground._
+
+406. The position of the firers must afford a suitable field of fire.
+
+The ground should permit constant observation of the enemy, and yet
+enable the men to secure some cover when not actually firing.
+
+Troops whose target is for the moment hidden by unfavorable ground,
+either move forward to better ground or seek to execute cross fire on
+another target.
+
+407. The likelihood of a target being hit depends to a great extent
+upon its visibility. By skillful use of ground, a firing line may
+reduce its visibility without loss of fire power. Sky lines are
+particularly to be avoided.
+
+
+_Choice of Target._
+
+408. The target chosen should be the hostile troops most dangerous to
+the firers. These will usually be the nearest hostile infantry. When
+no target is specially dangerous, that one should be chosen which
+promises the most hits.
+
+409. Frequent changes of target impair the fire effect. Random changes
+to small, unimportant targets impair fire discipline and accomplish
+nothing. Attention should be confined to the main target until
+substantial reason for change is apparent.
+
+410. An opportunity to deliver flanking fire, especially against
+artillery protected in front by shields, is an example warranting
+change of target and should never be overlooked. Such fire demoralizes
+the troops subjected to it, even if the losses inflicted are small.
+In this manner a relatively small number of rifles can produce
+important results.
+
+
+_The Range._
+
+411. Beyond close range, the correct setting of the rear sight is of
+primary importance, provided the troops are trained and well in hand.
+The necessity for correct sight setting increases rapidly with the
+range. Its importance decreases as the quality of the troops decrease,
+for the error in sight setting, except possibly at very long ranges,
+becomes unimportant when compared with the error in holding and
+aiming.
+
+412. In attack, distances must usually be estimated and corrections
+made as errors are observed. Mechanical range finders and ranging
+volleys are practicable at times.
+
+In defense, it is generally practicable to measure more accurately the
+distances to visible objects and to keep a record of them for future
+use.
+
+
+_Distribution of Fire and Target._
+
+413. The purpose of fire superiority is to get hits whenever possible,
+but at all events to keep down the enemy's fire and render it
+harmless. To accomplish this the target must be covered with fire
+throughout its whole extent. Troops who are not fired upon will fire
+with nearly peace-time accuracy.
+
+The target is roughly divided and a part is assigned to each unit. No
+part of the target is neglected. In attack, by a system of overlapping
+in assigning targets to platoons, the entire hostile line can be kept
+under fire even during a rush.
+
+
+_Observation._
+
+414. The correctness of the sight setting and the distribution of fire
+over the target can be verified only by careful observation of the
+target, the adjacent ground, and the effect upon the enemy.
+
+415. Observation only can determine whether the fire fight is being
+properly conducted. If the enemy's fire is losing in accuracy and
+effect, the observer realizes that his side is gaining superiority. If
+the enemy's fire remains or becomes effective and persistent, he
+realizes that corrective measures are necessary to increase either
+volume or accuracy, or both.
+
+
+_Discipline._
+
+416. Discipline makes good direction and control possible and is the
+distinguishing mark of trained troops.
+
+417. The discipline necessary in the firing line will be absent unless
+officers and noncommissioned officers can make their will known to the
+men. In the company, therefore, communication must be by simple
+signals which, in the roar of musketry, will attract the attention and
+convey the correct meaning.
+
+
+_Expenditure of Ammunition._
+
+418. In attack the supply is more limited than in defense. Better
+judgment must be exercised in expenditure. Ordinarily, troops in the
+firing line of an attack can not expect to have that day more
+ammunition than they carry into the combat, except such additions as
+come from the distribution of ammunition of dead and wounded and the
+surplus brought by reinforcements.
+
+419. When a certain fire effect is required, the necessary ammunition
+must be expended without hesitation. Several hours of firing may be
+necessary to gain fire superiority. True economy can be practiced only
+by closing on the enemy before first opening fire and thereafter
+suspending fire when there is nothing to shoot at.
+
+
+_Supporting Artillery._
+
+420. Artillery fire is the principal aid to the infantry in gaining
+and keeping fire superiority, not only by its hits, but by the moral
+effect it produces on the enemy.
+
+421. In attack, artillery assists the forward movement of the
+infantry. It keeps down the fire of the hostile artillery and seeks to
+neutralize the hostile infantry by inflicting losses upon it,
+destroying its morale, driving it to cover, and preventing it from
+using its weapons effectively.
+
+In defense, it ignores the hostile artillery when the enemy's attack
+reaches a decisive stage and assists in checking the attack, joining
+its fire power to that of the defending infantry.
+
+422. Troops should be accustomed to being fired over by friendly
+artillery and impressed with the fact that the artillery should
+continue firing upon the enemy until the last possible moment. The
+few casualties resulting from shrapnel bursting short are trifling
+compared with those that would result from the increased effectiveness
+of the enemy's infantry fire were the friendly artillery to cease
+firing.
+
+Casualties inflicted by supporting artillery are not probable until
+the opposing infantry lines are less than 200 yards apart.
+
+423. When the distance between the hostile infantry lines becomes so
+short as to render further use of friendly artillery inadvisable, the
+commander of the infantry firing line, using a preconcerted signal,[3]
+informs the artillery commander. The latter usually increases the
+range in order to impede the strengthening of the enemy's foremost
+line.
+
+[Footnote 3: With a 4-foot white and red regimental signal flag.]
+
+
+_Fire of Position._
+
+424. Infantry is said to execute fire of position when it is posted so
+as to assist an attack by firing over the heads, or off the flank, of
+the attacking troops and is not itself to engage in the advance; or
+when, in defense, it is similarly posted to augment the fire of the
+main firing line.
+
+Machine guns serve a like purpose.
+
+In a decisive action, fire of position should be employed whenever the
+terrain permits and reserve infantry is available.
+
+
+
+
+DEPLOYMENT.
+
+
+425. Troops are massed preparatory to deployment when the nature of
+their deployment can not be foreseen or it is desirable to shorten the
+column or to clear the road. Otherwise, in the deployment of large
+commands, whether in march column, in bivouac, or massed, and whether
+forming for attack or for defense, they are ordinarily first formed
+into a line of columns to facilitate the extension of the front prior
+to deploying.
+
+The rough line or lines of columns thus formed enable troops to take
+advantage of the terrain in advancing and shorten the time occupied in
+forming the firing line.
+
+426. In deploying the division each brigade is assigned a definite
+task or objective. On receipt of his orders, the brigade commander
+conducts his brigade in column or in line of regiments until it is
+advisable that it be broken into smaller columns. He then issues his
+order, assigning to each regiment its task, if practicable. In a
+similar manner the regimental commanders lead their regiments forward
+in column, or in line of columns, until the time arrives for issuing
+the regimental order. It is seldom advisable to break up the battalion
+before issuing orders for its deployment.
+
+427. Each subordinate commander, after receiving his order for the
+action, should precede his command as far as possible, in order to
+reconnoiter the ground personally, and should prepare to issue his
+orders promptly.
+
+428. Each commander of a column directs the necessary reconnaissance
+to front and flank; by this means and by a judicious choice of ground
+he guards against surprise.
+
+429. The premature formation of the firing line causes unnecessary
+fatigue and loss of time, and may result in a faulty direction being
+taken. Troops once deployed make even minor changes of direction with
+difficulty, and this difficulty increases with the length of the
+firing line.
+
+430. In the larger units, when the original deployment is found to be
+in the wrong direction, it will usually be necessary to deploy the
+reserve on the correct front and withdraw and assemble the first line.
+
+431. To gain decisive results, it will generally be necessary to use
+all the troops at some stage of the combat. But in the beginning,
+while the situation is uncertain, care should be taken not to engage
+too large a proportion of the command. On the other hand, there is no
+greater error than to employ too few and to sacrifice them by
+driblets.
+
+432. When it is intended to fight to a decision, fire superiority is
+essential. To gain this, two things are necessary: A heavy fire and a
+fire well directed and controlled. Both of these are best obtained
+when the firing line is as dense as practicable, while leaving the men
+room for the free use of their rifles.
+
+If the men are too widely separated, direction and control are very
+difficult, often impossible, and the intensity of fire is slight in
+proportion to the front occupied.
+
+433. In an attack or stubborn defense the firing line should have a
+density of one man per yard of front occupied.
+
+Where the tactical situation demands the holding of a line too long to
+be occupied throughout at this density, it is generally better to
+deploy companies or platoons at one man per yard, leaving gaps in the
+line between them, than to distribute the men uniformly at increased
+intervals.
+
+434. A relatively thin firing line may be employed when merely
+covering the movements of other forces; when on the defensive against
+poor troops; when the final action to be taken has not yet been
+determined; and, in general, when fire superiority is not necessary.
+
+435. The length of the firing line that the whole force may employ
+depends upon the density of the line and the _strength in rear_
+required by the situation.
+
+Supports and reserves constitute the strength in rear.
+
+In a decisive attack they should be at least strong enough to replace
+a heavy loss in the original firing line and to increase the charging
+line to a density of at least one and one-half men per yard and still
+have troops in rear for protection and for the other purposes
+mentioned above.
+
+436. In the original deployment the strength of the reserve held out
+by each commander comprises from one-sixth to two-thirds of his unit,
+depending upon the nature of the service expected of the reserve.
+
+A small force in a covering or delaying action requires very little
+strength in rear, while a large force fighting a decisive battle
+requires much. Therefore, depending upon circumstances, the original
+deployment, including the strength in rear, may vary from 1 to 10 men
+per yard. Against an enemy poorly disciplined and trained, or lacking
+in morale, a thinner deployment is permissible.
+
+437. The density of the whole deployment increases with the size of
+the command, because the larger the command the greater the necessity
+for reserves. Thus, a battalion acting alone may attack with two men
+per yard of front, but a regiment, with three battalions, may only
+double the front of the one battalion.
+
+438. By the assignment of divisions or larger units to parts of a line
+of battle several miles long, a series of semi-independent battle, or
+local combat, districts are created.
+
+The general deployment for a long line of battle comprising several
+battle districts is not directly considered in these regulations. The
+deployments treated of herein are those of the infantry within such
+districts.
+
+The density of deployment in these districts may vary greatly,
+depending upon the activity expected in each. Within these battle
+districts, as well as in smaller forces acting alone, parts of the
+line temporarily of less importance may be held weakly, in order to
+economize troops and to have more at the decisive point.
+
+439. The front that a unit may occupy when deployed depends also upon
+whether its flanks are secured. If both flanks are secured by other
+troops, the unit may increase its front materially by reducing its
+reserve or supports. If only one flank is so secured, the front may
+still be somewhat increased, but the exposed flank must be guarded by
+posting the supports or reserve toward that flank.
+
+Natural obstacles that secure the flanks have practically the same
+effect upon deployment.
+
+440. Except when assigned as supports or reserve, regiments in the
+brigade, battalions in the regiment, and companies in the battalion
+are, when practicable, deployed side by side.
+
+441. In the deployment, battalions establish the firing line, each
+furnishing its own support.
+
+In each unit larger than the battalion a reserve is held out, its
+strength depending upon circumstances. In general, the reserve is
+employed by the commander to meet or improve conditions brought about
+by the action of the firing line. It must not be too weak or too split
+up. It must be posted where the commander believes it will be needed
+for decisive action, or where he desires to bring about such action.
+When necessary, parts of it reenforce or prolong the firing line.
+
+
+
+
+ATTACK.
+
+
+442. An attack is bound to succeed if fire superiority is gained and
+properly used.
+
+To gain this superiority generally requires that the attack employ
+more rifles than the defense; this in turn means a longer line, as
+both sides will probably hold a strong firing line.
+
+443. With large forces, a direct frontal attack gives the attacker
+little opportunity to bring more rifles to bear. However, if the enemy
+is unduly extended, a frontal attack may give very decisive results.
+
+444. Owing to the difficulty of control and the danger of the parts
+being defeated in detail, wide turning movements are seldom allowable
+except in large forces.
+
+445. If the attack can be so directed that, while the front is
+covered, another fraction of the command strikes a flank more or less
+obliquely (an enveloping attack) the advantages gained are a longer
+line and more rifles in action; also a converging fire opposed to the
+enemy's diverging fire.
+
+446. An envelopment of both flanks should never be attempted without a
+very decided superiority in numbers.
+
+447. The enveloping attack will nearly always result locally in a
+frontal attack, for it will be met by the enemy's reserve. The
+advantage of envelopment lies in the longer concentric line, with its
+preponderance of rifles and its converging fire.
+
+448. Cooperation between the frontal and enveloping attacks is
+essential to success. Both should be pushed vigorously and
+simultaneously, and ordinarily both should move simultaneously to the
+charge; but at the final stage of the attack conditions may sometimes
+warrant one in charging while the other supports it with fire.
+
+The envelopment of a flank is brought about with difficulty when made
+by troops already deployed in another direction or by their reserves.
+The two attacks should be deployed at a suitable distance apart, with
+the lines of attack converging in rear of the hostile position. The
+troops that are to make the enveloping attack should deploy in the
+proper direction at the start and should be given orders which enable
+them to gain their point of deployment in the most direct and
+practical manner.
+
+The enveloping attack is generally made the stronger, especially in
+small forces.
+
+
+_DEPLOYMENT FOR ATTACK._
+
+449. Where open terrain exposes troops to hostile artillery fire it
+may be necessary to make the deployment 2 miles or more from the
+hostile position.
+
+The foreground should be temporarily occupied by covering troops. If
+the enemy occupies the foreground with detachments, the covering
+troops must drive them back.
+
+450. To enable large forces to gain ground toward the enemy, it may
+sometimes be cheaper and quicker in the end to move well forward and
+to deploy at night. In such case the area in which the deployment is
+to be made should, if practicable, be occupied by covering troops
+before dark.
+
+The deployment will be made with great difficulty unless the ground
+has been studied by daylight. The deployment gains little unless it
+establishes the firing line well within effective range of the enemy's
+main position. (See Night Operations.)
+
+451. Each unit assigned a task deploys when on its direction line, or
+opposite its objective, and when it has no longer sufficient cover for
+advancing in close order. In the firing line, intervals of 25 to 50
+yards should be maintained as long as possible between battalions. In
+the larger units it may be necessary to indicate on the map the
+direction or objective, but to battalion commanders it should be
+pointed out on the ground.
+
+452. The reserve is kept near enough to the firing line to be on hand
+at the decisive stage. It is posted with reference to the attack, or
+to that part of the attacking line, from which the greater results are
+expected; it is also charged with flank protection, but should be kept
+intact.
+
+Supports are considered in paragraphs 225 to 228, inclusive, and 298
+to 302, inclusive.
+
+
+_ADVANCING THE ATTACK._
+
+453. The firing line must ordinarily advance a long distance before it
+is justified in opening fire. It can not combat the enemy's artillery,
+and it is at a disadvantage if it combats the defender's long-range
+rifle fire. Hence it ignores both and, by taking full advantage of
+cover and of the discipline of the troops, advances to a first firing
+position at the shortest range possible.
+
+Formations for crossing this zone with the minimum loss are considered
+in paragraphs 212 to 220, inclusive. These and other methods of
+crossing such zones should be studied and practiced.
+
+454. The best protection against loss while advancing is to escape the
+enemy's view.
+
+455. Each battalion finds its own firing position, conforming to the
+general advance as long as practicable and taking advantage of the
+more advanced position of an adjacent battalion in order to gain
+ground.
+
+The position from which the attack opens fire is further considered in
+paragraphs 306 to 308, inclusive.
+
+456. It will frequently become necessary for infantry moving to the
+attack to pass through deployed artillery. This should be done so as
+to interfere as little as possible with the latter's fire, and never
+so as to cause that fire to cease entirely. As far as practicable,
+advantage should be taken of intervals in the line, if any. An
+understanding between artillery and infantry commanders should be had,
+so as to effect the movement to the best advantage.
+
+457. In advancing the attack, advanced elements of the firing line or
+detachments in front of it should not open fire except in defense or
+to clear the foreground of the enemy. Fire on the hostile main
+position should not be opened until all or nearly all of the firing
+line can join in the fire.
+
+
+_THE FIRE ATTACK._
+
+458. At the first firing position the attack seeks to gain fire
+superiority. This may necessitate a steady, accurate fire for a long
+time. The object is to subdue the enemy's fire and keep it subdued so
+that the attacking troops may advance from this point to a favorable
+place near the enemy from which the charge may be made. Hence, in the
+advance by rushes, sufficient rifles must be kept constantly in action
+to keep down the enemy's fire; this determines the size of the
+fraction rushing.
+
+459. To advance without fire superiority against a determined defense
+would result in such losses as to bring the attack to a standstill or
+to make the apparent success barren of results.
+
+460. Diminution of the enemy's fire and a pronounced loss in
+effectiveness are the surest signs that fire superiority has been
+gained and that a part of the firing line can advance.
+
+461. The men must be impressed with the fact that, having made a
+considerable advance under fire and having been checked, it is
+suicidal to turn back in daylight.
+
+If they can advance no farther, they must intrench and hold on until
+the fall of darkness or a favorable turn in the situation develops.
+
+Intrenching is resorted to only when necessary. Troops who have
+intrenched themselves under fire are moved forward again with
+difficulty.
+
+462. Supports and reserves occupying intrenchments vacated by the
+firing line should improve them, but they must not be held back or
+diverted from their true missions on this account.
+
+463. Paragraphs 309 to 317, inclusive, deal more in detail with the
+conduct of the fire attack.
+
+
+_THE CHARGE._
+
+464. Fire superiority beats down the enemy's fire, destroys his
+resistance and morale, and enables the attacking troops to close on
+him, but an actual or threatened occupation of his position is needed
+to drive him out and defeat him.
+
+The psychological moment for the charge can not be determined far in
+advance. The tactical instinct of the responsible officer must decide.
+
+465. The defenders, if subjugated by the fire attack, will frequently
+leave before the charge begins. On the other hand, it may be necessary
+to carry the fire attack close to the position and follow it up with a
+short dash and a bayonet combat. Hence the distance over which the
+charge may be made will vary between wide limits. It may be from 25 to
+400 yards.
+
+The charge should be made at the earliest moment that promises
+success; otherwise the full advantage of victory will be lost.
+
+466. The commander of the attacking line should indicate his approval,
+or give the order, before the charge is made. Subordinate commanders,
+usually battalion commanders, whose troops are ready to charge signal
+that fact to the commander. It may be necessary for them to wait until
+other battalions or other parts of the line are ready or until the
+necessary reserves arrive.
+
+At the signal for the charge the firing line and nearby supports and
+reserves rush forward. See paragraphs 318 and 319.
+
+The charge is made simultaneously, if possible, by all the units
+participating therein, but, once committed to the assault, battalions
+should be pushed with the utmost vigor and no restraint placed on the
+ardor of charging troops by an attempt to maintain alignment.
+
+467. Before ordering the charge the commander should see that enough
+troops are on hand to make it a success. Local reserves joining the
+firing line in time to participate in the charge give it a strong
+impetus. Too dense a mass should be avoided.
+
+468. The line should be strengthened by prolongation, if practicable,
+and remaining troops kept in formation for future use; but rather than
+that the attack should fail, the last formed body will be sent in,
+unless it is very apparent that it can do no good.
+
+469. To arrive in the hostile position with a very compact firing line
+and a few formed supports is sufficient for a victory, but an
+additional force kept well in hand for pursuit is of inestimable
+value.
+
+470. A premature charge by a part of the line should be avoided, but
+if begun, the other parts of the line should join at once if there is
+any prospect of success. Under exceptional conditions a part of the
+line may be compelled to charge without authority from the rear. The
+intention to do so should be signaled to the rear.
+
+471. Confidence in their ability to use the bayonet gives the
+assaulting troops the promise of success.
+
+472. If the enemy has left the position when the charging troops reach
+it, the latter should open a rapid fire upon the retreating enemy, if
+he is in sight. It is not advisable for the mixed and disordered units
+to follow him, except to advance to a favorable firing position or to
+cover the reorganization of others.
+
+473. The nearest formed bodies accompanying or following the charge
+are sent instantly in pursuit. Under cover of these troops order is
+restored in the charging line. If the captured position is part of a
+general line or is an advanced post, it should be intrenched and
+occupied at once.
+
+The exhaustion of officers and men must not cause the neglect of
+measures to meet a counterattack.
+
+474. If the attack receives a temporary setback and it is intended to
+strengthen and continue it, officers will make every effort to stop
+the rearward movement and will reestablish the firing line in a
+covered position as close as possible to the enemy.
+
+475. If the attack must be abandoned, the rearward movement should
+continue with promptness until the troops reach a feature of the
+terrain that facilitates the task of checking and reorganizing them.
+The point selected should be so far to the rear as to prevent
+interference by the enemy before the troops are ready to resist. The
+withdrawal of the attacking troops should be covered by the artillery
+and by reserves, if any are available.
+
+See Night Operations.
+
+
+_PURSUIT._
+
+476. To reap the full fruits of victory a vigorous pursuit must be
+made. The natural inclination to be satisfied with a successful charge
+must be overcome. The enemy must be allowed no more time to reorganize
+than is positively unavoidable.
+
+477. The part of the reserve that is still formed or is best under
+control is sent forward in pursuit and vigorously attacks the enemy's
+main body or covering detachments wherever found.
+
+The artillery delivers a heavy fire upon the retreating enemy; the
+disordered attacking troops secure the position, promptly re-form, and
+become a new reserve.
+
+478. If the captured position is a section of the general line, the
+breach should be heavily occupied, made wider, and strongly secured by
+drawing on all reserves in the vicinity.
+
+479. After the pursuit from the immediate battle field, pursuit by
+parallel roads is especially effective where large commands are
+concerned.
+
+480. Artillery and cavalry are very effective in pursuit.
+
+
+_ATTACK OF FORTIFICATIONS._
+
+481. Few modifications enter into the problem of attacking
+fortifications. Such as are to be considered relate chiefly to the
+greater time and labor of advancing, the more frequent use of darkness
+and the use of hand grenades to augment the fire.
+
+482. If the enemy is strongly fortified and time permits, it may be
+advisable to wait and approach the charging point under cover of
+darkness. The necessary reconnaissance and arrangements should be made
+before dark. If the charge is not to be made at once, the troops
+intrench the advanced position, using sand bags if necessary. Before
+daylight the foreground should be cleared of obstacles.
+
+483. If the distance is short and other conditions are favorable, the
+charge may be made without fire preparation. If made, it should be
+launched with spirit and suddenness at the break of day. (See Night
+Operations.)
+
+484. In siege operations troops are usually advanced to the charging
+point by sapping. This method, however, presupposes that an early
+victory is not necessary or that it is clearly inadvisable to attempt
+more direct methods.
+
+
+_HOLDING ATTACK._
+
+485. The holding attack must be vigorous enough to hold the enemy in
+position and must present a front strong enough to conceal the
+secondary nature of the attack.
+
+The holding attack need have comparatively little strength in rear,
+but conceals the fact by a firing line not distinguishable from that
+of a decisive attack.
+
+486. Supports and reserves are kept at short distances. Their strength
+is less if the object is merely to hold the enemy fast than if the
+object is, in addition, to compel him to use up reserves.
+
+487. Holding attacks which may later develop into decisive attacks
+should be correspondingly strong in rear.
+
+488. All feint attacks should employ dense firing lines. Their
+weakness is in rear and is concealed.
+
+
+
+
+DEFENSE.
+
+
+_POSITIONS AND INTRENCHMENTS._
+
+489. The first requirement of a good position is a clear field of fire
+and view to the front and exposed flanks to a distance of 600 to 800
+yards or more. The length of front should be suitable to the size of
+the command and the flanks should be secure. The position should have
+lateral communication and cover for supports and reserves. It should
+be one which the enemy can not avoid, but must attack or give up his
+mission.
+
+A position having all these advantages will rarely, if ever, be found.
+The one should be taken which conforms closest to the description.
+
+490. The natural cover of the position should be fully utilized. In
+addition, it should be strengthened by fieldworks and obstacles.
+
+The best protection is afforded by deep, narrow, inconspicuous
+trenches. If little time is available, as much as practicable must be
+done. That the fieldworks may not be needed should not cause their
+construction to be omitted, and the fact that they have been
+constructed should not influence the action of a commander, if
+conditions are found to be other than expected.
+
+491. When time and troops are available the preparations include the
+necessary communicating and cover trenches, head cover, bombproofs,
+etc. The fire trenches should be well supplied with ammunition.
+
+The supports are placed close at hand in cover trenches when natural
+cover is not available.
+
+492. Dummy trenches frequently cause the hostile artillery to waste
+time and ammunition and to divert its fire.
+
+493. The location, extent, profile, garrison, etc., of fieldworks are
+matters to be decided by the infantry commanders. Officers must be
+able to choose ground and properly intrench it. (See Intrenchments.)
+
+494. In combat exercises, when it is impracticable to construct the
+trenches appropriate to the exercise, their trace may be outlined by
+bayonets, sticks, or other markers, and the responsible officers
+required to indicate the profile selected, method and time of
+construction, garrisons, etc.
+
+
+_DEPLOYMENT FOR DEFENSE._
+
+495. The density of the whole deployment depends upon the expected
+severity of the action, the character of the enemy, the condition of
+the flanks, the field of fire, the terrain, and the available
+artificial or natural protection for the troops.
+
+496. If exposed, the firing line should be as dense in defense as in
+attack. If the firing line is well intrenched and has a good field of
+fire, it may be made thinner.
+
+Weaker supports are permissible. For the same number of troops the
+front occupied on the defensive may therefore be longer than on the
+offensive, the battalions placing more companies in the firing line.
+
+497. If it is intended only to delay the enemy, a fairly strong
+deployment is sufficient, but if decisive results are desired, a
+change to the offensive must be contemplated and the corresponding
+strength in rear provided. This strength is in the reserve, which
+should be as large as the demands of the firing line and supports
+permit. Even in a passive defense the reserve should be as strong as
+in the attack, unless the flanks are protected by other means.
+
+498. Supports are posted as close to the firing line as practicable
+and reinforce the latter according to the principles explained in the
+attack. When natural cover is not sufficient for the purpose,
+communicating and cover trenches are constructed. If time does not
+permit their construction, it is better to begin the action with a
+very dense firing line and no immediate supports than to have supports
+greatly exposed in rear.
+
+499. The reserve should be posted so as to be entirely free to act as
+a whole, according to the developments. The distance from firing line
+to reserve is generally greater than in the attack. By reason of such
+a location the reserve is best able to meet a hostile enveloping
+attack; it has a better position from which to make a counter attack;
+it is in a better position to cover a withdrawal and permit an orderly
+retreat.
+
+The distance from firing line to reserve increases with the size of
+the reserve.
+
+500. When the situation is no longer in doubt, the reserve should be
+held in rear of the flank which is most in danger or offers the best
+opportunity for counterattack. Usually the same flank best suits both
+purposes.
+
+501. In exceptional cases, on broad fronts, it may be necessary to
+detach a part of the reserve to protect the opposite flank. This
+detachment should be the smallest consistent with its purely
+protective mission.
+
+502. The commander assigns to subordinates the front to be occupied by
+them. These, in turn, subdivide the front among their next lower units
+in the firing line.
+
+503. An extended position is so divided into sections that each has,
+if practicable, a field of fire naturally made distinct by the
+terrain.
+
+Unfavorable and unimportant ground will ordinarily cause gaps to exist
+in the line.
+
+504. The size of the unit occupying each section depends upon the
+latter's natural strength, front, and importance. If practicable,
+battalions should be kept intact and assigned as units to sections or
+parts of sections.
+
+505. Where important dead space lies in front of one section, an
+adjoining section should be instructed to cover it with fire when
+necessary, or machine guns should be concealed for the like purpose.
+
+506. Advanced posts, or any other form of unnecessary dispersion,
+should be avoided.
+
+507. Unless the difficulty of moving the troops into the position be
+great, most of the troops of the firing line are held in rear of it
+until the infantry attack begins. The position itself is occupied by a
+small garrison only, with the necessary outguards or patrols in front.
+
+508. Fire alone can not be depended upon to stop the attack. The
+troops must be determined to resort to the bayonet, if necessary.
+
+509. If a night attack or close approach by the enemy is expected,
+troops in a prepared position should strengthen the outguards and
+firing line and construct as numerous and effective obstacles as
+possible. Supports and local reserves should move close to the firing
+line and should, with the firing line, keep bayonets fixed. If
+practicable, the front should be illuminated, preferably from the
+flanks of the section.
+
+510. Only short range fire is of any value in resisting night attacks.
+The bayonet is the chief reliance. (See Night Operations.)
+
+
+_COUNTERATTACK._
+
+511. The passive defense should be assumed only when circumstances
+force it. Only the offensive wins.
+
+512. An active defense seeks a favorable decision. A favorable
+decision can not be expected without counterattack.
+
+513. A passive defense in a position whose flanks are not protected by
+natural obstacles is generally out of the question.
+
+514. Where the defense is assumed with a view to making a
+counterattack, the troops for the counterattack should be held in
+reserve until the time arrives for such attack. The defensive line
+should be held by as few troops as possible in order that the force
+for the offensive may be as large as possible.
+
+The force for the counterattack should be held echeloned in rear of
+the flank which offers it the greatest advantage for the proposed
+attack.
+
+515. The counterattack should be made vigorously and at the proper
+time. It will usually be made:
+
+By launching the reserve against the enemy's flank when his attack is
+in full progress. This is the most effective form of counterattack.
+
+Straight to the front by the firing line and supports after repulsing
+the enemy's attack and demoralizing him with pursuing fire.
+
+Or, by the troops in rear of the firing line when the enemy has
+reached the defensive position and is in disorder.
+
+516. Minor counterattacks are sometimes necessary in order to drive
+the enemy from important positions gained by him.
+
+
+_DELAYING ACTION._
+
+517. When a position is taken merely to delay the enemy and to
+withdraw before becoming closely engaged, the important considerations
+are:
+
+The enemy should be forced to deploy early. The field of fire should
+therefore be good at distances from 500 to 1,200 yards or more; a good
+field of fire at close range is not necessary.
+
+The ground in rear of the position should favor the withdrawal of the
+firing line by screening the troops from the enemy's view and fire as
+soon as the position is vacated.
+
+518. A thin firing line using much ammunition will generally answer
+the purpose. Supports are needed chiefly to protect the flanks.
+
+The reserve should be posted well in rear to assist in the withdrawal
+of the firing line.
+
+519. Artillery is especially valuable to a delaying force.
+
+
+
+
+MEETING ENGAGEMENTS.
+
+
+520. Meeting engagements are characterized by the necessity for hasty
+reconnaissance, or the almost total absence of reconnaissance; by the
+necessity for rapid deployment, frequently under fire; and usually by
+the absence of trenches or other artificial cover. These conditions
+give further advantages to the offensive.
+
+521. The whole situation will usually indicate beforehand the proper
+general action to be taken on meeting the enemy.
+
+522. Little fresh information can be expected. The boldness,
+initiative, and determination of the commander must be relied upon.
+
+523. A meeting engagement affords an ideal opportunity to the
+commander who has intuition and quick decision and who is willing to
+take long chances. His opponent is likely to be overcautious.
+
+524. The amount of information that the commander is warranted in
+awaiting before taking final action depends entirely upon his mission.
+One situation may demand a blind attack; another may demand rapid,
+partial deployment for attack, but careful and time-consuming
+reconnaissance before the attack is launched.
+
+525. A great advantage accrues to the side which can deploy the
+faster. The advantage of a close-order formation, favoring rapid
+deployment, becomes more pronounced with the size of the force.
+
+526. The first troops to deploy will be able to attack with longer
+firing lines and weaker supports than are required in the ordinary
+case. But if the enemy succeeds in deploying a strong, defensive line,
+the attack must be strengthened accordingly before it is wasted.
+
+527. If the situation warrants the advance, the leading troops seek to
+deploy faster than the enemy, to reach his flanks, check his
+deployment, and get information. In any event, they seek to cover the
+deployment of their own troops in rear--especially the artillery--and
+to seize important ground.
+
+528. The commander of a long column which meets the enemy should be
+with the advance guard to receive information promptly and to
+reconnoiter. If he decides to fight, the advance guard must hold the
+enemy while the commander formulates a plan of action, issues the
+necessary orders, and deploys the main body. Meantime, the column
+should be closing up, either in mass or to form line of columns, so
+that the deployment, when determined upon, may be made more promptly.
+
+529. The action of the advance guard, prior to the receipt of orders,
+depends upon the situation. Whether to attack determinedly or only as
+a feint, or to assume the defensive, depends upon the strength of the
+advance guard, the terrain, the character of the hostile force
+encountered, and the mission and intentions of the commander of the
+whole.
+
+530. If the enemy is beforehand or more aggressive, or if the advance
+guard is too weak, it may be necessary to put elements of the main
+body into action as fast as they arrive, in order to check him. This
+method should be avoided; it prevents the formation and execution of a
+definite plan and compels piecemeal action. The best results are
+obtained when the main body is used as a whole.
+
+
+
+
+WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION.
+
+
+531. The withdrawal of a defeated force can generally be effected only
+at a heavy cost. When it is no longer possible to give the action a
+favorable turn and the necessity for withdrawal arises, every effort
+must be made to place distance and a rear guard between the enemy and
+the defeated troops.
+
+532. Artillery gives especially valuable assistance in the withdrawal.
+The long-range fire of machine guns should also be employed. Cavalry
+assists the withdrawal by charging the pursuing troops or by taking
+flank positions and using fire action.
+
+533. If an intact reserve remains it should be placed in a covering
+position, preferably on a flank, to check the pursuit and thus enable
+the defeated troops to withdraw beyond reach of hostile fire.
+
+The covering position of the reserve should be at some distance from
+the main action, but close enough to bring the withdrawing troops
+quickly under the protection of its fire. It should have a good field
+of fire at effective and long ranges and should facilitate its own
+safe and timely withdrawal.
+
+534. If the general line is divided, by terrain or by organization,
+into two or more parts, the firing line of the part in the least
+danger from pursuit should be withdrawn first. A continuous firing
+line, whose parts are dependent upon one another for fire support,
+should be withdrawn as a whole, retiring by echelon at the beginning
+of the withdrawal. Every effort must be made to restore the
+organizations, regain control, and form column of march as soon as the
+troops are beyond the reach of hostile fire.
+
+As fast as possible without delaying the march, companies, and the
+larger units should be re-formed, so that the command will again be
+well in hand.
+
+535. The commander of the whole, having given orders for withdrawal,
+should go to the rear, select a rendezvous point, and devote himself
+to the reorganization of his command.
+
+The rendezvous point is selected with regard to the natural channels
+of movement approximately straight to the rear. It should be distant
+from the battle field and should facilitate the gathering and
+protection of the command.
+
+
+SUMMARY.
+
+536. 1. Avoid combats that offer no chance of victory or other
+valuable results.
+
+2. Make every effort for the success of the general plan and avoid
+spectacular plays that have no bearing on the general result.
+
+3. Have a definite plan and carry it out vigorously. Do not vacillate.
+
+4. Do not attempt complicated maneuvers.
+
+5. Keep the command in hand; avoid undue extension and dispersion.
+
+6. Study the ground and direct the advance in such a way as to take
+advantage of all available cover and thereby diminish losses.
+
+7. Never deploy until the purpose and the proper direction are known.
+
+8. Deploy enough men for the immediate task in hand; hold out the rest
+and avoid undue haste in committing them to the action.
+
+9. Flanks must be protected either by reserves, fortifications, or the
+terrain.
+
+10. In a decisive action, gain and keep fire superiority.
+
+11. Keep up reconnaissance.
+
+12. Use the reserve, but not until needed or a very favorable
+opportunity for its use presents itself. Keep some reserve as long as
+practicable.
+
+13. Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if the result is worth
+the cost.
+
+14. Spare the command all unnecessary hardship and exertion.
+
+
+
+
+MISCELLANEOUS.
+
+
+_MACHINE GUNS._
+
+537. Machine guns must be considered as weapons of emergency. Their
+effectiveness combined with their mobility renders them of great value
+at critical, though infrequent, periods of an engagement.
+
+538. When operating against infantry only, they can be used to a great
+extent throughout the combat as circumstances may indicate, but they
+are quickly rendered powerless by efficient field artillery and will
+promptly draw artillery fire whenever they open. Hence their use in
+engagements between large commands must be for short periods and at
+times when their great effectiveness will be most valuable.
+
+539. Machine guns should be attached to the advance guard. In meeting
+engagements they will be of great value in assisting their own
+advance, or in checking the advance of the enemy, and will have
+considerable time to operate before hostile artillery fire can silence
+them.
+
+Care must be taken not to leave them too long in action.
+
+540. They are valuable to a rear guard which seeks to check a vigorous
+pursuit or to gain time.
+
+541. In attack, if fire of position is practicable, they are of great
+value. In this case fire should not be opened by the machine guns
+until the attack is well advanced. At a critical period in the attack,
+such fire, if suddenly and unexpectedly opened, will greatly assist
+the advancing line. The fire must be as heavy as possible and must be
+continued until masked by friendly troops or until the hostile
+artillery finds the machine guns.
+
+542. In the defense, machine guns should be used in the same general
+manner as described above for the attack. Concealment and patient
+waiting for critical moments and exceptional opportunities are the
+special characteristics of the machine gun service in decisive
+actions.
+
+543. As part of the reserve, machine guns have special importance. If
+they are with the troops told off to protect the flanks, and if they
+are well placed, they will often produce decisive results against a
+hostile turning movement. They are especially qualified to cover a
+withdrawal or make a captured position secure.
+
+544. Machine guns should not be assigned to the firing line of an
+attack. They should be so placed that fire directed upon them is not
+likely to fall upon the firing line.
+
+545. A skirmish line can not advance by walking or running when
+hostile machine guns have the correct range and are ready to fire.
+Machine-gun fire is not specially effective against troops lying on
+the ground or crawling.
+
+546. When opposed by machine guns and without artillery to destroy
+them, infantry itself must silence them before it can advance.
+
+An infantry command that must depend upon itself for protection
+against machine guns should concentrate a large number of rifles on
+each gun in turn and until it has silenced it.
+
+
+_AMMUNITION SUPPLY._
+
+547. The method of supply of ammunition to the combat trains is
+explained in Field Service Regulations.
+
+548. The combat train is the immediate reserve supply of the
+battalion, and the major is responsible for its proper use. He will
+take measures to insure the maintenance of the prescribed allowance at
+all times.
+
+In the absence of instructions, he will cause the train to march
+immediately in rear of his battalion, and, upon separating from it to
+enter an engagement, will cause the ammunition therein to be issued.
+When emptied, he will direct that the wagons proceed to the proper
+rendezvous to be refilled. Ordinarily a rendezvous is appointed for
+each brigade and the necessary number of wagons sent forward to it
+from the ammunition column.
+
+549. When refilled, the combat wagons will rejoin their battalions,
+or, if the latter be engaged, will join or establish communication
+with the regimental reserve.
+
+550. Company commanders are responsible that the belts of the men in
+their companies are kept filled at all times, except when the
+ammunition is being expended in action. In the firing line the
+ammunition of the dead and wounded should be secured whenever
+practicable.
+
+551. Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first.
+Thirty rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as
+a reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer.
+
+552. When necessary to resupply the firing line, ammunition will be
+sent forward with reenforcements, generally from the regimental
+reserve.
+
+Men will never be sent back from the firing line for ammunition. Men
+sent forward with ammunition remain with the firing line.
+
+553. As soon as possible after an engagement the belts of the men and
+the combat wagons are resupplied to their normal capacities.
+Ammunition which can not be reloaded on combat wagons will be piled up
+in a convenient place and left under guard.
+
+
+_MOUNTED SCOUTS._
+
+554. The mounted scouts should be thoroughly trained in patrolling and
+reconnaissance. They are used for communication with neighboring
+troops, for patrolling off the route of march, for march outposts,
+outpost patrols, combat patrols, reconnaissance ahead of columns, etc.
+Their further use is, in general, confined to escort and messenger
+duty. They should be freely used for all these purposes, but for these
+purposes only.
+
+555. When infantry is acting alone, or when the cavalry of a mixed
+command has been sent to a distance, the mounted scouts are of special
+importance to covering detachments and should be used to make the
+reconnaissance which would otherwise fall to cavalry.
+
+556. In reconnaissance, scouts should be used in preference to other
+troops as much as possible. When not needed for mounted duty, they
+should be employed for necessary dismounted patrolling.
+
+557. Battalion staff officers should be specially trained in
+patrolling and reconnaissance work in order that they may be available
+when a mounted officer's patrol is required.
+
+
+_NIGHT OPERATIONS._
+
+558. By employing night operations troops make use of the cover of
+darkness to minimize losses from hostile fire or to escape
+observation. Night operations may also be necessary for the purpose of
+gaining time. Control is difficult and confusion is frequently
+unavoidable.
+
+It may be necessary to take advantage of darkness in order to assault
+from a point gained during the day, or to approach a point from which
+a daylight assault is to be made, or to effect both the approach and
+the assault.
+
+559. Offensive and defensive night operations should be practiced
+frequently in order that troops may learn to cover ground in the dark
+and arrive at a destination quietly and in good order, and in order to
+train officers in the necessary preparation and reconnaissance.
+
+Only simple and well-appointed formations should be employed.
+
+Troops should be thoroughly trained in the necessary details--e.g.,
+night patrolling, night marching, and communication at night.
+
+560. The ground to be traversed should be studied by daylight and, if
+practicable, at night. It should be cleared of hostile detachments
+before dark, and, if practicable, should be occupied by covering
+troops.
+
+Orders must be formulated with great care and clearness. Each unit
+must be given a definite objective and direction, and care must be
+exercised to avoid collision between units.
+
+Whenever contact with the enemy is anticipated, a distinctive badge
+should be worn by all.
+
+561. Preparations must be made with secrecy. When the movement is
+started, and not until then, the officers and men should be acquainted
+with the general design, the composition of the whole force, and
+should be given such additional information as will insure cooperation
+and eliminate mistakes.
+
+During the movement every precaution must be taken to keep secret the
+fact that troops are abroad.
+
+Unfriendly guides must frequently be impressed. These should be
+secured against escape, outcry, or deception.
+
+Fire action should be avoided in offensive operations. In general,
+pieces should not be loaded. Men must be trained to rely upon the
+bayonet and to use it aggressively.
+
+562. Long night marches should be made only over well-defined routes.
+March discipline must be rigidly enforced. The troops should be
+marched in as compact a formation as practicable, with the usual
+covering detachments. Advance and rear guard distances should be
+greatly reduced. They are shortest when the mission is an offensive
+one. The connecting files are numerous.
+
+563. A night advance made with a view to making an attack by day
+usually terminates with the hasty construction of intrenchments in the
+dark. Such an advance should be timed so as to allow an hour or more
+of darkness for intrenching.
+
+An advance that is to terminate in an assault at the break of day
+should be timed so that the troops will not arrive long before the
+assault is to be made; otherwise the advantage of partial surprise
+will be lost and the enemy will be allowed to reenforce the threatened
+point.
+
+564. The night attack is ordinarily confined to small forces, or to
+minor engagements in a general battle, or to seizure of positions
+occupied by covering or advanced detachments. Decisive results are not
+often obtained.
+
+Poorly disciplined and untrained troops are unfit for night attacks or
+for night operations demanding the exercise of skill and care.
+
+Troops attacking at night can advance close to the enemy in compact
+formations and without suffering loss from hostile artillery or
+infantry fire. The defender is ignorant of the strength or direction
+of the attack.
+
+A force which makes a vigorous bayonet charge in the dark will often
+throw a much larger force into disorder.
+
+565. Reconnaissance should be made to ascertain the position and
+strength of the enemy and to study the terrain to be traversed.
+Officers who are to participate in the attack should conduct this
+reconnaissance. Reconnaissance at night is especially valuable.
+Features that are distinguishable at night should be carefully noted,
+and their distances from the enemy, from the starting point of the
+troops, and from other important points should be made known.
+
+Preparations should have in view as complete a surprise as possible.
+An attack once begun must be carried to its conclusion, even if the
+surprise is not as complete as was planned or anticipated.
+
+566. The time of night at which the attack should be made depends upon
+the object sought. If a decisive attack is intended, it will generally
+yield the best results if made just before daylight. If the object is
+merely to gain an intrenched position for further operations, an
+earlier hour is necessary in order that the position gained may be
+intrenched under cover of darkness.
+
+567. The formation for attack must be simple. It should be carefully
+effected and the troops verified at a safe distance from the enemy.
+The attacking troops should be formed in compact lines and with strong
+supports at short distances. The reserve should be far enough in rear
+to avoid being drawn into the action until the commander so desires.
+Bayonets are fixed, pieces are not loaded.
+
+Darkness causes fire to be wild and ineffective. The attacking troops
+should march steadily on the enemy without firing, but should be
+prepared and determined to fight vigorously with the bayonet.
+
+In advancing to the attack the aim should be to get as close as
+possible to the enemy before being discovered, then to trust to the
+bayonet.
+
+If the assault is successful, preparations must be made at once to
+repel a counterattack.
+
+568. On the defense, preparations to resist night attacks should be
+made by daylight whenever such attacks are to be feared.
+
+Obstacles placed in front of a defensive position are especially
+valuable to the defense at night. Many forms of obstacles which would
+give an attacker little concern in the daytime become serious
+hindrances at night.
+
+After dark the foreground should be illuminated whenever practicable
+and strong patrols should be pushed to the front.
+
+When it is learned that the enemy is approaching, the trenches are
+filled and the supports moved close to the firing line.
+
+Supports fix bayonets, but do not load. Whenever practicable and
+necessary they should be used for counterattacks, preferably against a
+hostile flank.
+
+The defender should open fire as soon as results may be expected. This
+fire may avert or postpone the bayonet combat, and it warns all
+supporting troops. It is not likely that fire alone can stop the
+attack. The defender must be resolved to fight with the bayonet.
+
+Ordinarily fire will not be effective at ranges exceeding 50 yards.
+
+A white rag around the muzzle of the rifle will assist in sighting the
+piece when the front sight is not visible.
+
+See paragraphs 450, 482, 483, 509, 510.
+
+
+_INFANTRY AGAINST CAVALRY._
+
+569. A cavalry charge can accomplish little against infantry, even in
+inferior numbers, unless the latter are surprised, become
+panic-stricken, run away, or can not use their rifles.
+
+570. A charge from the front is easily checked by a well-directed and
+sustained fire.
+
+If the charge is directed against the flank of the firing line, the
+supports, reserves, or machine guns should stop it. If this
+disposition is impracticable, part of the line must meet the charge by
+a timely change of front. If the flank company, or companies, in the
+firing line execute _platoons right_, the successive firing lines can
+ordinarily break a charge against the flank. If the cavalry line
+passes through the firing line, the latter will be little damaged if
+the men retain their presence of mind. They should be on the watch for
+succeeding cavalry lines and leave those that have passed through to
+friendly troops in rear.
+
+571. Men standing are in the best position to meet a charge, but other
+considerations may compel them to meet it lying prone.
+
+572. In a melee, the infantryman with his bayonet has at least an even
+chance with the cavalryman, but the main dependence of infantry is
+rifle fire. Any formation is suitable that permits the free use of the
+necessary number of rifles.
+
+Ordinarily there will be no time to change or set sights. Fire at will
+at battle sight should be used, whatever the range may be. It will
+usually be unwise to open fire at long ranges.
+
+573. An infantry column that encounters cavalry should deploy at once.
+If attacked from the head or rear of the column, and if time is
+pressing, it may form a succession of skirmish lines. Infantry, by
+deploying 50 or 100 yards in rear of an obstacle, may check cavalry
+and hold it under fire beyond effective pistol range.
+
+In any situation, to try to escape the issue by running is the worst
+and most dangerous course the infantry can adopt.
+
+574. In attacking dismounted cavalry, infantry should close rapidly
+and endeavor to prevent remounting. Infantry which adopts this course
+will not be seriously checked by delaying cavalry.
+
+Every effort should be made to locate and open fire on the led
+horses.
+
+
+_INFANTRY AGAINST ARTILLERY._
+
+575. A frontal attack against artillery has little chance of
+succeeding unless it can be started from cover at comparatively short
+range. Beyond short range, the frontal fire of infantry has little
+effect against the artillery personnel because of their protective
+shields.
+
+Machine guns, because their cone of fire is more compact, will have
+greater effect, but on the other hand they will have fewer
+opportunities and they are limited to fire attack only.
+
+As a rule, one's own artillery is the best weapon against hostile
+artillery.
+
+576. Artillery attacked in flank by infantry can be severely damaged.
+Oblique or flank fire will begin to have decisive effect when
+delivered at effective range from a point to one side of the
+artillery's line of fire and distant from it by about half the range.
+Artillery is better protected on the side of the caisson.
+
+577. Guns out of ammunition, but otherwise secure against infantry
+attack, may be immobilized by fire which will prevent their
+withdrawal, or by locating and driving off their limbers. Or they may
+be kept out of action by fire which will prevent the receipt of
+ammunition.
+
+578. Artillery when limbered is helpless against infantry fire. If
+caught at effective range while coming into action or while limbering,
+artillery can be severely punished by infantry fire.
+
+In attacking artillery that is trying to escape, the wheel horses are
+the best targets.
+
+
+_ARTILLERY SUPPORTS._
+
+579. The purpose of the artillery support is to guard the artillery
+against surprise or attack.
+
+Artillery on the march or in action is ordinarily so placed as to be
+amply protected by the infantry. Infantry always protects artillery in
+its neighborhood.
+
+580. The detail of a support is not necessary except when the
+artillery is separated from the main body or occupies a position in
+which its flanks are not protected.
+
+The detail of a special support will be avoided whenever possible.
+
+581. The formation of an artillery support depends upon circumstances.
+On the march it may often be necessary to provide advance, flank, and
+rear protection. The country must be thoroughly reconnoitered by
+patrols within long rifle range.
+
+582. In action, the formation and location of the support must be such
+as to gain and give timely information of the enemy's approach and to
+offer actual resistance to the enemy beyond effective rifle range of
+the artillery's flanks. It should not be close enough to the artillery
+to suffer from fire directed at the artillery. In most cases a
+position somewhat to the flank and rear best fulfills these
+conditions.
+
+583. The support commander is charged only with the protection of the
+artillery. The tactical employment of each arm rests with its
+commander. The two should cooperate.
+
+
+_INTRENCHMENTS._
+
+(Plate V.)
+
+584. Ordinarily, infantry intrenches itself whenever it is compelled
+to halt for a considerable time in the presence of the enemy.
+
+Infantry charged with a resisting mission should intrench whenever
+there is any likelihood that the cover constructed will be of use.
+
+585. Except in permanent fortifications or in fortifications prepared
+long in advance, the infantry plans and constructs the field works
+that it will occupy.
+
+When performing their duties in this connection officers should bear
+in mind that profile and construction are simple matters compared with
+location and correct tactical use.
+
+586. Intrenchments enable the commander to hold a position with the
+least possible number of men and to prolong his line or increase his
+reserve.
+
+They are constructed with a view to giving cover which will diminish
+losses, but they must not be so built or placed as to interfere with
+the free use of the rifle. Fire effect is the first consideration.
+
+587. The trace of a fire trench or of a system of fire trenches
+depends upon the ground and the proposed density of the entire firing
+line. The trenches are laid out in company lengths, if possible.
+
+Adjoining trenches should afford each other mutual support. The flanks
+and important gaps in the line should be protected by fire trenches
+echeloned in rear. (Fig. 6).
+
+588. To locate the trace, lie on the ground at intervals and select
+the best field of fire consistent with the requirements of the
+situation.
+
+A profile should be selected which will permit the fire to sweep the
+foreground, require the minimum of labor and time, and permit the best
+concealment. No fixed type can be prescribed. The type must be
+selected with due regard to the terrain, the enemy, time, tools,
+materials, soil, etc.
+
+589. _Hasty cover._ With the intrenching tool, troops can quickly
+throw up a low parapet about 3 feet thick which will furnish
+considerable cover against rifle fire, but scarcely any against
+shrapnel. Such cover is frequently of value to an attack that is
+temporarily unable to continue. In time, and particularly at night, it
+may be developed into a deep fire or cover trench.
+
+590. _Fire trenches_ should be placed and constructed so as to give a
+good field of fire and to give the troops protection behind a vertical
+wall, preferably with some head or overhead cover. They should be
+concealed or inconspicuous in order to avoid artillery fire or to
+decrease its accuracy. They should have natural or artificial
+communication with their supports, but in establishing the trace this
+is a secondary consideration.
+
+The simplest form of fire trench is deep and narrow and has a flat,
+concealed parapet. (Fig. 1.) In ordinary soil, and on a basis of two
+reliefs and tasks of 5 feet, it can be constructed in about two hours
+with intrenching tools.
+
+This trench affords fair cover for troops subjected to fire, but not
+actually firing. When it is probable that time will permit
+elaboration, the simple trench should be planned with a view to
+developing it ultimately into a more complete form. (Figs. 2 and 3.)
+Devices should be added to increase the security of the trench and the
+comfort of the men.
+
+Where the excavated earth is easily removed, a fire trench without
+parapet may be the one best suited to the soil and other conditions
+affecting the choice of profile. (Fig. 4.) The enemy's infantry, as
+well as his artillery, will generally have great difficulty in seeing
+this type of trench.
+
+In very difficult soil, if the time is short, it may be necessary to
+dig a wider, shallower trench with a higher parapet.
+
+[Illustration: Plate V.]
+
+Head cover, notches, and loop holes are of value to troops when
+firing, but many forms weaken and disclose the location of the
+parapet. Filled sandbags kept in the trench when the men are not
+firing may be thrown on the parapet to form notches or loopholes when
+the troops in the trench open fire and concealment of the trench is no
+longer necessary or possible.
+
+By the use of observation stations the maximum rest and security is
+afforded the troops. Stations are best located in the angles of
+traverses or at the end of the trench.
+
+591. Where the nature of the position makes it advisable to construct
+traverses at regular intervals it is generally best to construct a
+section of trench for each squad, with traverses between squads. (Fig.
+5.)
+
+592. _Cover trenches_ are placed as closely as practicable to their
+respective fire trenches. Where natural cover is not available, each
+fire trench should have artificial cover in rear for its
+support--either a cover trench of its own or one in common with an
+adjoining fire trench.
+
+The cover trench is simple and rectangular in profile. Concealment is
+indispensable. It is generally concealed by the contour of the ground
+or by natural features, but to guard against hostile searching fire
+overhead cover is frequently advisable.
+
+Cover trenches should be made as comfortable as possible. It will
+often be advisable to make them extensive enough to provide cooking
+and resting facilities for the garrisons of the corresponding fire
+trenches.
+
+593. _Communicating trenches_ are frequently necessary in order to
+connect fire trenches with their corresponding cover trenches where
+natural, covered communication is impracticable. They are generally
+rectangular in profile, deep, and narrow. They are traversed or
+zigzagged to escape enfilade.
+
+Returns or pockets should be provided for use as latrines, storerooms,
+dressing stations, passing points for troops, etc.
+
+Cover from observation while passing through the trench may insure
+against loss as effectively as material cover from the enemy's fire.
+
+_Communicating ways_, naturally or artificially screened from the
+enemy's view, sometimes provide sufficient cover for the passage of
+troops.
+
+594. _Dummy trenches_ frequently draw the enemy's attention and fire
+and thus protect the true fire trench.
+
+Any type is suitable which presents to the enemy the appearance of a
+true trench imperfectly concealed.
+
+595. When it is uncertain whether time will permit the completion of
+all the work planned, work should proceed with due regard to the order
+of importance of the several operations. Ordinarily the order of
+importance will be:
+
+1. Clearing foreground to improve the field of fire and construction
+of fire trench.
+
+2. Head or overhead cover; concealment.
+
+3. Placing obstacles and recording ranges.
+
+4. Cover trenches for supports and local reserves.
+
+5. Communicating trenches.
+
+6. Widening and deepening of trenches; interior conveniences.
+
+See paragraph 568.
+
+
+_MINOR WARFARE._
+
+596. Minor warfare embraces both regular and irregular operations.
+
+Regular operations consist of minor actions involving small bodies of
+trained and organized troops on both sides.
+
+The tactics employed are in general those prescribed for the smaller
+units.
+
+597. Irregular operations consist of actions against unorganized or
+partially organized forces, acting in independent or semi-independent
+bodies. Such bodies have little or only crude training and are under
+nominal and loose leadership and control. They assemble, roam about,
+and disperse at will. They endeavor to win by stealth or by force of
+superior numbers, employing ambuscades, sudden dashes or rushes, and
+hand-to-hand fighting.
+
+Troops operating against such an enemy usually do so in small units,
+such as platoons, detachments, or companies, and the tactics employed
+must be adapted to meet the requirements of the situation. Frequently
+the enemy's own methods may be employed to advantage.
+
+In general, such operations should not be undertaken hastily; every
+preparation should be made to strike suddenly and to inflict the
+maximum punishment.
+
+598. In general, the service of information will be insufficient;
+adequate reconnaissance will rarely be practicable. March and bivouac
+formations must be such as to admit of rapid deployment and fire
+action in any direction.
+
+599. In the open country, where surprise is not probable, troops may
+be marched in column of squads preceded, within sight, by a squad as
+an advance party.
+
+600. In close country, where surprise is possible, the troops must be
+held in a close formation. The use of flank patrols becomes difficult.
+Occasionally, an advance party--never less than a squad--may be sent
+out. In general, however, such a party accomplishes little, since an
+enemy intent on surprise will permit it to pass unmolested and will
+fall upon the main body.
+
+Under such conditions, especially when the road or trail is narrow,
+the column of twos or files is a convenient formation, the officers
+placing themselves in the column so as to divide it into nearly equal
+parts. If rushed from a flank, such a column will be in readiness to
+face and fire toward either or both flank, the ranks being back to
+back; if rushed from the front, the head of the column may be
+deployed, the rest of the column closing up to support it and to
+protect its flanks and rear. In any event, the men should be taught to
+take some form of a closed back-to-back formation.
+
+601. The column may often be broken into two or more approximately
+equal detachments separated on the march by distances of 50 to 100
+yards. As a rule the detachments should not consist of less than 25
+men each. With this arrangement of the column, it will rarely be
+possible for an enemy to close simultaneously with all of the
+detachments, one or more being left unengaged and under control to
+support those engaged or to inflict severe punishment upon the enemy
+when he is repulsed.
+
+602. The site for camp or bivouac should be selected with special
+reference to economical and effective protection against surprise.
+Double sentinels are posted on the avenues of approach and the troops
+sleep in readiness for instant action. When practicable, troops should
+be instructed in advance as to what they are to do in case of attack
+at night.
+
+603. Night operations are frequently advisable. With the small forces
+employed, control is not difficult. Irregular troops rarely provide
+proper camp protection, and they may frequently be surprised and
+severely punished by a properly conducted night march and attack.
+
+
+_PATROLS._
+
+604. The following paragraphs on patrols are placed here for
+convenience. They relate in particular to the conduct of the patrol
+and its leader, and apply to patrols employed in covering detachments
+as well as in combat reconnaissance.
+
+605. A patrol is a detachment sent out from a command to gain
+information of the country or of the enemy, or to prevent the enemy
+from gaining information. In special cases patrols may be given
+missions other than these.
+
+606. The commander must have clearly in mind the purpose for which the
+patrol is to be used in order that he may determine its proper
+strength, select its leader, and give the latter proper instructions.
+
+In general, a patrol should be sent out for one definite purpose only.
+
+607. The strength of a patrol varies from two or three men to a
+company. It should be strong enough to accomplish its purpose, and no
+stronger.
+
+If the purpose is to gain information only, a small patrol is better
+than a large one. The former conceals itself more readily and moves
+less conspicuously. For observing from some point in plain view of the
+command or for visiting or reconnoitering between outguards two men
+are sufficient.
+
+If messages are to be sent back, the patrol must be strong enough to
+furnish the probable number of messengers without reducing the patrol
+to less than two men. If hostile patrols are likely to be met and must
+be driven off, the patrol must be strong.
+
+In friendly territory, a weaker patrol may be used than would be used
+for the corresponding purpose in hostile territory.
+
+608. The character of the leader selected for the patrol depends upon
+the importance of the work in hand.
+
+For patrolling between the groups or along the lines of an outpost, or
+for the simpler patrols sent out from a covering detachment, the
+average soldier will be a competent leader.
+
+609. For a patrol sent out to gain information, or for a distant
+patrol sent out from a covering detachment, the leader must be
+specially selected. He must be able to cover large areas with few men;
+he must be able to estimate the strength of hostile forces, to report
+intelligently as to their dispositions, to read indications, and to
+judge as to the importance of the information gained. He must possess
+endurance, courage, and good judgment.
+
+His instructions should be full and clear. He must be made to
+understand exactly what is required of him, where to go and when to
+return. He should be given such information of the enemy and country
+as may be of value to him. He should be informed as to the general
+location of his own forces, particularly of those with whom he may
+come in contact. If possible, he should be given a map of the country
+he is to traverse, and in many cases his route may be specified.
+
+Besides his arms and ammunition, the patrol leader should have a
+compass, a watch, a pencil, a note book, and, when practicable, field
+message blanks and a map of the country.
+
+The patrol leader assembles the men detailed for the patrol. He
+inspects their arms and ammunition and satisfies himself that they are
+in suitable condition for the duty. He sees that none has any papers,
+maps, etc., that would be of value to the enemy if captured. He sees
+that their accouterments do not glisten or rattle when they move. He
+then repeats his instructions to the patrol and assures himself that
+every man understands them. He explains the signals to be used and
+satisfies himself that they are understood. He designates a man to
+take his place should he be disabled.
+
+610. The formation and movements of the patrol must be regulated so as
+to render probable the escape of at least one man should the patrol
+encounter a superior force. The formation will depend upon the nature
+of the ground traversed and the cover afforded. The leader must adopt
+the formation and measures best suited to the accomplishment of his
+object.
+
+In general, it should have the formation of a main body with advance,
+rear, and flank guards, though each be represented only by a single
+man.
+
+611. The distances separating the members of the patrol vary according
+to the ground. If too close together, they see no more than one man;
+if too widely separated they are likely to be lost to the control of
+the leader.
+
+With a patrol of four or five men the distances may vary from 25 to 50
+yards; with a larger patrol they may be as great as 100 yards.
+
+At times a column of files, separated by the distances prescribed, is
+a satisfactory formation.
+
+612. The country must be carefully observed as the patrol advances. In
+passing over a hill, the country beyond should first be observed by
+one man; houses, inclosures, etc., should be approached in a similar
+manner or avoided entirely; woods should generally be reconnoitered in
+a thin skirmish line.
+
+613. The strength and composition of hostile troops must be observed.
+If they can not be counted, their strength may be estimated by the
+length of time a column consumes in passing a given point, or by the
+area covered if in camp.
+
+Patrol leaders should know, if practicable, the uniforms, guidons,
+etc., of the enemy, as it will assist in determining the class of
+troops seen when no other means for doing so are available.
+
+Insignia from the enemy's uniforms, picked up by patrols, often convey
+valuable information by indicating what troops are in the vicinity.
+
+614. Patrols avoid fighting, except in self-defense or in order to
+prevent the enemy's patrols from gaining valuable information, or when
+necessary in order to accomplish their mission. In such cases, a
+patrol should fight resolutely even though inferior in numbers.
+
+615. Information gained by patrols is generally of no value unless
+received in time to be of use to the commander. Patrol leaders must
+therefore send back information of importance as soon as it is gained
+unless the patrol itself is to return at once.
+
+616. If written, messages should state the place, date, hour, and
+minute of their dispatch. The information contained in them should be
+clearly and concisely expressed. They should be signed by the patrol
+leader.
+
+The authorized message book should be used and the form therein
+adhered to.
+
+617. If the message be an oral one, the patrol leader should require
+the messenger to repeat it before starting back. In general, an oral
+message should cover but one point. Except when there is little chance
+of error in transmission, messages should be written.
+
+618. When in friendly territory and not very far from friendly troops,
+one messenger is sufficient unless the message is very important. In
+hostile territory, either two men should go together or the message
+should be sent in duplicate by different routes.
+
+619. Whether the information gained is of sufficient importance to be
+reported at once or may await the return of the patrol is a question
+which must be decided in each case. In case of reasonable doubt, it is
+generally better to send the report promptly. If the patrol leader has
+received proper instructions before starting out and has the requisite
+ability to lead a patrol, he can generally decide such questions
+satisfactorily as they arise.
+
+620. Infantry patrols are generally used for work within 2 miles of
+supporting troops, but cases arise where they must go to greater
+distances.
+
+621. Patrols composed of mounted scouts are conducted like cavalry
+patrols and should be trained in accordance with the Cavalry Drill
+Regulations.
+
+For distant patrolling, a mounted patrol under an officer should be
+used.
+
+622. For controlling the movements of the patrol, the leader should,
+when necessary, make use of the arm signals prescribed in these
+regulations.
+
+On account of the short distances separating them, ordinary
+communication between members of the patrol is best effected quietly
+by word of mouth.
+
+When a member of a patrol is sent to a distant point, communication
+may be effected by means of simple, prearranged signals.
+
+When practicable, the patrol leader may communicate with the main body
+by means of visual signaling.
+
+
+
+
+PART III.--MARCHES AND CAMPS.
+
+
+
+
+MARCHES.
+
+
+_TRAINING AND DISCIPLINE._
+
+623. Marching constitutes the principal occupation of troops in
+campaign and is one of the heaviest causes of loss. This loss may be
+materially reduced by proper training and by the proper conduct of the
+march.
+
+624. The training of infantry should consist of systematic physical
+exercises to develop the general physique and of actual marching to
+accustom men to the fatigue of bearing arms and equipment.
+
+Before mobilization troops should be kept in good physical condition
+and so practiced as to teach them thoroughly the principles of
+marching. At the first opportunity after mobilization the men should
+be hardened to cover long distances without loss.
+
+625. With new or untrained troops, the process of hardening the men to
+this work must be gradual. Immediately after being mustered into the
+service the physical exercises and marching should be begun.
+Ten-minute periods of vigorous setting-up exercises should be given
+three times a day to loosen and develop the muscles. One march should
+be made each day, with full equipment, beginning with a distance of 2
+or 3 miles and increasing the distance daily as the troops become
+hardened, until a full day's march under full equipment may be made
+without exhaustion.
+
+626. A long march should not be made with untrained troops. If a long
+distance must be covered in a few days, the first march should be
+short, the length being increased each succeeding day.
+
+627. Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the
+care of feet. Shoes should not be too wide or too short. Sores and
+blisters on the feet should be promptly dressed during halts. At the
+end of the march feet should be bathed and dressed; the socks and, if
+practicable, the shoes should be changed.
+
+628. The drinking of water on the march should be avoided. The thirst
+should be thoroughly quenched before starting on the march and after
+arrival in camp. On the march the use of water should, in general, be
+confined to gargling the mouth and throat or to an occasional small
+drink at most.
+
+629. Except for urgent reasons, marches should not begin before an
+hour after daylight, but if the distance to be covered necessitates
+either breaking camp before daylight or making camp after dark, it is
+better to do the former.
+
+Night marching should be avoided when possible.
+
+630. A halt of 15 minutes should be made after the first half or
+three-quarters of an hour of marching; thereafter a halt of 10 minutes
+is made in each hour. The number and length of halts may be varied,
+according to the weather, the condition of the roads, and the
+equipment carried by the men. When the day's march is long a halt of
+an hour should be made at noon and the men allowed to eat.
+
+631. The rate of march is regulated by the commander of the leading
+company of each regiment, or, if the battalions be separated by
+greater than normal distances, by the commander of the leading company
+of each battalion. He should maintain a uniform rate, uninfluenced by
+the movements of troops or mounted men in front of him.
+
+The position of companies in the battalion and of battalions in the
+regiment is ordinarily changed daily so that each in turn leads.
+
+632. The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the
+amount of straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at
+the end of the march.
+
+An officer of each company marches in its rear to prevent undue
+elongation and straggling.
+
+When necessary for a man to fall out on account of sickness, he should
+be given a permit to do so. This is presented to the surgeon, who will
+admit him to the ambulance, have him wait for the trains, or follow
+and rejoin his company at the first halt.
+
+633. Special attention should be paid to the rate of march. It is
+greater for trained than for untrained troops; for small commands than
+for large ones; for lightly burdened than for heavily burdened
+troops. It is greater during cool than during hot weather. With
+trained troops, in commands of a regiment or less, marching over
+average roads, the rate should be from 2-3/4 to 3 miles per hour. With
+larger commands carrying full equipment, the rate will be from 2 to
+2-1/2 miles per hour.
+
+634. The marching capacity of trained infantry in small commands is
+from 20 to 25 miles per day. This distance will decrease as the size
+of the command increases. For a complete division the distance can
+seldom exceed 12-1/2 miles per day unless the division camps in
+column.
+
+635. In large commands the marching capacity of troops is greatly
+reduced by faulty march orders and poor march discipline.
+
+The march order should contain such instructions as will enable the
+troops to take their proper places in column promptly. Delay or
+confusion in doing so should be investigated. On the other hand,
+organization commanders should be required to time their movements so
+that the troops will not be formed sooner than necessary.
+
+The halts and starts of the units of a column should be regulated by
+the watch and be simultaneous.
+
+Closing up during a halt, or changing gait to gain or lose distance
+should be prohibited.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 12._)
+
+
+_PROTECTION OF THE MARCH._
+
+_General Considerations._
+
+636. A column on the march in the vicinity of the enemy is covered by
+detachments called "advance guards," "rear guards," or "flank guards."
+The object of these covering detachments is to facilitate the advance
+of the main body and to protect it from surprise or observation.
+
+They facilitate the advance of the main body by promptly driving off
+small bodies of the enemy who seek to harass or delay it; by removing
+obstacles from the line of advance, by repairing roads, bridges, etc.,
+thus enabling the main body to advance uninterruptedly in convenient
+marching formations.
+
+They protect the main body by preventing the enemy from firing into it
+when in close formation; by holding the enemy and enabling the main
+body to deploy before coming under effective fire; by preventing its
+size and conditions from being observed by the enemy; and, in
+retreat, by gaining time for it to make its escape or to reorganize
+its forces.
+
+637. Tactical units should not be broken in making details for
+covering detachments.
+
+638. The march order of the whole command should explain the
+situation, and, among other things, detail the commander and troops
+for each covering detachment. It should specify the route to be taken
+and the distance to be maintained between the main body and its
+covering detachments. It should order such reconnaissance as the
+commander specially desires to have made.
+
+The order of the commander of a covering detachment should clearly
+explain the situation to subordinates, assign the troops to the
+subdivisions, prescribe their distances, and order such special
+reconnaissance as may be deemed necessary in the beginning.
+
+An advance or flank guard commander marches well to the front and,
+from time to time, orders such additional reconnaissance or makes such
+changes in his dispositions as the circumstances of the case demand.
+
+
+_Advance Guards._
+
+639. An _advance guard_ is a detachment of the main body which
+precedes and covers it on the march.
+
+640. The advance guard commander is responsible for its formation and
+conduct. He should bear in mind that its purpose is to facilitate and
+protect the march of the main body. Its own security must be effected
+by proper dispositions and reconnaissance, not by timid or cautious
+advance. It must advance at normal gait and search aggressively for
+information of the enemy. Its action when the enemy attempts to block
+it with a large force depends upon the situation and plans of the
+commander of the troops.
+
+641. The strength of the advance guard varies from one-twentieth to
+one-third of the main body, depending upon the size of the main body
+and the service expected of the advance guard.
+
+642. The formation of the advance guard must be such that the enemy
+will be met first by a patrol, then in turn by one or more larger
+detachments, each capable of holding the enemy until the next in rear
+has time to deploy before coming under effective fire.
+
+643. Generally an advance guard consisting of a battalion or more is
+divided primarily into the _reserve_ and the _support_. When the
+advance guard consists of less than a battalion, the reserve is
+generally omitted.
+
+644. In an advance guard consisting of two battalions or less, the
+reserve and support, if both are used, are approximately equal; in
+larger advance guards, the reserve is approximately two-thirds of the
+whole detachment.
+
+In an advance guard consisting of one battalion, the machine guns, if
+any, form part of the reserve. In an advance guard consisting of two
+or more battalions, the machine guns form part of the support.
+
+645. The _support_ sends forward an _advance party_. The _advance
+party_, in turn, sends a patrol, called a _point_, still farther to
+the front. Patrols are sent out to the flanks when necessary. When the
+distance between parts of the advance guard or the nature of the
+country is such as to make direct communication difficult, connecting
+files march between the subdivisions to keep up communication. Each
+element of the column sends the necessary connecting files to its
+front.
+
+646. A battalion acting as an advance guard should be formed about as
+follows: The _reserve_, two companies; the _support_, two companies;
+the _advance party_, three to eight squads (about a half company),
+depending upon the strength of the companies and the reconnaissance to
+be made; the _point_, a noncommissioned officer and three or four men.
+Or the reserve may be omitted. In such case the advance party will
+consist of one company preceded by a strong point. The remaining
+companies form the support.
+
+647. The distances separating the parts of an advance guard vary
+according to the mission of the whole force, the size of the advance
+guard, the proximity and character of the enemy, the nature of the
+country, etc. They increase as the strength of the main body
+increases; they are less when operating in rolling, broken country
+than in open country; when in pursuit of a defeated enemy than against
+an aggressive foe; when operating against cavalry than when against
+infantry.
+
+If there be a mounted point, it should precede the dismounted point by
+250 to 600 yards. The advance party may be stronger when there is a
+mounted point in front. The infantry maintains its gait without
+reference to the mounted point, the latter regulating its march on the
+former, (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+648. To afford protection to an infantry column, the country must be
+observed on each side of the road as far as the terrain affords
+positions for effective rifle fire upon the column. If the country
+that it is necessary to observe be open to view from the road,
+_reconnaissance_ is not necessary.
+
+649. The advance guard is responsible for the necessary reconnaissance
+of the country on both sides of the line of march.
+
+Special reconnaissance may be directed by the commander of the troops,
+or cavalry may be reconnoitering at considerable distances to the
+front and flanks, but this does not relieve the advance guard from the
+duty of local reconnaissance.
+
+650. This reconnaissance is effected by patrols sent out by the
+leading subdivisions of the advance guard. In a large advance guard
+the support commander orders the necessary reconnaissance.
+
+Patrols should be sent to the flanks when necessary to reconnoiter a
+specified locality and should rejoin the column and their proper
+subdivision as soon as practicable. When the advance party is strong
+enough, the patrols should be sent out from it. When depleted by the
+patrols sent out, the advance party should be reenforced during a halt
+by men sent forward from the support. If it be impracticable to send
+patrols from the advance party, they will be sent from the support.
+
+Where the country is generally open to view, but localities in it
+might conceal an enemy of some size, reconnaissance is necessary.
+Where the road is exposed to fire and the view is restricted, a patrol
+should be sent to examine the country in the direction from which
+danger threatens. The object may be accomplished by sending patrols to
+observe from prominent points. When the ground permits and the
+necessity exists, patrols may be sent to march abreast of the column
+at distances which permit them to see important features not visible
+from the road.
+
+Mounted scouts or cavalry, when available, should be used for flank
+patrols.
+
+651. Cases may arise where the best means of covering the head and
+flanks of the column will be by a line of skirmishers extending for
+several hundred yards to both sides of the road, and deployed at
+intervals of from 10 to 50 yards. A column may thus protect itself
+when passing through country covered with high corn or similar
+vegetation. In such case, the vegetation forms a natural protection
+from rifle fire beyond very short ranges.
+
+652. Fixed rules for the strength, formation, or conduct of advance
+guards can not be given. Each case must be treated to meet conditions
+as they exist. That solution is generally the best which, with the
+fewest men and unbroken units, amply protects the column and
+facilitates the advance.
+
+
+_Rear Guards._
+
+653. A _rear guard_ is a detachment detailed to protect the main body
+from attack in rear. In a retreat, it checks pursuit and enables the
+main body to increase the distance between it and the enemy and to
+re-form if disorganized.
+
+The general formation is that of an advance guard reversed.
+
+654. Its commander should take advantage of every favorable
+opportunity to delay the pursuers by obstructing the road or by taking
+up specially favorable positions from which to force the enemy to
+deploy. In this latter case care must be taken not to become so
+closely engaged as to render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. The
+position taken should be selected with reference to ease of withdrawal
+and ability to bring the enemy under fire at long range.
+
+655. In large commands artillery and cavalry form a very important
+part of the rear guard.
+
+
+_Flank Guards._
+
+656. A _flank guard_ is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a
+column marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may be
+placed in position to protect the passage, or it may be so marched as
+to cover the passage.
+
+657. The object of the flank guard is to hold the enemy in check long
+enough to enable the main body to pass, or, like the advance guard, to
+enable the main body to deploy.
+
+Like all other detachments, it should be no larger than is necessary,
+and should not be detailed except when its protection is required.
+
+658. When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance
+from the main body should not exceed a mile and a half. Practicable
+communication must exist between it and the main body.
+
+659. The flank guard is marched as a separate command; that is, with
+advance or rear guards or both, as circumstances demand, and with
+patrolling on the exposed flank.
+
+660. At times it may be necessary for an advance-guard commander to
+send out large reconnoitering parties which temporarily assume the
+character and duties of a flank guard. Such parties should be given
+specific orders as to when and where they are to rejoin the column.
+
+
+
+
+CAMPS.
+
+
+_SANITATION._
+
+661. If the area of the available ground is sufficient and suitable,
+the camp of the battalion or regiment should conform to the plates
+published in the Field Service Regulations. Under similar favorable
+conditions, the brigade may camp in column or in line of columns. In
+the latter formation the interval between regiments should be about 50
+yards. When the camp site has a restricted area, intervals and
+distances are reduced.
+
+Under service conditions, camp sites that will permit the encampment
+of regiments and brigades as above indicated will not often be
+available and regularity must be sacrificed.
+
+662. In large commands the halt order should assign camp sites to the
+next smaller commands, and the commanders of the latter should locate
+their respective commands to the best advantage on the area assigned
+them.
+
+
+_The Selection of Camp Sites._
+
+663. In campaign, tactical necessity may leave little choice in the
+selection of camp sites, but under any conditions the requirements of
+sanitation should be given every consideration consistent with the
+tactical situation.
+
+664. Great care should be exercised in selecting sites. In general,
+the following principles govern:
+
+The site should be convenient to an abundant supply of pure water.
+
+Good roads should lead to the camp. Interior communication throughout
+the camp should be easy. A camp near a main road is undesirable on
+account of dust and noise.
+
+Wood, grass, forage, and supplies should be at hand or easily
+obtainable.
+
+The ground should accommodate the command without crowding and without
+compelling the troops of one unit to pass through the camp of another.
+
+The site should be sufficiently high and rolling to drain off storm
+water readily, and, if the season be hot, to catch the breeze. In cold
+weather it should preferably have a southern exposure, with woods to
+the north to break the cold winds. In warm weather an eastern
+exposure, with the site moderately shaded by trees, is desirable.
+
+The site should be dry. For this reason porous soil, covered with
+stout turf and underlaid by a sandy or gravelly subsoil, is best. A
+site on clay soil, or where the ground water approaches the surface,
+is damp, cold, and unhealthful.
+
+Alluvial soils, marshy ground, and ground near the base of hills, or
+near thick woods or dense vegetation, are undesirable as camp sites on
+account of dampness. Ravines and depressions are likely to be unduly
+warm and to have insufficient or undesirable air currents.
+
+Proximity to marshes or stagnant water is undesirable on account of
+the dampness, mosquitoes, and the diseases which the latter transmit.
+The high banks of lakes or large streams often make desirable camp
+sites.
+
+Dry beds of streams should be avoided; they are subject to sudden
+freshet.
+
+665. The occupation of old camp sites is dangerous, since these are
+often permeated by elements of disease which persist for considerable
+periods. Camp sites must be changed promptly when there is evidence of
+soil pollution or when epidemic disease threatens, but the need for
+frequent changes on this account may be a reflection on the sanitary
+administration of the camp.
+
+A change of camp site is often desirable in order to secure a change
+of surroundings and to abandon areas which have become dusty and cut
+up.
+
+
+_Water Supply._
+
+666. Immediately on making camp a guard should be placed over the
+water supply. If the water be obtained from a stream, places should be
+designated for drawing water (1) for drinking and cooking, (2) for
+watering animals, (3) for bathing and washing clothing. The first
+named should be drawn farthest up the stream; the others, in the order
+named, downstream.
+
+If the stream be small, the water supply may be increased by building
+a dam. Small springs may be dug out and each lined with a gabion, or a
+barrel or box with both ends removed, or with stones, the space
+between the lining and the earth being filled with puddled clay. A rim
+of clay should be built to keep out surface drainage. The same method
+may be used near swamps, streams, or lakes to increase or clarify the
+water supply.
+
+667. Water that is not known to be pure should be boiled 20 minutes;
+it should then be cooled and aerated by being poured repeatedly from
+one clean container to another, or it may be purified by approved
+apparatus supplied for the purpose.
+
+668. Arrangements should be made for men to draw water from the
+authorized receptacles by means of a spigot or other similar
+arrangement. The dipping of water from the receptacles, or the use of
+a common drinking cup, should be prohibited.
+
+
+_Kitchens._
+
+669. Camp kettles can be hung on a support consisting of a green pole
+lying in the crotches of two upright posts of the same character.
+
+A narrow trench for the fire, about 1 foot deep, dug under the pole,
+not only protects the fire from the wind but saves fuel. A still
+greater economy of fuel can be effected by digging a similar trench in
+the direction of the wind and slightly narrower than the diameter of
+the kettles. The kettles are then placed on the trench and the space
+between the kettles filled in with stones, clay, etc., leaving the
+flue running beneath the kettles. The draft can be improved by
+building a chimney of stones, clay, etc., at the leeward end of the
+flue.
+
+Four such trenches radiating from a common central chimney will give
+one flue for use whatever may be the direction of the wind.
+
+A slight slope of the flue, from the chimney down, provides for
+drainage and improves the draft.
+
+670. The lack of portable ovens can be met by ovens constructed of
+stone and covered with earth to better retain the heat. If no stone is
+available, an empty barrel, with one head out, is laid on its side,
+covered with wet clay to a depth of 6 or more inches and then with a
+layer of dry earth equally thick. A flue is constructed with the clay
+above the closed end of the barrel, which is then burned out with a
+hot fire. This leaves a baked clay covering for the oven.
+
+A recess can be similarly constructed with boards or even brushwood,
+supported on a horizontal pole resting on upright posts, covered and
+burnt out as in the case of the barrel.
+
+When clay banks are available, an oven may be excavated therein and
+used at once.
+
+To bake in such ovens, first heat them and then close flues and ends.
+
+671. Food must be protected from flies, dust, and sun. Facilities must
+be provided for cleaning and scalding the mess equipment of the men.
+Kitchens and the ground around them must be kept scrupulously clean.
+
+672. Solid refuse should be promptly burned, either in the kitchen
+fire or in an improvised crematory.
+
+673. In temporary camps, if the soil is porous, liquid refuse from the
+kitchens may be strained through gunny sacking into seepage pits dug
+near the kitchen. Flies must not have access to these pits. Boards or
+poles, covered with brush or grass and a layer of earth may be used
+for this purpose. The strainers should also be protected from flies.
+Pits of this kind, dug in clayey soil, will not operate successfully.
+All pits should be filled with earth before marching.
+
+
+_Disposal of Excreta._
+
+674. Immediately on arriving in camp sinks should be dug. This is a
+matter of fundamental sanitary importance, since the most serious
+epidemics of camp diseases are spread from human excreta.
+
+One sink is usually provided for each company and one for the officers
+of each battalion. Those for the men are invariably located on the
+side of camp opposite the kitchens. All sinks should be so placed that
+they can not pollute the water supply or camp site as a result of
+drainage or overflow. To insure this, their location and their
+distance from camp may be varied.
+
+When camp is made for a single night, shallow trenches, 12 inches deep
+and 15 to 18 inches wide, which the men may straddle, will suffice.
+
+In more permanent camps, the trenches should be about 2 feet wide, 6
+feet deep, and 15 feet long. They should be provided with seats and
+back rests made of poles, and should be screened by brush or old tent
+flys.
+
+675. In cold weather the contents of sinks should be covered once
+daily with quicklime, ashes, or dry earth. When filled to within 2
+feet of the top, sinks should be discontinued and filled in.
+
+Open pits are dangerous during the fly season. However, the danger may
+be greatly reduced by covering the excreta with earth or by a thorough
+daily burning of the entire area of the trench. Combustible sweepings
+or straw, saturated with oil, may be used for this purpose.
+
+In fly season, trenches may be closed with seats covered down to the
+ground with muslin and supplied with self-closing lids. Urinal
+troughs, made of muslin and coated with oil or paint, should discharge
+into the trenches.
+
+676. In permanent camps special sanitary facilities for the disposal
+of excreta will ordinarily be provided.
+
+If necessary, urinal tubs may be placed in the company streets at
+night and removed at reveille. Their location should be plainly marked
+and thoroughly and frequently disinfected.
+
+677. When troops bivouac for the night the necessity for extensive
+sanitary precautions is not great; however, shallow sink trenches
+should be dug to prevent general pollution of the vicinity. If the
+cooking be collective, shallow kitchen sinks should be dug. If the
+cooking be individual, the men should be required to build their fires
+on the leeward flank of the camp or bivouac.
+
+Before marching, all trenches should be filled in.
+
+
+_PROTECTION OF CAMP OR BIVOUAC._
+
+_General Considerations._
+
+678. The outpost is a covering detachment detailed to secure the camp
+or bivouac against surprise and to prevent an attack upon it before
+the troops can prepare to resist.
+
+679. The size and disposition of the outpost will depend upon many
+circumstances, such as the size of the whole command, the proximity of
+the enemy and the situation with respect to him, the nature of the
+terrain, etc.
+
+A suitable strength may vary from a very small fraction to one-third
+of the whole force. For a single company in bivouac a few sentinels
+and patrols will suffice; for a large command a more elaborate outpost
+system must be provided. It should be no stronger than is consistent
+with reasonable security.
+
+The most economical protection is furnished by keeping close contact
+with the enemy by means of outpost patrols, in conjunction with
+resisting detachments on the avenues of approach.
+
+The outpost should be composed of complete organizations.
+
+680. In a brigade or smaller force on the march toward the enemy, the
+outpost is generally formed from the advance guard, and is relieved
+the following day when the new advance guard crosses the line of
+outguards. In a retreat, the detail for outpost duty is generally made
+from the main body. The new outpost becomes the rear guard the
+following day.
+
+681. When, as in large forces, an advance and rear guard performs such
+duty for several days, the outpost, during this period, is furnished
+by the advance or rear guards.
+
+When the command is small and stationary for several days, the outpost
+is relieved daily. In large commands, the outpost will, as a rule, be
+relieved at intervals of several days.
+
+682. The positions held by the subdivisions of the outpost should
+generally be prepared for defense, but conditions may render this
+unnecessary.
+
+Troops on outpost keep concealed as much as is consistent with the
+proper performance of their duties; especially do they avoid appearing
+on the sky line.
+
+Outpost troops do not render honors.
+
+
+_Distribution of Outpost Troops._
+
+683. The outpost will generally be divided into three parts. These, in
+order from the main body, are the _reserve_, the line of _supports_,
+and the line of _outguards_.
+
+The distances separating these parts, and their distance from the main
+body, will depend upon the object sought, the nature of the terrain,
+and the size of the command. There can be no uniformity in the
+distance between supports and reserve, nor between outguards and
+supports, even in the same outpost. The avenues of approach and the
+important features of the terrain will largely control their exact
+positions.
+
+The outpost of a small force should ordinarily hold the enemy beyond
+effective rifle range of the main body until the latter can deploy.
+For the same purpose the outpost of a large force should hold the
+enemy beyond artillery range.
+
+684. The _reserve_ constitutes the main body of the outpost and is
+held at some central point from which it can readily _support the
+troops in front_ or _hold a rallying position_ on which they may
+retire. The reserve may be omitted when the outpost consists of less
+than two companies.
+
+The reserve may comprise one-fourth to two-thirds of the strength of
+the outpost.
+
+685. The _supports_ constitute a line of _supporting_ and _resisting_
+detachments, varying in size from a half company to a battalion. They
+furnish the line of _outguards_.
+
+The supports are numbered consecutively from right to left. They are
+placed at the more important points on the outpost line, usually in
+the line on which resistance is to be made in case of attack.
+
+686. As a general rule, roads exercise the greatest influence on the
+location of supports, and a support will generally be placed on or
+near a road. The section which it is to cover should be clearly
+defined by means of tangible lines on the ground and should be such
+that the support is centrally located therein.
+
+687. The _outguards_ constitute the line of small detachments farthest
+to the front and nearest to the enemy. For convenience they are
+classified as _pickets_, _sentry squads_, and _cossack posts_. They
+are numbered consecutively from right to left in each support.
+
+688. A _picket_ is a group consisting of two or more squads,
+ordinarily not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of
+outguards to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or
+more sentinels, double sentinels, sentry squads, or cossack posts for
+_observation_.
+
+Pickets are placed at the more important points in the line of
+outguards, such as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the
+number of small groups required to observe properly its sector.
+
+689. A _sentry squad_ is a squad posted in _observation_ at an
+indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the
+remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels.
+In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol.
+
+690. A _cossack post_ consists of four men. It is an _observation_
+group similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel.
+
+691. At night, it will sometimes be advisable to place some of the
+outguards or their sentinels in a position different from that which
+they occupy in the daytime. In such case the ground should be
+carefully studied before dark and the change made at dusk. However, a
+change in the position of the outguard will be exceptional.
+
+692. _Sentinels_ are generally used singly in daytime, but at night
+double sentinels will be required in most cases. Sentinels furnished
+by cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near their group. Those
+furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away.
+
+Every sentinel should be able to communicate readily with the body to
+which he belongs.
+
+693. Sentinel posts are numbered consecutively from right to left in
+each outguard. Sentry squads and cossack posts furnished by pickets
+are counted as sentinel posts.
+
+694. Instead of using outguards along the entire front of observation,
+part of this front may be covered by _patrols_ only. These should be
+used to cover such sections of the front as can be crossed by the
+enemy only with difficulty and over which he is not likely to attempt
+a crossing after dark.
+
+In daylight much of the local patrolling may be dispensed with if the
+country can be seen from the posts of the sentinels. However, patrols
+should frequently be pushed well to the front unless the ground in
+that direction is exceptionally open.
+
+695. Patrols or sentinels must be the first troops which the enemy
+meets, and each body in rear must have time to prepare for the blow.
+These bodies cause as much delay as possible without sacrificing
+themselves, and gradually retire to the line where the outpost is to
+make its resistance.
+
+696. Patrols must be used to keep up connection between the parts of
+the outpost except when, during daylight, certain fractions or groups
+are mutually visible. After dark this connection must be maintained
+throughout the outpost except where the larger subdivisions are
+provided with wire communication.
+
+697. In addition to ordinary outguards, the outpost commander may
+detail from the reserve one or more _detached posts_ to cover roads or
+areas not in the general line assigned to the supports.
+
+In like manner the commander of the whole force may order _detached
+posts_ to be sent from the main body to cover important roads or
+localities not included in the outpost line.
+
+The number and strength of detached posts are reduced to the absolute
+needs of the situation.
+
+
+_Establishing the Outpost._
+
+698. The outpost is posted as quickly as possible so that the troops
+can the sooner obtain rest. Until the leading outpost troops are able
+to assume their duties, temporary protection, known as the _march
+outpost_, is furnished by the nearest available troops.
+
+699. The halt order of the commander, besides giving the necessary
+information and assigning camp sites to the parts of the command,
+details the troops to constitute the outpost, assigns a commander
+therefor, designates the general line to be occupied, and, when
+practicable, points out the position to be held in case of attack.
+
+700. The outpost commander, upon receipt of this order, should issue
+the outpost order with the least practicable delay. In large commands
+it may often be necessary to give the order from the map, but usually
+the outpost commander will have to make some preliminary
+reconnaissance, unless he has an accurate and detailed map.
+
+The order gives such available information of the situation as is
+necessary to the complete and proper guidance of subordinates;
+designates the troops to constitute the supports; assigns their
+location and the sector each is to cover; provides for the necessary
+detached posts; indicates any special reconnaissance that is to be
+made; orders the location and disposition of the reserve; disposes of
+the train if same is ordered to join the outpost; and informs
+subordinates where information will be sent.
+
+701. Generally it is preferable for the outpost commander to give
+verbal orders to his support commanders from some locality which
+overlooks the terrain. The time and locality should be so selected
+that the support commanders may join their commands and conduct them
+to their positions without causing unnecessary delay to their troops.
+The reserve commander should, if possible, receive his orders at the
+same time as the support commanders. Subordinates to whom he gives
+orders separately should be informed of the location of other parts of
+the outpost.
+
+In large outposts, written orders are frequently most convenient.
+
+After issuing the initial orders, the outpost commander inspects the
+outpost, orders the necessary changes or additions, and sends his
+superior a report of his dispositions.
+
+702. The _reserve_ is marched to its post by its commander, who then
+sends out such detachments as have been ordered and places the rest in
+camp or bivouac, over which at least one sentinel should be posted.
+Connection must be maintained with the main body, the supports and
+nearby detached posts.
+
+703. The _supports_ march to their posts, using the necessary covering
+detachments when in advance of the march outpost. A support
+commander's order should fully explain the situation to subordinates,
+or to the entire command, if it be small. It should detail the troops
+for the different outguards and, when necessary, define the sector
+each is to cover. It should provide the necessary sentinels at the
+post of the support, the patrols to be sent therefrom, and should
+arrange for the necessary intrenching. Connection should be maintained
+with adjoining supports and with the outguards furnished by the
+support.
+
+704. In posting his command the support commander must seek to cover
+his sector in such manner that the enemy can not reach, in dangerous
+numbers and unobserved, the position of the support or pass by it
+within the sector intrusted to the support. On the other hand, he must
+economize men on observation and patrol duty, for these duties are
+unusually fatiguing. He must practice the greatest economy of men
+consistent with the requirements of practical security.
+
+705. As soon as the posting of the support is completed, its commander
+carefully inspects the dispositions and corrects defects, if any, and
+reports the disposition of his support, including the patrolling
+ordered, to the outpost commander. This report is preferably made by
+means of a sketch.
+
+706. Each _outguard_ is marched by its commander to its assigned
+station, and, especially in the case of a picket, is covered by the
+necessary patrolling to prevent surprise.
+
+Having reached the position, the commander explains the situation to
+his men and establishes reliefs for each sentinel, and, if possible,
+for each patrol to be furnished. Besides these sentinels and patrols,
+a picket must have a sentinel at its post.
+
+The commander then posts the sentinels and points out to them the
+principal features, such as towns, roads, and streams, and gives their
+names. He gives the direction and location of the enemy, if known, and
+of adjoining parts of the outpost.
+
+He gives to patrols the same information and the necessary orders as
+to their routes and the frequency with which the same shall be
+covered. Each patrol should go over its route once before dark.
+
+707. Every picket should maintain connection by patrols with outguards
+on its right and left. Each commander will take precaution to conceal
+his outguard and will generally strengthen his position by
+intrenching.
+
+
+
+
+PART IV.--CEREMONIES AND INSPECTIONS.
+
+
+
+
+CEREMONIES.
+
+
+_General Rules for Ceremonies._
+
+708. The order in which the troops of the various arms are arranged
+for ceremonies is prescribed by Army Regulations.
+
+When forming for ceremonies the companies of the battalion and the
+battalions of the regiment are posted from right to left in line and
+from head to rear in column, in the order of rank of their respective
+commanders present in the formation, the senior on the right or at the
+head.
+
+The commander faces the command; subordinate commanders face to the
+front.
+
+709. At the command _present arms_, given by the colonel, the
+lieutenant colonel and the colonel's staff salute; the major's staff
+salute at the major's command. Each staff returns to the carry or
+order when the command _order arms_ is given by its chief.
+
+710. At the _assembly_ for a ceremony companies are formed on their
+own parades and informally inspected.
+
+At _adjutant's call_, except for ceremonies involving a single
+battalion, each battalion is formed on its own parade, reports are
+received, and the battalion presented to the major. At the second
+sounding of _adjutant's call_ the regiment is formed.
+
+
+_REVIEWS._
+
+_General Rules._
+
+711. The adjutant posts men or otherwise marks the points where the
+column changes direction in such manner that its flank in passing will
+be about 12 paces from the reviewing officer.
+
+The post of the reviewing officer, usually opposite the center of the
+line, is indicated by a marker.
+
+Officers of the same or higher grade, and distinguished personages
+invited to accompany the reviewing officer, place themselves on his
+left; their staffs and orderlies place themselves respectively on the
+left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer; all others
+who accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of
+his staff, their orderlies in rear. A staff officer is designated to
+escort distinguished personages and to indicate to them their proper
+positions.
+
+712. While riding around the troops, the reviewing officer may direct
+his staff, flag, and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing
+officer, or that only his personal staff and flag shall accompany him;
+in either case the commanding officer alone accompanies the reviewing
+officer. If the reviewing officer is accompanied by his entire staff,
+the staff officers of the commander place themselves on the right of
+the staff of the reviewing officer.
+
+The reviewing officer and others at the reviewing stand salute the
+color as it passes; when passing around the troops, the reviewing
+officer and those accompanying him salute the color when passing in
+front of it.
+
+The reviewing officer returns the salute of the commanding officer of
+the troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing officer do not
+salute. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 4 and 6._)
+
+713. In passing in review, each staff salutes with its commander.
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 4._)
+
+714. After saluting the reviewing officer, the commanding officer of
+the troops turns out of the column, takes post on the right of the
+reviewing officer, and returns saber; the members of his staff
+accompanying him take post on the right of the reviewing officer's
+staff and return saber. When the rear element of his command has
+passed, without changing his position, the commanding officer of the
+troops salutes the reviewing officer; he and the members of his staff
+accompanying him then draw saber and rejoin his command. The
+commanding officer of the troops and the members of his staff are the
+only ones who turn out of the column.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 10._)
+
+715. If the person reviewing the command is not mounted, the
+commanding officer and his staff on turning out of the column after
+passing the reviewing officer dismount preparatory to taking post. In
+such case, the salute of the commanding officer, prior to rejoining
+his command, is made with the hand before remounting.
+
+716. When the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor,
+each regimental color salutes at the command _present arms_, given or
+repeated by the major of the battalion with which it is posted; and
+again in passing in review.
+
+717. The band of an organization plays while the reviewing officer is
+passing in front of and in rear of the organization.
+
+Each band, immediately after passing the reviewing officer, turns out
+of the column, takes post in front of and facing him, continues to
+play until its regiment has passed, then ceases playing and follows in
+rear of its regiment; the band of the following regiment commences to
+play as soon as the preceding band has ceased.
+
+While marching in review but one band in each brigade plays at a time,
+and but one band at a time when within 100 paces of the reviewing
+officer.
+
+718. If the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor,
+the band plays the prescribed _national air_ or the field music sounds
+_to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_ when arms are
+presented. When passing in review at the moment the regimental color
+salutes, the musicians halted in front of the reviewing officer, sound
+_to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+6._)
+
+719. The formation for review may be modified to suit the ground, and
+the _present arms_ and the ride around the line by the reviewing
+officer may be dispensed with.
+
+720. If the post of the reviewing officer is on the left of the
+column, the troops march in review with the guide left; the commanding
+officer and his staff turn out of the column to the left, taking post
+as prescribed above, but to the left of the reviewing officer; in
+saluting, the captains give the command: 1. _Eyes_, 2. _LEFT_.
+
+721. Except in the review of a single battalion, the troops pass in
+review in quick time only.
+
+722. In reviews of brigades or larger commands, each battalion, after
+the rear has passed the reviewing officer 50 paces, takes the double
+time for 100 yards in order not to interfere with the march of the
+column in rear; if necessary, it then turns out of the column and
+returns to camp by the most practicable route; the leading battalion
+of each regiment is followed by the other units of the regiment.
+
+723. In a brigade or larger review a regimental commander may cause
+his regiment to stand _at ease_, _rest_, or _stack arms_ and _fall
+out_ and _resume attention_, so as not to interfere with the ceremony.
+
+724. When an organization is to be reviewed before an inspector junior
+in rank to the commanding officer, the commanding officer receives
+the review and is accompanied by the inspector, who takes post on his
+left.
+
+
+_Battalion Review._
+
+725. The battalion having been formed in line, the major faces to the
+front; the reviewing officer moves a few paces toward the major and
+halts; the major turns about and commands: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_,
+and again turns about and salutes.
+
+The reviewing officer returns the salute; the major turns about,
+brings the battalion to order arms, and again turns to the front.
+
+The reviewing officer approaches to about 6 paces from the major, the
+latter salutes, takes post on his right, and accompanies him around
+the battalion. The band plays. The reviewing officer proceeds to the
+right of the band, passes in front of the captains to the left of the
+line and returns to the right, passing in rear of the file closers and
+the band.
+
+On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes, halts,
+and when the reviewing officer and staff have passed moves directly to
+his post in front of the battalion, faces it, and commands: 1. _Pass
+in review_, 2. _Squads right_, 3. _MARCH_.
+
+At the first command the band changes direction if necessary, and
+halts.
+
+At the third command, given when the band has changed direction, the
+battalion moves off, the band playing; without command from the major
+the column changes direction at the points indicated, and column of
+companies at full distance is formed successively to the left at the
+second change of direction; the major takes his post 30 paces in front
+of the band immediately after the second change; the band having
+passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left out of the column,
+takes post in front of and facing the reviewing officer, and remains
+there until the review terminates.
+
+The major and staff salute, turn the head as in _eyes right_, and look
+toward the reviewing officer when the major is 6 paces from him; they
+return to the carry and turn the head and eyes to the front when the
+major has passed 6 paces beyond him.
+
+Without facing about, each captain or special unit commander, except
+the drum major, commands: 1. _Eyes_, in time to add, 2. _RIGHT_, when
+at 6 paces from the reviewing officer, and commands _FRONT_ when at 6
+paces beyond him. At the command _eyes_ the company officers armed
+with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the
+command _right_ all turn head and eyes to the right, the company
+officers complete _present saber_ and the noncommissioned officers
+armed with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the
+command _front_ all turn head and eyes to the front, and officers and
+noncommissioned officers armed with the saber resume the carry saber;
+without arms in hand the first motion of the hand salute is made at
+the command _right_ and the second motion not made until the command
+_front_.
+
+Noncommissioned staff officers, noncommissioned officers in command of
+subdivisions, and the drum major salute, turn the head and eyes,
+return to the front, resume the carry or drop the hand, at the points
+prescribed for the major. Officers and dismounted noncommissioned
+officers in command of subdivisions with arms in hand render the rifle
+or saber salute. Guides charged with the step, trace, and direction do
+not execute _eyes right_.
+
+If the reviewing officer is entitled to a salute from the colors, the
+regimental color salutes when at 6 paces from him, and is raised when
+at 6 paces beyond him.
+
+The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the reviewing
+officer, returns saber and remains there until the rear of the
+battalion has passed, then salutes, draws saber, and rejoins his
+battalion. The band ceases to play when the column has completed its
+second change of direction after passing the reviewing officer.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 10._)
+
+726. When the battalion arrives at its original position in column,
+the major commands: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The band plays in double time.
+
+The battalion passes in review as before, except that in double time
+the command _eyes right_ is omitted and there is no saluting except by
+the major when he leaves the reviewing officer.
+
+The review terminates when the rear company has passed the reviewing
+officer; the band then ceases to play, and, unless otherwise directed
+by the major, returns to the position it occupied before marching in
+review, or is dismissed; the major rejoins the battalion and brings it
+to _quick time_. The battalion then executes such movements as the
+reviewing officer may have directed, or is marched to its parade
+ground and dismissed.
+
+Marching past in double time may, in the discretion of the reviewing
+officer, be omitted; the review terminates when the major rejoins his
+battalion.
+
+727. At battalion review the major and his staff may be dismounted in
+the discretion of the commanding officer.
+
+
+_Regimental Review._
+
+728. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses.
+
+In line the review proceeds as in the battalion, substituting
+"colonel" for "major" and "regiment" for "battalion."
+
+To march the regiment in review, the colonel commands: _PASS IN
+REVIEW_. The band changes direction, if necessary, and halts. Each
+major then commands: 1. _Squads right_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The band marches at the command of the major of the leading battalion.
+
+At the second change of direction each major takes post 20 paces in
+front of his leading company.
+
+The rear of the column having passed the reviewing officer, the
+battalions, unless otherwise directed, are marched to their parades
+and dismissed.
+
+In line of masses, when the reviewing officer has passed around the
+regiment, the colonel commands: _PASS IN REVIEW_. The band changes
+direction, if necessary, and halts. The major of the right battalion
+then commands: 1. _Column of squads, first company, squads right_, 2.
+_MARCH_. At the third command the band and the leading company of the
+right battalion move off. Each company and battalion in rear moves off
+in time to follow at its proper distance.
+
+729. The review of a small body of troops composed of different arms
+is conducted on the principles laid down for the regiment. The troops
+of each arm are formed and marched according to the drill regulations
+for that arm.
+
+
+_Review of Large Commands._
+
+730. A command consisting of one regiment, or less, and detachments of
+other arms is formed for review as ordered by the commanding officer.
+The principles of regimental review will be observed whenever
+practicable.
+
+731. In the review of a brigade or larger command the _present arms_
+and the ride around the line by the reviewing officer are omitted. The
+troops form and march in the order prescribed by the commanding
+officer.
+
+
+_PARADES._
+
+_General Rules._
+
+732. If dismounted, the officer receiving the parade, and his staff,
+stand at parade rest, with arms folded, while the band is sounding
+off; they resume attention with the adjutant. If mounted, they remain
+at attention.
+
+733. At the command _report_, given by a battalion adjutant, the
+captains in succession from the right salute and report: _A (_ or
+_other) company, present_ or _accounted for_; or, _A (_or _other)
+company, (so many) officers_ or _enlisted men absent_, and resume the
+order saber; at the same command given by the regimental adjutant, the
+majors similarly report their battalions.
+
+
+_Battalion Parade._
+
+734. At _adjutant's call_ the battalion is formed in line but not
+presented. Lieutenants take their posts in front of the center of
+their respective platoons at the captain's command for dressing his
+company on the line. The major takes post at a convenient distance in
+front of the center and facing the battalion.
+
+The adjutant, from his post in front of the center of the battalion,
+after commanding: 1. _Guides_, 2. _POSTS_, adds: 1. _Parade_, 2.
+_REST_; the battalion executes parade rest. The adjutant directs the
+band: _SOUND OFF_.
+
+The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the line of
+officers to the left of the line and back to its post on the right,
+when it ceases playing. At evening parade, when the band ceases
+playing, _retreat_ is sounded by the field music and, following the
+last note and while the flag is being lowered, the band plays the
+_Star Spangled Banner_.
+
+Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant comes to attention,
+and, as the last note ends, commands: 1. _Battalion_, 2. _ATTENTION_,
+3. _Present_, 4. _ARMS_, and salutes, retaining that position until
+the last note of the National Anthem. He then turns about and reports:
+_Sir, the parade is formed_. The major directs the adjutant: _Take
+your post, Sir_. The adjutant moves at a trot (if dismounted, in quick
+time), passes by the major's right, and takes his post.
+
+The major draws saber and commands: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_, and adds
+such exercises in the manual of arms as he may desire. Officers,
+noncommissioned officers commanding companies or armed with the saber,
+and the color guard, having once executed order arms, remain in that
+position during the exercises in the manual.
+
+The major then directs the adjutant: _Receive the reports, Sir_. The
+adjutant, passing by the major's right, advances at a trot (if
+dismounted, in quick time) toward the center of the line, halts
+midway between it and the major, and commands: _REPORT_.
+
+The reports received, the adjutant turns about, and reports: _Sir, all
+are present or accounted for_; or _Sir, (so many) officers_ or
+_enlisted men are absent_, including in the list of absentees those
+from the band and field music reported to him by the drum major prior
+to the parade.
+
+The major directs: _Publish the orders, Sir_.
+
+The adjutant turns about and commands: _Attention to orders_; he then
+reads the orders, and commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _CENTER_, 3.
+_MARCH_.
+
+At the command _center_, the company officers carry saber and face to
+the center. At the command _march_, they close to the center and face
+to the front; the adjutant turns about and takes his post.
+
+The officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior
+commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_. The officers advance, the band
+playing; the left officer of the center or right center company is the
+guide, and marches on the major; the officers are halted at 6 paces
+from the major by the senior who commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _HALT_.
+They halt and salute, returning to the carry saber with the major. The
+major then gives such instructions as he deems necessary, and
+commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _POSTS_, 3. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _posts_, company officers face about.
+
+At the command _march_, they step off with guide as before, and the
+senior commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _HALT_, so as to halt 3 paces from
+the line; he then adds: 1. _POSTS_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _posts_, officers face outward and, at the command
+_march_, step off in succession at 4 paces distance, resume their
+posts and order saber; the lieutenants march directly to their posts
+in rear of their companies.
+
+The music ceases when all officers have resumed their posts.
+
+The major then commands: 1. _Pass in review_, 2. _Squads right_, 3.
+_MARCH_, and returns saber.
+
+The battalion marches according to the principles of review; when the
+last company has passed, the ceremony is concluded.
+
+The band continues to play while the companies are in march upon the
+parade ground. Companies are formed in column of squads, without
+halting, and are marched to their respective parades by their
+captains.
+
+When the company officers have saluted the major, he may direct them
+to form line with the staff, in which case they individually move to
+the front, passing to the right and left of the major and staff, halt
+on the line established by the staff, face about, and stand at
+attention. The music ceases when the officers join the staff. The
+major causes the companies to pass in review under the command of
+their first sergeants by the same commands as before. The company
+officers return saber with the major and remain at attention.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 19._)
+
+
+_Regimental Parade._
+
+735. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses; the
+formation having proceeded up to, but not including the _present_, the
+parade proceeds as described for the battalion, with the following
+exceptions:
+
+"Colonel" is substituted for "major," "regiment" for "battalion," in
+the description, and "battalions" for "battalion" in the commands.
+
+Lieutenants remain in the line of file closers.
+
+After publishing the orders, the adjutant commands: 1. _Officers,
+center_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The company commanders remain at their posts with their companies.
+
+The field and staff officers form one line, closing on the center. The
+senior commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+The second major is the guide and marches on the colonel.
+
+After being dismissed by the colonel, each major moves individually to
+the front, turns outward, and followed by his staff resumes his post
+by the most direct line. The colonel directs the lieutenant colonel to
+march the regiment in review; the latter moves to a point midway
+between the colonel and the regiment and marches the regiment in
+review as prescribed. If the lieutenant colonel is not present the
+colonel gives the necessary commands for marching the regiment in
+review.
+
+
+_ESCORTS._
+
+_Escort of the Color._
+
+736. The regiment being in line, or line of masses, the colonel
+details a company, other than the color company, to receive and escort
+the national color to its place. During the ceremony the regimental
+color remains with the color guard at its post with the regiment.
+
+The band moves straight to its front until clear of the line of field
+officers, changes direction to the right, and is halted; the
+designated company forms column of platoons in rear of the band, the
+color bearer or bearers between the platoons.
+
+The escort then marches without music to the colonel's office or
+quarters and is formed in line facing the entrance, the band on the
+right, the color bearer in the line of file closers.
+
+The color bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed by a
+sergeant of the escort, then goes to obtain the color.
+
+When the color bearer comes out, followed by the lieutenant and
+sergeant, he halts before the entrance, facing the escort; the
+lieutenant places himself on the right, the sergeant on the left of
+the color bearer; the escort presents arms, and the field music sounds
+_to the color_; the first lieutenant and sergeant salute.
+
+Arms are brought to the order; the lieutenant and sergeant return to
+their posts; the company is formed in column of platoons, the band
+taking post in front of the column; the color bearer places himself
+between the platoons; the escort marches in quick time, with guide
+left, back to the regiment, the band playing; the march is so
+conducted that when the escort arrives at 50 paces in front of the
+right of the regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to
+its front; when the color arrives opposite its place in line, the
+escort is formed in line to the left; the color bearer, passing
+between the platoons, advances and halts 12 paces in front of the
+colonel.
+
+The color bearer having halted, the colonel, who has taken post 30
+paces in front of the center of his regiment, faces about, commands:
+1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_, resumes his front, and salutes; the field
+music sounds _to the color_; and the color bearer executes the color
+salute at the command _present arms_.
+
+The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to the order, at
+which the color bearer resumes the carry and takes his post with the
+color company.
+
+The escort presents arms and comes to the order with the regiment, at
+the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it again in
+column of platoons, and, preceded by the band, marches it to its
+place, passing around the left flank of the regiment.
+
+The band plays until the escort passes the left of the line, when it
+ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear
+of the regiment.
+
+The regiment may be brought to a rest when the escort passes the left
+of the line. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 19._)
+
+737. Escort of the color is executed by a battalion according to the
+same principles.
+
+
+_Escorts of Honor._
+
+738. Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiving and
+escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for
+this purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior
+discipline.
+
+The escort forms in line, opposite the place where the personage
+presents himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it
+will march. On the appearance of the personage, he is received with
+the honors due to his rank. The escort is formed into column of
+companies, platoons or squads, and takes up the march, the personage
+and his staff or retinue taking positions in rear of the column; when
+he leaves the escort, line is formed and the same honors are paid as
+before.
+
+When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the
+point where the personage is to be received, as for instance, where a
+courtyard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels is posted
+from that point to the escort, facing inward; the sentinels
+successively salute as he passes and are then relieved and join the
+escort.
+
+An officer is appointed to attend him and bear such communication as
+he may have to make to the commander of the escort.
+
+
+_Funeral Escort._
+
+739. The composition and strength of the escort are prescribed in Army
+Regulations.
+
+The escort is formed opposite the quarters of the deceased; the band
+on that flank of the escort toward which it is to march.
+
+Upon the appearance of the coffin, the commander commands: 1.
+_Present_, 2. _ARMS_, and the band plays an appropriate air; arms are
+then brought to the order.
+
+The escort is next formed into column of companies, platoons, or
+squads. If the escort be small, it may be marched in line. The
+procession is formed in the following order: 1. _Music_, 2. _Escort_,
+3. _Clergy_, 4. _Coffin and pallbearers_, 5. _Mourners_, 6. _Members
+of the former command of the deceased_, 7. _Other officers and
+enlisted men_, 8. _Distinguished persons_, 9. _Delegations_, 10.
+_Societies_, 11. _Civilians_. Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and
+7), with side arms, are in the order of rank, seniors in front.
+
+The procession being formed, the commander of the escort puts it in
+march.
+
+The escort marches slowly to solemn music; the column having arrived
+opposite the grave, line is formed facing it.
+
+The coffin is then carried along the front of the escort to the grave;
+arms are presented, the music plays an appropriate air; the coffin
+having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and arms are
+brought to the order.
+
+The commander next commands: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_. The escort
+executes _parade rest_, officers and men inclining the head.
+
+When the funeral services are completed and the coffin lowered into
+the grave the commander causes the escort to resume attention and fire
+three rounds of blank cartridges, the muzzles of the pieces being
+elevated. When the escort is greater than a battalion, one battalion
+is designated to fire the volleys.
+
+A musician then sounds _taps_.
+
+The escort is then formed into column, marched in quick time to the
+point where it was assembled, and dismissed.
+
+The band does not play until it has left the inclosure.
+
+When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the
+escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may march _at ease_ in
+quick time until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought
+to attention. The music does not play while marching _at ease_.
+
+In marching at attention, the field music may alternate with the band
+in playing.
+
+740. When arms are presented at the funeral of a person entitled to
+any of the following honors, the band plays the prescribed _national
+air_, or the field music sounds _to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_,
+or _ruffles_, according to the rank of the deceased, after which the
+band plays an appropriate air. The commander of the escort, in forming
+column, gives the appropriate commands for the different arms.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 6._)
+
+741. At the funeral of a mounted officer or enlisted man, his horse,
+in mourning caparison, follows the hearse.
+
+742. Should the entrance of the cemetery prevent the hearse
+accompanying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the column
+is halted at the entrance long enough to take the coffin from the
+hearse, when the column is again put in march. The Cavalry and
+Artillery, when unable to enter the inclosure, turn out of the column,
+face the column, and salute the remains as they pass.
+
+743. When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters of the
+deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are presented
+upon receiving the remains at the quarters and also as they are borne
+into the church.
+
+744. The commander of the escort, previous to the funeral, gives the
+clergyman and pallbearers all needful directions.
+
+
+
+
+INSPECTIONS.
+
+
+_Company Inspection._
+
+745. Being in line at a halt: 1. _Open ranks_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_ the front rank executes right dress; the rear
+rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and execute
+right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective flanks and
+take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of
+their respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear
+rank, and file closers, takes post 3 paces in front of the right
+guide, facing to the left, and commands: 1. _FRONT_, 2. _PREPARE FOR
+INSPECTION_.
+
+At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain returns
+saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order saber, and
+stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection they carry saber,
+face about, and order saber. The captain may direct the lieutenants to
+accompany or assist him, in which case they return saber and, at the
+close of the inspection, resume their posts in front of the company,
+draw and carry saber.
+
+Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the right of
+the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, executes
+_inspection arms_.
+
+The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just
+above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain inspects
+the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in
+receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left
+hand at the balance and executes _order arms_.
+
+As the captain returns the piece the next man executes _inspection
+arms_, and so on through the company.
+
+Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes
+_order arms_ as soon as the captain passes to the next man.
+
+The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to right
+in rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers.
+
+When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes _inspection
+saber_. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute _inspection pistol_
+by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding it diagonally
+across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the neck, muzzle
+pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to the holster as
+soon as the captain passes.
+
+Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing to the
+left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants and
+commands: 1. _Close ranks_, 2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the command _march_ the lieutenants resume their posts in line; the
+rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the
+file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank.
+
+746. If the company is dismissed, rifles are put away. In quarters,
+headdress and accouterments are removed and the men stand near their
+respective bunks; in camp they stand covered, but without
+accouterments, in front of their tents.
+
+If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks and
+its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man will arrange
+the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters or permanent camp,
+or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter tent camp, in the
+same relative order as directed in paragraph 747.
+
+The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the
+quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and calls
+the men to attention on entering each squad room or on approaching the
+tents; the men stand at attention but do not salute. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+16._)
+
+747. If the inspection is to include an examination of the equipment
+while in ranks, the captain, after closing ranks, causes the company
+to stack arms, to march backward until 4 paces in rear of the stacks
+and to take intervals. He then commands: 1. _UNSLING EQUIPMENT_, 2.
+_OPEN PACKS_.
+
+At the first command, each man unslings his equipment and places it on
+the ground at his feet, haversack to the front end of the pack 1 foot
+in front of toes.
+
+At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs removed and
+unrolled, the longer edge of the pack along the lower edge of the
+cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter tent pins, removes meat can,
+knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and places them on the
+right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon in the open meat can;
+removes the canteen and cup from the cover and places them on the left
+side of the haversack; unstraps and spreads out haversack so as to
+expose its contents; folds up the carrier to uncover the cartridge
+pockets; opens same; unrolls toilet articles and places them on the
+outer flap of the haversack; places underwear carried in pack on the
+left half of the open pack, with round fold parallel with front edge
+of pack; opens first-aid pouch and exposes contents to view. Special
+articles carried by individual men, such as flag kit, field glasses,
+compass, steel tape, notebook, etc., will be arranged on the right
+half of the open pack. Each man then resumes the attention. Plate VI
+shows the relative position of all articles except underwear and
+special articles.
+
+The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers as before,
+inspects the equipment, returns to the right, and commands: _CLOSE
+PACKS_.
+
+Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up his
+haversack and its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, fork, and
+spoon, and the canteen and cup; closes cartridge pockets and first-aid
+pouch; restores special articles to their proper receptacles; rolls up
+and replaces pack in carrier; and, leaving the equipment in its
+position on the ground, resumes the attention.
+
+All equipments being packed, the captain commands: _SLING EQUIPMENT_.
+
+The equipments are slung and belts fastened.
+
+The captain then causes the company to assemble and take arms. The
+inspection is completed as already explained.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 16._)
+
+748. Should the inspector be other than the captain, the latter, after
+commanding _front_, adds _REST_, and faces to the front. When the
+inspector approaches, the captain faces to the left, brings the
+company to attention, faces to the front, and salutes. The salute
+acknowledged, the captain carries saber, faces to the left, commands:
+_PREPARE FOR INSPECTION_, and again faces to the front.
+
+The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber and
+accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him.
+
+
+_Battalion Inspection._
+
+749. If there be both inspection and review, the inspection may either
+precede or follow the review.
+
+The battalion being in column of companies at full distance, all
+officers dismounted, the major commands: 1. _Prepare for inspection_,
+2. _MARCH_.
+
+At the first command each captain commands: _Open ranks_.
+
+At the command _march_ the ranks are opened in each company, as in the
+inspection of the company.
+
+The field musicians join their companies.
+
+The drum major conducts the band to a position 30 paces in rear of the
+column, if not already there, and opens ranks.
+
+The major takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of the
+center of the leading company. The staff takes post as if mounted. The
+color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff.
+
+Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not take
+post in front of the column but accompany him.
+
+The inspector inspects the major, and, accompanied by the latter,
+inspects the staff officers.
+
+The major then commands: _REST_, returns saber, and, with his staff,
+accompanies the inspector.
+
+If the major is the inspector he commands: _REST_, returns saber, and
+inspects his staff, which then accompanies him.
+
+The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, then makes a
+minute inspection of the color guard, the noncommissioned staff, and
+the arms, accouterments, dress, and ammunition of each soldier of the
+several companies in succession, and inspects the band.
+
+The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of the
+color guard, noncommissioned staff, and band.
+
+The color guard and noncommissioned staff may be dismissed as soon as
+inspected.
+
+[Illustration: Plate VI.]
+
+750. As the inspector approaches each company its captain commands: 1.
+_Company_, 2. _ATTENTION_, 3. _PREPARE FOR INSPECTION_, and faces to
+the front; as soon as inspected he returns saber and accompanies the
+inspector. The inspection proceeds as in company inspection. At its
+completion the captain closes ranks and commands: _REST_. Unless
+otherwise directed by the inspector, the major directs that the
+company be marched to its parade and dismissed.
+
+751. If the inspection will probably last a long time the rear
+companies may be permitted to stack arms and fall out; before the
+inspector approaches they fall in and take arms.
+
+752. The band plays during the inspection of the companies.
+
+When the inspector approaches the band the adjutant commands: _PREPARE
+FOR INSPECTION_.
+
+As the inspector approaches him each man raises his instrument in
+front of the body, reverses it so as to show both sides, and then
+returns it.
+
+Company musicians execute inspection similarly.
+
+753. At the inspection of quarters or camp the inspector is
+accompanied by the captain, followed by the other officers or by such
+of them as he may designate. The inspection is conducted as described
+in the company inspection.
+
+
+_Regimental Inspection._
+
+754. The commands, means, and principles are the same as described for
+a battalion.
+
+The colonel takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of
+the major of the leading battalion. His staff takes post as if
+mounted. The color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff.
+
+The inspector inspects the colonel and the lieutenant colonel, and,
+accompanied by the colonel, inspects the staff officers.
+
+The colonel then commands: _REST_, returns saber, and, with the
+lieutenant colonel and staff, accompanies the inspector.
+
+If the colonel is the inspector he commands: _REST_, returns saber,
+and inspects the lieutenant colonel and staff, all of whom then
+accompany him.
+
+The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, makes a minute
+inspection of the color guard, noncommissioned staff, each battalion
+in succession, and the band.
+
+On the approach of the inspector each major brings his battalion to
+attention. Battalion inspection follows.
+
+
+
+
+MUSTER.
+
+
+_Regimental, Battalion, or Company Muster._
+
+755. Muster is preceded by an inspection, and, when practicable, by a
+review.
+
+The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field, staff, and
+band, the surgeon with the hospital roll; each captain with the roll
+of his company. A list of absentees, alphabetically arranged, showing
+cause and place of absence, accompanies each roll.
+
+756. Being in column of companies at open ranks, each captain, as the
+mustering officer approaches, brings his company to right shoulder
+arms, and commands: _ATTENTION TO MUSTER_.
+
+The mustering officer or captain then calls the names on the roll;
+each man, as his name is called, answers _Here_ and brings his piece
+to order arms.
+
+After muster, the mustering officer, accompanied by the company
+commanders and such other officers as he may designate, verifies the
+presence of the men reported in hospital, on guard, etc.
+
+757. A company may be mustered in the same manner on its own parade
+ground, the muster to follow the company inspection.
+
+
+
+
+HONORS AND SALUTES.
+
+
+758. Further rules governing honors, courtesies, etc., are prescribed
+in Army Regulations.
+
+759. (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and enlisted men
+not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, or mess, on
+every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being addressed, the
+officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting first.
+
+(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted
+men, the word "attention" is given by some one who perceives him, when
+all rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until the officer
+leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men at meals stop
+eating and remain seated at attention.
+
+(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer,
+faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing he faces
+an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same
+place or on the same ground, such compliments need not be repeated.
+Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute an officer
+unless addressed by him.
+
+(4) Before addressing an officer, an enlisted man makes the prescribed
+salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or, if unarmed, with
+the right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply.
+
+(5) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formation, officers
+and enlisted men salute military persons as follows: With arms in
+hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (sentinels on interior guard
+duty excepted); without arms, the right-hand salute.
+
+(6) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted men
+salute military persons with the right-hand salute.
+
+(7) Officers and enlisted men will render the prescribed salutes in a
+military manner, the officer junior in rank, or the enlisted men,
+saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted, all
+entitled to the salute shall return it.
+
+(8) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign
+conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before addressing
+a superior officer not mounted.
+
+(9) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, but
+shall come to attention if at rest or at ease.
+
+(10) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. In
+general, it does not exceed 30 paces.
+
+(11) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a body
+of troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite the post of
+the commander.
+
+(12) In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street cars,
+and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal salutes
+may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to disturb or annoy
+civilians present.
+
+(13) Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same
+compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and
+Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers of
+their own regiment, corps, or arm of service.
+
+(14) Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the
+foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed with
+the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the proper
+performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute as
+prescribed in drill regulations. (_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+760. (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute
+officers of grades higher than the person commanding the unit, by
+first bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as required by
+subparagraph (5), paragraph 759. If the person saluted is of a junior
+or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention in the exchange of
+salutes.
+
+(2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their commanders will
+exchange salutes, both commands being at attention.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+761. Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually
+engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under campaign or
+simulated campaign conditions. Troops on the service of security pay
+no compliments whatever.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+762. If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and armed
+with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought to _present
+arms_ or _present sabers_ before its commander salutes in the
+following cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when _to the
+color_ or _to the standard_ is sounded during ceremonies, or when a
+person is saluted who is its immediate or higher commander or a
+general officer, or when the national or regimental color is saluted.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+763. At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command shall
+render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position of
+salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at retreat and
+during ceremonies when _to the color_ is played, if no band is
+present. If not under arms, the organizations shall be brought to
+attention at the first note of the National Anthem, _to the color_ or
+_to the standard_, and the salute rendered by the officer or
+noncommissioned officer in command as prescribed in regulations, as
+amended herein.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 17._)
+
+764. Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when persons
+belonging to the military service are present, all officers and
+enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing toward
+the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward the flag).
+If in uniform, covered or uncovered, or in civilian clothes,
+uncovered, they shall salute at the first note of the anthem,
+retaining the position of salute until the last note of the anthem.
+If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover at the first note of
+the anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder and so
+remain until its close, except that in inclement weather the headdress
+may be slightly raised.
+
+The same rules apply when _to the color_ or _to the standard_ is
+sounded as when the National Anthem is played.
+
+When played by an Army band, the National Anthem shall be played
+through without repetition of any part not required to be repeated to
+make it complete.
+
+The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the playing
+of the National Anthem of the United States shall be shown toward the
+national anthem of any other country when played upon official
+occasions.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+765. Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will render
+honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as required by
+subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian dress and covered,
+they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder
+with the right hand; if uncovered they will salute with the right-hand
+salute.
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._)
+
+
+
+
+PART V.--MANUALS.
+
+
+
+
+THE COLOR.
+
+
+766. The word "color" implies the national color; it includes the
+regimental color when both are present.
+
+The rules prescribing the colors to be carried by regiments and
+battalions on all occasions are contained in Army Regulations.
+
+767. In garrison the colors, when not in use, are kept in the office
+or quarters of the colonel, and are escorted thereto and therefrom by
+the color guard. In camp the colors, when not in use, are in front of
+the colonel's tent. From reveille to retreat, when the weather
+permits, they are displayed uncased; from retreat to reveille and
+during inclement weather they are cased.
+
+Colors are said to be cased when furled and protected by the oil-cloth
+covering.
+
+768. The regimental color salutes in the ceremony of escort of the
+color, and when saluting an officer entitled to the honor, but in no
+other case.
+
+If marching, the salute is executed when at 6 paces from the officer
+entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed when 6 paces beyond him.
+
+The national color renders no salute. (_C.I.D.R., No. 6._)
+
+
+_The Color Guard._
+
+769. The color guard consists of two color sergeants, who are the
+color bearers, and two experienced privates selected by the colonel.
+The senior color sergeant carries the national color; the junior color
+sergeant carries the regimental color. The regimental color, when
+carried, is always on the left of the national color, in whatever
+direction they may face.
+
+770. The color guard is formed and marched in one rank, the color
+bearers in the center. It is marched in the same manner and by the
+same commands as a squad, substituting, when necessary, _guard_ for
+_squad_.
+
+771. The color company is the center or right center company of the
+center or right center battalion. The color guard remains with that
+company unless otherwise directed.
+
+772. In line the color guard is in the interval between the inner
+guides of the right and left center companies.
+
+In line of columns or in close line, the color guard is midway between
+the right and left center companies and on line with the captains.
+
+In column of companies or platoons the color guard is midway between
+the color company and the company in rear of the color company and
+equidistant from the flanks of the column.
+
+In close column the color guard is on the flank of the color company.
+
+In column of squads the color guard is in the column between the color
+company and the company originally on its left.
+
+When the regiment is formed in line of masses for ceremonies, the
+color forms on the left of the leading company of the center (right
+center) battalion. It rejoins the color company when the regiment
+changes from line of masses. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+773. The color guard when with a battalion that takes the battle
+formation, joins the regimental reserve, whose commander directs the
+color guard to join a certain company of the reserve. (_C.I.D.R., No.
+2._)
+
+774. The color guard executes neither loadings nor firings; in
+rendering honors, it executes all movements in the manual; in drill,
+all movements unless specially excused.
+
+
+_To Receive the Color._
+
+775. The color guard, by command of the senior color sergeant,
+presents arms on receiving and parting with the color. After parting
+with the color, the color guard is brought to order arms by command of
+the senior member who is placed as the right man of the guard.
+
+776. At drills and ceremonies, excepting _escort of the color_, the
+color, if present, is received by the color company after its
+formation.
+
+The formation of the color company completed, the captain faces to the
+front; the color guard, conducted by the senior sergeant, approaches
+from the front and halts at a distance of 10 paces from the captain,
+who then faces about, brings the company to the present, faces to the
+front, salutes, again faces about and brings the company to the order.
+The color guard comes to the present and order at the command of the
+captain, and is then marched by the color sergeant directly to its
+post on the left of the color company.
+
+777. When the battalion is dismissed the color guard escorts the color
+to the office or quarters of the colonel.
+
+
+_Manual of the Color._
+
+778. At the _carry_ the heel of the pike rests in the socket of the
+sling; the right hand grasps the pike at the height of the shoulder.
+
+At the _order_ the heel of the pike rests on the ground near the right
+toe, the right hand holding the pike in a vertical position.
+
+At _parade rest_ the heel of the pike is on the ground, as at the
+_order_; the pike is held with both hands in front of the center of
+the body, left hand uppermost.
+
+The _order_ is resumed at the command _attention_.
+
+The left hand assists the right when necessary.
+
+The _carry_ is the habitual position when the troops are at a
+shoulder, port, or trail.
+
+The _order_ and _parade rest_ are executed with the troops.
+
+_The color salute:_ Being at a carry, slip the right hand up the pike
+to the height of the eye, then lower the pike by straightening the arm
+to the front.
+
+
+
+
+THE BAND.
+
+
+779. The band is formed in two or more ranks, with sufficient
+intervals between the men and distances between the ranks to permit of
+a free use of the instruments.
+
+The field music, when united, forms with and in rear of the band; when
+the band is not present the posts, movements, and duties of the field
+music are the same as prescribed for the band; when a musician is in
+charge his position is on the right of the front rank. When the
+battalion or regiment turns about by squads, the band executes the
+countermarch; when the battalion or regiment executes _right_, _left_,
+or _about face_, the band faces in the same manner.
+
+In marching, each rank dresses to the right.
+
+In executing _open ranks_ each rank of the band takes the distance of
+3 paces from the rank next in front; the drum major verifies the
+alignment.
+
+The field music sounds the _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_, and
+_to the color_ at the signal of the drum major.
+
+780. The drum major is 3 paces in front of the center of the front
+rank, and gives the signals or commands for the movements of the band
+as for a squad, substituting in the commands _band_ for _squad_.
+
+
+_Signals of the Drum Major._
+
+781. Preparatory to a signal the staff is held with the right hand
+near the head of the staff, hand below the chin, back to the front,
+ferrule pointed upward and to the right.
+
+_Prepare to play:_ Face toward the band and extend the right arm to
+its full length in the direction of the staff. _Play:_ Bring the arm
+back to its original position in front of the body.
+
+_Prepare to cease playing:_ Extend the right arm to its full length in
+the direction of the staff. _Cease playing:_ Bring the arm back to its
+original position in front of the body.
+
+_To march:_ Turn the wrist and bring the staff to the front, the
+ferrule pointing upward and to the front; extend the arm to its full
+length in the direction of the staff.
+
+_To halt:_ Lower the staff into the raised left hand and raise the
+staff horizontally above the head with both hands, the arms extended;
+lower the staff with both hands to a horizontal position at the height
+of the hips.
+
+_To countermarch:_ Face toward the band and give the signal _to
+march_. The countermarch is executed by each front-rank man to the
+right of the drum major turning to the right about, each to the left,
+turning to the left about, each followed by the men covering him. The
+drum major passes through the center.
+
+_To oblique:_ Bring the staff to a horizontal position, the head of
+the staff opposite the neck, the ferrule pointing in the direction the
+oblique is to be made; extend the arm to its full length in the
+direction of the staff.
+
+_To march by the right flank:_ Extend the arm to the right, the staff
+vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the rear.
+
+_To march by the left flank:_ Extend the arm to the left, the staff
+vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the front.
+
+_To diminish front:_ Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the
+height of the eyes, right hand at the height of the hip.
+
+_To increase front:_ Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the
+height of the hip, right hand at the height of the neck.
+
+The _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_: Bring the staff to a vertical
+position, hand opposite the neck, back of the hand to the front,
+ferrule pointing down.
+
+_To the color:_ Bring the staff to a horizontal position at the height
+of the neck, back of the hand to the rear, ferrule pointing to the
+left.
+
+When the band is playing, in marching, the drum major beats the time
+with his staff and supports the left hand at the hip, fingers in
+front, thumb to the rear.
+
+The drum major, with staff in hand, salutes by bringing his staff to a
+vertical position, head of the staff up and opposite the left
+shoulder.
+
+The drum major, marching in review with staff in hand, salutes by
+bringing his staff to a vertical position, head of the staff up and
+opposite the left shoulder.
+
+At a halt, and the band not playing, the drum major holds his staff
+with the ferrule touching the ground about 1 inch from toe of right
+foot, at an angle of about 60 deg., ball pointing upward to the right,
+right hand grasping staff near the ball, back of the hand to the
+front: left hand at the hip, fingers in front, thumb to the rear.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 6._)
+
+
+
+
+MANUAL OF THE SABER.
+
+
+782. 1. _Draw_, 2. _SABER_.
+
+At the command _draw_ unhook the saber with the thumb and first two
+fingers of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook, fingers
+lifting the upper ring; grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the
+upper band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize the grip with the
+right hand, and draw the blade 6 inches out of the scabbard, pressing
+the scabbard against the thigh with the left hand.
+
+At the command _saber_ draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to its
+full extent to the right front, at an angle of about 45 deg. with the
+horizontal, the saber, edge down, in a straight line with the arm;
+make a slight pause and bring the back of the blade against the
+shoulder, edge to the front, arm nearly extended, hand by the side,
+elbow back, third and fourth fingers back of the grip; at the same
+time hook up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of the
+left hand, thumb through the upper ring, fingers supporting it; drop
+the left hand by the side.
+
+_This is the position of carry saber dismounted._
+
+Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber unhook the
+scabbard before mounting; when mounted, in the first motion of _draw
+saber_ they reach with the right hand over the bridle hand and without
+the aid of the bridle hand draw the saber as before; the right hand at
+the _carry_ rests on the right thigh.
+
+On foot the scabbard is carried hooked up.
+
+783. When publishing orders, calling the roll, etc., the saber is held
+suspended from the right wrist by the saber knot; when the saber knot
+is used it is placed on the wrist before drawing saber and taken off
+after returning saber.
+
+784. Being at the order or carry: 1. _Present_, 2. _SABER_ (or
+_ARMS_).
+
+At the command _present_ raise and carry the saber to the front, base
+of the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck,
+edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the hilt,
+thumb extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping the
+grip.
+
+At the command _saber_, or _arms_, lower the saber, point in
+prolongation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to the left,
+hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended. If mounted, the
+hand is held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front
+of the stirrup.
+
+In rendering honors with troops officers execute the first motion of
+the salute at the command _present_, the second motion at the command
+_arms_; enlisted men with the saber execute the first motion at the
+command _arms_ and omit the second motion.
+
+785. Being at a carry: 1. _Order_, 2. _SABER_ (or _ARMS_).
+
+Drop the point of the saber directly to the front, point on or near
+the ground, edge down, thumb on back of grip.
+
+Being at the _present saber_, should the next command be _order arms_,
+officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber _order
+saber_; if the command be other than _order arms_, they execute _carry
+saber_.
+
+When arms are brought to the order the officers or enlisted men with
+the saber drawn _order saber_.
+
+786. The saber is held at the carry while giving commands, marching at
+attention, or changing position in quick time.
+
+When at the order sabers are brought to the carry when arms are
+brought to any position except the _present_ or _parade rest_.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+787. Being at the order: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_.
+
+Take the position of parade rest except that the left hand is
+uppermost and rests on the right hand, point of saber on or near the
+ground in front of the center of the body, edge to the right.
+
+At the command _attention_ resume the order saber and the position of
+the soldier.
+
+788. In marching in double time the saber is carried diagonally across
+the breast, edge to the front; the left hand steadies the scabbard.
+
+789. Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, on
+all duties under arms draw and return saber without waiting for
+command. All commands to soldiers under arms are given with the saber
+drawn.
+
+790. Being at a carry: 1. _Return_, 2. _SABER_.
+
+At the command _return_ carry the right hand opposite to and 6 inches
+from the left shoulder, saber vertical, edge to the left; at the same
+time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left hand and grasp it at
+the upper band.
+
+At the command _saber_ drop the point to the rear and pass the blade
+across and along the left arm; turn the head slightly to the left,
+fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard, raise the right hand,
+insert and return the blade; free the wrist from the saber knot (if
+inserted in it), turn the head to the front, drop the right hand by
+the side; hook up the scabbard with the left hand, drop the left hand
+by the side.
+
+Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, when
+mounted, return saber without using the left hand; the scabbard is
+hooked up on dismounting.
+
+791. At inspection enlisted men with the saber drawn execute the first
+motion of _present saber_ and turn the wrist to show both sides of the
+blade, resuming the carry when the inspector has passed.
+
+
+
+
+MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING.
+
+
+_Shelter Tents._
+
+792. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:
+_FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS_.
+
+The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a
+file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
+sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the
+company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken
+from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guides, and file closers
+form on a convenient flank. Before forming column of platoons,
+preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be redivided into two
+or more platoons, regardless of the size of each. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+793. The captain then causes the company to take intervals as
+described in the School of the Squad, and commands: _PITCH TENTS_.
+
+At the command _pitch tents_, each man steps off obliquely to the
+right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt
+of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,
+barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man
+then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of
+the right heel.
+
+Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins removed;
+each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the rear,
+flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear-rank man's half
+on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; the guy loops at
+both ends of the lower half are passed through the buttonholes
+provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped end of the guy
+rope is then passed through both guy loops and secured, this at both
+ends of the tent. Each front-rank man inserts the muzzle of his rifle
+under the front end of the ridge and holds the rifle upright, sling to
+the front, heel of butt on the ground beside the bayonet. His
+rear-rank man pins down the front corners of the tent on the line of
+bayonets, stretching the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye
+of the front guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front
+of the rifle as to hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the
+tent, each pins down a corner, stretching the sides and rear of the
+tent before securing; the rear-rank man then inserts an intrenching
+tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear end of the ridge
+inside the tent, the front-rank man pegging down the end of the rear
+guy ropes; the rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the
+rear-rank man working on the right.
+
+The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown back on
+the tent.
+
+As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment and the
+contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention in front of
+his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin.
+
+To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes
+should all be of the same length.
+
+In shelter-tent camps, in localities where suitable material is
+procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used in lieu of the rifle
+and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the shelter tent.
+(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2, 5 and 8._)
+
+794. When the pack is not carried the company is formed for shelter
+tents, intervals are taken, arms are laid aside or on the ground, the
+men are dismissed and proceed to the wagon, secure their packs, return
+to their places, and pitch tents as heretofore described.
+
+795. Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching one tent as
+heretofore described, then pitching a second tent against the opening
+of the first, using one rifle to support both tents, and passing the
+front guy ropes over and down the sides of the opposite tents. The
+front corner of one tent is not pegged down, but is thrown back to
+permit an opening into the tent.
+
+
+_Single Sleeping Bag._
+
+796. Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its short
+dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the right side
+of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left side by means
+of the tapes provided; fold the left half of the poncho over the
+blanket and button it together along the side and bottom.
+
+
+_Double Sleeping Bag._
+
+797. Spread one poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the poncho;
+tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes provided; spread
+a second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned end at the feet,
+buttoned side to the right; button the two ponchos together along both
+sides and across the end.
+
+
+_To Strike Shelter Tents._
+
+798. The men standing in front of their tents: _STRIKE TENTS_.
+
+Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are
+lowered, packs made up, and equipments slung, and the men stand at
+attention in the places originally occupied after taking intervals.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 8._)
+
+
+_Common and Wall Tents._
+
+799. To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical wall
+tents: Mark line of tents by driving a wall pin on the spot to be
+occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal
+tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet,
+which will give a passage of two feet between tents. Spread tripod on
+the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is used.
+Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, and
+place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door (or
+doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the
+bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left
+(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the
+pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already
+driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the
+rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to
+complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops.
+Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front
+corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small
+amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven.
+According to the size of the tent one or two men, crawling under the
+tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or
+ridge pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes
+are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the
+tent to adjust it. The tent, steadied by the remaining men, one at
+each corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or
+storage type, corner poles will now be placed at the four corners.
+The four corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of
+the large pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such
+distance as to hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth
+when the guy ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through
+each remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven
+in line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the
+tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly
+are placed over the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace
+ropes, when used, are then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed.
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 11._)
+
+800. Rescinded. (_C.I.D.R., No. 11._)
+
+
+_Conical Wall Tent._
+
+801. Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using
+the hood lines with center pin as center, describe two concentric
+circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer
+circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3
+feet drive the other guy pin.
+
+In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case
+of pyramidal tents. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+_To Strike Common, Wall, Pyramidal, and Conical Wall Tents._
+
+802. _STRIKE TENTS._
+
+The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy
+ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall
+tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle.
+
+One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is
+lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole
+fastened together, and the remaining pins collected.
+
+
+_To Fold Tents._
+
+803. For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread the
+tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of side
+walls are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left;
+fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it
+rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent
+in two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in
+two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second
+from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the
+second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of
+the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the
+bundle; tie with the two exposed guys.
+
+
+_Method of Folding Pyramidal Tent._
+
+The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof canvas
+pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by leaving the
+rear-corner wall pins in the ground with the wall loops attached, one
+man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding the square iron in a
+perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from
+the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of
+the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle.
+
+Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear
+corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and
+pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and return to
+the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side
+of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the
+front side of tent.
+
+Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described
+above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the
+tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each
+on itself.
+
+Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward
+toward the bottom of tent, and continue to fold around the square iron
+as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth, and parallel with
+the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the canvas
+kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of the
+canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the two on
+the center width, which should be pulled out and away from bottom edge
+to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one end, fold
+toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first and second
+widths) and fold again toward the center so that the already folded
+canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle width. Then
+fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. Then begin
+folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, then
+making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that
+already folded, turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take
+the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle
+over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle drawing tight. Turn
+bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise.
+
+When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by
+23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack.
+
+Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle
+width of canvas in the back wall. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 1 and 8._)
+
+
+
+
+MANUAL OF THE BUGLE.
+
+
+_Warning Calls._
+
+804. _First call_, _guard mounting_, _full dress_, _overcoats_,
+_drill_, _stable_, _water_, and _boots and saddles_ precede the
+_assembly_ by such interval as may be prescribed by the commanding
+officer.
+
+_Mess_, _church_, and _fatigue_, classed as service calls, may also be
+used as warning calls.
+
+_First call_ is the first signal for formation for roll call and for
+all ceremonies except guard mounting.
+
+_Guard mounting_ is the first signal for guard mounting.
+
+The field music assembles at _first call_ and _guard mounting_.
+
+In a mixed command, _boots and saddles_ is the signal to mounted
+troops that their formation is to be mounted; for mounted guard
+mounting or mounted drill, it immediately follows the signal _guard
+mounting_ or _drill_.
+
+When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the _full dress_ or
+_overcoat_ call immediately follows _first call_, _guard mounting_, or
+_boots and saddles_.
+
+
+_Formation Calls._
+
+805. _Assembly:_ The signal for companies or details to fall in.
+
+_Adjutant's call:_ The signal for companies to form battalion; also
+for the guard details to form for guard mounting on the camp or
+garrison parade ground; it follows the _assembly_ at such interval as
+may be prescribed by the commanding officer.
+
+It is also used as a signal for the battalions to form regiment,
+following the first _adjutant's call_ at such interval as the
+commanding officer may prescribe.
+
+_To the color:_ Is sounded when the color salutes.
+
+
+_Alarm Calls._
+
+806. _Fire call:_ The signal for the men to fall in, without arms, to
+extinguish fire.
+
+_To arms:_ The signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on their
+company parade grounds as quickly as possible.
+
+_To horse:_ The signal for mounted men to proceed under arms to their
+horses, saddle, mount and assemble at a designated place as quickly as
+possible. In extended order this signal is used to remount troops.
+
+
+_Service Calls._
+
+807. _Tattoo_, _taps_, _mess_, _sick_, _church_, _recall_, _issue_,
+_officers'_, _captains'_, _first sergeants'_, _fatigue_, _school_, and
+_the general_.
+
+_The general_ is the signal for striking tents and loading wagons
+preparatory to marching.
+
+_Reveille_ precedes the _assembly_ for roll call; _retreat_ follows
+the _assembly_, the interval between being only that required for
+formation and roll call, except when there is parade.
+
+_Taps_ is the signal for extinguishing lights; it is usually preceded
+by _call to quarters_ by such interval as prescribed by Army
+Regulations.
+
+_Assembly_, _reveille_, _retreat_, _adjutant's call_, _to the color_,
+the _flourishes_, _ruffles_, and the _marches_ are sounded by all the
+field music united; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the
+musician of the guard or orderly musician; he may also sound the
+_assembly_ when the musicians are not united.
+
+The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if marches
+be played before _reveille_, it is fired at the commencement of the
+first march.
+
+The evening gun is fired at the last note of _retreat_.
+
+
+BUGLE CALLS.
+
+1. FIRST CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+2. GUARD MOUNTING.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+3. FULL DRESS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+4. OVERCOATS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+5. DRILL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+6. STABLE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+7. WATER.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+8. BOOTS AND SADDLES.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+9. ASSEMBLY.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+10. ADJUTANT'S CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+11. TO THE COLOR.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+12. FIRE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+13. TO ARMS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+14. TO HORSE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+15. REVEILLE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+16. RETREAT.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+17. TATTOO.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+18. CALL TO QUARTERS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+19. TAPS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+20. MESS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+21. SICK.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+22. CHURCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+23. RECALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+24. ISSUE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+25. OFFICERS' CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+26. CAPTAINS' CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+27. FIRST SERGEANTS' CALL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+28. FATIGUE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+29. SCHOOL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+29-1/2. THE GENERAL'S MARCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+(_C.I.D.R. No. 8, Sept. 3, 1914._)
+
+30. THE GENERAL.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+30-1/2. FLOURISHES FOR REVIEW.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+(_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+
+BUGLE SIGNALS.
+
+See paragraph 41.
+
+31. ASSEMBLE. MARCH.
+
+Same as _Assembly_, No. 9.
+
+32. ATTENTION.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+33. ATTENTION TO ORDERS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+34. FORWARD. MARCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+35. HALT.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+36. DOUBLE TIME. MARCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+37. TO THE REAR. MARCH.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+38. COMMENCE FIRING.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+39. CEASE FIRING.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+40. FIX BAYONETS.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+41. CHARGE.
+
+[Music illustration]
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX A.
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT,
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
+_Washington, December 2, 1911._
+
+The Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911, have been prepared for the use
+of troops armed with the United States magazine rifle, model 1903. For
+the guidance of organizations armed with the United States magazine
+rifle, model 1898, the following alternative paragraphs are published
+and will be considered as substitute paragraphs for the corresponding
+paragraphs in the text: 75 (in part), 96, 98, 99, 134, 139, 141, 142,
+148, and 150.
+
+By order of the Secretary of War:
+
+LEONARD WOOD,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff_.
+
+
+75.... Third. The cut-off is kept turned down, except when using the
+magazine....
+
+96. Being at order arms: 1. _Unfix, BAYONET._
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Take the position of
+parade rest, grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right
+hand, press the spring with the forefinger of the left hand, raise the
+bayonet until the handle is about 6 inches above the muzzle of the
+piece, drop the point to the left, back of hand toward the body, and,
+glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing
+between the left arm and body; regrasp the piece with the right hand
+and resume the order.
+
+If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
+from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
+most convenient manner.
+
+If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
+most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
+original position.
+
+Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity, but
+not in cadence.
+
+98. Being at order arms: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+At the second command, take the position of port arms. (_TWO_) With
+the right hand open the magazine gate, turn the bolt handle up, draw
+the bolt back and glance at the magazine and chamber. Having found
+them empty, or having emptied them, raise the head and eyes to the
+front.
+
+99. Being at inspection arms: 1. _Order (Right shoulder, port)_, 2.
+_ARMS_.
+
+At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle
+down, close the magazine gate, pull the trigger, and resume port arms.
+At the command _arms_, complete the movement ordered.
+
+134. Pieces being loaded and in the position of load, to execute other
+movements with the pieces loaded: 1. _Lock_, 2. _PIECES_.
+
+At the command _Pieces_ turn the safety lock fully to the right.
+
+The safety lock is said to be at the "ready" when turned to the left,
+and at the "safe" when turned to the right.
+
+The cut-off is said to be "on" when turned up and "off" when turned
+down.
+
+139. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. _With dummy (blank or
+ball) cartridges_, 2. _LOAD_.
+
+At the command _load_ each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half
+right and carries the right foot to the right, about one foot, to such
+position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
+body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height
+of the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back,
+takes a cartridge between the thumb and first two fingers find places
+it in the receiver; places palm of the hand against the back of the
+bolt handle; thrusts the bolt home with a quick motion, turning down
+the handle, and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each
+rear-rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar position
+opposite the interval to the right of his front-rank man, muzzle of
+the piece extending beyond the front rank, and loads.
+
+A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
+as practicable in the position of load.
+
+If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is similar; if
+kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the
+elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down the left hand
+steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt
+resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.
+
+For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
+are designated as that of _load_.
+
+141. _FILL MAGAZINE._
+
+Take the position of load, if not already there, open the gate of the
+magazine with the right thumb, take five cartridges from the box or
+belt, and place them, with the bullets to the front, in the magazine,
+turning the barrel slightly to the left to facilitate the insertion of
+the cartridges; close the gate and carry the right hand to the small
+of the stock.
+
+To load from the magazine the command _From magazine_ will be given
+preceding that of _LOAD_; the _cut-off_ will be turned up on coming to
+the position of _load_.
+
+To resume loading from the belt the command _From belt_ will be given
+preceding the command _LOAD_; the _cut-off_ will be turned down on
+coming to the position of _load_.
+
+The commands _from magazine_ and _from belt_, indicating the change in
+the manner of loading, will not be repeated in subsequent commands.
+
+The words _from belt_ apply to cartridge box as well as belt.
+
+In loading from the magazine care should be taken to push the bolt
+fully forward and turn the handle down before drawing the bolt back,
+as otherwise the extractor will not catch the cartridge in the
+chamber, and jamming will occur with the cartridge following.
+
+To fire from the magazine, the command _MAGAZINE FIRE_ may be given at
+any time. The cut-off is turned up and an increased rate of fire is
+executed. After the magazine is exhausted the cut-off is turned down
+and the firing continued, loading from the belt.
+
+_Magazine fire_ is employed only when, in the opinion of the platoon
+leader or company commander, the maximum rate of fire becomes
+necessary.
+
+142. _UNLOAD._
+
+All take the position of load, turn the _cut-off_ up, if not already
+there, turn the safety lock to the left, and alternately open and
+close the chamber until all the cartridges are ejected. After the last
+cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed and the trigger pulled. The
+cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the box or
+belt, and the piece brought to the order.
+
+148. _CLIP FIRE._
+
+Turn the cut-off up; _fire at will_ (reloading from the magazine)
+until the cartridges in the piece are exhausted; turn the cut-off
+down; fill magazine; reload and take the position of _suspend firing_.
+
+150. _CEASE FIRING._
+
+Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cartridge is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the
+trigger is pulled, sights are laid down, and the piece is brought to
+the order.
+
+_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men.
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX B.
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT,
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
+_Washington, December 2, 1911._
+
+Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 798, Infantry Drill
+Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the Infantry
+Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General Orders, No.
+23, War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, the
+alternative paragraphs published herewith will govern.
+
+By order of the Secretary of War:
+
+LEONARD WOOD,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff._
+
+
+747. If the inspection is to include an examination of the blanket
+rolls the captain, before dismissing the company and after inspecting
+the file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in place, closes
+ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company back to four paces from the
+stacks, takes intervals, and commands: 1. _Unsling_, 2. _PACKS_, 3.
+_Open_, 4. _PACKS_.
+
+At the second command each man unslings his roll and places it on the
+ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end of shelter
+half to the right.
+
+At the fourth command the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular to the
+front with the triangular end of the shelter half to the front,
+opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the contents of
+his roll for inspection and resumes the attention.
+
+The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file
+closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, draws
+saber and commands: 1. _Close_, 2. _PACKS_.
+
+At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly spread
+on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the front, folds
+his blanket once across its length and places it upon the shelter
+half, fold toward the bottom, edge one-half inch from the square end,
+the same amount of canvas uncovered at the top and bottom. He then
+places the parts of the pole on the side of the blanket next the
+square end of shelter half, near and parallel to the fold, end of pole
+about 6 inches from the edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly
+near the opposite edge of the blanket and distributes the other
+articles carried in the roll; folds the triangular end and then the
+exposed portion of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket.
+
+The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the front
+and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly two and
+two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each pair stands on
+the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely and buckles the
+straps, passing the end of the strap through both keeper and buckle,
+back over the buckle and under the keeper. With the roll so lying on
+the ground that the edge of the shelter half can just be seen when
+looking vertically downward one end is bent upward and over to meet
+the other, a clove hitch is taken with the guy rope first around the
+end to which it is attached and then around the other end, adjusting
+the length of rope between hitches to suit the wearer.
+
+As soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his roll in
+the position it was in after being unslung and stands at attention.
+
+All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: 1. _Sling_, 2.
+_PACKS_.
+
+At the second command the rolls are slung, the end containing the pole
+to the rear.
+
+The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain completes the
+inspection as before.
+
+792. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:
+_FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS_.
+
+The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a
+file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
+sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the
+company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken
+from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, and file closers
+form on a convenient flank. Before forming column of platoons,
+preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be redivided into two
+or more platoons regardless of the size of each. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._)
+
+793. The captain then causes the company to take intervals as
+described in the School of the Squad, and commands: _PITCH TENTS_.
+
+At the command _pitch tents_, each man steps off obliquely to the
+right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt
+of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,
+barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front rank man
+then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of
+the right heel. All unsling and open the blanket rolls and take out
+the shelter half, poles, and pins. Each then spreads his shelter half,
+triangle to the rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, rear
+rank man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together.
+Each front rank man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the
+halves, and holds the pole upright beside the bayonet placed in the
+ground; his rear rank man, using the pins in front, pins down the
+front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching the
+canvas taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and drives
+the pin at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the rope
+taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear rank man adjusts
+the pole and the front rank man drives the pins. The rest of the pins
+are then driven by both men, the rear rank man working on the right.
+
+As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents of the
+blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front of his own
+half on line with the front guy rope pin.
+
+The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents are
+pitched, should all be of the same length. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 8._)
+
+794. When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are taken as
+described above; the position of the front pole is marked with a
+bayonet and equipments are laid aside. The men then proceed to the
+wagon, secure their rolls, return to their places, and pitch tents as
+heretofore described.
+
+795. To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the same commands
+as before, except _Take half interval_ is given instead of _Take
+interval_. In taking interval each man follows the preceding man at 2
+paces. The captain then commands: _PITCH DOUBLE TENTS_.
+
+The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide and
+with him pitches a single shelter tent.
+
+Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the bayonet.
+
+The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two single
+tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. Two guy ropes
+are used at each end, the guy pins being placed in front of the corner
+pins.
+
+The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; and by
+numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling in on the left
+are numbered, counting off if necessary.
+
+All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent is to
+occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular ends to
+the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, first the
+ridges and then the square ends. The front corners of the tent are
+pinned by the front-rank men, the odd number holding the poles, the
+even number driving the pins. The rear-rank men similarly pin the rear
+corners.
+
+While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of the front
+rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted by the even
+number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the center eyes of the
+shelter halves in the following order: (1) The lower half of the front
+tent; (2) the lower half of the rear tent; (3) the upper half of the
+front tent; (4) the upper half of the rear tent. The guy ropes are
+then adjusted.
+
+The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned back,
+contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at _attention_, each
+opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent.
+
+796. Omitted.
+
+797. Omitted.
+
+798. Omitted.
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX C.
+
+MANUAL OF THE BAYONET.
+
+
+WAR DEPARTMENT,
+OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
+_Washington, February 20, 1918_.
+
+The following Manual of the Bayonet, prepared by a board consisting of
+Capt. Herschel Tupes, First Infantry, and Capt. Grosvenor L. Townsend,
+First Infantry, is approved and issued for the information and
+government of the Regular Army and the Organized Militia of the United
+States.
+
+By order of the Secretary of War.
+
+LEONARD WOOD,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff_.
+
+
+
+
+MANUAL OF THE BAYONET.
+
+UNITED STATES ARMY.
+
+
+1. The infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable the
+enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often necessary to
+obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed in the use of the
+rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters.
+
+2. The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier how to make
+effective use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat; to make him
+quick and proficient in handling his rifle; to give him an accurate
+eye and a steady hand; and to give him confidence in the bayonet in
+offense and defense. When skill in these exercises has been acquired,
+the rifle will still remain a most formidable weapon at close quarters
+should the bayonet be lost or disabled.
+
+3. Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will be judged by
+the skill shown by individuals in personal combat. For this purpose
+pairs or groups of opponents, selected at random from among recruits
+and trained soldiers, should engage in assaults, using the fencing
+equipment provided for the purpose.
+
+4. Officers and specially selected and thoroughly instructed
+noncommissioned officers will act as instructors.
+
+5. Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as the soldier
+is familiar with the handling of his rifle and will progress, as far
+as practicable, in the order followed in the text.
+
+6. Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground; but practice should
+also be had on uneven ground, especially in the attack and defense of
+intrenchments.
+
+7. These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic drill.
+
+8. The principles of the commands are the same as those given in
+paragraphs 9, 15, and 38, Infantry Drill Regulations. Intervals and
+distances will be taken as in paragraphs 109 and 111, Infantry Drill
+Regulations, except that, in formations for bayonet exercises, the men
+should be at least four paces apart in every direction.
+
+9. Before requiring soldiers to take a position or execute a movement
+for the first time, the instructor executes the same for the purpose
+of illustration, after which he requires the soldiers to execute the
+movement individually. Movements prescribed in this manual will not be
+executed in cadence as the attempt to do so results in incomplete
+execution and lack of vigor. Each movement will be executed correctly
+as quickly as possible by every man. As soon as the movements are
+executed accurately, the commands are given rapidly, as expertness
+with the bayonet depends chiefly upon quickness of motion.
+
+10. The exercises will be interrupted at first by short and frequent
+rests. The rests will be less frequent as proficiency is attained.
+Fatigue and exhaustion will be specially guarded against as they
+prevent proper interest being taken in the exercises and delay the
+progress of the instruction. Rests will be given from the position of
+order arms in the manner prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations.
+
+
+THE BAYONET.
+
+NOMENCLATURE AND DESCRIPTION.
+
+11. The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon consisting of three
+principal parts, viz, the _blade_, _guard_, and _grip_.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+12. The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, back,
+grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from guard to point
+is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge 5.6 inches.
+Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches. The weight of the
+bayonet is 1 pound; weight of rifle without bayonet is 8.69 pounds.
+The center of gravity of the rifle, with bayonet fixed, is just in
+front of the rear sight.
+
+
+I. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE.
+
+13. The instructor explains the importance of good footwork and
+impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and suppleness of
+body are as important for attack and defense as is the ability to
+parry and deliver a strong point or cut.
+
+14. All foot movements should be made from the position of _guard_. As
+far as practicable, they will be made on the balls of the feet to
+insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule can be laid down
+as to the length of the various foot movements; this depends entirely
+on the situations occurring in combat.
+
+15. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
+commands:
+
+1. _Bayonet exercise_, 2. _GUARD_.
+
+At the command _guard_, half face to the right, carry back and place
+the right foot about once and a half its length to the rear and about
+3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each other an angle of
+about 60 deg., weight of the body balanced equally on the balls of the
+feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands on hips, fingers to the
+front, thumbs to the rear, head erect, head and eyes straight to the
+front.
+
+16. To resume the attention, 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_. The men take
+the position of the soldier and fix their attention.
+
+17. _ADVANCE._ Advance the left foot quickly about once its length,
+follow immediately with the right foot the same distance.
+
+18. _RETIRE._ Move the right foot quickly to the rear about once its
+length, follow immediately with the left foot the same distance.
+
+19. 1. _Front_, 2. _PASS_. Place the right foot quickly about once its
+length in front of the left, advance the left foot to its proper
+position in front of the right.
+
+20. 1. _Rear_, 2. _PASS_. Place the left foot quickly about once its
+length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to its proper
+position in rear of the left.
+
+The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or to
+withdraw quickly therefrom.
+
+21. 1. _Right_, 2. _STEP_. Step to the right with the right foot about
+once its length and place the left foot in its proper relative
+position.
+
+22. 1. _Left_, 2. _STEP_. Step to the left with the left foot about
+once its length and place the right foot in its proper relative
+position.
+
+These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more
+favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. Better
+ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. In bayonet
+fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in stepping to the
+right or left is the one which at the moment bears the least weight.
+
+
+II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE.
+
+23. The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are the
+same as already given for movements without the rifle.
+
+24. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
+commands:
+
+1. _Bayonet exercise_, 2. _GUARD_.
+
+At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); at the
+same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with
+the left hand just below the lower band, fingers between the stock and
+gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping
+the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip,
+elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin.
+
+25. 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_.
+
+Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of
+order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention.
+
+26. During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will be
+executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they
+may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 27. Par. 24.]
+
+
+ATTACKS.
+
+27. 1. _THRUST._
+
+Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm,
+turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet at
+the point to be attacked, butt covering the right forearm. At the same
+time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of the
+body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot always on
+the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command.
+
+The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm,
+the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the
+attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach,
+chest, head, neck, and limbs.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 28.]
+
+28. 1. _LUNGE._
+
+Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot
+is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must always
+be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately without
+command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot if, for
+any reason, it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In the
+latter case, the preparatory common _forward_ will be given. Each
+method should be practiced.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 29.]
+
+29. 1. _Butt_, 2. _STRIKE_.
+
+Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle
+against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about
+the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the
+rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command.
+
+The points of attack in their order of importance are, head, neck,
+stomach, and crotch.
+
+30. 1. _Cut_, 2. _DOWN_.
+
+Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of
+attack. Guard is resumed without command.
+
+31. 1. _Cut_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_.
+
+With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left),
+directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without
+command.
+
+The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an
+enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false,
+or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in
+continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries.
+
+32. To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier will
+change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner, for
+example: 1. _To the right rear_, 2. _Cut_, 3. _DOWN_; 1. _To the
+right_, 2. _LUNGE_; 1. _To the left_, 2. _THRUST_, etc.
+
+Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the
+body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best
+accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot.
+
+These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
+guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 33. Par. 36.]
+
+33. Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting and
+lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings or
+other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably
+suspended at desired heights.
+
+34. The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by
+endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by
+directing the attack against one opening while looking at another.
+
+35. The soldier should also experience the effect of actual resistance
+offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in attacks. This will
+be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy.
+
+36. Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the
+execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the
+bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can
+be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely
+together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is
+preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc.,
+are also suitable.
+
+
+DEFENSES.
+
+37. In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard is
+resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have become
+proficient, the instructor will cause them to resume the position of
+guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry.
+
+38. 1. _Parry_, 2. _RIGHT_.
+
+Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply
+to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6
+inches to the right.
+
+39. 1. _Parry_, 2. _LEFT_.
+
+Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to
+cover the point attacked.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 40. Par 41.]
+
+40. 1. _Parry_, 2. _HIGH_.
+
+Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of
+vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front.
+
+When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may be
+supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This
+position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations,
+such as men mounted or on top of parapets.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 41. Par. 44.]
+
+41. 1. _Low parry_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_.
+
+Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height of the
+knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the right (left)
+to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened.
+
+These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist, leaves
+the head and body exposed.
+
+42. Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short
+motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far
+as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against _butt
+strike_ are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point
+attacked.
+
+43. To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the
+soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most
+convenient manner; for example: 1. _To the left rear_, 2. _Parry_, 3.
+_HIGH_; 1. _To the right_, 2. _Parry_, 3. _RIGHT_, etc.
+
+These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
+guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.
+
+In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is
+danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a
+vertical position.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 44.]
+
+
+III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET.
+
+44. 1. _Club rifle_, 2. _SWING_.
+
+Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn
+the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and
+muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at
+the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder farthest from the
+opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and
+knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet,
+shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity.
+_SWING._ Tighten the grasp of the hands and swing the rifle to the
+front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent and
+immediately return to the position of _club rifle_ by completing the
+swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command,
+_SWING_.
+
+The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any
+guard or parry that may be interposed.
+
+Being at _club rifle_, order arms is resumed by command.
+
+The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited.
+
+45. The position of _club rifle_ may be taken from any position of the
+rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in
+personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of
+the bayonet.
+
+
+IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS.
+
+46. The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous
+attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by the single
+movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the
+reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an
+attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of
+the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied
+by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to
+the right or left may be accompanied by attacks or defenses.
+
+47. Not more than three movements will be used in any combination. The
+instructor should first indicate the number of movements that are to
+be combined as _two movements_ or _three movements_. The execution is
+determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard is
+taken upon the completion of the last movement only.
+
+
+EXAMPLES.
+
+     _Front pass and LUNGE._
+     _Right step and THRUST._
+     _Left step and low parry RIGHT._
+     _Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE._
+     _Lunge and cut RIGHT._
+     _Parry right and parry HIGH._
+     _Butt strike and cut DOWN._
+     _Thrust and parry HIGH._
+     _Parry high and LUNGE._
+     _Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT._
+     _Right step, parry left and cut DOWN._
+     _To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN._
+     _To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE._
+
+48. Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will be
+made against the dummies both in quick time and double time.
+
+
+V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT.
+
+49. The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as far
+as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet exercises.
+
+50. The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme
+importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack
+fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the
+opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent
+on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take
+the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the
+offensive and take immediate advantage of it.
+
+51. Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing. Time
+for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a single
+hasty glance.
+
+52. In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be
+plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the point
+of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in night
+attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body.
+
+53. Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The
+point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in
+the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to
+the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for
+attack or defense.
+
+54. Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left hand.
+His position of _guard_ will not differ materially from that described
+in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge, he will be
+at a great disadvantage.
+
+55. The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is particularly
+useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a sentry can
+strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle.
+
+56. Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the
+muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will
+be directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attack him with short,
+stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon.
+
+57. The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and
+lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and
+advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp
+parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed
+to a counter attack, which should follow promptly.
+
+58. Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage by
+grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from behind.
+
+59. In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must be
+made to get on his near or left side, because here his reach is much
+shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable such
+an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the horseman.
+
+60. In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be best
+observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach
+generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within
+attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle
+of his body.
+
+
+VI. FENCING EXERCISES.
+
+61. Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of thrusts,
+parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will, the
+opponent replying with suitable parries and returns.
+
+62. The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before
+the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such
+condition as will prevent accidents.
+
+63. The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order,
+facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a
+distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as
+number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense.
+
+64. The opponents being at the order facing each other, the instructor
+commands: _SALUTE_.
+
+Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to
+the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and
+joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two.)
+Drop the arm smartly by the side.
+
+This salute is the fencing salute.
+
+All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will
+begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute.
+
+65. After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor
+commands: 1. _Fencing exercise_, 2. _GUARD_.
+
+At the command _guard_ each man comes to the position of _guard_,
+heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing
+lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the
+opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the _engage_ or _engage
+right_.
+
+66. Being at the _engage right_: _ENGAGE LEFT_.
+
+The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his
+opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
+right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position,
+each man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the
+corresponding portion of the opponent's bayonet.
+
+67. Being at _engage left_: _ENGAGE RIGHT_.
+
+The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his
+opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
+left and _engages_.
+
+68. Being _engaged_: _ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT_.
+
+The attack _engages left_ and then immediately _engages right_.
+
+69. Being _engaged left_: _ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT_.
+
+The attack _engages right_ and then immediately _engages left_.
+
+70. 1. _Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT)_; 2. _Number two, COUNTER_.
+
+Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly
+drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original
+position.
+
+71. In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage, a
+certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the
+play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This is
+necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended attack.
+It also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for his
+assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the movement is
+controlled by the left hand, the right remaining stationary.
+
+72. After some exercise in _engage_, _engage left_, and _counter_,
+exercises will be given in the _assaults_.
+
+
+ASSAULTS.
+
+73. The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name, as
+head, heck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the
+knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are
+first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at
+the command _assault_. Number one executes the attack, and number two
+parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one
+parries.
+
+74. For convenience in instruction _assaults_ are divided into _simple
+attacks_, _counter attacks_, _attacks on the rifle_, and _feints_.
+
+
+SIMPLE ATTACKS.
+
+75. Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement. There
+are three simple attacks--the _straight_, the _disengagement_, and the
+_counter disengagement_. They are not preceded by a feint.
+
+76. In the _straight_ the bayonet is directed straight at an opening
+from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle may, or
+may not, be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high or low,
+contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing the
+attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used in
+the engage may be continued in the attack.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number one, at neck_ (head,
+chest, right leg, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry right_; 3.
+_ASSAULT_.
+
+77. In the _disengagement_ contact with the opponent's rifle is
+abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled _under_ or _over_
+his bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This
+attack is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet
+from the moment contact is abandoned.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number one_, at stomach
+(left chest, left leg, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left_
+(etc.); 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+78. In the _counter disengagement_ a swift attack is made into the
+opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the
+engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral
+movement of the bayonet into the opening.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number two, engage left_; 2.
+_Number one_, at chest, _thrust_; 3. _Number two, parry left_; 4.
+_ASSAULT_.
+
+Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the
+opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry.
+
+79. A _counter attack_ or _return_ is one made instantly after or in
+continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible.
+This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter
+parry. The counter attack should also be made at, or just before, the
+full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made, a
+simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the
+opponent's body.
+
+Example: Being at _engage_, 1. _Number two_, at chest, _lunge_; 2.
+_Number one, parry right_, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.),
+_thrust_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+
+ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE.
+
+80. These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or disclosing
+an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the _press_,
+the _beat_, and the _twist_.
+
+81. In the _press_ the attack quickly presses against the opponent's
+bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the attack
+is delivered.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, press_, and at chest,
+_thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry right_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+82. The attack by _disengagement_ is particularly effective following
+_the press_.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, press_, and at
+stomach, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, low parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+83. The _beat_ is an attack in which a sharp blow is struck against
+the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an
+opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when
+there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, beat_, and at stomach
+(chest, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+84. In the _twist_ the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle or
+bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and a
+straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength
+on the part of the attack.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, twist_, and at
+stomach, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, low parry, left_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+
+FEINTS.
+
+85. Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are
+made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes the
+desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according
+to the number of such movements made by the attack.
+
+86. In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little force
+as possible is put into a feint.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, _Number one, feint_ head _thrust_; at
+stomach, _lunge_; 2. _Number two, parry right and low parry right_; 3.
+_ASSAULT_.
+
+Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes
+both parries.
+
+87. In double feints first one part of the body and then another is
+threatened and a third attacked.
+
+Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, feint straight thrust_
+at chest; _disengagement_ at chest; at stomach, _lunge_; 2. _Number
+two, parry right, parry left_, and _low parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+88. An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the
+_press_ or _beat_.
+
+89. In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried. When
+the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the attack the
+feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a counter
+feint.
+
+90. A _counter feint_ is a feint following the opponent's feint or
+following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined
+movements.
+
+
+COMBINED MOVEMENTS.
+
+91. When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various foot
+movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor
+combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession,
+increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more
+skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently.
+
+1. Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, by disengagement_
+at chest, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left, right step_ (left foot
+first), and _lunge_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+2. Example: Being at _engage left_, _Number one, press_ and _lunge_;
+2. _Number two, parry right, left step_, and _thrust_; 3. _ASSAULT_.
+
+3. Example: Being at the _engage_, _Number one, by disengagement_ at
+chest, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left, front pass_, and at head
+_butt strike_; 3. _Number one, right step_; 4. _ASSAULT_.
+
+92. Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as _cross
+counters_, and example No. 3 of movements known as _close counters_.
+
+93. A _chancery_ is an attack by means of which the opponent is
+disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which
+disables his weapon.
+
+94. When the different combinations are executed with sufficient skill
+the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized and
+executed at the command _assault_. The accuracy and celerity of the
+movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view to
+the correction of faulty execution.
+
+95. It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to
+leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of
+instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the
+object of the drill.
+
+
+VII. FENCING AT WILL.
+
+96. As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to
+the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men,
+each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself.
+Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random
+attacks and defenses.
+
+97. The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a time.
+Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn different
+methods of attack and defense from each other.
+
+98. The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a
+view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards
+everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the
+movements and quick perception of the adversary's intentions.
+
+99. Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent dodging
+to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be
+continually encouraged.
+
+100. In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents facing
+each other at the position of order arms, salute. They then
+immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles
+engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his
+opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided
+before the salute.
+
+101. The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing salute
+having been rendered, the instructor commands, _At will_, 2.
+_ASSAULT_, after which either party has the right to attack. To
+interrupt the contest the instructor will command _HALT_, at which the
+combatants will immediately come to the order. To terminate the
+contest the instructor will command, 1. _Halt_, 2. _SALUTE_, at which
+the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove
+their masks.
+
+102. When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one
+opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at
+_charge bayonet_, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver
+an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor
+commands, _HALT_, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in
+assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double
+time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a
+distance not exceeding 30 yards.
+
+103. The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide
+doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest
+indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment
+on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies and
+explain how they may be avoided in the future.
+
+[Illustration: Par. 104.]
+
+104. As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield the
+rifle left handed, that is on the left side of the body, left hand at
+the small Of the stock. Many men will be able to use this method to
+advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is wounded.
+
+105. After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in
+fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When
+practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this
+character.
+
+In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of
+umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at
+once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the
+numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required
+in group fencing.
+
+
+RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL.
+
+106. 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit
+counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient
+force to disable.
+
+2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit."
+
+3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. A
+position of engage is taken.
+
+4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only
+when the first hit was not called.
+
+5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because of
+breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take the
+position of the order.
+
+6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will
+not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend
+himself.
+
+7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing.
+
+8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit.
+
+
+SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL.
+
+107. When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's position
+and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to discover, if
+possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the adversary out
+and induce him to expose that part of the body at which the attack is
+to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a feint and then
+make the real attack.
+
+108. Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are
+difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more
+exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there
+is no previous warning of its delivery although it should always be
+expected. Returns are made without lunging if the adversary can be
+reached by thrusts or cuts.
+
+109. Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without
+knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and
+leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual returns with certain
+attacks from certain parries--a fault which the skilled opponent will
+soon discover.
+
+110. Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging.
+
+111. The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many
+forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible.
+Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted.
+
+
+HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS.
+
+112. The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of
+his weapon, not only to show the various movements, but also to lead
+in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and
+arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as
+instructors by fencing with each other.
+
+113. The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and his
+degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the instructor
+is demonstrating the combinations, feints, returns, and parries the
+rapidity of his attack should be regulated by the skill of the pupil
+and no more force than is necessary should be used. If the pupil
+exposes himself too much in the feints and parries the instructor
+will, by an attack, convince him of his error; but if these returns be
+too swiftly or too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious
+and the precision of his attack will be impaired. The object is to
+teach the pupil, not to give exhibitions of superior skill.
+
+114. Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered and
+fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick advantage of
+such opportunities.
+
+
+VIII. COMPETITIONS.
+
+115. In competitions between different organizations none but skillful
+fencers will be allowed to participate.
+
+116. In contests between two men judges may assign values to hits as
+follows:
+
+-------------------------------------------------
+                   | Thrusts |          |  Butt
+                   |   and   |  Cuts.   |   of
+                   | lunges. |          | rifle.
+-------------------------------------------------
+Stomach            |    4    |          |   1
+Chest              |    3    |          |
+Head               |    3    |    2     |   3
+Neck               |    2    |    2     |   2
+Legs               |    1    |    1     |
+Arms and hands     |    1    |    1     |
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+Stepping out of bounds, 4 points.
+
+117. When superiority between two men is decided by bouts, each bout
+will be decided by itself, i.e., points won in one bout can not be
+carried over to another.
+
+118. Details other than those mentioned above will be arranged by the
+officials of the competition.
+
+
+
+
+[C.I.D.R. 20.]
+
+INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
+
+CHANGES }                   WAR DEPARTMENT,
+No. 20  }                   WASHINGTON, _August 18, 1917_.
+
+Paragraph 150 and paragraph 150 of Appendix A, Infantry Drill
+Regulations (corrected to Apr. 15, 1917), are changed as follows, to
+correct error made in printing that edition:
+
+150. (Page 47.) _CEASE FIRING._
+
+Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load; those not loaded are loaded; sights are laid, pieces are locked
+and brought to the order.
+
+_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position, or to steady the men. (_C.I.D.R. No. 20, August 18, 1917._)
+
+[300.73, A.G.O.]
+
+150. (Page 220, Appendix A.) _CEASE FIRING._
+
+Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
+load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge
+is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights
+are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order.
+
+_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
+position or to steady the men. (_C.I.D.R. No. 20, August 18, 1917._)
+
+[300.73, A.G.O.]
+
+BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:
+
+H.L. SCOTT,
+_Major General, Chief of Staff_.
+
+Official:
+H.P. McCAIN,
+_The Adjutant General_.
+
+
+
+
+Books necessary for citizens and for every man interested in home
+defense and the military.
+
+Field Service Regulations                                      .75
+Regulations for the Army of the United States                 1.00
+Manual for Army Bakers                                         .75
+Blue Jackets Manual                                           1.00
+Sanitary Troops                                                .75
+Manual of Physical Training                                    .75
+Rules of Land Warfare                                          .75
+Coast Artillery Drill Regulations                             1.00
+Provisional Drill & Service Reg. For Field Artillery          1.25
+Ship and Gun Drills                                            .60
+Cavalry Drill Regulations                                      .75
+Small Arms Firing Manual                                       .75
+United States Army Transport Service Regulations               .50
+Manual for Army Cooks                                          .75
+Engineer's Field Manual                                       1.25
+The Deck and Boat Book                                         .60
+Infantry Drill Regulations                                     .50
+Drill Regulations for Machine Gun Companies                    .30
+Manual of Interior Guard Duty United States Army               .50
+Signal Book United States Army                                 .35
+Provisional Drill Regulations for 6' Howitzers                1.25
+Drill Regulations for Field Companies of Signal Corps          .75
+Gunnery and Explosive                                          .35
+Manual for Court Martials                                     1.10
+Manual for Medical Department                                 1.10
+Army Horse in Accident & Disease                               .85
+Non-Commissioned Officers and Privates Manual                  .50
+Provisional Drill Reg. for Horse and Light Artillery          1.25
+
+All the above Military and Naval text books have been compiled by U.S.
+Army and Navy officers and contain all changes to date.
+
+MILITARY PUBLISHING CO.
+42 BROADWAY
+NEW YORK
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED
+STATES ARMY, 1911***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 20866.txt or 20866.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/6/20866
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/20866.zip b/20866.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..268c82a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20866.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a06d15f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #20866 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/20866)